SYRIAC    GRAMMAR, 


A  COURSE  OF  EXERCISES,  A  CHRESTOMATHY,  km  A  BRIEF 
LEXICOX, 


UHLEMANN'S 

SYßlAC    GBAMMAU, 

TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  GERMAN 

BY    ENOOKl    HUTCHINSON. 
WITH    A    COURSE    OF 

EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR, 


CHRESTOMATHY    AND    BRIEF    LEXICON 


PREPARED  BY  THE  TRAl^SLATOR. 


NEW  YORK: 

D.  APPLETOX  &  CO.,  346  &  348  BROADWAY. 

EDINBURGH: 
T.  &  J.  CLARK,  38  GEORGE  STREET. 


^^      OP  THE 

ÜKIVERSIT 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1855, 

By  e.  Hutchinson, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District 
of  New  York. 


AM/N 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE. 


The  following  translation  was  undertaken  in  accordance  with 
the  suggestion  of  several  literary  friends,  and  in  view  of  an 
increasing  desire  among  American  students  to  become  acquainted 
with  a  language  in  which  the  earliest  and  best  version  of  the  New 
Testament  is  generally  admitted  to  have  been  made,  and  which 
is  essentially  the  language  spoken  by  our  Saviour. 

Uhlemann's  Grammar  is  acknowledged  by  all  to  be  a  manual 
of  rare  excellence ;  and  it  is  hoped  that,  in  an  English  dress,  it 
will  be  found  to  be  well  adapted  to  promote  the  progress  of  ori- 
ental philology  in  this  country.  Some  of  our  helps  of  this  kind, 
in  the  study  of  the  Syriac,  are  too  brief,  and  others  are  too  volu- 
minous. Uhlemann  has  aimed  lo  present,  within  moderate  lim- 
its, a  work  sufficiently  extensive  for  ordinary  purposes  of  instruc- 
tion. The  translator  has  endeavored  to  give  as  literal  a  transla- 
tion as  is  compatible  with  perspicuity.  He  has  added,  where  it 
seemed  to  be  necessary,  occasional  explanatory  notes.  After 
having  prepared  an  abridgment  of  the  paradigms  of  verbs  and 
nouns,  following  Winer's  arrangement  in  his  Chaldee  Grammar, 
he,  on  the  whole,  concluded  to  insert  the  full  paradigms  as  they 
stand  in  the  original  work,  and  not  to  make  the  attempt  to  im- 
prove a  grammar  so  nearly  faultless. 


yi  TP.ANSLATOR'S  PREFACE. 

The  translation  is  followed  by  a  course  of  Exercises  in  Syriac 
grammar,  which,  if  carefully  studied,  will,  it  is  believed,  mate- 
rially facilitate  the  progress  of  the  learner  in  an  accurate  know- 
ledge of  the  elements  of  the  language.  After  having  read,  with 
care,  the  introduction,  and  cursorily  examined  other  parts  of  the 
grammar,  the  pupil  may,  at  once,  commence  upon  the  Exercises, 
and  merely  consult  the  grammar  (as  directed  in  the  introductory 
remarks  to  the  Exercises)  as  a  book  of  reference,  in  order  to 
enable  him  to  solve  the  difficulties  with  which  he  may  meet  in 
analyzing  the  first  page  of  the  Chrestomathy.  The  translator 
trusts  that  he  shall  not  be  considered  as  obtrusive  in  calling 
special  attention  to  a  method  of  analysis  which  he  has  found  to 
be  of  great  advantage  in  teaching  classes  in  Hebrew.  Some  in- 
structors have  probably  adopted  a  similar  one^  and  others  may 
have  devised  still  better  methods.  This  is  submitted  to  the  con- 
sideration of  those  teachers  who  have  not  already  adopted  a 
satisfactory  one. 

A  brief  Chrestomathy  and  Lexicon,  prepared  by  the  transla- 
tor, follow  the  Exercises.  The  former  is  composed  of  selections 
from  that  beautiful  edition  of  the  Peshito  Bible  published  by  the 
British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society  in  London,  in  1816,  and 
reprinted  in  smaller  type  in  1826.  It  was  executed  for  the  use 
of  the  Syrian  Christians  in  India.  It  was  corrected  for  the  press, 
as  far  as  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  by  Dr.  Buchanan,  and  com- 
pleted by  Rev.  S.  Lee,  Professor  of  Arabic  in  the  University  of 
Cambridge.  Several  manuscripts  were  consulted,  and  the  text 
is  considered  as  very  correct,  though  we  have  discovered  in  it 
some  typographical  errors. 

In  the  Exercises,  an  extended  analysis  will  be  found  of  the  first 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE.  ^ 

page  of  the  Chrestomathy,  and  merely  brief  explanatory  remarks 
on  the  remaining  pages. 

The  basis  of  the  Lexicon  is  that  inserted  by  Uhlemann  in  his 
grammar,  to  which  the  translator  has  made  many  additions,  having 
consulted  the  Syriac  Lexicons  of  M.  Trost,  E.  Castell,  iEgidius 
Gutbier,  and  ^milius  Rödiger.  The  Lexicon  is  intended  merely 
to  include  those  words  which  occur  in  the  Chrestomathy. 

Some  errors,  in  the  author's  numerous  references  to  the  Old 
and  New  Testaments,  have  been  discovered  and  corrected. 
There  are,  probably,  others  which  were  not  observed. 

The  translator  trusts  that  this  efibrt  will  be  received  with 
indulgence  by  the  literary  public.  Errors  will  doubtless  be 
found  by  teachers  who  may  use  the  Manual,  and  he  will  be  very 
thankful  to  receive  suggestions  from  any  quarter,  by  which  a 
future  edition,  should  it  ever  be  called  for,  may  be  improved. 

The  publication  of  the  work  has  been  unexpectedly  delayed, 
most  of  the  stereotype  plates,  when  nearly  completed,  having  been 
destroyed  by  a  disastrous  fire. 

The  translator  avails  himself  of  this  opportunity  to  express  his 
obligations  to  Mr.  W.  W.  Turner,  late  of  the  Union  Thelogical 
Seminary  of  this  city,  T.  J.  Conant,  D.  D.,  of  Rochester  Univer- 
sity, and  J.  G.  Palfrey,  D.  D.,  formerly  of  the  Theological  School 
connected  with  Harvard  University,  for  valuable  suggestions ; 
also  to  Mr.  A.  H.  Guernsey,  of  this  city,  for  important  aid  in 
the  examination  of  the  manuscript  before  going  to  press. 

New  York,  Jan.  1855. 


EXTEACTS  FEOM  THE  AUTllOE'S  PEEFACE. 


The  earlier  sheets  of  this  Text  book,  designed,  principally, 
for  academical  instruction,  had  been  printed,  and  that  part  of 
the  Manuscript  which  contains  the  elementary  principles  and 
paradigms  had  been  for  a  considerable  time  out  of  my  hands, 
when  the  more  comprehensive  work  of  Professor  Hoffmann 
made  its  appearance.  In  the  preparation  of  this  work  my 
plan  had  especially  led  me  to  present,  with  as  much  brevity 
as  was  consistent  with  clearness,  what  is  most  essential  for 
understanding  the  language  in  its  grammatical  forms.  1 
was  of  the  opinion  that  the  more  extended  treatment  of 
separate  phenomena  of  the  language  might  be  dispensed 
with,  since  the  greater  portion  of  the  Syriac  forms  may  be 
explained  from  those  of  the  Hebrew  language  ;  and  in  fact, 
a  knowledge  of  the  Hebrew  implies  an  acquaintance  with 
the  principles  of  the  Syriac.  Upon  a  close  examination  of  the 
above-mentioned  work,  I  was  convinced,  that  I  had  proceeded 
upon  almost  the  same  principles,  had  made  a  similar  use 
of  the  older  grammarians,  such  as  Amira,  Ludov.  de  Dieu, 
Buxtorf,  Michaelis,  and  others,  and  had  deviated  only  in  the 
collocation  of  separate  rules.  Although  I  might  have  approxi- 
mated more  nearly  to  the  work  of  "Hoffmann,  by  isolated 
alterations,  yet  I  deemed  it  advisable,  where  deviations 
existed,  to  follow  my  own  views  ;  as  for  example,  in  the  ta- 
bular arrangement  of  derivative  nouns.  Following  the  older 
grammarians,  I  have  introduced  a  separate  paradigm  of  the 
nouns  placed  under  Declension  HI.,*  instead  of  classing  them 
with  the  Segholate  forms  ;  this  was  done  because  the  vowel 
entering  into  the  inflection  of  these  nouns  is  not  an  original 
one,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Segholate  forms,  but  is  introduced 
on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  pronunciation.     Eeal  Segholate 


»  §  48,  DecL  IIL 


forms,  monosyllabic  nouns,  namely,  those  derived  from  verbs 
3  rad.  Olaph  quiescent,  belong  rather,  according  to  their 
principal  inflection,  to  the  substantive-stems  of  Declension  Y., 
and,  in  only  a  few  instances,  coincide  with  the  Segholate 
forms.  In  preparing  the  Syntax,  I  have,  like  Professor  Hoff- 
mann, followed  the  Lehrgebäude  of  Gesenius  ;  and  like  him, 
also,  I  have  made  use  only  of  those  passages  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament collected  by  Gesenius,  in  which  the  translator,  unfet- 
tered by  the  Hebrew  text,  seems  to  have  wrought  more  in 
accordance  with  the  genius  of  his  own  language.  In  addition 
to  this,  I  have  frequently  consulted  the  translation  of  the 
New  Testament,  as  the  oldest  Syriac  writing  known  to  us  ;* 
Ephraemi  Opera  Syr.,  Romse,  1743,  tom.  HI.,  fob;  Barhebrsei 
Chronicon  Syr.,  ed.  Kirsch.  Lips.  1789;  and  Assemani  Bib- 
liotheca  Orient.  Clementino-Yaticana,  Eomse,  1719,  tom.  HI., 
fob;  so  that  a  close  and  impartial  examination  will  easily 
determine  what  has  been  added  from  my  own  not  inconsider- 
able collections. f     -^^     *     *     *     *     * 

Berlin,  March,  1829. 


*  In  point  of  time  the  Fesbito  version  of  the  Old  Testament  is  the  most  ancient 
document  extant  in  the  Syriac  language,  though  the  New  Testament  was  trans- 
lated into  Syriac  from  the  original  Greek  about  the  same  time.  Michaelis  sup- 
poses, that  the  Syriac  vei'sion  of  both  Testaments  was  made  near  the  close  of  tho 
first,  or  in  the  early  part  of  the  second  century. — Tr. 

t  The  remainder  of  the  Author's  Preface  relates  mainly  to  his  Reading  Lessons, 
which  we  have  not  inserted,  they  being,  in  our  opinion,  too  difficult  for  beg'nners 
— Ta. 


11 


CONTENTS 


PAGB 

Introduction. — ^Brief  Historical  Yiew  of  the  Syriac  Language 

and  Literature             17 

PART    FIRST. 

EIiE]»IE]VTS    OF   THE    liANGUAGE. 

CHAPTER    L 

WRITTEN     CHARACTERS    AND     THEIR    USE. 

§    1.  Consonants 28 

§    2.  Yowels  in  general  (Vowel  Letters  and  Yowel  Signs)    .        .  30 

§    3.  Yowel  Signs ,  30 

§    4.  Diacritical  Points  which  supply  the  place  of  Yowels    .        ,  31 

I    5.  Kushoi  and  Rukok 32 

§    6.  Ribui 33 

§    7.  Mehagyono  and  Marhetono 34 

^    8.  Linea  Occultans .  35 

I    9.  Tone 35 

1 10.  Marks  of  Punctuation 35 

CHAPTER  n. 

PECULIARITIES   AND    CHANGES    OF   LETTERS. 

1 11.  General  Yiew 36 

§  12.  Changes  of  the  Consonants 36 


XII  CONTENTS. 

PAGB 

1 13.  Quiescent  Letters 39 

^  14.  Yowel  Letters  which  are  not  sounded  (Otiant)      ...      40 
§  15.  Changes  in  the  Yowels 41 


PAKT    SECOND. 

ETYMOIiOGY,  OR  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

CHAPTER  L 

PRONOUNS. 

1 16.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns 44 

Table  of  Pronouns  and  Suffixes 45 

g  17.  Other  Pronouns  .........  48 

CHAPTER  XL 

THE    VERB. 

§18.  General  Yiew     . 49 

I.  Regular  Verbs. 

§  19.  The  Inflection  of  Regular  Yerbs  in  General         ...  50 

I.  Table  of  Personal  Inflection 52 

II.  Table  of  the  Temporal  Inflection  of  Regular  Yerbs      .        .  53 

A.  Personal  Inflections 54 

B.  Inflection  of  the  Tenses  and  Moods 55 

§  20.  A.  The  Ground-form  Peal — its  formation  and  signification   .  56 

B.  Derivative  Conjugations. 

1 21.  Ethpeel 58 

I  22.  Pael  and  Ethpaal 59 

§  23.  Aphel  and  Ethtaphal 60 

I  24.  Shaphel  and  Eshtaphal 61 

I  25.  Conjugations  occasionally  used  and  Quadriliteral  Yerbs        ~  62 

§  26.  Yerbs  with  Gutturals 63 

II.  Irregular  Verbs. 

I  27.  General  Yiew 63 

Table  of  Irregular  Yerbs    ...                ...  65 


CONTENTS.  XIII 

PAQB 

A.  Quiescent  Verbs. 

I  28.  Yerbs  1  Rad.  Olaph  Quiescent 67 

I  29.  Yerbs  1  Rad.  Yud  Quiescent 68 

^  30.  Yerbs  Med.  Olaph  Quiescent        .               ....  70 

§  31.  Yerbs  Med.  Rad.  Yau  and  Yud  Quiescent  ....  70 

5  32.  Yerbs  3  Rad.  Olaph  Quiescent 72 

B.  Defective  Verbs. 

I  33.  Yerbs  1  Rad.  Nun 75 

I  34  Yerbs  Med.  Rad.  doubled 75 

§  35.  Doubly  Irregular  and  Defective  Yerbs         ....  76 

Paradigms  of  the  Regular  and  Irregular  Yerbs   ...  80 

I  36.  Regular  Yerb  with  Suffixes 97 

Table  of  the  Same 102 

I  37.  Suffixes  to  Yerbs  3  Rad.  Olaph  Quiescent    .        .        .        .103 

Table  of  the  Same      .        ; 108 

I  38.  Auxiliary  or  Substantive  Yerbs 110 

CHAPTER  in. 

THE    NOUN. 

I  39.  Derivation  of  Nouns .        .  Ill 

§  40.  Nouns  derived  from  Yerbs 112 

Tabular  Yiew  of  Nouns  derived  from  Regular  and  Irregular 

Yerbs 113 

I  41.  Denominative  Nouns 122 

I  42.  Composite  and  Exotic  Nouns 123 

§  43.  Gender  of  Nouns 124 

I  44.  Number  of  Nouns 126 

I  45.  Diflferent  Relations  (states)  of  the  Noun       ....  129 

Table  of  the  Same 132 

I  46.  Nouns  with  Suffixes 136 

1 47.  Declension  of  Nouns  in  general   ....                .  139 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

TäOB 

l  48.  Exhibition  of  Nouns  according  to  Declension       .        .        .  139 

I  49.  Anomalous  Nouns 145 

Paradigms  of  Nouns  with  Suffixes 148 

I  50.  Adjectives  and  Numerals 150 

CHAPTER  IV. 

PAKTICLES. 

§  51.  Adverbs 152 

I  52.  Prepositions 153 

Table  of  Prepositions  with  Suffixes 155 

I  53.  Conjunctions  and  Interjections 156 


PART    THIRD, 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER    I. 


THE      PHONOUN. 

54.  Use  of  Separable  Personal  Pronouns  and  Suffixes 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns 

B.  Suffixes  .... 

55.  Pleonastic  use  of  Pronouns 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns 

B.  Suffixes         .... 
General  Remarks  on  Personal  Pronouns 

56.  Use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun 

57.  Use  of  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 

58.  Pronouns  for  which  the  Syrians  have  no  special  forms 

A.  Reflexive  Pronouns 

B.  Other  Pronouns    . 


157 
157 
159 
160 
ICO 
161 
163 
164 
166 
166 
166 
167 


CONTENTS.  XV 

FAGS 

CHAPTER   IL 

THE   VEEB. 

§  59.  General  View 172 

g  60.  Use  of  the  Preterit 172 

g  61.  Use  of  the  Future 175 

^  62.  Use  of  the  Imperative.        . 178 

§  63.  Use  of  the  Infinitive 179 

A.  Infinitive  Absolute 179 

B.  Infinitive  with  ^  or  the  Construct  form         .        .        .180 

§  64.  Use  of  the  Participle 182 

I  65.  General  Yiew  of  the  Manner  of  Designating  all  the  difierent 

Moods  and  Tenses,  and  particularly  the  Imperfect,  Pluper- 
fect, and  Optative 188- 

§  66.  The  Persons  of  the  Verb 190 

g  67.  Construction  of  Verbs  with  the  different  Cases  and  with 

Prepositions 193 

I.  Verbs  with  the  Accusative 193 

II.  Verbs  with  Prepositions 196 

III.  Passive  Verbs  and  their  Construction      ....  201 
Mode  6f  expressing  Greek  Composites         .        .        .        .203 
§  68.  The  Substantive  Verb  and  some  other  peculiarities  chiefly 

relating  to  the  Construction  of  Verbs  in  General      .  204 

f  I  7 

A.  Useof]oai    A^landA^lk 204 

B.  Indirect  Discourse 205 

C  Ellipsis — Zeugma — Paronomasia  and  Puns     ,        .        .  206 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE    NOUN. 

§  69.  Use  of  the  Noun  in  General 207 

§  70.  Gender  of  Nouns 210? 

§  71.  Number  of  the  Noun 212: 


:vi  CONTENTS, 

72.  Apposition  and  Duplication  of  Nouns 

73.  The  Empliatic  State 

74.  The  Construct  State  and  the  Genitive 

75.  Designation  and  Use  of  the  other  Cases 

76.  The  Case  Absolute     . 

77.  Comparison  of  Adjectives 

A.  The  Comparative  . 

B.  The  Superlative     . 

78.  Construction  of  Numerals 

A.  Cardinal  Numbers 

B.  Ordinal  Numbers  . 

C.  Other  Eelations  of  Numbers 

79.  Union  of  the  Noun  with  Adjectives 

80.  Union  of  the  Noun  with  the  Yerb 

A.  In  Respect  to  Number  . 

B.  In  respect  to  Gender 

C.  In  respect  to  both  Gender  and  Number 

D.  Construction  of  Sentences  in  which  there 

or  more  than  one  Subject  . 

81.  Peculiarities  relating  to  Nouns    . 

A.  Ellipsis  of  the  Noun 

B.  Zeugma  and  Hendiadys 
The  rendering  of  Composite  Greek  Nouns 


Compound 


PAGB 

212 
214 
215 
218 
220 
222 
222 
223 

221 
224 
224 
226 
227 
229 
229 
232 
234 

234 
237 
237 
238 
238 


CHAPTER  lY. 


PARTICLES. 

I  82.  Construction  and  Union  of  Adverbs 240 

^  83.  Use  of  the  Particles  of  interrogation,  affirmation  and  negation  242 

§  84.  Prepositions 244 

I  85.  Conjunctions 246 

I  86.  Interjections 249 

Peculiarities  in  respect  to  the  Position  of  Words  .        .        .  250 


y'   OF  TEE        N^ 

i]SlTßODUCTION, 


BRIEF  HISTORICAL  VIEW 


SYlilAC  LA]S"GUAGE  A^D  LITERATÜEE. 


1.  The  Sjriac  language  (sometimes  called  the  Western 
Aramaean,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  Chaldsean  or  Eastern 
Aramaean,  with  which  it  constitutes  the  Aramaean  dialect  of 
the  Semitic  family  of  languages),  formerly  extended  over  the 
whole 'nortliern  part  of  Aram,  from  the  borders  of  Palestine 
to  I^atolia,  and  from  the  Mediterranean  to  and  beyond  the 
Euphrates.*  It  degenerated  at  an  early  period,  and,  during 
the  continual  changes  of  government,  particularly  by  the  re- 
ception of  Persian  and  Greek  words,  lost  much  of  its  original 
purity.  Of  its  pure  state,  no  written  monuments  have  come 
down  to  our  times.  But  at  the  beginning  of  the  fourth  cen- 
tury after  Christ,  the  language  enjoyed  a  flourishing  period, 
and  kept  its  place  for  a  long  time  at  Edessa  as  a  written  lan- 
guage. As  from  the  earliest  period  the  Palmyrene  dialect 
was  recognized  as  the  principal  one,  so  this  period  has  been 
designated  by  the  name  of  the  Edessene  Period.  Moreover, 
at  various  times,  mention  is  made  of  the  Damascene,  the 
Chalnic  or  Ctesiphontic,  the  Acharic  or  IS'esibene,  and  the 
Maronite  dialects.  The  essential  difference  between  thes^con- 
sisted  very  likely  in  the  pronunciation  ;  this  may  be  asserted 
with  still  more  confidence  in  respect  to  the  Nabataean 
dialect.  The  ancient  written  language  of  Antioch  or  Com- 
magene  is  still  used  by  various  Christian  sects,  in  particular 

*  E.  Rödiger  says  of  the  Ararnjean  language:  "It  was  called  Syriac  in  the 
form  in  which  it  appeared  in  the  Christian  Aramaean  literature,  and  Chaldee 
when  it  appeared  in  the  Jewish  Aramaean  writings."  See  Gesenius'  Heb. 
Gramm.,  15th  edit,  by  Rödiger,  Leipz.  1848  ;  Einleitung,  §1.2.  b.— Tr. 


18  INTRODUCTION. 

by  the  Maronites,  IN'estorians,  and  Thomas-Christians  of  India, 
as  their  ecclesiastical  language.  So  also  the  Zabians,  or  so- 
called  St.  John's  Disciples,  are  said  to  make  use  of  it,  in 
their  religious  ceremonies.  But  as  the  language,  as  early  as 
the  eighth  and  ninth  centuries,  was  greatly  corrupted  by  the 
frequent  use  of  the  Arabic,  and  was  driven  by  the  Arabs 
from  the  cities  in  the  tenth  and  eleventh,  and  from  the 
villages  in  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries,  it  may  be 
safely  assumed  that  it  is  no  longer  in  use  as  a  vernacular  Ian 
guage.  Although  several  modern  travelers  of  note,  as 
Niebuhr  and  Brown,  maintain  that  it  is  still  spoken  in  some 
parts  of  Mesopotamia,  about  Raka,  Edessa,  and  Damascus,  as 
well  as  upon  Lebanon,  they  are  opposed  by  Ferrieres 
Sauvebo&uf  and  Yolney,  while  Chateaubriand,  Seetzen, 
Clarke,  Joliffe,  and  Buckingham  pass  the  matter  over  in 
silence;  and  Burckhardt  only  remarks,  that  the  Maronites 
in  the  convent  of  Kashia  use  the  Syriac,  at  the  present  day, 
as  we  do  the  Latin.*-* 

Rem. — The  LXX,  even,  use  Syria,  (2u^ta,  2v^oi,  2uPio'Ti)  in  Uie 

wider  sense,  for  the  Old  Testament  0^5*  (^'1  comp,  the  "Api/xoi 
in  Horn.  II.  ii.  783  ;  Hesiod  Theog.  304  ;  Strabo  Geog.  i.  2.  xi.  14  ; 
Stephanus  Byzant.  under  "Apjfxa,  and  Bochart  Geogr.  S.  ii.  5,  6  );  and 
the  Greek  and  Roman  Authors  often  confound  Syria  with  Assyria  (comp. 
Diod.  Sic.  ii.  13;  Herodot.  vii.  63;  Strabo  xvi.  2  ;  Xenoph.  Cyrop. 
vii.  5,  31 ;  Lucian  de  Dea  Syr.  §  1 ;  Oppian,  KvMriy  III.  402 ;  Horat. 
Od.  II.  11,  16;  III.  4,  32.  Justin,  i.  2;    Ammian    Marcell.   xxiii.  6. 

The  Arabs  call  it  ^Uislt,  as  it  lay  at  the  left,  when  their  faces  were 
turned  towards  the  east  (comp.  Abulfeda  Tab.  Syr.  p.  5;  Assemani 
Bibl.  Orient.  T.  III.  P.  ii.  p.  782.)  In  the  earliest  times  this  country 
was  divided  into  several  small  nations,  ruled  by  kings  (comp.  Jahn  Bibl. 
Archäol.  Thl.  i.  Bd.  i.  p.  51  seq.;  Mannert  Geogr.  Bd.  vi.  p.  1  seq.; 
Vater  Commentar  über  den  Pentat.  Bd.  I.  p.  152  ;  Winer  Bibl.  Real- 
wörterbuch, Bd.  i.  p.  51  seq.) ;  of  these,  subsequently  to  the  time  of 
David,  Zobah  and  Damascus  are  mentioned  in  the  Scriptures,  as  the 
most  powerful ;  David  conquered  them  both  (2  Sam.  viii.  3  sq.;  x.  6 ; 
1  Chron.  xix   [xviii  ]  3,  4.  sq  ),  and  Solomon  kept  possession  of  them 


*  Since  Uhlemann  prepared  his  grammar,  it  has  been  ascertained  that  the  Nes- 
torians  use  the  Syriac  language  at  the  present  day.  Mr.  Layard,  in  liis  admirable 
work  on  the  ruins  of  Nineveh,  says  of  the  Nestorians  (or  Chaldteans  as  he  incor- 
rectly denominates  them) :  "  Most  of  their  church  books  are  written  in  Syriac, 
which,  like  the  Latin  in  tlie  West,  became  the  sacred  language  in  the  greater  part 
of  the  East."  See  Layard's  Nineveh,  chap,  viii.  Missionaries  who  are  laboring 
among  the  Nestorians,  bear  testimony  to  the  same  fact. — Tr. 


INTRODUCTION.  jg 

until  Reson  Ben-Eliada,  who  had  been  general  of  the  king  of  Zoba 
(1  Kings  xi.  23  sq.),  re-established  at  Damascus  a  government  inde- 
pendent of  that  of  the  Hebrews.  Subsequently  the  Syrians  were  incor- 
porated with  the  monarchies  of  tlie  Assyrians  (738  b.  c),  the  Persians 
(539  B.  c),  and  the  Macedonians  (331  b.  c).  Though  after  the  death 
of  Alexander  the  Great,  they  arose  again  for  a  time  under  the  Seleucidae 
(301  B.  c),  yet  they  again  lost  their  independence  by  means  of  Pom- 
pey  (64  b.c.),  and  their  kings  reigned  only  at  Edessa,  till  the  third 
century  after  Christ,  when  this  kingdom  came  also  under  the  Roman 
sway.  At  th«  division  of  the  Empire,  under  Theodosius  (395 ),  Syria  fell 
to  the  Byzantine  Empire,  after  Jo vianiis  had  (a.  d.  363)  already  surren- 
dered Nesi])is*  to  Sapores  II,  king  of  Persia.  Afterwards  it  was  taken 
possession  of  by  the  Arabs  (636),  and  was  subjected  (660)  to  the 
Ommiades  and  several  other  Arabic  royal  families,  whose  dynasties 
were,  in  1086,  brought  to  a  close  by  the  Seljooks.f  At  the  time  of  the 
Crusades,  the  Christians  could  maintain  themselves  there  against  the 
Seljooks  but  a  short  time  (1097  and  subsequently)  ;  and  in  1171,  Sala- 
din  wrested  the  country  from  them.  In  1369,  Syria  became  a  prey  to 
the  marauding  inroads  of  the  Mongols  under  Timur  ;  and  it  has  now, 
for  three  centuries,  sighed  under  the  Turkish  yoke(cf.  Gatterer,  Hand- 
buch der  Universalhist,  Bd.  I.  p.  248  sq. ;  Beck,  Weltgeschichte,  Bd. 
I.  p.  213  sq. ;  Heeren,  Ideen  über  die  Politik,  u.  s.  w.  Thl.  I.  p. 
213  sq.  ;  Rühs,  Handbuch  der  Geschichte  des  Mittelalters,  p,  152, 
sq.).  The  transition  into  broadness  of  pronunciation  ("TrXaTutfTo/xov) 
seems  not  to  have  extended  much  beyond  the  time  of  the  Babylonish 
captivity  ;  and  the  Palmyrene  Dialect,  which  is  known  to  us  by  some 
inscriptions  found  among  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor,  and  decipher- 
ed by  Barthelcmy  and  Swinton,  may  have  grown  up  soon  after  Solo- 
mon, the  founder  of  that  city.  In  the  Edessene  Period,  during  which 
flourished  Ephraem  (died  378),  Jacob  Yon  Sarug,  Isaac  the  Syrian, 
and  Xenaias  of  Mabug,  all  of  whom  Jacob  of  Edessa,  at  the  middle  of 
the  seventli  century,  recognizes  as  classical  writers,  theological  learning 
was  zealously  cultivated  (cf.  Assem.  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  994).  The  Maronites 
on  the  Orontes  and  upon  Lebanon,  originally  disciples  and  followerp 
of  St.  Maro  (cf.  Assem.  I.  496  sq.  ;  Pfeiffer,  in  his  Auszuge,  p.  166  sq. ; 
Gieseler,  Lehrbuch  der  Kirchengeschichte,  Bd.  I.  p.  675  ;  Rühs,  Hand- 
buch der  Geschichte  des  Mittelalters,  p.  37)  approximate  to  the  an- 
cient Syriac  dialect ;  still  more  closely  do  the  Nestorians  (cf.  Assem.  T. 
III.  P.  II.  p.  379),  and  the  Thomas-Christians  of  India,  who  differ  from 
the  Nestorians  only  in  name  and  place  of  residence  (cf.  Assem,  a.  a.  0.  pp. 
413,  435.  sq.  ;  Pfeiffer,  pp.  285,  484  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  pp.  417,  638), 
all  of  whom  make  use  of  it  only  as  an  ecclesiastical  language  ;  the  two 
former  speaking  Arabic  in  common  life,  and  the  latter,  the  language 

*  A. celebrated  city  and  military  post  in  Mesopotamia,  generallj  written  Nisibis.—TR. 
t  Called,  also,  Seljuks,  Seljouks,  or  Seljoukian  Turks.— Tk. 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

of  Malabar.  Different  from  this  is  the  dialect  of  the  so-called  Johannes- 
Christians,  Mandasans,  or  Zabians  (who  are  not  to  be  confounded  with 
a  Mohammedan  sect  of  the  same  name,  in  Maraccii  Goran.  Sur.  II.  p.  33 
sq. ;  Assem.  T.  III.  P.  II.  pp.  509-515 ;  Pfeiffer,  p.510 sq.;  cf.  Gieseler,  Bd. 
I.  p.  66  ;  Meander,  Allgemeine  Geschichte  der  christlichen.  Religion  und 
Kirche,  Bd.  I.  Abth.  IL  p.  42t),  whose  religious  books  are  written  in 
a  corrupted  Syriac,  and  which  appears,  from  the  numerous  Ghebric 
expressions  which  occur  in  them,  to  have  been  drawn  up  in  the  Persian 
Irak.  By  the  Nabataean,  according  to  Barhebrseus  (in  Assem.  T.  I.  p. 
416)  is  to  be  understood  the  former  language  of  the  Syrian  country- 
people.  On  the  question,  whether  the  Syrian  is  still  a  vernacular 
language,  compare  Niebuhr,  Reisebeschr  von  Arabien,  Bd.  II.  p.  352  ; 
Brown,  Biblioth.  der  neuesten  Reisebeschr.  Thl.  I.  p.  489  ;  Ferneres 
Sauveboeuf,  Memoires  historiques,  etc.,  T.  II.  p.  169  ;  Volney,  Voyage 
en  Syrie,  etc.,  T.  I.  p.  331 ;  and  Burckhardt,  Travels  in  Syria,  etc.,  pp. 
22,  186. 

2.  Syriac  literature,  which  extends  over  almost  all  branches 
of  knowledge,  and  in  a  special  manner  over  the  department  of 
Theology,  and  possesses  valuable  works  upon  Oriental  and  Eccle- 
siastical History,  flourished  principally  in  the  period  between  the 
fourth  and  tenth  centuries  of  the  Christian  era.  The  language 
itself,  which  gave  proof  of  its  versatility  of  expression  by  the 
translations  of  Aristotle  and  other  Greek  authors,  and  by  its 
accurate  representation  of  mathematical  subjects,  had  found,  at 
an  earlier  period,  in  its  own  country,  zealous  cultivators  in  the 
departments  of  Grammar  and  Lexicography. 

As  the  most  ancient  grammarians,  whose  works  have  been  lost, 
history  records  the  names  of  Achudemen  (died  575),  Joseph  Hu- 
zita(died  580),  Jacob  of  Edessa  (died  698),  who  labored  to  restore 
the  purity  of  the  ancient  language,  Jesudenah  (at  the  beginning 
of  the  eighth  century),  John  Stylita  (about  830),  John,  son  of  Cha- 
mis.  Bishop  of  Themanum  (850),  and  Honain,  the  physician  (died 
876).  The  first  accurate  grammar,  however,  was  written  by  John 
Bar  Zugbi,  a  Nestorian  monk,  at  the  beginning  of  the  thirteenth 
century ;  about  which  time,  also,  Joseph  Bar  Malcon  seems  to 
have  composed  his  Refe  Pundorum^  and  Barhebrseus  (died  1286) 
to  have  made  known  his  grammatical  works.  At  the  beginning 
of  the  sixteenth  century,  the  study  of  the  Syriac  language  was 
transplanted  to  Europe.  Theseus  Ambrosius  learned  the  Syriac 
language  from  Syrians  at  Rome,  in  1514,  and  became,  in  1529, 
teacher  to  Albert  Widmanstadt,  who  subsequently  pursued' 
the  study  under  Simeon,  Bishop  of  the  Syrians  upon  Lebanon. 
Through  the  labors  of  these  men,  and  of  Moses  vonMerdin,  whom 


INTRODUCTION.  21 

Ignatius,  Patriarch  of  Antioch,  had  sent,  in  1552,  to  JuUus  III. 
at  Rome,  and  whose  instructions  were  enjoyed  by  Andreas  Dumas 
(Masius),  the  publication  of  the  New  Testament  was  effected  in 
1555.  At  the  close  of  the  sixteenth  century,  the  grammatical 
study  of  the  Syriac  language  was  much  promoted  at  Rome  itself, 
by  the  Maronites  Amira  and  Abraham  Ecchellensis,  whose 
copious  grammatical  works  had  already  been  preceded  by  the 
attempts  of  Theseus  Ambrosius,Widmanstadt,  Tremellius,  Dumas, 
and  Waser.  They  were  followed,  about  the  middle  of  the  seven- 
teenth century,  by  Isaac  Sciadrensis  and  Joshua  Accurensis. 
From  this  period  onwards,  the  Syriac  language  has  been  gram- 
matically pursued  in  Germany;  partly  independently  o-f  other 
languages,  most  copiously  by  the  two  Michaelises  and  Hoffmann ; 
partly  in  connection  with  the  Chaldee,  as  by  Ludov.  de  Dieu  and 
Jahn ;  or  with  the  other  Semitic  languages,  as  by  Buxtorf,  Het- 
tinger, Schaaf,- Vater,  and  others. 

The  earliest  attempts  at  Syriac  lexicography  were  also  made 
in  the  ninth  and  tenth  centuries,  in  Syria,  by  Honain  Isa  or 
Joshua  of  Maruz,  and  Gabriel,  the  son  of  Bochtiesu.  More  im- 
portant, however,  are  the  contemporary  works  of  Isa  Bar- Ali 
(about  885),  of  Ananiesu  Bar-Saru  (about  900),  and  the  most 
serviceable  work  of  this  kind  by  Abulhasan,  Isa  Bar-Bahlul  (about 
963,)  which  is  still  extant.  The  lexicons  of  Dumas,  de  la  Boderie, 
Schindler,  Crines,  Buxtorf,  Trost,  Hettinger,  Gutbier,  Nicolai, 
Schaaf,  and  Zanolini,  which  have  appeared  since  the  sixteenth 
century,  are  confined  to  the  New  Testament,  with  which  the 
Syriac  literature  in  1555  made  its  appearance  in  Europe.  Fer- 
rarius,  and  Edm.  Castell,  on  the  other  hand,  availed  themselves 
of  the  above-mentioned  Syriac  works  relating  to  the  same  subject, 
and  John  David  Michaelis  enriched  the  labors  of  the  latter  by 
valuable  remarks  and  additions.  The  valuable  work  of  Lorsbach, 
who  compared  all  the  Syriac  works  which  had  then  been  printed, 
besides  a  number  of  manuscripts,  and  collected  the  words  and 
significations  wanting  in  Syriac  lexicons,  still  remains  uncom- 
pleted. More  recently,  copious  works  have  been  promised  by 
Bernstein  and  Quatremere,  philologists  of  great  merit  in  the 
department  of  Oriental  literature.  Glossaries  are  contained  in 
the  Chrestomathies  of  Michaelis,  Kirsch,  Tychsen,  Grimm,  Hahn, 
and  Sieffert. 

Rem. — Eusebius  (Hist.  Eccl.  I.  13)  cites  the  letter  of  Abgarus  to 
Jesus,  and  the  answer  to  it,  as  among  the  most  ancient  Syriac  writings 
(cf.  Assem.  I.  554  ;  III.  P.  II.  p.  8  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  p.  U)  ;  and. 


22  INTRODUCTION. 

in  like  manner,  John  is  said  to  have  written  his  Gospel  in  the  Syriac 
language.  But  the  most  ancient  Syriac  work  of  undoubted  authenti- 
city, is  perhaps  the  translation  of  the  'New  Testament,*  which  must 
have  existed  as  early  as  the  second  century  (cf.  Hug,  Einleitung 
in  die  Schriften  des  N.  T.,  Thl.  I.  p.  348  ;  Gieseler,  Bd.  I.  p.  123). 
That  the  Syrians  considered  their  language  to  be  richer  than  the  Ara- 
bic is  attested  by  Asseman  (III.  P.  I.  p.  326  sq.)  ;  and  its  capacity  for 
rendering  Greek  authors  may  be  judged  from  Barhebr^us  (Chron.  p. 
231.  ed.  Bruns),  compared  with  Aristotle  (Top.  I.  cap.  4).  Abulphara- 
gius,  in  his  Historia  Dynast.,  ed.  Pocock,  p.  147,  mentions  Theophilua 
of  Edessa  as  the  author  of  a  successful  translation  of  two  books  of  the 
Iliad  (cf.  Assem.  I,  p.  521).  In  addition  to  the  larger  work  of 
Asseman  (Assemani  Bibliotheca  Orientalis  Clementino-A^aticana, 
Romas,  1129,)  3  vols,  fol.,  and  the  abridgment  of  it  by  Pfeiffer,  Erlangen, 
1776,  we  possess  a  brief  history  of  Syriac  literature  by  Hoffmann,  ni 
Bertholdt's  kritischem  Journal  der  neuesten  theologischen  Literatur, 
Thl.  XIV.,  pp.  225-291. 


I.  GRAMMARS. 

Thesei  Ämbrosii,  Introductio  in  Chald.  linguam,  Syriacam,  etc.,  Papiae, 

1539. 
Aug.  Caninii,  Institutiones  linguae  Syriacse,  Parisiis,  1554. 
Wichnanstadii,  Syriacae  linguae  prima  ekmenta,  Yiennae,  1555,  4to.  ed. 

II.  Antwerp,  1572. 
Toh.  Merceri,  Tabula3  in  grammaticen  linguas  Chald.,  quae  et  Syriaca 

dicitur,  Paris,  1560.  4to.     Eiusd.  grammatica  Chald.  et  Syr.  Yite- 

bergae,  1579,  8vo. 
Imman.  Tre?ndlii,  Grammatica  Chald.  et  Syr.  Genevae,  1569,  4to.  Ap- 
pended also  to  his  edition  of  the  New  Testament. 
A7idr.  Masii,  Grammatica  linguae  Syriacae  (im  Tom.  YI.  der  Antwerp, 

Polygl.)  1573,  fol. 
Casp.  Waseri,  Institutio  linguae  Syrae  ex  optimis  quibusque  apud  Syros 

scriptoribus  collecta.  Lugd.  Bat.  1594.  4to.  Ed.  II.  Leidse,  1619, 
4to. 
Georg.  Amirce,  Grammatica  Syr.  sive  Chald.  etc.    Romae,  1596,  4to. 
Christoph.  Criimii,  Gymnasium  Syr.  h.  e,  linguae  lesu  Christo  verna- 

culae  perfecta  institutio,  etc.     Yitebergae,  1611. 
lo.  Buztorßi,  Grammaticae  Chald.  et  Syr.  libri  III.  Basil.  1615.     Ed. 

II.  165Ö,  8vo. 

*  Hug,  in  his  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament,  says  that  the  Translation  of  the 
New  Testament  was  appended  to  that  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  that  both  were 
included  under  the  same  name,  Pcshito. — Tr. 


INTRODUCTION.  23 

To.  Casp.  Myriad,  Grammatica  Syro-Chaldaea.     Genev.  1619,  4to. 
Herrn.  Nicolai,  Idea  linguarr.     Aramaearum  per  comparationem  etc 

Copenh.  162t,  8vo. 
Ahrah.  Ecchellensis,  Linguae  Syr.  s.  Chald.  perbrevis  institutio.    Romse, 

1628,  16mo. 
Ludov.  de  Diew,  Grammatica  linguarr.  orientt.  Hebr^orum,  Chald.  et 

Syr.  inter  se  collaturum  Lugd.  Bat.  1628,  ex  recens.  Clodii.  Francof. 

ad  M.  1683,  4to. 
Isaac  Sciadrensis,  Grammatica  linguae  Syr.  Romse,  1636,  8vo. 
Foh.  Michael,  lydherri,  Rudimenta  grammaticse  Syr.  Halis,  163^.  Ed. 

XL,  1646,  12mo. 
losephi  Acurensis,  Grammatica  linguae  Syr.  Romae,  164t,  8vo. 
lo.  Ernst.  Gerhardi,  ^may^a^ia,  linguae  SyroChald.  Hal.  Sax.  1649. 
Awlr.  Sennerti,  Ebraimus,  Cbaldaismus,  Syriasmus,  Arabismus  nee  non 

Rabbinismus,  etc.  Viteb.  1666,  4to.     Eiusd.  Cbaldaismus  et  Syrias- 
mus, etc.,  1666. 
loh.  Henr.  Hottingeri,  Grammatica  Cliald.  Syr.  et  Rabbinica  Turic. 

1652,  8vo.    P^iusd.  Grammatica  quatuor  linguarr.  Hebr.  Chald.  S}t. 

et  Arab,  harmonica  Turici,  1659,  4to      (the  Syriac  also  printed 

separately). 
Briani   Waltoni,  Introductio   ad   lectionem   linguarr.  orientt.  Hebr. 

Chald.  Samarit.  Syr.  Arab.  Pers.  Armen.  Copt.  Lond.  1653,  12mo, 
lo.  Leiisdeni,  Scholae  Syriacae  lib.  III.  etc.     Ultraiect.  1658,  8vo. 
Giiil.  Bevertdgii,  Grammatica  Syr.  tribus  libris  tradita.  Lond.  1658, 

8vo. 
Ed?n.  Castelli,  Brevis  et  hannonica  quontum  fieri  potuit  grammatica3 

linguarr.     Hebr.  Chald.  Syr.  ^thiop.  Arab,  et  Pers.  delineatio, 

Lond.  1669       (preceding  his  Lex.  Heptagl.) 
Dav.  Grafunderi,  Grammatica  Syriaca  cum  Syntaxi,  etc.    Yiteb.  1665. 
lo.  Nicolai,    Grammatica   linguarr.  Ebr.  Chald.  Syr.  Arab.  J^thiop. 

Pers.orientalium  secundum  prima  praecepta  delineata  harmonica.  lenae, 

16T0.  4to.  Ed.  II.  Critica  Sacra  Francof.  et  Hamb.  1686. 
lo.  Altingi,  Synopsis  institutionum  Chald.  et  Syr.  Francof.  ad  M.  16  "1 6. 

Ed.  VI.  a  Georg.  Othone  adornata,  1701,  8vo. 
Christ.  Cellarii,  Porta  Syriaca.     Cizae,  1677,  8 vo.  Eiusd.  Porta  Syrioe 

patentior,  etc.,  1682. 
Henr.  Opitii,  Syriasmus  facilitati  et  integritati  suae  restitutus,  etc.  Lips. 

et  Francof.  1678.  4to.  in  compendium  redactus  a  Christ.  Ludovici 

Yiteb.  1669,  4to. 
Car.  Schafii,  Opius  Aramaeum  complectens  grammaticam  Chaldaico- 

Syriacam,  Lugd.  Bat.  1686,  8vo. 
Jo.  Aug.  Danzii,  Aditus  Syriae  reclusus,  etc.    lenae,  1689.     Ed,  III. 

1715,  8vo. 
lo.  Em.  Gerhardi,  Harmonia  linguae  Chald.  Syr.  et  iEthiop.  lenae, 

1693,  4to. 


24 


INTEODUCTION. 


Herrn,  von  der  Hardt  Syriacse  linguae  fundamenta.  Heimst.  1694. 
8vo.     (Only  Paradigms.) 

Ge.  Othonis  Palaestra  linguarr.  orientt.  Chald.  Syr.  Arab.  -^th.  Pers. 
etc.  Francof.  1702.  4to. 

lo.  Phil.  Hartmanni  Hebraicse,  Chald.  Syr.  et  Samarit.  linguarmu 
institutio  harmonica.     Francof.  ad  M.  1707.  4to. 

Sam.  Fr  id.  Bucheri  Thesaurus  orientalis  s.  compendiosa  et  facilis 
methodus  Hnguarr.  orientt.  etc.  Francof.  et  Lips.  1725.  4to. 

Christ.  Bened.  Michaelis  Syriasmus  i.  e.  graramatioa  Unguae  Syr. 
Halis,  1741.  4to. 

lo.  David  Michaelis  Grammatica  Syr.     Halis,  1784.  4to. 

/.  G.  Kais  Grammatica  Hebraeo-harmonica  cum  Arab,  et  Aram. 
Amstelod.  1758.  8vo. 

lac.  Ge.  Christ.  Adlerii  Brevis  linguae  Syr.  institutio  etc.  Altonae, 
1784. 

W.  Hezel,  Syrische  Sprachlehre.     Lemgo,  1788.  4to. 

loh.  Gottfr,  Hasse  Practlsches  Handbuch  der  Aramäischen  oder 
Syrisch-Chaldäisch-Samaritanischen  Sprache.     Jena,  1794.  8vo. 

Innoc.  Fessleri  Institutiones  linguarr.  orientt.  Hebr.  Chald.  Syr.  et 
Arab.  Vratisl.  Halis  et  lenae,  1787  et  1789. 

Ol.  Gerh.  Tychseni  Elementale  Syr.  Rostochi,  1793.  8vo,  (Ap- 
pended to  his  Chrestomathy.) 

lo.  Jahn.  Aramäische  oder  Chaldäische  und  Syrische  Sprachlehre 
für  Anfänger.  Wien  1793.  8vo.  neu  herausgegeben  von  Oberleit- 
tier Elementa  Aramaicae  s.  Chaldaeo-Syriacae  hnguae  etc.  Viennae, 
1820.  8vo. 

loh.  Sev.  Vater  Handbuch  der  Hebr.  Syr.  Chald.  und  Arab.  Gram- 
matik.    Leipzig,  1802  u.  1817.  8vo. 

Thomas  Yeates''  Syriac  Grammar,  principally  adapted  to  the  New 
Testament  in  that  Language.     Lond.  1819.  8vo. 

Hampus  Tullberg  Elementale  Syr.  P.  I.  et  IL     Lond.   1824.   8vo. 

Paul  Ewald  Lehrbuch  der  syr.  Sprache.     Erlangen,  1826.  8vo. 

Ändr.  Theoph.  Hoffmanni  Grammaticse  Syriacae  hbri  III.  Halae, 
1827.  4to. 


II.  LEXICO^^S. 

Andr.  Masii  Syrorum  peculium.     Antwerp,  1521.  folio. 

Fahr.  Boderiani  Dictionarium  Syro-Chald.     Antw.   1572.   (Tom.  VI. 

of  the  Antw.  Polygl.) 
Val.    Schindleri   Lexicon   pentagl.   Hanoviae,    1612.    1649.      Lond. 

1635  Francof.  1653.  1695.  fol. 
Christoph.  Crinesii  Lexicon  Syriacum.     Viteb.  1612.  4to. 
loh.  Bapt.  Ferrarii  Nomenciator  Syriacus.     Romae,  1622.  4to. 
loh.  Buxtorßi  mn.  Lexicon  Chald.  et  Syr.     Basil.  1622.  4to. 
Martini  Trostii  Lexicon  Syr.  etc.  Cothenis  Anhalt.  1623.  4to. 


SYEIAC  CHEESTOMATHIES.  gg 

Thomas  a  Novaria  Nomenclator  Syr.  Romse,  1636.  8vo. 

Andr.  Sennerti  Lexici  Cbald.  et  Syr.  compendium.    Viteb.  1666.  4to. 

loh.  Henr.  Hottingeri  Etymologicum  orientt.  s.  Lexicon  harmonicum 
heptagl.  etc.  Francof.  1661.     Turici,  1664.  4to. 

Dav.  Grafunderi  Compendium  Lexici,  Syr.  (Appended  to  his  Syriac 
Grammar.) 

Aegid.  Gutbirii  Lexicon  Syr.  Hamb.  1667.  8vo.  (Appended  to  his 
Kew  Testament.) 

JISd7n.  Castelli  Lexicon  heptagl.  Lond.  1669.  From  this  has  been 
specially  edited  the  Syriac,  by  J.  G.  Michaehs,  under  the  title, 
Edmundi  CasteUi  Lexicon  Syr.     Gotting.  1788.     Tom.  IL  4to. 

lo.  Ft.  Nicolai  Hodogeticum  Orientale  harmonicum  etc.  lense, 
1670.  4to. 

Christoph.  Cellarii  Glossarium  Syro-Latinum.     Ciz^e,  1683.  4to. 

Car.  Schafii  Lexicon  Syr.  concordantiale.  Lugd.  Bat.  1708.  (Ap- 
pended to  the  New  Testament ) 

Ant.  Zanolini  Lexicon  Syriacum.  Patav.  1742.  8vo.  (Appended 
to  the  New  Testament.) 


UI.  CHKESTOMATHIES. 

loh.  Dav.    Michaelis  Syrische   Chrestomathie   Thl.    1.     Göttingen, 

1768.    8vo.      Die   II.  Ausg.    1783.  mit  einem  Glossar,  u.  Anm. 

vervollständigt  unter  dem  Titel :  loh.  Dav.  Michaelis  Chrestoma- 

thia  Syr.  Ed.  III.  glossario  adnotationibusque  instructa  a  /.    Ch. 

Dcepkc.  1829. 
/.  C.  G.  Adleri   Chrestomathia  Syr.     Hafn,  1784. 
loh.    Gott/r.   Hasse   Lectiones  Syro-Arabico-Samaritano-^thiopic9e 

Regiom.  et  Lipsise,  1788.  8vo. 
Georg.  Guil.  Kirschii  Chrestomathia  Syr.     Hofae,  1789.  8vo.  (Newly 

edited  by  Bernstein.) 
Olai   Gerh.  Tychsen  Elementale  Syriacum  etc.     Rostochi,  1793.  8vo. 
Henr. Ad.  Grimm  Neue  Syrische  Chrestomathie  mit  einem  Glossarium 

u.  s.  w.     Lemgo,  1795.  8vo. 
Gust.  Knoes  Chrestomathia  Syr.  maximam  pai'tem  e  Codd.  MSS. 

collecta.     Gotting,  1807.  8vo. 
Aug.  Hahn  et  Sieffert  Chrestomathia  Syr.  s.  S.  Ephraemi  carmina 

selecta.     Lips,  1825.  8 vo.     (With  a  Lex.  Syr.) 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAR. 


PART    FIRST. 

ELEMENTS     OF     THE     LANGUAGE 


TABLE   OF   CONSONANTS. 


"■"■ 

NAME. 

1 

'r 

_— 

SOUND. 

'A 
1 

o 

s. 

1 

5 

1 

1 

Olaph 

.AK 

1 

I 

\ 

1 

S^oiritus    lenis. 

1 

2 

Beth 

Zu^ 

^ 

£i 

»o 

-O 

B,  Bh,  V. 

2 

3 

4 

Gomal 
Dolath 

? 

r 

r 

? 

G. 

D,Dh(iÄmthi.s). 

3 

4 

5 

He 

loj 

01 

cA 

01 

01 

H. 

5 

6 

Vau 

0^0 

0 

a 

Q 

0 

W  or  V. 

6 

1 

Zain 

r 

1 

^ 

\ 

1 

Z,    ?Gr,cFr. 

1 

8 

Cheth 

Lä^ 

J^ 

M^ 

•iM. 

•>« 

Ch,  or  Hh.' 

8 

9 

Teth 

A4 

i 

4 

4 

4 

T. 

9 

10 

Jud 

jqI 

Jk 

^ 

«^ 

%^ 

Y. 

10 

11 
12 

Coph 
Lomad 

0 

1 

n 
1 

>• 

^ 

K,  Ch. 
L. 

20 
30 

13 

Mini 

vi^So 

Sd 

k2 

^ 

;>o 

M. 

40 

14 
15 

Nun 
Seracatli 

AaSocD 

J 

£0 

1 
m 

N. 
S. 

50 
60 

16 

Ee 

K 

1 

1 

\1 

Vi 

3?  Hebrew. 

70 

11 

Phe 

]£ 

£2 

£i 

«£i 

^ 

P,  Ph,  F. 

80 

18 
19 

Tsode 
Koph 

5 

JH 

5 

^ 

Ts. 

K  guttural,Q. 

90 
100 

20 

Risk 

J 

r 

r 

J 

R. 

200 

21 

Shin 

I 

» 

M. 

-ft 

-s 

Sh. 

300 

22 

Thau 

o2 

z 

A 

^A 

2 

Th.  T.  0  Greek. 

400 

2R  CONSONANTS. 


CHAPTEE  I. 


"Written  Characters  and  their  Use. 


§  1.  Consonants. 


The  Syriac,  or  "West  xiramsean  Language,  has  an  alphabet 
consisting,  like  that  of  the  Hebrew  and  Chaldee,  of  twentj- 
two  consonants.  In  common  with  the  Arabic,  it  connects 
together  the  several  letters  of  a  word  by  horizontal  lines 
at  the  bottom ;  from  which  arises  a  fourfold  form,  though 
essentially  the  same,  according  as  a  letter  is  initial,  medial, 
or  final,  or  is  connected  or  unconnected  with  the  preceding 
letter,  as  exhibited  in  the  table  on  the  preceding  page. 

Rem.  1. — The  character  exhibited  in  the  preceding  alphabet,  is 
called  Feshito,  i.  e.  the  simple.  It  is  employed  by  the  Maroni  tes  and 
Jacobites,  and  is  said  to  have  been  invented  by  Jacob  of  Edessa  in 
the  seventh  century.  Besides  this,  Amira  mentions  the  Estrangelo, 
not  from  tfi-poyyuXo?,  round,  (see  Asseman  Biblioth.  Orient.  T.  HI. 
P.  IL  p.  378.)  which,  according  to  Michaelis  Gram.  Syr.,  p.  15, 
means  the  Gospel  character  (scriptura  evangelii).  It  was  the  basis 
of  the  Nestorian  smaller  character,  to  which  the  so-called  double 
alphabet,  used  for  inscriptions  and  titles  of  books,  bears  a  strong 
resemblance.  There  is  also  the  Palmyrene  alphabet,  found  in  inscrip- 
tions on  the  ruins  of  Palmyra  or  Tadmor,  and  the  Mandcean  or 
Nabatoean  alphabet.  The  latter,  in  consequence  of  the  amalgamation 
of  the  gutturals  |  with  1. ,  and  Ol  with  j-*  ,  consists  of  only  twenty  con- 
sonants. It  is  written  in  a  continuous  line,  with  four  different  forms  of 
each  letter,  viz.,  the  simple  consonant,  and  the  consonant  with  the 
vowels  a,  z,  or  u. 

Rem.  2. — The  letters  |,  p  ^i  ^i  \i  t?  r>  ^j  connect  only 
with  the  preceding  letter.  After  one  of  these  letters,  therefore,  >  ,  • , 
> ,  Z ,  stand  unconnected ;  and  also,  with  the  exception  of  # ,  always 
at  the  beginning  of  a  word.    The  final  letters  are  »^ ,  ^  ,  -VO ,    . ,  ^ , 

y  before  Ib^  is  written  -^^ ;  and  after  it  U  or  }^ .  Double  J^ ,  at  the  end 
of  a  word  takes  the  form  of  vi.     The  letter  G,  in  words  adopted  from 


coNsoNAisrTS.  29 

other  languages,  is  written  N^  .  Several  consonants,  where  they  ter- 
minate a  word,  are  slightly  inflected  upward  ;  e.  g.  »O,  »D,  %2i    etc 

Rem.  3. — The  gutturals  express  the  several  gradations  of  guttural 
sounds  from  the  weakest  to  the  strongest,  f  and  Ol  may  be  compared 
with  the  Spiritus  lenis  and  Sinritus  asper  of  the  Greek  languao-e 
(§  12.  5,  b).  Deeper  guttural  sounds  are  oa  (  =  the  German  ch  ) 
and  1  which  the  Greeks  express,  sometimes  by  the  Spiritus  asper, 
and  sometimes  by  7.  The  sound  of  «2  is  formed  in  the  fore-part  of 
the  mouth  ;  that  of  «O  farther  back  towards  the  throat.  %»  =  ^ 
sometimes  stands  for  g  at  the  end  of  Greek  words,  and  is  pronounced, 
according  to  Amira,  p.  9,  sc  before  e  and  i.  The  aspirated  conson- 
ants    Aao,..»jQ   are,  in   some  MSS.,   marked  as  such  with  a  red 

point  placed  over  them  ;  the  removal  of  the  aspiration  is  indicated 
by  the  same  sign  beneath  them  (§5). 

Rem.  4. — The  division  of  consonants,  with  reference  to  the 
organs  of  speech,  is  the  same  as  in  Hebrew.  But  the  gutturals 
^1ajG1(  occasion  less  difficulty  than  in  Hebrew,  as  the  Sheva  and 
Daghesh  forte  are  wanting  in  Syriac.  Of  the  gutturals,  in  connection 
with  a.  and  Q,  it  is  to  be  remarked  ;  a)  that  f  between  two  vowels  has 
the  sound  of  y  ;  e.g.  ^(0  ko-ijem  ;  h)  that  O  quiesces  in  —  and  — 
(=  0  and  u),  and  after  —  and  —  (==  a  and  e),  forms  the  dipthongs 
au  and  eu  ;    c)  that  initial  a  with  —  =  ^,  and  even  when  |  is  pre- 

•iOÖVä.]  Ihudho  ;     cZ)  that  initial  1 
;  e.  g.  J  OH  ehadh. 

Rem.  o. — The  letters  of  the  Alphabet  suffice  for  designating  the 

numerals  as  far  as  400  (Vid.  Table  of  Consonants,  Amira,  p.l2.  sq). 

In  compound  numbers,  the  larger  stand  first ;  e.  g.  (loZ  441.  From 

500 — 900,  the  tens  of  50 — 90  are  denoted  by  a  dot  over  the  letter  ; 

e.g.  «£0  600,  •Si  800.     Thousands  are  designated  by  —  placed  under 

the  units,  ten  thousand  by  "^,  ten  thousand  thousand  by  — .     Tho 

numbers  20  and  50  are  also  expressed  by  doubled  yD  and  ^,  tliu 
final  letters  falling  away  where  units  are  added.  Fractional  numbers 
are  designated  by  a  small  line  drawn  obliquely  dov^nward,  from  left 
to  right,  over  the  letter  which  expresses  the  denominator  of  tho 

fraction  ;  e.g.  *S  =^,  .  •  =  3  &«• 


80  VOWEL  LETTEKS  AND  VOWEL  SIGNS. 

§  2.     Vowels  in  General  ( Vowel  Letters  and  Vowel  /Signs), 

InSyriac,  the  vowel-letters  f,  o,  and  «a  originally  served  to 
designate  the  vowels,  and,  at  the  time  of  Mohammed,  the 
Syrians  were  acquainted  with  only  three  vowel-signs,  which 
sufficed  for  their  language,  and  which  the  Arabs  appear  to 
have  borrowed  from  them.  Afterwards  the  Monophysites 
sought  to  express  the  Greek  vowels,  and  increased  their 
number  to  seven  (v.  Asseman  T.  I.  pp.  477,  478  ;  Gesenius 
Lehrgeb.  p.  84),  and  since  the  time  of  Theophilus  of  Edessa, 
in  the  eighth  century, the  Greek  vowels  appear  to  have  been 
in  common  use.  The  ISTestorians,  on  the  other  hand,  make 
use  of  diacritical  points  (Asseman  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  378). 
The  Monophysites  or  Maronites  commonly  use  them  only  in 
doubtful  cases. 

Rem. — Even  in  the  last  century,  the  Maronite  Gabriel  Heva  em- 
ployed the  vowel-letters  to  designate  the  vowels,  making  "X  =  a, 
1=0,     •  I  =  e,     *.*  =  «,    and    O  =  u    (v.  Michaelis,  p.  29). 


§  3.      Voiuel    Signs. 

The  Syrians  denote  the  vowels  by  diacritical  points,  or  by 
characters  formed  from  and  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  vowels, 
the  latter  mode  being  that  now  generally  used.  In  ancient 
manuscripts  both  modes  occur  together. 


FORM. 

NAME. 

SOUND. 

Syriac. 

Greek. 

-^ 

y 

—     or     — 

7 

Pethocho 

(V-A£))    a. 

—       or      — 

—     or    — 

IS 

Revotzo 

(T^^')    e. 

— 

—    or    — 

Chevotzo 

(T^)    i. 

_L       or      — 

0 

Zekofo 

(Hoi)     0. 

d— ,  Q—  Q— 

Etzotzo 

(U>)     - 

DIACRITICAL  POINTS  WHICH  SUPPLY  THE  PLACE  OF  VOWELS.    31 

Rem.  1. — The  names  are  derived  from  the  form  of  the  organ  used  in 
pronouncing  the  vowel.    The  Greek  forms  from  which  they  are  derived 

are  easily  recognized.     —  also  occui-s  without  Q  =  ■?*  in  ^\o    and 

^^5^4^-  (^or  lAji'r^ID,  Luke  xvii.  29,  stands  more  correctly  lA-»;aD 
Psalm  xi.  6).  The  first  three  vowel-signs  may  also  be  written  beneath 
the  consonants. 

7 

Rem.  2. — As  to  pronunciation,  —  seems  to  have  denoted  a  and  ae, 

though  —  was  sometimes  sounded  by  the  Nestorians  like  a  (Y. 
Asseman  T.  III.  P.  II.  p.  379).      In  foreign  words  it  quiesces  in  Q. 

In  —  are  contained  both  the  German  ö  and  ü. 

Rem.  3. — As  to  quantity  it  may  be  assumed  with  some  certainty 

that  —  is  always  long,  and  —  always  short ;  according  to  others,  — 

f  '   'K  7      _ 

with  «^,  —  and  —  with  Q  are  long ;  —  is  short, except  in  foreign  words. 

7  P 

Amira,  on  the  other  hand,  maintains  that  —  =  a,  —  ==  ö,  and  the 

*^ 
others,  even  —  with  Q,  are  common.     Some  grammarians  also  denote 

the  quantity  of  the  vowels  by  different  signs,  thus  ; — 


—  — ;-  CJievotzo. 

O —      'O O —  Etzotzo. 

Rem.  4. — The  dipthongs  are  formed  with  Q  and  ^.  With  Vau  ;  a) 
with  —  preceding  at  the  beginning  or  middle  of  a  word,  au ;  e.  g. 
(ZoidD ;  b)  with  a  preceding,  oi  nearly  ( the  German  eu)\  e.  g. 
•jiOlCuA»!;    c)    in     the    middle    of  a   word,    after     a,  iu\    e.  g. 

-  X  7  '^ 

^OlCLirQQJ;  c?)  Vau  doubled,  the  first  with  —  ,  ou  (according 
to  Amira  u).  With  Yud  (besides  the  combinations  b  and  c  above); 
a)  with  a  preceding  —  ,  ai ;  e.  g.  ^Ij^I  ;  b)  with  —  m  the 
middle  and  at  the  end  of  a  word,  oi ;  e.  g.  fAxiDpD. 


§  4.  Diacritical  Points  which  siipply  the  place  of  Vowels. 
These  were  employed  earlier  than  were  the  vowels,  and 


32  KUSHOI   AND    RUKOK. 

were  used  even  after  the  invention  of  the  vowels,  by  the 
Nestorians.  The  point  which  designates  the  suffix  3  sing, 
fem.  01  seems  to  have  originated  from  that  system. 

•X  _        •  r 

Rem. — According  to  Amira  p.  51,  001=001 ;  while  001=001; 
«j01=«ji01;  *a01=«-i01  .  Ludov.  de  Dieu  has  treated  this  subject 
more  definitely  in  his  Grammar,  p.  35  seq. ;  according  to  him  the 
point  when  above  the  consonant  denotes  a,  o,  and  u,  under  it  c,  un- 
der «-k  and  I  ^,  and  under  Q  u.  \  The  principal  use  of  this  point  in 
the  verb,  is  to  denote  the  different  persons  and  tenses  (v.  Amira, 
p.  51 ;  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  37).  Throughout  the  preterite,  with  the 
exception  of  the  1  sing.,  it  stands  under  the  radicals.  In  the  parti- 
ciple, it  denotes,  over  the  first  radical,  in  Peal,  JL,  in  Aphel,  _L,  or 
in  Verbs  med.  Vau,  ^.  In  the  imperative  and  infinitive  it  may  be 
omitted  or  written  underneath.  The  future  takes  it  only  under  the 
radicals,  not  under  the  preformatives,  with  the  exception  of  the  1 
sing.,  where  it  stands  above  it  (comp.  Isenbiehl,  Beobachtungen 
von  dem  Gebrauche  des  Syrischen  Puncti  diacritici  bei  den  Verbis, 
Göttingen,  1773). 

§  5.     Kushoi  and  Rulwh  (^jläOD  —  yDo'i)* 
1.  [According  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  and  Norberg,yhe  Syrians 
have  in  fact  the  Sheva,  and  pronounce  a  vowelless  consonant 

with  a  short  half-sound  of  e  ;  e.g.  ^QOJ  pronounced  n^  hum. 
Someterammarians,as  Amira^  P-42,  and  the  Zabians}  use  JL« 


So  too,  'according  to  Asseman^  the  doubling  of  consonants  in 
pronunciation  (Daghesh  forte)  occurs  among  the  Oriental 
Syrians,  and,  according  to  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew,  in  Pael  ^^ 

and  Ethpaal  of  Verbs  ^a  and  Ml»*  But  as  the  doubly  written 
consonant  falls  away  where  analogy  would  require  it  to  be 
retained  (§  8),  this  grammatical  usage  is  still  very  doubtful. 
This  duplication  is  retained  only  in  foreign  words. 

2.  Analogous  withDaghesh  lene  is  Kushoi,{i.e.  hardening),  '; 
a  red  point  inserted  over  the  aspirates,  in  manuscripts,  which 
removes  the  aspiration.     The  retention  of  the  aspiration  is 
indicated  by  a  point  placed  underneath,    called  Rukok  (i.  e. 
.softening:). 
^  *     it  should   be   borne   in   mind  that    Sheya   and  Daghesh   are  not,  in 

I '      Syriac,  denoted  by  any  written  characters,  and  appear   only  in  pronunciation. 
Tr. 


RIBÜI.  33 

Rem. — Some  consider  Kusboi  to  be  Daghesh  forte,  which  is 
denied  (^y  Amira  and  Gabriel  Sionita.  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  25  sq.,  places 
il;  a)  at  the  beginning  of  words,  except  where  ^O,^  precede,  or  where 
the   preceding    word   ends   in    %ji ,  O ,   ( ,  in    wKich  case   Rukok   is 

retained;    e.g.   l,iSn\Z,   l,aV)\AÜ;  b)   in    the    middle,   after   a 

quiescent  letter ;  e.  g.  01^  .NV) ;  c)  after  dipthongs ;  e.  g.  A^ ;  IZqSd, 

with  the  exception  of  y^af  as.  Rukok,  on  the  contrary,  occurs,  besides 
the  cases  noted  under  a  above ;  a)  when  one  of  the  aspirates  ends  a 
syllable,  but  is  in  the  same   case   hardened   by  a  preceding    vacant 

consonant ;  e.  g.  ^J^M  ;  ^)  when,  according  to  Hebrew  analogy,  they 

follow  a  movable  Sheva ;  e.  g.  (A3)Q2  ;  c)  after  an  open  syllable ;  e.  o". 

\rA'     ^0  ^^^  these  consonants  are  not  pronounced  as  aspirates  in  Pa 

and  Ethpa.  of  Verbs  ^,  when  the  J  preceding  them  has  fallen  away ; 

e.  g.  •qXdZ from  ^\fij ;  and  in  verbs  with  the  middle  radical  doubled, 
where,  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  stands.  Furthermore,  here  belong 
the  letters  in  which  one  having  fallen  away  before  them,  is  to  be  com- 
pensated for,  in  the  future  and  infinitive  of  verbs  «.^2),  or  in  general 
where  Daghesh  forte  euphonic  stands  in  Hebrew.  These  points  do 
not  occur  in  printed  works. 


§  6.  Hi^ui  (^ao>).    '^^^"? 

1.  To  distinguish  the  plural  of  nouns  and  verbs  from 
the  singular  written  with  the  same  consonants,  the  Sjriac 
makes  use  of  jRihui,  i.  e.  two  points  placed  horizontally  over 
the   word.      This  sign  is  still  retained,  like  the  vowels,  in 

printed  books.     Thus,  by  means  of  these  points  |nNV)  is  read 

'i'i  \V7  the  Icings^  and  distinguished  from  |n\V),  the  king. 
This  sign  is  also  used  in  the  3  plur.  fem.  pret.  of  Yerbs  ^rad. 
Olaph  in  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal  (§  32),  to  distin- 
guish it  from  3  sing.  masc.  ;  e.  g.  1 1 S  yM  they  have  praised 
themselves  ,from  « i S  ■  >■  Z]  he  has  praised  himself.    In  like 

manner  Kibui  strengthens  the  distinction  between  the  3  plur. 
pret.  masc.  and  fem.,   where  the  formatives  Q  and  %a.  at  the 

end  sometimes  fall  away  from  the  3  sing,  masc;  e.  g.  ^"^^  =■ 
Q^4^,  -'^t^^-     The  plurals,  which  are  easily  recognized,  re- 
3 


34:  MEHAGYONO  AND  MAEHETONO. 

main  without  this  designation,  though  it  is  not  omitted  in 
plural  forms  with  suffixes.  In  numerals  the  usage  is  arbitrary. 
Some  mark  with  this  sign  only  the  feminines,  and  the  forms 

with  suffixes ;  e.  g.  ^ZJlZ,  tOauj-lZ. 

Rem. — Amira,  p.  48,  omits  Ribui,  when  the  plural  form  ^  (§  44) 

has  the  signification  tOJI  or  tOGLtAaf,  i.  e.  they  are^  but  adopts  the 
above-mentioned  use  in  numerals,  and  uses  it  also  with  prepositions 
joined  with  plural  suffixes  (§  16.  c). 

2.  Eibui  also  serves  to  denote  collectives ;  e.  g.  1;02  a  heeve^ 

Vfö^  a  herd  of  heeves. 

RexM. — When  Ribui  stands  over  h  (with  the  exception  of  the  1  sing, 
pret.  and  fut.,  and  the  participles  Act.  Pe.,  according  to  §  4.  Rem.), 

A^f-m  coincides  with  a  diacritical  point  representing  —  ,  one  of  the  points 
is  omitted.  When  three  points  come  together,  one  of  them  represents 
Kushoi. 


§  7.  Mehagyono  and  Marhetono. 

(Ill^OllD  _  Woi-r!^). 

When  an  accumulation  of  consonants  without  vowels, 
occurs,  and  the  Syrians  wish  to  indicate  that  a  monosyllabic 
word  is  to  be  pronounced  as  a  dissyllable,  or  a  dissyllabic 
word  as  a  trisyllable,  and  so  on,  they  place  a  line  under  the 

consonant  to  which  a  vowel  (usually  —  more  rarely  — )  is  to 

be  supplied  ;  e.  g.  *|ALx»j.   This  line  is  called  Mehagyono,  and 

denotes  a  removal  of  this  accumulation  in  utterance 
(Diaeresis).  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  voice  is  to  hurry  over 
these  same  consonants,  a  line  is  drawn  above  them,  which  is 

called  Marhetono ',  e.  g.  IAdjI. 

RexM.  1. — Some     Grammarians     place    Mehagyono     only    before 

;M^r).i  and   before   **.  in  |A**^j.     Amira,  p.  41.  sq.,  compares  the 

two  with  Diceresis  and  Synceresis^  which  may  have  been  transferred 
from  prosody  into  prose.  (Vd.  Chrestom.  Syr.  ed.  Hahn  et  SiefFert, 
Lips.  1825.  p.  11).  ^^ 

Rem.  2. — Sometimes  a  line  is  found  over  consonants ;  a)  in  numei  Jl; 

e.  g.  %i^LJk  12  ;  h)  in  abbreviations ;  e.  g  pO  for  f a^rJO ;  c)  over  the  paMle 

of  exclamation  Of,  to  distinguish  it  from  0|. 


LINEA    OCCULTANS.  35 

§  8.  Linea  Occultans. 

This  line  placed  under  consonants  denotes ;    a)  that  the 

letter   under   which   it  stands  is   not  pronounced;     e.   g. 

Z;Q  (§  12. 1);  h)  that  1  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  followed 

oj  Ol  is  to  be  pronounced  weaker,  and  like  1 ;  e.g,  »Oil  (vid. 

§1.  Kem.4) ;  c)  that  the  letter  quiesces,viz.,  in  the  imper  .  of 

the  pass.  Ethpeel  and  Ethpaal ;    e.  g.  ^^y^^Z),    pronounced 

ethkail^  and  imp.  from  ^01) ;  which  with  the  transposition 

of  the  first  two  j-adicals  is  ^JOl  (comp.  §  12.  1). 

Rem. — Some  have  extended  this  also  to  the  imperatives  Ethtaphal 
and  Eshtaphal ;  but  in  the  latter  especially,  it  appears  to  be  merely 
a  diacritical  designation  of  the  imperat.  As  such  it  may  in  general 
be  regarded  as  coming  under  b  and  c  above. 

§  9.  Tone. 

1.  The  tone  stands  regularly  upon  the  penultimate  sylla- 
ble, when  the  ultimate  does  not  terminate  in   a  üpaovable^ 
consonant  ;  e.  g.  ]t^\v>,  Mdlco.t,^  .^  ■    '■  n   ^ 

Rem. — In  an  accumulation  of  consonants,  where  by  Mehagyono 
(§  1)  the  penultimate  syllable  becomes  the  antepenultimate,  the  tone 
remains  upon  the  stem-syllable. 

It  is  more  difficult  to  determine  whether  words,  which,  according 
to  Amira,  p.  462,  have  Q  in  the  penultimate,  follow  the  same  rule  ; 
e.  g.  Ijcu^I,  and  should  be  pronounced  achuno  or  achuno. 


2.  The  tone  is  on  the  ultimate,  when  it  ends  in  a"|»©^ 
consonant ;  e.  g.  «^A^  ;  so  too  with  Q  and  w».  final,  if  they 
have  arisen  from  2q  and  Al ;  e.  g.  on\V)  from  2onSv>. 
vid.  Amira,  pp.  467 — 469. 

§  10.  Sig7is  of  Inierpunction. 

The  Syrians,  who  do  not  possess  the  Hebrew  systeni  of 
accents,  divide  their  periods,  (according  to  Amira,  p.  475,  dnto 


36  GENERAL   VIEW. 

protasis  and  apodosis,  which  again  are  subdivided  into 
smaller  parts,  and  include  the  more  precise  designation  of 
subject  and  predicate.  In  this  respect  they  designate ;  a) 
the  separate  members  of  the  protasis  with  (•);  h)  the  close 
of  the  protasis  with  (••),  which  is  also  the  sign  of  interroga- 
tion ;  c)  the  separate  members  of  the  apodosis  with  (♦♦), 
which  also  marks  longer  interrogations ;  and  d)  the  close 
of  a  period  is  marked  by  a  point,  which  as  it  also  occurs  in 
the  middle  of  a  period,  some  consider  to  be  the  smallest 
mark  of  interpunction,  and  (♦)  or  (♦♦)  the  largest  point. 

Rem. — Amira,  p.  479,  mentions  a  point  standing  over  a  word 
which  indicates  a  question,  address,  admiration,  praise,  command,  and 
the  like. 


CHAPTEK  II. 


Peculiaeities  And  Changes  of  the  Lettei^. 


§11.  General  View. 


As  the  changes  in  the  different  parts  of  speech  are  effected 
partly  by  consonants  and  partly  by  vowels,  this  chapter  is 
naturally  divided  into  two  parts.  In  the  first  place,  those 
changes  which  take  place  uniformly,  in  accordance  with 
fixed  laws,  in  pronouns,  verbs,  and  nouns,  must  be  accurately 
distinguished  from  those  which  occur  only  in  individual  forms. 
Though  the  former  class  of  changes  will  be  here  principally 
treated,  yet  in  order  to  afford  a  proper  connection  between 
them,  that  which  occurs  universally  will  be  first  treated  of, 
and  that  which  takes  place  in  special  and  individual  cases 
will  be  appended,  either  independently  or  in  remarks. 


§  12.  Changes  of  the  Consonants. 

Of  those  changes  in  the  radical  consonants  which  Hebrew 
grammarians  classify  as  Assimilation,  Transposition,  Falling 


CHANGES  OF  THE   CONSONANTS.  37 

away,  Exchange,  and  Addition,  the  first  only  is  wanting  in 
Syriac.  And  this  want  is  only  in  form,  for  in  point  of  fact 
this  feature  exists  in  those  cases  where  a  letter  is  dropped 
in  pronunciation  by  the  occurrence  of  Linea  occultans  (§  8. 
(iomp.  Gresenius,  Lehrgebäude,  p.  132).  Here  should  be  no- 
ticed the  following — 

1.  Consonants   are   dropped   in   pronunciation,    by    the 
occurrence  of  Linea  occultans,  as  follows  :  A)     In  General; 

a)  in  nouns  whose  middle  radical  is  doubled ;    e.  g.     pjlo 

mano ;    b)  >  without  a  vowel  before  2;  e.  g    Vh^  ;  c)  Ol  in 

suffixes  of  the  3  masc.  sing.  »^Oi ,  .jOIO  ,  »aOLi.,    ^oiOi.    of 

the  verb,  and  »aOlQ  of  the  noun  plural  (v.  Table  to  §  16);  or 

when  Linea  occultans  has  arisen  from  theGreek  Spiritus  asper ; 

e.g.  .  >v>nm;  cpc^pi^yj .  ^/)  o  in  derivatives  of  verbs  »a^and  ]a, 

as  (ajOQ*  from  j^*  :  B)    In  particular   is  this  the  case  ;    a) 

with  I  initial   in    ^^-»^1 ,  ^♦•**l ,  **J! »  ^^^  in  the  pronoun 

PI  in  connection   with  the  participle,  '\l\  I^m  ;     h)  with  Ol, 

particularly  in  the  following  cases ;  a)  in  the   pronouns  001 

and  ^01 ,  with  the  throwing  back  of  the  vowel  upon  the 

preceding  vacant  consonant ;    e.  g.  ooi  Ajlj^  ;    or  with  the 

falling  away  of  the  letter  with  the  preceding  vowel ;    e.  g. 

GO!  |aO  pronounced  k'^  sheu ;  in  which  case,  however,  before 

001 ,  —  passes  into  —  ;    e.  g.    OOl  p]  for  \i\ ;    ß)  in  looi 

(v.  §  38)   when  it   is  an  auxiliary  verb ;    e.  g.    looi  ^\J^ 

he   had  killed ;    7)  in  .äOU  for  ,^0U  to  give  \    c)  with    ^ 

in  ^ll  to  go  aicay^   when  it  should  have  a  vowel  which  falls 

back  upon  the  1  ;  e.  g.  Allffor  ASi|  (v.  §  28) ;  d)  with  J  in 

the  pronouns  tS\    masc.   and    ^tS\  fem.,    and  their  plurals 

.oAj I  masc.  ^Aj  I  fem.,  and  in  some  other  words ;  e.g.  (Al*  \ 

and  finally ;  e)  with  i  in  L\Ci  daughter ;  (v.  §  8). 

Rem. — Linea  occultans  is  retained  under  f  in  nouns  derived  from 

those  adduced  under  a  \  e.g.  fZoi  i  m]  ,  '\L\jS\  .  IZqju]  ,  nnd  many 


38  CHANGES   OF  THE   CONSONANTS. 

Others.  It  also  occurs  in  (j| ,  001,  and  ^»01  when  they  are  «sed 
for  the  logical  copula  or  substantive  verb  (comp.  §  16. 1.,  §  54.  A.  3. 
a  and  c).  In  these  pronouns,  even  when  thoy  stand  pleonastically 
(§  55.  A),   the  logical  copula  is  fundamentally  involved,  as  is  con- 

10 
OCn   (§  68.  A),  which   verb   loses 
Linea   occultans  only  when  it  is  used  absolutely  in   the  sense    of 
to  he,    to  become^  to  come   to  pass ;      As  to   further   inflection   of 

7 

luOOL»    compare  §  29.  1.  Rem, 

2.  Transposed  is  I  before  sibilants  in  Ethpe.^  MhjM.^  and 

Eshta.;  e.  g.  ^aI^Aco]  from  IJco ,  w*)0A»l  from  ^JO». 

2  1  "^  ^t  'S 

is  changed  into  *^  after  . ,  into  >  after  ];  e.  g.  •.m.SQ^  •  | 

for    •.*a.Sd»21|,  ^?1|  for  ^Kl«       There   is   no  transposition  when 

is    doubled  in  Ethpe.  of  Verbs  «.aJ^  and    Ql ;    e.  g.    ^▲TOZZf 

(v.  §31.  2).    (    as   middle   radical   is   sometimes   transposed;  e.  s^. 

•.mO (Z|'  from  <^^*  Also  J  in  the  imperat.  from  •.^CJlJ  (v.  §  8). 

«  0        7 

3.  Dropped  are ;    a)  |  with  Linea  occultans ;    e.  g.   *,aJ^ 

for  *äJ|  ;o  and   as    first   radical    in    the  1    sing.  fut.  Pe. 

intin.  and  part.  Pa.  of  Verbs  ]si  (§  28.  1);    e.  g.  ^Qol  for 

^QdII  ;    and  in  ^]  for  ^  ^]  ;    b)    «-a  and  J  as  first  radical, 

and  Q  as  middle  radical  in  Verbs  *^  (§  29.  2),  ^  (§  38.  1), 

and  Ql  (§  31.  1) ;  e.  g.  *QSik)  from  -QSJ.     Here  belong  such 

nouns   as   ]i.QdSD   for   Ho^l^      The  same  is  true  also  in 

respect  to  the  middle  radical  of  Verbs  Ml  (§  34.  1),  and  the 
nouns  derived  therefrom  ;  c)  one  of  two  Z  without  a  vowel 

standing  between  them  ;  e.  g.  jZ^^  for  IZZpjs*.  Also  when 
three  Z  stand  together  in  the  fut.  pass. ;  e.  g.  ^\^L1  for 
^^iollL  Finally  Z  falls  away  at  the  end  of  the  fem.  end- 
ings Zq  and  Aa.  ;  e.  g.  oa^ikiD  for  Iq2l\^.    ■    j^ 

■  4. — Exchanged  are  ;  a)  the  gutturals  1  ^^  |  before  01 ; 
e.  g.  'r^O\\  for  ;-iOll ;  h)  in  transferring  Hebrew  words  into 
Syriac,  f  passes  into  > ,  ^  into  »^ ,  «^3  i^to  Z ,  sometimes 
-^    into   -i   and   J  ;     also   ")   of  verbs   13?   into   01  ;      e.  g 


QUIESCENT   LETTERS.  39 

Zaia  =  tlJ^S  ;  c)  Z,  when  transposed  with  sibilants,  in  the 
passive,  goes  over  into  j  and  »^,  according  to  Kern.  2.  above; 
r/)  1  with  Z  in  the  construct  state  fem.,  and  before  suffixes 
(§§  45,  46);  and  in  the  Mhpe.  and  ^^/ipa.  of  verbs  ]si  (§  28. 
1   Kern.  ;    e.  g.  r**ZZ1  for  h^IZ]» 

Rem. — This  last  has  been  also  applied  to  nouns  derived  from    \£i 

Verbs;  e.g.    ^mJL  from  vmJ|»     In  many  cases  this  usage  is  doubt- 

;...£   which  may  be  derived  from  ;.•£  or  J..  (♦    Hence 

the  form  IrvtlZ  is  found.     The  derivatives  from.  Aphel  do  not  belong 

here;    e.    g.    jAujoZ   from  «->>0(* 

5. — Added  are  ;  a)  sometimes  ]  at  the  beginning,  before  a 

vacant   consonant ;    e.  g.    Zool  for  LoD  ;      wiÄs]  for  «^A»  ; 

also  in  Greek  words  beginning  with  2  ;  e.  g.  ^Qa,4^1  = 
5-a(Jiov ;      ^)  01  to  denote  the  Spiritus  asper  in  Greek'  words  ; 

e.  g.    |u.Sdoo1)   'PwfAajoj   (§  12.  1.  A.  c);    even  in  compound 

words  in  the  later  Syriac ;  e.  g.    «JCDOjOlJQCD  (fv)/oSog  ;  and  in 

cases   where  Ol    does   not   reprf^SQnt -Spiritus  asper ;    e.g. 

%cco;^Ol2)  UsTpog  ;    c)  J  is  added  where  it  supplies  the  place 

IP    0  7 

§  13.   Quiescent  Letters. 
The    vowel-letters     ^,  o,   1,   and,    according   to  some, 
01   also,  quiesce  in  the  preceding  vowel. 

Rem. — Here  belongs   only    01  ;    for   cfl    of  the  suf.  3  sing.  fem. 
=  jTf    of  the  Hebrew. 

The   following  letters   quiesce  : 

final  in  —  and  —  ;  e.  g.  P.i ,  Jj.^  ;  1  medial  in  — 
and  —  ;  e.g.  ^^dISd  ,  ;SdPD  ;  and  if  it  have  a  vowel,  this 
falls  back  upon  the  preceding  vacant  consonant  ;  e.  g. 
\\mJ  for  ^|mj.  And  so  in  words  transferred  from  the 
Hebrew;    e.  g.    »Op  ==  ^Jj^^» 


40  VOWEL-LETTERS  WHICH  ARE  NOT  SOUNDED. 

Rem. —  ]  quiesces  in  —  in  {SD^,  X^,  I  i  f  and  |)2)Z(*  In  Greek 
words  »  and  on  are  represented  by  ( — ,  a»  sometimes  by  wkf  — ;  e.g. 
1Zao)o  xiß(^rog  ;  (CDj|o  xa»poj.  In  the  later  Syriac  ]  stands 
for   a   and    s. 

2.  o  quiesces  in  — ;  e.g.  ^Q£) ,  and  sometimes  OQ ;  e.g. 
]l>OQi     (§3.  Eem.  4). 

Rem.  —  In  Greek  words  O  quiesces  m  — ,  in  the  termination 
«QOQ  =  0^  ;  e.  g.  «JCOO*^  >  N»*'^  ==  ^iXi-tt-ttoj.  «ISQ  is  also  used 
for  ajj  ;  e.  g.  %flDQOj(  ^  «fX"'^-  ^^  ^^®  ^^*®^  language  we  find 
also  .rDQljiZ(  =  'Aär]va»j  ;  *CDQO>|  =  ctp^«^. 

3.  «X,  medial  and  final,  quiesces,  in  —  and  — ;  e.  g. 
^jlL,  wi^..Zl»     wft  initial  usually  quiesces  in  — ;  e.  g.   ^^, 

and  —  falls  back  upon  the  preceding  vowelless  prefix ;  e.  g. 

7     1  7  1 

Ql,uO  for  Qlr^aO«  Also  between  two  consonants  Jk.  quiesces 
in  —  ;    e.  g.  l/uj{  for  l^LiJl. 

§  14.    Vowel-Letters  which  are  not  sounded    (Otiant). 

In  the  following  cases  «-i,  O,  1,  are  not  sounded  ; 

1.  ]  in  the  pronouns  2  plur.masc.  and  fem.  ,oAj1  ,  ^AjI 
conjoined  with  the  participle  to  denote  the  present  tense, 
e,  g.  ioAjI  ^iN^  pronounced  koielitun^  in  which  case  the 
^  of  the  participle  is  not  sounded. 

2.  O  and  «a  at  the  end  of  words  ;  a)  in  verbal  endings 
without  any  vowel  preceding  (2  pret.  sing.  fem.  ;  3  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.;  imperat.  sing.  fem.  and  plur.  masc. ;  and   2 

fut.  sing,  fem.)  ;    e.  g.    ^AL^^  ,  CL^^n  ;     h)  in  the  suffixes 

7  7 

«ji ,  «A^ ,  tin  I, ,  «uGlQ ,  where  wi.  is  sounded  only  when  fol- 
lowed  by  ooi ;  e.  g.  ooi  «inn  pronounced  hehyu  ;  c  )  in 
>  i  Nv^Zl  yesterday,  «i\»  rest,  and  the  like,  which  form  ^  in 
the  emphatic  state   (  §  46.  1). 


CHANGES   IN   THE   VOWELS.  41 

§  15.   Changes  in  the  Vovjels. 

Althongli  to  a  less  extent  than  in-  Hebrew,  the  vowels  in 
Syriac,  "undergo  various  changes  and  modifications  in  res- 
pect to  formation  and  derivation,  still  they  are  exchanged, 
transposed,  dropped  or  added. 

1.  They  are  exchanged  partly  in  accordance  with  the 
genius  of  the  language,  and  partly  in  transferring  Hebrew 
and  Chaldee  words.  The  genius  of  the  language  requires 
the  following  exchanges  of  vowels  ;  a)  in  the  preformatives 

of  the  fut.  and  infin,  Pe.  in  simple  syllables,    in  Verbs  \zi , 

wiÄ ,  (t»-M  §  32),  —  passes  over  into  — ;  e.  g.  ;5^M,   AP^  ; 

but  before  gutturals  and  >  at  the  end  of  words,  inta  —  ;  e.g. 

j^  for  >p«  ;     b)  in  the  feminine  with   |— ,   — ,    in  the  con- 

struct  state,  passes  over  into  —  ;    e.  g.   j£i4  construct  state 

Lcii  (§  45.  2).     In  transferring  words  from  the  Hebrew  and 

Chaldee,  the  following  vowel  changes  may  be  noted ;  a)  for 

— the  Syriac  prefers  — ;    e.  g.    Wit  =  nbti  5    ^'1  =  d1i<  ^ 

T  \k  "^  T  _  T  T   -: 

b)    "TT  is  exchanged  in  proper  names   mostly  with  — ;  e.  g. 
QfiQjLl  =  1^3? ;  —  with  —  ;  e.  g.  wmAsl»  =  nSTlÖ*! ;    ^)  1  with 

T  ••  •  ~    :     ■ 

Q— ;  e.  g.     ]*jQO  =  tlflp  ;  or  with  Q- ;  e.g.  "toCL»  =  (Chald. 

2.   Vowels  are  transposed  ;  A)  in  general;  a)  Q  in  the  im- 

perat.  plur.  masc.  Pe.  when  a  suffix  is  added ;  e.  g.  ol^Q^O, 

with  suffix  »aOloS^no ;    b)  concerning  the  falling  back  of  the 

vowel  over  1,  *a,  or  Oil,  upon  prefixes,  compare  §  13.  1.3; 

§52.  1;  §53.1.  Kern.;  B)  in  Particular ;    a)in^l),  vrhen- 
ever  1  is  vacant,  the  vowel  of  the  ^  falls  back  upon  it ;  e.g. 

A^l|  for  A^ll  (§12.1) ;    b)m  some  nouns  of  the  form  *»0*^pO, 

when   a   syllable  is   appended   and   in  the   emphatic  state 

li>Q£)   (§  45.  3  ;    §  48.    A.  Decl.  IV) ;    of  the  form  Xfik, 

emphatic   state  12,0*=^ ;     c)   in   ^^y^ao  and  iOjOD  with  1. 

prefixed,    Q  is  placed  before  n  when  a  and  j  retain  their 

—  ;  e.  gf.    -SoqqS^,  -  .^  VAr^nV.     In  A  when  it  enters  into 


4:2  CHANGES  IN  THE   VOWELS. 

composition,  —  moves  forward  upon  r ;  e.  g.  ^^a^X  ISo^li* 

8.  The  vowel  of  a  final  mixed  syllable  is  dropped^  wKen 
an  entire  syllable  is  added  at  tlie  end,  especially  when 
the  last  radical  begins  the  new  syllable  ;    e.  g.   in  the  verb 

^\4o  masc.  AX4o  fem.;  in  the  nouns  *,i»sV),  )a!^!^«* 
Kem. — This  vowel  remains  unchanged  ;  a)  when  merely  a  formative 

letter,  without  a  vowel,  is  added  ;  e.g.  Q^^D  from  ^^h6^  ;  ^)  when 
a  syllable  is  added,  if  the  stem-syllable  remain  a  mixed  one  ;    e.  g. 

^oA^4^  from  v^hS^  ;  and  moreover  ;  c)  when  the  stem-syllable 
becomes  a  simple  one,  in  the  following  cases  ;  a)  in  the  second  form 
of  the  3  fem.plur.pret.and  2  fem.  plur.  imperat.;  ß)  where  inHebrew 

Daghesh  forte  stands ;  e.  g.  ^Ol  emphatic  state    (SDI  (ü;^,  ^72'$)  '■> 

7)in  words  ofDeclension  I.masc.  (comp.  §  48.A).     In  ^^iJL  emphatic 

state  \1.aJL\  ^CU  emphatic  state  P^Cl*,  the  original  vowel  only 
reappears  (comp.  48.  A.  Decl.  IV). 

4.  Vowels  are  added;  a)  with  \  w»,  and  1,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  words  ;  1  and  1  usually  take  —  and  —  ;  e.g.  \iQO\ 
(imp.),  jOll :  but  ^  usually  takes  — ;  e.  g.  *£5Aji  ;  b)  of  two 
vacant  consonants  at  the  beginning  of  a  word, the  first  takes 
— ;  e.  g.  |*V)an  for  t>V)an ;  so  also  when  two  vacant 
consonants  ni  the  middle  of  a  word  follow  —  ;  e.  g.  |i\Aj^O 
for  lA>*'r£D  ;  or  when  in  Hebrew,  the  first  has  Daghesh 
forte  ;  e.  g.  U^.^for  T^'pyif  from  tll^i^  ;  or  finally  when 
three  vacant  consonants  would  come  together  in  the  middle 
of  a  word  ;  e.  g.  Al^^Z]  for  ZCi^^Zl.     This  assumed  vowel 

is  sometimes  —  ;  e.g.  AS40  (pret.  Pe.)  from  ^^s-fevO  ;  or  ■ — • 
before   jl,    (v.  §  13.3),    excepting  in  the  emphatic  state  of 

the   participle   fem.   pass,    of  Verbs  ]j    in   Pa.,  Aph.,  and 

7  , 

Eshta.,  where  —  is  added  to  distinguish  it  from  the.^active 
participle  (comp.  §  48.  B.  Decl.IV.  Eem.).  Finally  Q  is  as- 
sumed in  the  emphatic  state  sing,    of  some  words  ;    e.  g. 

VAii^oaSo  from  WalsD  for  1  Alsik) ;  c)  a  vowel  is  assumed 
with  Q  between  tAvo  vacant  consonants  :  this  vowel  is  _!. 
when  it  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  mixed  syllable  ;    e.  g. 


CHANGES  IN  THE  VOWELS.  43 

•QoZOp** ;  but  —  when  it  stands  in  a  simple  syllable ;  e.  g. 

(ZOpM  .  d)  The  assumption  of  a  vowel  is  arbitrary,  when 
there  are  two  vacant  consonants,  of  which  the  first  can  be 
attached  to  the  preceding,  and  the  second  to  the  following 

syllable  ;  e.  g.  |M>n,V)  and  ]M.2rSo;  if  the  second  consonant 

be  (,  —  must  be  assumed,  for  a,  Q  and  |  cannot  stand 
without  a  vowel  between  two  consonants. 


PART  SECOND. 


ETYMOLOGY,   OR,  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 


CHAPTER  I. 


PRONOUNS. 


§  16.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

The  Personal  Pronouns  are  divided  into  two  classes  : 
Separate  Pronouns^  which  stand  as  separate  words,  and 
mark  the  nominative  case  ;  and  Suffixes^  consisting  of 
syllables  formed  from  the  separate  pronouns,  which  are 
appended  to  other  parts  of  speech ;  appended  to  Yerbs,  they 
mark  the  accusative ;  appended  to  nouns,  the  possessive 
pronoun,  or  the  relation  of  the  genitive ;  and,  with  preposi- 
tions, they  form  the  remaining  cases. 


TABLE  OF  PRONOUNS  AND  SUFFIXES. 


45 


TABLE  OF  PRONOUNS  AND  SUFFIXES. 


SEPARATE. 

SUFFIXED  TO  VERBS. 

SUFFIXED  TO  NOUNS. 

<•• 

J. 

e. 

In  Sing. 

In  Plural. 

Sing. 

1.        2. 

1 

1  c. 

m 

i                        7                      7      1 

P 

%Ai 

7 
Ob 

2  m. 

AjV 

1             >-^              ^     >-- 

* 

0 
>*- 

7 

2  f . 

-AjV 

^^^11.              «jlD 

£> 
^A^ 

wa::! 

7 

3  m. 

001 

1 
01_j 

I  1 

—                 — 

«uOIjl 

oil 

7 

«aOIQ 

1      OCT 

^OIQjk     «aOIQ 

3  f. 

f                          X 

■ 

^01 

.  p         C7U_ 
01 

01 

* 

.  p 

Ol 

CT.' 

Plur. 

1   c. 

7 

7                     7 

r 

V 

p 

^ 

7 

2  m. 

2  f . 

3  m. 

1^1 

* 

Ok            P 

•X        7 

-«     7 

•X       7 

tOOLfe. 

SEPARATE    FROM    THE    V] 

SRB. 

3  f. 

^T 

^CT 

■»        7 

^OIa. 

46  REMARKS  AND  EXPLANATIONS  CONCERNINa  THE  TABLE. 

Remarks  and  Explanations  concerning  the  Table. 

I.     Tlie  Personal  Pronoun. 

The  second  and  third  persons  have  two  genders,  while  the 
first  person  is  of  the  common  gender.  The  fem.  of  the  2 
sing.,    is  denoted  by   «u.  appended  to   the  masc.     In  the  3 

7  0 

sing.  OCT  masc.  and  *aCT  fem.,  are  used  rather  in  a  demon- 
s' X 

strative  sense,  while  OCT  masc.  arid  »-»CT  fem.,  are  used  in 
connection  with  adjectives  and  participles  rather  to  designate 
the  present  tense.  And  so  in  the  plur.,  the  first  forms  given 
above  are  used  rather  substantively  as  nominatives,  and  the 
second  as  accusatives  (comp.  §  36).  Concerning  Linea  oc- 
cultans  under  ]  and  CT  of  the  1  and  3  sing.,  see  §  12.1. 

II.     Suffix   Pronouns, 

A.     Suffixes    of   the  Verb. 

In  the  suffixes,  or  abbreviated  forms  of  the  separate  pro- 
nouns, an  ancient  obsolete  form  whose  characteristic  was 
not  Z  but  O,  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  2  sing,  and  plur.  (comp. 
Gesen.  Lehrgeb.  203). 

Of  the  suffixes  to  verbs,  given  in  the  Table,  tbose  marked 
a,  fall  into  two  classes  ;  the  first  of  which  are  attached  to  con- 
sonants (with  the  exception  of  ^  )  in  the  forms  of  the  regular 

verb  ;  and  the  second  mainly  to  the  same  forms  of  Yerbs  |J, 
and  in  part  to  the  imperat.  and  fut.  of  the  regular  verb. 
The  forms  placed  between  1  and  2,  are  common  to  both. 

The  suffixes  marked  h  are  appended  to  forms  with  Q  and 
•Jb^  which  then  quiesce  in  Jl  and  JL.  Where  this  form  is 
wanting  under  h  it  is  comprehended  under  a.  Finally  the 
suffixes  under  c  are  attached  to  the  forms  with  ^,  and  also  to 
the  i>  sing.  masc.  and  3  plur.  fem.  pret.  The  forms  wanting 
under  c  are  comprised  under  a.  On  their  mode  of  union, 
comp.  ^^%Qj  and  37,  and  the  accompanying  Tables. 

B.     Suffixes  of  Nouns   or  Possessive  Pronouns. 

The  suffixes  of  the  noun  (possessive  pronouns)  are  attached, 
in  nouns  masc.  sing.,   to  the  emphatic  state  (§  45,)  with  the 


SUFFIXES   TO  PARTICLES.  47 

falling  away,  of  I- ;  e.g.  .^iSV) ,  emphatic  state  ]n\V>, 
with  suff.  «>^\^»  In  the  plural  thej  coalesce  with  the  end- 
ing of  the  construct  state  va.,  so  that  they  may  be  considered 
as  attached  to  the  final  consonant  of  the  noun ;  e.g.  construct 
state  « 1  'SSV),  with  sufF.  y  >  n\V)»  Only  in  the  3  sing.  masc. 
does  vA.  pass  into  Q,  and  in  the  3  sing.  fern.  JL  is  the  union 
vowel.  In  the  noun  fem.  the  suffix  with  a  union  vowel  is 
attached  to  the  emphatic  state,  with  the  falling  away  of 
]«-,  e.  g.  OlAi^oAQ  from  emphatic  state  lA^oAo»  In 
the  remaining  persons  (1  sing.  2  and  3  plur.)  suffixes  sing. 
are  attached  to  the  construct  state  (v.  §  46.  2) ;  e.  g. 
wiA^oAi)  from  the  construct  state  Ai^oAo,  plur.  wi^A^oAo 
from  construct  state  Ai^oAo« 

Rem. — For  the   complete  union  of  nouns   and  suffixes,    compare 
§§  46 — 48,  and  the  accompanying  Tables. 

Besides,  the  possessive  pronoun  may  be  expressed  in  a 

separate  form  from  the  noun,  by  means  of  some  form  of  ^^-»> 

(from  J  =  -]>;2?^  chald.  1*7   and  ^  )  with  a  suffix,  thus  ; 

Plural.  Singular. 


FEM. 


1.  ^^?  ^^^* 

2.  ,^iONi>         |Cia^) 


>   your. 


FEM.  CpMM.  MASa 

*  iSi>  my. 


3.  ^OUi^)  ^Oau^>    their.  \  C71Xa9  her.  OlXi9    his. 

Rem. — This  form,  which  corresponds  with  the  German  der  meinige 
(mine)etc.  occurring  after  a  suffix  to  the  noun,  indicates  an  emphasis  ; 
e.  g.  y>^}  «^1*,  »V>NZo,  but  thy  scholars.  Sometimes  it  signifies 
relating  to;  e.  g.  ^Qn^>  to  us. 


C.     Suffixes   to   Particles. 


The  Prepositions^  which  were   in  part   originally   nouns, 
take  suffixes  sing,  and  plur.     Singular  suffixes   are  attached 


48  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

to  *0  m,  L  the  sign  of  the  dative,  2q!^  to,  ^lo  from^ 
jAms  and  >A£)  after ^  ^non\  towards^  against^  comp.  §  15. 
2.  Plural  suffixes  are  attached  to  >Qi»»\r3  aside^  only  , 
iSN*^  without^  i,-M  or  ^Jj-M  a6ow^,  ^SlL*^for^  ^X^  oi;er,  jK 
or  ^.  towards^  after ^  ^yO  5e/öre,  2qa*2  {L^a^L  before 
nouns)  under.  The  suffix  plural  fern,  occurs  with  ^^^^2^ 
on  account  of ;  e.  g.  ^tc^^^iD ;  with  both  plural  suffixes 
and  Al  lO  betiueen. 


Rem. — For  the  complete  union  with  suffixes,  compare  the  Tahlo 
belonging  to  §  52. 


§  17.    Other  Pronouns. 

1.  The  Demonstrative  Pronoun  is  declined  as  follows  : 

Plural.  Singular. 

F.        C.       M.  R  M. 

-^^    ...  ^«^^'1  1j<5,  (,a.)  , 

^ai^  ).  these.  (V»01)  [""■'•  IjOI  [ '*'■*• 

J 01  is  united  with  the 

*•  ^  .         '  ^ 

personal  pronoun  3  sing.  masc.  001  and  fem.  «-»Ol,  forming  QJOl  and 

10     9  •\  I  *0    (7  -X 

JOI»  Sometimes  001  and  t-iOl  precede;  e.g.  pOl  OGl  just  this, 

IjOl  %jkö\just  this.     The  Chaldee  ,^»N>|    is  only  used  in  compari- 

sons;  e.  g.     -^'f  ^t?,  or  _k^01  ^t>  such. 

2.  The  Relative  for  all  numbers   and  genders   is   j,  who, 
which^  that,  and  with  the  pronouns  ^So  c.  M-il  m.  1r»l /  ^>  ^if 

pi.  com.  preceding,  it  becomes  interrogative. 

»p       ik7 

Rem. —  P-*l  having  a  relative  signification  with  J  following  it,  is 
an  exception  to  the  general  rule. 

8.  The  Interrogative  ;    a)  for  persons  of  both  genders  and 
numbers  is  ^^sD  who.      It  unites  with  001  following,  and 


THE   VERB GENEKAL   VIEW.  49 

forms  OJlO  and  \ij]  masc.  who  f  Vr-il  fern,  who  f  h)  liD  and 

^Sd  what^  refer  to  things  (  Uio,  lOk)  ) ;  c)  ^^iSi]  refers  to 
both  persons  and  things. 

4.  The  Reciprocal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns   are   formed 
partly  by  passives  (§  21.  2.  §  22.  2.  §  24.  2),  or  by  the  nouns 

luaj    soul^   and    ]iDQJj3  person^  with   suffixes    appended 
(comp,  the  Syntax). 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE   VERB. 


§  18.  General  View, 

1.  The  Yerb  is,  as  in  Hebrew,  the  most  important  of  the 
parts  of  speech,  since  it  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  formation  of 
the  others.  Yerbs  may  be  divided  into  the  three  following 
classes,  in  so  far  as  new  verbal  forms  are  derived  from  them 
in  accordance  with  definite  laws,  or  as   a   noun  is  to  be 

considered   as   their  stem:    a)   Primitives'^   e.  g.  *pAd  to 

write^    VH^  to  hill ;  h)  Verhal  Derivatives  {Conjugations) ; 

e.  g.  J3J1  tojusUfy^  from  *0>1  ;  c)  Denom^nat^ves^  subsequent 

7     7^  7 

formations  from  nouns  ;  e.  g.  ^EQ^  tQ  tithe ^  from  ;IX11  ten  ; 
o^^^f  to  celebrate  Easter*  f?r^\w\^%»*^  Easter. 

2.  The  Stem-form  in  the  3  sing.  masc.  pret.  consists 
usually  of  three  radicals  (verbum  triliterum),  and  is  pronoun- 

7 

ced  as  a  monosyllable,  by  the  help  of  —  placed  over  the 

middle  radical  in  transitive,  and  —  in  intransitive  verbs. 

3.  From  this  are  formed  the  Derivatives  or  Conjugations, 
which  agree  closely  with  the  ground-form  in  the  inflection 
of  persons,  and  the  principal  characteristics  of  mood  and 
tense.    Modern  grammarians  have  added  a  third  conjugation, 

^a^hel,  to  the  two  originally  derived  from  the  ground-form. 

The  passive  is  formed  by  prefixing  2*1,  and  has  not  only  a 
passive  but  also  a  reciprocal  and  reflexive  signification. 


50  THE     KEGULAR    VERB. 

The  Conjugations   are   as   follows  ; 

Actwe.  Passive. 

1.  Peal  ^\^     to  kill;*  Ethpeel  ^Jy^Zfl 

2.  Pael  ^^>4^     ^^  murder  ;  Ethpaal  ^^^.^Z]» 

3.  Apliel  ^4^1  to  cause  to  kill ;          Ethtaphal  ^^^ZZfl 
4  Shaphel  ^^^i^^jClM  to  cause  to  kill   (rare)  Eshtaphal  ^4^A*1'1 

Rem. — All  verbs  do  not  have  the  whole  of  the  conjugations ;  and 
wherePael  andAphel  are  found  together,  there  is  usually  a  difference 

7    7  ^        l' 

in  their  signification;  e.  g.  pCU  to  honor ^  r^Of  ^o  he  burdensome. 

4.  The  Syriac,  like  the  other  Semitic  dialects,  has  a  Pre- 
terit and  Future.  It  has,  moreover,  an  Imperative  in  the 
passive,  and  two  Participles,  an  active  and  a  passive,  in  the 
active.  The  Hebrew  Infinitive  absolute  and  Infinitive  con- 
struct are  in  Syriac  united  in  one  form  (v.  §  19.B.8). 

Rem. — The  other  relations  of  time  are  supplied  in  the  following 
manner  ;  the  Present  is  expressed  by  the  participle  with  the  personal 

10 
001  ( ^^rt, 

T    T 

the  former  joined  with  the  participle,  the  latter  with  the  preterite. 
The  Optative  and  Subjunctive^  are  contained  in  the  future,  to  de- 
note which  more  explicitly,  1 001  is  also  frequently  used  (v.Syntax). 

5.  Verbs,  finally,  are  divided  into  two  principal  classes, 
Regular  and  Irregular.  In  regular  verbs  the  radical  letters 
remain  unchanged,  while  in  irregular  verbs,  one  of  the  rad- 
icals either  falls  ^\y^j  {Defective  Verhs)^  ot  quiQ^QQS  [Quies- 
cent Verbs)  V.  §  27. 


1.     EEGULAR  VERBS. 

§  19.     The  Inflection  of  Regular  Verbs  in  General. 

The  formation  of  Verbs,  in  respect  to  person,  tense,  and 
mood  is  effected,  in  general,  by  uniform  laws.  The  irre- 
gular verbs  are  formed  in  a  different  manner,  in  particular 

*Literally,  he  killed,  etc.  The  infinitive  being  considered  in  English  the 
ground-form  of  the  verb,  and  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  is  uniformly  used  to 
represent  the  Syriac  ground  form  3  masc.  sing. — Tk. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  51 

cases  only,  according  to  their  special  laws.  It  will  therefore 
be  most  convenient  to  treat,  under  the  regular  verb,  of  what- 
ever belongs  to  the  universal  analogy  of  the  verb. 

In  the  following  Tables  of  the  Inflection  of  Regular  and 
Irregular  Yerbs,  the  following  signs  are  used :  The  radical 
letters  are  denoted  by  *.  The  vowels  which  stand  imme- 
diately over  the  *,  belong  to  the  inflection  of  transitive 
verbs;  and  those  vowels  which  are  separated  from  the 
*  by  ... .  belong  to  intransitive  or  guttural  verbs,  or  denote 
other  forms  in  equal  use.  Radical  letters  which  have  fallen 
away,  are  denoted  in  the  Table  of  Irregular  Yerbs,  §  27  by 
®.     Those  which  take  their  place,  stand  over  this  sign. 


52 


TABLE   OF   PERSONAL   INFLECTIONS. 


O 


>-^ 

o 

CO 

P-i 

o 

pq 
< 


1 

Future. 

1 

Singular. 

CO 

■5f 

■5f 

CO 

* 

.a*  r 

1 

* 

* 

* 

V5 

-^4 

H      * 

* 

* 

1 

Ü 
tH 

* 

*     : 
.d     :    ^ 

CO 

I*  L  u  r  a  I.                     1 

* 

•1 

* 
.0^ 

CO 

'1 

^0^ 

d 

* 

* 

^  O     : 

* 

6 

r-( 

TABLE  OF  THE  TEMPORAL  lOT'LECTION  OF  REGULAR  VERBS.     63 


1 

1 

i 
1 

1 

* 

1« 

1 

«^    #    :  f 

*    . 

* 

* 

*    : 
.d     \^ 

* 

,51 

* 

f    *       : 

* 
1'^ 

'^' 

^J^ 

i 
'-3 

'=7 

'1 

'1 

^ 

« 

* 

^     ♦ 

* 

f    * 

t      * 

* 

* 

*d 

•1 

Ph 

51 

51 

a. 

* 

^ 

* 

*    *        : 

-    *        : 

^^ 

*ö 

*o    • 

*  <.    ' 

's 

'CT 

'^ 

'C7 

'1 

'1 

§, 

^     * 

1»    * 

1-     # 

►.  ♦ 

■^    « 

»■     * 

»•    # 

>      * 

«^  * 

•>'    ♦ 

^^ 

# 

* 

* 

* 

i 

* 
f          ♦ 

* 
f      # 

*5 

^51 

* 

^51 

^51 

* 

^ 

# 

* 

Pl, 

,0 

#       : 

*       : 

i 

■5t 

•X- 

1 

# 

-< 

•-    -J«- 

"^    -x- 

r^ 

# 

»■  * 

^ 

* 

^ 

^0 

*..  - 

i 

0) 

1 

^ 

■je 

•Jf 

E 

■5f 

^         * 

t— 1 

<sd 

4  ■ 

«^■~ 

■i 

:i 

J 

:l 

'J 

^1 

•X- 

■X- 

^d 

1         * 

r^—  1 

54:  PERSONAL     INFLECTIONS. 

A.     Personal  Inflections  (comp.  Table  1). 

The  inflection  of  persons  is  found  in  its  most  simple  form 
in  the  preterit  and  imperative,  where  formative  syllables 
are  appended  only  to  the  stem  {Afformatives).  In  the  future 
the  form  is  more  complex,  additions  being  received  at  the 
beginning  {Preformatives\  and  at  the  end.  The  inflection 
is   as   follows  ; 

In  the  3  sing.  pret.  the  simple  verbal  stem  suffices  for  the 
masc;  but  in  the  fern.,  Z,  preceded  by  _L  (=  H^r)?  is  appen- 
ded and  considered  as  a  sign  of  that  gender.  The  3  plur., 
which  has  a  two-fold  gender,  is  distinguished  in  the  masc. 
by  the  addition  of  the  plural-sign  Q,  from  which  the  fem. 
in  its  simple  form  is  distinguished  only  by  a  silent  «a  instead 
"p  of  a*  ^  Jn  the  same  person  of  the  fat.  the  inquiry  into  the 
(  origin  of  the  preformative  J  in  the  sing.  masc.  and  the  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.,  is  a  difficult  one.  The  opinion  that  the  J 
had  its  origin  in  <u  is  opposed  by  the  fact  that  among  the 
Zabians  this  preformative  exists,  while  there  is  no  similarity 
between  those  two  letters.     More  consideration  is  probably 

due  to  the  derivation  from  (JOI  and  ^QJOl  (comp.  §  17).  In 
the  plur.,  the  masc,  in  addition  to  the  preformative  J,  is 
distinguished  as  in  the  pret.,  by  the  plural-sign  Q  with  ^  pa- 
ragogic,  which  causes  the  vowel  of  the  last  radical  syllable 
to  fall  away.  And  thus  the  ^^  in  the  fem.  reminds  one  of 
the  paragogic  final  syllable  }-;5  in  Hebrew.    The  abbreviated 

form  of  the  personal  pronoun  evidently  appears  in  the  2 
sing,  and  plur.     Thus   in  the   pret.  sing.,  Z   masc.    and  wkZ 

fem.  are  related   to  AjI  masc.  and  ^^AjI  fem.,    as  fOZ  masc. 

and  ^Z  fem.  are  to  tOAjj  masc.  and  ^Ajf  fem.  in  the  plur. 

The  same  is  true  of  the  preformative  Z  in  the  same  person 
of  the  fut.  sing,  and  plur.  where  the  fem.  sing.,  in  order  to 
designate  the  gender,  takes  ^  final  and  ^  paragogic,  with  a 
like  influence  upon  the  vowel  of  the  preceding  radical 
syllable.  In  the  plur.  the  2  pers.  shares  with  the  3  pers., 
this  same  character  at  the  end.  In  the  1  sing.  pret.  the  ori- 
ginal form  of  the  Z  with  JL  =  ijt]   preceding,  has  not  been 

shown.     But  in  the  plur.  ^  and  ^,    as  well  as  |  before  the 


INFLECTION  OF  THE  TENSES  AND  MOODS.  00 

1  sing,  and  J  before  the  1  plur.  fut.  refer  us  the  more  defi- 

nitely  back  to  Ml  and  ^j^^  Here  too  it  should  be  noticed 
that  the  1  plur.  fut.  is  distinguished  from  the  3  sing.  masc. 
which  has  the  same  form,  bj  Ribui. 

The  prefbrmatives  of  the  fut.  uniformly  take  —  except  in 
Pael  and  Shaphel,  where  (with  the  exception  of  the  1.  sing.) 

they  are  vacant,  and  in  Aphel,  where  they  take  .^» 

The  imperative  coincides  with  the  future  in  respect  to 
formatives  at  the  end,  except  that  the  paragogic  ^  in  the  2 
sing.  fem.  and  2  plur.  masc.  falls  away,  the  former  person 
ending  in  the  feminine  sign  «a,  and  the  latter  in  the  plural 

sign  Q  .    In  both  cases  in  Peal,  Q  is  retained  as  the  vowel 

of  the  radical  syllable.  Finally  the  fem.  plur.  ends  with  ^ 
and  the  vowel  of  the  final  syllable  is  retained. 

B.  Inflection  of  the  Tenses  and  Moods  {comp.  Table  11). 

1.  With  the  preterit  (the  characteristics  of  which  are 
more  specifically  given  in  Table  11.  and  the  section  following), 
the  imperative  most  nearly  coincides.  The  imperat.  Peal 
receives,  in  Yerbs  Med.  A,  between  the  second  and  third 

radicals,  Q  quiescing  in  — ;  but  in  Yerbs  Med.  E.  and  3 

Gutt.  the  middle  radical  takes  — ♦  All  the  remaining 
imperatives  are  like  preterits,  except  that  in  Ethpe.  and 
Ethpa.,   Linea   oocultans   stands  under  the  middle  radical 

7 

with  —  preceding. 

Rem. — The  same  holds  good  in  respect  to  the  imperatives  Ethta. 
and  Eshta.,  if  Linea  occultans  be  admitted  in  them 

2.  The  future  is  formed  from  the  imperative  by  prefixing 
J*     In  Aphel  the  characteristic  falls  away,  and  in  passives 

1  of  the  formative  syllable  2]  .  In  Ethpe.  and  Ethpa.  after 
the  rejection  of  Linea  occultans,  the  vowels  of  the  preterite 
re-appear. 

3.  The  infinitives  (of  which  the  simple  form  denotes  the 
gerund  in  do  or' the  absolute  state,  but  with  L  prefixed  de- 
notes the  construct  state)  are  formed  from  the  preterites  by 
prefixing  Lo»     They  end  (e'xcepT;ing  in  the  Peal,  where  they 

coincide  precisely  with  the  preterit)    in  Q,  and  in  the  apoco- 


56  THE  GROUND  FORM  PEAL. 

pate  feminine  form,  in  2q  ,    changing  tlie  vowel  of  the  last 
syllable  of  the  preterit    into  — ♦ 

4.  The  participles  are  formed  from  the  preterit  as  fol- 
lows ; —  in  peal,  active  form,  the  first  radical  takes  -2-,  and 
the  second  JL  ;  in  the  passive  form  ^^  is  inserted  between 
the  last  two  radicals.  In  the  other  conjugations  SiD  is  pre- 
fixed, and  _1,  in  the  second  syllable  of  the  active  form,  is 
changed,  in  passives,  into  _L»  But  this  distinction  appears 
only  in  the  absolute  state  of  the  masc,  and  even  here  is  lost 
in  verbs  3  Gutt.,  >,  and  ai,  the  active  form  of  which  like- 
wise takes  JL* 

5.  The  preformatives  of  the  fut.,  infin.,  and  part.,  mostly 
take  JL ;  but  in  Aphel  they  take  J-,  rejecting  the  1  accor- 
ding to  No.  2 ;  and  in  Pael  and  Shaphel  they  are  without 
a  vowel. 

Rem. — For  the  reciprocal  use  of  these  twoTables,  which  suffice  for 
the  complete  formation  of  the  regular  verb,  it  is  to  be  remarked  ; 
that  Table  I.  contains  the  personal  inflection  of  Peal.  The  forms  in 
Table  II.  in  the  inflection  according  to  Table  I.,  retain  their  charac- 
teristic vowels,  and  merely  take  from  Table  I.  the  aflformatives  with 
the  vowels  thereto  belonging.  Where,  in  pret.  Peal,  the  vowel  of  the 
stem  falls  away,  the  remaining  preterits  also  lose  the  vowel  of  the 
last  radical  syllable  ;  but  Ethpe.  takes  _L  over  the  first  radical,where 
this   has   JL   in    Peal.*     In  the  fut.  the  vowel  of  the  last  radical 

syllable  is  uniformly  lost  where  Q  falls  away  in  Peal,  except  that  in 
this  case  also  in  Ethpe.the  first  radical  takes  _!.♦  In  imperatives  the 

•X 

vowel  of  the  last  radical  syllable  is  retained,  as  Q  is  retained  in  the 
imperat.    Peal. 


§  20. 

A.     The    ground   form   Peal  —  its   Formation   and 

Signification. 

I.  The  usual  form  of  Peal  is  ^\4^  {transitive  verb  med.  Ä), 
Besides  this  the  form  with   _l   (med.  E)    is  always  used 

*Thc  iiiflectioQ  of  the  different  persons  in  the  preterit     should  be  noticed 
in  order  to  perceive  the  verification  of  this  remark.     Tk. 


ITS   FORMATION   AND    SIGNIFICATION.  57 

for  intransitives  ;  e.  g.  ^£it^  to  sit,  JD'^  to  be  near.  To  this 
class  also  belong  Verbs  ]l,  which  throw  back  —  upon  the 
first  radical ;  e.  g.  ,^  p  to  feel  pain,  or  derivatives  of  Hebrew 
Yerbs  ^y  ;  e.  g.  ^^X{>  =  ÜÜ-  ^ne  form  Med.  0.  still  ap- 
pears in  the  Verb  jQ2i£)  to  shudder. 

Rem. — With  the  inflection  of  Verbs  Med. A.  agree  those  with  3  rad. 
Ol ;  e.  g.  GlSbs  to  name,  OlLoZ  to  admire.  Verbs  Med.  E.  retain 
— ,  when  in  Verbs  Med.  A.  —  stands  in  the  radical  syllable.  In 
respect  to  the  forms  of  the  3  plur.  fern.  pret. « iNfeiD,  ,^  ■  Nf^  and 
^ji4^  adduced  by  Buxtorf,  the  first  is  found  only  in  Verbs  (J  and 
the  second  seems  to  have  originated  from  crasis  with  the  affix  —jtOI* 
There  are  instances  to  be  found,  though  rare,  in  which  —  is  placed 
over  the  third  radical  in  the  1  plur.  ^^Nfc^*  The  apocopate  form  of 
the  infinitive  with  Q  is  also  sometimes  found  in  Peal  ;  e.g.  Luke  ix. 
33.  a»;^V)\»  In  the  imperat.plur.masc.  with  ^  paragogic,  Q  final 
quiesces  in  _  ;  e.g.  »oNofi^»  Besides  the  2  plur.fem.with  ^,  Araira 
(p.  300)  adduces  another  form, viz :  « aNofcx)»  The  imperat.of Verbs 
Med.  E.takes  —  instead  of  Q ;  though  the  transitive  form  with  Q  is 
also  found ;  e.g.  Q^OpD  from  JD;£}*  Sometimes  another  form  with 
—  occurs  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xiii.  3.  r^l«  More  rarely  the  vowel  of  the 
imperat.  buffers  from  that  of  the  fut.  as  in  the  Verb  ^l*),  fut.  ^1 M, 
imperat.^1*  Not  only  the  imperat.  but  the  fut.  of  Verbs  Med.E.  and 

of  those  having  the  third  rad.  a  guttural,  take  — ;  e.g.  ;»»01»  In  the 
fut.  3  sing.  fem.  the  form  with  •->    attached  is  more  frequent.     A.lso 

a  form  of  the  fut.   with  — ;    e.  g.    -**^^^  together  with  la^Nl» 

Instead  of  the  part.  act.  ^^.^^j  ^he  participial  noun  of  the  fonn^\^^, 

emphatic  state  0—4^5  is  often  used.     In  the  part.  act.  the  emphatic 

state  masc.  and  the  absol.  fem.  are  alike  ;  e.  g.   |j-4^^    The  active 

form  ^1  »»•  (Mark  xiv.  67),  in  immediate  connection  with  ^ax9 
(verse  54),  is  perhaps  to  be  regarded  as  an  error  in  transcribing.  The 
passive  form  is  always  fully  written  ;    in  intransitive  verbs,    the  first 

7 

radical  sometimes  takes  — ♦  Passsive  intransitives  occasionally  occur  in 


58  DEEIVATIVE  CONJUGATIONS. 

an  active  sense,  sometimes  derived  from  transitives  ;  e.  g.     ^  .o^ 

hearing^    r^-*^l  holding. 

To  the  inflection  of  tlie  participle  belongs  also  the  idiom 
by  which  the  present  tense  is  expressed  by  abbreviated  per- 
sonal pronouns,  appended,  like-  afformatives^  to  the  partici- 
ple. But  this  formation  occurs  only  in  the  2  sing,  and  the 
1  and  2.  plur.  masc.  and  fern.,  and  is  as  follows  : 

Participle  Passive,  Participle  Active. 


COMM. 


MASO. 


w*Zi;4^'  2^14^  2  Sing. 

^ii^4^  1  Plur. 


^KLJ^  ^oAjJSlx^  ^aS^^         ^oZlJ^4^  2  Plur 

2.  From  the  preceding  remarks  it  appears  that  the  signiii 
cation  of  Peal  may  be  transitive  or  intransitive.  Sometimes 
we  find  both  forms  in  the  same  verb.     In  some  cases  there 

is  no  difference  of  signification ;    e.  g.    tm\\  and  »ff>sS   to 
chew  ;  and  in  other  cases  there  is  a  difference  in  signification; 

e.g.  «^th^^  to  divide^  *\V^^  ^^  ^^  divided. 


B.     Derivative   Conjugations. 

§  21.     Ethpeel. 
1.  The  characteristic  of  this  conjugation,    as  in  the  other 

passives,  is  the  formative  syllable  ^f  and  the  vowel  —  or  in 
Verbs  3  Ead.  Grutt.  _L,  in  the  last  syllable  (vid.  Amira, 
p.  278).  The  passive  conjugations  are  distinguished  from 
each  other  generally  by  the  vowels  over  the  radical  letters, 
or  by  the  addition  of  2  {Ethta.)  or  by  the  insertion  of  * 
{Eshia.). 

Rem. — Upon  the  transposition  of  the  sibilants  with  Z  see  §  12.  2. 
The  first  radical  takes  _L  in  the  3  sing.  fem.  and  1  sing,  pret.,  in  all 
of  the  imperat.,  in  the  2  sing.  fern,  and  2  and  3  plur.  masc.  and  fern. 


DEKIVATIVE     CONJUGATIONS.  59 

of  the  future,  and  finally  in  the  part,   excepting   the  absolute  state 

masc.     According  to  others  —  is  used,    but  only  in  Verbs    |l  even 

when  ]  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  Acts.  xx.  27.  AJ^IÄ»!";  ASi\«T^  This 
usage  however  is  confirmed  neither  by  examples  nor  by  Amira.  The 
3  sing.  fem.  and  1  sing.  pret.  the  imperatives,  2  sing.  fern,  and  2  and 
3  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  of  the  fut.  and  the  part,  excepting  the  absolute 
masc.  cannot  be  distinguished,  according  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  p.  217, 
from  the  same  persons  of  Ethpa.  excepting  when  the  first  radical  is 
an  aspirate,  which,  in  Ethpa.  becomes  hardened.     The  passive  form 

^^i^^^l  ^s  ^^^  mentioned  by  Amira.     In  the  Verb  «£Q£l4,  in  Ethpe., 

«^.  is  inserted  between  the  two  final  radical  letters.     The  infinitive 

however  is  excepted ;    e.g.  pret.  »CQ-iÄ^Zl ;  infinit.  Qm£i.^A!sO* 

2.  The  signification  oi  Ethpe.  is  ;    a)  passive  of  Peal;   e.g. 

^^,^^^1  5     ^)  reflexive;  e.  g.    JQaj^ZI   to  reflect  hy  or  upon 

ones  self;     c)   =  Peal  in  intransitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.    U^   and 

<  >  1  <^Z1  to  return ;     d)  sometimes  Ethpe,  is  passive  of  Aph.  ; 

e.g.     ^a-.iAs]  to  be  embarrassed,  from  ^Q^uil* 


§  22.     Pael  and  Ethpaal 

1.  Both  of  these  conjugations  are  characterized  by  _L  in 
the  penultimate,  and  j;;_,  in  Pa.,  in  the  ultimate  syllable. 
The  vowel  is  changed  into  _L ,  in  Verbs  8  Ead.  Gutt.  or  5, 
as  it  is  in  the  passive.  The  preformative  (  of  the  1  sing.fut. 
Pa.  alone  takes  JL  (comp.  §  19.  A.  and  B.  5).  The  imperat. 
Ethpa.  with  Linea,  occultans  and  the  part.  fem.  Ethpa.  are 
like  the  same  forms  in  Ethpe. 

Rem. — The  passive  form  ^^4^^]  does  not  occur  in  Amira.  It  is 
rejected  also  by  Buxtorf.  Amira  remarks,  p.  339,  that  in  XL»ajZf, 
the  second  radical  takes  —  only  in  the  imperat.  (vid.  Matt.  ix.  27). 
Concerning  the  part.  act.  and  pass,  in  Pa.  vid.  §  19.  B.4.     The  form 

I    7 

^'^  (Mark.  x.  16 )  in  pret.  Pa.  must  be  considered  as  an  incorrect 

X   7 

mode  of  writing,  since  ^*,r>  (verse  32)  is  a  participial  noun. 


60  APHEL    AND    ETHTAP2AL. 

2.  The  signification  of  Pa.  is  ;  o)  causative ;  e.  g. 
^iJsij  to  cause  to  he,  afraid^  from  ^x»j  to  fear  ;  h)  intensive  ; 
e.g.  Mfi^  to  overwhelm  from  M^i^  to  press;  c)  =  Pe.;  e.g.  >n«l 
and  *na1  to  hiss ;  d)  to  hold  forih^  to  declare  ;  e.  g.  «JDjl 
to  pronounce  just.  The  signification  of  Ethpa.  is  ;  a)  passive 
of  Pael  ;  e.  g.  ^^-4^21  to  he  murdered ;  h)  reciprocal;  e.  g. 
;lo>Zl  to  wonder  within  one^s  self ;  c)  =  Peal;  e.  g.  *2iajZf 
to  he  made  to  hlush,  i.  e.  to  6Zwsä  ==  «ÄQJ» 


§  23.     Aphel  and  Eihtaphal, 

1.  Aphel  is  characterized  by  \  placed  before  the  stem, 
which  quiesces  in  _!!♦  After  the  preformatives  of  the  fut., 
infinit,  and  part.,  1  falls  away,  and  its  vowel  falls  back  upon 
the  preformative.  JL  occurs  in  the  second  syllable,  and,  only 
in  Verbs  3  Rad.  Gutt.  and  J ,  is  _!.  found  in  that  syllable. 
In  the  passive,  to  compensate  for  the  loss  of  the  characteris- 
tic 1  of  Aph.,  Z  mit  Jl.  is  inserted  between  the  stem  and  the 
formative  syllable  of  the  passive  2]»  The  final  radical  syll- 
able takes  —  ;  e.g.  ^*^4^Z21» 

Rem. — The  characteristic  (  of  Aph.  is  retained  after  the  prefor- 
mative, in  verbs,  which  lose  a  radical  letter  ;  e.g.  ^.k.>jpO  from  ]jLm* 
Under  the  same  rule  should  be  placed  Verbs  p;  e.g.  «A^p  or 
•^(fil]«  But  the  Verbs  «.»aJ2Is|  to  he  ahle^  and  «aAsf  to  drink,  do 
not  belong  here,  since  _2^  already  re-appears  over  |*  They  are  rather 
forms  of  Pe.  with  (  prosthetic,  as  is  also  shown  by  their  further  for- 
mation  ;  e.g.  fut.  «axQaJ,  infinit.  n»»^«V)  (comp.  §  20.Rem.),  part. 
P.  »  ■'^*,  and  the  passive  «^j^Aa !♦  In  respect  to  the  participles  of 

Aphel  the  same  rule  holds  good  as  in  §  22. 1.  Rem.  compared  with 
§19.  B.  4.  Buxtorf  and  others  do  not  recognize  the  passive.  Lud. 
de  Dieu  p.  238,  approves  of  the  abridged  imperat.  with  Lin.  occult. 


SHAPHEL  AND  ESHTAPHAL.  61 

^i^^^^^l»     Later  Grammarians  however  doubt  the  correctness  of 
this  form  (Comp.  §  8.  Rem.). 

2.  The  signification  of  Aphel  is  ;  a)  causative  as  in  Pael ; 
e.  g.  ^A^l  to  bring  forward;  and  then  it  frequently  takes 
two  accusatives ;  e.  g.  «miü-L  to  cause  to  put  on  (something 
upon  some  one)  ;  h)  imperative  or  perrnissive ;  e.  g.  «JdoSl 
to  suffer  to  mount  a  horse ;  c)  intransitive ;  e.  g.  ^^Ja^o]  to  he 
weak ;  d)  =  Pael ;  e.  g.  ^^Ji* j  and  ^^J^jl  to  frighten.  The 
passive  has  either  the  passive  signification  of  Aphel  or  co- 
incides  with  Pe.;  e.g.  »sAa  to  dwell,  *oZoZZ|  to  keep  hoixse. 


§  24.     Shaphel  and  Eslitaphal. 

1.  Shaphel  is  one  of  the  conjugations,  admitted  into  the 
paradigm  at  a  later  period  (§  18.  3).  Its  characteristic  is  » 
with  JL  prefixed  to  the  stem,  and  _1  in  the  »last  syllable.  In 
inflection  it  coincides  with  Aphel.  In  the  passive  (Eshta- 
phal)  occurs  the  transposition  of  m  and  L  and  _L  appears 
in  the  last  syllable.  The  preformative  of  Shaphel,  like  that 
of  Pael,  takes  _L  only  in  the  1  sing.  fut. 

Rem. — In  verbs  which  lose  a  radical  letter,  this  conjugation  some- 
times  furnishes  a  new  stem ;  e.  g.  ^Omw»  to  he  blacky  from  ^QaaS, 
Shaph.  of  y>V)»t»  The  same  is  true  in  Eshtaphal.  Thus  J*jOA*1 
furnishes  the  new  quadrihteral  «jt^A»!^ 

2.  The  signification  of  these  two  conjugations  is  similar  to 
that  of  Aph.  and  Ethtaphal.  Sliapliel  is,  in  the  examples 
still  extant;  a)  causative ;  e.g.  ^ytp*  to  let  fall-,  h)  inten- 
sive ;  e.  g.  *<^\»»»  to  exchange,  from  «'^N»»  to  change.  Eshta- 
phal has  sometimes  a  passive  and  sometimes  a  reciprocal 
signification  ;  or  it  forms  intransitives  ;  e.g.  \y...>A*(  to  err, 
io   sin.  ^ 


62  OTHER  CONJUGATIONS  AND   QUADBILITERALS. 

§  25.  Conjugations  occasionally  used  and  Quadriliieral  Verbs* 
The  occasional  conjugations  (vid.  Agrell  in  Otiolis  Syr.  p. 
28  sq.)  are  similar  to  Pa.  and  Aph.  and  take,  for  the  most 
part,  their  signification.  They  are  also  to  be  considered  as 
quadriliterals.  To  verbs,  which  take  the  initial,  prosthetic 
letters  Lo ,  CD ,  Z,  and  are, 

A.  similar  to  Apbel,  belong  ;  a)  Maphel,  ,^^mV)  to  make 
pooTj  pass.  ^aOQSoZf  to  become  poor ;  b)  Saphel,  •jDCTi;CO  to 
permit  to  hasten  and  to  hasten  =^=  JDCny] ,  pass.  ^oJI^dAod]  to 
persecute ;  c)  Thaphel,  ,V)NZ  to  teach. 

Rem. — For  ^SOaCTI  (t-iA»]  vid.  §  23.  Rem.)  no  special  form  can 
be  assumed,  as  similar  examples  do  not  occur. 

B.  Similar  to  Pael  are  those  conjugations  which  insert 
i*.,  Sü,  r,  Ö,  after  the  first  radical  viz.;  a)  Panel  =  Poel, 
usually  transitive  ;  e.  g.  ''Ci..  to  chew  the  cud,  pass.  ijOoZl 
to  become  divided  ;  b)  Paiel,  transitive  ;  e.  g.  f*^-^  to  suffer  ; 
c)  Pamel ;  e.g.  ^mSn.»>  to  remain  :  d)  Parel ;  ^yiP*  to  dance^ 
pass.  ^>;..Z(  to  be  cut  off. 

C.  Not  very  different  from  the  last  are  also  the  quadril- 
iteral  verbs  with  prosthetic  *-»  and  final  ^,  viz.  ;  a)  Pali  = 
Pael ;  e.  g.  ^LlJ^  to  domesticate,    pass.  •.aAjlaZj   to  converse 

1»     7  7      7    .»-i> 

with  one ;    b)  Palen,  ^a-»>  to  be  master,   pass.  ^^»Z]  to  make 
one  a  master. 

D.  Here  belong  quadriliterals  with  a  radical  doubled  = 

*  7 

Pilel  and  Pilpel  ;  a)  Palel  =  Pael ;    e.  g.   Jr^^  to  reduce  to 
slavery  ;    b)  Pealel  with  its  pass.  y)Sv>\  mZ]  to  dream,    and 

n  -n  7 

finally ;  c)  Palpel  (in  Yerbs  Mii);  e.  g.  ^QCOSuflO  to  heal,  pass. 

7       7  J^'^ 

^;^)Z|  to  he  broken. 

Rem. — Those  verbs,  which  are  compounded  of  t^Vo  ground  forms, 

7         7,^  y  7 

also  belong  here  ;  e.  g.  ;S^c » |  to  blush,  from  MLd •  and  'fL •  ♦     In 

quadriliterals  formed  from  the  Greek  (e.g.  »n\A£)  to  elect  a  Bishop), 


VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS.  63 

a  letter  of  the   ground   form  frequently  falls  away ;  e.  g. 
yt'f^Si  to  appoint  as  Patriarch. 


§  26.   Verbs  with  Gutturals. 

Since  the  peculiarities  of  Guttural  Verbs,  are  not  marked 

in  Syriac,  as  in  Hebrew,  either  by  Daghesh  forte  or  Sheva, 
the  irregularities  in  verbs  of  which  the  first  and  second  rad- 
icals are  gutturals  are  entirely  wanting  ;  and  those  only,  of 
which  the  third  radical  is  a  guttural  or  >,  deviate,  and  those 
in  but  very  few  cases  from  the  regular  verb,  in  connection 
with  which  these  deviations  have  already  been  cited.  (Con- 
cerning Yerbs  |a,  K,  and  Xf  compare  §§  28,  30,  32).  For 
more  convenient  reference,  these  cases  of  deviation  are  here 
brought  together.  These  verbs  take  ;  1)  inthefut.  and  im- 
perat.Peal,  —  instead  of  Q  ;  e.  g.,  fat.  Jr"^  ;  imperat.  >^;  2) 
in  like  manner  in  the  other  conjugations,  and  in  the  part, 
act.  Peal,  they  exchange  the  _i  of  the  last  syllable  for  _L ; 
e.  g.  part.  act.  Peal,  'A^]'-  pret.  Ethpe.  •rSofZf,  fut.  '^]lj; 
Pa.  pret.  >p»,  fut.  j,a3,  imperat.  )p»,  part. act.  &  pass.  >r*^; 
Aph.   Pret.  M»>1,   fut.  ^p,     imperat.  ^>1,   part.  act.  and 

r       7 

pass.   M»^» 

Rem. — In  the  same  manner  in  Pa.  and  Ethpa.  are  formed  the 
following  ;  1*^  to  console,  ]So4  to  soil,  W  •  to  defile,  and  1  f^Zl 
to  be  adorned   (comp.  §  13.  1.  Rem). 


II.    Irregular  Yerbs. 

§  27.      General    View. 

1.  Under  Irregular  Verbs,  are  to  be  comprehended,  those 

in  which  there  is  a  change  in  respect  to  one  of  the  three  letters 

of  the  ground  form.     Such  letter  either  quiesces  ox  falls  away 

(Quiescent  and  Defective  Verbs).     A  verb   iu  which  two   let- 


64:  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

ters  of  the  ground  form  are  changed  is  said  to  be  doubly  an- 
omalous  ( Verbum  dupliciter  imperfectum). 

2.  The  Quiescent  Verbs  are  the  following ;  verbs  with  1. 
rad.  Olaph  (|a),  ^o^Of;  1.  rad.  Jud  (o^),  ,^;  med.rad.  Olaph 
(\l\  ^ji;  med.  rad.Yauand  Jud  {oL,^)  ^D  (y>QD),  ZulD; 
and  3  rad.  Olaph  (Uj  fl'^.  ♦ 

To  defective  verbs  belong  those  with  1.  rad.  Nun 
(_a);  e.g.  jaSü,  and  med.  rad.  doubled  (^);  e.g.  *QIDJ» 

Rem. — Here,  and  frequently  in  subsequent  sections,  the  designa- 
tions of  classes  of  verbs  are  taken  from  the  position  of  the  radicals, 
of  the  Verb  ^ijsÄ  (=  ^3?5),  by  which  the  variations  affecting  the 
radical  letters  of  irregular  verbs  are  kept  in  view. 


TABLE    OF    IRREG 


Verbs  M  ;  \iy%*  §  32.                                                     Verbs  ^1  ; 

Part.  Pe.     |   Imperat.  Pa.    |      Put.  Pe. 

j     Pret.  Pe. 

Pret.  Aph.  |    Imp.   Po. 

■»  p 
*** 

P     7 

0 

*** 

1. 

Part.  P.  Pa.  |   Imperat.  Pe.   |   Infin.  Aph.    |  Pret.  Ethpe. 

Part. Pass,  j    Imperat. 

***As2)  ***zi 

3PI.f.Fa.Pe. 

2  PI.  f.  Imp.  Pe.  1  3  f.  8.  Pr.  Pa.    3  f.  8.  Pr.  Pe. 

2.A. 
a. 

b. 

Fut.Ethpa.  1  Pr.  Ethpe. 

_iO**                L  o^  He 

Zo  :»;»: 

7     7        * 

***Aj 

2S.f.Pr.Pa.  1 

2Pl.f.Pr.Pe.   |2m.8.Pr.Pe. 

1  S.  Pr.  Pe. 

It            It 

Verbs  CIL  and  «-*.!; 

»JlZ.0** 

j^7                         ^7 

Zo*  * 

Par.Act.Pe.  |    Pret.  Pa. 

,1. 

*     o* 

3Pl.m.Fu.Pe  |  2  8.  f.  Fut.  Pa.  |  3m.Pl.Pr.Pe.  |  Sf.S.Pr.Pe. 

2.B. 

^.IIL\ 

7 

o  *  * 

S.  A.  a. 

Pr.  Ethta.    |  2  S.m.Fut. 

*r:2zi 

.IlLL 

Part.  Pass.    |    Infinit.     | 

*o*k) 

Verbs  Ml ; 

Par.Act.Pe.  |  Pr. Ethta. 

^1. 

*  o  * 

'tm 

Pr.Ethpa.   |  Pret.  Pa. 

*;:z] 

*   7 

ü  L  A  E 

VERB 

s 

— Vid.  pp.  51 

,63. 

^]i.  §  30.                     1                       Verbs  ja ;  ^t  §  28.                 j 

Fut.  Pe. 

1      Pret.  Pe.      |      |   Pret.  Ethpe.  |      Fut.  Pa.     j  Imperat.  Pe.  |    Pret.  Pe.    |     || 

y  * 
♦  *  *  J 

*** 

1. 

***zi 

1»          7 

♦^   7 

7   1> 
*   *  * 

i.l 

i 
1 

Future. 

1     Pr.  Ethpe.    1 

1     Infin.  Pa.     |     Fut.  Pa.     |  (2m.Fu.Pe.)  1  l.S.Fut.Pe.  j     i| 

***Aj 

1» 

2. 

^        "            7 

**oJ         (*Q*oZ)          *Q*o 

7     1                                   7        1 

2.1 
i 

Fut.  Pa.     1      Pret.  Pa.     |      |    Pret.  Esht.    |  Pret.Shaph.  |  Pret.  Ethtap.  |   Pret.Aph.  |     || 

■K    7 

1» 

•»      7 

**   * 

3. 

**o  A»*| 

7 

**oZZl 

'0 

*  *  o  1 

3. 

Ixio,  :>a^*  §  31. 

Verbs  wi^  ;     ^»     §  29. 

Part.  P.Pe.  i     Pret.  Pe.      | 

3f.  S.  Pr.  Pe.  1  Pret.  Ethpe.  |  Imperat.  Pe.   |    Pret.  Pe.   | 

*0* 

0 

1^ 

1. 

z:*; 

*:*2i 

r  I 

*  ** 

*  *  * 

7 

1. 

Future.     |    Pr.  Ethpe.    |      |  Imperat.  Pe.    |  1  S.  Put.  Pe. 

Infin.  Pe.     |    Fut.  Pe.    |     1| 

*o*zzi 

2. 

S.I. 

2. 

Fut.  Aph. 

Pret.  Aph. 

Pret.  Esht. 

Pret.Shaph.    |   Pret.  Ethta.  |  Pret.Aph. 

■*-x 

-■,.          3. 

*o*I 

**oZZ1 

.0 

*  *  Ol 

a! 

1 

Verbs  ^  ;   J^Zü.  I  33. 

Pret.Aph.  1      Pret.  Pe.     |       |     Fut.   Aph.     |   Pret.Aph.    |     Infin.  Pe.      |   Fut.  Pe.    |      i| 

(*)-»y 

(*), 

*     * 

1. 

*           7 
*    *    O  J 

*  *  o  1 

7         * 

7 

Pr. Ethpe.  |   Part.  P.Pe.    | 

II 

*I*il 

*   i^    ** 

2. 

VERBS.  67 

A.    Quiescent  Verbs. 
§  28.      Verbs  1  rad.  Olajjh  quiescent  (\2i)  vo]  to  eat. 

The  following  are  the  irregularities  of  these  verbs. 

1.  In  the  Pret.  Peal,  where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  first 
radical  has  no  vowel,  )  takes  JL,  but  in  the  imperat.  and 
part,  pass.,  it  takes  — ;  e.  g.  ^Qol ,  ^\^^1»  If  the  preform- 
ative  or  characteristic  consonant  of  the  conjugation  be  with- 
out a  vowel,  the  vowel  of  1  falls  back  upon  it ;  e.  g.  fut. 
Pa.    ^|j;   pret.  Ethpe.  ^]lt 

Rem. — In  the  fut.  and  infinit.Pe.  the  preformative  takes  Jl,  in  the 
verbs  j^i;  ^T,  Hi;^,  -rCol^jT  r-TryO;  e.g.  ^QolJ,V5oK 

But  —  is  used  in  the  verbs    j£l"  %t   *2L^,   ^X   r^X,    >«»1^ 

e.  g.  ;iO^,  ;Sd]Sd*     Both  of  these   forms    are  found   in  "{!!{*     It 

should  further  be  remarked  that  the  first  class  of  verbs  mentioned 

above,  form  the  fut.  and  imperat.  Pe.  like  transitives  with  Q,  excep- 
ting Verbs  3  rad.  Gutt.  or  >,  and  the  second  class  form  them  like 
intransitives  with  _!_♦  Lud.  de  Dieu  (p.  265),  rightly  doubts  the 
correctness  of  the   double  form   of  the  infinit,  and  fut.  Pe.  with  _! 

and  JL,  although  the  form  ^l|V^\   is  found  in   I  Cor.  x.  27  ;  but 

the  fut.  of  it  is  not  found  with  Q,*  Also  the  correctness  of  ^qXo|Z 
in  1  Cor.  x.  28,   is    suspected.     The  forms  of  the    3  plur.  fern.  pret. 

-  »N*^!  and  '^'^f  are  not  approved.  The  vowel  —  is  sometimes 
found   in   the   part.  pass.  Pe.  of  the  regular  verb  (§20.1. Rem.).   In 

the  passives  Ethpe.  and  Ethpa.  of  the  Verb  pMf,    (is  assimilated  to 

the  preceding  Z;  e.  g.  ^jaZZl»    This  formation  is  also  found  in  some 

other  verbs  varying   little  from  regular  verbs  ;    e.  g.   ^Ü)ZZ|    and 

2.  The  radical  }  usually  falls  away  in  the  1  sing.  fut.  Pe.; 

e.  g.  ^Qol  I  will  eat,  ;k)l  I  will  speak.  ]  does  not  so  often 
fall  away  in  the  other  persons.  The  same  peculiarity  ex- 
ists in  the  infinit,  fut.  and  part.  Pa.,  and  the  vowel  is  thrown 

back    upon    the    preformative  ;    e.    g.    *2l^   and   %2i^"ij» 


68  QUIESCENT  VERBS. 

Rem. — The  Verbs  ^1 1  to  go  away  and  f  Z|  to  comCy  lose  ]  in  the 
imperat.,  and  form  ; 

^{,      oil.      wilf,     ^{ 

^12,  oZ,  JZ,  12. 

3.  In  Aphel  and  Shaphel  with  their  passives,  ]  is  chang- 
ed into  ♦©,  and,    with   the   preceding   _L  ,    forms  au ;  e.  g. 

Rem. — In  two  verbs  f  is  changed  into  «.a,  viz :  fZf ,  Aph.  «-iAiftl, 
imperat.  iLif »  fiit.  1^  ,  infinit.  Oi^Liio  ,  part.  ]Li}jD.  (^]  , 
Aph.  ^S^liOl  =  p)2i<n  )♦  -^^^  ^^^^  reason  «jZL^I  and  «£i\a  to 
learn,  are  sometimes  found  together. 


General  Remarks, 

The  Verb  %i\  (according,  to  §  12.1 ;  §  15.2)  should  be  no- 
ticed in  the  following  persons  ;  pret.  3  fem.  and  1  sing. 
AllX  ^lf ;  flit.  2  fem.sing.  and  2  and  3  plur.  ^-AllZ^Q^lU, 
etc.;  part. fem. sing,  fll]  and  plur.masc.  and  fem.  ^-i-^lV,  ^it» 
In  the  signification,  to  he  of  use,  to  profit,  it  is  formed  regu- 
larly. Yerbs  whicb  commence  with  Oil,  like  Verbs  ^a,  as- 
sume the  vowel  and  throw  it  back  upon  1 ,  but  do  not,  like 
those,  reject  or  change  it,  although  this  latter  occurs  in 
the  Galilean  dialect,  which  had  but  a  single  character  for 
the  two  gutturals  (comp.  §  ].  Kem.  1). 

§  29.      Verbs   with  1  Rad.    Yud   \  *Jt2))  ^^    to   bring  forth. 

In  respect  to  these  verbs  it  should  be  observed  : 
1.  That  in  the  pret.  Pe.  even  when  transitive,  they  take 
2^  in  the  ultimate  syllable  (excepting  Verbs  3  Rad.  Gutt.) ; 


VERBS   1   RAD.   JÜD,    ETC.  69 

e.  g.  «^Aa  (^r*)*  If"»)  tliö  first  radical,  be  without  a  vowel, 
as  is  usually  the  case  (in  pret.,  imperat.,  part.  pass.  Pe.),  it 
quiesces  in  JL*  In  the  fut.  and  infinit.  Pe.  the  vowel  ^  falls 
back  upon  the  vowelless  preformative  ;  e.  g.  ,-k|j  ,  r-L^* 
So  too  in  Ethpe.,  —  falls  back  upon  Z  ;  e.  g.  r^-^^l«  But 
where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  first  radical  takes  a  vowel, 
these  verbs  are  regularly  inflected ;  e.g.  L^* 

Rem. — In  the  part.  pass.  Pe.,  besides  the  regular  form,  one  with 
—  appears  ;  e.  g.  >*^i  \i»  Only  «jDOU  takes  —  ;  but  where  the 
regular  verb  takes  —  over  the  first  radical,  — ,  with  Linea  occultans 
under  01,  falls  away  ;  e.g.  A^GLt*  Lin.  occultans  with  —  appears 
in  the  3  fem.  and  1  sing.  pret.  with  a  suffix  attached ;  e.g.  cnÄOCTL» 
she  hau  given  him  (AaCTU)»     In  3  plur.  masc.  and  fern,  under  sim- 

«V  7 

ilar  circumstances,  Lin.  occult,  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  «-lOIOSGLi  they 
have  given  him  (QJDOIa)» 

2.  In  the  fut.and  imperat.Pe.the  second  syllable  takes  J_» 
In  the  fut.  and  infinit.  Pe.  this  class  of  verbs  is  similar  to 
Verbs  la,  and  changes  a  into  I  which  quiesces  in  —  (vid.  1. 
above).  But  in  the  1  sing.  fut.  a  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  ^V 
The  imperat.  on  the  contrary  retains  a  ;  e.  g.  ,^» 

^    Rem. — Vi^  and  t^A^  follow  the  inflection  of  Verbs  ^  (§  33) ; 

*  7  •»  7-h  ^  t,  7    -^ 

e.  g.  imperat.  ^>  and  *oZ,  fut.  ^,J  and  «joAj,  infinit.  ^,.Sd  and 
«IDAlaO*  In  like  manner  *Q01  imperat.  from  «£^011»  follows  the 
same  rule. 

3.  In  Aph.  and  Shaph.  with  their  passives  u  is  changed 
into  o  (vid.  Yerbs  ]a,  §  28.  3) ;  e.g.  ^iol',  ^joi. 

Rem. — A  is  retained  in  m!»l  and  *ni  i]  ;  still  it  should  scarcely 
be  considered  as  an  irregularity,  since  from  ,JL»  appear  Pa.  ,^0, 
Ethpa.  ^0L\. 


70  VERBS   MED.  RAD.  VAU  AND   YÜD   QUIESCENT. 

§  80.      Verbs  Med.  Olaph  quiescent  (\L)  \i\M  to  ask. 

The  irregularities  of  these  verbs  occur  only  inPe.,Ethpe., 
and  Pa.  with  its  passive. 

1.  Peal.  In  the  pret.  f  quiesces  in  JL  and  the  latter  falls  back 
from  1  npon  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  ^]ii ;  but  when  ^  is  the 
third  radical,  it  quiesces  in  —  standing  before  T  ;  e.  g.  «aU« 
The  vowel  —  appears  in  Aph. ;  e.g.  \\»\*  In  the  imperat. 
and  fut.  Pe.  1  quiesces  in  — ;  e.g.  ^|ä  ,  ^"ImJ* 

2.  In  Ethpe.,  besides  the  regular  form  ^^iZ*) ,  —  is  some 
times  inserted  after  Z ;  e.  g.  *»)r::Zl^ 

Rem. — In  both  cases  metathesis  of  |  takes  place  ;  also  a  duplication 
of  it ;  e.g.  ^1,  ^]1  and  ^]2 ;    Ethpe.ai£il2l"and  **libl2]* 

3.  In  Pa.  and  Ethpa.  1  is  generally  changed  into  ju  ;  e.g., 
tOi  ^  and  ^ClL^L]*     The  other  verbs  retain  "j ;  e.  g.  ^1A»]I 

Rem. Both  forms  are  found  from    1 1  •   (\\i  •  ]  and  ]^^  •  l)» 


§  31.      Verbs  Med.  Bad.  Vau  and  Yud  quiescent 

(oi  and  wii»)  ^ao  (i»OQ£))  to  stand  up,  A>Vn  to  die. 

The  verbs  whose  middle  radical  letter  is  Q  or  ju,  and  whose 
grammatical  structure  generally  agrees  with  that  of  the  reg- 
ular verb,  differ  from  the  same  in  the  following  cases  : 

1.  In  the  pret-and  infinit.Pe.  of  Verbs  Ql,  the  vowel ap- 

pears  in  place  of  Q,  which  is  dropped ;  e.  g.  ^QjD,  ^onk)»  In 
the  part.  pass.  Pe.,  and  in  the  other  conjugations  generally, 
Q  is  changed  into  jl,  and  quiesces  in  _!.  in  the  part.  P.,  Pe., 
Ethpe.,  Aph.  and  Ethtaph.;  e.g.  ^QjdZi,  2>Qx£)ZZ1,  JxIad],' 


VERBS   MED.  RAD.  VAU   AND   YUD   QUIESCENT.  71 

On  the  coutrarj,  ^  is  movable  in  Pa.  and  Ethpa ;  e.  g. 
Ullo,  ^>alol]*  In  the  part.act.  masc.  of  Pe.,1  (=y,  vid.  §1. 
Eem.  4),  which  has  arisen  from  Q,  goes  over  in  the  other 
inflections  into  a  ;  e.  g.  ^(o  masc,  |V)in  fern.  Only  in 
the  imperat.  and  fut.  Pe.,  Q  remains  and  quiesces  in  _L  ;  e.g. 
^QOJ,  in  which  cases,  as  well  as  in  the  pret.  (in  Yerbs 
•-*A),  o.  appears  and  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.  g.  A.kLo ,  i»Qa^nj* 
Finally  the  preformatives  of  the  fut.  Pe.  have  no  vowel,  ex- 
cept the  1  sing.,  which  takes  —  over  1 ;  e.g.  ^ao]* 

Rem. — In  Pe.,  Ethpe.,  Aph.,  and  Eshta.,  verbs  of  this  class,  which 
are  at  the  same  time  P  (§  32),  as  (oL  and  some  others  which  can  be 
referred  to  no  particular  species,  as  oaOr,  IQiD,  retain  Q  movable. 
Some  are  inflected  in  both  ways,  but  with  a  different  signification  ; 
e.  g.    JO]    to  take  a    handful,  Aph.     'fu]]    to  deviate  from  the  way. 

0  r 

The  Verb  ^020,  contrary  to  the  rule,  takes  a.  in  the  fut.  and  imperat. 

But  Zul£>  follows  the  inflection  of  Ql  Verbs  ;  e.g.  fut.  ZoSaj»    The 

imperat.  of  «OOQa*  to  spare,  takes  —  (.fOn),  with  the  signification, 
far  he  it.  In  some  manuscripts  Jl.  is  found  in  the  preformatives  of  the 
fut.  and  in  the  infinit.  Pe.,  which  manner  of  writing  was  received  by 
the  ancient  grammarians,  and  which,  as  is  testified  by  Amira,  p.  311, 
the  Mandaeans  used  on  account  of  metre  (vid.  Lud.de  Dieu  p.  292). 

2.  In  Ethpe.  i  of  the  formative  syllable  Z]  is  doubled ; 

e.  g.    >»Qjlo2Z%     By  this,   the  transposition  of  the  sibilants 

does  not  occur  ;  e.g.  MilZZl»  When  three  Z  come  together 
in  the  3  sing.  fem.  and  2  sing,  and  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  fut.. 

one  Z  is  omitted  ;  e.  g.  ^cl»-dZZ»  The  occurrence  of  three  Z 
together  is  unavoidable  only  when  the  verb  itself  begins 
with  Z,  in  which  case  four  Z  would  properly  come  in  succes- 
sion ;    e.  g.    ^oloZZl   Ps.   Ixii.  10,   from  ^Z»     Ethtaph. 

differs  from  Ethpe.  merely  in  signification  ;  e.  g.    ^CuSll\ 
Ethpe.  to  raise  one!s  self  Ethtaph.  to  he  token  away. 

Rem. — tCfi  I  g^ZZ I   to  he  convinced,   Ethtaph..   from    «£CLx2)|  ,   is 

usually  written  «rfii^^Zl» 


72  VERBS  8   RAD.    OLAPH   QUIESCENT, 

3.  In  Aph.  the  preformatives  of  the  fat.,infinit.,and  part., 
lose  the  characteristic  JL ,  excepting  the  1  sing.  fut.  ;  e.  g. 
UJ-1^1»  The  part,  pass.,  contrary  to  the  analogy  of  other 
part,  passives,  changes  a.  into  —  ;  e.g.  ^OQSd,  to  distinguish 
it  from  the  active  form  y^iOV)  ♦ 

Rem. — No  example  is  found  of  Shaphel. 


§  32.    Verhs  3  rad.  Olaph  Quiescent  (]]j  j]-..  to  disclose. 

These  verbs,  which  include  the  Hebrew  jj^i  and  f^^^erbs, 
are  different  from  the  regular  verbs  in  the  following  cases. 

1.  The  third  radical  ]  either  quiesces  or  is  changed  into 
•a*  Here  it  should  be  remarked  that  the  pret.  Pe.  ends  in  ]-; 
e.  g.  ll-y« ,  the  other  preterits  in  *a;  e.g.  Ethpe.  %-A.t2]» 
The  futures  of  all  the  conjugations  end  in  ]- ;  e.  g.  Pe. 
fj-.ip.j ,  the  imperat.  Pe.  in  wil.  ;  e.g.  «-»--^if ,  imperat.  Ethpe. 
in  «-1.-  ;  e.g.  «.i^..Z( ;  the  other  conjugations  in  p- ;  e.g.  Pa. 
|J-...*  The  termination  of  the  infinit.  Pe.  is  the  same  ;  e.g 
-<|.-^«  The  other  conjugations  in  the  infinit,  end  with  O»— ; 
e.  g.  Aph.  CLiA.|^So ,  the  participles  generally  with  ]- ; 
e.  g.  Pe.  U-yi—  Only  the  part.  pass,  of  Pa.,  Aph.,  and  Shaph., 

ends  with  w»- ;  e.  g.  Pa.  w^-^^.^j-Sd» 

Rem. — Some  verbs  with  «ia«  (*a^)  in  the  pret.  Pe.  are  inflected 
like  the  other  preterits.  Here  belong  mostly  intransitives,  or  Verbs 
Med.  E. ;  e.  g.  «^.^^CD  to  he  great.  Both  forms  are  found  in  the 
Verbs  (SQa  and  «iV)a  to  swear.  The  imperatives  of  this  kind  of 
verbs,  take    «.k.   at  the  end.     Some  verbs  with  3  rad.  He.,  seem  to 

7  I  7 

belong  here ;  e.g.  OISD«  to  name,  Pa.  «>V>»>     Some  grammarians, 


VERBS   3   EAD.   OLAPH  QUIESCENT.  78 

without  proof,  derive  from  the  imperat.  Ethpe.  the  forms  )J...Z(  and 

|J-.iL|»  The    Verb  1 001  has  two  forms  of  the  future;  e.  g.    (OOU 

and  fOOlJ»    In  the  formation  of  the  present  tense  in  connection  with 

the  pronoun,   the  part,  takes  «jk.   quiescent,   instead  of   f. ;    e.  g. 

Aa10>)SD   for   tS\  \]Oy\liD*      From  ]l£D  to  hate  appears  a  double 

form  of  the  part.  pass. ;  e.  g.  {ICO  and  (ilfin»  The  former  refers 
more  particularly  to  things,  and  the  latter  to  persons. 

2.  When  a  letter  or  syllable  is  added,  1  is  either  changed 
into  a.  or  falls  entirely  away. 

A.  In  the  first  case,  jt,  is  a)  movable  in  the  pret.  3  sing. 
fern,  of  all  the  conjugations  excepting  Pe.  of  verbs  ending  in 
]L  ;  e.g.  Ethpe.  AlS..Zf  (  Pe.  AS..  ) ;  in  the  second  form  of 
8  plur.fem.  ;  e.  g.  Pa.  ^-»-i-^.. ;  in  the  2  phir.  fern,  of  all  the 
imperatives ;  e.  g.  Pe.  ^^i  iN>t ;  in  the  2  and  3  plur.  fern,  of 
all  the  futures ;  e.  g.  Ethpe.  ^jl^^iAj  ;  in  the  fem.  sing, 
and  plur.  of  all  the  participles ;  e.  g.  Pe.  |j>^yi ;  and  finally 
in  all  the  infinitives  except  that  of  Pe. ;  e.  g.  Aph.  o^.^^ 
(Pe.  |J-.^k)) ;  ft)  A  is  quiescent  in  the  1  and  2  masc.  and  fem. 
of  both  numbers  of  all  the  preterits,  and  in  such  a  manner 
that  a.  in  Pe.  (excepting  the  1  sing.  A^.t )  quiesces  in  — ; 
e.g.  A^y. ,  .oAa^.i*  In  other  cases  ju  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.g. 
Ethpe.   A^..ZT,    ^oLäS^yM, 

B.  1  falb  away  in   the    3   sing.  fem.  pret.  Pe.  of  Verbs 

^0  0  Alf  • 

ending  in  }-.  with  —  retained  ;  e.  g.  A-^\\  '  ^^  ^^  ^  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.  pret.  Pe.,  and  in  the  3  plur.  fem.  (in  the 
8  plur.  masc.  Pe.  of  Yerbs  «-&J^  and  of  other  preterits,  *a— 
remains)  of  all  the  preterits  ;  e.  g.  Pe.  Q^ii ;  in  the  fut. 
throughout  in  the  2  sing,  fem.,  while  the  regular  form 
^  is  changed  into  ^ ;    e.  g.    Pa.  ^-i^.tZ,    and  in   the   2 


74  VERBS  3   RAD.   OLAPH  QUIESCENT. 

and  8  plur.  masc.  ;  e.g.  Pe.  vP^vjT^  5  ^^so  in  the  2  sing.  fern, 
imperat.,  where  w»  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.g.  Pa.  ^yi »  ^^^^  ^^  ^^'^ 
2  plur.  masc.  imperat.,  where  Q  quiesces  in  —  ;  e.  g.  Aph. 
Q^y,') ;  finally  in  the  plur.  masc.  of  the  part.,  where  the  reg- 
ular form  ^A—  is  exchanged  with  ^a«  ;  e'.  g.  Pe.  ,  »^^  !i 

Rem. — Instead  of  Pa.  and  Ethpa.,sometimes  the  quadriliteral  form 
«-»öi^yi  appears.  The  3  plur.  masc.  pret.  oLyi  (with  paragog.  Nun 
^OQ^..)  occurs,  sometimes  with  |  retained  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xxviii.  2. 
^00(;£)»  But  the  form  Ol..  which  Buxtorf  adduces,  is  neither 
confirmed  by  examples  nor  found  in  Amira.  In  all  the  conjugations 
excepting  Pe.,  the  3  plur.  fern.  pret.  differs  from  the  3  sing.  masc. 
only  by  taking  Ribui  (vid.  §  6),  for  which  Amira  (p.  266)  in  verbs 
ending  with  «a.  ,  and  in  Pa.  of  verbs  ending  with  ^ ,  writes  a 
double  a  ;  e.  g.  *  i  »^yi*  In  the  imperat.  Ethpe.,  besides  the  form 
given  in  the  paradigm,  occurs  the  2  plur.  fem.     >  '       a    I 

General  Remark. — Verbs  )]  or  «.».L,  which  are  at  the  same  time 

|l  (comp.  §  30.  1),  are  inflected  like  Verbs  ]]  ;    e.  g.  pret.  Pe.  «jilJ. 

Zufl,  AaV,  ^AaV,  plur.  Olli,  etc.,  infinit.  l]Ik),  imperat.  JO,  JQ, 

etc.,   fut.  IpJ,    plur.  ^OUJ,  etc.,   part.  act.  fU,  pass.  1|J,  Aph.  pret. 

«a|j]  and  «-i^l,  infinit.  QafJSo,  imperat.  JuX  fut.  %a|jJ,  part.  %a|jSd* 


APPENDIX  TO  §  32. 

Inflection  of  the  Verb  \1j^  to  live. 

In  the  Verb  \xm  with  a  movable,  a.  is  rejected  when  the 
first  radical  and  the  preformative  are  without  a  vowel ;  e.  g. 
infinit.  Pe.  V>iD  for  )a.*j>1o»  Sometimes  this  verb  takes  } 
between   the  preformatives  and  the  first  radical;     e.   g. 


DEFECTIVE     VERBS.  75 

V^lüiD  (better  perhaps  ^*]2i)),  fut.  ]i»J  for  ]jLmJ  and  with  ] 
inserted  iCU*(j,  Aph.  pret.  ^a^\,  infinit.  naM.V)  or  Qj.AiPiD, 
fut.  twJ  and  pap,  imperat.  ]ja(,  part.  t»xk)  and  p^pi)« 
a.  also  falls  away  when  no  preformative  precedes,  and  its 
vowel  falls  back  upon  the  first  vacant  radical ;  e.g.  imperat. 
Pe.  «i  »*  for  «>  ■  .I»,  part.  fern.  J^-**  for  (>  >  »i»  The  form  ^|-m 
(Matt.  XV.  27)  is  found  in  the  part.  plur.  masc. 


B.   Defective  Verbs. 

«  7 

§  83.    Verbs  loith  the  first  radical  Nun  (^)  «n^l  to  ^o  ow^. 

The  irregularities  of  these  verbs  are  the  following  : — 
In  the  fut.,  imperat.,  and  infinit.  Pe.,  and  in  all  forms   of 
Aph.,  the  first  rad.  J  falls  away  ;  e.  g.  joqslj,  *£)Q2),  «n*^V), 
*Q2)(»     The  fut.  and  imperat.  Pe.  sometimes  take  —  and  — : 
e.  g.  *rimj,  ^^>^* 

Rem.  —  The  exceptions   to  this  rule   are  ;    a)   Verbs  Med.  Rad. 

7  p 

doubled  (§  34) ;  e.  g.  ^J  ;  6)  Verbs  Med. Rad.  Quiescent;  e.  g.  *2ü  ; 

*  ,7  •       '       "" 

c)  Verbs  Med.  Rad.  01 ;  e.  g.  JOIJ,  fut.  901U«  Those  verbs  whose 
third  radical  is  #  or  Z,  are  not  changed  by  assimilation,  as  in  Hebrew; 

»  7  ^  -X .         -ft 

e.g.  ^XIQaOI  we  have  believed^  tOZAwJ  ye  have  descended.  TheVerb 
»nmi  to  mount  up^  takes  its  pret.  and  part.  Pe.  from  «nVciO  (vid.  § 
35.2).  Upon  retaining  the  characteristic  ]  in  Aph.;  e.g.  P|Z  forpj. 
Comp.,  §  23.  1.  Rem. 


§  34.      Verls  with  Med.  Rad.  doubled   (Ml)  «ma>S    to  sprinhle. 

In  respect  to  these  verbs  it  should  be  remarked  : — 

1.  That  the  middle  radical  falls  away  in  the  pret.,  infinit., 


76  DOUBLY    TRREGULAK   AND    DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 

imperat.,  and  fut.  (having  —  over  the   preformative)   Pe. ; 

e.  g.  pret.   «DdS  ,  infinit,  jao*^ ,  fut.  *CDOp ,  imperat.,  *0DOK 

Also  Aph.    and   Shaph.   with   their  passives;   e.   g.  «JDOif, 

»flOjZZI»      The    part.     act.    Pe.   takes    1    in    place    of   the 

middle  radical,  which  has  fallen  away ;  e.  g.  ^ßo]) ;  but  1 
falls   away   again   when   a   syllable  is   added ;    e.   g.  plur. 

li^M. — Those  verbs  whose  2  and  3  rad.  is  ( ,  an-  exceptions,  and 
are  inflected  according  to  the  rules  for  quiescent  verbs  (§  35.  1.  d). 

In  the  fut.  and  imperat.  Pe.  forms  with  —  (not—)  appear;  e.  g. 

****J ,  ^*      The  part.  act.   Pe.  has  ^*^P^  in  the  plur.  from  the 

Verb  ^\l  to  go  in.  In  the  part.  Aph.  sometimes  the  middle  radical 
appears  again,  but  it  is  marked  by  Linea  occultans ;  e.  g.  Heb.  ix.  5, 

^1  WqV)»     In  Aph.  the  characteristic  f  sometimes  remains  after  the 

preformative;  e.  g.  onM^Q^  from  «nn»  (Comp.  §  23.  1.  Rem.). 

2.   The  part.  pass.  Pe.  *£CLi^i  ,  Ethpe.,  Pa.  and  Ethpa. ;  e.  g. 

*mm>Z| ,  «mnn?  ,  are  regularly  inflected,  with  the  retention 
of  tlie  middle  radical.  Instead  of  the  last  two  forms,  how- 
ever, Palpel.  and  Ethpalp.  (§  25.  D)  are  more  in  use;  e.  g. 

Rem. — The  last  remark  holds  good  also  of  Shaphel,  which  occurs 
more  rarely  (Comp.  1.  above). 


§  35.    Doubly  Irregular  and  Defective  Verbs. 

1.  By  Doubly  Irregular  Verbs  are  understood  those  in 
which  occur  two  of  those  letters  which  usually  give  rise  to 
irregularities.  In  the  inflection  of  these  verbs,  either  one 
or  both  of  those  letters  may  retain  their  peculiarities.  This 
class  of  verbs  consists  of  (vid.  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  340,  sq.);  a) 

Verbs  ^  and  ]] ;  e.  g.  ]xxij ,  Aph.  *jlCd]  to  approve ;   b) 

Verbs  ]z>  and  11 ;  e.  g.  ]l]  to  come^  Aph.  ^^A**! ,  ]aOi]  to  heal^ 

Pa.  .jXdI  ,  |a1  to  boil^  Ethpe.  *j^W  ;  c)  Verbs  J^Si  and  ]J ', 


BOUBLT   IRREGULAR  AJiD   DEFECTIVE   VERBS.  77 

e.  g.  "liol  to  swear ^  imperat.  ^xSOji  ,  fut.  ]io]j ,  infinit.  \s?^ , 

Aph.   «■*,V)ol  ;   Iia   25ö  sprout^  imperat.  ^aJ»^  ,  Aph.  ^a^oI 

and  «.i-Vi]  ;     d)  Verbs  li  and  fl ';  e.  g.  1  p  ^ö  (?^^<7ö,  imperat. 

»ji^D ,  infinit.  lloSo  \  Jf^  to  he  displeased^  Aph.  J2L* 

2.  To  Defective  verbs  (see  Lud.  de  Dien,  p.  34:4:)  belong 
the  following,  in  so  far  as  they  occur  in  the  language,  either 
in  individual  forms  only,  or  have  borrowed  their  defective 
forms  from  synonymous  verbs,  or,  finally,  vary  from  the 
regular  verb  in  inflection  and  interpunction.     a)  Impersonal 

Verbs.      From   %ojl    to  he  hit^   occurs  only  the   part.  act. 

,r5jl  it  hefits.      From   tPD   appear  the  3  sing.   fem.   pret. 

Aj]Sd  it  is  disagreeahle^  the  part.  act.  fem.  pJiD  and  ttie  3 

sing.  fem.  fut.  /ISolZ ;  and  from  llo  and  IV»  appear  the  act. 

part.  l]o  and  It  it  is  suitahle. 

b)  The  following   defective  verbs,  are   completed   from 

others  which  are  synonymous :  «oNffi  to  mount  up^  part, 
act.  tiOKm ;  the  other  tenses  of  this  verb  are  formed  from 
*acaj ,  imperat.  *QDO ,  fut.  •.om.J ,  infinit.  «nmV» ,  Aph.  *qcd|  , 

*       7  7     7-7. 

part.   >r>rr>Vf>  ^  Ethpa.  ^q^AodV     A  similar  complement  is 

7  y 

found  in  JOOI^^  to  give  (see  §  29.  1.  Rem.),  imperat.  .Ä01 , 
infinit.  ^Äd  ,'  fut.  ^£S  from  ^L  ,  Ethpe.  ^cul]\ 

c)  Those  which  differ  in  form  and  inflection  are  %^ölj, 

to  run,  imperat.  .u^JOl ;  ^l]   to  go  away  and  ]l]  to  come 

(see  §  28.  2.  3.  Eem.) ;  also  looi  to  he  (see  §  32.  1.  Rem. 

and  §  38),  fut.  locu  and  loou ;  also  from  looi  is  found  a 

fut.  apocopate  lou  ,  loiZ,  plur.  tOOU  ,  etc.,  having  the  signi- 
fication of  the  conjunctive  as  well   as   of  the   usual   future 

(comp.  Agrell.  Otiola  Syr.  p.  46) ;  lA»  to  dririk,,  with  ] 
prosthet.  ^Lm\ ,  imperat.  *aA»1  ,  part.  lA»  ,  fut.  lAmJ  ,  infinit. 
lAnlD ;  ^1 ,  Aph.  ^ia»oi  to  helieve  ;  V»>*  (see  App.  to  §  32), 
to  live.  Finally,  in  four  verbs  3  rad.  Olaph. ;  e.  g.  "1*0 , 
]Uii,  lU,  laZ)  (1>Z),  which  merely  occur  in  Pa.  audits 


78  DOUBLY  IRKEGÜLAR  AND   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

passive,  the  second  syllable  qniesces  in  _L,  as  in  Yerbs  3 
Gutt.  (see  §  13.  1.  Kern.),  and  1  is  retained  in  all  of  the 
tenses  and  moods,  while  its  vowel  falls  back  upon  the 
preceding  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g.  3  sing.  fem.  pret.  i^o* 
The  formation  is  as  follows  ;  pret.  Pa.  *^Q ,  part.  V^füSo , 
infinit.  o]inV) ,  imperat.  \jlO  ,  fiit.  \jl^3  ,  Ethpa.  U-oZl , 
part.  VLb^,   infinit.  o|IiAi ,   fut.  llr^Aj» 


80 


PARADIGM  I. 


like   \Ethtaphal. 


'51 

u 


like    Aphel. 


.~^  ->v4  »s^  r>g 

^•s^    .rvi    .r-i    ^«^ 


p^-,  f=^,  «i^,  *^, 

•^  "^       'vl       •^ 

.rvj  .rvj  ,;v4  t.«^ 

t.^<i)  ix-^  ""-^  ""-3) 

■^  i  <!  4 


ä 


q 


^^    .^ 


'^c 


I'V 


4 


^5{ 


'"^     f 

^   , 


^v|       ^vl       »v|       --si 


•^ 


1 


<  - 

.q 

1/ 

^1 


-Q 
f<^ 


-q 


-   ^o 


n 


•>si    ^    JvT    ^ 


"I 


Q      Q 

^9^      1/ 


I 

a 

3 


"I  if 


Q    -g 


1 


J  d  y  • 

•^      <      <3 


'•^ 


'  'A  'A 


%.% 


Q    ' 

-;:5    vj    ^    y\ 

'^'^     <i     <i     <4 

1 


1 


'J 


^Q     a 


Q 


't 


■<o  ,    1 


V 

i 


•^ 


«4-' 

d 

J,' 

5ä 

c 

«*^ 

s 

"U-3 

c5 

s 
^ 

1 

g 

f^ 

(M 

1—1 

L^ 

CO 

00 

CI 

c? 

I— ( 

_J1 

Ol 

c^ 

'■3 


-•\|        JiVj       ,*vJ         t^- 

^  ^  ^   ::J 

f  ■?  i  ■# 


q 


ivi    t!vj    r:4 
Q 


'3 


f^       ;^      f«^      '^r-- 
•^       »^       'vj       ^ 


^q  :g 


•^  •>g  »vj       r 

■^q  "^q  "^q   "^ 

'#  #  -^  ': 

1  ^ 


% 


a 


r^    p«vi  p'vi    V-- 

Vv|      >v4       »^      *^ 


"-J-- 


q 


^ 


1 ' 

f^    r^    r^    ^*rr 


r^    r^   «rvi    rj- 

1 


'-3 


1  1  '"3  M   0 


#1 


*6 


%/ 


Q     q 


In 


^•3 

c 

5?   -fea 


=.  1 


'^  :^  cj  cj  '^ 
4.  n  d  V 


-q 


|i|'; 


■I 


S3. 


^  ^^  ^::^  c:j  '^ 

^ q   e^q   t«. Q 


1  'I 


c     a 


-  a  "^ 


1^ 


CO      CO         c^ 


^^   CO       OD  C^  (M  !-< 


82 


PARADIGM   II. 


f ! 

1  A 

o 
a 

?  1 

2 

'3 

00 

5                                      ^ 

*'«—   *"«—  *'*^-  ^*^-   ^<— 

?j    ?4    ..^    -'^    r^ 
o      o      o      o      o 

•-3  '4  '^  'ä  -\ 

-a 

o         o 
o            ^ 

% 

'1 

'    'o^      O      o 

d 
<d 

i 

1 

i^^    i^    .-^    «^    «^^ 

.^  5T  -^   i^  -;:i 

f  ^;!  i  I  ^\ 

^d  ^d 

1 

'  1  :l  '^ 

1 

1 

f-  ^         f-  ^             f                  6                  f                  f 
^S^        -^^        '^        r^        "^ 

^*—  *"«—  •<—  «—  W- 
r^   -^li  ^  r^   r-i 

■1  n  .1  s  ^ 

?    '^      1  1  1  1 

%  if  1 1 H 

1 

1 

^1      '1 

1          a)    CO             CO             C>»             CJ             r^ 

Q^    CO       CO           C^            (>4           T-l 

t , 

Verbs  First  Ead.Olaph, 


88 


o 


o    9. 

n 


o 


.r-i    r-i    ^    ^i     <i     <    ^    r^  < 
o      o      o    «^^^  ;  "^    <!^      o      o  "^^ 


^    rn-:?  4 -I  4=^-1 


1 


■I 


■^ 


■a  -a 

o     o 


o    o 

•lit 


d       o      o      o      o 


^3  ^3  'a  -^^3 

4  -4  i  P 


*"  rj   ^p  r^  fNj  «= 'S 

-<.   ».;2.   -"^    ivj  •;< 


3  ^^ 


fi2 


Jq/n  '^t;j-:^  ?i  -i:!  t-ö  "-^  "^  ?i  ■v^r-S 


p;^ 


—  1     ^ 

:^  :^  c^  a:^ 

1 1 1  m 

% 

V 

.1-4  1 4-* 

'^2 

52 

J    .9  ^9  J\  J 

:a  tJ.  y.  ^'^ 

44  4  •4;! 

;^   CO              CO           <M           C^          rH 

^  CO      CO          <N          <M  rH 

a-  § 

jl^ 

84 


PARADIGM   III. 


^ 


^ 


o 


n. 


O 

•4. 


•^      «^      'vl 

^^       ^-vj       cf-vj 

o      o      o 


o 


A.  n.  ^-4.  n 

rvsl  «^  »Vj  «^ 

1 


w. 


o 


o      o      o 

-4  n.  ^-4. 

1 


o 

?4 


•^   r^    "^   r^    "^ 

^5     ""i     "-^     ""1    ■'^ 

H..  .4,  vl.  4.  ,-4 


o 


-4.^, 


►•vl      *v|      •>>!      ^vj      -vj 

.rv|     tTvi     ,rv|     tTxj      »«vi 

O        O        O       O        O 

n.  ^-4.  n.  n.  n. 


't 


-   .o^ 


T/  'T/ 


I 


'3 
«4. 


O 

n. 


n.  ^^. 

-4/ 


o 

'■4. 

o 


o      q 

H.  '-4. 


'i 


o      o 

'^.  '-4. 


1 


o      9 

?4.  ,^. 
1 


•^         «VJ 


1 


4.  An.  4. 

•^     "^     »^ 

1 


I 


a:i:4.:l;l 


1 


O 


'i 


:  1      '^ 


t»-  N^  t»-  t.-  ,.- 

;4  t^  H  t4  H. 
t 


:  1      -^ 


^^O 


I  "4 


n 


1 

n. 

o 


«•N    i^ 


'rj.4. 

i 


1  "^ 


■1-i 


:i 
1 


U. :-!.  U.  H-  'A 


*N|  «^ 


1 


1^ 

a^  CO 


4. 4. 4. 

o    =1 


o 


'•4.  '4. 

1/  "T, 


v1 


A.  A. 


feS 


s 


CO       CO 


Verbs  First  Rad.  Jud. 


85 


o 


'•4. 


o    9 
o     V 


o  'oT 


°  1/ 


<  t-^  t-vi  Si    :;:-i 

-^      o    "o      o    -^ 


'^  '^  c:}  d'^ 

1  ''^  3  X^ 
-J.  4,  :^-  4>n. 


'a  '^  '^  'S  :ö 
'•4.  '^.  n.  -^.  -4, 


'  1  ^  '"^  'i '? 

'-i.  >l.  -4. 1  ^4 


n    »^sj    »^    "^    «— 
J    ^^    ^^    ^1    ^1 

H..  H.  H.  h4.  h. 


/ 


1  ^5  "^  "2^3 
4..  4,  ^.  s4.t4. 


:^  '^  ':::)  d'^ 


^1  a.  ;4.  H.^. 


■I -I 

n.4. 


9  "o 

n.-4. 


I 


■il 


'I 'I 

o    o 


«^ 


"•4.r4. 


'I 'I 


'^  '^    I  <    C:j    Qi    «^Icj    H*^ 

^A:A:  a.  4.  H.  a.  n. 

°    V  4^-         t 


H    -1     H    -I 


1  :^  a  5:^:^ 
a.  /I.  A.  ä:ä. 


'I 'I 

Ha. 


'13.    H*^     H*^     H*^     /rr  ;  ^Jl    '■rIL    h^     h^  ''^ 

^^.  ^^.  ^^.  /I.  ■^i  ^..  4, 4-  .^•^^• 


•    G      v4  S 


CO       CO  Ol 


d  rH 


'4./1. 


1"^ 


CO       CO  <M  <N       rH 


äi 


a.(^ 


86 

PARADIGM  IV. 

'^    '^   '^    5    '^ 

Ü  ^^  a  :£  a 
^  ^^  ^  ^  '^ 

•<—    '«—   '«—   '«—    '«-T 

.:=j  .::j  .::i  .:^  .^ 
il  ^il  ü  ü  4 

'1 
1 

'I  5  3  s  ii 

,  1  ^4  -9  ^  '^ 

ä  -;!  {5  'S  'S 

3  .1  ^  .4    1 

'1 

•^■^ 

o    ^ 

^      ->4      'vl      ^      ->J 

^•vp      h-»i)      ^.-Si)      ^-sb      e^-ü) 

'q  j  'i  i  i 

f           fr""-     f           f           F 

^  'H  ^  ^  ^ 
Jo,  -•s>  «Cq,  ,^  ,v^, 

«  =1  g  i  '. 

'1 
d 

1                           t             ' 

q    c 

r  -^    «^    -^    ^  i^ 

i  tci  :£  t^  :^  -^ 

1  ^4  ^  ^  '^ 

1 

f            <             f            f            (■ 

^         Cgf         C4           -vj           »Vj 

:ii  ü  ;a  4  4 

'1 
il 

^3 

a, 'I 

"-sp    •-■>4>    "«Jl    "S)    -M" 

.^-sp     u-vp     '"-vp     ''•vp     t-vp 

1  :|  i  :J  •'. 

5i 
a 

11 

'  =^  .:|  :^  .4  a 

1 

l£  Jil  :il  <il  'il  Ä 

3  =1  :i  J  14 

^•^^•f 

1'^  '^  '^  '^  f^ 
'r^   "^  r^   '^   "^ 

14  4  4  'ü  3 

^                  1 

1 

^    ^    J^    ^   r^ 

ü  il  il  il  4 
3  =1  4  ,^  r 

'1 

il 
^3 

.  '4  'il  '^  '^  'il 

^                  1 

'ü  ü  il  il  il 

3     :^      4     .4        1 

'3 

1 

n 

la^    CO       CO           (N           C^           r-H 

Q^   00       CO           (N           (M           r-l 

e 

'S 

Fer^s  ific/.  Bad.   Olaph  Quiesceid. 

87 

n 

'-3  «Pi  pi  fi  '^ 

f^  ^^  ^^  :^  ^:ä 
1  ^  ^  1 1 

a  a  «  «a 

31 

!ä  a  !a  '4  '1 

'i  'i  'j[  ^^a 

31 

.  I  >  \ 

^4  ^  '^  '^ 

ä 
1 

n 

I^  '^  '=^  ':::}  r^ 
.a  :^  :^  ^^  ^4 

1     ^ 

'-3  '^  q  '::i'^ 
'ii  :ii  va  ^^'-^ 

C  'C 

n     -vi     «vj     .>>4     %- 

t.-c±     ►.-si)     h.-vl>     N<^     t^M> 

"^  X     "^^T*     "^"S*     «^"^^^  '"'*^  * 

.44 

'4 '4 

31 

1  a  a  ;^  -^ 

'Ü  :il  :£  ^ü'i 

1-3 

tl 

^^    r^    r^   f*^    «— 

<l        >vj        *^       '^-vl        «-«4 

•^  .^  .^  a  -^ 

1   1"    ^ 

%  %  %  %% 
A  °r  ^l  '\  ' 

■i'i 

n 

■|  3  3  3  5 

1     1     1  "^     1 

1    ^ 

=-^1 

11 

^   C^l   (^ 

1[^   Ot       CO          CI          c 

c5 

g   CO       CO          <M          GO       ^ 

i{- 

88 


PARADIGM    V. 


rvl  -V|  'Vl  -^  '^ 

•V4  -vj  -vl  »^  -^ 

hQ      hQ      hQ      hQ      ^C 


.1. 


V  ^-i 


"Q    »^q    hQ    hq 


'I 


'^ 


CO 
CCK> 

"1 


-n4         »^         rvj        »sg         .^ 


1 


i; 


^  ^  '^    '^   r::^ 
.Q   -q   -q   ^q   ^q 

^3    '^A    '^A    '^ A    '^ A 


Hq 


•^    «^    »^ 

•vj     -vi     »»g 


H  Q 


•^ 
•^ 


•^ 
•^ 


H  n 


•^ 
•^ 


*^q 


'I 


v'-i 


^ 
•^ 


•^ 
•^ 


5 


.q    .q    .Q 


ä^   CO       CO  (M 


CM  t-( 


'i 


O 


1 
Ä 


^9 


5»'  a 


1^ 


Verbs  Mid.  Bad.  Vau  and  Jud. 


89 


hQ    hQ 


'^     '"^      '^      '^      H 


'^    '^    -^    *— 

Q         H^         HQ         HQ 


^'s    p*^    r^    /^    "«— 

<      VvJ      '-sj      Qj       -vi 


'^  ^^  ^::J  ^:::|'^ 

•^      "^     un     .n   'vi 


q    "Q 


M 


Ml 


3  ^g  h'q  h'q  hO 


^^ 


'I 'I 


--4       -vj       ^      V-- 


1^lfJ|1:|5 


'^  '-3  cj  '::^'^ 


'I 'I 

5} 


"V^ 


g  --a  .-a  -a  la 


^  ^ 

t 


::i  ^  !  ^  !^  '^  :>!  ::i 


liM'^i^ 


^ 


'^  '^  cj  C:)'^ 


•I 'I 


•^       »vj       «--4       rr- 


n      ^      «^      »>g     ^«— - 

I  ^3  '8  ^g  1 


% 


^a    ^ci    ^o    ^o 


^  ^  ^  "l^i.i'^4"^^ 


Q^  c^  (M     ^  CO     CO       <M        cq 


^    CO       CO  (M  <N       rH 


^1 


1^-     g 


90 


PARADIGM    VI. 


1 


i^   »^    »vj    ^^4 


r^  ^'-"^ 


"1  d  "j  "i  ^ 


CO 


-f -j  =3  =3  '1 


--j  ■  j  =3 1  '^ 


■•i  ■:^  =^  ^  d 


'vl        'vj        »vj       *v|        'Vj 

1  "1  "1  a  "t 


1  ^,  ^  3  -I 


i 


V 

I 


V 


■1^ 

:3 


1  "1  a  a  % 


^  ^^  .^^  -s^-^  t^h.  t??'^  t^-^  t?^'-^  ^"  ^-^  ^ 


H  %  n  1 


51 


•vrw'Vi^"i^'~v^,^%-'v 


■^■11^.^ 


■I 


"^^    •      1/1 


--1 ::!  ^  =^  W -^  d -I 


V-     ^^'^ 


% 


'Ia 


Q^  CO      CO         <M         <N         '-'      £ 


Ü  I  y  S   ««J      s 


CO       CO  <N  <M  »-1        Kg        LS   CI       C^ 


Verbs  Third  Bad.  Olaph. 


91 


f  f 


u: 


% 


"^H  •-  '1  a 


f  I 


;=L     ;=L     ;=>• 
1 


% 


Vr!^ 


3  : 


a 


f  I 


"I 


^^     f^4     pj3 


■%■ 


Bra 


ii 


'I  'I 


't  '-!  u  'y]  i-i  y\  y\  ^  y\  f  \ 


't44i. 


n 


'J  'I 


3  '^  y  '4  a  '-1^  a  C4  .i,  ^  a  :/:^^  ^^-.^^ 


V^:^ 


% 


n 


S3.   :=»^ 


r^i 


'»s-Tfi    jsJ    \  y\  y\  y\  ^Ji 


CO      CO  <M  (M  r-l 


:^44.4 


^*   03      CO  (N  <M 


«21 


92 


PARADIGM  VII. 


-vi 

q 


'vj  »vj  'vi  "^ 

rv|      ^rv|     ^^  «vj 

61    -61    .61  61 

1 


^a  '-^  '^ 


-61 

^8 


^1 

SI. 

q 


»^  -^  «-vj  «^  •^. 

cTvi     j^      »vj     ,rvi     ^ 
■^61    .61    ^.61    -61    -61 

a 

d 


'.     ^O 


't 


V  -1 


'I 

-61 

.3 


rvi 


% 


'ä"  *¥  '"^  »si^  ,3 


•^6]    fQ    «=61    f61 


3 


J^    "vi     '^     5^     f^ 


^  H   ^  "^  r^ 

:a  «^a  ^a  r 


Pü  ^3  «3  ^3 

I  q  '^  ^  ^ 


<      f      f      f      f 
1^   ^  ^  ^  J^ 


f6 
C 


'^  '1 


q     c 


^o 


3  :; 


^6 
C 


2       v:        c5 

1 0^   CO       CO  (M  <N  i-H 


gs 


•Vj  «VsJ  .>^  .^  »«Vl 


■i 


I 


't 


v-^-v 


^  a    «*4       S      «4-:       ^       J 

^  CO      CO         (M         (N         '-'      '    .  Si 


-vl     .^ 


J  4 
q  ^ 


'S 


Verbs  First  Bad.  Nun. 


'J 


f    D        «*^        /^        c*Vl        •"«— 

1  '^  1  \  1 


^v4       ,!VI       r^       / 


^ 


•^    «^vj 


:^  <^  -:::{  ^  'f? 


:^  \^  '^ 


:^ 


^^ 


iVl        pM 


t 


! 


'I  '4  '^  ^"^^1 


n 


-vi      «^4      -s^      ^*— 
er?     ^«3     ^.^     «^n  I 


f 


•^   -^ ..; 


<c^       1/         I    T  «=>^. 


^  f-T     <i    Ci    C4   '^    ^ 


f 


*^  ^^  C!  ci^^ 


<x^ 


^^ 


■1:1 


n 


q   q  ^  q  '3^  ^  '3,  ^  9 
f  


L-s«--     s 


^(NfMf^COCO  (M  C^  '-' 


^  CO      W         C^         c 


"6 


iJ5^ 


94 


PARADIGM   VIII. 


CO 


.4 


^ 


'i 


»>s|      -vj      »>«4      'vl  «^ 

.-g    ^-vi    r^    r-i  «^"^ 

^  -I  I  -i  'I 
1 


f.rs       »^      f» 


q   ^1    I    I   'I 


•^  .>s|  »^  "^  »vj 

tuvi  ^v|  ,rv|  ^-M  ,rvi 

•  r>  «^.»N  «^»rs  '^•'^  ^•r^ 

1  ..^  M  M  I 


•  *N        f«!?         f»*N         c'^^         f»'* 

'  (,       -      'I'  ^t 


4 


•'t 


I 


J 


1   1 


^  1 


r  'I  ^1  r  H 


«^    «^»^    b,»^    b«^    u»^ 
fl    ffl    .fl    ffl    f 


'V"^  ^'1 


% 


I-. 


Q      «A    '^•' 


f^_    f         f         f         f 
»vl     ^    ^    ^    ^ 

^Q       Q     (=a     «:a       a 


•*v|     «^     «^     »vi     «^ 

•  r\       ••^        ••>       •r>        »»s 


"  '«i^   V  ^O- 


H 


'I 


••^      M«J 


^  'I    I    J  'I 
1 


*9\       .rs      %< 


e     :^      I     .1       ^ 


9    9 


I Q^   CO       CO  <M  (M  rH 


qI^  CO       CO  (M  (M  r-^ 


4  k^  ^ 

S    IS 


Verbs  Middle  Bad.  Doubled. 


95 


?4   -"^ 


a 
t 


1 


■I' 


•'^     *^     ^^     ^^*^ 

^•Vl  ^^         \fS         %rN      »Vj 


•^1   r>i    .f^ 

^  ^  ^ 

'^  '::J  Ci 


CS  (■ 


I 


? 


"^   -vi   -vi  r;; 


f 


1       •^        -»si 


f 


•:::i  =7 


n 


^  q  ^ 


1 


:1  'I 


<N  C^       rT   0?      CO         (M 


Vi 


'-3   '-3  CJ  Cl'^ 


^3 


a 


Jf  '3-  .:s  ^■:s  :2- 1  ^  51  '  a  51 
9  3  ^a  a  -a  a 


'^  '3  <:!  ^'-S 


'I; 


'H.  '71  ri  Ci"^ 


>>    CO       CC  O^  (M       ri 


t»^ 


^§ 


96     PARADiaM  OF  THE  VERB  WITH  DIACRITICAL  POINTS. 


PAKADIGM  OF  THE  YERB  WITH  DIACRITICAL 

POINTS. 


(  Compare  §  4.  Rem.  ). 


3  m. 


Preter.  Sing. 


^H^ 
^Ho 
^U^ 


Plur. 


Fut.  Sing. 


Plur.     ^oHi^CiJ  ^Ql^OJ 

Imper.Sing.  m.  ^Q^^  ^Q^O  jPlur.  m. 


*    3/. 

Al4o 


2  m. 


1    c. 


Al4o 
Ai4o 
Alio 


A14Ö 
A140 
A140 

I  ^q14^Z|  ^q^oj 


Infin.      ^J>4^nlD  ^Jy^nSo  ^^^^ülD  ^^y^^ik)  oSf^oV)  etc. 


Part.  Act.      ^\4^  m.  V^^  f^  jPassive  ^^U^D  ^^u^O  ^\jl^ 

^H^iSd       I  ^4oAi  ^5)4oASo  ^J^oAk) 


Rem. — ^The  forms  of  the  verb  wliich  are  omitted  in  the  foregoing 
lable^  are  not  marked  with  diacritical  points,  since  they  may  easily 
De  recognized  from  their  formation. 


VERBS    WITH   SUFFIXES.  97 

§  36.      Verbs  with  Suffixes. 

The  union  of  verbal  forms  with  suffixes  is  much  more 
simple  in  Syriac  than  in  Hebrew.  It  should  be  remarked 
in   general   that  the  vowel  of  the  first   or  second  syllable 

either  falls  away ;  e.  g.  —  in  the  3  fem.  and  1  sing.  pret. 

and  Q  in  the  fut. ;  or  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  falls 
back  upon  the  preceding  consonant ;  e.  g.  in  the  same  per- 
sons of  pret.  Pe.  in  which  —  of  the  first  syllable  falls  away. 
The  verbal  endings  «a  and  O  quiesce  in  —  and  — *  Verbal 
forms,  unless  they  terniiruite  with  •u.  and  CL. ,  remain 
unchanged  before  the  suffixes  .QS  ,  ^j^»  Also  the  character- 
istic vowel  of  the  first  syllable  of  Fa.  and  Aph.  remains 
unchanged,  and  the  suffixes  of  the  3  plur.  are  attached  to 
verbs  in  the  form  of  separate  pronouns.  In  respect  to  the 
particular  persons  the  following  should  be  remarked  (see 
Table  of  the  pronouns,  §  16.  and  table  of  the  verbs,  with 
suffixes,  §  36). 

A.      Preterit     with  Suffixes. 

_    y  *^  *      ^ 

3  sing.  masc.  ^^4^  before  the  suffixes   ^QO ,  ^-i^  m  the 

2  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  The  other  persons  ^^y^^  with 
sun.  a.  1. 

3  sing.  fem.  Al^n  before  ^QO ,  ^»  The  others  Ai^ 
with  sutf.  a.  1. 

2  sing.  masc.  A^^  unchanged,  and  by  way  of  exception 
with  suif.  c. 

2  sing.  fem.  ^Al^O  is  changed  into  ^Al4o  with  suff.  b. 
1  sing.  com.  ti^  forms  Al|^  with  sufi".  a.  1. 

3  pirn-,  masc.  ol^  becomes  oi^^'  with  suff.  b.  or  with  ^ 
parag.,  excepting  before  ^  ,  ,^*  ^ 

3  plur.  fern,  wii^  either  ^^  with  sutf.  c.  or  with  , 
parag.  ^-»A^» 


98  FUTURE  WITH   SUFFIXES  . 

2  plur.  masc.  and  fern',  and  1  com.  retain  the  forms 
.oAl4^,  ^Al4o ,  ^JiixD  with  suif.  c. 

Rem.— The  3  fern.  2  masc.  and  1  com.  sing,  in  some  forms  with 
suffixes  are  only  distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  diacritical 
point,  which,  in  the  tirst  person,  stands  over  the  consonant  (vid. 
§   4).     Verbs  Med.  E.   with  suff.  follow  the  form  of  Verbs  Med.  A., 

and  retain  —  where  the  latter  retain  — ;  e.  g.  3  sing.  fem.  l±^£^ 

with  suff.  OlAl^^.  Yet  the  form  OlÄSOMi  occurs  in  Ps.  cxviii. 
167,  instead  of  which,  since  no  similar  example  occurs,  the  punctua- 
tion should  perhaps  be  —.♦  The  same  is  the  case  even  in  Verbs 
Med.  Olaph.  Quies.     So  the  vowel  —  belonging  to  ^l»  is  changed 

into  —  over  Ol^^A  ;  but  in  the  1  sing.,  —  remains ;  e.  g.  ^A^]a« 
In  respect  to  verbs  1  rad.  (  and  j^  quiescent,  it  should  be  remarked, 
that  where,  in  the  regular  verb,  the  first  radical  is  without  a  vowel,   | 

retains  its  —  and  a  its  — ;  e.  g.  OlA^f^     But  where,  in  the  regular 

7 

verb,  ~^  stands  over  the  first  radical,  this  class  of  verbs  retains  it  in 
the   same   manner;   e.  g    jlo|  with  suflf.  Cn^iSDf ,    |N   i    with   suff. 

V,\   I»      Defective  verbs,  or  those  with  Med.  Rad.  doubled,    retain 
—  in  the  pret.  unchanged,  like  the  form  ^^4^*     "^he  3  fem.  and  1 

f>  7  7  t\  -K  7 

sing,  change  —  into  — ;  e.  g.  Adj  with  suff.  01  Aoj ;  but  they  remain 
unchanged  before  »QO  and  ^oJD  ;  e.  g.  iQ2AO)*  Pa.  and  Aph.  retain 
the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  unchanged.  In  respect  to  —  of  the 
second  syllable,  it  should  oe  observed  that  where  Pe.  retains  — ,  Pa. 

■"  7 

retains  — ;  but  where  —  falls  away  or  falls  back  upon  the  first  sylla- 

ble ,  —  is  lost.  The  3  sing.  masc.  and  3  plur.  masc.  and  fem.  in  Pe. 
and  Pa.  with  sufl'.,  are  hence  all  similar,  and  can  only  be  distinguished 

from  eacli  other  by  their  signification  in  the  context;  e.  g.  OlX^O 

(from  ^^4^  ^^  ^^4^)*     ß"t  these  forms  are  exceptions  to  this  rule 

when  standing  before  tQ2  and  ^a^^* 

B.     Future  with  Suffixes. 

Throughout  the  sing,  and  in  the  1  plm-.,  Q  ,  which  has  been 
inserted,  remains  unchanged  before  the   suffixes   tOO   and 


IMPERATIVE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  99 

,-aS»     Before  the  other  suffixes  it  falls  away,  and  the  form 

^^4^  takes  the  suff.  a.  1. ;  but  if  the  suff.  is  in  the  3 
person,  only  the  suffix,  a.  2.  is  used.  The  other  persons 
are  treated  according  to  the  rule  laid  down.  In  the  plur. 
the  2  and  3  niasc.  and  fem.  remain  unchanged  with  suff.  c. 

Rem. — «.A  parag.  of  the  3  sing.  fem.  falls  away,  and  is  connected 

with  the  sutf.  after  the  form  \s.^L*  What  is  true  of  Q  in  Pe.  is 
also  true  in  Pa  in  respect  to  the  falling  away  of  the  vowel  of  the  Last 

syllable,  excepting  before  ^QD  and  ^aI)*  In  the  3  sing.  masc.  with 
sufF.  of  3  person  masc. ;  e.  g.  «jQlOiNf^ni ,  -«  appears  sometimes 

over  Q.*  But  this  form  is  neither  mentioned  by  Amira  nor 
by  Sionita.  The  2  sing,  sometimes  takes  ^  before  the  suflf.  of  the  1 
sing,  and  plur.      The  same  is  true  in  respect  to  the  imperat. ;  e.  g. 

« >  I  iZoldZ  |J  put  me  not  to  shame.     In  Verbs  Med.  E.  the  middle 

radical  retains  — . ,  and  in  Verbs  3  Gutt.,  —.*  This  peculiarity,  Amira, 
p.  389,  refers  exclusively  to  quadriliterals ,  i.  e.  to  Aph. ;  but  examples 

are  also  found  in  Pe. ;  e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxi.  9.  ed.  Erpen.  « i1  iO0*^»Z  |J  , 

ed.  Paris.  -  »i<^o^7  ^  and  in  Pa.  Ps.  cxviii.  172,  ■  »1  i*^\Z»  Amira 
adds  that  this  form  is  found  particularly  in  prohibitory  negations, 
which  remark  is  likewise  confirmed  by  the  examples  given.  The 
persons  of  the  fut.  with  ^   remain    unchanged.      But   it  should   be 

remarked  that  if  the  form  ^oSfcni  takes  the  suff.  of  the  3  per.  sing. 

masc;  e-  g.  -  >nn»  ir>V^rM   sometimes  #  falls  away;  e.  g.  Matt.  viii. 

25,  «aOIO'HuUn 

C.     Imperative  with  Suffixes. 

The  2  sing.  masc.  \SQ^  remains  unchanged  with  suff.  a. 
2.  of  the  1  per.  sing,  and  plur.,  and  of  the  3  sing.  fem. 
When  the  suff.  is  in  the  3  sing.  masc.  the  form  of  suff.  c. 
is  used. 

In  the  2  sing.  fem.  of  the  form  ^O^^  with  suff.  h.^ 
quiesces  in  — .♦ 

In  the  2  plur.  masc.  Qi:^a4D  passes  into  a^ao  with 
8uff.  b. 


100  INFINITIVE   WITH    SUFFIXES. 

The  2  plur.  fem.  is  rare,  and  omits  #  before  the  suffix. 

Rem. — The  imperative  with  —   and in  Pe.   and  in  the  other 

conjugations,  retains  its  vowel  unchanged ;  e.  g.  -  '^  Avr>^  ^^^u^  ^^^ 
«-iCn>  \*^n  receive  him.     The  forms  of  the  imperat.  pass.,  with  an 

~  7        T> 

active  signification,  also  remain  unchanged ;  e.  g.  ^>M  ^^  reminded^ 
with  suff.  •aJLk'f^JL}*  In  respect  to  the  transposition  of  Q  in  the 
jjlur.  it  should  be  remarked  that  1  of  Verbs  |2)  (§  28.  1)  loses  its 
vowel  _*       But  in  those   \£i  Verbs   whose  imperat.  does  not  take 

•X  7  * 

Q ,  this  vowel  is  inserted  after  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  Or^l  with  suff. 
^OlO^lDOf«     Yet  this  transposition  of  Q  does  not  always  take  place, 

as  the  form  t,>JO\0(>Q  sometimes  occurs.     In  Pa.  and  Aph.  —,  in 

y  -x  7       ^  o.  7 

Verbs  3  Gutt., ,  falls  away;  e.  g.  0i.»O»   with  suff.  «aOlOM^QA 

prnise  him,  o\no|  with  suff,  >-i01Q\*^0|   lead  him  hither.      Verbs 

|l  are  an  exception,  as  they  retain  — .;  e.  g.  t^kJQ£D|.^|  do  me  good. 

Also  a  form  with  .  parag.  sometimes  occurs ;  e.  g.  tQ^Q^O  with  suff. 

P  -xt      ,        -x  ^ 

%Aaia.JaA4^^^*  1"  t'^^  ^®"^-  P^""*'  ^^^  paragogic  form  is  the  more 
usual ;  but  in  Pa.  and  Aph.  both  forms  occur  together. 

D.     Infinitive  with  Suffixes. 

7  -»> 

The  infinitive  Pe.  ^4^Sd  with   suff.  a.   1.  remains  un- 
changed before  the  suff.  of  the  2  per.  plur.     The  suffixes  of 

the  other  persons  are  attached  to  the  form  ^4j^k3.      But 

.   .  .        .  .        *' 

the  infinitives  of  the  remammg   conjugations  with    a   are 

treated  as  feminine  substantives,  the  feminine  suffixes  of 
which  (those  of  the  3  plur.  excepted,  which  are  attached 

separately  to  the  form  with   Q)  they  take,  attached  to  the 

termination  Zo-  (Compare  §  45.  2.  and  §  48.  B.  feminines, 
declension  1). 

Rem. — In  Pe.,  where  —  of  the  second  syllable  falls  away,   some 

grammarians  insert,  in  its  place,  — ;  e.  g.  OlNfcnV^N»     Buxtorf  adds 

yet  two  other  forms  with  Q  a  Q  inserted  after  the  third  radical ;  e.  g. 


PAKTIUIPLES    WITH    SUFFIXES.  101 

>mr>\^oVr>  ^nd  «^OloNf^nV)»     If  the  vowel  be  — ,  as  in  Verbs 
GlL  ,  it  remains  unchanged  ;  e.  g.  QlVnoVflN» 

E.     Participle     with  Suffixes. 

Participles,   which   are   considered   as  nouns,    take  their 
suffixes.     This  occurs,  however,  more  rarely  in  the  part,  act, 

where  either  prepositions  are  used  ;   e.  g.  v^ ,  ^^i\n  who 

seek  thee^  or  a  noun  formed  from  tlie  participle  is  joined  with 

the  suffix;  e.  g.  jA  supporting^  OljO,^  his  helper.  On  the 
contrary  participles  with  separate  pronouns  (vid.  §  18.  -t. 
Rem.),  or  with  afformatives  (§  20)  form  the  present  tense. 


102 


EEGULAR   VERBS    WITH   SUFFIXES. 


Proper  Form. 

Sing.  ]   c.   '         2  m. 

i 

2   f . 

Pret.    Pe.  )       ^^ 
Sing.  3  m.)         ^^ 

.4jX4ß 

>»i^ 

,inVf)jD 

3f.                    JbS^O 

^ujZli^ 

j^'AL^ 

woAL^o 

2  m.                  t^4^ 

^2^14^^ 

* 

* 

.  >  1  »Aa^j;^ 

* 

* 

1  c.                   Al^ 

# 

;ai^ 

^^^^ 

•■ 

*jlDq!L4o 

i 

1     .A^ 

1 

2  m.              .o'Al^ 

.  » 1  ioAV^^p 

* 

*              ! 

2f.             ^Al^ 

«ajjITa!!^ 

* 

*              1 

Ic.                   ,Ji^ 

» 

.A^ 

«inlSfi^Q  1 

Infinit.            ^Jy^^Q!^ 

-»jX^qId 

^K(^n^ 

^AnVfc^QLo 

I"P-ing.)      V^a^ 

* 

*             ; 

1 

?,  f            *An^o 

.»IiKq^T) 

* 

* 

» i  in\4sia 

* 

# 

2  f            ^^\nt\n 

0    •-^  «^. 

* 

i 
1 

1  ^--^^^ng.}    ^4a3 

woX^ni 

Y%i^ 

^ijol^ni 

^jq14qj 

Pret.  Pa.           ^5y^ 

..A'fco 

>.i^ 

^Zol^nV) 

^Zol^nVo 

^ZqI^So  ! 

EEGULAB  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


103 


3  m. 

3f. 

Plur.  1  c. 

2  m. 

2  f . 

aCi^ 

01^4^ 

^ 

yOsLin 

.  kri\i\n 

ait\^ 

oiii^ 

(tH^ 

.qdAS4d 

^AlL4o 

oi^^l^ 

(t^n 

* 

* 

•^Gf1GuA^k4^ 

ouAl^ 

^'av^ 

* 

■X- 

OliM^ 

oiAi^4^ 

* 

^Al^ 

>«^AVAr^ 

1      «^aial4^ 

1 

^3Cl^^O 

»  ?  «.t    .  7 

«,     0  ...-h     7 

a  ^VA'o 

ouoAL^ 

^o^Al^ 

* 

* 

^^fn « 1  «AxAr^ 

oiL»A^4^ 

^'Al^ 

* 

* 

^aiA.iX^o 

oiilk^ 

* 

•  ni^Ao 

oiS(^nvl 

oill4^ 

^S4c^ 

^inSt)nvt 

^olJLq^o 

olJ^o^^ 

■X- 

* 

^CTICL^Q^^ 

ou^q4^ 

^i^O^D 

* 

* 

«aOIQ^QO 

.o\^on 

* 

* 

^C71CuX4qJ 

oiSa4^ 
oiL.Sa4o 

* 

* 

aL..!^4^ 

44^ 

■^onLo^nJ     ^»nSo^QJ 

«-*01aJq!^QJ 

oijQ^Qj 

^jol^oj 

QHJol^OJ 

oCi^ 

ciL^ 

,^ 

^a:iL|!D 

ctZqI^qSo 

^"ZqI^  \QS^ö^4cik) 

104    SUFFIXES  TO  VEftBS  WITH    THIRD  KADICAL  OLAPH  QUIESCENT 

§  37.     Suffixes  to    Verbs  with  third  J^adical  Olwph 
Quiescent  (]])♦ 

Verbs  ]J  (§  32)  differ  so  widely  in  their  mode  of  connection 
with  suffixes,  from  regular  verbs,  as  to  demand  a  separate 
treatment.     It  may  be  remarked  in  general : 

1.  That  the  termination  X^  either  loses  ]  ,  as  in  the  3  sing, 
masc.  pret.  Fe.,  or  in  the  sing.  masc.  of  the  imperat.  Pa., 
Aph.,  Shaph.  with  suff.  c ;  or  1    is  changed  into  wi.  movable, 

as  in  the  infinit.  Pe.  with  suff.  a.  1,  excepting  before  #00  , 

— aO  ,  where  the  ^  which  has  arisen  from  |  also  falls  away, 

accordino:  to  some.      So  the  termination  of  the  fut.   L.  is 

IS 

chano^ed  into  .»-  with  suff.  b. 

2.  Forms  which  end  in  «^  either  omit  —  entirely,  and 
connect  the  suff.  a.  1,  with  jl.  movable,  as  3  sing.  masc.  pret. 

Pa.    and   Aph.   (and   sometimes   Pe.   with   «-&.  final),   or  

remains  with  suff.  b,  as   2  sing.   masc.  imperat.  Pe.,    and, 

X 

without  exception  ,  —  remains  also  in  the  first  case  before 

•X  -n  t 

.QO  ,  -jlO»  The  terminations  of  the  imperat.  fem.  •-»•  , 
^1  I  ■  are  changed  into  a-  (or  ^jL)  with  suff.  b,  and  into 
l-i—  with  suff.  c. 

3.  The  forms  which  end  with   Q  otiant.,  take  for  Q  the 

forms  OQ  (and  0|^) ;  and  for  Q.^-  the  form  CL»  unchanged  in 
all  the  preceding  cases  with  suff^.  b ;   e.  g.   3  plur.    masc.  ' 
pret.  of  all  the  conjugations  excepting  Peal. 

In  respect  to  individual  persons  of  this  class  of  verbs  with 
suffixes,  the  following  should  be  remarked  : 

A.     Preter.  with  Suffixes. 
(Comp.  Table  of  Verbs  |J  with  S affixes. 

The  3  sing.  masc.  Uy«  loses  1  and  appends  suff  b,  and 
Buff.  «aOU  of  the  3  sing.  masc.  to  the  form  -^.i» 


FUTITRE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  J 05 

The  3  sing.  fern.  Al..  takes,  unchanged,  suff.  a.  1.  The 
same  is  true  of  the  1  sing.  Aa^..» 

2  sing.  masc.  AjAy,  takes,  unchanged,  suff. 


sing.  fern.  .uZlA..  attaches  suif.  b.  to  the  form  ^l5u!L... 
o  plur.  masc.  olyt  is  changed  into  OcA' ,  (and  oil',,)  with 

suff.  b.  ^  \.'         \: 

3  plur.  fem.  «^yt  remains  unchanged  with  suff.  c. 
2  masc.  and  fem.  and  1  plur.  take,  unchanged,  suff.  c. 
Rem,    Yerbs  3  rad.  ^ ,  as  they  are  mostly  intransitives, 
take  no  suffixes  in  Peal.     But  Pa.  and  Aph.  of  these  verbs 

with  a  transitive  signification,  as  well  as  of  Verbs  ]]  with  the 

same  ending,  take  suff.  a.  1,  with  the  falling  away  of  — , 

exceptmg  before  ^juD  ,  tOD ,  where remains.     The  3  sing. 

fem.  remains  unchanged  in  Pa.  A.JXyi  and  Aph.  Zuly,V   The 

same  is  true  also  of  the  1  sing,  in  both  conjugations.  The 
3  plur.  masc.  occurs  mostly  before  the  suff.,  with  o  doubled 

•      0.         7 

{see  Amira,  p.  372);  e.g.  Ps.  liv.  3,  ed.  Erpen.,  aiOQl^ 
they  have  sought  them.  Sometimes  the  original  |  appears 
before  both  OO;  e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxvii.  16,  »^ooIi-m  they  hme  seen 
thee.  In  Pa.  Q^(f  and  Aph.  Qj^v\1,  —  falls  away  before 
the  suff.,  and  jl.  becomes  movable;  but  Q  quiesces  in  — ;  e.  g. 
Gu^  with  suff.  yO^r^ ;  CuZuf  with  suff.  ^abolAiV  The  3 
plur.  fem.  in  Pa.  and  Aph.  in  the  simple  form,  takes  the  suff. 
given  in  the  tab.  with  the  falling  away  of  —  over  ^\  e.  g. 
*jiCruH./|*  The  paragogic  form  of  these  two  conjugations 
takes  suff.  c.  given  in  the  table,  without  change. 

B.     Future  with  Suffixes. 
The  3  sing.  masc.  1],^  and  all  the  persons  which  terminate 
with  U- ,  aflax  to  the  form  alJ  suff.  b.     The  2  and  3  plur. 
masc.  and  fem.  remain  unchanged,  and  are  connected,  as  in 
the  regular  verb,  with  suff.  c. 


106  IMPERATIVE   AND   INFINITIVE   WITH   SUFFIXES. 

Rem.    This  mode  of  formation  also  occurs  in  Pa.  and 

Apb.     Sometimes  also takes  the  place  of  —  in  the  suff. 

3  sing.  fem. ;  e.  g.  Matt.  i.  19,  OU^u  that  he  should  dismiss 

her^  or  in  Pa. ;  e.  g.  Luke  xiii.  18,  20,  oulDjl  I  shall  liken 

it  And  with  the  falling  awaj  of  »^ ;  e.  g.  tQOClMf  /  will 
show  you^  the  correctness  of  which  Lud.  de  Dieu^  p.  398, 
doubts. 

C.  Imperative  with  Suffix  h>. 

2  sing.  masc.  «^yf  is  unchanged  with  suti".  b. 

2  sing.  fem.  *j»--^v»  is  changed  into  "v*  with  suff.  b. 

2  plur.  masc.  Q-^.t  is  changed  into  OQL^y.  (and  ollyi)  with 
suff.  b.  ^  \^  \^ 

2  plur.  fern,  ^i  i\..  affixes  suff.  c.  to  the  form  J->-^yi« 
Rem.   The  imperat.  Pa.  IJ.t  and  Aph.  iJytf  take  the  suf- 
fixes of  the  pret.  in  connection  with  the  3  or  1  person ;  e.  g. 

OlflDf  heal  her.  The  same  is  true  in  the  plur.  masc.  of  the 
same  conjugations.  In  the  fem.,  the  paragogic  form  with 
suff.  c.  is  the  usual  one.     (Compare  2,  above.) 

D.  Infinitive  with  Suffixes. 

In  the  infinit.  Pe.  Vmt^,  in  place  of- 1—,  «.*  without  a  vowel 

is  inserted  with  suff.  a.  1.     In  respect  to  the  falling  away 

of  ^  before  ^QO ,  ^jlI)  ,  (see  1.  above,)  Lud.  de  Dieu.,  p.  395, 
doubts.  The  infinitives  of  the  other  conjugations  are  treat- 
ed as  in  the  regular  verb.     (Compare  §  36,  D.) 

E.  Participle  with  Suffixes. 
(Compare  §  20  and  §  36,  E.) 


Passive. 

Active. 

Plur.                 Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

v°,^>l      ^A 

v°Ä 

^>i 

^^   ,r^\v 

^AA^ 

m. 


2. 


1, 


PARTICIPLE   WITH   SUFFIXES.  107 

The  participles  of  the  other  conjugations  are  inflected  in 
a  similar  manner,  retaining  the  characteristic  vowels ;  e.  g. 

Pa.  act.  .oAjA^  ye  ask,  Aph.  ^joSo  we  thank^  Ethpe. 

^1aI£)ALo  we  turn  about. 

General   Remark. 

Verbs  of  the  form  of  V^  to  console,  never  lose  the  third 
radical  letter  1  when  taking  a  suffix,  but  throw  back  itg 
vowel  upon  the  middle  radical,  which,  according  to  §  36,  usu- 
ally stands  vacant ;  e.  g.  pret.  3  sing.  masc.  .juIIq  ,  ^Vi.s> , 
3  pi.  masc.  »-jJO^jlO,  yoU^i,  fem.  *-^].*ii,  ^OuIaIS,  fnt.  3 
sing.  masc.  «^M-OJ,  ^h-^ü,  imperat.  2  sing.  masc.  « 1 1 1] i n, 
^ouVi^ ,  fem.  « 1 1 1 1 1  n ,  •uOICIaIajd  ,  2  plur.  masc.  tO]jkO , 

..7  7  0..7 

fem.  %aJMJD,  «aOUl.«^* 


108 


VEKBS  ]]  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


Verb  )] 


Proper  Form. 

Sing.  1   c. 

2     m. 

2     f. 

Pret.  Sing.  Pe. 
3  m.    Pa. 

T        7 

P          7 

•n        7 

Pe. 
'f'         Pa. 

*  a;.? 

1  c. 

A^^ 

* 

•^'/u-o 

«jOAji*^ 

Peal. 
Plur.  3  m.  } 
Pael.  ' 

Q*mi 

j  *aJOO;£) 

^      7 
*>            7 

3     /.           ■ 

••7 

»7 

..P7 
p     *7 

..p   7 
P  "    7.. 

*•*     7.. 

Infin. 

r;oii 

«jJLl;nk> 

p        i> 

Imp.  {   Pe.   j 
2  m.\   Pa.    I 

P  7 

* 

* 

2    /. 

0 

I          XP 

* 

* 

Plur:  2  m. 

o-o 

1        * 

* 

2/ 

0  ■^.o 

* 

Futur.  3  m. 

Uni 

>-^ 

•,«ni;ni 

VERBS 

fj    WITH   SUFFIXES. 

109 

3  m. 

3f. 

Plur.  1  c. 

2  m. 

"■  1 

'                          -^         7 

alia 

.     P         7 

r     r 

»>     p 

«K             17 

-^       X    7       i 

cillo 

ail-n 

.9.7          7, 

^QdZ-£5 

■«     .    7          7 

oiLaIo 

diL-iO 

* 

^qdZu^ 

^Zu^o 

iK           7 

•X                 7 

dioo-D 

01  Ol'^ 

^00-D 

.QSOO'O 

•X      -x^v 

-n    -X       7 

,-jLDoVrD 

..       0  7 

- 

.        97. 

01-»  pD 
OUUr^ 

pT. 

p*r. 

•x      p  ^  ^. 

<  '      '^ 

1      au*rnk) 

ÖU',jQk3 

^•r^ 

».       P           -^ 
•X        P          ,-« 

» p     * 

-«  p         * 

0     7 

6u*o 

.     P   7 

oi;o 

P  7 

* 

■x- 

10 

Gulo 

I  IP 

* 

4^ 

•X       7 

öioo-jd 
öiol-o 

•9f 

* 

.      P  -^IP 

^^ 

* 

* 

-n       -n 

ou^ 

^•^ 

•x         *      ■» 

.on»;n3 

f>aiOi;ni 

110  AUXILIARY   VERBS,    OR   VERBS    SUBSTANTIVE. 

§  38.    Auxiliary  Verbs,  or  Verbs  Substantive, 

1.  There  are  in  Syriac  two  auxiliary  verbs  (verbs  sub- 
stantive). One  of  these,  fool  to  be,  which,  in  Hebrew, 
exists  as  Vau  conversive,  is  used  to  form  the  moods  and 
tenses  which  are  wanting  (see  §  18.  4.  Hem.).     The  other, 

which  is  properly  a  noun,  La  being,  substance,  essence  {essen- 
tia), with  Olaph  prosthetic  A*] ,  takes  the  place  of  the  aux- 

IP 
OGi,  belongs  to 

Yerbs  ]J ,  like  which  it  is  inflected,  but  in  respect  to  which 
it  is  to  be  particularly  observed,  that,  when  connected  with 
the  participle,  preter.or  future,  the  01  (with  Linea  occultans) 

is  not  pronounced ;  this  is  also  the  case  when  the  verb  is 

ooi  *^\M  he 

has  begim.    Upon  the  double  formation  of  the  fat.  ^oou 

and  loou,  see  §  35,  2,  c.    The  inflection  of  A*]  is  as  follows  : 


Sing. 
F.  C.  M. 


^L^   {lam)  1. 

i^V  {thou  art)  yuk^tJ!(  2, 
OUA.»!  {he,  she  is)  ^OloZul  3. 


Plur. 

r.  c.         M. 

^Aa|  {we  are) 
»^»A^l    (ye  are)    •QTLiA.il 
-aGUAa|  {theij  are)  tOOUA^I 

2.  In  connection  with  p  is  formed  Au.^,  which  is  inflect- 
ed similarly  to  A»];  e.  g.  *^Aa.S  /  am  not.  LÄ\  in  connec- 
tion with  looi  forms  the  imperfect ;  e.  g.  looi  A^l  or  looi 

^axo'L^he  was.  The  same  tense  is  also  expressed  by  looi 
looi.  looi  doubled  marks  the  pluperfect ;  e.  g.  A^ooi  AaOOi 
/  had  been. 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS.  lU 


CHAPTEE      III 


The    ISTouN. 


§  39.     Derivation  of  Nouns. 

1.  Nouns,  as  in  Hebrew  and  Chaldee,  are  primitive, 
derivative,  and  sometimes  compounded.  To  primitives 
belong  nouns  of  one  and  two  syllables,  which  indicate  ani- 
mals, plants,  metals,  numbers,  members  of  the  bodies  of 
animals,  etc.  (See  Gesemics,  Lehrgeh.  p.  478,  sq.).  Inasmuch 
as  they  coincide  with  simple  verbal  forms,  they  are  always 
recognized  as  nouns  by  the  nature  of  the  object  which  they 

y  y  i> 

designate;  e.g.  \£Q:^ßesh,  *aai}  gold,  %Si£QO  silver.  The 
derivatives,  which  are  by  far  the  most  numerous,  are  form 
ed  partly  from  verbs  (verbals),  and  partly  from  nouns 
(denominatives). 

2.  The  derivation  of  nouns  is  effected ;  a)  without  any 
change  of  the  original  word  ;  e.  g.  t^i...^Vf>  counsel^  from 
«,■  \V)  to  counsel ;  ^^Xjd]  mourning^  from  ^^ä]  to  mourn ; 
or  by  a  mere  change  of  the  vowel ;  e.  g.  y\o  king, 
;flD  I  fetter ;  h)  by  the  falling  away  of  the  radical  letter  ;  e.  g. 
(Als  sleep^  from  ^J*a ;  1^  t  care^  from  *2)  f--» ;  \^^  ^^^ 
heart,  from  «.nn^^ ;  but  especially  c)  by  the  addition  of 
formative  letters  or  of  entire  syllables.  Those  letters,  if 
initial,  are  ] ,  So,  j,  2,  *  ;  if  medial,  they  are  ^  and  Q  ; 
final,  1 ,  1 ,  2^  Several  of  these  formative  letters  are  some- 
times found  in  the  same  noun  ;  e.  g.  y.iifl^2  scholar, 
]l4^Q*  dominion,  l2oiV)»i^  compassion,  ]LiJ:i01^  flame. 


112  NOUNS   DEEIVED    FROM    VERBS. 

§  40.     Nouns  derived  from   Verbs. 

Verbal  nouns  are  kindred  either  to  participles,  and  de- 
note the  subject  or  object  of  the  action  (Concrete  Nouns),  or 
they  are  kindred  to  the  infinitive,  and  receive  the  significa- 
tion of  the  action  or  quality  itself  (Abstract  Nouns).  But 
frequently  in  the  formation  of  these  nouns,  rare  or  obsolete 
forms  of  the  infinitives  and  participles  arc  chosen.  The 
following  tables  present  a  collective  view  of  the  modes  of 
formation. 


TABULAR  VIEW     OFDERIVATIVE  NOUNg.  113 


TABULAR    VIEW 


OF 

NOUNS    DERIVED   FROM   REGULAR    AND   IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


I.    PARTICIPIAL    FORMS 
A.    Of  peal. 


a.    The  simple  hut  unusual  Participial  Forms^  ivhich  are  most- 
ly Adjectives. 


Absolute  state,  j  ^^4^  j  Vi^i^ 

Emphat.  state.,    (   UJ^  1  ]1^ 

Ji^..     a  man.  \}Q£D  foolish. 

\^j^     an  associate.  VI  OLD  rural,  quiet. 

l^ryi     leprous.  ^rI5  sick: 

Ql  and  %A.l  ^ 

\a.M.\     mournful  Ir^:^  pure. 

y   and   «Jh^ 

lo»,  ]la»     c^wa^.  lio  hard. 


e — ' — 

0  y. 


\^l^  impure  ;     «HytfO  much. 


\0%     ♦.        r 


From  these  are  derived  Abstract  Nouns  ;  e.  g.  '{LcIj^O  hardness; 
'\Lo\a.yjJD   multitude. 


114 


TABULAE  VIEW   OF  DEKIVATIVE   NOUNS. 


b.      Usual  Participial  Forms  of  Peal. 


a.     Active.  ß.     Passive. 

Absolute  state,  J  ^O  (  ^u^^ 


Empliat.  State,    *   W^ii  (   WT^^ 

>ai£D  a  witness.  ^iNn  sound. 

>aO(  black.  [OuGl.^  given. 

t^LZi  Ql  and  «u.1 

foA^  aw  inhabitant.         %^.^^  cursed.         fai*^  ji  f/ry. 
|*LkJ  so/if.  ^ 

Mi 


•.Qa>l  righteous. 
(^.•1  a  hireling. 


«^^ 


IpQJ  a  herdsman. 


Ql  and 


»0  IV 

(^^^  long-sufferinq . 


y^i^  reviling. 

]]" 

• »    s 

pL.19  a  herdsman. 

poij^  a  landlord. 
U'and  la 
|jl£0(  a  i^hysician. 
)l"and  U 
IP*  beautiful. 


1^1*^4  renowned.    |*^>*^»i  beloved, 
\j\lkfree.  ]j-aJ^>  rare. 

P' 

PSQO  concealed. 

V'and  U 
fl^}  m.   (ZulS)  f.  beautiful. 

|J    and   ^ 


1 11*^1  prophet^         ]Ai*^l  prophetess. 


Here  belong  also  AbstractN"ouns,  as  (ZojLflDl  ^eaZ^w^,  IZqjQajQ^ 
publication^  \L09[^  freedom,  QO^>l  and  |^QQji)l  righteousness, 
(ZQAjl,^-^  dryness. 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  115 


c.     With  Immutable  Vowels. 


Ab.  Stat.,  j  Vy^     ^q4i3  ,  ^q4o       \q^       ^OD  &  with  [ 
Emph,  ,   ^  P^'      Uoi^    ]]q4^        ]]q4d        Ü^Q^        ]JL 

}i»,\^  a  plough-        J  Oil  smaZ/.     J^Ory«  ^  ^^«^-  (oSjDQflD      a  rei 

man.  *  ^lohemer.  {color). 

(^^-  t(;ea^.        |4n^>»  (^  ^ob,  pkO>l  a  sower.     t^LOLK»)  a  friend. 


_a  l2)  l©         mere?-.]      ]ä 

lj-fc.J  a  carpenter.  \iQSi\a preacher.  |aO)|  a  Aam-  fSD30|  black. 

Ql  and  «-*J^  ^2)  Ql  and  «-»A    Pr>i0  fa j905sessor. 

()Q>j  a  spend-     fJQ^^  damp.         PCIaI  a  ^*ver.     Ql  and  «.i^ 
i/in/^  oL  and  %jui 

li-.i>  a  y^cf^e.  licuj  a  destroyer.  \LaA^mortal.  \i::iO^  fortunate. 

-x     7  (» «^  p  %p  0   *.   divorce. 

lUi  a  combatant.  TjO,  J  a  yowfA.  llOU«  «  &ar6er.  U-Soj  a  i/Z/  o/ 

[i^S^  an  orator.  \MQMy^aspy.      [l^J  a  cleft. 

]]"and  -  '^         fl'and  «.i-i         U  and  wk^ 

X^iL  a  seer.     X^O^  mournful.   UO^  creator. 

].VV>  quiet.  1®°?5  ^  mocÄ;er. 

B'and  la 

\MJSi\  a  baker. 

From  these  are  formed  Abstract  Nouns,  like  VZq^Sm  rejection, 
VZoioi]  littleness,  ]la»Oy( division,  ]la2CU\  giving,  etc. 


116 


TABULAE  VIEW  OF    DERIVATIVE  NOUITS. 


B.    PARTICIPIAL    FORMS. 
a.    Of  the  other  Active  Conjugations. 


Pael. 

It  takes  the  usual  ^ 
form,  and  the  form  j 

with  pL.  and  the  [ 

form  V^QSd  J 

p^^  a  leader. 
|o;rnV)  poor, 

fl'hNV»  a  teacher. 


^.^ 


a  torturer. 


^ 


Ql  and  «jlI 
iO)1d  united. 

]lkll-^  high. 

Uand^A 
P-kUvSo  seditious. 

pUjOTiD  a  leader. 

]]  and]ä 
fl  ifiDtSiO  a  physician. 

11  and  K 

•  P»  0     7 

PI  i*^V)  a  comforter. 


Aphel. 
Usual    form    and  1 


^•^•V)  a  dwelling. 
t4o\V)  pincers. 
|JO«nV)  an  offense. 

7  J 

^>>nV)  despairing, 
injurious. 


X,-\£^ 


Shaphel. 
Usual    form    and 

(,nSiiV)  a  slave. 
|'^\»>«  changing, 

•^0     0  7 

\1^\Ql»  a  deliverer, 
Wand  *A 

10      0       7 
■  NSaVo  proud. 

Part.  pass. 
« iNV)aV>  completed. 


Q.L  and  «.^JL 

11  and  ^' 
|1m>V)  a  watch-tower, 

•P  -X  7 

poVyJbO  a  sickle. 
U  and  «-^jS) 

^P  P  7 

p^jQvo  a  confessor. 


From  these  are  derived  Abstract  Nouns,  as  lZcü;2,l0  direction, 
]2oi<^\V)  doctrine,  l2oi.Im]ib  healing,  &c. 


TABULAü  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS, 
b.     Of  the  Passive  Conjugations. 


iir 


Ethpeel. 
Usual    form    and 


Ethpaal. 
Usual   form   and 


Eshtaphal. 
Usual  form    and 


Usual    torm    ana  j        Usual   lorm   and  ^  Usual   form    and  ) 

those  with  # ,  (1      i     those  with  # ,  |l      )  those  with'^,  ]l      ) 

Ql  and  ^            ViSrsJ.Ak)  curdled.  ]]  and  ^ 

]imi<^2ASo  entreat-               .  r<y>  jil^SoZlftiD /w//. 
pLlr-fe^iO  renowned. 

Ml 
]lK\V)ASo  eloquent. 


C.    PARTICIPIAL  FORMS  OF  LESS   FREQUENT  CONJUGATIONS. 


Palel.  Pealel.  Paiel 

Usual  form  and  \  Usual  form  and  |  Usual  form  and  J 

lia^Cl  a  church-  |V)\V>S»  unhurt.  Irt-»^  a  farrier, 
treasurer. 


Parel. 
Usual  form  and 


Taphel.  Quadriliterals, 

Usual  form  and  ^      |£^  »l\AKn 


an  accuser. 


..>*  a  pitcher.  r^v'^  ^^  interpreter, 

loOijiQiO  sudden.       1,a^^Z  a  pupil. 


118 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


II.    IISrFIlSriTIYE  FOEMS. 
A.    OF  PEAL. 


a.     Simple  Infinitive  Forms — Segholal£S. 


Absolute  state,  J  ^\^  j  ^\^ 

Ernphat.  state,  ^   V^i)  1   IJ'^Ö 

|jl2U  the  soul.  t^^?  rain. 


|V)i»\  bread. 
ft 

JJ^Ia  sea-grass, 
pD^  herbage. 
\r^  ^  child. 
OL  and  «u^ 

|J  and  «.«^ 
lOj-M  joy. 
Ml 

*P      7 

\\y%  a  treasure. 
]]  and  \L 


|mJ)  morning. 

|A£)*   diligerice,  (for  jAS)^-.*). 

Ql  andtjLl 
|1juS  peace. 

»    P       7 

l^aj  a  dwelling. 

]]'and  ^ 

Ml 

Pq!^  ^/a^  heart. 
Wand  ]i 


\MyQjD  holiness. 
pa  9  0*1  a  wag. 


Ql  and  «.LI 

|^q4  goodness, 

*  p    p 

(QCD  an  end. 


Ml 


(Zja  countenance.      \LO\i  labor, 


pCLO  coldness, 
|J  and  «.i^ 
(A£)0(  anguish. 


It  is  seldom  that  all  three  forms  are  found  derived  from  one  orig- 
inal ;  e.  g.  fJ^AA  a  rope,  |j£^aj  a  pestilence,  JjsQlm  guilt ;  oftener 
two  forms,  as  |Jl  an  oalc,  \1\  a  storm  (from  ^1). 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS.  119 

b.    Infinitive  Forms  with  Immutable  Vowels. 


Abs.  Stat.  (  ^5)^      ^  ^QO  {  ^Q^  {      qI^o 

Em.  Stat.  (   ]]^      (  1]'^'q£)  (U^Q^O  (I'ZqI^ID 

'\y\y%  a  herd.       \f^Oy  a piinc-    \jJDn^\  seizure.     q\'^?0  folly. 

1  ^-^v  n  ann^'h  turc.  \k'iCi'^^  affiauce.  fZo^NV)  a  king 

.  -,  ^p  p  -x  _  .  „  dom. 

ja  f^Q2  gleaning.  (2) 

l^fiol  a  ^^Vc?Ze.        ]a  (and  ]1)     'U^QCo'l  a  fetter. 

*o  0    K^  ing. 

\'^Ou\  renown. 

\i^  a  vessel.  ^„  P>^0^  to/Ä:ai^^;e 


Q^  and 


U 


LUk  anu  ...^       »p^ 

Val?  a  flowinfj.     Jf-^  «"'1  *^ 
li  and  ^      \LoQS>  perfume. 

,^.  V  and  ^ 

I '  C    ^^^  arrival. 

IJ  and  *^  c?^7Z(:e. 

f  iSi  a  sprout.        (J  and  ^2) 

^P    P    -x 

Pfc.sQJ  error. 


ness. 


tion 
]Lk\0   re 

*p  p 


iing. 


Ql  and  «.iA 

•x         7 

O^k  (j  favor. 

|J  and  «u-^ 

IZqjüI  indecency. 

«p.  -x        7 

IIQuOVm  appear- 
ance. 

»Pj  -x       7 

(ZOQID  posses- 
sion. 

ÜandU 

^Zoa^    orna- 
ment. 


110  TABULAR  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUNS. 


B.    USUAL  INFINITIVE  FORMS  OF  PEAL  AND  OF  THE 
OTHER  CONJUGATIONS. 

A 

Peal  Pael.  Aphel.  Shapliel. 

Usual  form  Usual  form  Usual  form  and 

and  and 

^c^,^c^,  "^s^i^  ^^4^    Hod» 

^Q^OLD  or^Q4o2         lAfHAM^D  ]^^mQS 

thought,  change. 

\d^£>^  a  heel.  \cL»JlZiL  flattery.  IZo^Cil*  slavery, 

Yfl^^  a  desert.   y^^L  help.       JjpAqSD  a  concussion. 
Qa^aSD  a  thrust.  \moboL  combat.  f^OQA  delay, 

^  la  ^  \£ 

^^ili)^  a  speech.  '{LSQ.^Lmer-    IZqj^QSd  c7e 

chandise.  struction, 

»  u  t  * 

^,iO  insight.  \t^^*>*QLdespair.\L^U\0^a  gift.  \h\OQM  deliver^ 
•     I,  II  II  » 

^  Ql  and  «.kA  ^2)  ance. 

llO2i!L0  departure.  f;rf>V)  a  saw. 

]^>0<y>Vn  bellows.  1A»Q^Z  rubbish.        l;oV)  a  Aoe. 

qÜ  and  *A.i  U'and  wi^L        l]"(and  \si)        IJVd  «^ 

)Z^!!^  harTcen-  *|ZLiXQd2  a  maw-  IZcuAxSO  aii  as-   ]>SV)Q>  cow- 

Z72^.  ^Ze.  sembly.  elusion. 

]]  and  «.B^     |J  and  «^xS  (j  and  «.^2)  |J  and  «.a^ 

P',10  a  drawing  1Aa)oZ  doctrine.  IZoi  i^oV)  cow-  |a>OQs  a^o- 
'o/*  (of  water).  elusion. 

IJ'and  la 

jA^Z^i  arrival. 


TABULAE  VIEW  OF  DERIVATIVE  NOUN'S.  121 

C.    INFINITIVE  FORMS   OF  THE  LESS  FREQUENT 
CONJUGATIONS. 


Palel  and  Palpel. 

Pealel. 

Pavel  and  Paiel. 

(•^)011     splendor. 

I'AVlSviS,  In. 

pJLoZ  a  worm. 

Ql  and  %ju^ 

nocence. 

V'and  *A 

^vh^Qit    motion. 

Pali. 

\[tr\r\^  contam- 
ination. 

liftGI^Qi:^    astonhh- 
ment. 

Parel.  Pamel.  Taphel. 

]Q0l5Qfö  swiftness,         \^^Q»  shame,        Ir^oLoZ  doctrine. 


122  DENOMINATIVE  NOUNS. 

§  41.     Denominative  Nouns. 
Here  belong  : 

1.  Noans  ;  a)  without  any  formative  additions,  derived 
from  some  other  nouns,  which  may  be  either  primitives  or 
derivatives  of  verbs ;  e.  g.  JHyi  a  gardener,  from  Holy»  a 
garden ;  ]»»  ^V)  a  seaman,  from  ]»»\V)  salt ;  h)  with  the 
formative  syllables  ]i-  masc.,  |Aj.-  fern.,  (Patronymics  or 
Gentile  ISTouns) ;  e.g.  V^ioooij  Roman,  lA > \;m  k\Israelitess ; 
with  the  falling  away  of  the  syllable  »flOQ  in  names 
of  towns  ;  e.  g.  ^iffl^]  an  Ephesian,  from  «laomal ;  or 
Feminine  Abstract  Nouns,  terminating  in  "jia  and  ]Aa— ;  e.g. 
^Zqi\^  youthfulness,  from  P«.^  a  youth ;  '|Zo;aQl  blind- 
ness,  from  ;^Q1  blind;  \LkM^y  beginning,  from  «Aa9  ^/i<; 
Äeac?,  principal ;  c)  diminutives  with  .Q  or  cfioa  masc.  and 
|AjJQ  fem.  attached  to  the  noun ;  e.  g.  po«^  a  little  son, 
from  Vr^  ;  Vscu*!  a  ?^V^?e  brother,  from  "U*]  ;  lA^oZ;a  a  lit- 
tle daughter  from  IZrD  ;  |flOO*^\^  a  young  dog,  from  |ol^« 
Sometimes  we  find  both  forms  in  use ;  e.  g.  |jo;^..  and 
pDO;o..  a  manikin,  from  Ir^yi*  Diminutives  from  com- 
pound nouns  also  occur ;  e.  g.  pomJ^  from  1jl];0  ;  also 
a  double  formation  ;  e.  g.  1jQflD0;.O.t  a  very  little  man, 
|AjJQAjoZ;iD  a  very  little  daughter. 

Rem. — Amira  (p.  145)  mentions  a  form  with  the  third  radical 
letter  doubled,  and  Q  inserted  between  them  ;  e.g.  Ih^O^oS  a  little 
assembly,  from  l4^^« 

2.  Adjectives  belong  here,  which  are  formed ;  a)  by  affix- 
ing the  terminations  p  masc.  and  IZLj  fem. ;  e.  g.  \l»^Oj 
masc.  (AaJjsjO)  fem.,  spiritual,  from  paOj ;  b)  by  affixing 
the  terminations    U  masc.  1A^-  fem.  ;    e.  g.  ]aIü«Q..  masc. 


COMPOSITE  AND   EXOTIC  NOUNS.  123 

IAaIq^Q^  fem.  corporeal  from  ]Sfl*Q^.  ;  ordinal  numerals 
(see  §  50.  8) ;  e.  g.  "^AAZ  the  third,  from  ]hll ;  c)  by  affix- 
ing  the  terminations  V"J  masc.,  ]LkJ  fem.;  e.g.  IlLloj  masc. 
|Aai>jO>  fern. 

Rem. — lu  respect  to  the  cases  under  a.  and  c.  above,  Amira  re- 
marks (p.  106)  that  the  latter  is  rather  used  in  metaphorical  lan- 
guage, yet  he  also  admits  the  interchange  of  the  two  forms. 


§  42.     Composite  and  Exotic  Nouns. 

1.  The  formation  of  words  by  composition  is  more  frequent 
in  Syriac  than  in  the  other  Semitic  dialects,  (see  Michaelis, 
p.  151 ;  Lud.  de  Dieu,  pp.  73,  74).  The  words  most  fre- 
quently used  in  forming  compounds  are  ;i  son  ;  e,  g.  M^J^i 
man,  \lOL\:i^voice;\i2^  sir  ;  e.g.  \s^ , N SO  enemy;  *Sirmi(ch; 
e.  g.  \Lm^  jDj  householder;  j^j^j principal ;  e.g.  (^NNvao 
firstling;  ]Lk:D house;  e.g.  AaO  Jroao  corn-house;  sometimes 
^\l>*|  eating ;  e.  g.  1  »;o\ol  adversary.  In  changing  the 
Concrete  idea  into  the  Abstract,  either  the  last  part  of  the 
compound  word  only  is  regaraed  ;  e.g.  |Zonn,\sn  hostility, 
or  both  parts  are  changed  into  the  feminine  ;  e.  g.   12oA*Ä 

7   7 

t^j  house-holding.     Upon,  the  plural  inflection  see  §  44. 

2.  The  Syrians  have  introduced  many  Greek  words  into 
their  language,  and  given  them  either  Syriac  terminations 
or  permitted  them  to  retain,  more  or  less,  the  Greek  forms. 
The  following  are  examples  ;      jly. V  a/ja,     ^CuXy^^o]  kayysXm, 

^inVn     .m  ^ysp.(^v,       yd\\-n     fxaXXov,       ]4^1ALD     fxaärj/xara, 
.fnoVnm .  !nVnrr>   (i\)Woyi(i[kog.      There   are   some  peculiarities 


124  GENDER  OF  NOUNS. 

in  the  formation  of  these  Avords,  for  which  see  §  12.  5.  and 
§  44.  Eem.  8.  At  the  time  of  the  Crusades,  the  Syrians 
introduced  words  also  from  the  western  languages ;  e.  g. 
VLvT^a  the  Franks,  ^toUT  Germany,  »lAxS^l  England. 
\Lk'^  Prince,    «jt)901  Henry,   etc. 


§  43.     Gender  of  Nouns. 

The  Syriac  language  has  but  two  genders,  masculine  and 
feminine.  The  latter  is  distinguished  partly  by  the  signifi- 
cation and  partly  by  the  form. 

1.  In  respect  to  the  signification,  the  gender  is  fixed  by 
the  same  rules  as  in  Hebrew.  Masculines  are  the  names  of 
men,  masculine  ofiices,  nations,  mountains,  months  and 
rivers.  Feminines  are  the  names  of  female  persons  and  ani- 
mals, countries,  cities,  and  members  of  human  and  animal 
bodies,  which  are  found  double  although  they  have  mascu- 
line  endings  in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  ^^^yofeet  from  ^yi',  etc. 

2.  In   respect  to  form,    the  feminine  is  characterized  by 

-  (  1^  ),  wi«. ,  Q- ,  Z»  But  the  first  of 
those  final  syllables,  which  is  particularly  used  for  the  for- 
mation  of  feminines  from  masculines  (e.  g.  \'rCLt^  female  com- 

7 

panion  from  ;^ija  masc),  must  not  be  confounded  with  a 
similar  sounding  termination  of  masculines  (the  emphatic 
state,  §  45,  3)  usually  given  in  the  lexicons,  as  the  only  mas- 
culine form  in  use.  To  distinguish  this  fern,  form  from  the 
raasculineSj  it  is  usually  given  with  the  termination  }L ; 
e.  g.  IAqj^  the  queen.  The  forms  with  cL  and  «.a»  have 
arisen  by  apocope  from  U ;  e.g.  on»  (,  goodness,  ^lo  learn. 
The  last  of  the  above  mentioned  endings  L  is  seldom  used  ; 
e.  g.   LiHiD  part. 


GENDER    OF    NOUNS. 


125 


Rem. — 1.  The  feminine  ending  I-  is  generally  found  in  adjec 
tives  ;  e.  g.  JD^  masc.  \^  fern.  If  the  word  ends  with  1 ,  this 
letter  is  changed  into  a.  ,  and  forms  ]^ ;  e.  g.  \cUi  masc.  \lnl  fem. 
Gentile  nouns  and  numerals  ending  with  w*-«  change  that  termina- 
tion  mto  P».-  ;  e.g.  w»jOOU  masc.  M)0C7U  fem.  Nouns  with  \L 
final  are  masculine  when  Z  is  a  radical  letter  of  the  noun  ;  e.  g, 
(AjtO  boiv,  I Ao  .  ornament,  lÄul  olive. 

Rem. — 2.  Many  nouns  with  a  masculine  ending   are  feminine   or 
common.     They  are  usually  given  in  the  emphatic  state    (§  45.  3) 
e.  g.  "Jsi-S.  ship,    V^)0)  wa^,    |l-S^  rib,   ]1j1  earth,   ]lyA  pitcher. 

1". -»^  »py  »p-x  ^P^\i 

>|£:3  well,      |;00  he7'd,      IjCl.r  Zme  of  battle,     \xa\   com.  img 

^  P    ""  ^      P     7  ^  ^mP  7  *t?         ^ 

J£51  leather  bottle,  p^;ja  sword,  com.,  |J^qSd  burden,  (;2D  ^a^^w^ 
|£)P  s^owe,  I^D;^  6eZ/?/,   |lii\  com.  tongue,  \m£ü  soul,  IjQJ ^re, 

IP»  .kP7.»PP  »PP 

9CU2D  com.  moow,    |;^(T>  shield,    \££l£D  com.  mo^A,     |<^!\  branch 

\£ß'rL  bed,  |aji09  com.  «^mc/,  (AjZj  com.  terror,   |SiO>  com.  ;^rwza 

wiew^,   ^Qju*  hades,  (Aj^QA  rws^,  jiV?»  com.  heaven,  (jkSQji  com 

5?^w,   ^'Q'  ^^^y-     Names  of  animals  also  are  of  the  common  gen 

der  ;  e.  g.  |l^*»  an  ass,    \}J^  ,  a  camel  ;    also  the  cardinal  num 

bers    from  20    to    100..     Greek  nouns   retain    their  gender  ;    e.  g, 

po-x  1^^'^ 

•iSCOpJOfiO  ö'uvoiJof,  (0^/U>  5ia^y\xr\.  In  general,  those  nouns  are 
considered  as  feminine  which  come  from  the  feminine  of  the  He- 
brew, ending  in  HT,  and  all  of  those  nouns  which,  in  the  emphatic 
state,  end  in  '\L   (§  45.  3). 


126  NUMBER   OF   NOUNS. 

§  44.    Number  of  Nouns, 

There  are  two  numbers  in  Syriac,  the  singular  and  plural. 
There  are,  indeed,  four  dual  forms,  taken  from  the  Hebrew, 

ending  in  ^-ju-  (^>2  masc.  two^  ^Ihl  fern,  two,  ^2]^  two 

hundred,  and  ^>^^  EgyjpPj ;  but  they  cannot  be  considered 
as  a  special  form  of  the  language.     Pairs  are  usually  ex- 
pressed by  the  plural,  and  duality  by  the  numeral  two. 
Tlie   plural   of   masculines   is   formed    by  annexing   the 

syllable  ^x.  to  the  noun  sing. ;  e.  g.  ^'Q^  'mountains,  from 

io^  ;  that  of  the  feminine  by  ^  (instead  of  | ) ;  e.  g.  JjoAa 

virgin,  plur.  ^oAs« 

Rem.  1.    Plural  masculines  of  derivatives  from  Yerbs  U , 

ending  with  V-  a.nd  •-*- ,  terminate  in  ^-ä-  ;  e.  g.  \H  hoy^ 

..     -n  7  7  _-«  7 

plur.  ^iN^ ;  *.*;-äSd  dioelling,  plur.  ^,.ftSD*  Feminmes 
ending  in  q  and  L  take  tQ ;    e.  g.  on\V)  kingdom,  plur. 

p       •  7  IP  I 

tOO^SD  :  those  ending  in  •-»-  take  ^  ;  e.  g.  ^'^  creature^ 

plur.  ^;:d*     Nouns  derived  from  Yerbs  Mik,  if  the  doubled 

consonant  appear  again  in  the  plural,  take  Linea  occultans 

I  ..7 
under  the  first  of  the  similar  lettere  ;    e.  g.  ^ *  Vj V).>  from 

m^        0  7  X..    7  «P7 

pD^  sea,  ,^1  V)V)S  from  jSos  people. 

Bern.  2.  Some  masculines  form  the  plural  in  the  same 
manner  as  feminines.  Here  belong :  (coj  physician,  plur. 
•QfiDj;   Jujoj  cno,  plur.  |ZCL»)Of ;    |^>|  mö?i,  plur.   (ZQ-a>| ; 

jZ"!  j?Z«cö,  plur.  tO)2] ;  \laL  snake,  plur.  IZoQAi ;  ^JjQO 
mwZö,  plur.  VZojjQD  ;  ImjQD  throne,  plur.  .qcd>o:d  ;  ]I!^!^ 
night,   plur.   *o\iN ;    Uaa  memher,    plur.    (ZoJ^QO ;    J^J 

^  -up  P70-»>P 

herdsman,  plur.  (as  a  part.  ^->^5)   tOiJ  ;   |ci»  cup-hearer^ 

»p.  p  7  p  , 

plur.  |Zaa* ,  &c.  (Compare  Agrell,  Comment,  de  varietate 
generis  et  numeri,  p.  68  ;  and  upon  the  absolute  and  ein- 
phatic  states,  th'-''-  form  and  use,  see  §  45.  1.  3.) 


NUMBER   OF   NOUN'S.  127 

Rem. — 3.  The  following  feminines  form  the  plural  like  mascu- 
lines ;  a)  by  rejecting  the  feminine  ending  of  the  emphatic  singular 
(§  45.  3),  \!iDXell,  ^J^V;  ((ltS( woman,  \m^)  ;  Xtsof  wall,  ]sxi]] 
l2\l  .  ^art^ew,  "llyi  ;  UjQLd..  coa^'^^yi  ;  Xt^}  ßc/-basket, 
^>Sn>  ;  li^l^?^  ^^«^  K^?  ;  XK^  thorn,  \^  ;  1^4^»  loheat, 
\^Z  ;  TZoi  window,  IcLd  ;  lÄ£lL  ^/Ze,  iLoS  ;  I'Aoh^  &a5m 
US ;  U\^  ieaf  {of  paper),  W]^  ;  12\\^  sickle,  ]]'^  ; 
l2\SQ**iD  sieve,  \la**^  ;  12\1Sd  w^orc?,  IJLo  ;  l^di  hair,  "JjiO^ 
VZ^io  cave,  Ip^D  ;  12*^^3  barley,  iJlflO  ;  VAl^SlflD  sAzp,  ll-*^; 
VA^üJ!^  cZws^er  (of  grapes),  ]nil ;  lAo'^l  //io?i^,  'in'fL  ;  UjcL^ 
6nc?Ze,  I'Sjr^  '  12\2^0  bark,  ]sSo  ;  ]^n^  almond,  ]r^', 
I'Ali  year,  ^^J»  ;  I'Ali  hour,  ^-.JLj»  ;  VZüfi  /^,  "^112,  etc. ; 
b)  by  retaining  2 ;  e.g.  Xh^  ^ooty,  X^A^  ;  lAl^cry,  1^1^; 
12{a*  5z>A^,  Uvm  ;  X^\^'^oxious  means, "{b^  ;  \l^f^ugliness, U]^; 
IW»  care,  ^As^  ;  l^lß  caZZ^r^9',  V/^  ;  ^LJom  rust,  lA>*Q* 
(see  Agrell,  passim,  p.  VO.  sg'.) 

Rem. — 4.  Some  nouns   form   a  double  plural    (the  feminine  form 

17 
^  ^  ^,  .      ^  M^^^^ 

^dioV  and  iCTloV;  ^^  army,  ^ÜLum  and  ^oSim  ; 
]lr*I  Örea5^,  ^jx»  and  ^Oj*I  ;  ^1  ^me,  ^oloi  and  ^1  {times, 
turns  in  repetition)  ;  ^1  hand,  ^^Tand  ^rA  {ff^^^  ^/^Ae  hand); 
yjOi  day,  ^^qI  and  ^q1  ;  \oS>,  heart,  ^^^  and  ^Qii-^ ; 
lilD  Zort^,  ^-^^  and  ,0'^  ;  höU  stream,  ^hou  and  ^OJOIJ  ; 
lU^Vea.^,  ^^^Ll^nd  ^?K  ;  \LjL  eye,  ^Li  and  ^ifoun- 
tain)  ;  ^2.01  heel,  ^»OOl  and  ^-tEiqI  ;  jj'rO  Aorw,  ^>  and 
^•^  (corner)  ;     ]^  name,  ^OlSO*  and  ^OTSQ*  ,  etc.        Some 


128  NUMBER   OF  NOUNS. 

masculines  as  in  some  of  the  above  examples,  take  Q  or  01  between 
the  plural  ending  and  the  last  radical.  Also  some  feminines  in  |Z 
take  Q  and  01  before  the  plural  ending ;  e.g.  \tiiDO\ people,  |ZqLd|; 
XtlliDpart,  l2oiV);  l^Sl  o/mX^,  VZoill;  \^]\noiher,]l(AiD^, 
1A!sd1  handmaid,  jZoUdI  (compare  §  49).  Sometimes  a.  is  in- 
serted  ;  e.  g.  (ZjQQj  6e^,  |Au>QQ>  ;  (AOOj  ^?ace,  |A.i^Oj  ; 
(ACDQQD  mare,  (AjlCOCLCO,   etc. 

Rem. — 5.  The  composites  (§42.1)  form  the  plural  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  either  ;  a)  the  last  part  of  the  composite  is  inflected  ;  e.g. 
(£Q2lD  ZXjlO  granary,  or  ;  6)  the  first  part ;  e. g.  |«1  i1*^  maw- 
Ä:/^c?,    or  ;    c)  both  parts  ;  e.g.    (j-iDZllli  tattling. 

Rem.  6. — Some  words  only  occur  in  the  plural ;  e.g.  y^liD  water^ 
(juM  Zi/b,    \Si\face,    y.k^^'i  worth. 

Rem.  Y. — Some  singular  names  (collectives)  take  the  plural  mark, 

«p      ••?  ikp»«     y  *9"0 

iiJe&wi  (§  6) ;  e.  g.  [mm  horses,  (r^O  cattle,  (lA  «A^ep.  Amira 
(p.  95)  also  places  here  Ir-^^  ^*^c?5   and   (r*A2  draft-cattle. 

Rem.  8.  Greek  nouns,  without  regard  to  gender,  take  the  Syriac 
plural  ending  of  masculines  in  f-  ;  e.  g.  yZiOOSSi^JZi}  i'jt Kf xo'n'oi, 
L^2)  cpaXayysg,  tSü..O>  i^o/fAara.  Less  frequently  do  they  take 
the  plural  terminations  of  feminines  in  \l  ;  e.g.  (ZOID^  (xiip^avaj, 
IZojAcol  (froiSicc.  Letters  which  constitute  the  Greek  singular 
terminations  are  commonly  omitted;  but  in  some  instances  retained; 
e.  g.  |sQnV)l  vofxoi  from  vojxoj.  The  plural  terminations  (Js?  and  rsg, 
from  ig  and  a?,  are  represented  by  |,i  and  |4  ;  e.  g.  j,  iSo  xXsiSsg 
from  xXsig',  [^ijkJfi]  olvSpiolvtss  from  avS^iag.  The  Syriac  often  re- 
tains the  termination  of  the  Greek  plural  and  of  the  cases,  represent- 
ingthe  accusative  aj  (first  declension)  by  «IX),  %CD(,  JCDO  and  «£00  f; 

7     0  «7   7     I  7     3:*%7 

e.    g.     «1X1301     ^wva^,       «JDD|J_a^    (pjaXa^,       «löQJjZI     'Aä>)va^, 

17-^  7  -  «X 

;'^in  Ksyx^sag;   oi  and  ou^  (second  declension)  by   Q   and 


DIFFERENT   RELATIONS   OF   THE   NOUN  129 

»COO;      e.   g.     QQaQ^^I  27-WÜ0J,     %CDQ2uJ1aä  ^/Xj-jr-n-ou^;   and 

;  e.g.  llJaLO  xs(paXaia;  the geuitive 
'i  ^-S'  \®^-*^'l  ä^X^iwv  ;  SS  and  a^  of  the  third  declension 
are  represented  by  «iXLfc.,  *CD,  %£0\  and  ^flOO  ;  e.g.  *£D;rQO  Kajtfa^a^, 
JDD|o\a-7rXaxag,  >00OlA-^g1  'EXkr\vas  *,  £«?  from  the  singular  in  is 
is  represented  by  «£CU. ;  e.%  g.  «miCTD?]  a]^s(fsis  ;  and  the  neuters 
ending  in  ara,  are  represented  by  |4  ^^i<i  til  ?  0.  g.  l^^ißyiOj  and 
P4H^i«0>  Soy  liar  a.  Some  of  these  plural  endings  occur  in  Latin 
nouns  ;  e.  g.  «ID pQJf  annonm  ;  %S£i\\^SC)\o  castra.  The  same  is 
true  in  respect  to  Syriac  words  ;  e.  g.  kTOjl..  garden^  for  1i-t  from 
lAl^.   (comp.  Ägrell  Otiol.  Syr.  p.  46—49). ' 


§  45.     Different  Relations  {States)  of  the  Noun. 

1.  Besides  the  absolute  and  construct  state  of  the  Hebrew^, 
of  which,  the  latter  marks  the  genitive,  there  is  in  Syriac 
and  Chaldee,  an  emphatic  state.  It  originally  marked  the 
noun  with,  the  definite  article.  It  also  occurs  where  we 
should  not  expect  to  find  the  definite  article. 

Rem. — The  indefinite  article  is  expressed  by  the  absolute  state, 
or  by  pM  one.  There  are  many  nouns  which  never,  or  very  seldom, 
occur  in  the  absolute  state;  e.g.  [[I^QM  heat,  }^(10  situation, 
Yjo'Z  hull,   VZoli  death,   etc. 

2.  The  construct  state  ;  a)  of  nouns  niasc.  sing.,  does  not 
differ  from  the  absolute  state ;    e.  g.    ^  good ;    but  in  the 


180  DIFFEEENT  RELATIONS   OF  THE   NOUN. 

plural,  the  ending  ^a-  is  changed  into  «-».- ;  e.  g.  *i*^C  con- 
struct  state  from  ^ajqZ»  Nouns  masc,  which  form  the  plural 

•n  .  .  .  '' 

by  -ju-  (§  44.Eem.l),  change  that  termmation  mto  »a^  ;  e.g. 
^JLA^  from  ^r^ ;  5)  in  the  fem.  sing.,  (-  of  the  absolute 
state  is  changed  into  2  ;  e.  g.  Aoi  from  )^4»  To  the  ter- 
minations Q  and  *j^  only  2  is  added  ;  e.  g.  2on\V>  from 
nn\V) ,  A^'^  from  wi^»  In  the  plural^  Z  is  appended 
instead  of  y  ;  e.g.  A£l4  from  i^.^* 

3.  The  characteristic  of  the  emphatic  state,  for  both  gen- 
ders and  numbers,  is  final  1  (=  ^  the  Hebrew  article).  This 
IS  ;  a)  attached  to  the  sing,  of  nouns  masc.  with  _1-  preceding; 
e.g.  {Sül  from  ^Ql  people.  In  the  plural  the  xioun  masc.  takes 
the  termination  (*  with  the  falling  away  of  *jl-  ;  e.  g. 
I  r^y.  ^/le  men,  (from  the  constr.  state  ^»r^y»)  from  ;^yt; 
h)  in  the  emphatic  state  fem.  sing,  and  plur.  |-.  is  attached 
to  the  constrigkct  state.  In  tji^  sing.,  i_  falls  away  before  L  ; 
e.  g.  lA^oArü  from  constr.  state  A^oA^^  In  the  plural,  — 
is  retained  before  Z ;  e.  g.  1  A^oAo  from  A^oZ^» 

•J)     7 

Rem.  1. — The  emphatic  state  plur.  masc.  ends  in  (j^.  in  nouns 
which  take  ^.a«  in  the  plural,  (§  44.  Rem.l) ;  e.  g.  (',^^  from 
^  ,.ÄiD»     Only  three  nouns  take  (.»»  instead  of  (ju.  ;  viz.    (••^4 

«•n«.  P  ^  i>..9 

bo7/s,  \^jk^Q  fragments,  and  (-a^M  i»reas^,  from  the  emphat.  sing. 
U-j^,  M^^7  H»r**»  The  emphatic  forms  }Ll}h  water,  and 
I   >  V)»  heaven,  belong  here.     Buxtorf  cites  yet  a  third  form,  with 

»Ö      P  »9   9..  *    9"  9  ^     9. «9     «I 

U-  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  IX.  24.  (a^;     26.  |-jLliD;    Ephes.  ii.  11.   f-M*r"1* 

But  these  forms  are  not  recognized  by  Amira,  and  the  form  in  (a»« 
should  perhaps  be  restored  in  these  cases,  as  more  correct.  The  fol- 
lowing  should  be  noted  as  irregular  emphatic  plural  forms  :  p*^*^j 


DIFFERENT  RELATIONS  OF  THE  NOUN.  131 

from  \£i\  fruit,    [iMukJ  from  U»^>  odor,    J-JOV^from  \Q\j^si(/ht^ 
(Aq  from  {A^i^  house,   etc. 

Rem.  2. — Feminines  with  masculine  endings  (§  43.  Rem.2),  form 
tlie  emphatic  state  like  masculines  by  attaching  the  termination  (-.; 
e.g.  ^)(  mr^Ä,  emphat.  state  Jl)  I ;  ^0;ü  ^nee,  emphat.  state 
iDJQSiÜ*  Before  the  ending  (-  of  the  fern,  absol.,  Q  is  inserted  and 
quiesces  in  —  ;  e.g.  JLOpj»*  from  jOfj^yoy.  Forms  with  ^ju^  take 
\Da^*  Some  words  in  the  emphatic  form  take  Q  before  the  last 
radical;  e.  g.  1A-^CId|Sd  from  |jD]k)/ooc?.  Feminines  which  are 
formed  from  masculines,  like  l^r^y«  from  J^yi,  and  especially 
adjectives,  form  the  emphatic  state  fem.,  by  affixing  the  syllable 
ifL  to  the  masc.  absol. ;  e.  g.  lAli^  (from  ^i  masc).  Adjectives 
in  t  change  this  termination  into  w»- ;  e.g.  lAa-jL^  from  ü-^  ^"^^• 
Those  in  ^  take  u.  after  1 ;  e.  g.  IAiI^m'^Lo  from  ^IOm*^ 
compassionate.  In  the  emphat.  state  plur.,  some  words  change  a. 
before  finto  Q  ;  e.  g.  IZoiu  from  IIqj  «Aee/».  Some  take  Q  ; 
e.  g.  VZoiiiD  from  t^  part.  Others  insert  jl  ;  e.  g.  1Aji^]Sd 
from  12'pfiD^  bundle. 

Rem.  3.— The  emphatic  form  is  found  even  before  the  genitive, 
which  is  formed  by  J  ;  e.  g.  "Jli!^?  ^^  servant  of  the  king 
(vid.  Syntax,  §  VS). 


182 


TABLE   OF  RELATIONS  OF  NOUNS. 


Table  of  the  Different  Relations  (States)  of  the  Noun, 

MASCULINES.        ^^^  fM^l^  ^ 


A.  Nouns  of  one  and    two    syllables    with    immutable    vowels. 
(Decl.    1.   §   48). 

Plural.  u  Singular. 

emphat. 


constr. 


..7  P   7 
..    7    -X  7 


.>WÖS 


absol.    B    emphat. 


..I   p   7 

..  X  .X  7 

i..p    p 


»i     0  0   7 

^0    >.  7 

fcoL 


constr.  {,nd  absol. 


0    7 
•X  7 

^   p.     p 


Head. 

Vessel. 
Thief. 

Herb. 
Nazarite. 

Nation. 


B.  Nouns   in   which  —  and  —  of  the  ultimate  syllable  fall  away, 
but  the  vowel  of  the  penultimate  is  retained      (Decl.  II). 


^^..  7 

IjCJlCD 


X  ..     p 


7 ..  p 


7    ...X 

7  7 


:.r 


*   P  7 

IP         p 
JCJICD 


7  7 


sJO^r^ 


Talent. 

Witness. 

Hand. 

Altar. 


DECLENSION   OF  NOLANS. 


133 


C.  Nouns  in   which  —  (in  gutturals  —  )  of  the  ultimate  syllable 

7 

falls   away,   and  the  vowel  —  appears  over  the  antepenultimate 
radical  consonant.     (Decl  III). 


jX^r^AliO 


^i'Sfc^^Ak) 


W'^t^ 


\4£>tiO  (One  dead).^^^-,^-^^' 


D.  Segholate  forms,  which  begin  with   a  vacant   consonant,    over 

7  1»  ...  ^      , 

which    the   original  —  or  —  reappears   in   inflection,    or    Q   is 
assumed  in  their  stead      (Decl.  IV). 

I 


^  ..-«        7 

|Soa» 


..  .7         7 

..7  7 


■liii^ 


*    P       -x 


•  •X      -X 
..IX      7 
..      X       7 


7 


King, 

Holiness. 

Master. 

Day. 

Eye. 

Impure. 


E.  Nouns  derived  from  Verbs  1]"  ending  with  V- ,  *^5  *^ »  i^  which 
1   passes   into    «^   and   is   movable  as  in  both  the  other  forms 


(Decl.  V). 


•  P  7   p.. 

^P,  0      TO.. 

IZoij 

7     P" 

.    P   7P" 

Zql> 

■»  p.» 
P    7   "P 
1^7' 

* 
^  >  o« 

7          7 

1 » oa         fo»      Prisoner. 


(ij  Herdsman. 
,  >  VmVn  ^  [bandoned. 


184 


DIFFERENT   RELATIONS   OF   THE  NOUN. 


F  E  M  I  N  1 1^  E  S.  i.^A'^H^ 


lui 


A.  Nouns  with  immutable  vowels  (Q,  «-i-.,etc.)  before  the  ending 
U  (Decl.  I). 


UoAq  Virgin,  JJo  Bride,  ^L^  City, 


Plural. 


empbat. 


constr. 


AL'^Io 


absol 


Singular. 


emphat. 


constr. 

A^ 


absol. 

floAa 


B.  Nouns,  whose  final  syllable  begins  with  two  consonants,  which, 
in  the  emphat.  state  sing,  have  _I_  or  -1.  inserted  between  them 
(Decl.  II). 


l]k)>l  Widow,    13!^'    Chariot,    ^Jl  Alms. 


12^^-,'r 

ASsoiT 

-ioiT 

l^^i^if 

t^sS 

Xi^;^ 

Ai,^ 

^.^ 

IV 

^^ 

l^oji 

Aoji 

^?1 

VAoji 

Ao)i 

C.  Nouns,  in  whose  emphat.  state,  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is 
moved  forward  to  the  second  vacant  consonant  (  Decl.  Ill ). 


*  IvnjI  Par^wer,     flLl  Cowr. 

p     ..     7 

12-,^^« 

2*^L 

ii^- 

^- 

^^ 

1^ 

*x^ 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


135 


D.  Derivatives  of  Verbs  ]]  ending  in  ^-Zand  lo,   whose  «^  and 
O  in  the  emphat.  state  sing,  quiesce  in.^  and  _:^  ( Decl.  IV ). 


|!Lk»0*  Blame ^    fni  n  Animal^     \"^L  ^"*^' 


l2\l>[»'o 


*Pi     0" 


AjIajo« 

0         ...X         ( 

lolL 

0   ••  7 

Ali^ 

^ 

l^^o 


12< 


•   7  7 

ZCLiLJ» 


U-mO 


Ui^ 


E.  Derivatives  of  Verbs  p  ending  in  Q  and  «.x«  (  Z ),  beginning 
with  two  consonants,  and  having  O  iind  wi  movable  in  the  plural 
(  Decl.  V  ). 

«k  4\  X  X  • 

Q.^*    Thing ^    Qm.Lo  Plague^    ^r-^   Creature,     Q.^»   Request^ 
Alio  Par  if,    OjSd  .Dominion. 


Alio 


0         ..1» 

l2aMl^ 

Zqj^ 

^a^ 

Xt:-^ 

Zu'3 

^•^ 

M^l 

^.5 

\°^l 

12^ 

2oiV) 

0    7   .. 

^qiSd 

l2o3i> 

2o3i5 

P..7    P 

VZoo, 

2Qa^ 

l2o»vi 

2aMio 

lA.-^ 

A^>o 

Viol, 

2ai^ 

l2dio 

Alio 

rzä-Ai) 

Lh-^ 

136  NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

§  46.  Nouns  with  Suffixes, 

The  noun,  in  taking  suffixes  (see  §  16.  2.  B.  and  table  of 
suffixes,  §  16),  undergoes  the  following  changes : 

1.  In  masculines  ;  a)  the  suff.  in  the  sing.,  is  attached  to 
the  emphatic  state,  with  the  falling  away  of  "U  ;  e.  g.  pNV» 

(from  .^,S^),  with  the  suffix  .in\Vi>     In  decl.  I.  III.  IV.  V. 

(§  48.  A)  the  radical  vowels  are  not  changed.  In  nouns 
of  decl.  II.,  the  final  vowel  of  the  absolute  state  _2_  or  _!_,  re- 
appears before  the  suffix  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plural ; 

e.  g.    ^-^,    emphat.  ]^\n,    with    suffix    .  iV)\s  ;  jOL-flO, 

jOlflO ,  with  suffix  .OOljCflflD^  So  also  monosyllabic 
nouns,  which  lose  Jl  or  _!_  in  the  emphatic  state,  take  it 
again  before  the  suffix  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plur. ;  e.g. 

2>a*  ,  emphat.  |^»s  ,  with  suffix  ^«^s ,  y!^£uM  (^'^   from 

•^Q),  etc.     In   nouns,    derived   from  Yerbs   ]]  ending  in  \1 , 

emphat.  state  t  (Decl.  V),    v*  before  the   suffix   of  the  1 

sing.,  2  and  3  plur.,  quiesces  m  _^  ;  e.  g.  «i  »\^  ,  .o^ > \ ^ 

from  )]!(5 ,  emphat.  Ij^L^  ;  but  before  the  other  suffixes  w>  is 

movable  ;  e.  g.  »^j^^  ,  oi>\^  ;  (  and  according  to  Syriac 
grammarians,  *u  is  movable  even  before  the  suffix  1  sing ; 

e.g.  wi.1^.4)-  The  same  is  true  also  of  nouns  ending  with  »-»-I 

(passive  participles  of  Pa.  Aph.  and  Shaph.  of  Verbs  ]]j'  §32.1, 

•X  X  7  7  7  T  7 

§48  masculines,  Decl.V);  e.g.  ^oouAmio,  »^AmLo  (.  >  .A^Vn) 
from  ^Amk)  drinh.  These  nouns  with  suffixes  of  the  1, 
sing,  are  pronounced  like  the  absol.  state  ;  e.  g.  -»A^Vn  Ytiy 
drinks  («-lIöjQO  m?/  throne  from  "ImjCLD  is  an  exception). 
Here  belong  all  the  emphatic  forms  ending  with  ^L» ,  having 
a  vacant  consonant  preceding,  excepting  \k*^  master^  which 
with  a  suffix  is  as  follows  :  ^'fh  ,  j^',1d,  cft^Sd  ,  .OOT^,  etc. 
Finally,  in  emphatic  nouns  ending  in  [a,  having  a  vowel 
preceding,  the  general  rule  is  followed;  e.g.  ]lyJJl  reflection^ 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  13; 

with  sultix  »A-Ä.1.01 ,   or  faO'rlD  creator^  with    suff.    *xuO'-Q 

"'^  "  ^  0  0  ^^   ' 

^O'rO»  The  same  is  true  of  nouns  with  ll  for  ]u ;  e.  g. 
llUao  with  suff.  J\^ori ,  yUciCi,  ^^Siilaa,  etc.,  plur.  J(1q^ 
»^P»Q^»  But  in  cases  where  the  termination  |"|  does  not 
stand  for  "U ,  as  in  l)ico  ,  1  takes  Lin.  occuL  in  suff.  1  sing. 
and  2  and  3  plur. ;  e.  g.  J\iai ,  ^tia> ,  etc.  In  the 
other  suff.,  and  in  the  phir.  with  suff.,  the  vowel  of  ]  is 
thrown  back  upon  the  preceding  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g. 
«jLDpLfiD  ,  ^fl£0  ,plur.  wapiX) ,  ^pL£D  ,    etc. 

b)  Plural  suffixes  in  the  masc.  are  attached  to  the  construct 
fern  (§  45.  2.  a)  with  which  the  suff.  1  sing,  forms  a  crasis ; 
e.  g.  »*n\V)»  In  the  sing,  masc,  however,  w*.  passes  into  Q ; 
e.  g.  wiOinn\V)  (also  .-lOlO-.  ==  Germ,  aü  (Engl,  oi,  nearly ), 
according  to  Lud.  de  Dieu^  p.  160,  but  not  according  to 
Amira) ;  and  in  the  3  fem.  —  before  «^  passes  into  «, ;  e.  g. 
OlinSv»  (§  16.  B).  Plural  nouns  with  ^^  ,  attach  the  suf- 
fix  to  the  construct  form  ending  in  «uui ;  e.  g.  ^->-^yi  with 
suff.  %,in!!^.. ,  waOlOi^..^     So  also  in  the  emphatic  ending 

%    07  ^\  ~        fV^  ^\  ••■7 

with  U-  ;  e.g.  >»^-i^yt ,  w»oiQJi.y.  (see  Lud.  de  Dieu,  p.  163). 
Also  plurals  with  ^ll ;  e.g.  ]  i  A^,  with  suff.  JX^  and  «i  l\l, 

and  those  plurals  which,  with  the  suffix  of  1  sing.,  differ 
from  the  sing,  with  the  same  suff.  only  by  taking  Eibui  ; 
e.g.  llAmLo  drinh^  with  suff.  ^4*^ ;  pl^^"-  emphat.  j-i IAaSd 

..7  7  7    .     ••      7 

with  suff.  »uAmSo  and  ^aAäSd  my  drinks. 

Rem.  1. — Collective  nouns  sing,  with  Ribiii,  take  the  sufF.  sing.; 
e.g.  lliwith  snff.  CJul ,  j^il*  Only  ]jül  takes  the  suff.  plur. ; 
e.  g.  ^OlÖmil^  Amira  p.  213,  supposes  that  U>Q£)  with  both 
suffixes  belongs  here. 


188  KOUNS  WITH    SUFFIXES. 

Rem.  2.  \st\  father,  \j^\  brother,  \j!l^  father-in-law,  are  formed 
anomalously.  The  first  two,  with  the  siifF,  of  the  1  sing.,  change 
—  into  —  ;  e.  g.  »-uQ|»  The  last  takes  —  ;  e.g.  «iSf)»t.  Final  | 
before  the  other  suffixes  is  changed  into  Q;  e.  g.  ^QS| ,  •ulSOSI  , 

•X       ^7  .      9v        »7  9^         ^7 

•jOlQIDf ,  OlQOl ,  ^QQf ,  etc. 

2.  In  Feminines ;  a)  the  suffix  in  the  sing,  is  attached 
to  the  form  of  the  emphat.  state  with  a  union  vow  el  preced- 
ing ;  e.g.  oii\Lk5j1  from  USO)*)  widow,  emphat.  state  lAVvn;^, 
The  suffixes  of  the  1  sing,  and  of  the  2  and  3  phir.  are 
attached  to  the  construct  state  without  the  union  vowel, 
to  avoid  the  concurrence  of  three  vacant  consonants  ;  e.  g. 
^1\Cua  from  VrOjs* ,  constr.  state  L\Cl»^* 

Rem. — From  l-ZfiD  (emphat.  state)  mistress^  is  found  tOCn2;SD» 
In  \L*f^  daughter,  constr.  state,  Z^  with  the  sufi*.  of  the  1  sing.,-« 
moves  forward  from  the  first  to  the  second  consonant ;  e.  g.  tuL'^iDi  ♦ 
It  should  be  remarked  that  the  letter  marked  with  Linea  occultans 
is  to  be  pronounced,  if  the  above  suffix  occur ;    e.g.    |Ai*,Sd  with 

•X       .7        X  ^9.       I  .71  ■■      * 

sufF.   .QD/\l-i,iO,  |£pl  with  suff.   •alpl»     Amira  asserts   (p.   190) 
that  the  laterSyrians  have  the  form.tOCJlAX-i^  ,  etc. 

b)  In  the  plural,  feminines  take  singular  saffixes ;  e.  g. 
wiAL'oAq  ,  yj^ot^ ,  etc. 

Rem. — In  respect  to  the  cardinal  numbers  (§  50.  2),  it  shouJd  be 
remarked  that  they  take  both  the  sing,  and  plur.  suffixes,  forming 
with  the  first,  possessive  pronouns,  and  with  the  last,  demonstrative 
pronouns ;  e.g.  OlZ;£Ql  his  ten,  ^OOIajZ  those  two,  ^Ou2>Z  those 
two,  .OOuALZ  those  three. 


DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS.  139 

§  47.  Declension  of  Nouns  in  General. 

Nouns  are  varied  in  respect  to  inflection  (§§44.46)  accord- 
ing to  their  form,  either  with  or  without  any  vowel  changes. 
Thus  they  are  divided  into  tv/o  principal  classes,  viz. ;  those 
with  immutable  and  with  mutable  vowels.  The  latter  class, 
on  account  of  its  diversities,  may  be  arranged  under  several 
paradigms,  and  together  with  the  former  class,  takes  the  place 
of  the  declensions  of  the  western  languages  (comp.  §  48). 


§  48.  Exhibition  of  Nouns  according  to  Declension. 

A.  Masculines. 

Decl.  I. — This  includes  all  monosyllabic  nouns  as  well  as 
those  having  more  syllables  than  one,  with  immutable  vow- 

els    (^, ,  Q,  Q,)    e.  g.  %ä^>  liead.^  p^O  master^  ^O^JiD  lean, 

Q.i  midst,  ^.Jj^kQSi  partition^  »aZoZ  native.  To  the  latter  class 
belong  likewise  those  nouns  whose  penult,  syllable  is  either 
a  close  one  ;  e.  g.  t  ClOJ-»  herbage^  (gentile  nouns  with  «.k. ; 
e.  g.  *>A'r^  Nazarite\  or  such  as  would  have  a  close  penult 
syllable,    if  the   Syrians   employed   duplication  of  letters 

0  7 

(=  Dagh.  forte) ;  e.  g.  *^2l1..  thief 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  nouns  derived  from  Ml  Verbs  with  — ^ 
which  in  the  plural,  double  the  final  radical  letter,  and  mark  the 
first     of    the    two    doubled    letters    with    Lin.    occult.  ;     e.    g. 

7  17  -X  3: 

^QLnation,  plur.  -.biOSOl«  But  monosyllabic  nouns  having  Q  and  a., 

-  I  *>  7 

and  m  the  emphat.  state,  which  change  —  and  —  into  — ,  belong  to 

«s  *0  7  I 

segholate  forms(Decl.IV);  e.g.  ^CL»  day,  emphat.state  JSOQa  ;  ^-lA 
eye,  emphat.  state  ]uS ;  as  do  those  also  in  which  under  the  same 
circumstances  Q  is  transposed  ;  e.  g.  **0j£)  holiness,  emphat.  state 
]i>QD^  In  J>ai^  young  man.,  ^IQl  kid,  and  ja^V^  paradise, 
_1  falls  away  in  the  inflection  and  u.  with  JL  preceding,  forms 
ai  ;  e.  g.  emphat.  state  |^r>i\\ ,  etc. 


140  DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS. 

Decl.  IL  This  includes  nouns,  with  _I_  and  JL,  which  have 
two  consonants ;  e.g.  ^Q*  name^  or  two  syllables,  of  which 
the  penult. is  either  a  mixed  one  as  in  ^\4^1d  (part.  pass. 
Aph.),  t»»naV)  mighty  ;   or  whose  middle  radical  must  be 

7  7  7  -n 

doubled;  e.g.  po  a  talent  ;  ;2)«  sparrow  ;  or  has  an  immu' 

•7   9  _  ^•'        *     0  ^  «a        7        X 

table  vowel ;  e.g.  ^1^  eternity  ;  jOlfiO  witness  ;  ^\.^..  wheel. 
In  these  nouns,  the  vowel  of  the  final  syllable  falls  away 
excepting  in  the  sing,  before  the  suff.  of  the  1  sing,  and  be 
fore  the  2  and  3  plur. ;  e.  g.  emphat.  state  ]^\s  with  suff. 
Ol  vis  S  ,  .  iV^Ss,  and  .OOlSoSl* 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  pt  hand^  emphat.state  |r»( ;  plur.,_ipA|, 

y*       7  -^0*7  ' 

etc.  Forms  also  like  «ax!D^  altar ,  and  (m^,^  belong  here, 
which  take  a  new  syllable  with  _2_  over  the  first  radical  letter  in 
conseq'ience  of  an  accumulation  of  consonants  ;  e.  g.    t^iJSrSo  (see 

7     7  ^  *       5  ^ 

§  15.  4).  The  following  are  examples  :  vMJflO  morning^  «.^A^lLo 
opening^  etc.  From  ^i\V)  fountain^  appears  the  emphat.  state 
]t  I  \V) ,  plur.  fju-  i W)> 

Decl.  III.  To  this  belong  those  nouns,  which,  throughout 
their  inflection,  lose  JL  (before  gutt.  JL)  of  the  final  syllable  ; 
but  take  _L  as  a  helping  vowel  over  the  antepenultimate 
radical  consonant,  viz.  ;  in  participles  Ethpe.  ;  e.  g. 
^^y^^Alk:  dead^  emphat.  state  IJ^^AliD* 

Decl.  IV.  Here  are  to  be  enumerated  all  nouns  which  cor- 
respond with  Hebrew  segholate  forms  (see  Gesen.  Lehrgeb. 
p.  568  sq).  Such  for  the  most  part  in  Syriac,  are  monosyl- 
labic nouns  which  begin  with  a  vacant  consonant,  and  have 
for  their  characteristic  vowel  _L  or  _l,  which  appears  first 
in  the  emphat.  state  over  the  first  radical.  In  this  form  the 
noun  remains  unchanged  throughout  its  formations.  They 
may  as  in  Hebrew,  be  divided  into   derivatives  of  verbs 

with  and  without  gutturals,  and  derivatives  of  üi  and  »^^ 
Verbs. 


DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS.  143 

A)  To  tlie  first  class  belong  forms  like  j^  Idng,  emphat. 
state  ]alk)  ;^  -^  hooh,  emphat.  state  l-a»;  Xrc/u'^  em- 
phat.  state  ]'^-^  with  suff:  oiolso ,  .ooi-r£ia> ,  J\^,  To 
the  form  with  Hholem  in  Hebrew  corresponds  ^o^  holiness 
emphat.  state  Ujab;  j^o-^Q  hiee,  emphat.  state  ]l)>aQ 
(comp.  §  15.  2.  B.  b).     The  same  applies  : 

^  B)  In  forms  with  gutturals;  e.g.  j^i  slave,  emphat.  state 
Ijni ;  ^i^  master,  emphat.  state  |]1q»  Here  belong  also 
emphatformslikellifear^/i,  "{Vji cedar,  \iho\  food,  X>^yo]way. 
C)  Finally,  derivatives  of  Yerbs  ^  and  oi  lose  -lor  -^ 
belonging  to  the  middle  quiescent  radicals  a.  or  Q»  In  con- 
nection with  _L,  JL  and  Q  form  the  dipthongs  ai  and  a?^ ;  e.g. 
^^^  eye,  emphat.  state  ^jA;  jdOm  ^^^^7^!,  emphat.state  ]ocuI, 
(AjtO  constr.  state,  /iowse,  emphat.  lAxO). 

Rem. — The  following  forms  take  — ,  viz. :  ;£QQ  flesh,  ;^lö  side, 
^J^  counsel,  and  the  emphat.  forms  lib]  mourning,  \iAJXsea, 
^Jjl  threshing  floor,  \ZL^  ship,  I'^l  Zam6 ;  from  ^^"^  etc.  Some 
words  which  would  in  Hebrew,  take  Pattah,  in  Sjriac,  take  J^ ;  e.g. 
^yi'/<5^^5  emphat.state  My»)  ,  etc.  f  is  considered  as  a  guttural  when 
at  the  end  of  JSO^  impure,  emphat.  state  IfSQ^,  plur.  absol.  -j)Sa|^ 
constr.  <-itSü.4 ,  emphat.  1  pio^  ;  and  in  the  emphat.  form  ]]  j2,  plur. 
^|)Z  (  also  ^? |Z  )  from  the  absolute  form  (jZ  grass. 

Bed.  V.  Here  belong  derivatives  (mostly  participles  and 
infinitives)  of  Yerbs  P  (comp.  §  40.)  ending  in  11,  «^  and  ^i— 
The  distinguishing  characteristic  is,  that  ]  is  changed  into  »jl, 
and  is  movable  as  well  as  both  the  other  endings  in  the 
emphat.  state  sing,  and  before  the  suffixes  with  the  union 
vowel ;  e.g.  Vx*  emphat.  state  H^i« »  with  suff.  ouA  . ♦  But 
before  the  suff.  of  the  1  sing,  and  2  and  3  plur.  1  quicsces  in 


142  DECLENSION   OF   NOUNS. 

— ;  e.  g.  .oouiyt»     The  sfime   is  true   in  the  plnr.   which 

ends  with  ^  (§  44.  Eem.  1)   with  the  falling  away  of  ]  ;  e.g. 

»^  ,-      The  suffix  is  attached  to  the  emphatic  state  ending 

with  Xä as  well  as  to  the  constr.  state  ending  with  ^j^a*  In 

respect  to  the  changes  of  the  vowels,  it  should  be  remarked 

that  the  form  with  ]-  takes in  the  emphatic  state,  if  it  be 

a  monosyllable  and  begin  with  a  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g. 
Iju^..  from  p..  revealed.  In  words  of  two  or  more  syllables 
the  preceding  vowel  remains  unchanged  ;  e.  g.  ^V^^  from 
[^»Vr>  |>\  Av>  from  |J..ASd«  Monosyllabic  nouns  with 
*JL  mute  likewise  retain  their  vowels  ;  e.g.  "jLao  from  ,  >nn 
wine.  Finally  nouns  ending  with  «x.  (part.  pass,  of  Pa.  and 
Aph.  see  §  32.  1),  lose  _L  in  the  emphat.  state  sing. ;  e.  g. 
]  Arr>Vn  from  >i\mV)  abandoned ;  but  —  appears  again  in 
the  emphat.  state  plur. ;  e.  g.  ]iSmV>» 

»  i> 
Rem. — From  monosyllabic  nouns   ending  with  (—  we  find  forms 

with  — ;  e.  g.    (ifflO  (Matt.  vi.  4)   from  }£QD»     Also  from  fj^  we 

have  the  plur.  emphat.  Hk.2L4  as  though  from  %%\(j*     Here  belongs 

also  f  "^^  from  the  obsolete  form  pjQA,  constr.  state  plur.   -  >V/^*. 

The  part  Pe.  act.  differs  from  the  noun    of  the  same  form    by  being 

inflected  as  usual,while  thenoun,in  the  plur.takes  the  form  of  feminines 

of  decl.  IV.,    and  f  is  changed  into  Q  movable  with  _I_  preceding ; 

«.g.  [Ly  pasturing,  plur.   ^^^> ,  constr.  « i  iS> ,  emphat.  [^lLj  ;  yLy 

herdsman,  on  the  contrary,  becomes  in  the  plur.  tQl9,  Zoi),  \LQLy* 

From  |;1d  master,  both  forms  of  the  plur.  cccur ;  the  latter  form  in 

(fiD)QD  throne.     The  noun   ('^^ prophet,  in  the  plur.,  contracts  a 

and  I  into  u.,  |>ni ;  while  the  adjective  « i  .i ro  takes  yet  anotherf, 

«j^P     17  -117  ij7     I        7        .»«•»>     I       y 

<;mphat.  |Jju^,phir.  ^U-^^,  *u^^,  (|-v^^^ 


DECLENSION   OF   NOUNS.  143 

B.  Feminines. 

Decl.  L  This  includes  all  the  Feminines  ending  with  \J, 
which  have  an  immutable  vowel  in  the  penult  syllable.  In 
this  case  the  penult  syllable  has  either  a  vowel  with  a  letter 

quiescing  in  it ;  e.  g.  ]]  oAo vir^/m,  or  the  noun  is  a  derivative 

of  Verbs  ^,  in  which  case  in  the  plural,  the  first  of 
the  duplicate  radicals  reappears,  and  takes  Linea  occultans  ; 

e.g.  |Jl  (also  13^)  pretense  from  ^Sil ;  ]]o  hride^  plur.  _!LSo^ 
The  suff.  of  the  1.  sing,  is  appended  to  the  constr.state  with- 
out the  union  vowel ;  e.  g.  ^^A^oAo^  The  suff.  in  other 
persons  is  joined  with  the  form  of  the  emphat.  state  ;  e.  g. 

^^oAc) ,  etc.  (comp.  §  46.  2). 

Rem. — From  ^LaLqH  waistcoat^  appears  the  plur.  _jJ-iZqO  as  if 

from  (^.I-äZqO  or  taljZoO»     Some  forms  with  final  \l  take  Linea 

occult,  in  the  emphat.  state  under  J  ;  e.g.  )la,I^  city,  emphat.  state 

|Al^r^;    or  J  falls  entirely  away  as  in   \^\*S\   another,    emphatic 

state   iZ^jaf* 

Decl.  IL  Here  belong  all  nouns  fem.  whose  final  syllable 
begins  with  two  consonants.  They  have  the  peculiarity, 
«hat  between  these  two  consonants,   in  the   emphat.  sing., 

—  or  —  is  inserted.  This  vowel  is  determined  by  the  vowel 
belonging   to   corresponding  masculine  terminations ;  e.  g. 

llSoi"!  ividow,  (from  ^"^^^j"!  masc),  emphat.  state  f ALSdj]  ; 
II40  (from  ^\4^  masc),  emphat.  state  lA!i4^ ;  before  guttu- 
rals —  is  always  the  vowel  inserted  between  the  two  conso- 

nants  in  the  emphat. ;  e.g.  [j^'^fowl,  emphat.  state  jAj^^a^ 
In  the  reception  of  suffixes  this  declension  agrees  with  decl. 

I ;  e.  g.    c^A^if ,  OlA^SoiV;,  ^AÜL^^  and  OlAl|i>» 

Rem. — Some  insert  Q ;  e.  g.  ]]ak?/a//,  emphat.  lA^oaiD»     So 

too    f;lD>Z  wonder,    ]»i>,*^«Z  love. 

Decl.  III.  This  includes  those  nouns  fern,  whose  vowel  of 
the  first  syllable  is  moved  forward,  in  the  emphat.  state  to 


144  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

the  second  vacant  consonant ;  e.  g.  }^ilLia  female  companion, 
emphat.  '\L\ii** ;  Uyrl  cow,  empliat.  ]Äi^.Il»  Nouns  of  this 
class,  taking  a  suff.  in  the  sing.,  are  treated  like  nouns  in 
decl.  I.  and  II. 

Rem.  .—  Some  nouns  have  several  emphatic  forms.  Thus 
pDjl  alms,  has  three  emphatic  forms  ;  e.  g.  lAojl ,  lAojl ,  ^Aoj]» 
In  the  same  manner  also  are  inflected  |m^>  offering,  jAoUD  terror, 
f*^m  woman,  Pj^ j  fear,  etc.  The  following  contractions  in  the 
emphat.  state  should  be  mentioned  :  I^h^  for  \LLf*^  new,  1^^v\ 
for  (Aia..  from  (121..  vine,  ^A^^  for  ]Al*S\  from  ]l*^\  brick. 

Decl.  IV.  This  includes  fern,  derivatives  of  Yerbs  |J  end- 
ing  in  U  and  |0»  It  should  be  remarked  in  reference  to 
them  that  the  immutable  vowel  of  the  penult  syllable  is 
retained,  and  jl.  and  Q,  in  the  emphat.  state  sing.,  quiesce 
m  —  and — ;  e.  g.  |i\AJs*o  •  from  (^.jsaO  .  reproach,  (ZOi-k» 
from  1qj-m  animal.  If  the  masc.  be  monosyllabic  the  vowel 
of  the  first  syllable  falls  away ;  e.  g.  lA^-L^  from  l!!^.^  girl, 
(Bi  masc).  But  in  the  constr.  state,  and  in  all  the  plurals, 
jb  and  Q  are  movable  ;  e.  g.  AjumO  . ,  Zq-»-m  ,  A^A^ »  plur., 
^i  mO>  ,  etc. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  the  participle  act.  of  Pa.  and  Aph. ;  but 
the  fem.  participle  pass,  in  the  same  conjugations,  ending,  in  the 
masc,  with  %j. ,  takes  —  instead  of  —  in  the  emphat.  state. 
With  this  vowel  jl  forms  the  dipthong  ai  ;  e.  g.  ^>\.tV> , 
emphat.  |Ai\..V)  from  «^..k)» 

Decl.  V.  To  this  belong  mostly  monosyllabic  derivatives 
of  Yerbs  U  ending  with  Q  and  «-a^  (some  end  in  2 ),  which 
begin  with  two  consonants ;  e.  g.  OwiD  calamity,  w»;a  crea- 
iure.    Also  dissyllabic  nouns  belong  here  with  immutable 


ANOMALOUS  NOUNS.  145 

vowels  in  the  penult  syllable  ;  e.g.  qo]  victory^  ^jo2  thanks^ 
whose  O  and  wt  quiesce,  throughout  in  the  sing.  But  in  the 
plur.  where  o  and  ^  are  movable,  some  nouns  (derivatives 
of  Pa.)  take  —  after  the  second  radical  letter;  e.  g.  ol^. 
entreat?/^  plur.  »Q^f ,  Zo-ik.  ,  (ZoLi«»  Nouns  ending  with 
^  belong  here,  which  in  the  plur.  take  Q  with  the  falling 
away  of  2 ;  e.  g.  A^  offering^  plur.  # Ciill ,  Lq!Ll  ,  fZci^» 
Other  nouns  (rierivatives  of  Pe.)  take  —  after  the  first  rad- 
ical letter ;  e.g.  QiDj  resemblance^  plur.  tOiOj ,  2qLdj,  IZqSdj; 
or  with  gutturals  following,  they  take  — ;  e.  g.  CUkSo  hlow^ 
plur.  tQ*AiD,  etc. 

Rem. — The  same  peculiarity  of  taking  a  new  vowel  is  found  also 

^         0  p   "7     0  «»  *  0  7 

in  0;Sd  authority,  plur.  tO^SD  ,  etc. ;  liOl  sheep,  plur.  tQOJ  and 
I pO  a  hundred,  plur.  (Zo pD  as  if  from  QOJ  and  OpD»  So  also  in 
some  nouns  which  are  not  derivatives  of  |J  ;    e.  g.  QoN*^ partition^ 

p       fy    0  -x  P  »0«  p       -^    o\ 

plur.  .Q-tJi^) ;  OjClCD  testimony,  plur.  |ZO>Ol£D,  and  even 
r>'^\Vn  ^    n^XVn  ^    besides  tO^\V) ,   and  some  others. 


§  49.  Anomalous  Nouns. 

Some  nouns  of  very  frequent  occurrence  are  inflected  in 
a  manner  varying  more  or  less  from  the  above  mentioned 
paradigms  (§  §  47,  48).     This  arises  either  from  an  attempt 
to  unite  different  ground-forms,  or  from  the  simple  ground 
form  conforming  less  closely  to  the  general  laws  of  inflection. 

These  nouns  are  the  following  : 


146 


PARADIGMS  OF  NOUNS. 


MASCULINES. 


Plural, 


emphat. 

constr. 

absol. 

loial 

•'     7     0  ^7 

i2ou3r 

la\i:i( 

|Jl10 

.A.IO 

^ 

TÄO 

^h^ 

..I     p 

]2oiSai 

ioisoi 

]loyir 

ZoTzr 

P  "7    ,^7 

Smgulc 

tr. 

emphat. 

constr 

abso 

W 

^r 

Father, 

1-^ 

7 

7 

Son. 

liuo 

Ax^ 

7 

House. 

]Sa« 

^ 

^ 

Name. 

lur 

i'zr 

i2r 

Place. 

FEMININES. 


I2(kir 

ZoüiDr 

^cÄLÖf 

1 

^r 

1^ 

Ali 

p  .. 

•{l-^ 

Z;^ 

•{li^x 

zo^r 

P   "^7 

\    -iLL 

l2cniir 

zoii^r 

,     ]ho]' 

Ai^r 

I2i 

••     7  »7 

^r 

'    IM' 

Ak)!' 

^Qi^r 

iovbr 

,j^r 

i  l^Sl 

AiiSäi 

1I£. 

wUL» 

^-^ 

li^ii 

Ai. 

«p.  p  ••   * 
|Zq2l£D 

/n<^m 

.Q2i£D 

I^SUX) 

._^ 

fAlöoj 

Alüo) 

^o; 

1^0} 

Aao) 

5.01 


]i^l 


%  P     -x 


Mother, 
daughter. 
Sister. 
Maiden. 
ML 
People, 
Year. 
Lip. 
Place. 


148 


NOUNS   WITH  SUFFIXES. 


Paradigms  of  Nouns 

A.  Masculine  Nouns. 

Singular.            Decl.  II. 

Decl.  IV. 

Decl.  V. 

Stat,  absol.                 >cnco 

»^i^D 

n 

^iLm^ 

Witness. 

King. 

Boy. 

Drink. 

Suff.Sing.  1  c.        ^JCJUD 

•xa^V) 

.^2^ 

.»  >A^Vn 

2  m.        »^jcnoo 

^i^Llo 

.^ 

2  f.     wklS^OlCD 

.inn\V) 

..n^'i 

3  m.      OlJOlflO 

oialk) 

oiAl 

oiIAaLo 

3  f.        OIJOUT 

oioLk) 

chA4 

ouAaSd 

Suff.plur.  1  c.         ^jOim 

^n\^o 

.A^ 

^AaSo 

2  m.     .QOjOlflD 

^oan^V) 

-o«^»A^v> 

2  f.      ,-i-OjaiCD 

^.nnVo 

^-k^Li/^LLO 

3  m.   ^001>0T£D 

^oaialLD 

^cuSi 

3  f.     ^OIjOlflD 

^oiiiLk) 

^olJU 

(To  the  sufF.  1  sing,  of  the  forms  y^  and 

*jiÄm!i  add 

§  46.  1.  a). 

Plural.                 ^JOICD 

^ 

7             9 

SufF.sing.  1  c.         i-ijaiCD 

*Aa\^ 

-14 

-l:^ 

V            0 

2  m.      ^)OICD 

^^aLV^ 

.-^ 

--1^ 

2  f    *jL.ILi>C7lC0 

.»OinNV) 

-aA4 

..n/.Vi 

7           l> 

3  m.*u010)ai£D 

•jfno.'^V.V) 

*jaia!i4 

w>aiQli.'(J 

3  f.        OU?Ol£D 

oiinNv^ 

cfiA7 

oull2 

Suff.plur.  1  c.        ^J01£D 

2  m. .  QUA) aim 


K 


7»         7 


2  f.  ^-JLlLijOm)      ^-»^ 


7f         7 


3  f.  ^dujoicD    ^ctLoÜ     ^ou2L4    ^oulll^ 


NOUNS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


149 


with  Suffixes, 
Comp.  §  49.     Table. 


Son. 
p 

•  0 

7 


Father 

•X      .y 
•X      ..y 

^01  on)] 

.-  *■       ..y 
•X        -x     .»y 

^      -"    X         ^7 

•x         -x      ^y 

.001  anil 


i^ooc?,    Waters. 

..      7 

..     7 

^aioio 
oilso 
^^ 

* 

♦.  ..     7  »>  ••  7-  » 

r>rn,Vn  .001 1  iV) 


B.     Feminine 
Decl.  1.        Decl.  IV. 


Maiden. 

-Alia 

;a^4 

ai'AA^ 

^ooiA^oAa    ^ooiAH^ 
^oiASoAs  ^oiAIX^ 

^SAo  ^ 

-Al!4 


WoAa 

Virgin. 

vaIjALoA^ 

oii\lbA£i 

oi^LoA^D 

.ÄLoAiD 


Nouns. 
Decl  V. 

Petition. 


oi7q1* 


^ooiZol. 


wkASoAo 

j^ASoAo 

^judIMLoAi:) 

OlÄSoAlD 

oi'ASoA£5 
tASoAiD 


oi^Alli 
(ii^AlVi 


.QDAlLi 


.qdALoAo 

^.^Al^oAo  ^-IdAH^ 

.ooiASoAni  ^ooiAll^ 

^oiASoAts  ^oiA.A.4 


n^.       y^ 

•Pm  p«y^ 

oiZa\# 


,001  ZcA» 


^01 


zix; 


150  ADJECTIVES  AND  NUMERALS. 

§  50.  Adjectives  and  Numerals. 

1.  Adjectives  being  derivatives  of  verbs  (see  §  40.  and 
tables)  and  having  the  same  form  as  nouns,,  are  inflected  ac- 
cording to  the  same  laws  (see  §§  44,  45,  48).  In  respect  to 
denominative  adjectives,  see  §  41.  2. 

Rem. — The  Syriac  has  no  special  forms  for  the  comparative  and 
superlative.  For  the  manner  in  which  these  are  expressed,  see 
Syntax   §  77. 

2.  Numerals  are  either  cardinal  or  ordinal.  In  the  former 
we  should  notice  the  peculiarity,  that  masculines  from  3  to 
10,  as  in  Hebrew,  have  feminine  endings  ;  but  feminines,  on 
the  contrary,  have  masculine  endings.  From  20  to  100 
there  is  only  one  form  for  both  genders. 

The  numbers  from  1  to  10  are  the  following  : 


C  A.RDI 

N  ALS. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Maso. 

r,- 

7 

^ 

12»       6. 

^Vl 

^»Z       2. 

MlQ* 

T^      7. 

t^l 

.        l'^\      '■ 

]liß2 

tj^l      8. 

^s-^ 

llojf      4. 

^2 

K.r  9. 

IaIqI»       5. 

•^ 

(•^£01       10. 

Rem. — Upon  the  union  of  these  numerical  words  with  suffixes, 
see  §  46.  2.  b.  Rem. 

The  tens  from  80  to  90  are  expressed  by  the  plural  of 
the  cardinals  from  3  to  9 ;  e.  g.  ^£L2  30,  ^^  >  \n'i(  40, 
^^■■V)m  50,  ^^i  60,  ^^iSn»  70,  ^ilV)2  80,  ^-il»2  90. 
The  plural  of  10  (^jini)  represents  20.  All  plurals  are  of 
the  common  gender.  Iti)  signifies  100,  ^ifco  200,  IILdZ^Z 
or  1Zo]Sd  alz  300,  etc.,  with  the  preceding  unit  in  the  fem- 
imne.  .^iiL  signifies  1000  (instead  of  *a!5^  or  »ai^,  em- 
phat.   IslS.,  plur.   ^i^'^,l[at^);    ^lA^^jl  signifies 


16. 


ADJECTIVES  AKD  NÜMEKALS.  151 

2000,   ^^■•ii^  1^1  8000.   etc.   (with  the  preceding  unit  in 
the  masculine). 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  11  to  19  are  formed  by 
the  union  of  units  with  10  in  one  word,  in  the  following 
manner : 

Fern.  Masc.  Fern.  Masc. 

1  ,m:^ZjZ        'rfXiijZ     12.  'rmiZA«  J 

X'ioiiKLl     -^Z^Z     13.  f^cüü»        ;TT>sn»     11. 

y.rf>\n>y   'rmiAfDjl'    14.        T'rr^l^fJ.;      ;msik)Z ) 

7  7  7  I    iVOM^PZ.  ^  P      «    r       1  fi 

r.Vs;V)M    f^f^^     15.         ,..    ,,       -rmiAiLoZ)  18. 

•r£QlAaV>M  ^  1  ,m{>Z  -r£QlsZ       19. 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  21  to  29,  81  to  39,  etc., 

are  formed  by  the  numeral  representing  the  number  of  tens, 

followed  by  the  numeral  under  ten  preceded  by  O  ;    e.  g. 

(A^Zo  ^L\l  masc.  83,    «aLOmO  ^A»  fem.  65.     Sometimes 

the  units  precede ;  e.  g.  ^;mio  p^J  (  24,  etc.  So  if  the 
number  of  numerical  words  combined  be  large,  the  greater 
numerals   are   always  placed   before    the  smaller ;    e.    g. 

U^o    ^".mio  ll^l^Zo  A%.  1827. 

3.  The  ordinal  numbers,  from  3  to  10,  are  formed  from 

the  cardinal  numbers    by  adding  the  terminations  f-i  masc, 

^Aa-  fem.,  and  inserting  ^  before  the  ultimate  radical.  Foi 
the  first^  a  particular  word  is  used,  and  for  the  second^  a  form 
differing  somewhat  from  the  form  of  the  cardinal  for  2. 

ORDINALS. 

Fern.  Masc.  Fern.  Masc. 

VAaIDpO       V^r^     the  first.    lA^A^^     XkLkL»     the  sixth. 

I'A^w;/  X^^^  the  second.  VAiSan»  liSi*^»  the  seventh. 

ILLJSZ      112uXZ    the  third.  XLJl^I  lA^l  '  the  eighth 

12u1a£)      ]1Ll£j  the  fourth.     ^AAiuiZ  XILm^L     the  ninth. 

iLA^^  ]'>^>^-     the  fifth.     IL-^jlCQI  ll-^jjni      the  tenth. 


152  PARTICLES — ADVERBS. 

The  tens  of  ordinals  from  20  are  expressed,  as  in  Hebrew, 
either  by  cardinal  numbers  or  by  the  addition  thereto  of  the 
terminations  {jl-  masc,  *|Ajl  fem. ;  e.  g.  |ajL;£ü1,  ^JuA^Z, 
[  >  1 » K.^\\ ,   etc.     The  units   are   put  after  ;    e.  g.    {-»Aa^Z 

The  intermediate  numbers  from  11  to  19,  etc.,  are  formed 
by  uniting  the  ordinal  number  10  with  a  unit  of  the  cardi- 
nals, into  one  word,  the  unit  preceding ;  e.  g.  ^A.^^mv  >f 
fem.,|ji;>mSrM  masc.  the  eleventh, \Lä\ > m\Z>Z fem.,  (>'>or>k;/ 
masc.  the  twelfth,  etc.  Sometimes  the  ordinal  10  is  united 
with  a  cardinal  number  and  the  word  is  preceded  by  j  ;  e.g. 

7        7  7  7        ,-»>  •  7 

;mSpi^> ,  'rCQuZj ,  etc. 

Rem. — The  Syrians,  like  the  Hebrews,  express  the  idea  oi  a  part^ 

•X 

by  a  feminine  form  and  the  insertion  of  Q  after  the  first  radical 
letter  ;  e.g.  ^A^oZ,  (1209,  |a1dQa«  third  part,  etc.  Upon  the 
other  relations  of  numbers  comp.  Syntax  §  78. 


CHAPTEE  FOURTH. 

PARTICLES. 

To  Particles  belong  adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions 
and  interjections.  In  respect  to  their  origin  they  may  be 
considered  as  primitive, derivative,  or  transferred  from  other 
parts  of  speech.     The  last  are  by  far  the  most  numerous. 


§  51.  Adverhs. 

1.  The  following  may  be  considered  as  primitive  adverbs: 
^1  so,    JJ  ,  Q^  not,   ^iDL  there,    p  here. 

2.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  with  the 
characteristic  endings   Aj  ,  Zo.  and  A^l ,   are  the  following  ; 


PEEPOSITIONS.  153 

Lk-r»J\_at  last,    AllOyO  at  first,  IqjUI  again,  A^^aK   godly, 

Lä]\jk^  in  short,  Aj^Vr^  Hehraicalhj,  lüol  today. 

3.  As   transferred  from   otlier  parts  of  speech  are  to  be 
considered  those  : 

a)  from   substantives ;     a )   with  a  preposition ;    e.    g. 

IZ'^M^  finally,    IVrAT^   truly,    \XCi\Oi   once,    QyA  inwardly, 

« i  \«  1  ^immediately,  u^S;i^  anew  ;  j3)  without  a  preposition; 

e.  g.  I  »\n  {want)  not,  lAmSD  enough,  oiSo  ,  ^^  wholly,  en- 

tirely,  also  in  the  plural  (AllDl  sometimes  ;  b)  from  adjectives, 

numerals   and   pronouns;    e.   g.    «jQ^ ,  ^.i .t m  very,    >a»A^, 

»CLm^Lo  only,    r**^}  5  \r**^]  «^  once,   ]r**^  immediately,  |SßD 

Aoit?  m?/c7i  f  |i^\ ,  Ql5sD  tvhy  ?    c)  from  verbal  forms,  as  the 

infinitive,  ^^61  again  ;  or  participles  ,^m»»V>\ ,  ^frlulo  ^ 
almost. 

Rem. — Some  adverbs  are  transferred  from  the  Greek  ;  e.  g. 
oWvn  (xaXXov,  |^m>-\V)  (xaXjrfTa,  foa*!  s/x*].  The  Syriae  lan- 
guage is  especially  rich  in  compound  adverbs.  Such  are  tlie  fol- 
lowing :  ]Ljk]  where  ?  ]aulJ  liOA  wherefore?  jJ  ^^XulD,^  not  yet, 
«^ASd|]  liOpl  how  long?  \»ül  notv,  (SDr^  I^OI^  until  now,  etc. 
Among  compound  adverbs  may  also  be  placed  the  circumlocutory 
AfV  not  to  he   (see  §  38).     The  simple  interrogation   is  either  not 

7 

expressed  at  all,  or  by  the  addition  of  .j^  :  the  negative  interroga- 
tion, is  expressed  by  ]] ,  and  loi  !]♦  The  syllable  w**)  prefixed 
to  pronouns  and  adverbs  expresses  an  interrogation  ;  e.  g.  PjiI  ^ 
whence  ?  (J-»  f  who  ? 

§  52.  Prepositions. 

1.  To  the  original  Prepositions  belong  the  prefixes  *Si , 
J  (gen.),  ^  (dat.  and  ace.)  which  are  always  joined  with  a 
noun  or  pronoun,  and  are  vacant  when  the  noun  or  pronoun 

begins  with  a  regular  consonant ;  e.  g.  ^QaT)  ,  n\Sn^> 
Prefix  prepositions  take  the  vowel,  which  is  usually  JL,  when 


154:  PREPOSITIONS. 

the  following  consonant  is  vacant  ;  e.  g.  ]>Vn*«^ ,  )>V^V , 
or  when  the  vowel  falls  back  from  the  quiescents  ]  or  Ol; 

e.  g.   'l]^QO  from  1|Sd  for  ]%D ;     *AiD00i*S  for   wijiooi'^» 

Before  words  wliicli  begin  with  1 ,  •-»  or  cu^ ,  the  vowels,  in 
which  these  letters  quiesce,  fall  back  upon  the  preceding 
prefix  ;  e.  g.  p^^l^  ,  IjI^jO^^)  ,  1^»]] ,  liAA  ,  901^  from 
11>1',  etc. 

Rem. — Before  |Aji  6,  and  ^As,  these  prepositions  take  —  ,  pro- 
bably because  they  were  also  written  (Aa|  and  —aAsI«  In 
>\QQD  and  VOjQD  the  preposition  -^  quiesces  in  Q ,  *  which  falls 
back  (comp.  §  15.  2.  B.  c.  and  the  tables  following);  e.g.  VV<^r>r)\ 
y>,jDQ^ ,  except  when  suffixes  are  appended  with  a  union  vowel,  in 
which  case  the  J_  of  the  second  syllable  falls  away  and  the  original 
form  reappears  ;  e.g.  Ol^>I^on\  etc.  Among  the  original  preposi- 
tions may  also  be  reckoned  the  monosyllables  ^Ql  with,  LoSi^  by, 

ZqI  to. 

2.  Most  of  the  other  prepositions  are  considered  as  trans- 
ferred  from  other  parts  of  speech  ;    a)  substantives  in  the 

P.7'X  »0  7  7 

constr.state  ;  e.  g.  ^^O  before,  LPOy  instead,  »SlXw/or, .  i1  lO 
and  Al.k^  between,  >r^  and  wtj^K»  about,  ZcLmZ  and  L^.j>*Lunder, 
-Ld  (iiomL^liD  2Duri)  from,  >Ao  after ;  b)  substantives  with 
prefixes ;  e.g.  jAfiQQ  according  to,  ^^ioQ-^  against,  ^r^QJ^ 
before  ;     c)   compounds ;    e.  g.   ^  I^A  until  to,   ^\lL  over, 

,Ä!l2  — SD  without,  >,.**  —So  around,  about,  M.2i£)QJ^  ^IsO  against. 

3.  Several  of  the  prepositions  seem  to  have  been  origi- 
nally plural  nouns,  on  which  account  they  are  united  with 

plural   suffixes.     Here   belong    \^over,    >|.,  ^.    after,  a- 

gainst,  jSLLt^for,  ^^n  before,  lQj>*L  under  (comp.  §  16.  2.  C. 
and  the  following  paradigms). 

^Instead  of  saying  that  ^  quiesces  in  Q  the  author  should  have 

said  that  L  takes  the  vowel ..  with  Q  quiescing  in  it,  as  j^  is  not  a 
quiescent  (see  §  13). — Tr. 


PREPOSITIONS  WITH    SUFFIXES.  155 


Prepositions  with.  Suffixes. 
(  §  16.  IL  C.  and  §  52  ). 
A.  With  Suff.  of  the  Sing.  B.  Of  the  Plur. 


Masc.  Fern. 

in.  to.  after.        against.       over,  on  account  of. 

Sing. 

2  f.   «inn  ^Lql^    ^jSi'ib^    .  >nKonr^^  .,n.Kv   ^j^dAS^ 

3  f.     6\L     6\LhL^      giIAo    diSxzaoo^     oiiSs    oi^Aso 

Plur. 

2  m.  .onii  .qoZqL  .QD>i\£)  .onVnoo!^  .oniSs  .o^AÜI^ 

2  f.  ^jljqo ^««iZol ^ jAo ^inSnool  ^i^iSs  ^AS|i^ 

3  m..ooir:i  ^ooiZol.  .ooi>Är^  ^üC^asnna^^öuS^  ^6oiAi^5iD 
3  f.  ^aio  ^diZa^^ai>AQ^ai\noo\  ^OLkük^diAX^ 


Rem. — The  following  take  no  suffixes  :  LaJOi  in,  \Ci^  without^ 
Q.LL  within,  ^*5yl^  over,  L^t^  under,  \^^  until  to,  and 
^!^  'f^SQ   except. 


156  CONJUNCTIONS  AND   INTERJECTIONS. 

§  53.   Conjunctions  and  Interjections. 

1.  The  original  Conjunctioüsare  the  copulative  O  ,  j  that^ 

because  (^before  infinit.),  # f  z/J  ^  as,  since^  q\  or^  «.^D  hence^ 
^Cl^  (for  this  preposition  in   questions  see   §  51.  3.  Kern.) 

7 

namely.  ^>  lest. 

Rem. — O  and  > ,   like  «2  and  ^,    are  prefixed  (see  §52.  1). 

2.  Compound  Conjunctions  are  ;  a)  with  ^1 ;  e.  g.  Qläv  if, 
^f  fli  andJJo^  unless^  ^^  although,  ^J  OOul  and  ^jJI  if 
but,  ^0  —  ^lo  be  it— be  it ;  b)  with  >  ;  e.g.  üj  lest,  especially 
after  prepositions  ;  e.  g,  j  j^l  as,  >  \>h4^  ,  ?  ^^  and  j  «<^\m 
because,  j  ^  ?es^,  j  P^A  wn^z7;  c)  with  other  conjunctions  ; 
e.  g.  ^^u^Ol  hence,  ^  i^V)  ?zow;,  tQ.i  p  therefore,  *£i^  p 
although.     From  the  Greek   are  borrowed  |J  (  aXXa,  ;a.  .  ya^, 

■7»  7  \^ 

3.  Interjections  as  primitives  are  mostly  onomatopoetic  ; 

-    0  X^  0  \   0  0    0 

e.  g.  0*1 ,  ^o I  0  !  «-»o  wo  !  (01  behold  !  «.aGU  Äey  .^  Aa  / 
They  are  sometimes  borrowed  from  other  parts  of  speech  ; 
e.g.  «äoAäI  ,   ^CL^ifyet!    nsnn  I^ray  you  ! 


PAET    THIKD. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER    FIRST. 
THE     PRONOUN. 


§  54.    Use  of  the  Sepo.rable  Personal  Pronouns  and  Suffixes, 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  These  pronouns  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence, denote 
a  certain  emphasis,  and  stand  in  various  relations  to  the  verb 
which  follows  in  the  same  person.  This  relation  is  not  only ; 
a)  that  of  the  nominative  absolute  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xiv.  10. 
5^a>*]j  Ajf  . (>  pio  _-»j  Aj|  hut  ihou^  ivliy  judgest  tliou  thy 
brother  !  Eph.  iv.  20.,  Acts  xix.  15.,  II  Tim.  iv.  5  ;  but 
it  may  be  also  represented ;  h)  by  the  oblique  cases ;  e.g.  a) 
by  the  genitive  ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  11.  o\naV^\  pMo*  |Jj  001 

7      0  ~  . 

«-»01QJ£QSd  luhose  shoes  I  am.  not  worthy  to  unloose^  John  xix. 
11.,  Ephes.  vi.  20  ;  /3  )  by  the  dative  ;  e.  g.  Kirsh.  ii.  2. 
•jul  -  »^  .ri)*^  ]3  \i\o  hut  no  one  comes  to  me,  Luke  xxiii.41 ; 
7)  by  the  accusative ;  e.g.  Kirsh.iv.7.-9.  ^^iSn  ^oAj)?  fSD  001 
Bo  aiLil^  «^^  y^^  ISuSOfclo  ^QmSimIj  \\ \\n  ^oAjI 
ClL^^SiMfiuhat  you  seek  to  find  in  the  night,  I  seek  to  find  in 
the  day   time^   and  find  it  not. 


158  THK    PRONOUN. 

Rem. — They  are  also  emphatic  after  the  verb;  e.g.  Luke  iii,  14. 
— JUa  ^ I  ,^S1  \xhD  what  then  shall  ive  do  ?  Upon  ^Qj]  and  » ^ f 
as  accusatives,  comp.  §  16.  Rem.  1.  and  tlie  preceding  table. 

2.  United  with  substantives,  adjectives  or  adverbs  they 
mark  the  Present ;  a)  of  the  substantive  verb  looi  (see  §38); 
e.g.  «-»01  Vr^'fM  she  is  true-^  Matt.  xxiv.  26.  001  ^^OkkO  he  is 
in  the  desert ;  verse  23.  001  p>01  he  is  here  ;  h)  of  the  finite 
verb  with  its  participle;  e.  g.  p]  '^'\  I say^  tS\  pJl.ji 
thou  art  horn   (comp.  §  64). 

Rem. — (Upon  ]  and  01  see  §  12.  1.  B). — The  contraction  of  the 
pronoun  with  the  participle  or  adjective  into  one  word  is  found  in  the 

y     -^  (J  V  I         I  7 

1  pers.  plur. ;  e.  g.  ■  1  »;0  we  read ,   ^1  » •  ^^Q  we  are  holy.     It  is 
also   found  sometimes  in   other  persons  ;    e.  g.  Eph.  iii.  13.    P^l« 

•X         0     7 

I  beseech  ;  Gal.v.3.  Q£la,x»  he  is  guilty  ;  iii. 11  (comp.  §20.and§37.E). 

3.  Farther  in  these  cases ;  a)  the  pronoun  of  the  same 
person  may  be  doubled,  so  that  the  former  will  denote  the 
subject  and  the  latter  the  substantive  verb  ;  e,  g.  John  i.  20. 
]^\  \l\  I  am  ;  xiv.  20.  tOAjl  ^jJ^  i oAjI  ye  are  in  me  ;  Matt, 
xxvi.  73  ;  or  the  part,  present  of  the  finite  verb  is  placed  be- 
tween ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  11.  1j]  ySLlLD  )j*|  /  baptize  ;  xxvii.  4; 
John  xiii.  13 ;  Barh.  68,  16  ;  105,  14  ;  148,  15. 

ft)   In   the   simple   pronoun    may    be    contained    both 

the   subject   and   substantive   verb  ;    e.  g.  Gen.    xxix.   4. 

1«^^  .;>*  -i —  ^£^3]  joSüji]    whence  are  ye? — ive  are  from 

Haran ;  Assem.  I.  33  ;  12.  13. 

c )  The  pronoun  001 ,  as  substantive  verb,  may  follow 
the   1    and   2   person    as    subject ;     e.    g.    Acts    xxii.   8. 

^OAa  001  PI  lam  Jesus ;  Luke  xxii.  67.    U»,i«V>  OOl  Aj]  ^ 

if  thou  art  the  Messiah  ;  verse  70 ;  xxiv.  18  ;  Ephr.  I.  214.  E; 
Bnrh.  173,  18-20.     Also  ^Qjf  and  ^jf,  follow  the  1  and  2 


PRONOMINAL   SUFFIXES.  I59 

pers.  as  subject ;  e.  g.  Matt.  v.  13.   11j]>  OuAk>  .qjI^'.oAj] 

ye  are  the  salt  of  the  earth;  I.  Cor.  iii.  17;  Barli.  183.  1. 

Rem. — Instead  of  the  pronouns,  thePhiloxenian  version  of  the  N.T. 
uses  Aal  with  suff.;  e.  g.  ^aOIoZLI  '^Xlain\  ^OIuA^l  ^bS{>je  are. 

B.     Suffixes 

1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  of  the  verb  denote  the  accusa- 
tive ;  rarely,  and  for  the  most  part  in  translations  from 
the  Hebrew,  the  dative  ;  e.  g.  wjjAooL  for  ^  AsoL  thou 

hast  given  to   me. 

Rem. — This  imitation  of  the  Heb.  is  neglected  in  passages  of  the 
0.  T. ;  e.  g.  Zach.  vii.  5.  comp,  with  Ephr.  II.  296.  B.  and  Isa.  xxiv. 
4,  comp,  with  II.  65.  C. 

2.  In  the  relation  of  genitive,  the  suffixes  are  attached  to 
the  nomen  rectum  or  to  the  genitive  proper;  e.g.  Ez.  xvi.  18. 

wiJDAo»>    P    PsO    thy    erahroidered    garments^     literally    of 
thine  embroidery   or  ornament ;  vii.  20;  xi.  15  ;  xxvii.  16,  27; 

Matt.  vi.  11.  ^IQJQCDj  }V)»»N  our  necessary  hread^  literally 
of  our   need. 

Rem. — The  suffix  is  seldom  found  with  the  nomen  regens  ;  e.g.  Ez. 

xvi.  27.  |ZCL*.J1>  «-i^AjaJOf  ^Ld  of  thy  lewd  ways,  usually  in  con- 
nection with  )l  iV)!  the  right,  and  |jSü£D  the  left ;  e.g.  Acts.  iii.  7. 
[1  »Vr>   »^  OlpitQ  on  his  right  hand\  Matt.v.29;  Rev.i.I7.  Sometimes 

•  p  -x  p        •  7 

a  double  suffix  occurs ;  e.g.  Ephr.  I.  204.  B.  and  C.  j^pQl^  yV^^ 
thy  first  horn. 

,3.  The  noun   taking  a  suffix  stands  before  an   adjective 

connected  with  it ;    e.  g.  Ps.  Ixxxvii.    1.   l«uir^  oijQ^^ 

•  p  p  ,■"  ^ 
in  his  holy  moimtain]  Ez.  vi.  9;  Ephr.  I.  284.  A.  \^  Oij^o] 
his  good   treasure. 

4.  The  suffix  to  the  noun  is  often  understood  objectively; 

e.  g.  Exod.  XX.  20.  Glll^yfear  before  him  ;  I  Cor.  xi.  25. 
»AJpoJbi  in  remembrance  of  me]  John  xv.  10.  GidO^ 
love  to' him]  Barh.  218,  14. 

Rem.  1.— Possessives  are  also  expressed  by  ^J  with  sufF.  (§  16. 
B)  ;    e.  g.  Barh.  49.  7.     oCLäl  ]LmMuJ  his  commander  ;  146,  10. 


160  PLEONASTIC   USE   OF  PRONOUNS. 

This  manner  of  expression  is  used  particularly  when  a  stronger  em- 
phasis is  required  than  is  indicated  by  the  mere  suffix  ;  e.  g.  Matt. 

vi.  13.    1Zq^!^Sd  k^Ol  vA-Li?  thine  is  the  kingdom  ;    Barh.  146,  1. 

•^O)  ^-^?  fAO)  (Z,.!  our  great  church  in  Haran.  If  the  sufF. 
to  the  noun  be  also  repeated,  it  indicates  (emphatically)  the    Greek 

possessives    s/xo?   tfo?,    &c. ;    e.  g.  John  iv.  34.    « i\a>    «ji^.QbfSD 

sfxov  /S^wfxa  ;  vii.  6  ;  xv.  9  ;  Rom.  3.7.     The  same  repetition  of  the 

•I'       X  7 

suffix  occurs  also   in   prepositions  ;    e.  g.    II  Cor.  v.  19.   ^-^?  ^^ 

^v  »jjuorv  ;    I  John  ii.  2,  and  in  certain  forms  of  expression;  e.g.  Matt. 

xxvii.  4.  ^!^  pD  — !^  r»  t(f%  >;|aaj  ;  John  xxi.  22. 

P  7    0 

Rem.  2. — We  should  mention  the  use  of  the  suff.  in  %^;L0  ,  t;iD, 

for  the  pronoun  of  the  second,  and  in   ^^tj,*^S,    k^ASD( ,    ^p2I^,for 

the  pronoun   of  the  first   person,  when  the   discourse   is    addressed 

to     superiors  ;     e.   g.    Genesis   xliv.    16.       %ji;ik2^    ^h    h^ 

what  shall  we  say  to  thee  {my  lord)  ?  .^ji,^\\  |cn4>*  our  [thy 
servants'')  iniquity  ;  verse  32.     St)  kings  in  speaking  of  themselves 

use   ]n\V) ;  e.  g.   Esth.  viii.  8.     ]nlv?>    ]Snan    CLDo'Aa    write 

in    (my)    the   Mng^s   name;    and   in    reference     to    God,    GUJ^ 

is  used  ;    e.  g.    Gen.  v.  1.     Also    w»^   stands  connected  with  the 

second   and   third  persons ;    e.  g.  Mark  xii.  37.     t^^So    CTL^    y^O 

7     0 

he  calls  him  his  {my)  Lord^  and  differs  fi-om  ^;lD ,  in  that  the  for- 
mer is  the  common  form  of  salutation,  while  the  latter  marks  the 
pluralis  majestatis,  and  is  used  of  Christ  in  the  version  of  the  New 
Testament  ;  e.  g.  Acts  i.  1  ;     Rom.  xiv.  8. 

Rem.  3. — It  is  rather  to  be  considered  as  an  imitation  of  a  Hebrew 
idiom,  when  the  suffix  relates  to  a  noUn  which  does  not  occur  till 
later  in  the  discourse  (comp.  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  739) ;  or  when 
the  noun  itself  is  repeated  instead  of  the  pronoun;  e.g.  Gen.  xvi.  16. 

§  55.  Pleonastic   Use  of  Pronouns. 

A.  Separable  Personal  Pronouns. 

Here  belongs  the  pronoun  of  tlie   third  person   ooi  (Ol) 

(comp,  §  12.  1.  B)   united  with  nearly  all  persons  of  the 

sing,  and  plur.,  by  which  an  emphasis  is  denoted,  which  is 

disregarded  in  the  later  language.     It  is  found  still  in  such 


PLE02s"ASTIC    USE   OF   PRONOUNS,  IQl 

passages  as  John  viii.  26.  ]^Vv^  ]j1  WCvnVn  q^  -oSoi 
(hat  {exactly)  I  speak  before  the  world;  verse  28  ;~  xv.  16  ; 
Rom.  iii.  31 ;  Heb.  ix.  17.  It  is  to  be  considered  merely 
as  pleonastic  in  Luke  vii.  19.     Ji^Ar^Sn  ooi  ^-^tf  of 

or  shall  we  wait  for  another  ?  Rom.  xiv.  8  •  Heb.  xiii  22  •  I 
Tim.  i.4;  v.  9;  Barli.  133,  3  ;  Assem.L  221,A.5,  especially 
where  it  occurs  with  a  feminine  noun ;  e.  ^.  Rom.  iii.  28 

i^'rd  ^OjjliD  001  fZoiSOiOlO  by  faith  is  a  man  justified.  001 

is  sometimes  connected  with  a  plural ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  214  D. 

^         -'y         y        0.  -x         ..  y  -K        .7  -n  ' 

^OOU-l^iO  001  ^OLlmJ  AlilO  on  account  of  his  wives  and 
children. 

Rem. — Sometimes   also   the   fern.    ^Ol   (still  more  emphatic),  is 

found ;  e.  g.    Rev.  xxi.  2.    A^Ijs*   IAäj^    ^01     l^i  /y^Kn 

and  I  saw  (it)  the  holy  city  ;  xxii.  19,  and  the  pkr.  .QJ01  Assem.L 

*^  7  \ 

7i,  A.  20,  21.  001  and  001  are  sometimes  united  together  without 

emphasis  ;  e.g.  John  v.9.  |SoCL»  001  0010  and  this  day  ;  Barh.148, 

3.  Also  in  the  plur. ;  e.g.  Matt.  iii.  1.  .QJOl  lAkJQjL^  — »j  tO^Jl^ 

but  in  these  days.  The  pleonastic  use  of  OOI  is  confirmed  from 
the  fact  that  the  Philoxenian  version  omits  it  altogether. 

B.     Suffixes. 
1.  The  suffix  is  often  used  pleonastically  with  the  verb, 
when  the  object  with  ^  as  though  by  way  of  explanation 

■«   7  t  t      7  *  «^ 

follows;  e.  g.  Matt.  i.  21.  OlSd^  wiOIOa-mJ  ;a..  ooi/or  he 
shall  bless  (it)  his  people  ;  verse  24;    ii.  6,  11 ;  Mark  xiv.  47. 

Without   ^  in   Matt.  xxv.  25.     j^jIiD   ClLä^  I  buried  (it 
thy   talent  ;    xxvii.  5  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  14. 

Rem.  1. — The  suffix  also  occurs  pleonastically  with  "  after  verbs 
of  motion,  yoing,  cominy,  &c. ;  e.g.  Gen.  xxvii.43.  «^  ^1  yo  ;  Luke 
viii.SY.  OlS  ^l|j>  therewith  he  departed;  Matt.x.C;  John  xi.31;  iv.3. 
*OoZ  01^  l2lo  and  he  came  ayain  ;  Assem.  1.44, A.l 7.  OLl  joaJ 
he  went  out  ;   186,A.30.  |lki')f  Lx^l^  OlS  loOl  ZujJ  he  had  yone 


162  PLEONASTIC   USE   OF   PRONOUNS. 

to  the  Aramaeans  ;  Eplir.  I.  220,  B.  (ÄQ!iO  OlS  ^£)  Moses  stood 
up  ;  Matt.  iii.  2.  lüo»)  IZonSV)  OlL  Ao'^O  the  kingdom  of 
heaven  is  near ;  the  same  is  true  frequently,  after  LjJ^D  {  =  to 
depart  from  this  life)  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  14.  01^  A.kiO  9V^  Lazarus 
is  dead  ;  Mark  ix.  26  ;  Assem.I.  367,  9  ;  Ephr.l.204,A  ;  sometimes 

7 

with  verbs  which  have  not  the  signification  of  motion  ;    e.  g.    ;*^rO 

to  believe  ;  John  xi.  31  ;  ^^  to   make^  Barh.  217,  10  ;   \^  to  be 

*  ^^ 

foolish^  Rom.  i.  22  ;  and  even  after  (OOl  John  i.  15. 

Rem.  2. — On  the  contrary,  the  suffix  in  active  verbs,  sometimes, 
falls  away  when  it  can  either  be  easily  supplied  from  the  context, 
or   the   same   object    has   already   preceded;    e.   g.  Barh.  424.  9. 

^CJlQlD^    IaDO    -  llOlO      '^J    ^\b    »na"!    he    brought     out 

all  of  the  silver  coin  and  heaped  [it)  up  before  him  ;  particularly  the 

9v*  7      7 

neuter..;  e.  g.  Gen.  xxiv.  49.  wk.JO|CLis»  inform  me  thereof.  In  many 
verbs  following  each  other  the  suffix  which  is  to  be  repeated  falls 
away  ;  e.g.  Matt.  xiv.  19  ;  I  Cor.  xi.  23, 24.  Where  two  follow  each 
other  the  suffix  is  usually  added  to  the  latter  verb  ;  e.g.  Barh.  419,5. 

CTI^      1  »'«^^^nn    — 1»l.*DjQ!sD  ^üe  esteem  and  honor  it. 

2.  The  suffix  is  also  pleonastic  in  the  nomen  regens  wbicli 
precedes  the  genitive  v^ith  j ;  e.  g.  John  iii.  18.  OlSnaD 
Pi^M^)  in  the  name  of  the  only  begotten;  xii.3.  ^QAjiJ  wiCTlQ-^..  j 
the  feet  of  Jesus  ;  verse  31 ;   Acts  v.  2  ;  Ephr.  I.  87,  B. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also  the  repetition  of  the  suff.  before 
^i«*j  (§  54.  B.  4.  Rem.  1)  and  after  ^\o  ==  all.,  without  J  following 
it ;  e.g.  Matt.  xiii.  2.  \aX^  uC^D  the  ivhole  multitude  ;  ii.  3,  4  ; 
Kirsh.  114,  10.  iM/^k)  ^01^  all  cities.  Sometimes  ^\o  with 
suffix  occurs  after  the  noun  ;  e.g.  Barh.  71,  6.  Ol^  ^J  pßl  but 
the  tvhole  people  ;  Matt.  vi.  33.  ^Gl^O  ^^G1  all  these  things. 
Without  the  suffix  ^\d  signifies  each^  every  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iv.  4.  ^^ 
jISiD  every  word  ;  Acts  xviii.  4. 

3.  Finally,  a  pleonastic  suffix  is  attached  to  prepositions 
thus ;    a)    1  is  placed  before  the  accompanying  noun  and  is 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  163 

considered  either  as  a  sign  of  tlie  genitive  (§  52.  2)  or  as  a 
relative;  e.  g.  I  Tim.  i.  8.  IcdqSdjj  dlod]  according  to  {it) 
the  law  ;  Jolm  i.  42.  V^qä^j  Cljthi  to  {him)  Jesus ;  xviii.  15; 
S^  Rev.  V.  11 ;  2qL  Luke  xxiii.  7  ;  ^^So  Rom.  viii.  3. 
]ilu4j^?  oiAS|^  for  {it)  sin  ;  ^  Acts  iii.  6  ;  ^  Rom. 
xiii.6  ;  Barli.  74,18.  |jO'r4?  ^OlolLl  against  {him)  the  tyrant; 

7  0" 

^1  76,  U  ;  J>OjX3  Luke  v.  19  ;  b)  or  the  preceding  preposi- 
tion with  the  suffix  is  repeated  before  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  Luke 
ii.8.  fylloi  aih  in  {it)  the  field;  Barh.192,7;  Assem.l.  27, 1, 
29;  Ephr.L87,B ;  ^  John  ii.  2.  ]loLm^\  aiL  to  {it  to)  the 
feast;  ^  Acts  viii.  85  ;  ^^  Acts  ix.  21,  etc. 


General  Remark  on  Personal  Pronouns. 

In.  Sjriac,  we  also  find  in  personal  pronouns  enallage  ;  a) 
of  7iumher  in  A*]  ;  e.g.  Barh.  166,  6.  ^;CD^  #0010  wiOioA^f 
\r^»  |;£Qi>0  (*J  there  were  among  tJ-em  twenty  women  and 
ten  children  ;  in  words  whose  plural  only  is  used ;  e.g.  Luke 
xxiii.  45.  OiAiJLd  ^k)  UaaOl»  ^isl  J^]  ^'r-^^lo  the  vail 
of  the  temple  ivas  rent  {in  us  midst)  in  tiuain.  The  same  is 
true  in  the  dual ;  e.  g.  Hebrews  xi.  26.  ^'^?  CT^V^'^P 
the  treasures  {of  it)  Egypt;  Barh.  108,  2  ;  h)  oi  gender  ;  e.  g. 
Michael.  Chr.  20,  9,  10.  ^Oio  —  T2oiZl\ooilo  all  places 
—in  these  ;  c  )  of  gender  and  nwnher  together,  if  by  collec- 
tives sing.  fem.  are  signified  name^  of  countries  and  cities, 
men  or  inhabitants  ;  e.g.  Barh.  565,  18,  19.  12qaj]  Q*jii»f 
^7nV'o  0-^j  .ootI  ^]o  —  UUy^  they  found  a  great 
moMymen,  —  and  these  cdso  they  led  into  captivity ; 
\lculX  580,  1,  2 ;    tAi.>o  591,  5,  6  ;  .^'^aVlöO,  11,  12. 


164  RELATIVE    FRONOUNS. 

§  56.    Use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun  (§  17.  2). 

1.  The  Relative  >  gives  to  adverbs  of  interrogation,  place, 
time,  etc.,  a  relative  signification;  e.  g.  p^l  ivheref  >  p^j 
there,  where,  John  i.  28.  ^1-mQji  looi  ^SDlLo?  PjiI  there,  where 
John  baptized  ;  verse  40  ;  Barh.82,2  ;  '^^ ivhither  f  ?  ]L^ 
thither,  where;  e.g.  John  xiii.  36.  \i\  ^llj  paV  lohither Igo ; 
Barh.  198,  18  ;  Assem.I.  27;  2.3. v.  E  ;  ]xzu{how  f  ?  Uif 
just  as  :  e.  g.  John  iii.  14  ;  v.  26  ;  xiii.  33  ;  ^tl£>\  when  f 
J  ^ASol  when,  as  ;  e.  g.  v.  25.  ^QlSoal?  ^Ak)]  tc'/ien  they  shall 
hear  ;  \^£iD  how  much?  >  ^SüD  so  much  ;  e.  g.  John  vi-  11. 
Cl^  .5  1^0  rzs  mwc/i  as  they  would,  j  gives  the  same  mean- 
ing sometimes  to  nouns;  e.g.  >2|  joZöce  ;  J  jZ]  where;  e.g. 
John  iii.  8. 

2.  The  oblique  cases  are  formed  by  some  mark  of  the 
case  followed  by  a  suffix  ;  a )  the  genitive  is  indicated  by 
the  suffix   added  to   the   nomen  regeiis ;    e.  g.   John  ix.  11. 

^Oma  olSüÄj  whose  name  is  Jesus  ;  Assem.I.  165,  A.  14 ;  h) 
the  dative^   according  to  the  following  example ;    Rom.  i.  9. 

pj  ^aSDaSo  01^  j  whom  I  serve ;  verse  31 ;  c)  the  accusative, 
thus  ;  e.  g.  John  i.  26.  01^  ^bS{ ^^^  ]]'^oAj1j  whom  ye 
know  not.  The  accusative  is  also  expressed  by  the  suffix  at- 
tached to  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  iii.34.  OiipÄ  IcnjLj  whom  God  hath 

sent ;  d)  the  ablative  by  JD  ;  e.g.  John  i.48;  by  ^^  Rom.i.6. 
In  a  similar  manner  the  relative  is  united  with  the  preposi- 
tion ;  e.g.  ^OL,  John  iii.2.  aiSoi  loC^j  loith  whom  is  God,  etc. 

Rem. — In  connection  with  the  suffix  of  the  1  and  2  person,  added 
to  the  verb,  it  (the  relative)  forms,  with  reference  to  a  preceding 
subject  of  the  same  person,  the  oblique  cases    loho,  I,  whom,  me,  like 

the  Lat.  qui  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlv.  4.  *jJJoAlCil>  ..arOQa  \z\  \i\  I  am 

Joseph  whom  {me)  ye  have  sold  ;  Num.  xxii.  30  ;  Isa.  xli.  8  (Ephr. 
11.88.  E)   ^AU^j  A^l  ^'CqI  thou  art  Israel  ivhom  {thee)  I  have 


RELATIVE   PRONOUKS.  165 

made  strong.     The  same  occurs  with  prepositions.;  e.  g.  Num.  xxii.   * 
30.  thy  she  ass  *k\\  Aj|  J^LkHS^i  u2Jon  ivhom  (me)  thou  hast  ridden. 
The   relative  alone   sometimes   marks  the   accusative,   particularl) 

y    s'    •  •   •>> 

the  neuter;  e.  g.  Gen.  i.  31.    ^I^)  \0  all  that  he  made.     The  re 
lative  is  sometimes  used  before  the  mark  of  the  case ;  e.g.  Barh.  43, 

12.  OUOV^J  to  which  time  ;  137,  5.  |oai  (jl.i4^>  which  belonged 
to   the  Arabians. 

3.  The  Syrians  express  the  relative  with  a  demonstrative 

preceding  Ae,  or  this^  wlio^  that^  which^  etc.,  as  follows ;  a)  by 

J  OOl ,  J  0C71 ,  J  pOl  rnasc,     ?  «^Ol ,  >  jjOi   tern.,    and  m  the 

plur.  J  ^OlOl  masc,    ?  ^^01  fern. ;    e.  g.  John   vii.    16.   lOI 

«^^•9  OOlj  5w^  7n5,  ti^/io  has  sent  me;  Eom.iv.  5;  vii.  6;  Phil. 

ii.6.  *jiaioA^1>  IjOl  that^  which  was;  John  i.24.  obZ^lj  .OJOl 

those  lüho  were  sent;  Barh.  17,  2  ;  170,5  ;    &)  by  >  ^isD  masc. 

and  fern.,  and  >  UJ^^i)  neut. ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  12.    A^l?  ,-SD^ 

»oai-aAj  aiik  to  liim  who  hath^  shall  he  given  ;    John  iv.  34 ; 

V.30  ;  vii.l7,  18  ;  Mattxiii.l7.  ^oAjV^uI?  V)^^  that  luhich 

ye  see  ;  Kom.  i.  28  ;  viii.  25  ;    c)  by  ?  ^Ll  masc,  j  IJ  fem. 

and  plur.  j  ^»Kifcom. ;  e.  g.  Eom.  ii.29.    OCT  ]>mnr:)>  M 

he  who  is  inwardly  /John  ix.  8  ;  Rom.  ii.  2,  3  ;  iv.  7  ;  v.  14 ; 
Barh.  85,  3  ;  d)  frequently  by  the  participle  ;  e.g.  Rom.vii.l. 

|ffr>r>Vr>i  ^ .  v  ..  those  who  know  the  law. 

Rem.— If  a  particular  emphasis  is  to  be  indicated  the  demonstra- 
tive is  doubled  ;  e.  g.  John  ix.  8.  loOl  *oA1?  OCT  QJOT  this  very 
one  is  he  who  sat.  Sometimes,  like  the  Greek  attraction,  the 
demonstrative  is  wanting;  e.  g.  John  iv.  14.  CT^  \^l\  p|j  USD 
•ro-:  UaTog  ov  syu)  ^wfTw  aura) ;  or  the  relative  is  wanting ;  e.  g.  Heb. 
v.2.  »'^^^  ]L]o  and  he  {or  this)  who  can;  less  frequently  are  both 
wanting,  according  to  Hebrew  usage  ;  e.  g.  Job  xxiv.  19.  Finally 
the  relative  occurs  pleonastically  before  participles;  e.g.  Amos  vi.  1. 
.a»OT  I^  ^i.^S'  -*0  ^0^  ^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^^  dcpiseZion  ;  Ephr JI.2V4.D. 


166     DEMONSTEATIYE  AND  INTEEEOGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  57.    Use  of  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

The  demonstrative  is  neither  used  for  the  relative^  nor 
does  it  give,  as  in  Hebrew,  a  special  emphasis  to  particles 
and  numerals  (comp.  Gesen.  Lehrgeb.  p.  750  sq.).  It  is 
used  only  in  its  proper  signification. 

Rem. — It  is  emphatic  in  connection  with    OOl  and  ».aOI  (§  17.  1. 

Rem.) ;  e.  g.  Matt.   v.    47.      Sometimes  pOl  may  be  translated  by 
hicce  ;    e.  g.   John  xix.  19. 

2.  The   interrogative  pronoun   (  §  17.  3  )   is  united  with 

nouns  of  both  genders  and  numbers ;    e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  48. 

cjL>j]  ^QJ|  -üiOO  -'^1  *uai  _SD  tvlio  is  my  mother  and  who  are 

my  hretliren  f     The  oblique   cases   are  either   so   expressed 
that,  in  the  genitive,  the  noun  in  the  constr.  state  precedes ; 

e.  g.  Gen.  xxiv.  28.     wiAjj  ^iD  L\!^  whose  daughter  art  thou  1 

or  so  that  ^Jk)  follows  with  ?  preceding  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xii.  8. 

^^j  Ir-^l  ^SD/rom  lühose  handf    or   OlSoj   stands   before 

the  noun;    e.  g.  Matt.  xxii.  20.     I^jAoo    poi   \{d\*  QiLdj 

ivhose  image  and  writing  is  this  ?     The  other  cases  are  form- 
ed by  the  special  case-signs   preceding,  or  by  prepositions  ; 

e.g.  Assem.  1.  84,  6.   ^2]  ^Üi^  to  lohom  shall  I  give  ?   Matt 
xii.  27.  "JlSüD  whereby  ? 

Rem. — Sometimes  flaf  occurs  instead  of  the  relative  in  the 
indirect  question,  without  J  following  it ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv.  42. 
^QOjlD  \L\  |AlA  \fjk\^  at  what  hour  yo2ir  lord  will  come?  and 
QliiO  mcludes  fOOl ;  e.g.  John  xviii.  38.  p;*  QlSo  i^^ai  t* 
^rw^A  ?   vii.    20. 


§  58.  Pronouns  for  which  the  Syrians  have  no  special  forms. 

A.    Eeflexive  Pkonouns. 
The  Syrians  express  the  reflexive  pronoun  (§  17.  4)  as  fol. 
fows ;  a)  by  the  passive  (comp.  §  21.  2.  §  22.  2.  §  24.  2);   h) 
often,  particularly  in  the  third  person,  by  the  personal  pro- 


OTHER  PRONOUNS.  167 

noun  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  54,  15.  ^^4^  Cl!£  OOl  he  hilled  himself; 
77,  5.  lalÄ  ^OOUi  0V)io'|  they  chose  themselves  a  king  ; 
83,  16  ;  by  prepositions  ;  e.g.Barli.  164,12.  ^ocTuiL.  QiLilo 
and  they  lead  hy  themselves ;  c)  by  \m2ky  and  ISdqio»  The 
former  is  used  in  reference  to  persons  ;    e.g.  Matt,  xxiii.  12. 

-^7  x7T>  7 

OlmSLJ  Ul^;J)  ;-»...  ^!iDAe  who  exalteth  himself;  Barh.  56, 2  ;  84, 
15 ;  144,  12  ;  less  frequently,  in  reference  to  tilings ;  e.  g. 
Luke  xi.  17.  dlaSU  ^\l  ^^^^Lly  oiiVo  ^»5y^  every  hingdo'^.i 
lohich  is  divided  against  itself  JiDQio  is  used  in  reference 
to  both  persons  and  things  ;  e.g.  II  Cor.  xii.  15.  ^"2*1  *.»^aiD 
I  give  myself;  Luke  xi.  17.  ^^SiibäD  OliDQlö  ^j  \L^Ci 
a  house  which  is  divided  against  itself 

Rem.  —  Less  frequently  occur  in  u  reflexive  signification, 
XoSk  heart  ;  e.g.  Lukeii  .51 ;  uuS  head  ;  'U*oS  spirit  ;  e.g.  Dan. 
iv.  5,  9  ;  III»  life;  Ps.  vii.  6.  The  pronouns  |m£iJ  and  V^QID  by 
way  of  periphrasis  for  other  pronouns ;  e.  g.  Rom.  x.  3.  |Zo]ja 
.OOlmaJj  their  own  righteousness  ;  1  Cor.vi.l9  ;  Phil.ii.4,5  ;  Rom. 
ix.  3.  -  -Vnr>ir>  \!\  I  myself ;  Heb.  i.  3  ;  ix.  28. 
B.  Other  Pronouns. 
The  other  pronouns  are  thus  expressed  : 

1.  This,  thai,    see  §  56.  8. 

2.  Each,  every,  are  expressed  ;  a)  as  substantives,  by 
l--i^.Gen.  xL5;  ^1  I  Cor.  iii.  8  ;  vii.  2,  8  ;  GaL  vi.  4 ; 
the  latter  is  doubled  "in  Acts  ii.  88,  45  ;  I  Cor.  vii.  17  ; 
xi.  21 ;  II  Cor.  v.  10  ;  I  Thess.  iv.  4.  Sometimes  they  are 
expressed  by  ^J  ^^  Bom.  xiii.  1 ;  r^  r^  ^  Eph.  v. 
88;  ^.-j1^  Lukexiv.33;  .m^'r^^  or  ^'^  ^ 
Kom.  xii.  18;  h)  as  adjectives;  a)  by  ^'  Matt.  vii.  17  ; 
lJohniv.8;  ^^^  ^-lo  Assem.  L  11,  A.  19 ;  ^)  by  a  re- 
petition of  the  noun  defined  by  each,  every ;    e.  g.  II  Kmg? 


168  OTHER   PRONOUNS. 

xvii.  29.  ^1 5>ai  every  nation ;  Matt.  xx.  10 ;  7 )  by  the 
plural ;  e.g.  Amos  iv.  4.  Ir^^-^  every  morning:  sometimes 
by  the  singular  which  is  to  be  considered  as  a  distributive  ; 
e.  g.  Jer.  xxxvii.  21.  lk>Q-ijO  each  day.  The  neuter  is  ex- 
pressed  by  io^  >\o  John  iv.  25. 

3.  Whosoever,   (quicunque),  is  expressed  by   %mj\  \iD   or 

.äILd   John  i.  7 ;    1  Cor.  iii.   13 ;     >  ^   Matt.   xiii.  19 ; 

J  iLf  ^ä  I  John  iii.  8  ;    >  ^  Mark  vii.  16  ;  Barh.  195,  3  ; 

198,12.  The  neuter  by  >  t^Q^  Acts  iii.22  ;  iv.  23  ;  j  ^^ 
Matt.  X.  27.  ' 

4.  Somebody^  anybody  (aliqids)^  in  interrogative  and  con- 
ditional  clauses,  are  expressed ;  «  )  by  ,aJ[  and  In^it  John 
iv.  33.  ^tül  ^\^  CFi^  ^"A.*"!'  ^j]  l^nl  ÄarÄ  «/i/y  owe 
brought  him  aught  to  eat  ?  vii.  48  ;  1  Tim.  vi.3.     afcJf  A^]  .( 

-7\     y  _  y"  ^ 

%2i^k5>  if  any  one  teach  ;  Kev.  xxii.  18  ;  fe)  by  >  ^io  Mark 
vii.  16.  CTl-i  Zl»1j  ^So  hath  any  one  ?  c)  sometimes  by  ^io 
Kom.  iii.  3.  ^ooiiSd  J  s'l  rtvsg ;  Mark  xii.  5  ;  or  more  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  Hebrew  idiom,  by  \m2Li  Lev.  iv.  2  ;  v.  1 , 
2,  4  ;  vii.  27.  The  neuter  is  expressed  ;  a)  by  ^^  Acts 
V.  36  ;  ^dj  OOl  ^r^J  that  he  tuns  something  (great) ;  John 
vii.4 ;  I  John  ii.  15  ;  h)  sometimes  by  ^  Lev. v. 9.  ]Ldj  ^ 

«?•  «x 

some  {of  the)  blood;  or  (ZQHi.   (=  ^i^tj  )  Gen.  xviii.l4. 

^  TT 

5.  Nobody,  no  one  ;  a)  as  substantives,  are  expressed  by 
^mjl  ]]  Matt.ix.l6;  John  i.l8  ;  James  i.l3  ;  U'wAjI  Acts  xviii. 
lOflCor.ii.ll;  •ra^l]'Num.xxxi.49  ;  .aj]  ;i  j]  Jer.li.43; 
dftj"!  Zu^  John  vii.4  ;  sometimes  by  ^mS\}  Zu^  John  xv.l3; 
>  LjjL  or  simply  by  Au^  v/ith  an  adjective  or  participle  fol- 
lowing; e.g.Matt.xix.l7.  V^lL^nooneisgood.  The  neuter, 
by  !>OjV^  U'or  V'^^k)   Phil.  ii.  3  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  7;    AA'  fol- 


OTHER  PRONOUNS.  169 

lowed  by  U>^^  Matt.  x.  26  ;  with  U)^  preceding,  II  Cor. 
vi.  10  ;  without  ^^So  James  iv.  2  ;  b)  as  adjectives,  by  IJ 
after  the  noun,  with  the  verb,  I  Cor.  ii.9.  1\js*  ]]  ]i  »v  no  eye 
hath  seen  it ;  before  the  noun,  Eom.  viii.  39.  lA^'^  13  no 
creature  ;  by  Aa.^  with  the  noun  following,  Luke  iv.  24. 
U-^  A^  no  prophet ;  Heb.iv.13  ;  with  the  noun  preceding, 
Eph.  V.  5  ;  with  the  words  standing  between,  John  xv.  22. 
IAa^^  tOCJlL  iooi  Aa^  they  would  have  had  no  sin. 

6.  Some,  any^  are  expressed  ;  a)  by  j  A^t  Matt.  xvi.  14. 
^,j;V)l>  A^l  some  say  ;  John  ix.  9  ;  with  words  interposed, 
vii.  12.  ^•r^l?  'ri-yt  OOOl  iU|  for  some  said ;  >  fjü]  A^] 
I  Cor.  viii.  7  ;  xv.  34;  II  Thes.  iii.  11 ;  h)  by  aul  "^j 
Phil.  i.  15  ;  I  Tim.  iv.  1 ;  ^  1*^1  John  ix.  16  ;  c)  elipti- 
cally,  by  ^,  Matt,  xxiii.  34.  ^hS\  ^Ji4^  ^ooilk)  some 
shall  ye  kill ;  Mark  xii.  o  ;  Acts  xvii.  32  ;  Eom.  iii.  3  ;  d) 
sometimes  by  the  plural  of  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  viii.  27. 
1i\LDQl  some  days  ;  IjQII  ,  Gen.  xxix.  20.  The  neuter  is 
expressed  by  ?  A^f,  Matt.  xiii.  4.  ^^^>  A^l  some  fell ;  also 
in  verse   8. 

7.  Some,  others,  are  expressed  ;  a)  by  P'h^[—  tr*^!»  ^^^^ 
xxviii.  24  ;  or  by  oJl  .mj1_—  .äj]  .aj1_  Phil.  i.  15 ;  Z^)  by 
^'^l»!  —  J  Aaf  Matt.  xvi.  14  ;  John  vii.  12  ;  or  with  j  A^t 
repeated,  Assem.  I.  10.  Eem.  1,  2  ;  c)  by  ,00lliD  —  ^oouSo 
Acts  xvii.  32  ;  Barh.  105, 10  ;  with  the  sign  of  the  case 
prefixed,  114,14.  (ooili^  Sek  ^oauSülo  ol^^  ^oouSülo 
some  they  killed,  others  he  blinded  ;  finally  by  ]jr^1  —  ^, 
Barh.  93,  18. 

Rem.— When  some   signifies  the  greater  part,   it  is  expressed  by 


170  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

p,.jaf ^Sd  |{a.i^CO  ,   John  vii.  40.     Some  this — others  that,  by 

VAIJ'^1  Vr-»^1  Acts  xix.  32. 

8.  The  one,  the  other,  {alter)  are  expressed  ;  a)  of  persons, 
by  ;iiyt  masc.  "{L^h^  fem.,  repeated;  or  by  \^\\  —  Ij^^u*  Isa. 
iii.  5;  \^\\  —  H^l  Gren.  xiii.  11 ;  also  of  inanimate  objects, 
Matt.   xii.    13.    6\L\C1j^  yj^  blalo  a\^Y ^m2i  he  stretched 

forth  his  hand  and  it  became  sound  as  the  other;  I  Cor.  xiv.7; 
Col.  iii.  13.  "ISDloi  ailciZ  ^i  ^mjQ  M\r  tf  one  hath  an 
accusation  against  another  ;  Phil.  ii.  3,  4  ;  h)hj  ^^  or  ^Ol 
repeated,  Rom.xii.lO;  j.**-^  r^  oiie  to  the  other  {=each  other, 
comp-  Remark) ;  Matt.  xxiv.  10 ;  John  xiii.  35  ;  also  by 
fj^j^l  -  r-^*  Matt.  vi.  24.  ^'r^]  —  ^-»^j^I  John  iv.  37  ;  c) 
by  the  repetition  of  the  same  noun,  Acts  xxi.  34. 
^fSo  ^,lD  —  tJüf  one  this,  another  that ;  or  by  (j^j^  Gal.vi.2. 
'\}r**'i  1r^^^  QH^^O  let  one  hear  another's  burden. 

7  7 

Rem. —  One  another  is  represented  by  ^a*  ^jsj,  with  a  preposition 
interposed  between,  John  xiii.  14;  xxii.  34,  36  ;  sometimes  by  the 
simple  preposition  with  suffix,  Rom.i.24.  ^OOIO  among  one  another  ; 
y^*^  John  xvi.  19  ;  Barh.  41,  18. 

9.  The  same,  himself,  herself,  itself,    are  expressed  ;  a)  by 

7 

a  personal  pronoun  doubled,  with  p  placed  between  ;  e.  g. 
Heb.x.ll.  UkS?  tOJCfl  jD  .QJOl  the  same  sacrifice ;  Phil.iii.l. 
^j^JOl  rO  ^.».JOl  ^Äe  «ame;  also  without  ^  ;  e.g.Assem.I.44,13. 

«£\  P    ••?*  -X  P  'X  • 

|ALOQ-fc  .QJdO  ^OOIO  at  the  same  time  ;  6 )  by  a  compound- 
ing of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  (§  l7.  1.  Rem.;  §  57.  l. 
Rem.) ;  c)  by  the  pleonastic  suffix  before  the  noun;  e.g.Mark 

«^^     p  •  p 

1.42.  jAlAO  aiQ  at  the  same  hour;  Heb.  ii.  14;  ix.  24. 
|.a.SDftl  OlS  into  heaven  itself ;  Matt.  xxvi.  44;  Heb.  ix.  21. 


OTHER  PRONOUNS.  17 1 

(Sdj  ^Ld  OUSo  i/;77/i  ^/ie  same  6^ooc? ;  with  \u>  and  tlie  noun 
following  ;  e.g.  Assem.  1.415;  3.  VAlij  oTlL}  the  same  year  ; 
416,  1  ;  d)  sometimes  by  liaJ  and  ]Sdq1£}  with  suffix  (§  58. 
A),  Matt.  iv.  6 ;  John  v.  26,  43. 

Rem. — More  definite  are  001  QJOl ,  equivalent  to  just  the  same^ 
exactly/  the  same  ;Jolin  i.  15  ;    vii.  25  ;    Barh.  26,  2. 

10.  ^  certain  (one) ;  a)  by  ,-m  masc.  |,js*  fern.  ;  John  iv. 
46.  pK»  (auiLo  a  certain  king ;  v.  2.  (r**  I'^OJ  a  certain 
;?/ac6  ;  Barh.l  16,10  ;  117,3  ;  with  «!sO  following;  e.g.  Assem. 
I.  33;  22,  27 ;  Barh.  93,  6 ;  h)hj  :>oJiD  relating  to  things ; 
e.g.  Barh.  l70,  3.  io"^  T^>^  ^  P  when  he  had  entered 
into  a  house  ;   l78,  2  ;   194,  3. 

Rem. — In  proper  nouns  it  is  sometimes  expressed,  by  circumlocu- 
tion, by  OlSüÄj  *«jl;e.  g.  Assem.  350,  18  ;  351,  2. 

11.  As  great — as  (tantus  quantus)  is  expressed  by  ^i*]; 
e.g.  Barh.  190,  16.  OCT  ^DQ-»?  l^^ol  »^V—  op^  V^Z/c?/  sai/J 
no  need  so  great  as  on  this  day.  Of  which  nature — of  suchy 
or  so  as  [ialis-qualis),  are  expressed  by  U^Ol  —  j  "^Dd]  ;  e.g. 
Assem.1.39  ;  17,18.  wiCToZuTliioi  -  IjoSßll  Ajf  l{>lj  ^^ 
as  the  statue  which  thou  hast  seen,  so  is  he.  This  latter  idea 
alone  is  also  expressed  by  ^fand  a  pronoun  following;  e.g. 
John  iv.  23;     ^CT  »^1?  such;  Barh.  55,  13  ;  70,  18. 


CHAPTER    SECOND, 
THE    VERB. 

§  59.     General    View. 

The  use  of  the  Preterit  and  of  the  Future^  as  in  ihe  He- 
brew, is  so  comprehensive,  that  by  them  almost  all  tue  other 
relations  of  time  are  designated,  in  accordance  with  definite 
rules  (comp.  §  65).  This,  however,  is  usually  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  preterite  designates  those  tenses  which 
stand  in  connection  with  past  time,  while  the  future  has  the 
same  influence  vc^oyl  future  time. 


§  60.      Use  of  the  Preterit 
1.  In  the   Past  it   designates  ; 

t,  7  7 

a)  the  absolutely  past  tense  ;  e.g.  Matt.ii.2.  Oi^iooo  ^W 
we  have  seen  his  star ;  OlS  -^SliL  ^Z")  me  are  come  to  wor- 
ship him  ;  John  iii.  16 ;  Assem.  I.  861,  26,  27  ; 

h)  the  Narrative  tense  {Aorist) ;  a )  mostly  hefore  the  sub- 
ject ;  e.g.  Mark  xi.  11,  ^SaIo]]  ^Qm>  ^  Jesus  came  to  Je- 
rusalem ;  John  ii.22.  «-lOlOrJ-i^Z  OpjZ*!  his  disciples  remem- 
hered;  ß)  after  particles  (when  something  aciJwa?  is  denoted), 
e.  g.  |0,  Barh.  68,12.  q\oo  ]]  ^  since  they  did  not  receive; 
line  4.  ?  \^r^  until  that ;  Matt.  i.  25.  ZjL»j  "t^jl  until  she 
brought  forth  ;  Barh.  24,  6  ;  Zuiij  ^ojl  until  he  died ;  213, 
18  ;  217,  3  ;  Assem.  I.  31,l7 ;  Ephr.  1.  196,  F  ; 


USE   OF  THE   PRETERIT.  I7ß 

c)  the  Pluperfect ;  a)  in  relative  clauses  whicli  define  the 
principal  action,  and  in  point  of  time,  precede  it ;  e.g.  Matt. 

i.  24.    ll-riß?  CJlOpSo  (sÜ  rCia?  Ki.T  pi  he  did  as  the  angel 

of  the  Lord  had  commanded  ;  Mark  xi.  6 ;    b)  after  particles  • 

e.g.  p  lohen,  after  ;  Matt.  ii.  1.    K,Qm1  j2L2f  p  when  Jesus 

was  horn  ;    verse  9 ;    John  ii.  22 ;    vi.  23,  24  ;'  Barh.  90  9  • 

Assem.  84,  B.  6.    >   jA^)  q/J;er  ^/la«;;  Barh.  89,7.    ^5^>  )Äd 

•XSOa^r^  after  that  he  had  slainDarius;  164,8.  j  ji\a  _Ld,  ibid; 

Assem.  1.  213,  A.  25;    >   Ir*»^  5o  500?^  a5  ;  Barh.  79,  12. 

Rem. — More  frequently,  however,  for  the  pluperfect,    stands  the 

10 
0C71  (  §  65  ). 

2.  It    denotes   the    Present   Tense  ; 

a)  in  verbs  of  quality  and  condition ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvi.  2,  3. 

jiV^»  AnV)m  the  sky  is  red;  John  iv.  35.  0>C1m>  ^UH^ the 
fields  lohich  are  white ;  Isa.  i.  3  ;  Ephr.  II.  11 7,  Ä ;  6 )  in 
general  designations  of  time,  denoting  simply  what  is  usual 

and  customary ;  e.  g.  Ps.  xiv.  2.  jCUjI  )1'^  the  Lord  holes 
down  ;  xxv.  2  ;  c)  when  it  denotes  a  state  or  condition  ;  e.g. 

Gen.  iv.  6.    ^^  «-»^Z*!  ]lV)\  w^Ay  art  thou  angry? 

3.  It   marks   the   Future    Tense  ; 

a)  in  prophecies,  asseverations,  and  the  like,  (for  the 
most  part,  however,  only  in  translations  from  the  Hebrew),, 
which  are  viewed  as  already  fulfilled  and  accomplished  ;  e.g. 

Isa.  ix.  2.  ]aj  fjOlQJ  OVm  they  shall  see  a  great  light ;  Gen. 
xvii.  20 ;  sometimes  after  verbs  in  which  is  involved  the 

idea  of  a  future  action ;  e.  g.  Barh.  80,  1.    *riou>  •^'(  he 

promised  that  he  would  give  ;  h)  the  completed  future  {futurum 

exacium)  after  j  (IsO ;  e.g.  Mark  xii.25.   (A^io  ^  QiQOj  psD 

?/;Ae7i  ^Aey  sAa^Z  rise  from  the  dead  ;  John  iv.  25. 

4.  In  exhortations,  and  in  clauses  which  contain  condi- 
tions or  conclusions,  the  preterite  also  expresses  the  rela- 
tion of  the  subjunctive  ;  a)  of  the  present  tense,  (]ooi  with  a 
participle  or  adjective) ;  e.  g.  I  Thess.  v.  6.  ^;.i^  ^ooi  hi 
us   be   ivatchful;  verse  8  ;  Eph.  ii.  11  ;  Tit.  ii.  9,  10;    /;)  of 


174  USE   OF  THE   PKETEEIT. 

the  imperfect :  e.  g.  John  ix.  41.  Aa^  ^oAaOOI  (aV^ff)  o!^ 
VAji^aj  .oa^  loot  if  ye  were  blind,  then  would  ye  have  had 
no  sin;  xv.  19  ;  c)  of  the  pluperfect ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  21. 
•jLjal  looi  Zpi?  )]  AjiOOI  ^Z  q!^  hadst  thou  been  here  my 
brother  had  not  died;  Barh.  93,  10  ;   Ephr.  I.  225,  E. 

Rem. — In  the  first  case  (under  a,  above)  jOOl  is  sometimes  want- 
ing;  e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  17.  ^Ol  ^'^f2:D  |Jj  the  bottles  do  not  thereby 
hurst ;  xxv.  24 ;  Mark  i.  44  ;  ii.  21,22  ;  Luke  v.  36  ;  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  is  more  frequently  expressed  by  the  future  (§  61) ;  and 
sometimes  the  preterite  with  ».aQ^  oh,  that,  denotes  tlie  optative 
(§  65);  e.g.  Rev.  iii.  15.  AaOOI  (^^jO  %jiGu^  oh,  that  thou  wert 
cold  ;  Ephr.  III.  284.  Oil  jll  ^  ZuOOl  U'^ol  would  that  I 
were  not  of  her  children.  This  idea  seems  also  involved  in  the 
cases   under   c. 

5.  Finally,  the  preterit  also  stands  for  the  Imperative 
and   the   Infinitive  ; 

10 
001  occnrs  as  an  Imperative  in  connec- 
tion  with  an  adjective   or  participle  ;    e.  g.   Mark   v.  34. 
]<^  A>>    ^AjOOI    IVäj    \)yiy\g  ;    II   Tim.   iv.   5  ;    Rom.  xii.    9,  10. 

no»  >>|i  ^.».Süja)  .OA^OOI  love  your  brethren  ;  I  Pet.  ii.  13  ; 
iv.  9  ;  after  preceding  imperatives  ;  e.  g.  Luke  x.  37. 
,^11    AaOOI    \LD(J\    tS\    »2) I    ^1    «Tfopsüjs  ,    xai    tfC    'ifoUi    h[kolbig  ; 

I  Pet.  iii.  15  ; 

b)  the  preterit  stands  as  an  Infinitive  after  verbs  signify- 
ing to  come^  to  go,  to  send,  etc.,  without  the  copula  ;  e.  g. 
Barh.  415,2.  oai  ^  ]{•  Xl'f  he  came  to  besiege  Acco  ;  402, 
8;  with  the  copula,  Barh.  403,  16,  17.  qLdo-Oj^^ 
they  sent  to  entreat ;  especially  after  ^\m  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  68,  1. 

7         -n  .7  i7 

u*.O^0  —  fcj^Aa  ^\M  he  began  to  open  —  and  to  offer  up. 


USE   OF  THE   FUTURE.  175 

Rem.— But  this  union  frequently  denotes  merely  the  aorist ;   e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  288,  2.    o2f  QSuO  thei/  arose  to  go  i.  e.  they  went. 


§61.    Use  of  the  Future. 

1.  The  Future  stands  ; 

a)  for  the  Absolute  Future;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv.  35. 
^jmj  U  *.*J^0  ^0*,£:i2J  tl>lo  IaIq»  Heaven  and  earth  shall 
pass  away,  but  my  word  shall  not  pass  away ;  i.  21,  23 ; 
Luke  xviii.  8  ;    John  xiv.  13  ; 

b)  for  the    Complete  Future  in   conditional  clauses,  (with 

the  future  in  the  conclusion  of  the  sentence) ;  John  v.  43. 

^n\nnZ  OoOi  aimsn  ^Omo  ]l\i  ^\^]  .f  if  another  shall 

have  come  in  his  own  7iame,    him  will  ye  receive  ;   viii.  28. 
XV.   7,   10. 

2.  Furthermore,  it  denotes,  the  following  relations  of  time; 
a)  the  Present  although  more  rarely  than  in  Hebrew ;  e.g. 

John  iv.  13.  fcn^  *£5oZ  USo  ^^01  ^  fAmJ  >  >\o 
flfa?  6  'n'/vwv  Jx  rou  i)(JaTo^  rovTCfo,  (5"j-v|/^fl'£»  «raXiv ;  with  tf  verse  48, 
after  >  ^'^  Luke  xxii.  61.  1]1..-J>2^  I^QJ  j  ^^3  Z)/orö 
iJÄe  coch  crows  ;  b  )  the  Imperfect ;  a)  after  such  verbs  as 
y  ^\M  ;  Assem.  I.  27,  20.  Olli  '^\l  ?  *^J*  ^^  spake  to  him 
{began  to  speak)  ;  ß  )  after  particles  J  V^^  until;  }  >OjiD 
before;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  21.  llD'rio  ^^Aj  j  W^o  before  he 
was  conceived  in  his  mothers  womb ;  Barh.  xi.  15 ;  c) 
more  rarely  the  Perfect ;  e.  g.  Jud.  v.  8.  louS.  \^^  Grod 
hath  chosen;  Isa.  xliii.  17,  19;  d)  the  Pluperfect:  after 
P'^ ,  J  io^  5e/öre  ;  e.  g.  Jer.  i.  5. 
'3.  It  serves  to  express  the  following  Moods  ; 
A  )  the   Subjunctive  ;    a)  of  the  Present;    a )  in  general ; 


176  USE   OP  THE  FUTURE. 

Jolin  vii.  37.  ]AmJO  «^Zo^  ]l\2  let  him  come  to  me  and 
drink;  Bark  79,  1.  ioLOJ  \\  > n V> yio^?  let  him  die;  ß)  after 
? ,  J] J  with  a  preceding  present  or  imperative ;  e.  g.  John 
V.  10.  5^pr^Qa*2j  yS  .f^i\»  X^it  is  not  lawful  that  thou 
shouWst  carry  thy  bed;  vi.  12.  \>0^  jS^J  ]]?  —  QmtD 
gather — iÄa«  nothing  he  lost ;  Matt.xxvi.41 ;  Assem.I.377,10, 
11,13  ;  h)  of  the  Imperfect ;  a)  in  conditional  clauses  ;  John 
ix.  22.  Oia  IjQJ  «Jü]  (\  if  any  man  should  confess  concern- 
ing him  ;  ß)  after  a  preceding  imperfect ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  25. 
jOlßOJ  «jUf)  (OCJl  «n>lff)  |J  it  was  not  needful  that  any  one 
should  testify;  after  a  preterite;  v.27.  Jiaj  piQl  jOOUj  Olf)\#I 
he  gave  him  authority  that  he  should  execute  judgment  ; 
i.  31 ;  Barh.  80,  3  ;  Assem.  I.  359,  5 ;  after  the  pluper- 
fect; e.  g.  John  iv.  8.  .Ql£)p9  —  ooai  Q^  they  were  gone 
that  they  might  buy ;  y)  sometimes  with  looi  appended;  e.g. 
Ephr.  I.  223,  C.  looi  Oli^ilJ  ]inj!ihow  he  would  do  ;  As- 
sem.  I.  297,  B.  3.  v.  E  ;  c)  of  the  Perfect  sometimes,  in  con- 
ditional  clauses,  after  J  and  ^|  U]  {in  case  that) ;  e.g.  John 
vii.  51  ;  Ephr.  I.  237,  B.  and  E ;  d)  of  the  Pluperfect,  more 
rarely,  and  only  with   jOOl  appended ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  40,  B. 

fOOl  IAjlJ  ^P^^  Uili*?  IjOfirU  fOOl  |00U  P'^Om  pl^ 
what  harm  luould  have  arisen  because  it  had  brought  forth 
good  ears  ? 

Rem. — May,  might,  can,  should,  must,  and  the  like,  are  also  ex- 
pressed by  the  future ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  203,  F.  IvmJO  ^iV?  that 
he  might  go  and  see  ;  John  iv.  40.  •OGlZo^  (OOUj  GUSiO  QIO 
they  entreated  him  that  he  would  remain  with  them;  verse  47  ;  v, 
14  ;  Rom.  vi.  1.  fQQJ  *^U  \^  '^hat  shall  we  say,  shall  we 
continue?  Gen.  ii.  16,  30,  31 ;    Luke  xviii.  1  ;    John  vi.  28  ;   Heb. 


USE  OF    THE  FUTUKE.  177 

i.  6  ;  Barh.  63, 19.  ZoSCU  ^w^^J  ]]?  ^  every  one  who  of- 
fered not  should  die  ;  68,  18 ;  Mark  ix.  49.  1Am^>  ^ 
i»»SV)ZZ    f»»\V)n   every   sacrifice  should   he  salted   with   salt ; 

7»  I  7 

Prov.  XX.  9  ;     r^\^  ^iO  who  can  say?       By  way  of  circumlocution, 

P  7 

may  and  should  are  expressed  by  J  %*^t  n  ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  xi.  7  ; 
must — by  J  Uo  with  a  future  following  ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  24  ;  I 
Tim.  Hi.    2. 

B)  The  Imperative  ;  a)  in  Prohibitions ;  e.g.  Matt.  i.  20. 
^\Lil  \i  fear  not ;  John  iii.  7  ;  vi.  20  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  83,  34. 
^Ql^L  1]  sin  not ;  h)  after  a  preceding  imperative  ;  e.  g. 
John  i.  40.    ^OVm2o  o2  gpxstfäs  xa*  'ihrz^  verse  47;  viii.  11. 

Rem. — The  third  person  of  the  imperative,  which  is  wanting,  is 

always  expressed  by  the  future  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  i.  3.  (9G1QJ  (OOU  let 
there   he    light. 

C)  The  future  marks  the  Infinitive  after  verbs  which  in- 
volve the  intention  of  some  action ;  e.  g.  Barh.  34,  4,  5. 
•^.  J^j  ]lo  he  sought  to  kill ;  90,7,8.    ^^OloA^QJ?  ^Ju.Zt 

he  thought  to  kill  him  ;  Matt  ii.  22.  ^l)j?  ^?  he  feared  to 
go;  Assem.  1.  33,  25.  ll'JjO  2>00*J?  ^'t»  he  began  to  fast 
071^  io  prflv ;  John  iii.  3.  (U»J?  ^»n«V)  U  Äe  cannot  see  ; 
verses  4,  5  ;  xv.  4  (without  j  following,  Matt.  viii.  28).  In 
like  manner  occur  fZT  Matt.  v.l7 ;  ^^  xvL  3  ;  jOa  Luke 
viii.  55  ;  Acts  i.  4 ;  and  many  others. 

Rem.— The  infinitive  with  ^  also  follows  these  verbs.  Com- 
pare   §  63.   B. 

4.  Finally,  the  future  is  also  expressed  by  ^Al  ready, 
about  tobe  (  =  fxeXXsjv )  and  a  following  infinitive  ;  e.g.Matt. 
xi.  14.  ]1\^  r»ÄlJ  he  who  is  to  come  ;  John  iii.  14. 
lül  >  01^  Qk}>ZASüii  r»^  ]xio\  even  so  the  Son  of  Man 
is  to  be  lifted  up  ;  vi.  6  ;  'vii.  85  ;  in  the  plural ;  Luke  xxi. 


178  USE  OF  THE  IMPERATIVE. 

9.  looiSijJi  ^jb^Ol  ^jj]  ^hA^  this  will  come  to  pass;  verse36. 
The  implied  idea  of  the  imperfect  is  expressed  by  looi  ap- 
pended ;  e.  g.  John  vii.  39.  o\nn^\  0001  ^^kAl)  paO» 
the  spirit  which  they  were  to  receive. 

Rem. — Also  occurs  J  ^kAl  with  a  following  future  ;  e.  g.  Assem, 
I.  481,  22.  f;jüj  ^JOID  r*'^?  the  priest  shall  begin  ;  37,  17  ; 
Ephr.  I.  197,  D  ;  in  the  plural  ;  John  vi.  15.  The  idea  of  willing, 
purposing,  is  also  expressed  bv  M^»  ;  a  )  with  J  and  a  future  fol- 
lowing;  especially  Matt.  xvi.  24.  «-»)Ao  fZpj  t^*?  ^3;0 
whoso  will  follow  after  me  ;  v.  40;  Barh.  68,6  ;  or  without  >  ;  e.  g. 
Luke  xviii.  13.  UIji^J..  (001  lo»  U  he  would  not — lift  up  ;  b) 
with  an  infinitive  following  ;  John  i.44.  «n*^V)\  ^Q »  he  would 
go  forfh. 


§  62.    Use  of  the  Imperative. 

1.  The  Imperative  expresses  either  a  command ;  e.g.  John 

•  ■»7  P         7      1 1      -X  *, 

V.  8.  j^OlO  ySQ"^  ^QOs  y)QO  arise,  take  up  thy  bed  and 
walk  ;  or  encouragement  and  permission  ;  e.  g.  Mark  i.  38. 
V>>on\  on^Ol  go  into  the  city  ;  John  xi.  15. 

Rem. — In  the  same  signification  the  Syriac  appends  the  impera- 
tive of  l2f  (vid.  §  28.  l.Rem.;  2.  Rem.)  to  the  future  of  the  finite 
verb,  especially  of  "jZ  and  wkZ  in  the  singular,  when  two,  are  in- 
tended ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xxxi.  44.  ]V)iO  y)in]  l2  let  us  make  a 
covenant  ;  xix.  32  ;  and  oZ  in  the  plural,  when  several  are  meant ; 
e.g.  John  xi.  7.     ^IP    oZ   let   us  go. 

2.  The  imperative  standing  after  the  future,  some- 
times acquires  a  future  signification ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlv.  18. 
oLoalo   —  ^qdIu  ^2^  I  will  give  to  you— and  ye  shall  eat; 


USE   OF  THE  INFINITIVE.  179 

or  the  latter  of  two  imperatives,  following  each  other  with- 
out a  copula,  denotes  the  infinitive;  e.  ff.  John  iv  16 
^;£)  *A^1  go  to  call ;  verse  29.  0\j^  oZ  come  to  see  ;  Ephr. 
I.  201,  E;  or  with  the  copula  they  stand  in  the  relation  of 
cause  and  effect  ;  e,  g.  Gen.  xlii.  18.  Q.»-mO  Q,*^v  Ijoi  do 
this  and  live,  i.  e.,  if  ye  ivould  live. 

Rem. — In  this  latter  case  the  future  also  follows  the  imperative  ; 
e.  g.  Isa.  viii.lO.  >iV)iOZZ  l]o  IAIj^  o\Sv>  speak  a  word, 
it  shall  not  be  fulfilled. 

8.  Of  two  successive  imperatives,  when  one  is  negative,  it 
is  expressed  by  the  future  (§  61.  3.  B) ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  U. 
^.^4**^  "    *^ÖL  1»01   ^iDO   *aLi  go  and  henceforth  sin  no 

more  ;  Eom.  xi.  20 ;  Eph.  iv.  26. 

Rem. — Concerning  the  third  person  df  the  imperative,  com- 
pare  §  ßl.  3.  B.  Rem.  On  the  use  of  (001  to  designate  this 
person,  see  §  60.  5.  a. 


§  63.    Use  of  the  Infinitive. 

The  Syriac,  which  has  not,  like  the  Hebrew,  a  double 
form  for  the  infinitive  absolute  and  construct,  denotes  the 
latter  by  ^  prefixed  (compare  §  19.  B.  3). 


A.    Infinitive  Absolute. 

The  infinitive  without  ^  is  mostly  used  adverbially, 
and  in  connection  with  its  finite  verb,  which  it  precedes, 
denotes  ;  a)  a  strentheninsr  of  the  action ;  e.  g.  Hebr.vi.  14. 
..>  .  or>1  n>  mVnr>  w»0;Id1  QD^Q^  /  toill  bless  thee  exceed- 
imrly  and  multiply  thee  greatly  ;  I  Sam.  xx.  6 ;  xxiii.  22  ; 
John  ix.  9.     OlS  ]Sx>j   \^^  he  is  very  like  him  ;  Acts  v. 


180  USE   OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

28  ;  Philem.  verse  9  ;  b)  certainty^  confirmation ;  e.  g.  BarH. 
15,  18.  ^}L  ^r^  thou  shall  know  with  certainty.  Neg- 
atively with  ]]  before  the  finite  verb  it  is  equivalent  to,  by 
no  means ;  e.g.  John  xx.  5.  ^Ü  U  ^ÜSo  he  by  no  means 
went  in  ;  Rom.  ix.  6. ;  c)  it  sometimes  denotes  continuance  ; 
e.g.  Isa.  xxx.19.  tOatoZ  |j  f^nV>  ye  shall  not  always  weep  ; 
Exod.  xxxiv.  7. 

Rem. — By  the  infinitive  absolute  are  also  expressed,  rather  how- 
ever after  the  idiom  of  the  Hebrew,  other  minute  points  of  the 
language ;  e.  g.  much^  much  more ;  Jer.  xxii.  10.  O^n  p*^^^ 
weep   much ;     somewhat^   indeed   (  Germ,  etwa  ),    Gen.   xxxvii.   8. 

>V<^  AjI  1  A^^^  n^  vVnVn  y^Ht  thou  indeed  rule  over  us  ? 
then^  truly;  xliii.7.  ^001  ^->-^r^  ^r^  could  loe  then  know  ?  per- 
haps, indeed ;  Acts  vii.  34.  Aap^  fl»*^  I  have  indeed  seen.  More 
frequently  it  is  merely  pleonastic ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  22 ;  John  xiii.  29  ; 
Acts  vii.  45  ;  and  it  is  appended  to  the  imperative  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  vi.  9. 
\1SqaSo  QSSfl»  hear  ye.  The  negative  sometimes  stands  before 
it ;  e.g.  Gen.  iii.  4.  ^LQ^l  ASbSD  |J  ye  surely  shall  not  die. 
The  case  a,  in  translations  of  passages  from  the01dTestament,is  also 
expressed  by  the  noun  formed  from  the  finite  verb ;  e.  g.  Gen.  ii.l7. 
2qSdZ  *|ZqSo  t1^)3?l  tl1^  ^^^^  ^^«^^  surely  die  (compare 
Ephr.  I.  24,  A),  which  is  closely  connected  with  the  ordinary  Syriao 

mode  of  expression  ;  as  »^4  1^^'  1^0  ,-m  |,-m  rejoice  exceed- 
ingly  ;  see  §  67.  1.  c. 


B.    Infinitive  with  ^  or  the  Construct  form. 

The  Infinitive   with  ^  stands  ; 

a)  after  verbs  which  denote  a  purpose,  wish,  determina- 
lion,  capacity,  command,  etc.  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xi.  54.  »^*^ 
Jo*^  r^U^^  they  sought  to  catch  something;  Matt,  xxi,  46 ; 


THE    INFINITIVE.  181 

John  V.  16;  vii.  1.     oaii^OlSuL  looi  ]£il  J]' Ac  would  not 

go;  Matt.  xiv.  5;  Barli.  14,  18;  83,  6;  Matt.  vi.  24. 
»KfcS'^V^S  ,»»n«V>  .ajI  |J  no  man  can  serve  ;  Mark  ii.  7 ; 
John  iii.  2  ;  X.  21 ;  Barli.  192,20.  ^Zsol  ^ioif  ^2  Uaf 
here  also  could  he  not  remain  ;  Luke  xv.  15.    ]v*Vf>V   OXJ^ 

he  sent  him  to  feed ;  John  iv.  83.     VV^]^V  SLa'(  he. 

brought — to  eat ;  Ephr.  I.  230,  D.  oicfuScA  -.  ^Qiimj  they 
shall  take  —  to  kindle  ;  John  xi.  31.  ]nnV)L  JJl]  '[;*->r.V% 
that  she  goeth  unto  the  grave  to  weep ;  Barh.  12,  20;  h) 
after  verbs  signifying  to  begin,  to  cease,  to  be  accustomed  ; 
e.  g.  Matt  iv.  17.  Oi;nV>\  ^;ji  he  began  to  preach ; 
xvi.  21 ;  Barh.  I,  1,  2  ;  5,  2  ;  Assem.  I.  513,  B.  20  ;  Acts 
V.  42.  0'^\Sn\  0001  ^^iV«  J]  they  ceased  not  to  teach  ; 
Eph.  i.  16;  Barh.  5.  10.  n'^\M>aV)S  ^^^  they  were  ac- 
customed to  changes. 

Rem.  1. — The  infinitive  with  ^  (which  can  sometimes,  viz.  in 
passages  translated  from  the  Hebrew,  be  rendered  by  while^  or 
when  ;  e.g.  Gen.  ii.  3.  ,*^\Sn\  fOu^  fr^?  which  God  created, 
when  he  made  it);  forms,  after  ^^Al  (§  61.  4)  and  after  looi,  a  cir- 
cumlocution for  the  future ;  e.g.  Gen.  xv.l2.  %*^\\^iy\  \mliD»  ]ooi 
the  sun  shall  go  down.  But  of  the  Hebrew  idiom,  by  which  the 
infinitive,  joined  with  a  preposition  or  conjunction,  is  explained  by 
the  finite  verb,  there  occurs  in  Syriac,  only  the  construction  with 
>  ^  before  ^ ;  e.g.  Assem.  1. 42,8.  oaSSüLj  ^  ]ocri  IJ*  Jlo 
and  he  ceased  not  to  teach  ;  negatively,  in  Hebr.  iv.  1. 
W vVr>\^  V>  «-*(^?  '^ho  should  refrain  from  entering,  i.  e., 
who  should^  not  enter  ;  or  comparatively,  without  y  ;  Gen.  iv.  13. 
/"^^^^^  ^  «jiZcL-Xnco  «uOI  pb)  my  crime  is  greater,  than 
can  be  forgiven  me. 

Rem.  2. — Tn  the  poets  we  sometimes  meet  with   a  transition 


182  USE   OF  THE   PARTICIPLE. 

from   the   infinitive   to   the   finite   verb;    e.g.   Ephr.  III.  129,  F. 

]lni  .siLj^ä  )]o  I'A^vnV  \lVn  Ucn»  /^^  «^^  ^^  «M>n*=^ 

|vr>nVn  >\jlQJ  far  better  is  it,  in  time  of  thirst  to  drink  water ^ 
than,  instead  of  drinkiwj  to  measure  fountains  (literally,  and  we 
will  not  measure)  ;  and  likewise  conversely ;  which  seems  to  be 
done  for  the  sake  of  the  metre  (compare  Hahn  et  SiefF.  Chr.  p.  7 . 
Anm.).  The  Syriac  also  expresses  the  infinitive  by  the  future, 
with  or  without  J  prefixed  (  §  61.  3.  C  )  or  by  the  participle 
(§64.3.B). 


§  64.     Use  of  the  Participle, 

1.  Participles  may  be  considered  either  as  Adjectives  or 
as  Substantives  : 

A)  As  Adjectives^   they  assume  tbe  number   and  gender 

of  their  subject;  and  take  their  object  in  the  case  or 
with  the  preposition  of  the  verb  from  which  they  are 
formed ;  thus ;  a  )  the  Active  Participle  ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  14. 
UQ-^O  tl^r^O  \jOL  ^^al*^pQ>  ^i  NOI  those  who  sold  oxen,  sheep, 
and  doves  ;  verse  16  ;  viii.  44 ;  Barh.  52,  4,  5 ;  74,  20. 
1c7i!L  ^^j  ]n\V)  a  king  who  fears  Qod ;  Assem.  I.  270, 
A.  Rem.  9 ;  Acts  vi.  3.  l^'r^?  C5U*oi  ^iSv>  full  of  the 
Holy  Ghost ;  Rom.  i.  29  ;  John  iii.l5.  oii  ^^cnk)>  .aiSo 
every  one  who  believes  on  him  ;  b)  the  Passive  Participle^ 
with  the  case  or  the  preposition  of  its  active ';  e.  g.  Ez.  ix.  2. 
V.  QO  .Ä-Jli^  clothed  in  Byssus  ;  Barh.  82,  14  ;  108,  6  ;   l70, 

19.       |r*|     «.|^A2    maimed    in    the    hand ;     Lev.    ii.    4. 

■J"    ,*         ^    i^    p  I.. 

^i&SQO  ^A^2>  .  ^jif..  cakes  anointed  with  oil ;  I  Sam.  ii.l8. 

HpQ-^  ^92  blessed  of  the  Lord. 

B)  As   Substantives^   participles   stand,   in  a  genitive  re- 
lation, in  the  construct  state,  before  the  noun  ;  thus    a)  the 


USE  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE.  188 

Active  Particijple ;  e.g.  Gen.  xxiii.  10.  "{LyL  «lS]i  those  who 
went  in  at  the  gate  \  Rom.  vii.  1.  "IflDQiüJ  «-«Ar^  those  who 
hnow  the  law  (literally,  the  hnowers  of  the  laiu) ;  Barh.  1 95, 
11.  I^im  %h{f<\%  loho  had  drawn  the  sword  \  214,  1  ; 
even  before  prepositions;  II  Tim.  iii.  2.  fZonafcjD  *j  ,£kO 
who  deny  (i.e.  7'efnse  to  acknowledge)  favors;  I  Tim.  i.  10. 
fASook)   ^\L   ^r^^  breaker   of  their   oath ;    b )   the  Passive 

Participle;  Gen.  xxiv.  31.  "Ur^?  OOa'^O  bl&ssed  of  God; 
xxvi.    29. 

2.  Participles  mark  the  following  relations  of  time  : 

A)  The  present,  in  connection  with  the  separable  pro- 
noun denoting  the  subject  (  §  54.  2  ) ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  9. 
Aj]  ^|i  thou  prayesi  (art  pro^ying);  xv.  15 ;  Assem.  I. 
34,  9.  tflo  ^Sd  ]j1  f^^iSi  J]  /  have  no  command  from  our 
Lord. 

Rem. — In  the  third  person  which  is  usually  already  rendered 
definite  by  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  the  separable  pronoun  is 
omitted  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xv.  5.  Ol^  ^\njiO  and  he  heareth  it  {the 
sheep)  ;  verse  6.  «^GIOSTIm;^  Iji^O  cnAinS  IZlo  and  cometh 
into  his  house  and  calleth  his  friends  ;  John  iii.  18,  20;  iv.  36 ; 
vii.  17  ;  viii.  47 ;  iv.  23.     li^li  iLZf  IJT  but  the  time  cometh, 

B)  The  past ;  a)  the  Imperfect ;  a )  in  connection  with 
looi  (§  65) ;  /3)  without  loCTI  after  a  preceding  imperfect ; 
e.  g.  John.  iii.  22.  .iCilSDO  ^OOliOii  loCFl  »^OlAlo  he  tar- 
ried with  them  and  baptized ;  iv.  27,  31 ;  vi.  2  ;  7 )  after  the 
preterite  in  a  relative  parenthetical  clause ;  e.  g.  John  vi.  5. 

pan?/    who   came   to   him ;  verse  11  ;  Assem.  I  .  75,  A.36  ; 
joined  with  o  copulative  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  4,  3.     IjQ^^  onSoD 


184  THE   PARTICIPLE. 

^IajO   ^qSo>>9    they  went  up  on  Mount  Hermon  and  abode  ; 
b )  the  Perfect ;  John  vii.  52.     ö'^yt  ^r^  U^?"  ^U^O  *a^ 

y)]^  U  search  and  see,   that  out  of  Galilee  hath  arisen  no 
prophet. 

Rem. — It  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  mere  imitation,  and  not  as  a 
constant  idiom  of  the  language,  when  tlie  Hebrew  infinitive 
^^^j-|  or  the  participle  n^n»  (^7  which,  coming  before  the  finite 
verb,  is  indicated  the  continuance  or  gradual  progress  of  an  action), 
is  expressed  in  Syriac  by  the  participle   of  ^l]  ;     e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  5, 

^•mio  0001  ^iV  ]2do  ( -i^om  -jibn  vri  D'^Tan-) ) 

and    the   waters   decreased    more    and    more  ;     I    Sam.    ii.    26. 

^  ^ilo  ^iT  U^o   ( nit)i  bi!^n  tibn  -i5?5m )  «^ 

t\ie  hoy  grew  from  day  to  day. 

C  )  The  Future  ;  ö  )  the  Absolute  Future  ;  «  )  in  general 
propositions  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  23.  .-a.DQa*(  ^(o  thy  brother 
shall  rise  again  ;  ß)  after  a  present  ;  John  xi.  24. 
y>{lD)  p|  |l,a  /  ^nozü  /!/ia^  he  shall  rise  again  ;  iv.  25  ; 
7)  after  a  preterite,  Barh.  80,  20;  81,  1.  >A£3j  oil  ;Sd] 
]2j-i^V)^  OlS  ^1  ^oSiSD  ^-ÜqI  \t^l  he  said  to  him  that  in 
three  days  he  would  surrender  the  city  ;  John  iv.  25  ;  ^  )  after 
a  future  ;  John  xiv.  23.  ^-i-»Z|  oiZolo  ^oiQLa.Lcujp  ^aO] 
7ny  Father  will  love  him,  and  we  will  come  to  him  ;  Assem.  I. 
862,  5,  8.  XA  looi  ]i  i'fcmip  -^  j  »A  ^ouAj  ^*  if  it 
shall  be  granted  me  that  —  then  will  I  become  a  christian  ;  s  ) 
after  an  imperative  ;  Mark  xi.  24.  ^oAj]  ^-jLTiflDJj  Qli£UOI 
believe  that  ye  shall  receive ;  ^)  after  loi,  John  xvi.  32. 
\blM  \kL\  (01  behold  the  hour  shall  come  ;  Gen.  vi.  17  ; 
xlviii.4 ;  Exod.  ix.  18 ;    *] )  in  direct  and  indirect  questions ; 


USE  OF  THE   PARTICIPLE.  185 

e.  g.  John  vii.  41.  ]»»i«V)  fZf  ö^yi  ^  \i£L^i  shall  the 
Messiah  come  out  of  Galilee  ?  verse  81 ;  viii.  22  ;  xiii.  27. 
AjI  r^il>  y>jSD  what  thou  wilt  do  ;  h)  the  futurum  exactum  ; 
a  )  after  particles ;  e.  g.  John  vii.  27.  l2"|>  *aAi"|  when  he 
shall  have  come ;  verse  81.  Barh.  133,  2.  ^bS\  Uso»)  \J> 
as  soon  as  thou  shall  have  heard  ;  /3  )  in  conditional  clauses  ; 
e.g.  Epiir.  I.  218,  F.  \^  ^ooil  Vl  *QOiI>  tff  imless  I 
shall  have  given  him  water. 

3.  In  like  manner,  participles  indicate  various  Moods  ; 

A  )  The  Subjunctive  ;  viz.  a  )  of  the  Imperfect  (  with 
|00l  ,    compare    §    65  )     after  ^(  ;     e.   g.     Barh.    88,    10. 

^oZASo  ]] 1)21  ;o2A^  I^W  ^1  everi  though  the  vessel  broke, 

the  ground  —  would  not  break ;  Assem.  I.  879,  2. 
Zlio  ülo  1>  >'  1>> .  J><i->o  ;ao  ^1  2/  Äe  d'eM/ec?  Christ  then 
shoidd  he  live,  if  not,  he  should  die  ;  after  ?  13 1,  Barh.  56,  12. 

rifice ;  in  relative  clauses  depending  upon  a  future 
( =  imperfect  subjunctive  )  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  862,  19. 
^.iJ^pi)  ^lO  ^QOCCLkSf  .oaü  JDOUAJ)  rn£>  Aß  ordered 
that  he  shoidd  be  given  them  as   Bishop,    lohom  they  should 

001  in  conditional  clauses 
(compare  §  60.  4.  c) ;  e.  g.  Gal.  iv.  15.  iooi  K»naV)  oiil 
-,-\  —LÄOUO  .oAaOOI  11  riiOnr  ^  '^  had  it  been  possible 
ye  would  have  plucked  out  your  oivn  eyes,  and  given  them  to  me; 
Heb.  X.  2  ;  xi.  15 ;  I  John  ii.  19. 

B  )  The  Infinitive,  after  verbs  signifying  to  begin,  to  cease, 
to  permit,  to  command,  to  be  able,  etc. ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  1. 
v^\V^^  Qji";i  they  began  to  pluck  ;  Mark  i.  45 ;  Luke  v.  21 ; 


186  USE   OF  THE  PARTICIPLE. 

XV.  14  ;  I  John  ii.  8.  1V**ASd  ^'^  fioiQJ  theij  began  to  see 
the  light ;  Assem.  I.  87,15.  (l£)  ^y  he  began  to  call ;  50, 
5  ;  Barh.  96,  7  ;  108,  19  ;  160,  7  ;  180,  5  ;  83,  12  ; 
|Z|i  ^^ito  ^  ^^4^  he  ceased  to  build  churches ;  Matt.  xiii. 
30.  ^-luTd)  noon»  suffer  to  groiu ;  Luke  xviii.  16;  Jolin 
xi.  44  ;  xviii.  8  ;  Luke  x.  40.  *^  l>r^  ^  '^'\  bid  her 
Äe^  me  ;  Mark  ii.  2.  ^QJ]  r**l  •^*^»|  U  2^  com/^  wof 
hold  them  ;  vii.  15  ;  Jolin  v.  19  ;  viii.  43  ;  Acts  x.47 ;  Mark 
vi.  37.     ^fcfOS^  .OOlL  ^Äj  we  will  give  them  to  eat. 

Rem. — Sometimes  j  also  stands  before  such  a  participle  ;  e.  g. 
Matt,  xxiv.30.  VZ1>  liülj  OT^n^  ^OVmJ  they  shall  see  the  Son 
of  man  comiftg  ;  John  v.  19  ;  Acts  xxi.  32.  ^^i  »»Lo?  ^So  Q^aiA 
tOOO^O^^    OOQI    £'7ra;;ö'avTo    Toitrovrsg  töv    IlauXov. 

4.  The  Absolute  Participle  is  distinguished  by  a)  p  pre- 
ceding  it ;  e.g.  Matt.xiv.25.  »^oiLo  p  ^Q«u  ^ooiZoj^  ]!} 
Xlü^D  ^^  /esw5  came  to  them  walking  upon  the  sea  ;  xv.  32; 
John  ix.  7.  lu*  P  U]o  he  came  seeing ;  Barh.  62,  6. 
AaId  tä'rOO  ^-^Ak)  p  disquieted  by  war  he  died ;  73,4. 
]ijDj  p  ]]Vi*o]^  P  H  not  standing,  but  bowed  to  the  earth; 
b)  by  >  preceding  ;  e.  g.  Mark  ii.  14.  ]mnV)  Zu.o  jd^j 
sitting  at  the  receipt  of  custom ;  xi.  2,  4  ;  Matt.  xiv.  26  ; 
xxvi.  64. 

Rem. — If  to  such  a  participle,  a  noun  he  appended,  this  con- 
struction   sometimes   expresses  the   Latin   ablative   absolute  ;  e.  g. 

..7     ikl         p  ..  P  ^1 P  7 

Matt.  XV.  20.  «jiCJIOHkl  ^^^^  '^  r^  ^^^^  unwashed  hands  ; 
Mark  vii.  2,  5  ;  John  xi.  44.  wiCnoly^JO  ^aiÖj-»"|  ^^0)1  p 
6oww^  Äawc?  a?ic?  foot.  In  the  translation  of  the  New  Testament, 
the  participle  is  sometimes  to  be  understood  as  in  the  person  of  the 
finite  verb  following  it ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  8.  OnOS  Q^]  «ropsuä^vref 
i|crafl'aT£ ,  verses  9,  10,  11,  13. 


USE   OF    THE   PARTICIPLE.  187 

5.  The  passive  participles  frequently  have  an  active 
signification  ;  a  )  those  from  transitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.  I^Iatt. 
Viu.  18.  ai^  ^HH^?  t}^ose  surrounding  him  ;  Luke  vii. 
14.  Ollik  0001  ^-JLiuO»/  those  hearimr  him  ;  John  v.  4. 
fi^^  fOOl  MAlk)  troubling  the  water  :  Actsxxi.l6 ;  Assem. 
I.  30,  4.  U^^^^^il»  yO  fteffrm^  ^Äe  child;  34,9  ;  37,8 ; 
377,  2.  Olr^l^)  olL  Zooi  1n»n\  she  drew  him  ly  the 
hand  ;      h  )  those  from  intransitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  v.  4. 

jlJDIJ  ^OOLi^Q^  blessed  are  those  ivho  mourn  ;  Mark  vii. 
30  ;  John  xi.  19.  0001  ^^21  they  were  come  ;  xii.  15. 
I/jlI  ^'  ,SljSi't  riding  upon  a  foal  ;  Barh.  170,  2  ;  223,  1. 
|CC>)    M^l  «^aAä   ^    sitting  upon  a  bed. 

Rem.  —  Participles  sometimes  have  the  signification  of  the 
Latin  participle  in  -ndus  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  128,  2.  ^'Owi-m)  timendus. 
Here  also  belong  (  compare  No.  5  )  such  constructions  as 
^\b  «.k.!^  >ni*^«  /  have  forsaken  all  ;  ^t£^  ->^  \ASiD  I  deny 
thee  ;     «jk^  V)a  »*>)  ^f  as  I  will. 

6.  Finally  participles  are  also  used  impersonally  thus  ; 

_•^..      X       7»  '^p  _7 

o)  the  Masculine ;  Eom.  xvi.  2.  ]■  i,n\  *0>1j  j^^f  «s  it 
hecometh  saints  ;  Heb.  viii.  3  ;  Philem.  8  ;  Assem.  I.  33,20. 
^  ^Oji  *j;ä   my   son,    it   behoveth   thee ;    455,  A.  24,  4L 

loi!§^9  li^^^  W^  V  it  behoveth  not  a  servant  of  the  Lord; 
John  iii.  30.  ]A«VnV  "jooi  l]o  OOl  0(yi^  he  must  increase  ; 
ix.  4.  IJo  ^  Z  must ;  Acts  xxv.  27  ;  xxvi.  1 ;  Rom.  xiv. 
4 ;  Mark  iv.  38.  ^i  I^j-j  ^  ^4^  P  «^  M-'^^si  coi,  bVi 
dt'B'oXXjfxsäa ;  6)  the  Feminine;  especially  to  denote  the 
neuter;  e.  g.  Gal.  vi.9.  ^  X^\^  ^ocn  ü'  /e«  i^  «o^  be  bur- 
densome to  us;  Barh.  45,  13.     U^?  l?^'!   this  is  probable; 


188  MOODS    AND  TENSES. 

Assem.  I.179,B.22.  Zooi  1^  it  was  necessary;    482,24. 
^)|0  ]1qs  it  is  honorable  and  right ;  5 19,  A.  4. 

I^EM. — Here  belongs  also  Rom.  xiv.  4.     iJiOlO^fO  \^sD  it  comes 
into  his  hands  ;   i.  e.   he  can  ;  and  in  the  feminine,  Acts  v.  39. 
nn  >  ^] A  ]>^<vn  |J   qje  cannot. 


§  65.     Yiew  of  the  manner  of  designating  all  the  Tenses  and 

Moods  ;  of  the  Imperfect^  Pluperfect^  and  Optative  in 

particular. 

1.  The  Indicative  ; 

A  )  of  tlie  Present  is  expressed ;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§60, 
2) ;  h)  sometimes  by  the  future  (§61.  2.  a) ;  c)  usually  by 
the  participle  (§  54.  2.  b,  and  §64.  2.  A); 

B )  of  the  Imperfect ;  a)  usually  by  the  participle  joined 
with  |00i  (§  18.4.  Kern.,  and  §  38 ;  also  without  the  substan- 
tive verb,  §  64.  2.B.  ß  ) ;  e.g.  Matt.  ii.9.  Vooi  ^if  he  went; 
verse 20.  (i\(^>  oiasu  oooi  ^'^*^^  ^oioi  who  sought  the 
chiMs  life  ;  iii.  5.     JOOU   olSo  Zooi  josu  all  Judea  went 

out ;  John  xvii.  12.  AaOOl  \%i  I  kept ;  h)hj  the  prete- 
rite (§  60.  1.  b),  and  rarely  ;  c  )  by  the  future  (  §  61. 
2.  b  )  ; 

C )  of  the   Perfect  J   besides  cases  noted  in   (  §  60. 1 ) ; 

a)  rarely  by  the  future  (§61.  2.  c);  ft)  by  the  participle 
(§  64.  2.  B.  b) ; 

D  )  of  the  Pluperfect ;  a)  usually  by  (001  in  the  same 
person  and  number  added  to  the  preterit ;    e.  g.  Luke  v.  9 


MOODS  AND  TENSES.  189 

(001  Olf*^]  |01SdZ  terror  had  seized  him;  John  iv.  8. 
OOOl  QUI  they  had  gone  into  ;  v.  13.  looi  ^ii2f  he  had 
hidden  himself;  x.  22.  fOOl  fOOl  he  had  been ;  h)  by 
the  preterit     (  §  60.  1.  c ) ;     c)  rarely  by  the  future   (  §  61. 

2.  d  ) ; 

E  )  of  the  Future  besides  cases  noted  in  §61.  1.,  some- 
times ;  a)  by  the  Preterit  (§  60.  3.  a) ;  h)  by  the  impera- 
tive (§  62.  2) ;     c)  by  the  participle  (§  64.  2.  C); 

F  )  of  the  Futurum  exactum  ;     a)  by  the  preterit    {§  60. 

3.  b),  more  frequently ;  h)  by  the  future  (^  61.  1.  b),  some- 
times ;  c)  by  the  participle  (§  64.  2.  C.  b). 

//.  The   Subjunctive  ; 

A  )  of  the  Present  is  given  ;  a)  by  the  preterit  of 
looi  (§  60.  4.  a  ),  very  often  ;  b)  by  the  future  (§  61. 
3.  1.  a  )  ; 

B  )  of  the  Imperfect ;  a)  usually  like  the  indicative  of 
the  same  tense,  by  the  participle   with  fOOl   in  conditional 

clauses  ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  19.  »Sf  ^oAaOOl  ^jlIh*  *"  ^L^ 
|0Aa001  >^.  >  -  >*^|i  //"ye  ÄWCIÜ  me,  ye  would  also  knoiu  my 
father ;  verses  39,  42  ;  xviii.  30,  36  ;  xxi.  25  ;  b)  by  the 
future  (§  61.  3.  A.  b),  sometimes  ;  c)  by  the  participle  alone 
(§  64.  3.  A.  a) ; 

C  )  of  the  Perfect;  sometimes  by  the  future  (§  61.  31 
A.c); 

D  )  of  the  Pluperfect ;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§  60.  4.  c) ;: 
6)  by  the  future  (§  61.  3.  A.  d),  more  frequently ;  c)  by  the- 
participle  with  looi    (§  64.  3.  A.  b). 

Ill  The  Optative  is  expressed ;     a)hy  the  interrogative- 


190  THE  PERSONS  OF  THE  VERB. 

pronoun  with  a  preterit  or  future  following ;  e.  g.  Judges 
ix.  29.  wA^jill^  poi  '{SqiL  oiLq^I  ^>  ^^  oh  that  I  had 
(who  will  give  over  to  me)  this  people  in  my  power  I  Ps.  iv.  7 ; 
lv.7;  h)  by  the  particles  ^^oJi  and  *aoA»l  oh  that,  with  a  pre- 
terit following  (§  60.  4. Rem.);  the  Future;  e.g.  Gen.  xvii.18. 
]I*p  %2)oA«l  oh  that  he  might  live  ;  or  the  participle  with 
looi ;  e.  g.  II  Cor.  xi.l.  ^  ^oAaOOi  ^;nimV)  »aoA»! 
may  ye  yet  hear  with  me  I 

Rem — The   optative   is   sometimes  also  expressed  by  A  or  Q-ä^  ; 

7  7  7       '^If* 

e.g.  Ps.lxxxi.l3.  tilSV)»  «iVtS  Quäv  would  that  my  people  would 
hearken  to  me  ;  by  verbs  that  denote  a  wish  with  a  following  j  ; 
e.g.  Exod.  xvi.  3.  1^^109  ^001  ^^ i„0 »  would  that  we  were  dead! 
When  the  substantive  verb  denotes  a  wish,  it  is  omitted ;  e.  g. 
Luke.  ii.l4.     loi^fJ   |Aa*QÄ*2  glory  toGod.  Sometimes  instead  of 

7  7 

the  Hebrew  ^^^  1)2  occurs  the  almost  correspondent  J  ^^Ql  ^So ; 
e.  g.  Job  xxiii.  3 ;  but  it  is  literally  translated  in  Cant.  viii.  1. 
«.a2^  ]>*!  ^*!^Aj  ^Sd  oh  that  thou  wert  my  brother» 

lY.  The  Imperative^  besides  the  cases  under  §  62,  is  ex- 
pressed ;  a)  by  the  preterit  of  looi  (§  60.  5.  a) ;  b)  by  the 
future,  especially  negatively  (§61.  3.  B). 

V.  The  Infinitive,  finally,  besides  the  cases  under  §  63,  is 
expressed  ;  a)  by  the  preterit  (§  60.  5.  b)  ;  h)  by  the  fu- 
ture (§  61.  3.  C) ,  and  more  frequently  ;  c)  by  the  partici- 
ple (§  64.  3.  B). 


§  m.  The  Persms  of  the  Verb, 

1.  The  third  singular  masc.  and  fern,  of  the  active  and 
passive  conjugations  is  sometimes  used  impersonally  thus : 


THE  PERSONS  OF  THE  VERB.  19  i 

a  )  the  masculine ;  a)  of  the  preterit ;  e.  g.  Heb.  x.  34. 
^oa^  jd]d  it  pained  you  ;  Luke  x.34.  ^jiOIqSi  OlL  ^^y^^Z^ 
he  cared  for  him ;  ß)  of  the  future,  Deut.  vi.  24. 
^  ^a\^  it  would  be  good  for  us  ;  Jer.  vii.6.  tOnlL  «^]jQj 
it  icould  harm  you  ;  h)  the  feminine ;  a)  of  the  preterit  , 
Ps.  xcv.lO.  001  ]j^  *^  AjJSd  it  shames  me,  (I  am  as  ham- 
ed)  of  this  generation  ;  Ps.  xxxi.9.  wk^  Aoi  it  grieves  me  ; 
Luke  xviii.  23.  Oiik  A^'^o  it  pained  him  ;  ß)  of  the  future, 
Gal.  vi.  9.  ^  t1^l2  M  it  will  not  be  grievous  to  us  ;  Ps. 
Ixix.  20.     OlL  IpZj  ^^üL  whom  it  grieved. 

2.  In  like  manner  in  Syriac,  the  neuter  is  usually  ex- 
pressed ;  a)  by  the  third  person  singular  feminine  of  the 
verb,  thus  ;  a)  in  impersonal  phrases,  as  Luke  vi.  13. 
OVyjLj  it  was  light  ;  John  vi.  17.  AOaa*  it  was  dark  ;  pas- 
sively,  Barh.  84,14.  AiSdA«|  the  report  was  spread  abroad; 
Assem.  L  298.  A.ll.  OlL  AjJSk.tZI  it  was  revealed  to  him  ; 
481,  7 ;  ß  )  in  connection  with  the  demonstrative  pro- 
noun or  with  adjectives  as  subjects  ;  e.  g.  John  i.  28. 
»jiOOl  |a±1  Aa-CiS  -jki^OI  this  came  to  pass  at  Bethany  ;  i.  3. 
Zooi  Ir**  W^l  Ihere  was  not  any  thing  ;  Ephr.  I.  240,  F. 
^qSjD  »1  -^*^  Ijoi  L'^HM  it  seemed  good  to  Moses ;  passively, 
Assem.  I.  380,  4.  ^  Zup^Zl  ]o>l  it  seemed  just  to  us.  Yet 
we  also  find  for  the  neuter ;  b)  the  third  person  singular  mas- 
culine  ;  e.g.  Isa.  xxiii.  12.  »jlu^  «m>*11  |J  there  will  be  no 
rest  for  thee  ;  Barh.  133,  8.  OlS  'r^olZ]  it  was  said  to  him; 
Assem.  L  362,  5.     oJS  ^aulj  ^^it  shall  be  permitted  to  me, 

8.  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  general  or  indefi- 
nite, it  is  expressed,  in  Syriac,  in  various  ways,  as  in  the 
English,    thus;     «)by   the  third  person  singular  ;    e.g. 


192  THE  PERSONS  OF  THE  VERB. 

Gen.  xi.  9.  ^'fO  he  calls ;  (i.e.  one  callsy  it  is  called)  ;  to 
which  is  also  appended  by  way  of  explanation,  after  the 
Hebrew  idiom,  the  participle  or  participial  noun  of  the  same 
verb  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  xvi.  10.  l#CLft)  ^O^i  the  wine  ireaders  shall 
tread  ( no  more  wine  ;  i.  e.  no  one  shall  tread);  or  \mS\  and 
Ij^yt  ;  e.g.  I  Sam.  ix.  9.     ];iii«  looi  ;iDl  he  (i.  e.  any  one) 

said ;  John iii. 4.  "tofiO  \r^s%  ^SuiAj j  .-^^^  U^l  ^^^  ^^^-^ 
one  5e  horn  when  he  is  old  f  or  passively  Matt.  xxvi.  13. 
^SiioAj  it  shall  he  told  ;  Acts  xvi.  13.  A^  lool  IvmASd  ^2 
^Zq^»  there  prayer  was  wont  to  he  made ;  Barh.  58,  13,  15  ; 
h)  by  the  third  person  plural ;  e.g.  Isa.  Ixiv.  3.  oZ  #  |J  they 
( i.  e.,  men  in  general )  have  not  heard  ;  xlvii.  1 ;  Dan.  i.  12  ; 
Heb.  xi.  3.  ^OOl  ^V**A^?  ^-^-^01  ^^/la^  ^Aey  see  (i.  e.  what 
any  one  sees,  what  is  seen  ) ;  also  with  an  explanatory  parti- 
ciple or  adjective  ;  e.g.  Isa.  xxiv.  16.  OiSsI  |jdl  they  fail- 
ed  ;  c)  by  the  second  singular ;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  4.  *£:i*faL  p 
when,  thou  bringest;  I  Tim.  ii.  1.  >o;nV>  loCJlZj  /A«^  ^Aow  o/'- 
ferest  (i.  e.  ^Äa^  ^Aere  he  offered ) ;  sometimes  the  verb  is  in 
the  second  plural.  Matt.  vi.  24  ;  d)  sometimes  by  the  first 
plural  ;  e.g.  Mark  vii.27.  )i^JO  -«  «nmi>  (or  by  the  infin- 
itive with  ^,  Matt.  XV.  26.  o>V);^\o  —  >omV)\  xxii.17), 
that  we  (i.e.  anyone)  should  take — and  cast;'  e)  more  fre- 
quently by  the  participle  alone;  e.g.  Matt.vii.l6.  >^r^V  ]C^\ 
do  men  gather  f  v.  15  ;  ix.lT  ;  x.  29  ;  I  Cor.  iv.l2  ;  Barh.6.2. 
^•iof  they  say  ;  58,  9. 

Rem. — Here  belongs  also    f^LDfASD  they  say,  it  is  said  ;  and  im- 
personal phrases   with  an   infinitive  following  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  xii.  12. 
<^vVnV   «4^Sa   one  may   do  ;  Acts   y.   29.      QfiOSL^Ak^  fJo 
we  {any  one)  must  obey. 


VERBS    WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  193 

4.  When  the  Deity  or  those  in  high  stations  (e.g.  Kings), 

speak  of  themselves^   the  first  person  plural   denotes  the 

^p  p  ^      •»»1» 
plurdlis  excellentice ;    e.   g.   Gen.    i.    26.     \mi\   ,äU    let   us 

(i.  e.  I  will)  make  man;  xi.  7;  Barh.  90,  9.  _iqAd  loi  be- 
hold we  (i.e.  ij  Justiniav)^  have  written  ;  11.  ^  *abAo  write. 
to  us  {me) . 

Rem. — Sometimes  though  for  the  most  part  only  in  passages 
translated  from  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  the  construction 
changes  from  one  person  to  the  other,  viz. ;  a  )  from  the  third 
to  the  second,  or  vice  versa;  Micah  vii.  18.     yLOD\    \6C^   Lm^ 

AjV  r>^V  Mo  oi2oZ;I>  t)'^>  l2u4>*  ;nsSoo  floL  .nn»? 

there  is  no  God  as  thou^  who  forgiveth  sins^  and  remitteth  the 
transgressions  of  the  remnant  of  his  heritage^  and  retainest  not 
(compare  Ephr.  II.  284,  A.  B);  Mai.  ii.  15;  Gal.  iv.  21. 
]rr>nVr>i  LjJ*l  .OOOU)  ^^t?  ^^iSi]  .oAjI  «^  0;k)l 
"kiysri  /xoi,  ol  vnro  vofAov  ^iXovTSg  e/vai  ;  Rom.  ii.  1 ;  Matt,  xxiii.37  ; 
b  )   from    the   first   to   the   third   person  ;    e.    g.   Isa.  xlii.  24,  25. 

r>m.\v   ^1  CTl^  — lu^J»*?  ^^  because  we  have  sinned  against 

him,  —  hath  he  poured  out  upon  them  (us). —  Here  also  belong  the 
instances  where  writers  include  themselves,  in  the  first  person  plural, 
in  what  they  declare  of  their  ancestors;  e.  g.  Psalm  Ixvi.  6. 
OlO  li-M^  ^^  then  did  we  rejoice  in  him.  When  several  verbs 
having  difi'erent  subjects  follow  each  other  in  the  same  person,  it 
appears  to  be  rather  according  to  the  Syriac  idiom,  not  to  indicate 
more  particularly  the  difference  of  the  subject ;  e.g.  II  Sam.  xi.13. 


§  67.     Construction  of   the    Verb    with  various    Cases    and 
Prepositions. 

I.     Verbs  with  the  Accusative. 
1.     "With  an  Accusative  are  construed  ; 
a  )  Transitive    Verbs  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  ii.  6.     «jiCnOiAp  OOlf 


194  VEBBS  WITH  THE    ACCUSATIVE. 

..x}£i^  who  shall  feed  my  people  ;  iv.  16;  even  intransitives, 
having  at  the  same  time  a  transitive  signification;  e.g.  Barh. 
214,  2.     IjSOm  looi  *^y  he  rode  upon  an  ass  ;  215,  11. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  such  verbs  as  in  other  languages  govern 
other  cases ;  e.  g.  fdSi  to  command  ;  Matt,  xxvni.  20.  ^^V^aCJl  to 
believe ;  John  xii.  38;  Romans  x.  16,  (  with  J^  John  ii.  23  )  ; 
Ill  to  answer  ;  Ephr.  TIL  285 ;  ;0«>  to  announce  ;  Acts  xvi. 
10.  §tc. 

h  )  Here  belong  the  following  classes  of  verbs  ;  a  )  those 
signifying  to  put  on  or  put  off  clothing,  to  adorn,  to  gird,  to 
cover  with  anything  ;  ««nS  I  Cor.  xv.  53  ;  Eph.  vi.  11 ; 
Barh.  223,  12.  ^a#0*^\  «•'^\l>  that  he  put  on  our  gar- 
ments ;  »M>\«  Col.  iii.  9  ;  Jflo]  I  Sam.  ii.  4 ;  Acts  xii.  8 ; 
even  passive  verbs ;  e.g.  *2i4^Z|  Acts  xii.  8  ;  « >  «nZf  Ps. 
civ.  2  ;  and  ß)  those  denoting  a  want  or  excess  ;  e.  g.  Acts 
vi.  8.  lJju**0  fZoni  4  fOOl  USD  he  was  full  of  faith  and  p)0W' 
er  ;  xiii.  10 ;  Rom.  i.  29 ;  Mark  viii.  36.  'rfiCUjJ  Oliaj  .  ^ 
if  he  suffer  ha^rm  as  to  his  soul.  Furthermore  here  belong ; 
y)  verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting,  >oll  John  xv.  20  ; 
Luke  i.  72  ;  pjif  John  ii.  17,  22  ;  lU  Heb.  vi.  10  ;  and 
finally  ;  ^)  verbs  of  coming  and  going  to  a  place ;  e.  g.  Matt. 
XV.21.  >0f  ?  pDQjaAiL  lZ]o  Ae  came  into  the  region  of  Tyre 
Mark  v.  38 ;    Luke  ii.  5 1  ;    John  iv.  5 ;    ^11   Luke  iv.  42 

7  m.     9 

John  vi.  1;     ySiöl   Luke   ii.  39  ;    iv.  14;  \^  Acts  ix.  3 
AjIj  John  ii.  12  ;  -oaj  i.44  ;  «.oSro  v.  1 ;  ^  xviii.33 ; 

c)  several  neuters  also  take  an  accusative,  viz  ; 

a)  in  connection  with  a  noun,  as  their  object,  formed 
from  the  same  verb  ;    e.  g.   Judg.  xiv.  12.     Üh^o]   ^]   to 


VERBS    WITH   THE   ACCUSATIVE.  195 

propose  a  riddle  ;  Ez.  xvii.  2  ;  Acts  ii.  17.  —  ]jo'vis»  Ivm 
fSn\n  NoS»!  to  have  visions  —  dreams ;  Matt.  xiii.  24 ; 
Ephr.  I.  251,  C  ;  253,  A  ;  especially  ß  )  when  the  noun  is 
more  accurately  defined  by  an  adjective ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  10. 
|Ao>  iZOpivj  Q^rA*  they  rejoiced  exceedingly;  John  iii.  29 ; 
Assem.  I.  862,  18 ;  Gen.  xxvii.  34.  XLi^j  Xtil^X'^^'i he 
lamented  sorely  ;  Zach.  i.  14. 

10 
001 ,   in  the  sense  of  to  befall^   to  happen  to   any  one, 

also   governs   the   accusative   of  the   object ;    e.   g.   Luke  xiii.  2. 

tQj(    |001    |JL201l ,  because  this  has  befallen  them  ;  Acts  vii.  40. 

fcAOUOOl    |JL1o   what  has  happened  to  him  ;  Acts  xxviii.  5,  6. 

2     The  following  govern  a  double  accusative ; 

a )  verbs  in  Pa.,  Aph.^  and  Sha.^  Pe.  of  which  takes  an 
accusative,  viz.;  a)  verbs  of  putting  on  or  off  clothing, 
adorning^  covering  with  anything;  e.  g.  *an  vv,  «t>N»| 
Mark  xv.  l7,20;  Ephr.  I.  289,  A.  fZüJu^QO  ^cuf  ut^o 
he  clothed  them  with  garments  ;  II.  178,  D ;  John  xix.  2. 
VsQy.ilj  lAwJ  »-iOlQjLCQOO  they  put  upon  him.  a  purple  robe; 
Ez.  xvi.  10  ;  ß)  verbs  oi filling  up,  satisfying  ;  e.  g.  Ephr. 
I.  527,  A.  V^wai  tlSüL  A.\v>  lAlijf  ^Äe  w;?:(^ow;  ^^Zeci 
<Äe  vessels  with  oil;  Luke  i.  53.  |A£l4  ^^*^ffl  pÄO  ^Äe  hun- 
gry he  fills  loith  good  things  ;  y)  those  which  denote  teaching^ 
or  showing ;  e.  g.  John  xiv.  26.  ^,V)\n  .on<^\i  /-e  w;i7 
/mcA  2/ow  all  things  ;  I  Tim.  iv.  6 ;  John  xiv.  8.  1^1  ^Qlm 
shoiv  us  the  Father  ;  verses  10,  82  ; 

b )  verbs  in  Peal  with  a  double  accusative  signification. 
Here  belong  ;  a)  verbs  of  clothing^  covering  (also  with  J3  of 
the  thing) ;    e.  g.   Ephr.  1.  289,  A.     ^Hn^Ci  ,Qjf  -^£01'  he 


196  VEKBS   WITH   PREPOSITIONS. 

f  r 

girded  them  with  girdles  ;  «,i(iV)  to  anoint^  Ps.xlv.7;  ^)1  to  sow  ; 
Lev.  xix.  19  ;  ß)  verbs  o^ filling  up  (also  with  *o  and  ^)\ 
e.  g.  John  ii.  7.  '(l^  V^  ^l^oSso  fill  {them)  the  water 
pots  ivith  water ;  verse  9  ;  Barh.  212,  2  ;  Assem.  I.  832,  A. 
12;  7)verbs  oicommojuding ^ordering ^  (also  with  ^iDand  ^^ol 
the  person  and  thing) ;  e.g.  Gen.  vi.22.  OlrOQj  \y.D  all  thai 
he  had  commanded  him)  Mark  viii.ll.  IZ]  Olik  0001  ^-i-^l« 
they  demanded  of  him  a  sign  ;  ^)  verbs  of  showing  or  doing 
any  thing  to  any  body,  or  mahhig  a  person  or  thing  to  he 
thus  and  so ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xvii.  5.     »^AOOU  V^]  /  have  made 

<Äee  a  Father ;  John  viii.53.  «^ji£ü  Aj]  r^ai  OliD  t^/Aa^  maÄ;- 
s.si5  thou  thyself?  Heb.  i.  2  ;  Assem.  I.  346,  A.  4.  v.  E.  Al- 
so with  an  accusative  of  the  material  of  which  anything  is 
formed ;  Q.  g.  I  Kings  viii.  32.  Vjä^  ]£)p!^  ^1  ]^ 
he  built  of  {them)  the  stones  an  altar  ;  e)  verbs  o^  naming^  \^ 
Isa.  Ix.  18  ;  I  John  iii.  1. 


II.     Verbs  with  Prepositions. 

1.  Verbs  are  construed  with  ^  which  in  English  are 
joined  with  m,  on,  upon^  ahoui^  concerning,  etc.  Here  belong 
especially  ;  a)  verbs  which  denote  some  state  or  emotion  of 
the  mind  ;  e.g.  Luke  i.l4.  01fSoV)0  ,0^*0  they  shall  rejoice 
at  his  birth ;  Barh.90,20;  *Q  V^%  to  have  pleasure  in  some- 
thing;  Matt.  iii.  17  ;  Heb.  x.  38;  ^  CtiiL^  to  wonder  at; 
Matt.  xxii.  33  ;  Luke  ii.  47  ;  *^  J^ifiD  to  hope  in  ;  Matt.  xii. 
21  ;  John  v.45  ;  JD  ^kltOI  to  believe  on ;  Mark  i.  15 ;  John 
ii.  11;  ^  ;-J  to  look  at  ;  John  i.  36,  43  ;  Barh.  190,  13  ; 
Assem.  I.  89,  A.  l7  ;      *Q  ZoiO  to  be  ashamed  of  ;  Eom.  i. 


VERBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS.  197 

16  ;  *0  Jl.^  to  rebuke  ;  I  Tim.  v.  1  ;  l]o  iUd.  or  threaten  ; 
Matt.  viii.  26 ;  Luke  iv.  41 ;  Barh.  53, 10;  ^  ^\^  to  mock 
at ;  Matt.  xx.l9  ;  xxvii.  31;  ^  *£Uk)  to  laugh  at ;  Acts  ii. 
13  ;  b)  verbs  that  denote  acknowledging^  denying,  swearing 
by,  calling  upon ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  32,  33.  ^jlC^  IjQJ?  %ai1o 
whosoever  shall  confess  me ;  Mark  i.  5 ;  Acts  xxiii.  8  ; 
Eom.  x.  9,  10 ;  Matt.  x.  33.  »jlO  joaojj  ^Sb  whosoever 
shall  deny  me ;  xxvi.  34  ;  I  Tim.  v.  viii ;  Assem.  I.  341,  A. 
23;  372,  8,  9;  Matt.  xxvi.  63.  \1L  loüLa^  ]j1  ]SdqLo 
7  adjure  thee  by  the  living  God  ;  Mark  v.  7 ;  I  Thess.  v.27; 
*a  ]\D  to  call  upon ;  Gen.  iv.  26.  Here  also  belong ;  c) 
some  verbs  which  denote  a  doing  something  for  or  against 
some  one  ;  e.  g.  *0  r^^^  «-i^jf  and  %^CLm  to  prove  against 
some  one ;  Acts  xxiv.  27 ;  xxv.  9  ;  Eom.  ix.  17 ;  1  Tim.  i. 
16;     *Q  >01fiD  (also  with  ^\l)  to  testify  against ;  Dent.  xxxi. 

7 

28.  Of  verbs  of  motion,  here  belong ;  d)  *a  \\2i  to  encoun- 
ter ;  Luke  viii.  27 ;  xxii.  10  ;  and  ^d  |21  to  come  with  (i.  e. 
bring)  something ;  Psalms  Ixvi.  13. 

Rem. — Here  also  belongs  «Ä  1A«  to  drinJc  from  ;  Gen.  xliv.  5. 
^;iD  OUD  1A»J  |cQO  the  cup  from  which  my  Lord  drinks.  Some 
times  vO  denotes  a  ^ar^  of  the  object ;  e.g.  H  Sam.  xxiii.  10. 
yiA^Vty^«^  JDJ>*  Äß  7wac?e  an  overthrow  among  the  Philistines  ; 
and  here  are  to  be  placed  *0  ,£l1  and  ^^iül  to  labor  at  something; 
I  Kings  ix.  23. 

2.  The  following  verbs  are  construed  with  ^  as  a  sign  of 
the  dative;  a)  \h.os>Q  o^ giving,  permitting,  commending; 
e.  g.  John  xiv.27.    .onS  t^l  *Q^  -^?  t^^  ^^  peace 

-  .7  -x  *^7 

gfüe  /  fo  you  ;  Matt,  viii.21,31.  ^  -  %aJi^  *£Cxa|  ;?em?^  we 
—  us;   Mark  V.  13;   Luke  viii.  32  ;   Acts  xx. 32.    ^^^ 


198  VEKBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 


\p  »»  %%7     *- 


loL^P  •  Qol^  p1  /  commend  you  to  God ;  I  Peter  iv.  19  ; 
h)  those  of  pleasing  and  displeasing  ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  29. 
01^  ;£!»>  ^r^  that  which  pleases  him ;  Kom.  xv.  2,  8  ; 
Heb.  xiii.  16 ;  or  c )  those  that  denote  likeness^  similarity; 
e.g.  Luke  xiii.  18.  loiJ^j  lZonNV>  USoj  ]l2^  to  what  is 
the  Kingdom  of  God  like  ?  verses  9,  20  ;  Heb.  ii.  17  ;  Barli. 
137,  12.     aC^  AjI  loi  thou  art  like  him. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  impersonal  phrases,  such  as  ^  |J0  it  it 
fitting  for^  and  ^  Aa|  equivalent  to  to  have  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  9  ; 
Luke  xvi.  28,29  ;  John  x.  16.  (with  the  accusative  of  the  object  in 
relation  to  ^^s^v,  II  John  9.  OlS  AjiVl«^©  t^P©  iJoi 
ouTof  xal  <röv  itoLri^cx,  xat  «rov  ulov  £;)(;£ i),  and  ^  Ljk\  equivalent  to 
not  to  have  ;  Matt.  xiii.  21 ;  Johnxiv.30.  In  the  same  signification 
occurs  also  ^  looi  ;  e.g.  Barh.  66,  4.  1^1^  Ol!^  0001  VaSZ 
he  had  three  sons. 

3.  With  ^k)  are  connected ;  a  )  verbs  which  denote  to 
fear^  flee,  guarding  oneself  retraining,  ceasing,  releasing ; 
e.g.  Luke  xxiii.  40.  AjI  ^5lm>  loi!^  ^  ]J'*2)f  fearest  thou 
not  Godl  John  ix.22;  Barh.  94,9;  Kom.  ii.3.  *£)0;i2  Aj]? 
JOI-S^J  OUaj  ^Sd  that  thou  shalt  escape  the  judgment  of  God; 
I  Cor.  vi.  18  ;    x.  14  ;    Barh.  170,  4 ;  Matt.  x.  17.     oioijlj 

\m\  \\n  ^  beware  of  men  ;  xvi.  6,  12  ;  Luke  xii.  15;  xx. 
46  ;  John  xvii.  15.  ^ajlO  ^  ^ojf  «^Z?  that  thou  shouldst 
keep  them  from  evil ;  1  Peter  ii.  11.  öiL^j^yO  Jk5  dO'^l] 
Vrs^}  abstain  from  lusts  of  the  flesh  ;  Acts  xv.  29  ;  I  Pet. 
iv.l.     |0l4>^  ^io  01-^  *.*.N«  he  caasethfrom  sin;  Barh. 102,9; 

K  C  ^  '^  4s,  "A        7 

Assem.  I.  42,  8;  II  Thess.  iii.  3.     |r-^  ^So  ^oaoiQAJ  he 


VERBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS.  199 

tvill  keep  you  from  evil ;  b)  those  of  filling  up,  lacking,  and 
failing ;  Luke  xv.  16.  ]^0^  ^  OlfiDp  fisüiül  to  fill  his 
belli/  unth  husks ;  Barli.  69,1 ;  I  Tim.  vi.  10.  fZoiSOiOl  ^ 
Q2L4  they  came  short  of  the  faith  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  18  ;  c)  those  of 
asking,  beseeching;  John  iv.  31.  OUiD  0001  ^^  iVO  they 
besought  him  ;  verse  40;  I  Peter  ii,  11. 

Rem. —  ^SO  also  expresses  the  Latin  proe  ;  e.  g.  ^lo  A^iO  to  die 
before  ;  or  per^  with  ^\1  and  »oNm,  John  x.  1,  2. 

4.  With  ^J^  are  construed  verbs,  which,  in  Enghsh,  may 
be  followed  by  about,  concerning,  viz.  ;  a )  some  which  ex- 
press  an  affection  of  the  mind;  e.g.  Matt.xv.22.  ol^  Xlm9A| 
be  merciful  to  me  ;  xvii.  15  ;  Eom.  ix.  15  ;  xi.  82 ;  Matt. vi. 
28.     ^oAjf  ^g^t  '  jliD  j»Qa^  \iA  why  take  ye  thought  for 

raiment ;  Luke  xii.  26.     ^  Ut  J  to  be  anxious  ;  Matt.v.22. 
^  ^amoZf  to  rejoice  over  ;  Eev.  xviii.20,  ^  po  to  weep 
over;  Lukexxiii.27,28.  ^  yS^lX  to  take  counsel  concern- 
ing ;  Matt.  xxvi.  4;  b)  those  which  denote  power  or  authori- 
ty  over  something  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xix.  14.     poi   ^^iNs  «^^SüJ> 
that   this  person  should  rule  over  us  ;  Eom.  vi.  14  ;  vii,  1  ; 
Barh.  40,  6  ;  Matt,  xxiii.  85.     ,Qn^!Ll  ]l]l  shall  come  upon 
you  ;     Luke    xxi.    84  ;     John    xviii.   4  ;     Luke    i      i' . 
laOloSl  AllLaj  VaJImJ  fear  fell  upon  him  ;  c )  those  which 
denote   a   do{7ig  for  or  against,    or  an  occupation  with  some- 
thing; e.  g.  Acts  vii.  58.     ^OloSl  Ojoicoj  ^^SJ{  those  ivho 
testified  agaimt  him  ;  Matt.  xxvi.  62 ;  John  i.  8.   "^  ?aimjj 
II01OÜ  that  he  might  bear  witness  of  the  light ;  ^  iii.  26  ;    v.  81. 
^SS^'i  too,ccuse;    John  viii.  46  ;    ^  ^^   to  ?^n7e  of 
concerning,  John  i.  46  ;  v.  46  ;    Acts  xxi^,    ^  'M  and 


200  VERBS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

WsD  to  speak  of^  about ;  John  i.  22,  30;  xiii.  22;  vii.  13  ; 
d )  verbs  of  covering,  protecting,  or  burdening  ;  e.  g.  Matt, 
xvii.  5.  ,00U.^  Aj^I  fZ'^olJ  Jill  a  bright  cloud  covered 
<Äe77i  ;  Luke  i.  35.     «iniNs  _^  U-^^?  cn\i*>  the  power  of 

the  Most  High  shall  cover  thee  ;  ^\l  ^4^  and  ImD  have  the 
same  signification  ;  Jer.  xviii.  23  ;  II  Sam.  xiii.  25. 
^»jlSi  \o\i  '^y  so  that  we  shall  not  burden  thee.  And  finally ; 
c)  several  verbs  that  denote  a  charge,  command  or  petition  ; 
e.  g.  ^^  J^Si  to  charge  one ;  II  Chron.  xxxvi.  23  ; 
^i^  %QÄD  to  prescribe  for  one  ;  II  Kings  xxii.  13.  ^^  \i^ 
to  pray  for :  John  xvii.  9.  ^^  ^[»  to  ask  after  ;  Assem. 
I.   50,    6. 

Rem. — Here  also  belong  phrases  compounded  with  nouns  derived 
from  these  verbs ;  e.  g.  I  Peter  v.  7.  louL  ^i^  O^  tOoAa» 
cast  your  cares  upon  the  Lord  ;  Barh.  VV,  5.  O^iQl  ]«^Vvr>  V^ 
|ZoN »  fc^  they  took  care  for  the  King  ;  Isa.  i.  14.  «jlLi  0001 
fZ;n   i\  they  are  a  burden  to  me  ;  Job  vii.  20. 

5.  With  AxD ,  *ii  1*^  and  ALiä  between,  are  construed 
verbs  which  denote  dividing,  separating,  distinguishing ; 
e.g.  Gen.  i.4.  po«»A  I^OICU  AjlO— .^ja  he  separated  be- 
tween light  and  darkness  ;  Kuth  i.  17.  La^  ^^  >  and  \u* 
to  see,  to  perceive  a  difference  between  ;  II  Sam.  xix.  35  ; 
Mai.  lii.  18. 

6.  With  iAi  after,  are  joined  verbs  which  signify  to  go 
(equivalent  to  to  follow  )  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iv.  25.  OIjAo  rK\\ 
they  followed  him;  xii.  15;  Mark  x.  32;  Matt.  iv.  19. 
uSbi^  ol  follow  after  me  ;  xix.  2  ;  John  viii.  12  ;  i'Ao  ^^5^^ 
I  Tim.  vi.  1 1  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  22. 


PASSIVES  AND  THEIR  CONSTRUCTION.  201 

Rem. — More  in  accordance  with  the  Hebrew  idiom  we  find 
fAo  with  verbs  signifying  to  put  away,  destroy  :  e.  g.  I  Kings 
xiv.  10  ;  xxi.  21. 


General    Remarks. 

To  seern^  to  appear^  are  expressed,  as  in  Hebrew,  by 
til  iSn  in  the  relation  of  genitive  or  with  the  suffix  be 
longing  to  the  person  ;  e.  g.  Gren.  xix.  1 4.  *  %  1  i\n  looi 
«uOIOjAm  he  seemed  to  his  sons-in-law;  II  Sam.  x,  3. 
y.i.K'^  (he)  seems  to  thee.  When  rendered  more  definite 
by  the  adjectives  good  or  had^  they  are  expressed  either  by 
^  *^M  and  ;>'^»  ,  or  »»liZ]  without  til  i\n ;  e.  g.  Acts 
vi.  5  ;  Kom.  xv.  2.  .S  ;  Gen.  xxi.  11 ;  Matt.  xxi.  15  ;  or  in 
connection  with  «./iiSn  ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  240,F.  "jooi  \.x2i» 
\a*^  '  '^  -^*^  i-kS  luould  this  seem  good  to  God  f  In  the  trans- 
lation of  the  New  Testament,    SoxsX  is  usually  expressed  by 

^VvmASO;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvii.  25;  xviii.  12;  xxi.  28;  xxii.17: 
Luke  X.  36. 

To  suffer^  permit^  are  expressed  either  by  ,  Of?)  to  com- 
mand^ or  j^  to  cause  (without  the  copula^  following)  ;  e  g. 
Barh.  72,  12  ;  or  they  are  expressed  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  thing  to  be  done  is  implied  in  the  imperative  itself ; 
Barh.  27,  2;  114,  14. 


III.    Passives  and  their  Construction. 

1.  The  active  cause  in  passives  is  usually  expressed  by 
^;  e.g.  Matt.  vi.  16.  ]aliVo^  ^op^Aj?  that  they  may  he 
seen  hy  men  ;  Luke  viii.  29.     OlS  locn  \^  he  was  caught  by 


202  VERBS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

Mm;  Assem.  1.  89,14,  and  16.  flo  oiS  ^iSoA»!  there  was  a 
voice  heard  by  him  ;  Barh.  152,  11. 

Rem. — Yet  we   also  frequently  find  ^SsD,  Matt.  iii.  14.     «^1^| 
Vr>v7^  that  I  should  be  baptized  of  thee  ;  v.  13  ;  xx.  23. 

2.  Passives  whose  actives  govern  a  double  accusa- 
tive, sometimes  retain  one  of  them ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  41. 
^^ao>   1^0)   AJVvn/^  she  was  filled  loith    the  Holy  Ghost ; 

ii.  40  ;  Barh.  32,  14.  Uq^  .ain\>  I'r^yt  ^  ^'^^  ^^^  ^^ 
cZac^  m  ^?/ssws  ;  90,  14  ;  108,  6  ;  223,  15;  Assem.  I.  86, 
A.  27,  28. 

3.  When  passives,  especially  in  verbs  relating  to  the 
mind,  have  an  active  signification,  they  are  joined  with  the 
accusative ;  e.g.  I  Thess.  i.  2.  tZoj^^  ^oaJik  ^pjAlD  tu« 
remember  you  in  our  prayers  ;  «na»iZ]  to  ^Am/^,  Eom.  ii.  3  ; 
XV.  5  ;  ^joA»1  to  recognize^  Acts  xix.  15 ;  ^liA»]  to  obey^ 
Eph.  vi.  1 ;  Col.  iii.  22  ;  ^J^^  to  wish,  I  Tim.  vi.  10. 

Rem. — Here  also   belong  such   passives   as   99Q..Z|  to  chew  the 

cud,  Lev.  xi.  3,5  ;  and  hence  also  may  be  explained  why  participles 
passive  of  the  Fe.  (§  64.  5)  take  the  accusative  of  the  object. 

4.  Passives  have  also  frequently  a  reflective  signification 
(§21,  2;  §22.  2  ;  §24.2;  §58.  A.  a)  ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  6. 
.OlyiZj  ta^t^  ^Qju  Jesus  bowed  hiinself  down  ;  verse  8  ; 
Mark  i.  7  ;  I  Tim.  v.  14.  ^y^o?P  ^^J^?  ^«»-!Laf  those  who 
are  young  shall  marry  ;  iv.  13;  ^ojlajZ]  to  wax  strong^  Acts 
xix.  16  ;  xxiii.  11 ;  »»«^Zl  to  hide,  John  viii.  59  ;  *aAsZj 
to  turn  around^  Matt.  ix.  22.,  etc. 

Rem. — Many  neuters  take  a  passive  signification  ;    e.  g.  t-^   to 


MODE  OF  EXPKESSING  GEEEK  COMPOSITES.         203 

err^    Luke  xxi.  8.     fCIl^Z  ]iQ^  ^^  «rXaviiäijTS  ;    ^Cl«*   to  burn^ 

9QlLD  ^^i,ni  xa/  <rup/  xa/srai  ;     ^^SÜ  to  fall,  iii.lO. 

jjQlO  \\2iJ  sig  »jthp  ßaXksTai  ;  *n2Ü  to  go  out,  viii.  12.     ^Q£1SÜ 

ixÖXrjä'rjtJ'ovTai  etc. 

Upon  tlie  use  of  verbs  for  adverbs,  see  §  82.  1. 


Appendix   to   §  67. 

Mode  of  expressing  Greek  Composites. 

To  the  subject  of  the  construction  of  verbs  with  cases  and  prepo- 
sitions, belongs  also  the  manner  of  rendering  Greek  Composites, 
which  in  the  Synac  translation  of  the  New  Testament,  are  express- 
ed  as   follows  : 

1.  By  simple  verbs,  in  the  signification  of  which  ;  a)  the  idea 
of  the  Greek  preposition  is  included  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xx.  18. 
— Lm  >^^*^  ava/3aivo;jLSv  ;  viii.  1.  AmJ  ^  xaraßävTi  ;  iii.  2. 
QQoZ  ixsravosTrs  ;  xvi.  5.  QL^  iirsXa^ovro  ;  or  by  verbs  which  ; 
b  )  without  respect  to  the  Greek  preposition,  answer  to  the  simple 
Greek  verb  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xi.  5.  ^W  oL^aßXintoxxii  ;  Acts  xxiii.  33. 
Q20U  ava^dvra^  ;  Rom.  14.  9.  (o-m  avs^iiö'sv;  Luke  xv.  24,  32  ; 
x.31,32.  ;£il  ävTi-rrap^Xäsv  ;  Acts  xxvi.  5.  ^jul^  «n'po^'jvwfl'xovrsj ; 
Rom.  XV.  4.       ilDAoZI    <:r'pos^pa97i. 

2.  By  verbs  ;  a  )  with  a  preposition  answering  to  the  Greek ; 
6.g.  ^JjaOQ^  =  avT<  ;  Luke  xiii.l7.  OlSoOoS  OOOI  ^  i  V>  >  n> 
91  avTjxsi'jxsvoi  auTW  ;  Acts  vi.lO  ;  Rom.xiii.2.  ^^=  sVi'  andxara; 
Luke  X.  34.  ^OIGLil  diii  ^^H^Zl  xa<  i<rsfX£X^ä>]  aurou  ;  Matt. 
xxvi.62.  -  - '  ^^     .^mmVn  xaTafiaprupoutf/v  tfou  ;  ^aL  =  ö'uv  ;  Rom, 


204  PECÜLIAKITIES  OF  VERBS. 

*  7    «  IS  I  9 

vi.8.  GlLOl  (mJ  Cu^Tjfl'ofjisv  aurw,  Heb.  iv.  15  ;  II  Tim.  i.  8.  y)rO 
-=  'n'po  ;  Acts  vii.  40.  ^■>V)yO  ^QJ^^p)  oJ'  <;rpo'7rop£ufl'ov<rai  »jjxwv  ; 
Matt.  ii.  9  ;  or  b)  by  an  adverb  of  similar  signification  ;  e.  g. 
tJLäJJ  ^SO  =  ctva,  IPeter  i.3;  «JLi>9  ^SD  tAof  ava^svvyjö'aff  ^/xa^, 
Heb.  vi.  6.  ^Oi^  ^  =  <7rpo ,  II  Cor.  xiii.  2  ;  ZjSoV^CLirO  ^ 
fposi^rixa. ,  Rom.  i.  2  ;    Col.  i.  5. 

3.  By  another  verb  representing  the  preposition,  which  usually 
stands  first,  without  any  connective  particle,  in  the  same  tense, 
number,  and  gender  with  the  finite  verb  ;  e.  g.  ^^  (  to  come  be- 
fore )  =  "TTpo ,  Mark  xiii.  23.  L'^\  t^^O  irposiprjxa,  Acts  vii.  52; 
Rom.  iii.  9  ;  xi.  35.    This  verb  sometimes  follows  ;  e.  g.  John  xx.  4. 

4.  If  the  composite  is  formed  from  a  noun  or  adjective  and  a 
verb,  it  is  usually  resolved  into  its  components  ;  e.  g.  Mark  iv.  20. 
p  (£)    ^jlIDGIa   xap<7ro(popoua'iv ;  iii.  4.     J^^L^J   Of   «^^9   ^^^-^^^^ 

ayaäo'Tr'ojVa«  ->;  xaxo-TToj^rfai  ;    Matt.   xix.  18.     Z09GIQO    ^GlfioZ   |J 

I^QA    ou  4'SU(Jo|aap<n;p^(j'ffi^. 

Rem. — It  seems  to  be  merely  pleonastic,  where  in  John  iv.  4. 
öi^pp^stfäai  is  translated  by  ;nM  |Zpn 


§  68.     2^e  Substantive    Verb^    and  some  other  Peculiarities 
chiefly  relating  to  the  Construction  of  the  Verb, 

A.     Use  op  looi,  A*]  and  Aa^L  (§  38). 

Instead  of  looi   tobe  (with  which,  according  to   §  65.  B. 
and  D,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  formed),  the  Syriac 


INDIRECT     DISCOURSE.  205 

also  uses  tu]  ,  and  in  negative  phrases  Aa^  with  suffixes, 
and  with  them  also  in  connection  with  the  former  (Iqoi), 
forms  the  imperfect ;  e.g.  John  ix.24.  looi  ^oioA^I  he  was; 
verse  14.     Zooi  OuA^^  they  were,  etc. 

Rem.  —  (OOl   sometimes  stands  pleonastically  with  the  preterit, 
without  giving  it  the  signification  of  the  pluperfect ;  e.g.  Mark  i.45. 

IP  17 

001     ^'^    he     began ;     Luke   i.   8  ;     John     iii.     25.      It    is 

sometimes  omitted  as  present  or  imperfect,  according  to  §  54. 
2  ;  or  when  it  would  be  a  mere  copula  between  the  sub- 
ject and  object ;  e.  g.  Matt,  xxvii.  29  (§  65.  III.  Rem.) ; 
Luke  i.27.  It  seems  to  mark  emphasis  after  |J  (in  the  Philoxenian 
version  Q^  nowise)^  e.g.  John  vi.  32.  ^O^S  «^OU  (solO  ]ooi  )] 
looses  has  not  given  you;  verses  38,  58  ;  xiii.  11,  18  ;  Heb.  ii.5,16  ;: 
or  in  interrogations  with  |J  =  nonne  ) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  55.. 
(JOI  loOl  P  is  this  not  ?  xx.  13 ;  Mark  vi.  3  ;  Luke  xi.  40;  xvii, 
17.  Concerning  looi ,  Ljk\  and  Aa-U  with  ^  =  to  have — not  to 
have,  compare  §  67.  II.   2.  Rem. 


»  B.     Indirect  Discourse. 

The  indirect  discourse  is  usually  expressed  directly, 
commencing  with    >    (  =  'iD  —  o^'  )>    e.   g.  John  iv.    1 7. 

]]k^  .  »V  Aa^j  •^^'r^l  Jaä*  thou  hast  rightly  said,  I  have 
no  husband;  verse  53;  ii.  17;  vi.  31  ;  Barh.  51,11. 
AlSoij  jk>1'  p  as  he  said;  I  {he)  have  heard;  135,10  ;  69,7.. 
\l\  looi  1]  ]<^i"  A  ]^Vvr>%  "Jsa*  -Jij  001  he  swore,  he  would 
(I will)  be  no  King  of  the  heathen;  223,  11,  12. 

Rem.— Sometimes  >  is  wanting  at  the  beginning  of  the  direct 
discourse  (especially  before  61  ) ;  e.g.  Barh.  131,  11,  12  ;  374,  13  ;: 
443,  8  ;    more  frequently  '^V  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  106,3  ;  183,9  ;  219,5  ;, 


206  ELLIPSIS,    ZEUGMA,  ETC. 

243,  10  ;  486,  5  ;  543,  19  ;  596,  11.  Compare  Assem.  I.  479,  A. 
24,  with  480,  1.  The  indirect  discourse  also  occurs;  e.  g.  Barh. 
79,  19.  I^lr^  ^OOlüi  laaco  flj  Oli^  O'^V^Aey  said  to  him,  the 
tribute  is  not  sufficient  for  thee  ;  94,  1 — 3  ;  97,  1.  Sometimes  the 
direct  discourse  passes  over  into  the  indirect ;  e.  g.  276,  8 — 10  and 
vice  versa  ;  166,  19,  20  ;  513,  5,  6. 


C.    Ellipsis — Zeugma — Paronomasia,  and  Puns. 

1.  When  a  verb  has  previously  been  used  in  the  protasis, 
it  is  usually  omitted  in  the  apodosis,  where  it  would  proper- 
ly be  repeated  ;  e.  g.  Matt.i.22.  lEoAjj  Zooij  (tC^  ^j  IjOl 
hut  what  has  happened  {has  happened)  that  it  might  be  fulfil- 
led; xxi.  4;  John  xx.  31  ;  Rom.  v.  20 ;  I  Cor.  ix.  25. 
*nnmi>  ^j^01>9  ^a^CJI  those  who  run  (run)  that  they  may 
obtain  ;  II  Cor.  v.  13  ;  Heb.  vii.  19  ;  viii.  3  ;  I  Peter  iv.  11; 
I  John  iii.  6.  Sometimes  the  verb  is  to  be  supplied  from 
the  context ;  Matt.  27,25.     ^^iNs  OlLoj  his  blood  {come)  upon 

us;  Acts  XX1V.6.  ^fiDoSüiO»  ^|   as  %t  {is  written )   in  our 
law. 

Rem. — The  ellipsis  must  be  considered  as  a  pecuharity  of  the  Sy- 
riac  language,  where  the  Philoxenian  translation,  omitting  the  >  in 
the  apodosis,  adheres  strictly  to  the  Greek  words ;  e.  g.  Matt  i.  22. 
ZoOl  oC^  ^>  IjOl  rouro  8s  oXov  yiyovsv  ;  John  xx.  31.  Con- 
'ierning  the  omission  of  ;Ld|  see  B.  Rem.  above ;  and  concerning 
the  elliptical  use  of  fOOl  see  A.  Rem. 

2.  Sometimes  a  verb,  by  its  signification,  can  belong  to 
only  one  of  two  connected  nouns  {Zeugma),  so  that  to  the 
other  noun   another    verb  must    be  mentally    supplied; 


USE   OF  THE  KOUN   IN   GENERAL.  207 

e.  g.  Job  IV.  10.     -'rLiZf  U*o  _  llilj  IASdou  the  roaring 
of  the  lion  {is  stilled)  and  the  teeth  are  broken  ;  x.  12. 

8.  Paronomasia  and  puns  occur  but  rarely  in  Syriac. 
The  former  is  a  mere  imitation  of  the  Hebrew  original  in 
Ps.  xl.  3.  ^Oy*Jo  lU^  ^01^?  (  rilijT^]  tr^T\  ^55^T  ) 
that  many  see  it  and  r^'oice.  Puns  occur  mostly  in  names 
where  the  language  does  not  require  any  such  alteration  to 
be  assumed ;  e.g.  Gen.  xlix.  8.  ,0>qj  ^  Ijooil  Judah  {thy 
brethren)  shall  praise  thee,  verses  16,  19. 


CHAPTER     THIRD. 


The   Noun. 

§  69.     Use  of  the  Noun  in  General, 

1.  Abstract  nouns  not  unfrequently  in  Syriac  take  the 
place  of  adjectives  and  then  they  stand  in  the  relation  of 
genitive  to  the  noun,  with  ?  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  11. 
l«)aO)  'UjO;^  with  the  Holy  Ghost;  John  xv.l.  1>^#>  l^yt 
the  true  vine  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  44.  Especially  does  this  union,  as 
in  Hebrew,  occur  with  adjectives  which  denote  the  material 
or  substance  of  which  a  thing  is  composed  ;  e.  g.  John  ii.  6. 
]ki\^}  UVil  stone   water-pots  ;    Heb.  ix.  4.     ioai>>  ]^ino 


208        USE  OF  THE  NOUN  IN  GENERAL. 

a  golden  box  ;  II  Cor.  x.  4  ;  II  Tim.  ii.  20  ;  Barh.  11,  7,  8 ; 
20,  10  ;  88,  2  ;  172,  8  ;  228,  7.  l>0iajj  fjoSoL  a  fiery 
pillar. 

Rem. — Adjectives  of  material,  however,  do  occur ;  e.g.  Barh.  59,4. 
I^AjlmJ  ];.A^fiD|  a  brazen  celestial  sphere  ;  and  in  the  same  con- 
struction adjectives  of  quality  with  J  prefixed,  used  for  substantives ; 
e.g.  Michael.  Chr.  85.  f'^^?  lA^Ä  week  of  the  white  (clothes). 
Abstract  nouns  with  >  in  connection  with  a  pronoun,  supply  the 
place  of  the  predicate  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  vii.  14.  pf  ;ffio>  ^j  pf 
but  I  am  carnal  ;  or  with  a  preposition  prefixed  they  supply  the 
place  of  an  adjective  to  which  a  noun  is  to  be  supplied  ;  e.  g.  Heb. 
ii.  17.  fCTlIl^r^  in  divine  (  things)  ;  Luke  viii.  49.  ^iD  %mS\ 
AjlOj  one  of  the  household ;  even  with  sufiixes,  «jiGIO^Is) 
^aijxovj^ofxsvoj.  Some  abstract  nouns,  in  the  relation  of  genitive  with 
J  following,  precede  as  nomen  regens  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  170,  20. 
^Aij  Uvi^iöO  '^^(^'»'y  writings  ;  172,  4  ;  178,  5  ;  195,16.  \^\M^ 
|imia>  in  the  remaining  fortresses  ;  198,13.  Here  also  belongs  ^oÄ 
according  to  §  55.  B.  2.  Rem. 

2.  Especially  are  adjectives  or  concrete  substantives  de- 
noting possession^  custom^  similarity^  etc.,  expressed  bj  way 
of  circumlocution,  by  means  of  the  nouns  '^  eon  ;  2jQ 
daughter ;  \il^  and  f;iO  hrd^  master  ;  »Ä>  and  *muj  prince^ 
ruler ;  and  Aaä  house.  In  respect  to  the  use  of  these  nouns 
it  is  to  be  observed  ; 

7 

a)  \Ci  designates  ;  a)  Gentile  names^  inhabitants^  etc.  e.  g. 
Tit.  i.  12.    14-0  Min  Cretans;  Barh.  167,1 ;  Acts  xxi.  12; 

_P    «^7  ..7  m^  X  7»» 

|jZ]  ^aXO^  oi  hröiim  ;  Barh.  80,  17.  lAjLfc^  «>1Q  citizens] 
91,  2  ;  ß)  the  idea  of  race^  species^  kindred ;  e.g.  Kom.  xi.l4. 
l^fiQO  ;ä  a  kinsman  ;  Deut.  xxiii.2  ;  I  Cor.  vii.22.    |>ps»  ;Q 


USE  OF  THE  NOUN  IN  GENERAL         209 

a  freeman  ;  John  xviii.  85.  |SQ1  ^xia  heathen  ;  Michael. 
Chr.  5.  .min>>01  jo  a  heretic  ;  Assem.  11.248.  ^^V^*^  \^ 
a  courtier ;  Kev.  ii.  14,  20.  (Here  also  belongs  1«JJQ) ; 
7)  participation^  likeness^  {=  tfOv  ÖfAo^) ;  e.  g.  Eph.  iii.  6. 
fZoZ'^  >i,lO  (fuyxX^ipovofxo» ;  I  Thess.  ii.  14 ;  Acts  xviii.  3  ; 
xix.  24.  '|ZqiV)o1  'r^  ojaoTs^vo?  ;  Dan.  i.  10.  ]l»  jo  con- 
temporaries ;  Phil.  iv.  3 ;  Gral.  i.  14  ;  ^)  locality,  situation, 
and  other  circumstances ;  e.g.  Isa.  xxyi.  1.  lid»  ;i  a  moa^; 
Psalms  cxxxii.  2.  IjO»  ;q  a  nec^  chain.  And  finally;  s ) 
the  adverbial  phrase  01  Al«  ;^  forthwith,  immediately  ;  Matt. 
xiii.  5,  20 ;  John  v.  9  ;  xiii.  30  ;  Acts  x.  33  ;  xxi.  32. 

h)  Z;i  plur.  Aia  forms  ;  a)  rarely  abstracts;  e.g.  ]a>]  A^ 
circumcision;  more  frequently  concretes  in  the  feminine; 
e.  g.  I  Mace.  xi.  7.  IJ^m  i;0  one  horn  free  ;  or  it  denotes; 
/3)  the  product  of  anything ;  e.  g.  lAl^^  ^r^  grapes*, 
lASOa  2;^  (/wm  071  sea-iueed  ;  and  tropically  Jj£5  2;^  voice  ; 
Kom.  X.  16,  18 ;  Gal.  iv.  20 ;  and  in  the  plural,  Acts  xii. 
22  ;  y)  implements,  clothing,  lAl£^  L\^  naphin  ;  ]>  ^  2jjD 
nn^ ;  (^  descendants,  nations,  etc. ;  e.  g.  Luke  xiii.  1 6. 
iOOl'pQl  L\^  the  Hebrews ;  Matt.  xxi.  5.  ^CUOl^  2*^  Jeru- 
salem, or  its  inhabitants. 

c)  ^Mq  denotes  ;  «)  mostly  concretes  ;  e.  g.  Rom.  xi.  34. 
]^V0>  ^^AO  counselor  ;  Matt.  v.  25  ;  xiii.  28,  39 ;  II  Chron. 
xiv.  5.  lLDaM2  ^Üq  neighbor  ;  ^)  sometimes  nations ;  e.  g. 
floSoSo  ^i^  an  Ethiopian.     In  like  manner ; 

c?)  V^VO  Luke  vii.   41.      lioJ  IjiD   (ZeZ^tor  ;    Ephr.   IL 
360,  C  ; 
e)  *o  J  forms ;  a)  principally  concretes  of  masculine  offices 


210  GENDER  OF  NO  [JMS. 

e.  g.  II  Sam.  xviii.  1.  \zl^  %£ij  a  chiliarch  ;  Luke  xvi.  1. 
fAjJD  %Q>  o/xovojao?  ;  Heb.  iv.  14.  |  ,10QD  »jDj  a^'xis^s\>g  ; 
I  Pet.  V.  4 ;  Luke  xix.  2  ;  /3)  abstracts ;  e.  g.  Luke  xvi.  2. 
fZoAjk^;)   As)   o/xovo/xiot.     In  like  maimer  ; 

/)  ^mjA  ;  a)  concretes  of  masculine  offices;  e.g.  Luke  viii. 
41.  |A»aio  ola)  dtpxitfuva/w/oj  ;  John  ii.  8,  9 ;  Acts  ii.  29 ; 
I  Thess.  iv.  16 ;  ß)  more  rarely  abstracts  ;  e.  g.  Matt,  xxiii. 
6.  |q2qLd  «JLa>  -rpwToxaäs^pj'a.  Sometimes  it  denotes  ;  y) 
the  extremity  of  a  thing  ;  e.  g.  laSoo^flo"!  ^m^h  orifice  of  the 
stomach  ;    M-»^  ^«lij  aperture  of  the  mouth»     Finally  ; 

^)  AjlO  denotes;  a)  the ^Zace  ot  receptacle^  in  which  a 
thing  is  found  or  kept;  e.  g.  Acts.  xii.  17.  X^^\  A*^ 
prison;  Matt  xi v.  2.  lAllO  Ajä  grave;  Acts  xvii.  19. 
\LkJ  LäS^  judgment  hall ;  Luke  xix.  29.  lA*i  Aaä  oZ^^;e  ^ar- 
(ien  ;  Heb.  ix.  4.  fV)fno  AaQ  censer  (literally,  house  of  in- 
cense); II  Tim.  iv.  13  ;  ß)  countries^  cities^  etc.  ;  e.g.  Assem. 
I.  169,B.7,  UioooiJ  Aa.Q  the  Roman  dominions;  Michael. 
Chr.  10.     UfloiÄ   Läh    Persia. 

Rem. — Here,  however,  do  not  belong  ^9013  A^^  Mesopotamiay 
and  |la.l  AjlS  forehead,  where  Aa.2  signifies  between.  More 
rarely  we  find  similar  compositions  with  *Si\  father,  and  ^1  wo^A- 
er.  Of  the  latter  only  occur  yMjS^  jiol  /Äe  croi^fw  of  the  head,  and 
(a1D9  PD|  hydravMcs.  The  Syriac  also,  though  more  rarely  than 
the  Hebrew,  uses  the  names  of  countries  and  cities   for  nations  and 

X     I        ^7 

inhabitants  ;  e.  g.   Barh.  150,  12.      %\r\t\Si\   Africans  ;    248,  6. 
Aa;..1Z  Tagritians. 

§  70.   Gender  of  Nouns. 
1.  Nouns  which  in  the  plural  take  the   termination  of 


GENDER  OF  NOUNS.  211 

another  gender  (§  44.  Kern.  2  and  3),  retain  the  gender  of 
the  singular,  and  in  this  case  respect  is  rarely  had  to  the 
termination.  Here  belong ;  a  )  masculines  with  a  femi- 
nine termination  in  the  plural  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  43. 
•OOIO  AaJ^  m-^?  fZojZf  place  m  which  there  is  no  water; 
I  Cor.  X.  9.  (locLm  ^QJ|  OpSOf  the  serpents  destroyed  them; 
]2qS1L  ( from  BU)  Luke  ii.  13  ;  fASooi  ( from  fcodi  ) 
Matt,  xxviii.  20;  '{lo^  (from  ]££)  Luke  xxi.  34; 
VZoi'au  (from  1>0U)  Matt.  vii.  25,  26.,  etc. ;  h)  feminines 
with  a  masculine  termination  ;  e.  g.  John  xi.  35.  ^2f 
^QA^>  «.aOIQILO)  *a001  fears  came  «nto  ^/le  eyes  of  Jesus  ; 
i^  (from  \h^)  Matt.  xiii.  30;  Pio  (from  l^li)  xxiv.35; 
liSo  (from  IAiSd)  x.  30  ;  ^jJ^  (from  Xtlm)  Acts  xxiv.  17  ; 
i^iS*  (from  (Ai^)  xix.  84.,  etc. 

2.  When  the  abstract  stands  for  the  concreto,  or  when 
the  noun  takes  another  than  its  proper  signification,  the 
gender  in  both  cases,  is  regulated  by  the  sense.  Concern- 
ing the  former  of  these  cases,  compare  §  80.  B  ;  to  the  lat- 
ter belongs  IZiSV)  Xoyos^  Christ;  e.  g.  John  i.  1 — 4. 
IALLo  looi  •uOIoAjiI  it  was  the  word;  verse  14  ;  or  ]xm  Icu^ 
(literally,  beast  of  tooth)  ==  avri-x^pKfTos^  Rev.  xiii.  1  ;  xvi.  2,13; 
xvii.  7,  8.  Q^>  a  myriad  {of  onen)  ;  Acts  xxi.  20  ;  Barh. 
65,  9,  10  ;  334,  6  ;  395,  19.  UsJJ,  in  the  plural,  =  inhabi- 
tants; Barh.  159,  10;  236,  8  ;  548,  20.,  etc. 

4 

3.  In  Syriac  the  neuter  of  nouns,  as  of  verbs,  is  desig- 
nated by  the  feminine  ( §  66.  2 ) ;  e.  g.  Rom.  vii.  18. 
fA£l4  aya^ov,  lAju^  xaxov ;    in  the  plural,  Assem.  I.  218. 


212  NUMBER. 


B.  11.   IIZj-mO  lAcLiAllL  r>  Aoft]   tfiey  despwed  the  old  and 
the  new. 


§  71.  Number. 

1.  Some  nouns,  particularly  those  which  denote  cohesive 
materials  (liquids,  metals  and  the  like),  form  a  plural  only 
when  they  may  be  conceived  of  as  consisting  of  several 
parts ;  e. g.  (Z;.LflO  barley^  iplur.  |,1I3D  barley-corns;  in  like 
manner  \^  from  fA^^  ivheat ;  Matt.  iii.  12  ;  John  vi.  13  ; 
I  Cor.  XV.  37 ;  and  |m  i   o  timber  ;  I  Cor.  iii.  12. 

2.  Some  nouns  singular  have  a  plural  signification  {col- 
lectives §  44.  Kem.  7),  and  then  they  take  Bibui  §  6.  2.  As 
such  they  are  joined  either  with  the  plural ;  e.  g.  John  iv. 
30.  (ajI  qqsjo  there  came  out  people  ;  or  with  the  singu- 
lar ;  e.  g.  John  x.  3.  01^  jlSO»  111  ^^e  5Äeep  hear  his 
voice ;  verses  4 — 8. 

Rem. — 1.  As  collective  plural  forms,  the  following  sometimes 
occur,  l(v^O  locust  ;  Michael.  Chr.  63,11  ;  79,  6.  l^liD  (proper- 
ly ^ari)  remainder^  members  ;  102,  5,  8. 

Rem. — 2.  As  pluralis  excellentice,  the  Syriac  has,  merely  by  im- 
itation  of  the  Hebrew  ^aJj|  or  t-iJOj|  =  "i^li^  ,  Michael.  Chr.  30. 
]j1  |SQa  •jUO)!:^   /  swore  by  the  Lord. 


§  72.  Apposition  and  Duplication  of  Nouns. 

1.  A  noun  in  apposition,  usually  includes  a  more  accu- 
rate definition  or  explanation  of  the  previous  noun,  as  for 


APPOSITION  AND  DUPLICATION.  213 

example  in  the  names  of  cities  ,  lA^'^D,  lAa>^  fAu^, 
Assem.  I.  349,  3.  lAo>  lAu^  ]>^0>fcif  Aniwch,  a  great 
city.  The  noiin  in  apposition  takes  the  number  and  case  of 
its  subject ;  e.  g.  Matt  x.  3.  ]mnV)  ^ASo  Matthew  the  Pub- 
lican ;  Barh.  32,  7.  ]iSnn>  \h^  ^^uijj  IpAa  the  image 
of  Baal   {of  a)  god  of  the  Babylonians  ;    11,  8  ;    12,    2. 

1*1^^^  «^?]  I n\V>  ^io  /row  Melchisedech  {from  the)  Ca- 
naanite. 

Rem.  —  Sometimes  the  noun  m  apposition  stands  before  the 
principal  noun;  e.  g.  Barh.  39,  11.  «oLiO*,^  V^^Ajf  .nmi 
he  took  for  wife  Roxane  ;  so  too  with  nouns  of  weighty  measure^ 

7  •  .XI*.  ^'il'    J 

and  time,  m  the  genitive  ;  e.  g.  Rev.  vi.  6.  «fiOOniinO  |i^^^ 
I  r^SO>    Mree   measures   (of)    barley. 

2.  The  duplication  of  the  noun  denotes  ;  a)  a  great  num- 
ber or  quantity  ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  III.  154.  -jJQJ  ISOtA  CHQ  Aa| 
^^QJ  there  are  many  fish  in  the  sea  ;  b)  the  distributive 
sense  expressed  in  English  by  each,  by  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xx.  9, 10. 
p-»j  p-i>  a  penny  each ;  Barh.  85,  6.  ^^laO  ^^mO 
%  heaps ;  424,  10 ;  165,  19.  Especially  in  respect  to 
numbers  ;  e.  g.  Mark  vi.  7.  ^jZ  ^>Z  ^it^o  eac^  ;  verse  40. 
]]Sd  ]]Sd  a  hundred  each  ;  II  Cor.  xi.  24  ;  c)  it  forms  a 
circumlocution  for  a??,  every  (§  58.  B.  2) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv. 
7.  ]00>  loO^O  xam  to-ttou^  ;  Tit.  i.  5.  ILjSD  ]jLijiü*D 
xttTtt  -roXiv  ;  «f )  a  diversity,  variety  ;  e.  g.  Mark  ii.  17. 
■,^.#^  ,^>A  various  diseases ;  John  v.  4  ;  Acts  x.  46. 
ivT  AV^  with  different  tongues ;  xxi.  34  ;  ^xxy.  19  ; 
Assem.  1.  13,  A.  6.  v.  E.  io^D  y>>D  ^?  l]Sß]S^ 
discourses  having  various  contents  ;  191,  A.  7.  v.  E  ;    280. 


214  THE  EMPHATIC  STATE. 

B.  13.  V.  E  ;     e )  a  strengthening  of  the  sense   (§  77.  B.  b) ; 
e.g.  John  vi.  7.  ^^wxlio  ^^So  very  Utile  ;  II  Thess.  iiL6. 


§  73.  The  Emphatic  »State. 

1.  The  Emphatic  State  expresses  the  noun  with  the 
article  with  less  definiteness,  from  the  fact,  that  in  many 
nouns  this  form  also  denotes  the  absolute  state  (§  45.  1), 
which  is  no  longer  in  use ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  9.  Sometimes 
also  it  supplies  the  place  of  the  indefinite  article  ;  e.  g.  John 
iv.  7.  ^;iQo  ^iD  IZAjI  LL]  there  came  a  woman  of  jSa» 
maria  ;  ix.  1 ;  Acts  vii.  37  ;  xi.  24 ;  even  with  r**  masc. 
]y**  fem.  appended ;  e.  g.  Luke  xix.  12.  ^»^  Ir^vt 
a  man.  ^ 

Rem. — From  this  should  perhaps  be  distinguished  the  cases  in 

7 

which   pM  is  used  numerically  ;    e.  g.   Eph.  iv.  6. 

2.  Hence  to  avoid  any  ambiguity  ooi  is  also  sometimes 
joined  with  the  emphatic  state  in  order  to  designate  it  as 
such.  It  stands  either  before  the  noun ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  33. 
iM'rJ^  OOI  mSD  the  dumb  spahe  ;  John  xviii.  16  ;  or  fol- 
lows it ;  e.  g.  John  v.  9.  001  V^..  No^mZJ  the  man 
became  whole. 

Rem. — In  the  first  case  the  absolute  state  usually  occurs, 
when  >  follows  001  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xxii.  27.  %aSüaSD9  001 
the  servant. 

3.  Hence  also  the  emphatic  state  with  ?  following  is 
used  in   the  relation  of  genitive  ;     e.   g.   Eev.   xviii.  2. 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE.  215 

YlVjli  \jLoy  V5yi>>  VZio^jo  laljj  ]1'^  a  habitation  of 
devils  and  a   hold  of  all  unclean  spirits. 


§  74.  UTie  Construct  State  and  the  Genitive. 

1,  In  the  Sjriac  also  the  Construct  state  serves  to  denote 
the  relation  of  genitive,  more  frequently,  however,  in  the 
plural  of  the  masculine  and  the  singular  of  the  feminine, 
where  it  can  at  once  be  recognized  by  its  special  form  ;  e.g. 
Matt.  xi.  12.  ^IjaOi  JioOi  ^  since  the  days  of  John  ; 
xiu.  48.  |Sq_ji  »^,äco  the  shores  of  the  sea  ;  Acts  xxiv.  16  ; 
Assem.  I.  2,  B.  1.  Vr**o  ^AlLZ  Al»  ^cti  that  is  the  thirty- 
first  year  ;  37,  3,  4.  jjdo'hlI^  Al^SßQ  in  the  midst  of  the 
clerus  ;  40,  4.  .OOlioilaiai  ^0*^*^0  their  deficient  faith^ 
literally,  the  deficiency  of  their  faith. 

Rem.  —  Yet  the  masculine  singular  of  the  noun  occurs  also 
before  the  genitive  in  the  construct  state  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  41. 
fi*^l  V)iiO  in  the  name  of  the  Prophet  ;  xiii.  2.  pii  \Zk£^  \^ 
on  the  shore  of  the  sea  ;  verse  50.  In  addition  to  the  nouns  which 
supply  the  place  of  adjectives  ( §  69.  2 )  it  also  occurs  in 
Q..  midstj   and    ^.^  hand,   etc.  ;    e.g.  Matt.  xiii.  1  ;  Gal.  iii.  19  ; 

Barh.  255.  11.   ^ji^|j£)  ^ir^   in  the  interior  of  the  palace.    Here 

belongs  moreover  the  use  of  the  construct  state  in  adjectives  and 
participles  (§  64.  1.  B),  followed  by  the  noun  with  a  preposition  or 
particle  belonging  to  both,  by  which  is  denoted  either  the  genitive 
relation  ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  28.  IaIO  D^a\^  blessed  of  (among)  women. ; 
II  Tim.  iii.  3.   lÄ.."5ik    . /<^vLvr>   slaves  of  passion  ;   I  Tim.  i.  10. 

•  ft   9    "    y      ft    '        "7      * 

|AVr>r>Vf>  \\^   *-»,jQl  violator  of  an  oath  ;     or   a   more   accurate 


216  THE  CONSTKÜCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE. 

definition  of  the  adjective  or  participle ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  Y,  18. 
.OOiASdQaO  %a^k..|iX>  far  advanced  in  their  years  ;  Rev.  xiv.  4. 
\lj\   ,-Sß     '  ^  ■>  *^1    redeemed  from  the  earth  ;  Acts,  xxiii.  23. 

2.  Far  more  usual  is  ;  a)  the  connection  of  the  emphatic 
state  as  nomen  regens^  with  a  following  >  before  the  genitive  ; 
e.  g.  Matt.  X.  5.  \Zil*^y  paiola  into  the  way  of  ike  Gentiles ; 
verse  15.  1j^>>  ]Sdcuä  at  the  day  of  Judgment ;  verse  42; 
xii.  42.  "jjiHiZj  lA^Vvn  the  queen  of  the  south  ;  xiii.  11,  45 ; 
xxiii.  85  ;  xxiv.  3  ;  John  viii.  47.  loilLj  IIld  the  word  of 
God ;  or  h)  with  a  pleonastic  suffix  referring  to  the 
genitive  following,  ( §  55.  B.  2  ) ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  8. 
]A£äÄ>  6\'^  Lord  of  the  Sabhath  ;  xi.2.  ]»iaV)>  ^010,^1 
the  work  of  the  Messiah  ;  xii.  40.  ll)|j  OUijiÄ  in  the 
heart  of  the  earth. 

Rem. — Rarely,  and  chiefly  in  foreign  words,  >  stands  after  the 
construct  state  before  the  genitive  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiii.  22. 
>Zq19  -  '^^(^  the  deceitfulness  of  riches ;  John  x.  23. 
tOV>i\»?  lofcml  the  porch  of  Solomon.  But  it  is  commonly 
used  when  one  or  more  words  are  interposed  between  the  nomen 
regens  and  the  genitive  ;  e.g.  Barh.  421.13,20.  ^QAsSol)  OCT  1jZ| 
the  region^  that  is  of  Jerusalem ;  or  when  several  gen- 
itives follow  each  other  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  83,  B.  21. 
^a|jlQ£d1J  I'rliJjij  ]L.1>Q£D>  loilL'  V^  Lm^J  Vh| 
the  convetit  of  the  Mother  of  God,  of  the  Syrians  in  the  Scythian 
desert  ;  Barh.  81,  2.  The  nomen  regens  is  sometimes  wanting,  and 
the  genitive  is  then  to  be  distinguished  by   >  ;    e.  g.   Rom.  xiv.  8. 

7  7      0 

.  1  »t  tr^>  the  Lords  are  we  ;  Matt.  xxii.  21.  Sometimes  >  is 
wanting  when  the  noun  forms  an  apposition  with  a  preceding 
genitive  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xii.  39.  |>^1  ^Q-i>  CTZ|  the  sign  of  Jonah 
the  prophet.     >   stands  before  proper  nouns,  especially  the  names 


THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE.  217 

of  countries  and  cities,  when  they  thereby  acquire  a  more  de 
definite  designation  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ii.  1,  6.  ]>oaU9  ^QmJL  Lm^ 
Bethlehem  in  Judea.  In  some  instances,  especially  in  the  super- 
scriptions of  some  Psalms  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  iv,  v,  vi,  ^  (^  auctoris)  sup- 
plies the  place  of  >;  very  rarely  elsewhere  ;  e.g.  Barh.  17,  4. 
Mh^  ^1D)Q2)  the  deliverance  of  the  (i.e.  5y  the)  Lord  ;  Assera.  T. 
340,  A.  25,  26.  So  too  with  ^So,  when  origin  or  descent  is  indi- 
cated ;  e.g.  Barh.  3*72, 16.  ]l^wJ^,^  ^  1^^  ^-^^^"^  -^rni 
he  took  fifty  cities  of  the  Franks  ;  or  when  there  is  indicated  a 
choice  or  selection  from  several ;  e.g.  271,  1.     ^0X0 ^f^  ^Sd  r*^ 

one  of  his  slaves  ;    270,18.     [aDjoL  ^LD    \\jk.y^  many  of  the 
Turks. 

3.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  to  be  understood  objectively; 
e.g.  Markxi.  22.  loilLj  lAoiSOiOl  faith  of{\,  e.  in)  God  ; 
Jobn  ii.  17.     »^A.i^j  OIU^  the  zeal  of  (i.  Q.for)  thine  house; 

Up         X  7  -«  »I 

»■■V)?    01,£XLm   i/i«;  reproach   of 

Christ  (i.e.  iAa^  attached  to  hirn). 

Rem.  —  Other   turns   of  expression   imitating  the   Hebrew   are 

Isa.  xvii.  2.     ;jh.lO;^>  m>C10  Ci7ie5  o/"  (a6ow<)  ^roer  ;  Exod.xxii.il. 

^;SO>     OiASdqSO   aw   oath   of  (by)    the   Lord  ;     Ez.   xxxv.    5. 

•0C71^>  |JqL  iniquity  of  (at)  their  downfall ;  Isa.liv.9.,  etc.    Not 

unfrequently   is   this   genitive   of  the   object   connected   with  the 

preposition  of  the  verb,   from  which  the  nomen  regens  is  derived  ; 

7     9  7    ^''«'>'  0  ' 

e.  g.   Barh.   53,    IS.     tr^^?  IZqiSOiOI    the  faith  in  our  Lord  ; 
Assem.  1.  347,20. 

4.  Sometimes,  especially  when  geographical  references  are 
made,  tbe  genitive  occurs  (as  in  English)  where  apposition 
would  be  more  strictly  correct ;  e.  g.  Acts  vii.  40. 
^^^^  ll>f  ^  from  the  land  of  Egypt  ;  xx.  6  ;  Kom.  xi. 
8  ;  Barh.  114,  l3.  ^i^^?  I'^i  oiS'^\  the  whole  mountain* 
of  Lebanon, 


218       DESIGNATION  AND   USE   OF  THE  OTHER  CASES. 

5.  Standing  after  adjectives,  the  genitive  is  often  used 
merely  to  define  them  more  accurately;  e.g.  Luke  xxiv.  25. 
(£L^  «J,  iH   lO  yLkl^-i  «,>,  trf>»i  Of    0  /oo^$  and  slow  of  heart  ; 

woo  7  ••  7         _«? 

Acts  vii.  51.     PpO  <>  >an  of    0  ye  stiff  necked  ;  Cant.  ii.  5. 

]ASDja9  ZoLi;0  sich  for  love. 

Rem. — Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  takes  the  place   of  an 

adjective;    e.g.   John,  xviii.  10.     (1  >V)»>    OlJjf   ^w  n^Ä<  ear; 

xxi.  6   (§54.  B..  2.  Rem.) ;  and  vice  versa  the  nomen  regens  ;    e.  g. 

Luke  iv.  25.     |A^SO)|  «-^vh^D  'jroXkai  x^P«'  ;  John  ii.  12.     In  the 

first  case  the  Philoxenian  translation  uses,  instead  of  J,  the  explana- 

tory  001  and  *ji01,    equivalent   to    that  is,   namely  ;    e.  g.    01J9| ; 

IAaJLlIQa   wiOl    and   J   is   to   be  understood    as  a  relative,  when 

it   follows   prepositions   with   suffixes  ;    e.   g.   Assem.    I.   30,    17. 

(£)QO£Qjl£)(>    ^OOlid   with  (them)  the  bishops.     Compare  §  55. 
B.  3. 


§  75.     Designation  and  Use  of  the  other  Oases. 

1.  The  dative  and  accusative  have  ^  for  their  common 
sign,  which  may  be  omitted  before  the  accusative  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  xvii.  4.  ,^>SSfclD  ASZ  ,^iU  let  us  make  three  tahema- 
cles  ;  Barh.  60,  9.yixO|  |oj  (jLaop  he  raised  a  great  perse- 
cution. No  difiiculty  is  thereby  occasioned  even  when 
the  two  cases  stand  together ;  e.  g.  Acts  xiii.  21. 
^o'lftiL  «oai^  «AOL»  he  gave  them  Saul ;  xx.  32. 

Rem.  With  verbs  having  a  double  accusative  (§  67. 1.  2)  ^  falls 
away  in  both  cases.  The  same  is  also  to  be  recognized  in  the  pre- 
ceding pleonastic  suflSx  to  the  verb     (§  55.  B.  I) .       Usually 


DESIGNATION  AND   USE  OF  THE  OTHER  CASES.       219 

^  (  =  ~in}»<  )  stands  before  the  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  ; 
e.  g.  Barh.  14,  9  ;  or  before  proper  names,  11,  20.  |01  il\  OUO 
he  built  Nineveh.  For  this,  in  Gen.i.  1 — 3,  the  Peshito  has  tuk  = 
H^jj^  (compare  Ephr.  I.  116,  D),  which  moreover  occurs  in  Eccl.  ii. 
3  ;  iii.  lY ;  iv.  1  ;  viii.  9,  17 ;  Cant.  iii.  5 ;  viii.  4. 

2.  The  accusative  is  also  used  adverbially,  and  tlien  de- 
notes ;  a)  direction  towards  a  place  (§  67. 1,  b) ;  e.  g.  John 
vii.  14,35;  viii.14;  xviii.3 ;  Barh.58,  18,19;  6)  in  indicating 
time  it  denotes ;  a)  the  question,  How  long  ?  e.g.  Barh. 7, 5, 
6.  -aIoQa  — xlS)]  t;4^  l^^  ^^^  ^^'^^  continued  forty  days  ; 
3,  15,  16.  '<•  1)Ld  ^OIClSl  o\^12i  they  mourned  for  him 
a  hundred  years  ;  24,  7,  8  ;  85, 19,  20  ;  195,  6,  7  ;  Assem.I. 
18,  A.]  ;  ß)  When  ?  Luke  i.  59.  ]ilV)Z?  ^oLL  ^oct  it 
came  to  pass  on  the  eighth  day  ;  Ps.  i.  2.  f»^^*^  JSqSQji  hy 
day  and  night ;  c)  in  reference  to  measure  and  weight  ; 
Hoio  long  ?  How  high  ?  etc.  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  38,  19.  looi  ^jf 
]Sd1'  l^uLZ  it  was  three  cubits  long;  20,  6;  179,  13. 
— iÄ  •   ^i£)  jj   —   %oAa   Kv^     ^^^  snoiü  lay  four  fingers  deep; 

d)  concerning^  in  relation  to,  as  to  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  37,16.  \.^^m 
^001  lASOQO  he  was  beautiful  as  to  form ;  17.  JQII 
]iDQ2)0  y  ^^  he  had  small  eyes  and  a  small  mouth ;  38,  4; 
Assem.  I.  74,  A.  30;  77,  A.  22  ;  86,  A.  25. 

Rem. — In  indicating  time,  How  old  ?    is  commonly  expressed  by 
JO   or   L*^   with  the  addition  of  the  years  ;    e.  g.   John  viii.  57. 
><•  ^»^<^>>  ;«3  fifty  years  old  ;  Barh.  3,  20. 

3.  Derivative  nouns  also  take  the  accusative  instead  of 
the  genitive  of  their  verbs,  viz. ;    a)  participial  forms;  Heb. 


220  THE    CASE    ABSOLUTE. 

xii.  2.  >/rnVr>>m\  \S  Q^^  the  finisher  of  OUT  faith  ;  James 
iv.6  ;  i)  infinitive  forms ;  e.g.  Kirscli.Chr.136,1.  MIo-ä-Sd 
.rr>>Vrt<y^r>i  >^^1^ffn^>r^\  ^^^  conquest  of  Constantinople, 

4.  The  vocative  is  distinguishable  in  part  by  its  connection ; 
e.g.  Matt.  xxvi.  39,  42.  ]»»^aV)  J  *juO|  m?/  Father  ij  it  he 
possible ;  Rom.  viii.  15  ;  partly  by  o],  prefixed  ;  e.  g.  Rom. 

ii.  1.  laJ'rO  o]  0  man  ;  verse  3  ;  I  Tim.  vi.  11 ;  James 
V.  1. 

Rem. — The  Philoxenian  translation  imitates  in  Greek  nouns  the 
vocative  termination  belonging  to  that  language  ;  e.  g.  Luke  i.  3, 
and  Acts  i.  1.    ]]laof2  oT  w  ©so^iXs  ;  I  Tim.  vi.20. 

5.  Finally  the  ablative  is  distinguishable  by  the  preposi- 
tions,  *0,  ^!sO,  ^Qi,  etc..  prefixed. 

Rem. — Time,  When  ?  is  frequently  expressed  in  a  similar  man- 
ner  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  11.  yaisDy  yr^:^  at  eventide  ;  Prov.  vii.  9  ; 
Assem.  I.  37,  A.  11. 


§  76.     The  Case  Absolute. 

By  the  case  absolute  is  meant  a  noun,  which,  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  sentence,  by  itself  and  without  connection 
with  what  follows,  forms  a  clause,  and  is  usually  to  be  ex- 
plained by  supplying,  as  to,  concerning^  and  the  like.  Here 
belong    especially  ; 

1.  the  Nominative  absolute^  which ;  a)  either  forms  the 
subject  of  the  following  clause  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xxii.  24. 
«401  «2}  I  Z,XaO  .  OiAdo>>0  and  his  concubine  —  she  also  bore  ; 


THE    CASE    ABSOLUTE.  221 

or  b)  is  to  be  rendered  by  an  oblique  case,  wHcli  a  suffix 
to  the  noun,  in  the  clause  following  shows  to  be  ;  a)  a  gen- 
itive ;  e.g.  Ephr.  I.  242,  E,  Ol'^moj  ]^^<^^  ]ooil  p  \^] 
l^t,'^  \0  if  there  be  found  on  the  skin  of  the  body  of  a  man  a 
blemish  ;  I.  110,  D  ;  Matt.  iii.  4  ;  or  the  suffix  to  the  prepo- 
sition indicates  it  as  ;  ^)  a  dative ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  vii.  7. 
^Gl!^  ^iD  01^  1^01.-»  IAogIQSo  »alSn  to  each  one  is  given  a 
gift  from  God  ;  Acts  xv.  21 ;  /)  an  accusative;  e.  g.  Ephr.I. 
223,  F.  ^OUOOI  |iSd  ^1>*  ^^r-»  W  —  \»Q^  ^e  know  not 
what  has  befallen  Moses ;  (§  67.  1.  c.  Rem.)  Ps.  Ixxiv.  17; 
tf)  an  ablative  (with  a  following  *Q  and  ^isO)  ;  e.g.  Heb.  x.  1. 
%1^'i  l2£il^j  OlO  looi  Aaf  12^1  lS^  IqdqSüJ  in  the  law  is  the 
shadow  of  the  good  things  to  come ;  Ephr.  I.  287,  A. 
X^\yn\   U^joo  Guk)  ^onro2  ]]'  ^jlO)  ^o  ;iV>m  ^ 

of  anything  leavened  and  of  honey ^  bring  ye  no  gift  to  the 
Lord. 

2.  The  accusative  absolute;  e.  g.  Gen.  xlvii.  21. 
(;r>\  1^  So  .QJf  wUü  |V>s\o  the  people  led  he  (literally  led 
he  it)  from  one  citg  to  the  other. 

3.  Oases  with  prepositions  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  ii.  17. 
Olli)  ^QofZ  U"  VAaajdjo  1^^?  1^,^?  U^V  ^ 
of  the  tree  of  the  knowledge  of  good  and  evil  {of  it)  shall 
thou  not  eat. 

Rem. — Sometimes,  instead  of  the  suffix,  the  preceding  noun 
absolute  is  repeated  ;  e.  g.  Esth.  vi.  7 — 9.  —  lI'^yiN 
^;*^  1^  »-»OIQJUjQ^O  as  for  the  man  —  thus  let  him  be  clothed ; 
likewise  with  the  pronoun  ;   e.  g.  Jer.  xxvii.  8. 


222  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  77.     Comparison  of  Adjectives, 


A.     The    Comparative. 

The  comparative  is  usually  expressed  by  the  simple  ad- 
jective,with  ^  =  prce  following  and  before  the  object  com- 
pared ;  e.  g.  John  viii.  53.  .QTa]  _So  Aj]"  »£5>  AjV  ]SüL 
>Oai^|  art  thou,  then,  greater  than  our  father  Ahraharri  ;  vii. 
81 ;  xiii.  16;  xiv.  12  ;  xix.  11 ;  Assem.  I.  378,  19.  wi^f 
I^^NVo  ^lo  ,jiJ^  {o4  my  mother  is  dearer  to  me  than  the 
queen  ;  372,  3.  v.  E  ;  Barh.  82,  20.  f^/.  ^OOlÜ)  ^O 
f  ASo)  Zooi  ]lLfe9f  she  was  a  cubit  taller  than  any  man. 

Rem. — Besides  ^SsO,  sometimes  also  «JQ^  very,  or  \aL^  more, 
equivalent  to  by  far,  is  added  to  the  adjective  in  order  to  strengthen 
the  meaning  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xx.  Sb.  ;aAj»  «AOU)  t^U  »^OIQ^O^ 
*OrQl>  ^1^1  ^iDhappier  by  far  is  he  who  gives  than  he  who  receives; 
Heb.  iii.  3  ;  iv.  12.  The  simple  adjective  is  used  as  a  comparative 
in  stating  the  age  of  two  persons  ;  e.  g.  Ez.  xvi.  61.  AÖrf)1> 
fZ>OSl\o  lAaiinN  «.^ZcLmP  since  I  have  received  thy  sisters^ 
the  elder  and  the  younger  ;  Barh.  27,  6,  7.  Rarely  after  the  He- 
brew idiom,  are  we  obliged  to  supply  the  comparative  adjective 
from  the  context  ;  e.  g.  Job  xi.  17;  more  frequent  is  ^SsD  =  too  ; 
e.  g.  Deut.  xiv.  24.  p^Sof  --^^  »-lOl  ^|>  ■»  fy>  the  way  is  too  great 
for  thee  ;  or  before  an  infinitive  with  ^  =  than  that  ;  e.  g.  Gen. 
iv.  13.     «n*^«V)\  ^Lo pDj  greater  than  that  it  can  be  forgiven, 

■n 

This  construction  with  ^Sd  occurs  also  with  verbs  of  quality  ;  e.  g. 
Lam.  iv.  7.  f^Nn  ^iO  O^QmO  V;^2  ^Sd  QaD>  they  are  purer 
than  snow  and  whiter  than  milk.  The  adverbial  more  or  less,  in 
respect  to  numbers,  is  expressed  by  ^iD  piA^and^j^Q;  Barh, 
156,  2  ;  Assem.  I.  414,  3. 


COMPARISON   OF  ADJECTIVES.  2?3 

B    The  Superlative, 

The  Superlative  is  expressed  ;     a)  by  the  positive^  with 
the  noun  following  in  the  genitive  plural  ;  e.g.  I  Cor.  xv.9. 

|»»,i\»>  »001)011  the  least  of  the  Apostles  ;  or  with  ^Ä  in- 
stead of  the  genitive;  e.  g.  Matt.ii.6.  IjOOUj  ]^V<^^  Vr»V^ 
the  least  among  the  {princes)  towns  in  Judah  ;  or  simply  by 
the  emphatic  state  ;  e.g.  Matt.  v.l9.  Ir'^^  ih^  ^^^t  ;  Barh. 
85,  7.  IjlI^Ij  "|Aq>  IÄla^  v*jioj  B^me^  the  greatest  city 
of  Italy  ;    Assem.  1.  323,  A.  20;    335,  A.    14.  v.  E  ;  in  the 

plural,  ICor.vi.2.  jÖpOj  eXa^irfra  ;  II  Pet.i.4.  (£3909  iiiyKfTct; 
or   when   a  preference  is  given  to  one  individual  over  a 

ft   *^      ''* 
whole  species,    by  ^^  ^So  and  a  following  plural  ;    e.  g. 

Ephr.I.  204,  C.  ^GLiilO  ^  ^  lL>  the  greatest  of  all  evils  ; 
h)  by  doubling  the  adjective  or  noun,  so  that  the  latter 
stands  in  the  relation  of  genitive  in  the  plural ;  e.g.  Gen.ix.25. 

^r^:il  r£il  the  meanest  slave  ;  Exod.xxvi.33.     ^aj^QO  ^mq^Q 

the  holy  of  holies^  i.  e.   the  holiest  place  ;  Num.  iii.  32  ;  Barh. 

530,  3,  4.  ]»n.\V)  yiiA.V)  the  hing  ofkings^  i.e.  the  might- 
iest hing;     c)    by  *£i.6  and  ;-iA^   before  the  adjective  ;    e.  g. 

Eev.  xviii.  12.  l;niV>  r'AJ«  ]rfi>0  the  most  precious  wood  ; 
Barh.   87,  3. 

Rem. — To  denote  the  superlative,  use  is  also  made  of  the  words 
«Aa)  and  l^iO;  e.g.  Barh.  170,  13.  |La£0|  .Ji^)  the  most  excellent 
physician  ;  Assem.  1.  335,  B.  4,  5.  püja9>  (jSo  the  most  merci- 
ful ;  more  like  the  Hebrew,  by  IoTlSv  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  xxxvi.  6.  f  JO^ 
]oi!äv  the  mountains  of  God,  i.e.  the  greatest  mountains.  In  verbs, 
a  strengthening  is  denoted  by  « i  .i  CD  much  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  56,  11. 
fc>j^>Z]  - '  1  ^  he  was  much  disquieted  ;  or,  by  «JOJ  many  (§  67.1. 
c.  ß)  ;  e.g.  Barh.  6,  5  ;  135,  1.  To  be  noted  also  are  such  forms  as 
OlASßajaj,  literally,  whose  wisdom  {is  known)  for  the  wisest. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  NUMERALS. 


§  78.     Construction  of  Numerals  (§  50). 

A.     Cardinal  Numbers. 

The  cardinals  from  three  upwards,  are  connected  with 
nouns  in  the  following  manner  ;  a)  the  object  numbered  pre- 
cedes the  emphatic  state  plural ;  e.g.  Luke  i.56.  lA^Z  U*r^ 
three  months  ;  Barh.  133,  1 6.  ^LyLQ  ^^*,m\  \äJi»  tvjenty-two 

years  ;  4,  5.  •aSQaiO  ^ZflD  (▲!•  ^w;o  hundred  and  five  years; 
or     6)  it  follows  in  the  absolute  state  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  x.  29. 

^f^t  ^LJL  two   sparrows ;    xiv.    20.      ,^i1  i^OO  ;mi9^ 

twelvt  baskets  ;    John  v.  5  ;  Acts  xx.  3  ;  Barh.  135,  lO. 

Rem. — Exceptions  to  this  rule,  however,  occur,  the  object  num- 
bered standing  after  the  number  in  the  emphatic  state  ;  e.  g.  Barh. 

160,17.    l^äi   ^1«^^  Uj^^  eif/ht  thousand  slaves  ;    121,8; 
164,  4  ;     or   the  cardinal,  though  rarely,  stands  as  nomen  regens  in 

the  construct  state  ;    e.  g.   Matt.  iv.  25.     \l\    i|V)  Z;£Q1  ten  cities^ 

(literally,  the  ten  of  the  cities).     Some  nouns,  such  as  ]lOGLi,  f  AjL» 

also  follow  the  numeral  in  the  singular ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  213,  A.  21, 

*P77  17  77'»> 

22.  ^Oa  pmO  ^^>aV)»>  0;iQlj  ^Sd  when  fifty-one  days  had pas- 

sed;  Barh. 10,1 6.  Concerning  the  designation  of  age  by  '^  and  Z;0 

comp.  §  75.2.  Rem.;  Assem.I.  31,21  ;  377,  1  ;  Ephr.I.195,D  ;  Barh. 

50,13  ;  179,4;  with  the  omission  of  _xl#  ;   Barh.  5,  12.    l]2i  ;L 

•aSQaaO  ^lmO  one  hundred  and  sixty  five  years  old.  For  the 
combination  of  numerals  without  any  numbered  object,  compare  § 
50;  in  respect  to  which  it  is  to  be  noticed  that,  contrary  to  the  He 
brew  usage  the  smaller  numbers  follow  the  larger  ;  e.  g.  Num.  iv. 
43  ;  1  Kings  v.  11.  Concerning  suflSxes  to  cardinal  numbers,  see 
§  46.  2.  b.  Rem. 


B.     Ordinal  Numbers. 
1.  Ordinals  are  connected  like  adjectives  with  their  nouns 
in  the  same  number  and  case  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xiv.  25.   li;4^lQ^ 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  NUMERALvS.  225 

fiNN?  (AjlIajS)  in  the  fourth  watch  of  the  night  ;  Eev.  iv.  7  ; 
vi.  9.  ]i«iVl>i  llQ^  the  fifth  seal ;  verse  12  ;  xvii.  11. 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers  also  supply  tlie  place  of  ordinals 
as  follows  ;  a)  the  units,  especially  in  designating  time  ;  a) 
with  the  noun  standing  before  the  numeral  in  the  emphatic 

state  plural ;  e.  g.  John  xix.  14.  A«  ]l.s  j^^")  about  the  sixth 
hour  ;  ß)  with  the  noun  after  the  numeral^  in  the  absolute 
state  ;  e.  g.  John  iv.  6.  ,^iV»  Ai  ^ooiAa^  it  was  the  sixth 
hour  ;  verse  52 ;  Acts  iii.  1 ;  x.  9,  30 ;  but  more  especially ; 
h)  in  numbers  above  ten  with  the  noun  preceding  in  the 
construct  state  ;  e.g.  Luke  iii.  1.  IrCQlAiQAj  ZimQ  in  the  fif- 
teenth year;  Assem.  I.  2,  A.  1.  2,  v.E.  )*^ml£i»b  l|io  ALäQ 
in  the  one  hundred  and  seventeenth  year  ;  p.  3,  A.  17.  B.  19 ; 
388,  3 ;    389,  1,  3,  5;  407,  10 ;    or  with  j  following  in  the 

emphatic  state  ;  e.g.  Barh.  4,  16.  ]^Ss>  IslS^J  lAlio  in  the 

year  of  the  world  one  thousand;  or  c)  the  ?  prefixed  raises  the 

cardinals  to  ordinals  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxii.  26.    ^9>^>  the  second; 

VaIZj  the  third ;  verse  39 ;  Luke  xii.  38.  t^li  A  ^'^>'^? 
the  second  or  the  third ;  especially  in  designating  the  years 
of  the  reign  of  a  sovereign;  e.  g.  Barh.  1Ö,  14;  11,  1 ; 
86,    11. 

Rem. — Sometimes  also,  in  accordance  with  Hebrew  usage,  the 
object  numbered  is  repeated  after  the  numeral  in  the  absolute  state 

plural ;  e.g.  Gen.  vii.ll.  ^'<*  "I^Sd  As  Alan  in  the  six  hundredth 

'/ear;  and  the  years  of  the  reign  are  given  with  v»-i>  with  a  suffix  ; 

.'.  g.  Barh.  19,  9.  OlSu)  ;£QlAlA2  in  the  tenth  year  of  his  reign  ; 

<)0,  8.  In  giving  the  days  of  the  month,  either  *£)  without  >Oa,^ 
is  repeated  after  the  numeral,  before  the  name  of  the  month  ;  e.  g. 

Assem.  I.  2,  B.  12.  v.  E.    ^  >  ^'^  limiASAo  on  the  IS th  of  Ni- 

san{Äprii);  272,B.31  ;  399,19,20  ;  407,8,9  ;  or,  reversely,  after  the 
name  of  the  month,  before  the  numeral  following  it ;  e.  g.  397,  13. 

OIQ  ]i»Ao  ^p.»  «^^jlID  on  the  9  th  of  June  ;   or   with   ^CUQ 


226  BELATIONS   OF  NCJMBERS. 

before   the  numeral  and  the  name  of  the  month  which  follows  with 

•Q  repeated  ;  e.g.   398,  7.    ^OIT)  oJ^^O  ^j-CQlO  ]Ln3  iOcL^ 

on  the  21  th  of  December  ;  274,  30;  or   reversely,  so   that  SOOaO 
stands  after  the  name  of  the  month,  before  the  numeral ;  e.  g.    399, 

14.     Oli  ^^CQIO  ^>Z  U>aiJD  •£>!  «KM'pi^  071  the  22nd  of  Au- 
gust.    This  takes  place   even  in  designating  the  days  of  the  week ; 

«  p  "         ? 
e.g.  Matt,  xxviii.  1.    \*^m*^  pM  the  first  day  of  the  week  ;  John  xx. 
19;  A.ssem.  I.  2,  B.  12.  v.  E! 


C.     Other  Relations  of  Numbers. 

1.  Distributives  are  formed  ;  a)  by  doubling  the  cardinal 
numbers  (§  72.  2.  b) ;  e.  g.  Mark  vi.  40 ;  Barh.  19,  14 ;  b) 
sometimes  by  circumlocution  by  means  of  ^^^  ;  e.  g.  Barh. 
41,  16.  r^  ^jZ  ^i^  two  each  ;  17. 

2.  Numerical  adverbs  ;  a)  in  answer  to  the  question,  How 

many  times  1  (Multiplicatives) ;  a)  by  h^  and  »Q  before  a 
cardinal  number  following,  which  more  'clearly  defines  it ; 

e.g.  Gen.  iv.  15.  f\n«n  ^k»  seven-fold;  Luke  viii.8;  without 
*0,  Jer.  xvii.18.  ^jZ  ^  twofold;  ß)  by  the  simple  numeral 
with  .JO,  Luke  xix.8.  'iio))^  (i.e.  lai^)  fourfold;  b)  in  answer 
to  the  question  How  often  f  a)  with  the  signification  of  a  cardi- 
nal,  by  means  of  ^1  time^  plural  ^.U^l  times ^  as  in  Eng- 
lish; e.  g.  II  Cor.  xi.  24,  25.  ^\  I^m  once  ;  ^~LLCi\  -^^>r 
five  times  ;  Matt,  xviii.  22  ;  Luke  xvii.  4  ;  John  xiii.  88  ; 
by  VAlil  plural  fAlil,  Asssem.  1.  484,  27,  30;  sometimes 
by    .A  ti^ne^  plural  ^^i-^,  Barh.    10,  19  ;    more   rarely  by 

Vk»9o]  way^  or  merely  by  the  feminine  of  the  ordinal  num- 
ber ,  e.  g.  Gen.  iv.  24  ;     ß)   in  an   ordinal   signification,  in 

such  a  manner  that   either  \i:Oi\    of  the  cardinal    precedes 

with  J,  and  is  repeated  after  it  in  the  plural ;  e.g.  A^Zj  |i^l 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  ADJECTIVES.       227 

^^iöf  (also  elliptically  ASZj  ]x^]  or  ^Aüf  A-i^4)  for  tke 
third  time ;  or  by  adverbs  of  the  ordinals  in  2o,  e.  g.  Jude, 
verse  12.    Lew  >  ^Lfor  the  second  time. 

3.  Fractions  are  represented  ;  a)  by  special  forms  derived 
from  the  cardinal  numbers ;  e.  g.  Rev.  viii.  7.  IALoZ  one- 
third;  vi.  8.  liob>  one  fourth  ;  Heb.  vii.2  ;  h)  by  circumlo- 
cution ;  e.g.  Rev.  xi.13.  VrCQl  ^  y**  one-tenth  ;  Ephr.  1.204, 
D ;  Ez.  V.  2.  ^QiSb  ASZ  ^  lU^ 


§  79.     Connection  of  the  Noun  with  Adjectives, 

The  adjective   is  related  to  the  noun  either  as  epithet  or 
predicate. 

I.  As  epithet  it  follows  the  noun  in  the  same  gender  and 

number  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xvii.  1.  po>  l>CL4  an  high  mountain  ; 
xvi.  4.  lZ',-i.y»0  lAa>o  lAri'^i  a  wicked  and  adidterous  gener- 
ation  ;  xi.  8.  |^i^>  |A*jJ  soft  raiment  ;  John  xi.  47. 
IAaIi^sd  IZoZ*)  many  miracles.  The  same  is  true  in  respect 
to  pronouns  and  participles ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xv.  8.  lioi  ]V)S  ^Aw 
_peop?e ;  verse  12  ;  xix.  1 ;  Rev.  iii.  8.  Uiu»Ä2)  Iij2  (2?2  o/^en 
door.  Collectives  in  the  singular  are  followed  by  the  ad- 
jective in  the  plural ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  78,  A.  4.  ^^^  )SQ2k 
]or>r>Vr>i  the  people  who  hold  to  the  lavt  ;  so  also  with  nouns 
in  the  plural  having  a  singular  signification ;  e.  g.  John  vii. 
38.  t**  Ijio  living  water  ;  Heb.  x.  24  ;  or  in  the  singular 
ad  sensura ;  e.  g.  Num.  iv.  5.  jCXU;^>  liLiZ  *Aja|  the  vail 
which  was  spread  out. 

Rem. — The  pronoun    frequently    comes  first ;    e.  g.   John  xi.  47. 
\'f^\%  MCn  this  man  ;    Matt,  xviii.  1 :  xvii.  18.  Adjectives  are  also  used 


228       CONNECTION   OF  THE  NOUN   WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

emphatically ,especially  in  titles;  e.g.  Assem.l.25,A.l4.  «^pD  pL2a4 

yOu\S^ the  jnousEphraem;  ll7,B.23.,-Ls*GU  ^*^  l*-»^  the  holy 
John;  286,  A.  1.  If  an  adjective  is  appended  to  the  dein onstrative 
pronoun  for  the  sake  of  more  particular  designation,  the  pronoun 
usually  stands  between  the  noun  and   the  adjective  ;  e.  g.    Ephr.  1. 

124,E.  falD,^0  \r^JB\  OOl  (901QJ  this  light  first  spread  abroad; 
127,  D ;  or  before  both,  132,  F.  ]£j  ]l<^\V>  OOl  this  great  teach- 
er.— ^\b  occurs  (as  a  noun)  exclusively  before  the  noun  ;  e.g.  Matt. 
XV.  13.  I  pa  I  |AOf^  ^\d  this  whole  planting,  (with  suffix,  compare 
§55.B.  2. Rem.).  A  word,  generally  a  particle,  sometimes  stands  be- 
tween  the  noun  and  the  adjective  ;  e.  g.   Acts  xvii.  20.    Ja.«  \\J^ 

»p.     0"  <K  ^         \^ 

fZU^QJ  strange  words  indeed.  But  very  rarely  the  adjective  fol- 
lows   in  a  gender   different  from  that  required  by  the  noun  ;     e.  g. 

Barh.  454,  18.  1ä^^  VhiJ  (fem.  VAaa^O)  the  holy  cloister.  Or 
with  nouns  of  the  common  gender,  the  gender  of  several  adjectives 
following  one  after  the  other,  is  interchanged  ;  e.  g.  Michael.  Chr. 
61.  1,  2. 

2.  As  predicate  (with  the  substantive  verb  expressed  or  to 
be  supplied)  the  adjective  precedes  the  noun,  which  follows 
in  the  absolute  state,  or  with  a  suffix  ;  e.  g.  Mark  xv.  23. 
jjQVß  cTiQ  »^i\»t>  f jiQxi  wine  with  which  myrrh  was  mingled  ; 
verse  26.  lAi^  Zooi  |iDuÄD  as  reason  was  written  ;  Matt.xv. 
28.  «-»^ZoiSOaOl  »aOl  tQ>  great  is  thy  faith.  In  like  manner 
the  pronoun  ;  e.  g.  Mark  xv.  26.  ^^'boU)  ]n\V)  CU<^  that  is 
the  King  of  the  Jews;  Luke  ii.  12.  \L\  ^oh^  |j01  that  shall  he 
for  you  the  sign. 

Rem. — Sometimes  the  adjective,  as  predicate,  follows  the  noun, 
viz.:  when  several  words  follow  which  define  more  closely  the  signi- 
fication of  the  adjective ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xix.  20.  |oa;q  ]jai  '{Lk\Ci 
^SoAj^  tn;SV)\  «jiGFI  this  city  is  nigh  to  flee  unto  ;  or  an  adver- 
bial idea  is  embraced  in  the  preposition ;  e.  g.  Gen  xxix.  7.  V^  ^'^.^ 
^Qjk£i  fSOQ^  it  is  yet  high  day,   i.  e.   high  in  the  day.     Sometimes 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.    229 

the  adjective  singular,  as  predicate,  stands  before  the  plural  noun  ; 
e.g.  Barh.  542,  14,  15.  ]jLd  oio  %^a&3  to  that  same  were  the 
words  written;  or  it  follows  a  plural,  being  itself  in  the  singular  ; 
e.g.  Assem.  I.  21,5,  6.  01^  ,  *n\  fZ^jkl^lO  (AjL.*QfiO  songs  and 
hymns  were  composed  by  him.  But  especially  the  adjective  in  the 
plural  follows  collectives;  e.  g.  Rev.  xix.  1.  ^;Si3|)  |Pk.ye£0  [mlO 
a  great  multitude,  who  said ;  Barh.  88,  4.  The  predicate  is  also 
expressed  by  a  noun ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  xii.  27.  |m>i«V)>  tOAjf  C7i;.t^ 
ye  are  the  body  of  Christ ;  Eph.  v.  30. 

3.  When  several  nouns  of  different  genders  are  connected, 
the  adjective  as  epithet  and  predicate,  usually  conforms  to 
the  masculine  ;  e.g.  Luke  i.  5,  6.  —  MQa  ■  \\  OlZAjfO  Mpl 
fOl-^  >0^  0001  _.&.Qa>l  »OOLk^L  Zacharias  and  his  wife  Miz- 
abeth  both  feared  God  ;  verses  6,7  ;  Barh.  106,9. 

Rem. — Concerning  the  neuter   the  same   rules  prevail  as  in  §  66. 

2,  and  §  70.  3  ;  e.g.  Assem.  I.  36,  6.     1AaÄ0>  v*01  that  which  has 

been  written;  372,  19  ;  Ephr.  I.  241,B ;  Barh.24,  18.  üHjuS)  ^ 
he  did  that  which  was  evil. 


§  80.     Connection  of  the  Noun  with  the  Verb, 

The  Yerb  conforms  in  number  and  gender  to  the  subject; 
but  to  this  there  are  mriQy  exceptions,  which  may  be  refer- 
red to  the  following  cases.  Compare  Agrell  Comment,  de 
varietate  generis  et  numeriin  LL.OO.  Lundce,  1815,  4. 

A.     In  regard  to  Number. 

Here  it  should  be  remarked  : 
1.  That  collectives  or  those  nouns  which  are  regarded  as 

such,  are  connected  with  plural  verbs.  Here  belong,  |J.»-m;  e.g. 

Barh.  94,  10.    oLa^V«^'^^  lliooji  1].i.ja  the  Roman  army 


230  CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB. 

proceeded  towards  Persia  ;  96,  9  ;  ^  ;  e.  g.  Acts  xxvi.  13. 
0001  -  ><^^^  ^\d  all  who  were  with  me  ;  Michael.  Chr.  15,5  ; 
and  its  compounds,  r**-^;e.g.Assem.L39,8 — 5.  CLoADf  ffc»\n 
all— wrote  ;  ^lols  ;  e.g.Michael.Chr.  14,15.  O'^ifj  ^ScAb  all 
who  said;  *äj1  ^D;  e.g.Barli.277,6.  OJOlZ  »Jtilo?  that  every 
one  wondered;  also}jalD;  e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^OOULlD  01-^  Qiao 
the  whole  multitude  arose;  lLrQCO;e.g.Bar]i.422,10.1]ytQ£D  o2f 
a  great  multitude  came  ;  Assem.I.  386,15,16 ;  (iül;  e.g.  John 
V.  3.  IcnlpJ  1^^  ^^  OOCil  ^jiUi'i  ^jlLoIO  in  these  (pools) 
lay  a,  great  multitude  of  invalids ;  Assem.  I.  483,  19  ;  Barh. 
95,6,7;  227,8;  312,7;  Uj'r*';  e.g.  Barli.211,8.  o.-^  ]i-^ 
»£);\V)\  the  others  fled ;  342,  19.  According  to  the  same 
construction  are  names  of  places  put  for  their  inhabitants ; 
e.g.  IfsoQl  cloister;  Assem.I.411,  Note  B.  4 — 6.  P—  I'^dl 
«aOIOOVm  when  the  monks  saw  him. 

Rem. — The  same  nouns  also  are  found  with  the  verb  singular  ;  e.g. 
l]j-M,  Barh.551,  13  ;  ^\d,  288,12,  and  its  compounds,  .»»S^"^;  e.g. 
309,14;  ^V^\n;  e.g.  314,2  ;  ^1  ^  or . ■l\n;e.g.3'73,l;also]jÜLa"; 
e.g.Acts  xiv.4 ;  pQl;  e.g.Acts  v.26;Barh.  301,9,10.  In  like  manner, 
abstract  feminines  occur  for  concretes;  e.  g.  |ZQaJ|,  Barh.  490,  18. 
Ld\^  (ZojuI  Ou^  all  men  fled  ;  (AaJQa  for  prisoner;  Assem.  1. 
490,  A.  31 ;  ^Al^fSiO  for  inhabitants]  e.g.Acts  xiii.44  ;  |Z,i  for  con- 
gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23.  Still  more  remarkable  is  the  construction 
of  these  nouns  in  one  and  the  same  period  with  a  singular  and  plu- 
ral verb ;  e.g.  Üjlx»,  Barh.212,1.  »aOlO^lO—  1]j-m  %a01q!^  ^Jkl 
an  army  conquered  him  and  took  him  captive ;  *Mj\  ^oJD  e.g.  388,3, 
4  ;  ISüi;  e.g.  Acts  xxi.  36  ;  Barh.  371,  8. 

2.  Nouns  with  a  plural  form  having  a  singular  significa- 
tion  (  §  44.  Eem.  6  ),  are   either  ;     a)  in   respect  to  form 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.    23 1 

connected  with  the  plural  verb ;  e.  g.  )si\,  II  Cor.  iii. 
18.  (Aji-^y.  l£)|o  with  unc0vered  face  ;  Barh.  201,  1  ;  \21*\ 
e.g.  Johniii.l5.  ^!bklIL>  |l!l»  Olli  ^OOOIJ  he  shall  have  eternal 
life  ;  V.26;  Barh.219,12  ;  llio;  e.g.  John  v.7.  Ql^fZZV?  to 
\.^\d  when  the  water  was  troubled ;  Barh.  194,  3  ;  268,  7,  8, 
12;  and],  ■Sn»;e.g.Mark i  10.]uiß*  QO>Aflo|  oupavo/  ö'x'^°M'^v°' '» 
James  v.  18.  1^^  ClOOU  (,«iDS  6  oJpavoj  usrov  £(Jwxsv  ;      or   fe) 

more  rarely,  in  Tespect  to  signification,  they  are  connected 
with  the  singular  verb ;  e.  g.  Luke  xxiii.  45.  wiia]  ^\^  A 
^jZ  th^  vail  was  rent ;  John  i.  4,  fOOl  [»jt.^  OlO  in  him  was 
life ;  Num.  xxxiii.  14.  |.i  V)  ^-^Z  lOCTI  Aj^j^  there  was  no 
water  then  ;  Luke  iii.  21.  f  >Sn»  «-mAsZ*!  the  heaven  was  open- 
ec?;  as  feminine,  II  Petr.  iii.  5.  ^Qji;id  ^  Zooi  ouAaj  |a1q» 
oupavo/  ^tfav  gx<7raXai  ;  Barh.  228.  10. 

3.  With  the  noun  plural  also  is  connected  the  verb  singu- 
lar ;  a)  when  the  verb  preceding  is  used  impersonally ;  a) 
Lk]  and  A^ ;  e.  g.  John  vi.  9.  i e»rii  «jbSOm  ^OIQ^  Aji| 
^oJQJ  ^^LO  I^ICD)  he  has  five  barley-loaves  and  two  fishes  ; 
xxi.  25  ;  I  Cor.  xv.  40  ;  Barh.  144,  8 ;  with  locJl,  John  v.  2. 
>r>^<Y^|  {aSDa*  OIQ  (001  A^l  there  were  in  the  same  five  porches  ; 
Assem.  I.  352,  13  ;      ß)  other  verbs  relating  to  persons ; 

*p      7     ••5'       .^•»  I    7  P      P  -7    ..  7  I  .^ 

e.  g.  Luke  u.  13.  U-^^^?  '»-Sv®   |Zn.ia,»>  »uVmH  ^^^^'^  «jo- 

*  ^  -*     P   7  7 

peared  many  of  the  heavenly  host ;  Barh.  124,  11.  ta,*  q  ^^^ 
pjb»  //?e  Arabians  made  peace ;  133,  12.  .  alL  li^>1  A^iO 
there  died  four  thousand;  l77,  14;  339,  9  ;  or  h)  when 
the  verb  follows  though  more  rarely  ;  a)  A^*)  and  AaJi; 
e.g.  Barh.  148,  10.  !>00«in\  looi  A^t  IjO»  ^SoI»  Chisum 
had  five  ivalls  ;     ß)  other   verbs   relating  to  persons ;  e.  g. 


232  IN"  RESPECT   TO   GENDER. 

Barh.  1 12,  lO.  ^\ix)Z1  l^K^  fftf^^y  were  slain  ;  125,  14,15. 
>-^^l  ?-•-»— 4  ^he  Arabians  chose  for  king  ;  190,  9.  ^lO 
^\*I>  p  -.  lAi^3^  since  the  inhabitants  feared  ;  298,  17 ; 
613,  3;  532,  19.* 

Rem. — Some  havo  attempted  to  explain  this  singular  of  the  verb 
as  the  third  plural  pret.  defectively  written  (§  6  ;  comp.  Agrell  a.  a. 
O.p.  12,13)  ;  still  it  is  remarkable  that  one  and  the  same  author,  as 
Barhebrseus,  should  employ  interchangeably  both  ways  of  writing. 
On  the  contrary  this  construction  is  found  in  Hebrew  and  more 
frequently  in  the  Arabic ;  and  to  both  of  these  languages,  such  a 
defective  form  of  the  3  pret.  plur.  is  unknown.  When  a  plural 
is  to  be  considered  as  distributive  {one  of  them,  or  each  one  of  them)y 
the  Syriac  uses  not  only  the  singular  but  the  plural  also,  and  marks 
this  construction  more  accurately  by  , »» \0,  tOOULO  f**  or  ^lO 
r^^Ol;  e.g.  Barh.  434,  12.     Ol'ilV  f»».\o  ^lY.QJOT  each   one  of 

them  went  into  his  country  ;  101,  14,  15.     ^a*    , n\n    0>1^    ^O 

«^         ■»>  •       •  • 

•OQlllO  each  one  of  them  had  answered. 

4.  The  dual,  which  is  used  in  four  words  only,  (§  44),  is 
connected  with  the  plural  verb  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  xxiv.  40. 
^OOOU  ^jZ  two  shall  be  ;  xviii.  19  ;  xix.  5  ;  Barh.  165,  19. 
^UltkL'iL  t^^jLtO  and  they  both  brought  forth. 

Rem. — Sometimes,  also,  according  to  the  sense,  the  verb  in  the 
singular  is  found  with  ^9^So  ;  e.g.  Barh.396,12.  ^9^  AOSÜJ 
01p»1  ^i)  that  it  should  be  called  Egypt ;  433,20.  Similar  is 
Barh.  121,  11.  ^;*LO  ^LiL  Lih  there  departed  two  armies. 

B.     In  respect  to  Gender. 

1.  Nouns  masculine,  singular  and  plural,  sometimes  take 
the  verb,  whether  it  precede  or  follow,  in  the  feminine 
when  they  are  masculine  in  respect  to  the  termination,  but 
not  as  to   signification    (compare   §  43.  Kem.  2,  and  §  70. 

i.b). 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.  233 

Rem. — It  must  be  considered  as  a  solecism  or  a  designation  of 
the  neuter  when  the  verb  feminine  is  found  with  a  noun  masculine  ; 

e.g.  Barh.527,16.  |aSD)  LOCI  fD  when  it  was  evening  ;  compared 
with  Matt.  viii.  16  ;  xiv.  15  ;  or  Barh.  152,  14.  V^Ji^L^  -  ZoOl 
there  arose  a  quarrel ;  compared  with  Matt,  xxvi^  5 ;  Acts 
xxiii.  10. 

2.  Feminines  take  a  verb  in  the  masculine;  a)  when  they 
are  feminine  merely  in  respect  to  termination  (compare  § 
70.  l.a) ;  h)  when  abstracts  stand  for  concretes  (compare 
§  70.  2) ;  e.  g.  ^ai,  lAiaj/or  mankind;  Barh.236,8.  ^ 
oAaSd  ] AäSIJ  |la^  ^mSüi»  there  died  about  fifty  thousand 
men  ;  548,  20  ;  585,  14.  ]2;jiai  army;  581,  12.  Qmliif 
]Z;*^rCl^  ^^01  these  armies  were  assembled ;  or  1^n>Aey^  milita- 
ry for  soldiers  ;  607,  20. 

Rem. — These  nouns  are  also  found  with  the  verb  feminine ;  e.  g. 
Barh.  341,  10,  11.  ^-iaj  \ls&.  JCQläZ  y^  ^bJiJjü  there  died 
about  twelve  thousand  men  ;  348,  15,  16.  But  the  preceding  verb 
masculine  is  to  be  considered  as  impersonal  in  such  cases  as  Barh. 
612, 14.  '\tsSi\  JDOVaZf  there  tvas  occasion  given  ;  compared  with 
579,  14.  Zool  lAlDJ  lAal  there  was  much  occasion  ;  or  606,  19, 
20.  lA^jaj  OiZq!^  fOCn  he  had  fear  ;  compared  with  136,  6. 
"j^Vvn  V^  lA^kjaJ  L^tSLl  fear  fell  upon  the  king, 

3.  Sometimes  the  noun  is  connected,in  the  same  sentence, 
with  the  masculine  and  feminine  of  the  verb  ;  not  only,  a) 
nouns  of  the  common  gender  ;  e.g.  Mark  v.  13.  U*Oy  QOSU 
GlLio  lAsiL^  ,  i^<^  these  unclean  spirits  went  out  and  entered  ; 
but  h)  such  also  as  have  a  determinate  gender ;  e.  g.  Barh. 
268,  10.  QoLmZIo  »aS^^I  ^OuZjZ  they  both  {mother  and 
daughter)  fell  and  were  suffocated  ;  260,  11,  12. 


234  CONSTRUCTION  OF  SENTENCES. 

G.     In  respect  to  both  Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Collectives  feminine  often  take,  in  accordance  with  the 
meaning,  the  plural  masc.  of  the  verb ;  e.  g.  Barh.  661,  6, 
7.  0001  ,^>ni^  —  VZojkj'l  the  inhabitants  had  fled  ;  Gen. 
xli.  57.  o2l  U'l  oi^  the  whole  people  {country)  came  ; 
Matt.  viii.  32.  olaj  _  ^6\  I'^oa  dlli  this  whole  herd  — 
perished ;  Assem.  I.  53,  17.  ^^^Q  p  lAi^^^  OlSo  AjUoZI 
all  the  inhabitants  {the  V)hnle  city)  assembled  and  wept.  So 
too  the   names  of  cities ;    e.  g.   Assem.  I.  51,     Note  B.  1. 

qX^oAi^  AqSU  «^01)0 1  the  inhabitants  of  Edessa  went  out  tobe 

slain  ;  Barh.  248,  6,  7.     |Zq*.,a^  for  Mohammedans;  Barh. 
580,  1,  2. 

2.  With  nouns  plural  feminine,  sometimes  occur  verbs 
singular  masculine^  as  well  before  as  after  the  noun  ;  e.  g. 
Isa.  iii.  1Ö.  tOUJiOl^  Al£5  ^Qj»iZZ|  the  daughters  of  Zion  are 
haughty  ;  Barh.  215,  7.  Oi'Zqq^  ^Ollo  fvoZIß// o/  Aw 
^ooc?s  ÄacZ  been  plundered;  Ephr.  XL  145,  A.  loOl  ^TIaAo 
lA^Ao  ^OliNs  there  were  writings  composed  concerning 
iÄem ;  Jer.  xiv.5.  .nn«0  j-^-»  -  (A^j  ^^e  Ä7*?ic?ä  cahed  and 

forsook;  Barh.  368,  11,  12  ;  10,  9.  *a01oLV,I^' ASZ  there 
were  three  eyes. 

Rem. — Seldom  are  cases  found,  where  the  verb  singular  feminine 
stands  with  the  noun  plural  masculine  ;  e.  g.  Job  xxxix.l3,  14. 
OlAlD  1^*^*  ^fc»»,*^»  the  ostrich  leaveth  her  eggs. 


D.   Gonstruction  of  sentences  when  there  is  more  than  one  subject^ 
or  where  the  subject  is  compound. 

l.When  the  subject  of  a  sentence  is  compounded  of  a  nom- 
inative and  genitive,  the  verb  conforms  ;    a)  usually  to  the 


CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB.        235 

nominative  ;  e.  g.  Barli.  228,  7.  IjQSüL  ZoLoj  tl\Ll^  there 
was  seen  the  form  of  a  pillar  ;  613,  14.  ]tnmVi>  lAl.. 
AiSoAsl  the  cry  of  the  poor  was  heard  ;  348,  20 ;  h)  the 
verb  conforms  to  the  genitive,  when  the  latter  contains  the 
principal  idea  ;  e.  g.  Job  xxxii.  7.  ^^<^\So  M^>  llyi  Q^  the 
multitude  of  years  shall  teach;  Barh  96,8,9.  \L\  i.,^)  OTjL.QflO 
A\«y>i  a  great  part  of  the  city  was  destroyed  ;  141,  10;  241, 
10,  U ;  188,  7,  8.  oooi  ^^dot^JD  — .  \k^  ^a}  a  muiti- 
tude  of  the  dead  were  buried. 

Rem. — In  the  last  connection  ^O,  almost  always  is  found  ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  viii.  34  ;  Acts  xxi.  30  ;  I  Cor.  xiv.  23  ;  to  which  the  verb 
rarely  relates,  as  Barh.611,3.  OlÄloZ  ^01^  yio^mJ  all  of  his 
petitions  should  be  granted. 

2.  When  it  has  several  subjects  connected  by  and,  the 
verb  stands  as  follows ;  A)  when  they  are  of  the  same  gen- 
der ;  a )  in  the  plural ;  thus  a )  before  the  subjects ; 
e.  g.  John  xxi.  2.  "iLooVZo  ]Si]D  ^QISüä  Yr»*£]' OOOI  ^OGfuLf 
^^pAjO  there  were  together  Simon  Peter,  Thomas  and  Nathaniel; 
Barh.  19,  7.  .AjQ-»o  \o\»  a^u^]^  Saul  and  Jonathan  were 
slain ;  78,  8  ;  193,  17  ;  Assem.  I.  30,  A.  1,  2.  ^%mty-)  p 
^AlD  OlSoo  J20oja.i^  when  the  clergy  and  the  whole  congregation 
were  assembled;  Ephr.  1.  223,  A ;  /3)  after  the  subjects; 
Exod.  xvii.  10.  r^ns\re^  jOmO  ^ojOiIo  "lioSo  Moses,  Aaron 
and Hur,  went  up.  But  the  verb  is  also  frequently  found  ;  h) 
in  the  singular  ;  a)  before  the  subjects ;  e.g.  Matt,  xxviii.  1. 
]2>*1  ^'»Sdo  li\jLS_i^i  ^'rSD  Z2]  then  came  Mary  Magda- 
lene and  the  other  Mary ;  Barh.  106,  4,  5  ;  121,  19  ;  159,  9; 
160  13.  Ij^qSdo  llao  looi  there  arose  famine  and  pest- 
ilence ;  193,  19;  Assem.  I.  272,  A.  35,  36 ;  Ephr.  I.  216,B; 


236       CONNECTION  OF  THE  NOUN  WITH  THE  VERB. 

280,D  ;  ß)  after  the  subjects  ;  e.g.  Johiiii.2.  ^Q«u  001  *2i( 
^'rOL]  1  >mo^  ^Kr\/n  Jesus  and  his  disciples  were  invited  ; 
Barh.  1 11,  lO ;  Assem.  I.  284,  A.  5.  v.  E  ;  B)  when  the  sub- 
jects are  of  different  genders,  the  verb  conforms  ;  a)  to  the 
gender  of  that  standing  nearest  to  it ;  e.  g.  Barh.  106,  9. 
f    '^^^  (aJO  t  rQyi  ^i^ilO  rO  when  men^  women  and  youth  had 

^  «p.e..   0         **••«.  f  I      «Y* 

assembled  together ;  192y  10.    (L9)...0    |>0-4    Oi.Ny(i£f    mountains 

and  islands  appeared ;  195,  4  ;  or  h)  the  masculine  is  pre- 
ferred, especially  if  the  verb  follow  the  subjects ;  e.g.  Barh. 
74,  12,  13.  0001  y^^rAt^  OiÄa*0  JDcLlDOjofi  Theodosius 
and  his  sister  were  educated ;  77,  7  ;  78,  2  ;  Ephr.I.  258,  A{ 
C)  finally,  when  there  are  several  subjects,  if  the  construc- 
tion commence  with  the  singular  of  the  verb,  in  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  sentence,  the  plural  of  the  verb  is  used  ;  e.g. 
Barh.  137,  14.  QO'lo"  ^Olo',rLKlo  lln.I  J^o  Oahala  and  his 
confederates  arose  and  fled ;  155,  16.  P-ij  OlZo-^  «A2U 
QQjßO  (Uu90  the  judge  and  the  elders  went  out  and  brought. 

Rem. — The  verb  in  the  plural  also  follows,  when  several  subjects 
are  united  by  ^Ol  with  ;  e.g.  Barh.  197,5,6.  ^Ql  >Q2unxJ  ^O 
QIQ  (aIDO))  IZoXa^jM  when  Nicephorus  with  the  Roman  army 
returned;  72,2;  85,9.  When  there  are  two  different  subjects, 
of  which  one  is  a  pronoun  of  the  first  person,  the  verb  follows  in  the 
first  person  plural  ;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  48.  jajOfi^  ^dOfO  (jj 
^A^  ^001  ,^>SO  Ipb.^^  I  and  thy  father  (we)  have  sought  thee 
with  much  sorrow  ;  Assem.  T.  173,  B.  23 — 25.  Yet  sometimes 
when  the  subjects  are  in  the  first  and  third  persons,  the  verb  is  in 
the  first  person  singular ;  e.g.  Assem.  1,  347,  28,  29.  ^mujiSDO  \i\ 
ukLjk}  \ljkD  rM  land  the  Messiah  are  (am)  one  nature» 


PECULIARITIES  RELATING  TO  NOUNS.  237 

§  81.     Peculiarities  relating  to  Nouns, 
Ä.     Mlipsis, 

1.  If  the  subject  of  a  sentence  would  be  repeated  in  the 
predicate,  before  a  genitive  for  the  purpose  of  defining  it 
more  accurately,  that  subject  is  omitted,  and  only  the  geni- 
tive is  used ;  e.  g.  Matt.  iii.  4.  l^l£D?  oi»q2lL  ]oai  «-»oioA^f 
V^sxi  his  clothing  was  (  a  clothing  of)  cameVs  hair  ;  John 
V.  36.  ^ImQa?  ^3i^  fOJJ  \LOyoLSL  a  witness  which  is  great- 
er than  that  of  John;  x.  21 ;  xi.  4;  Heb.  iii.  3  ;  v.  14. 
]L]J'f»  lA^QO^Si  1  r-'lQy*>  to  those  who  are  of  full  age  belongs 
strong  meat ;  Col.  iii.  22. 

Rem. — This  Ellipsis  also  occurs  in  designations  of  time  and  place, 
with  TAi»  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  394,  6,  7.  0U3  ZoOlj  1^1*  iO^. 
j,  A.10  .«JCOOJOUQCD  a  year  before  the  Nicene  council,  for  (Als  , 
^Ali  ^^  ;  1.  11.  lAl»>  oijAo  the  year  thereafter,  for  lAl», 
VAi»?  OljAii  ;  Mark  xiv.  9.  IjOl  »aZ',^  fpZ^j  InaV  ^ 
(viz  :  iZ])  where-ever  this  my  gospel  shall  be  preached, 

2.  Sometimes  the  accusative  is  wanting  with  the  active 
verb,  when  the  object  can  be  easily  supplied  from  the  sig- 
nification of  the  verb  ;  e.  g.  'r^j  to  plough,  literally  to  drive 
difSi  the  yoke— plough),  I  Sam.viii.l2.  (in  full,Luke  xvii.7)  ; 
,  V  >  to  bring  forth,  Aph.  y-SoVto  beget  (U^),  Glen.  xvi. 
1  ;  XXX.  1;  ».r^mi  to  marry,  literally  to  take  (IZAj]);  Ezra. 
ix.  2,  12  (in  full,  Barh.  39,  11) ;  ^a^j]  to  cast  lots,  literally 
to  cast  (Ima  a  lot)',  I  Sam.  xiv.  42  (in  full,  Ps.  xxii.  19); 
also  nouns  with  prepositions ;  J>QOD  to  consider,  literally  to 
lay  (]  '^^^  in  the  Heart)]    Job  xxxiv.  23  (in  full,  Acts  v. 


238  ZEUGMA  AND   HENDIADYS. 

4) ;  ]>>  to  ship,  literally  to  go^  (ISüjLa  upon  the  sea) ;  Mark  vi. 
48 ;  Luke  viii.  23. 

Rem. — Here  also  seem  to  belong  impersonal  phrases  (  §  66.  1,  2) 
like  ^  ^r^)  ^  AjpD  to  which  may  be  supplied  ykSH  or 
VmO>  ;  and  ^  t^p  to  which  may  be  supplied  \£l^*  To  ^^Lj 
it  is  clear,  and  Aiijlm  it  is  dark,  it  is  forced  and  unnecessary  to 
supply  y^y]  or  IALdOa» 

B.     Zeugma  and  Hendiadys, 

Zeugma  occurs  with  the  noun  as  well  as  with  the  verb 
(§  68.  C.  2);  e.g.  Gen.  ii.  1.  ^OCJllx>l  Olloo  U>1o  llso»  the 
heavons  and  the  earth  and  all  their  host ;  or  Hendiadys  ; 
e.g.  Gen.  iii.  16.  ^aILlI^O  *>ninp  thy  sorrow  and  thy 
conception,  i.  e.  the  sorrow  of  thy  conception  ;  Job  iv.  16. 
Cases  of  Paronomasia  are  merely  imitations  of  the  Hebrew; 
e.g.  Isa.  xxviii.  10,  18;  and  passages  of  accidental  asson- 
ance ;  e.g.  Barh.  102, 18.  Hifinn  flY  ]rn  i'«^n  P'  not  by 
persuasion  but  by  the  sword. 

APPENDIX. 

77ie  Rendering  of  Composite  Greek  nouns. 

The  Syrians  render  the  Greek  composite  noun  as  well  as 
the  verb  (compare  Appendix  to  §  67)  into  their  language, 
in  the  following  manner  ;  1)  by  simple  Syriac  words  of 
like  signification  ;    e.  g.  I  Tim.  iv.    13.    avapwö'iff  ll-i;0; 

^apaxkri<fis  |Zq10  ;  i.  9.      a(fsßsTg  \LaMJ  ;  ävotfjoi  (a^^^ ;    Matt. 

xviii.  28.    (fuvdouXog  ]Lid  ;    or  2)   by  writing  two  words  for 
one ;  a)  in  the  relation  of  genitive;  e.g.  Acts  ii.23.  irp6yvu(fis 

lAl,^  ^r>vr>  oVn»  IITim.  iii.2.    ax^oKfroi  IZosu^ö  *a,ao  ; 
or    b)  by  two  nouns,  of  which  the  latter  stands  in  apposi- 


THE  RENDERING  OF  GREEK  COMPOSITE  NOUNS.       239 

tion  ;  e.g.  John  xi.l6.  (fv^^ia^riTai  a-Wov  ^cno^^^  |^  «Vnx/  • 
c)  by  a  participle  and  noun  whicli  correspond  with  the 
verb  ;  e.  g.  Acts  iv.  13.  a/pa/xfxaroi  |;jzifiD  -^.>  |J  : 
or  by  participles  and  adjectives  and  the  noun  with  ^  pre- 

fixed  ;     e.  g.    II    Pet.  iii.     16.      Svcfvorirog    jJ-Oom^    .o^rrtv  ; 

or     d)  by  the  pronoun   and  verb  ;    e.  g.    I  Cor.    vii.   8. 

a/afj^oj  \mJi  ^ai\  LJ^}  ^^iS»1>  If  the  composites  are  form- 
ed -from  adjectives  and  nouns  ;  3)  they  are  frequently  re- 
solved into  their  component  parts,  and  rendered  in  the  same 
manner  as  in  cases  mentioned  above  ;  a)  in  thci  relation  of 
genitive;   e.  g.   Mark  x  vi.  14.     CxXTipoxap^/a  ]AV  ZcuaD; 

urn 

Col.  ii.  14.  p^ffipo/pa(pov  ^Qcu*  'r^ ,'  Matt.  xxiv.  24. 
-l^svSoifpocpriTOLi  (ZoOjOj  |jL*aJ  ;  6)  by  the  noun  and  adjec- 
tive  ;  e.  g.  Phil.  ii.  3.  xsvoSo^ia,  {q.a;co  ^kOQs  ;  II  Cor.  xi. 
-..>  |n,iN» ;  4 )  sometimes  we  can 
trace  definite  laws  of  rendering  ;  a)  nouns,  adjectives,  and 
adverbs  compounded  with  'jra^,  take  ^i»D  ;  e.  g.  Luke  xi.  22. 
flravo'jrXja  P-»l  01^  ;  xxiii.  18.  <;rajx<7rXiiä£?  JaIO  01^  ;  Sap. 
xviii.  15.  "jravro^tvttfAOff  V»^  ^*i^>  ;  6)  when  they  are  com- 
pounded with  a  privative,  the  latter  is  represented  by 
fl'and  tfj  ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  xv.  53.  Ä^avac/a  ]ldlajlD  ]]';  Eph. 
i.  4.  afxwfjoo^  ^C^  Vj  ;  Matt.  iii.  12.  (i(fßs(fTog  ]aij  ]]j» 
Finally,  in  composites  formed  with  <fvv ,  this  is  often  ren- 
dered by  ^»clL  ;  e.  g.  Philem.  verse  23.  (fwaixi^'oXuros 
lxou   ^jioi)  llflii  ;     Kom.  xvi.   9.    o  tfuvsp/oj  ^fxwv  I^As) 

7     T 


CHAPTER  FOURTH 


PARTICLES. 


§  82.     Construction  and  union  of  Adverbs, 

1.  Besides  the  formation  of  adverbs  described  in  §  51,  is 
to  be  noticed  as  a  special  peculiarity  the  expressing  of  them 
by  certain  verbs,  which,  either  stand  in  the  same  tense,  num- 
ber, and  gender,  with  the  finite  verb,  with  or  without  the 
copula,  or  the  infinitive  of  the  verb  follows  with  ^«  In 
this  connection  stand  ;  a)  ^ö\  to  return^  and  «2lfiD0f  to  con- 
tinue^ioT  once  more^  farther^  again  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  viii.  10.  ySiü\ 
ai9r»0  again  he  sent  her  out ;  Ps.  Ixxi.  20.  ^*acnZ 
»jLioal  thou  shalt  bring  me  again  ;  Job  vii.7.  ^aSOSOiZ  V 
^V*»Sn\  they  shall  no  more  see  ;  Luke  xx.  11,  12.  «SifiDOl 
>r*0  he  sent  again  ;  Assem.  I.  208,  A.  7,  8 ;  Gen.  iv.  2. 
y^lV)^  AaCDol  she  bare  again  ;  Barh.  152,  8  ;  also  by  ad- 
ding pleonastically  *Qo2  again ;  Gen.  viii.  21.  »SifiDo'l  M 
|l>]]  C7i4^SQ^  %QoZ  I  will  no  Tnore  curse  the  earth ;  h) 
<i^m1  to  make  much^  for  very  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  92,  14.    «A.rml 


CONSTRUCTION   AND    UNION   OF  ADVERBS.  241 

;q^  he  esteemed  very  much  ;  II  Cor.  viii.15  ;  II  Kings  xxi. 
6.  %AxO>  ,nsV>\  1  i.yt  rt>1  he  did  much  evil ;  c)  ^qSjb  to 
end fi)X  wholly  ^completely  ;e.g.(aQX).,xxiY.\b.  oWv>V)\  NoS»  ]] 
Äe  Äarf  not  yet  done  speaking  ;  d)  y>rO  to  precede  (always 
without  the  copula)  for  before  ;  e.  g.  Z^|  tijD^  I  have  said 
before  ;  Acts  ii.  31  ;  vii.  52  ;  Rom.  iii.  9,  25;  viii.  28,30;  xi. 
35  ;  xii.  11 ;  I  Cor.  ii.  7;  Gal.  iii.  8. 

Rem. — More  according  to  the  Hebrew,  seems  to  be  the  expression 
in  Hos.  vi.  4  ;  \^Q  S^JoSoj  ]]'U  ("jj^n  d'l^tp^^  btp)  t^  ^ew, 
which  early  is  scattered  ;  Gen.  xxxvii.  7  ;  or  II  Kings  ii.  10. 
t^a^m  A^JOdI  (iS^töb  iTl'^topn)  thou  askest  too  great  a  tking;com- 
pare  Ephr.  I.  519,  D.  E  ;     Jj^i^ön  ^^  II  Chron.xxvi.l5,is  expressed 

by  ' '  a  ^  I  »  compare  Jer.iv.5,and  onward.  If  the  finite  verb  already 
precede,  it  may  be  omitted  in  adverbial  usage  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xx.  41. 

I         »»  X7  7  r 

,»-00 1  ^o>  y);£^  .  Q2l2  <Äey  mourned —  but  David  the 
most. 

2.  Adverbs  like  adjectives,  are  connected  with  nouns 
and  stand  ;     a)    before  them  ;    e.  g.   Luke  iv.  25.     .i.tfn 

Xt^^^^y]  many  widows ;  John  ii.  12.  IASocLa  ^u\nfew 
days  ;  Barh.  78,  1  ;  105,  3 ;  106,  8 ;  Assem.  I.  30,  15,  21  ; 
270,  A.  6.  V.  E ;  with  words  standing  between;  284,  A.  10. 
V.  E.  ;  b)  more  seldom  after  the  noun  ;  e.  g.  I  Cor.  v.  6. 
^»i.xi^O  l;i^fi»i  a  little  leaven  ;  II  Chron.  ii.  9.  ]ffl.i  .n 
«jL^j-OD  much  wood  ;  Barh.  80,  16.  Aa*A^  ^  IjQJ  the  fire 
placed  under. 

Rem. — Sometimes  nouns  represent  the  adverb  by  a  following  geni- 
tive ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  219,  A.  llllj  l^IioV  ^OOli^  JooiAjiV 
IjqSqio  they  had  continually  the  cloud  and  the  pillar.    Particu- 


242      INTERROGATION,    AFFIRMATION   AND  NEGATION. 

larly  should  be  noticed  ;  ^^  \>>  iNoO  almost  ;  or  — LD  ^  »^^ 
\y  iNo    jZ]  ^iD,  •-»-yjhCD partly^  etc. 

3.  The  repetition  of  the  adverb  indicates  ;  a)  a  strength- 
ening or  increase  of  the  meaning  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  vii.  19. 
JOi^  %£i^  9.^'^^  ready  ;  Matt.  iv.  24.  «aiO  »HiO  'z;er?/  5ac?  ; 
John  vi.  7  ;  Barh.  65,  14.  ^JuJio  ^.Snn  and  84,  17. 
jAq  5ÄO  J?/  degrees  ;  h)  sometimes  a  diversity  is  expressed 
by  adverbs  of  place  ;  e.  g.  I  Kings  xx.  40.  Iq^o  \il^  here 
and  there. 


%  83.     Use  of  the  Interrogation^  Affirmation,  and  Negation, 

A.  Upon  the  construction  of  the  interrogation,  it  should 
be  remarked  ; 

1.  That  the  simple  direct  question  is  distinguished  ;  a) 

eitber  by  being  preceded  by  an   interrogatory  pronoun  or 

particle ;    e.g.  Luke  xxii.27.     *£)>   ciliD  ivho  is  the  greatest  ? 

John  ix.  26.     »A   r^^  U^  what  has  he  done  to  thee  ?  verse 

10.     .^1  >  1  >  \   »^-mA2)Z|   llOjij  hoio   were   thine   eyes   opened  ? 

verse  19;  vii.  35  ;  Assem.l.  33,  15;  179,  B.  25.     ^OkliV-So 

^aJ^OI   0001   ^^r*  whence  know  they  thisi     or  h)  by  the 

position  of  the   words  employed,  the  prominent   word   in 

forming  the  question  being  generally  placed  first  ;    e.   g. 

Matt.  XX vii.  U.     MjOOUj  p\V>  OOlAjj  art  thou  the  Icing  of 

the   Jews?    Assem.  I.    33,    17.     U^t   >*^  ^1   is  it   thy 
wish  f 

2.  A  question  with  |1  usually  contains  an  affirmation  ;  e.g. 
John  iv.  35.  1?^  fZ]  ^^^  U^'T  >Ac)>  ^'^öf  xptJ\  }j 
say  ye   not,  that  after  four   months   cometh   the   harvest  ? 


INTERROGATION,  AFFIRMATION   AND  NEGATION.      243 

xvni.26  ;  but  with  ]Sxii  it  embraces  a  negation;  e.g. John  v. 
45.  ^OaL  ]j1  *y.i4^  1^1?  ^oAjI  ^laSO  ISol  believe  ye  that 
I  shall  accuse  you  ?  x.  21 ;  xviii.80  ;  or  a  doubt  ;  e.g.  Matt, 
xxvi.  22.  ^-rSo  ij]  tnl  Lord  is  it  If  John  ix.  27;  xviii.25; 
so  also  with  *jbO  ;  e.  g.  Ephr.  I.  240,  P,  ^ji  looi  ;-<^^ 
fa;So  « 1 1 1  sn  yjould  this  please  God  ?  Luke  xviii.  8  ;  xxiv. 
18 ;  John  vii.  35. 

»7»7       ^ 

Rem. — The  direct  question  is  also  found  with  fjf  (apa),  Barh. 
131,  12  ;  with  "lliO  for  fcü!^  119,  10. 

3.  The  indirect  question  is  indicated  by  /j  =  whether  ; 
e.g.  Matt.  xxvi.  63.  |01^>  a\\n  f»>iaV>  OOl  Aj]  J  whether 
thou  art  the  Christ  the  son  of  God.  The  disjunctive  {whether 
— or  {utrum — an)  is  marked  by  0^  in  the  second  part ;  e.  g. 
Matt.  xi.  3.  ,^1  >  nmV)  OCT  ^'^y'oVli]?  OCT  0CT*Aj1  art  thou 
he  who  should  come  or  shall  u^e  look  for  another  ?  John  ix. 
2;  Assem.  1.  87,  B.  12,  13;  377,  20,  21. 

Rem. — The  affirmation  or  negation  of  a  question  is  usually  expres- 
sed by  a  repetition  of  the  leading  verb  with  the  personal  pronoun  ; 
e.g.  Assem.  I.  375,  7.  O'^lo  —  2'3soVj  ^'^  *LmV  ^oAlSfi« 
Z;SO(>  ^,V^NO  ^)!i£lm  have  you  heard ^  my  brethren^  what  I  have 
said  ?  and  they  answered,  yes,  all  ;  10.     QIjDO   — ,    \1    Of    tr^\M 

p..  I   7  ^        ,  ,        .  . 

.  r^'fBy  is  it  true  or  not  ?  and  they  answered  it  is  true,  i.  e.  yes  ; 
sometimes  by  another  verb;  e.g.  Matt.xx vii.  11.  Z;iD'|  tS\  thou  hast 
said  it,  i.  e.  yes  ;  in  the  negative  with  the  same  repetition  ;  e.  g. 
Assetn.  I.  3*78,  7,  11.  Sometimes  only  |]  ==  not,  appears  ;  e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  33,19.     %A^i\  |j  ;iD|0  and  he  said,  JVo,  my  father. 

B.  The  negative  particles  fl  and  Q^  (and  nonne  ?  )  are 
distinguished  from  Au^  by  this  latter  forming  the  negation 


244  PKEPOSITIONS. 

to  A— i],  and  with  nouns,  adjectives,  and  participles  (§  58. 
B.  5)  or  with  suffixes  (§  38.  2),  it  includes  the  substantive 
verb. 

Rem. —  ]]  is  repeated  in  the  latter  of  two  negative  clauses  ;  e.  g. 
I  Cor.  xi.  11,  16  (but  the  negative  sense  is  lost  when  the  parti- 
cle is  to  be  taken  affirmatively  ;  as  in  Matt.  v.  25  ;  Luke  xxi.  34). 
To  adjectives  and  participles  it  gives  a  negative  or  privative  signifi- 

cation  (  =  ww,  in,  -less)  ;  e.  g.  Eph.  i.  4.  ^CdX)  |J  spotless  ; 
Rom.  i.  23.  \\»^>>AVf>  (J  imperishable.  Before  nouns  it  signifies 
nothing  less  than  ;  e.g.  Deut.  xxxii.21.  <ilfi\  |J  nothing  less  than 
my  [God's)  people.  Before  the  future  (equivalent  to  an  imper- 
ative) it  is  prohibitory  ;    compare  §  61.  3.  B,  and  §  62.  3.     Doub- 

led(|JO  — .|]oor|Jo y  ),  it  signifies  neither  —  nor  ;    John  viii. 

19;  ix.  3. 


§  84.     Prepositions, 

1.  When  prepositions  come  together,  in  many  instances  ; 
a)  the  signification  of  one  of  them  is  only  apparently  lost. 
Thus  for  example,  ^So  ;  a)  before  prepositions,  denotes 
the  direction  from  a  place  whose  position  is  more  closely 
defined  by  those  which  follow  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  46,  21. 
IrM  lap  Zu-mZ  ^io  out  from  under  a  rock,  1.  37,19  ;  ß)  after 
prepositions  it  denotes  a  removal  from  the  place  more  closely 
defined  by  those  which  precede  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  1. 54,  7. 
|Z,i  ^Sd  AjsjAL  «^aioSOfiO  they  buried  him  under  the  Church  ; 
Barh.  200,  16.  ^Ala"^  ^  'rü  before  the  city;  72,  19,  20; 
%Q,  13.  |jQä  ^iD  ^\l^  from  below,  (i.  e.  above)  the  walls  ; 
figuratively,  31,  17.  |lO)09  |00l^  ^  ^\i^  above  all  ex- 
cellence ;  one  of  the  prepositions  is  ;  b)  merely  pleonastic  ; 
e.  g.   Eccl.  X.  14.     OliAo  ^  after  him  ;  Assem.  I.  36,  22. 


PREPOSITIONS.  245 

yLQ^  ^/rom  thee;  87,  1  ;  Dan. v.  24.  ^ü\c^^  ^o  be- 
fore him  ;  Barh.  65,  9.     ]n\SnS  2q1  to  the  King. 

2.  Several  of  the  prepositioüs  have  a  peculiar  consecu- 
tion ;  e.g.  betiüixt — and  between,  \iO ^jJUjD;  e.g.Matt.xx.l7. 

^OOl^O  «,101 01  lO  between  him  and  them ;  frequently  with- 
out the  copula,  xix.  10  ;  ^  —  AxO  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  60,  13. 
*ji0lJ0|J  ,^  AajQ  between  Haran  and  Edessa  ;  75,  17,18  ;  83, 
15  ;  146,  13  ;  rarely  ^  —  ^  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  60,8  ;  from— to, 
\  lk)%._^;e.g.Matt.i.l7.  *uO^^  ]So^^.  JOCT-of  ^  /rom 
Abraham  to  David ;  in  more  general  designations  also  with- 
out ]ioA;  e.  g.  Barh.  99,  17;  105,  7. 

3.  Besides  the  cases  mentioned  in  §  55.  B.  3.  b)  preposi- 
tions are  repeated  with  several  nouns  which  follow  after  one 
another,  and  depend  upon  one  and  the  same  preposition  ; 
e.  g.  Barh.  82,  10 ;  104,  11,  13  ;  but  the  preposition  is  quite 
as  frequently  omitted  after  the  first  noun  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  6,  1 ; 
40,  12 ;  m,  6. 

Rem. — As  special  idioms,  are  to  be  regarded  the  following  ;  a) 
%0  sometimes  stands  for  ^  (^v  r=  sis)  ;  e.  g.  Luke  ii.  3.  looi  ^If 
ClAl^^iDO  .»  ^^^'^  each  went  to  his  own  city  ;  iii.  3  ;  Barh.  66, 
16,  17  ;  or  serves  to  designate  the  value  or  price  of  a  thing,  equiva- 
lent to  for  ;  Barh.  64,  6.  ^Jlk)  ^jJk\üLo  ^'Z^DQ  for  two 
hundred  and  fifty  oholi  ;  149,  8,  9  ;  191,  1,  2  ;  193,  19  ;  h)  \ 
denotes  direction  towards  a  place  (§  67.  1.  b.  ^)  ;  with  numerals, 
with  l^A  preceding  =  about  to  ;  c)  ZcL^  and  ^CUL  show,  some- 
times a  possession  in  a  physical  and  intellectual  sense  (  =  penes)  ; 
e.g.  Job  XV.  9.  ^Zq^  |001  Uj  which  stands  not  in  our  power  ;  23. 
14;  d)  -Sd  forms  adverbs  (§  51.  3.  a)  ;  expresses  the  pronouns 
anybody  —  some  (§  58.  B.  4,  6,7),  and  sometimes  indicates  the  di- 
rection  to  a  place  ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  485,  28.     ImJ,^  ^So  towards 


246  CONJUNCTIONS. 

morning  ;  1.  29  ;  e)  ^^  often  occurs  before  a  duty  or  obligation 
(§  67.  IL  4.  b)  ;  Ezra  x.  4.  It  may  also  in  respect  to  signification, 
be  considered  as  a  preposition  ;  /)  U  ?  without  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  227,5. 
|J.i5    |J>0  l^Hi    y^}  without  hands  and  without  feet. 


§  85.     Conjunctions. 

The  Sjriac  language,  in  common  with,  the  other  Semitic 
dialects,  is  very  deficient  in  conjunctions  ;  but  affluence  of 
periodic  diction  in  all  languages  arises  from  this  class  of 
words.  Hence  in  syriac,  upon  the  one  hand,  the  periods 
are  wanting  in  variety  and  continuance  ;  and  on  the  other 
hand  the  connective  particles  which  do  exist  have  many 
significations.  In  general  the  following  may  be  observ- 
ed : 

I.  Those  conjunctions  (e.  g.  lühen^  then)  are  frequently 
omitted,  which,  in  the  protasis  indicate  the  relation  to  the 
apodosis,  and  the  two  members  are  united  by  and ;  e.  g. 
Gen.  xix.  23.  ^  ^olo  *naü  |jdQj»  when  the  Sun  had 
arisen^  Lot  came  ;  xliv.  4. 

Rem. — Moreover  the  following  fall  away  ;  a)  O  {asyndeton)  after 
verbs  of  motion  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  ix.  7.  ^1  f  ^QlO  he  arose  and  went  ; 
Barh.  25,  1;  197, 19  ;  especially  in  earnest  discourse  ;  e.  g.  I  Sam. 
XV.  6  ;  b)  o{or  ;  e.g.  II  Kings  ix.  32.  ^jLlSoioiSD  Xt!Ll  ^jl 
two  or  three  eunuchs  ;  c)  J  more  in  accordance  with  Hebrew- 
usage  ;  e.  g.  Isa.  1.  2.  *mS\  A^O  Lkl\  ]{V)\  wherefore  was,  I 
came,  (when  I  came),  no  one  there.  On  the  other  hand  O  is  often 
repeated  {polysyndeton)  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  61,  20.  ;-lio21o  Aa^DO 
fiV>«\  «n\rPO  >QO0  he  died,  was  buried,  arose,  and  went  to 
;  82,  17;  38,  5,  6. 


2.  As  correlatives,  conjunctions  are  used  doubled  in  a 


CONJUNCTIONS.  247 

sentence  ;  a)  the  same  word  ;  e.  g.  o  —  o  and  •£)]  —  *£i\ 
as  well — as,  both — and ;  e.  g.  Assem.  I.  291,  A.  10,  ll,v.E; 
oi  ^o(  either-— or  ;  Barb.  112,  4  ;  223,  4,  5  ;  \!{—\\  ^wheth- 
er — or;  Q.g.  217,13;  or  6) different  words  ;  e.g.  Jiaoi  — )^| 
like— as;  Assem.  I.  75,  B.  ll,  13,  v.E;  374,  23,  24;  with 
>  llkil  preceding;  Bphr.I.  214,  E;  ]]  T—  ^"i  although— yet; 
e.g.  Barh.  91,  12,  13. 

3.  The  conjunctions  j  =  that^  therehy^  or  (Jj  =  that  not^ 
are  usually  connected  with  the  future  (§  61. 3.  A) ;  e.  g.  As- 
sem. I.  515,  B.32  ;  Barh.  213,  6 ;  but  in  as  far  as  they  have 
the  signification  of  since,  because,  {qixod),  they  are  connected 
with  the  preterite  ;  e.g.  Matt.  ix.  8.     «sau>    (GLi(J   <^'^>*^^ 

they  praised  Ood,  because  he  had  given  ;  12,  41  ;  13,  11  ; 
Barh.  24,  9. 

4.  Concerning  the  use  of  particular  conjunctions,  the  fol- 
lowing may  be  noted  ; 

a)  o  I  is  sometimes  used  in  comparisons  (=^  ^So)  ;  e.  g. 
Matt,  xi.22  ;  xix.  24  ;  and  likewise  h)  »^1  in  comparing 
one  thing  with  another  of  the  same  species ;  e,  g.  Isa.  i.  7  ; 
Job  xxiv.  14;  Assem.  I.  75,  A.  1.  v.  E  ;  168,  B.  29  ;  with 
numerals  it  signifies  really,  about ;  Barh.104,13  ;  c)  q!ä  if^ 
(  =  Tj^  ^av )  denotes,  in  doubtful  cases,  the  relation  of  the 
subjunctive  ;  tl  =  Ü|j^  s'  in  cases  of  certainty,  denote^ 
the  indicative,  and  also  occurs  in  indirect  questions  (§  83.3); 
it  is  negative  in  those  passages  containing  asseverations 
under  oath,  yet  only  in  those  which  are  translated,  and  which, 
according  to  the  Hebrew  idiom,  are  without  any  negation ; 
with  a  negative  U  /j,  ]]  ]  or  ^  (j  1,  it  is  afiirmative(compare 
q;j^  and  jiJii  ü^,  Gesenius  Lehrg.  p.  844)  ;  e.  g.  Cant.  2.  7. 


248  CONJUNCTIONS. 

<;julZ  tlo  Cr^l  {\  f^a^s  noij  rouse  not ;  d)  >  (for  tlie  further 
use  of  which  see  §  56  ;  §  69.1 ;  73.  3  ;  §  74.  2.;  §  78.B.  2) 
a)  from  particles  which  it  follows,  forms  conjunctions 
e.  g.  J  n^just  as  J  Assem.  I.  34, 17  ;  so  ihaij  Matt.  ii.  13 
y  iSiuV  Just  asj  John  viii.  28  ;  Ephr.  I.  214,  E  ;  j  ^Aif 
(of  time)  05,  i(;Äen,  Assem.I.  485,  15  ;  j  wiOlQ  smce,  because^ 
Barh.  112,  7,  8  ;  160,  12  ;  y  >2^,  39,7,  and  j  jAq  ^,  As- 
sem.  I.  213,  A.  25,  afterwards ,-  >  0lAl»;o  as  sooti  as,  1.218, 
27  ;  ?  ]!^  (of  time)  ^Äew,  1.485,20 ;  y  ^i^,  Barh.160,  16, 
and  y  ^,  158,12,  sincefiecause  ;  y  ISo^l  wn^  i(Äa^, (including 
the  terminus  ad  quern),  Ephr.  II.  125,  B  ;  242,  A  ;  ISo'^ 
y  ^öl^somuchthat,'B2LThA9S,2;  >  2>0^  6e/öre,150,l3  ;  ^3) 
in  the  signification  of  that,  y  is  sometimes  omitted  before  the 
future  ;  e.g.  John  xxi.  3.  POJ  jo."!  pf  ^l]  I  go  thati  may 
catch  fish;  after  ,1,  John  v.  7.  \i\  \2^  W  ^  until  that  I 
come  ;  or  it  is  pleonastic  after  J  ;  e.  g.  Matt.  x.  13.  OOT  «I 
|Aa^  |as>  when  the  house  is  v^orthy ;  Mark  viii.  3  ;  Luke 
vi.  7  ;  John  viii.  36 ;  after  ^f.  Matt.  ix.  21 ;  ]]'q!£  Mark 
13,  20  ;  e)  the  copula  o  also  denotes  a)  that^  especially 
after  verbs  of  sending^  entreating,  commanding,  etc  ;  e.  g. 
Assem.  I.  77,  23,  24  ;  Barh.  11,  18  ;  97,  8;  105,  1  ;  152,  5; 
221,2;  it  forms  ß)  the  apodosis ;  e.g.  Barh.  39,  7.8;  and 
is  y)  equivalent  to  but  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  11,  16;  16,  9 ;  (5)  it 
sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  comparative  ^]  ;  e.  g. 
Job  V.  7.     Also  the  Hebrew  üb^i^  is  translated  by  the  fre- 

7  T 

quently  occurring  ^'p-O  yet,  nevertheless. 


INTERJECTIONS.  249 


§86.     Interjections. 


1.  The  Interjection  which  denotes  an  imprecation  or  cry  of 
distress,  is  usually  connected  with  ^  following  ;   e.  g.  Eccl. 

X.  1 6.     « i*^N  «-»0  woe  to  thee  I  ii.  1 B.     ^n*^\  %aO  woe  to  you  ! 

Matt,  xviii.  7;    xxiii.  13-16  ;    xxiv.  19  ;    Ephr.  II.  135,  E. 

IjOOUaj  ]nSv>S  ^o  woe  to  the  king  of  Judahl  274,  D. 
(Al  ^^in*»iASOfS  1^0  woe  to  those  who  meditate  deceit  !  351,  0. 
wkiOQlQ^  ]jO;  or  with  E  appended;  e.g.  V»0  ^ji^woe  to  me! 
Ez.  XXX.  2.  ]SdQjlL  01  o]  woe  for  the  day!  sometimes  with 
^M  ;  e.  g.  Jer.  1.  27.     |Oai  \   \\  «^o  woe  la  you  !    or  ji, 

Amira  p.  449.  |>01  (Ao;^  ^^  OlOf  woe  to  this  generation. 
Without  an  intervening  preposition,  they  are  the  usual  ex- 
pressions of  grief  and  mourning,  and  the  noun  is  then  to  be 

taken  in  the  accusative  ;  e.  g.  Judges  xi.  35.  «^2^2  01  o] 
alas^  my  daughter  !  Eev.xviii.10,16,19. 

Rem. — Sometimes  Of  occurs  as  an  ordinary  exclamation,  with  ^ 
as  a  sign  of  the  accusative  ;  e.  g.  Barh.  333,  3,  4.     As  a  particle  of 

exclamation  sometimes  also  occurs  ^| ,  properly,  verily^  truly ; 
compare  Amira  p.  436. 

2.  Concerning  the  construction  of  particular  interjections, 
the  following  may  be  observed  : 

a)  loi  lo  !  behold,  is  frequently  pleonastic;  e.g.  Ephr.  III. 

149,  B.     la'^in  P2  loi  yZoA^O  001  ^oiJct  IL^  the  mortal 

body  is  thus  dependent  upon  the  soul  ;  or  at  the  beginning  of 
a  period  it  serves  to  give  animation  to  the  discourse  ;  e.  g. 

Ephr. III. 247,0.  ^^>ol  %MA\Si  loi  lo  !  our  brother  (member) 
is  separated ;  in  designations  of  time,  like  the  Greek  rj5r\^  it 

signifies  now,  already ;  e.   g.  Matt.  iii.  10.     ^QukfiD  |..;J   (Ol 

(ij^f)    Ir^^   ^^  the  axe  is  already  laid  at  the  roots  of  the  tree  ; 

Kum.  xxii.  28.     ,^*mi  AjxZ  fOl  already  the  third  time  ;  As- 

sem.  I.  369,  30 ;  with  >  ^  following,  since  that ;    e.g.  Acts 


250        PECULIAEITIES  IN  THE  POSITION  OF  WORDS. 

X.  30.  1j1  ^ft?  ^  1^  since  that  I  have  fasted ;  Col.  i.  4  ; 
preceded  by  |J  (|01  |J  ,  from  which  comes  Q^)  ou^'i  nonnef 
e.g.Matt.v.46.  ^^^  IjOl  *a01  IfOnV)  *2i\  loi  {]  do  not  even  the 
publicans  the  same?  verse  47;  xiii.  27  ; 

h)  ^SQ^far  he  it,  with  ^  of  the  person  and  j  before  the  fu- 
ture  of  the  finite  verb  ;  e.g.  Matt.  xvi.  22.     •^;-So  ^a^  tiXlM 

J  01  ^a^  |OOlZ>  /ar  6e  it  from  thee^  my  lord,  that  this  should  hap- 
pen  to  thee;  Assem  1.  341,  A.  30.  loÜLo  iosiSJj  ^  .£qI* 
far  be  it  from  us  that  we  should  deny  God  ;  375,  13.  Some- 
times the  participle  follows  ;    e.  g.    Assem.  I.  51,  12,  13. 

ij«£^j  ^Jk  «HLm  .I.»*  far  he  it  from  us  that  we  should  deny  ; 
the  verb  follows  in  the  fature,with  ^  preceding  (=tDJÄ  com- 
pare §  85.  4.  c) ;  e.  g.  I  Sam.  xxiv.  7 ;  or  in  the  infinitive 
with  ^ ;  e.  g.  Gen.  xliv.  7 ; 

c)  *AQa4  /ia^7./  (=  TitlJi^)  with  sufiix  plural,  and  the 
noun  following  with  ^,  to  which  the  preceding  sufiix  relates; 
e.g.  Matt.  V.3.  ^^o\Ci  ]inrir>V)\  ^OLuQai  hail  to  the  poor 
in  spirit;  verses  4-11 ;  with  a  word  interposed;  e.g. Assem. 
I.  95,  A.  3,  6,  V.  E.  \si^  ^Qlkl»  ^  ^V  >*^Q^  hail  also  to 
thee,  Simon  Peter  ;  frequently  absolute  without  ^  ;  B.  8.  v. 
E.  ^Qjua»  öy,iOina4  hail  to  thee  0  Sichem  ;  96,  A.  17,  19. 
— The  Hebrew  jj^^  is,  in  the  Peshito,  expressed  by  ]-j  ;  e.  g. 
I  Kings  xxii.  12. 

APPENDIX. 

Peculiarities  in  the  Position  of  Words. 

In  the  position  of  words,  which,  as  in  the  Hebrew,  is  very- 
easy  and  natural,  besides  the  peculiarities  referred  to  in  the 
preceding  chapters,  the  following  deviations  from  the  usual 
collocations, occur  ;  a)the  verbs  looi  and  '^\  are  interposed 


PECULIAEITIES  IN  THE  POSITION  OF  WOKDS.         25l 

between  words, wliich,according  to  their  grammatical  connec- 
tion,  cannot  be  separated ;  e.  g.   Exod.  vii.  7.     'r-d  \mq^IsD 

'^^  1 001  ^jlILdL  Moses  was  eighty  years  old ;  Luke  v.  3  ; 
Exod.v.l6.  Q^y\  ^  ^r^\  (1*^No  and  hricJcs^say  they  to  u-s^make 
ye.  The  same  is  true  ;  h)  of  personal  pronouns,  having  the 
signification  of  |00l ;  e.g. John  viii.83.^0l;rD(j  -JLm  OUjI  we 
are  Abraham's  seed  ;  verse   37  ;  Heb.  vii.  28.     |^i  »1*^^    fCDOSoi 

fSaOOO  ^  iOV)  1 01-1  ^  001  2*^  is  the  law  which  makes  priests  of 
feeble  men  ;  c)  more  rarely  the  same  occurs  with  the  noun  ; 
e.  g.  Matt.  xvi.  1.  ^cul"  ]q*jJ>  ]ISüs  ^  l2V  OlS  ^JLL]«  they 
besought  him  that  he  ivould give  them  a  sign  from  heaven  ;  d) 
more  frequently  it  occurs  with  particles  ;  e.  g.  Mark  i.  45. 
lAl^rSü^  ^QUj  AaV>-^ii  he  shoidd  go  openly  into  the  city, 
CJompare  loi  and  loi  J]    (§  86.  2.  a). 


EXERCISES 


IN 


SYRIAC    GRAMMAE, 


AND 


A    CHRESTOMATHY, 


rREPAKED  WITH  RSFEEENCE  TO 


THE      TRANSLATION      OP 


UHLEMANN'S   SYRIAC    GRAMMAR, 


BY  ENOCH  HUTCHINSON. 


NEW  YORK: 

1855. 


Entered  accordin«;  to  Act  of  Congr.  ss.  in  the  year  1855, 

By  E.   HUTCHINSON 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Sonthe  n  District 

of  New  York. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS, 


The  following  Exercises  are  designed  for  beginners,  who 
need  something  simple,  and  at  the  same  time,  something 
which  will  lead  them  into  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
grammar. 

A  small  portion  of  Syriac,  perhaps  a  page,  should  be  se- 
lected and  carefully  analyzed  in  reference  to  all  the  import- 
ant phenomena  of  the  language.  Every  peculiarity  in  res- 
pect to  each  word  should  be  critically  examined.  Perhaps 
the  best  course  would  be  to  trace  one  peculiarity  throughout 
the  page,  searching  the  grammar  and  other  helps ;  then 
trace  another,  and  so  on,  until  every  peculiarity  shall  have 
been  examined.  Thus  the  most  important  facts  will  be 
strongly  impressed  upon  the  memory. 

The  great  difficulty,  especially  with  beginners,  is.  that 
they  often  attempt  to  investigate  too  many  subjects  at  once 
and  thus  do  not  obtain  clear  ideas  of  any.  There  is  fre- 
quently a  great  inclination  to  press  forward  and  translate 
rapidly.  Hence,  many  important  subjects  of  investigation 
are  entirely  neglected,  Superficial  scholarship,  is  the  un- 
avoidable result  of  such  a  course. 

That  nothing  may  escape  observation,  a  few  general  di- 
rections are  presented  to  aid  the  learner  in  making  his 
analysis.  In  mentioning  those  points,  which  are  to  be  ex- 
amined, the  exact  order  in  which  they  occur  in  the  gram- 


251  INTRODUCTORY     REMARKS. 

mar,  has  not  been  followed,  but  they  have  been  so  arranged, 
it  is  hoped,  as  best  to  facilitate  the  progress  of  the  student ; 
and  they  are  intended  to  embrace  the  most  important  phen- 
nomena  necessary  to  be  attended  to  by  the  learner. 

Before  commencing  the  examination  the  pupil  should  be 
directed  to  the  Introduction  of  the  grammar,  that  he  may 
become  somewhat  acquainted  with  the  history  and  literature 
of  the  Syriac  Language.  The  grammar  should  be  studied 
rather  as  a  book  of  reference  than  as  one,  which  must  be 
committed  to  memory.  The  student,  at  first,  should  consult 
it  as  an  aid  in  analyzing.  At  the  commencement  of  the  an- 
alysis, he  will  feel  the  need  of  assistance,  and  that  assistance 
he  must  find  in  the  grammar.  When  he  there  discovers  a 
principle  of  the  language  and  perceives  its  application  in 
parsing,  he  can  easily  retain  it  in  his  memory.  By  the 
time  that  he  has  carefully  studied  the  Exercises  and  Chres- 
tomathy  through,  he  will  not  only  have  a  considerable 
knowledge  of  the  language  ;  but  will  have  most  of  the  gram- 
mar committed  to  memjory^  with  but  very  little  effort,  and 
no  loss  of  time  in  learning  rules  and  principles,  whose  ap- 
plication he  does  not  perceive,  and  which  consequently  are 
apt  to  escape  from  the  mind.  After  the  pupil,  in  the  course 
of  his  analysis,  shall  have  become  somewhat  familiar  with 
the  grammar,  he  may  recite  it  regularly  through,  and  it  will 
not  be  an  unmeaning  nor  an  uninteresting  exercise. 

The  general  divisions,  in  the  Exercises,  are  marked  by 
the  character  ^f,  to  distinguish  them  from  similar  divisions 
in  the  grammar  marked  §.  Smaller  divisions  are  inserted 
linder  Kemarks  and  Explanations. 


2.F5 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  ANALYZING. 


I.  Find  the  Guttural  Ldters  on  page  first  of  the  Chrestomathy. 
Vid.  Gram.  §  1.  Rem.  3,  4.   Ftf  J'  %B^ 
II.      "      "  Aspirates,  or  on  what  letters  Kushoi  and  Rukok 

are  found.     Vid.  Gram.  §  1.  Rem.  4  ;  §  5.  ?*^2^ö 

III.  "      "  Diacritical  Points,  for  which  the  vowels  are  de- 

signed to  compensate,  formerly  used  instead  of 
vowels  and  for  other  purposes.     Vid.  §§2,3,4,     , 
and  Rem.  f^^  ^  ^^ 

IV.  "      "  Lmg  and  Short  Vowels.     Vid.  §  3.  Rem.  3.  F  -  ^^  ^ 
V.      "      "   Simple  QXidi  Mixed  ?,y\\Bh\(iS.       T.   li^ 

VI.      "      "  Pure  and  Impure,  Mutable  and  Immutable  vowels, 
Vid.  §45.  A;    §48.  A.       ?.    0,^ 
VII.       "      "  Dipthongs,  Quiescent  and  Otiant  letters.     Vid.  §  3. 

Rem.  4;  §  13  ;  §  14.       ? .     Tf2 
VIII.      "      "  Liime  Marhetono,  Mehagyono  and  Sheva.   j-   2J'4 
IX.      "      "  Linea  Occultans.     Vid.  §  8.        P.     TlJ 
X.  Find  on  what  syllables  the  Tmie  is  to  be  found.     Vid.  §  9.1^  ^7^ 
XL  Examine  the  Mar^5  of  P?*wc/?/^^i6m.     Vid.  §  10.      y.    %^Q 
XII.  Find  Ribui.     Vid.  §  6.        5!    2  ?Ö 

XIII.  Read  the  Syriac.        f  .  1%0 

XIV.  Translate.       f^   2?^5 

XV.  Examine  the  Changes  of  Consonants — assimilated — trans- 
posed— dropped — added  and  exchanged.  Vid. 
§12.       9ö^^^%^ 


256  GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  ANALYZING. 

XVI.  Find  the  Changes  of  Vowds — thrown  back — exchanged — 

transposed — dropped  and  added.     Yid.  §  15.  fa^  2oi 
XYII.  Find  the  Suffixes  and  Prefixes,  Sufformatives  and  JPrefor 

matives.    Yid.  §  16  ;  §  36  ;  §  46.    f^>^  ^^^ 
XYIII.  Parse.    In  respect  to  Verbs — ascertain  whether  they  are  ^^^ 

Simple  or  Compound — Their  Conjugation —  Voice — Ilegvr    .... 

lar  or  Irregular — Active,  Passive  or  Neuter — Number — 

Person — Gender — Mood — Tense — Conjugate  and  Influt 

them  to  the  Case,  Mood,  Tense,  etc.,  where  they  are 

found— i??^.     Yid.  §  19.,  etc.;  §  59.,  etc. 
Nouns  • —  Signification  —  Suffi,x  or  Prefix  —  Adjective  or 

Substantive — Derivation   and   Formation — Declension — 

Person — Number —  Gender —  State —  Case .    Yid .     §43; 

§70;  §  44;  §  n;§  45;  §  t3  ;  §U;   §46;  §47; 

§48;  §50;  §77.,  etc. 
Pronouns — What  kind — Person — Number — Gen  der — 

Case— Suffix— Rule.    Yid.  §  16  ;  §  17  ;  §  54.,  etc. 
Participles — Derivation — Active  or  Passive — Conjugation 

—Rule. 
Adverbs — Primitive  or  Derivative — ^What  they  qualify.  Yid. 

§  51  ;  §  82. 
Numerals — Cardinal   or   Ordinal — Gender — Decline — To 

what  they  belong. 
Prepositions — Suffixes — ^What  they  govern.  Yid  §  52;  §  84. 
Conjunctions — ^What  kind — Suffix  or  Prefix — What  they 

connect.     Yid.  §  53.  1,  2  ;  §  85. 
Inter jedions — ^Primitive  or  Derivative.    Yid.  §  53. 3;  §  86. 


257 


EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR 


I,  EXERCISE  FIRST. 


ViD.  Gram.  §  1.  Kem.  3,  i. 
IT  1. 

Find  the  Chitturals  mi  the  first  jpage  of  the  Chrestomathy.  t^H-^L.  J*-^  5 

1.   Select  all  those  letters  which  are  ever  used  as 
Gutturals;  thus: 

loioi]loillcncnlloilloi]]oioiloi]oi 
lloioil    loi"|loioilioill**loicnoi]oija 

loi]cnij^oill1  oiloiioi1oil<ji]oioilcjil 

HoiigiIIctioiIoiIIgiIIiIiIoiIlHoi 
01 1 1  H  ^  01* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  The  above  are  all  guttural  letters,  but  not  all  used  as  such 
ia  the  text  from  which  they  are  taken, 

b)  The  guttural  1  resembles  the  Spiritus  lenis  of  the  Greeks, 


258  EXERCISES  IN  STRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

being  a  scarcely  audible  breathing  from  the  lungs.  1  has  always 
a  feeble  sound.  The  Galileans  pronounced  i  and  «m  like  1Ä  of 
the  Hebrews.  An  Arabian  would  pronounce  ^  as  a  sort  of  vowel 
sound  like  a.  It  is  a  kind  of  soft  breathing  (comp.  Gesenius' 
Hebrew  Grammar,  by  Conant,  §  6).  The  Greeks  express  •>* 
as  well  as  ^,  sometimes  by  Spiritus  asper,  and  sometimes  by 
7.  usually  %j^  is  sounded  like  hh  with  a  rolling  of  the  palate. 
01  before  a  vowel  is  our  h  (Spiritus  asper);  but  when  uttered  after 
a  vowel,  it  has  nearly  the  sound  of  h  in  Korahy  perhaps  a  little 
softer,  as  in  ah !  oh !  It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  exactly  the 
sounds  of  these  letters ;  still  it  is  important  that  the  learner  should 
fix  upon  a  definite  pronunciation  of  each. 

2.  Find  those  letters  which  are  here  used  as  gutturals. 

011jg»01Cn0101G10l01G101010101  01* 

EXPLANATIONS.  l>^.f-^    5/5 

a)  Verse  3.  word  3.,  (31  is  a  guttural,  as  it  would  in  Hebrew 
take  a  composite  sheva,  and  it  has  no  vowel  of  its  own.  (Some 
would  perhaps  prefer  to  call  Ol  a  regular  movable  consonant,  and 
consider  I  at  the  end  of  the  word  as  otiant,  and  O  as  quiescing 

b)  Verse  3.  word  4.,  1  is  a  guttural  for  the  same  reasons. 

c)  Verse  3.  word  6.,  **  is  a  guttural  for  the  same  reasons. 

d)  Verse  4.  word  6.,  01  is  a  guttural  being  movable.  It  be- 
longs  to  the  second  syllable  of  the  word,  being  preceded  by  a 
vowel  (§  15.  4.  d).     The  other  cases  maybe  similarly  explained. 

Rem.-— It  should  be  remarked  that  there  are  some  other  guttural 
letters  on  the  first  page  of  the  chrestomathy,  which  should  be  con- 


EXELRCISE   FIRST — GUTTURAL   LETTERS.  259 

sidered  merely  as  movable  consonants.  It  is  true  that  all  gutturals 
are  sounded,  and  might  be  said  to  be  movable  consonants  (com- 
pare Gesen.  Heb.  Gram.,  transl.  by  Conant,  §23.2).  Still  we  prefer 
to  make  a  difference  between  gutturals  and  regular  movable  con- 
sonants. The  latter,  though  guttural  letters  on  page  first,  are  the 
following  : 

3.  Find  those  guttural  letters  wliicli  are  regular 
movable  consonants  : 

]cn11oioi1oioilloioiloioiA*A*'|oi 

OlM.CnAj1oi|onL01j^Ol|GllOlG101|Gl 

EXPLANATIONS.  iT^f-    B/5 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  ]  is  a  regular  movable  consonant,  and 
is  sounded  nearly  like  the  vowel  — ,  and  does  not  quiesce 
in  its  vowel.  In  dialects  kindred  to  the  Hebrew,  ]  melts  in- 
to the  vowel  far  more  readily  than  the  sound  of  the  Hebrew 
i^  melts  into  its  vowel.  Still  ]  retains  its  power  as  a  movable 
consonant.  It  is  very  common  in  Syriac  for  a  guttural  let- 
ter to  take  a  long  vowel,  where  in  Hebrew,  it  would  have  a 
composite  Sheva.  This  seldom  occurs  in  Hebrew  (vid.Ges- 
enius'  Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant.  §  23.  2.  Bern.  2). 

b)  V.  1.  w.  5.,  01  is  movable,  as  it  does  not  quiesce  and 
is  not  otiant. 

c)  Y.  1.  w.  8.,  o  (not  a  guttural)  is  movable,  as  the  pre- 
ceding letter  is  not  sounded,  and  the  foUovang  one  is 
quiescent. 

d)  Y.  1.  w.lO.,  1  should  be  considered  as  movable  though 
its  sound  so  melts  into  the  vowel,  we  can  scarcely  perceive 
that  it  has  the  power  of  a  consonant. 


260  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

e)  y.  1.  w.  11.,  1  is  not  movable,  as  it  quiesces,  though 
seldom,  in  —  (§  13.  1.  Eem). 

/)  y.  1.  w.  11.,  Ol  is  movable  for  the  same  reasons  as 
others  above.  —  preceding  it,  belongs  to  the  previous  sylla- 
ble (comp,  t  5.  1.  f;  §  15.  4.  d). 

g)  y.  3.  w.  2.,  01  is  movable  as  it  is  a  suffix,  and  =  j:;  of 
the  Hebrew  (§  13.  Eem.). 

h)  y.  9.  w.  9.,  1  is  movable  as  it  has  a  vowel  of  its  own, 
though  it  so  flows  into  the  sound  of  the  vowel  that  it  is 
scarcely  perceptible  (Tf  1.  1.  b). 

Rem. — It  should  be  remarked  that  two  of  the  guttural  letters  | 
and  01  are  sometimes  used  as  quiescents  and  sometimes  as  otiant 
letters  (§  12.  A.  B.  and  Rem.;  §  13;  §14). 


IT.  EXERCISE    SECOND. 

Find  the  Aspirates  or  in  what  letters  Kushoi  (^aaOO  a  hard- 
ening^  and  Ruhok  {yDOj)  a  softening  are  found. 

1.  Those  which  are  ever  aspirated  (§  1.  Rem.  3). 

•        •        •       • 

2.  Find  those,  which  are  aspirated  on  page  first 
(§5.  and  Rem.  by  Tr.). 

AAAAA2AAAqAZ,.q   r  Si  r  L  rLy  a  dD 

•  ■  •  •  * 


EXERCISE   SECOND — ASPIRATES.  261 

EXPLANATIONS,  f^f^  ^'^ 

a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  A  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  the  syllable 
(§5.  2.  Rem.  c.  a), 

b)  V.l.  W.2.,  A  is  aspii*ated  as  it  follows  an  open  or  sim- 
ple syllable  (§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c.,  and  §  15.  4.  d). 

c)  V.  1 .  W.4.,  A  is  aspirated,  because  a  letter,  which  would 
in  Hebrew,  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  precedes  it  (§  5.  2.  Rem. 
c.  b). 

d)  V.  2.  w.  4.,  Ö  is  aspirated  as  the  preceding  word  ends 
with  1  (§5.  2.  Rem.«). 

e)  V.3.  W.2.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  syllable 
(§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

/)  V.3.  W.4.,  Q  is  aspirated  because  it  follows  a  letter 
which  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  (§  5.  2.  Rem. 
c.b). 

g)  V.3.  W.4.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  is  preceded  by  a  letter 
which  would  in  Ilebrew  take  a  composite  Sheva  and  would 
of  course  be  vocal  (§5.  2.  Rem.  c.  b). 

h)  V.3.  W.5.,  2)  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  syllable 
(§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

i)  V.4.  W.7.,  ?  is  aspirated  as  the  preceding  word  ends 
in  ]  (§5.  2.  Rem.  a). 

k)  V.4.  W.7.,  Q  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  a  syllable  (§  5.  2. 
Rem.  c.  a). 

I)  V.7.  W.4.,  J  is  aspirated  as  it  closes  a  syllable  (§  5.  2. 
Rem.  c.  a). 

m  )  V.lO.  w.  4.,  r  is  aspirated  as  it  follows  an  open  sylla- 
ble (§  5.  2.  Rem.  c.  c). 

3.     Find  those   which   are   not  aspirated' 

EXPLANATIONS.      *^-  ^-«^3/3 
a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  o  is  not  aspirated  as  it  begins  a 
word  (§5.  2.  Rem.  a). 


262  EXERCISES  IN-  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR 

h)  Y.4.  W.I.,  Ö  is  not  aspirated  though  it  is  preceded  hj) 
(^5.  2.  Kem.fl),  because  it  begins  a  verse. 

c)  Y.ß  W.8.,  A  is  not  aspirated  as  it  is  preceded  by  a  let- 
ter, which,  in  Hebrew,  would  not  take  a  vocal  Sheva,  and 
which  has  no  vowel  (§  5.2.  Note  by  Tr.). 

d)  For  the  pronunciation  of  these  aspirates  see  the  Alph- 
abet, and  §  1.  Rem.  3,  4. 

Rem. — a  when  aspirated  is  sounded  like  v,  and  when  not  aspira- 
ted like  ^  ;  r  ^^^^  ^^  ^^  '^'^^  when  aspirated,  but  otherwise  hke  d  ; 
£)  when  aspirated  is  sounded  like  ph  or  /,  and  otherwise  like  p  ; 
L  when  aspirated  like  th  in  thin,  in  other  situations  like  t; 
.•  is   sounded  like   r/   hard   whether  it  be    aspirated    or   not  *  ; 

a  when  aspirated  is  sounded  like  hh  or  k  with  a  rolling  of  the 
palate ;  in  other  situations  like  k.  In  general  the  aspirates  are 
pronounced  like  the  corresponding  letters  in  Hebrew  (vid.  referenc- 
es above  and  Gesenius'  Hebrew  Grammar  by  Conant,  §  6.  2.  3.  and 
Kote  by  Tr.). 


nr.  EXERCISE    THIRD. 

1    3. 

(  §  2  ;  §  3  ;  §  4  and  Rem). 

Find  the  diacritical  points  for  which  the  vowels 
are  designed  to  compensate,  formerly  nsed  instead  of 
vowels  and  for  other  purposes  :  • 

VAI  ooio  VaI  001  VaI  •^IL  looi  *2ooi  looiJ  IcSoi  ooio 
looi  12]  J^  001  locn  1 2l|  looi  J{^  looi« 

*  The  aspiration  of  »t  would  be  indicated  by  the  rolling  of  the 
palate.  ^ 


EXERCISE  THIRD — DIACRITICAL  POINTS.  263 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem.  1. — Diacritical  points  sometimes  mark  particular  tenses  and 
persons  of  verbs  (§  4.  Rem.). 

Rem.  2. — The  vowel  system  of  the  Syrians  began  to  be  introduced 
in  the  time  of  Mohammed.  Then  and  even  after  the  system  was 
completed  by  introrlucing  cliaracters  from  the  Greek  vowels,  the 
ancient  diacritical  points  were  used  to  some  extent  by  many  writers. 
They  are  now  seen  in  the  more  ancient  writings. 

Rem.  3. — The  diacritical  points  here  presented  and  others,  appear 
in  ancient  Syriac  writings,  perhaps  from  the  fact  that  they  have 
been  copied  from  more  ancient  editions,  and  in  some  cases  doubt- 
less, directly  from  the  oldest  editions  of  the  Peshito.  The  several 
editions  have  been  copied  with  so  much  care,  that  even  after  the 
vowel  system  came  into  use,  the  diacritical  points,  which  had  been 
used  long  before,  were  copied  as  well  as  the  more  recent  vowels. 
Thus  appear  sometimes  two  characters  to  represent  one  vowel  sound. 
As  later  editions  have  appeared,  however,  those  points  have  gradu- 
ally been  omitted  and  vowels  substituted,  though,  some  remnants  of 
the  old  system  are  still  left  (§2;  §3;  §4). 

^'«5       a)  Verse  1.  word  -4,,    lA^»  The  diacritical  point  under  \ 

^according  to  the  principles  laid  down  byLudov.  deDieii)indi- 

cates  the  vowel  — ♦     We  have  then  here  the  vowel  and  the 

ancient  diacritical  point  for  which   the  vowel   compensates 

(§4.  Rem.). 

b)  V.l.  w.  5.,  0010«  The  point  under  Ol,  according  to 
Amira,  indicates  —  (§4.Rem.). 

c)  V.3.  w.  2.,  wi^O»  The  point  under  «a  indicates,  ac- 
cording  to  Ludov.  de  Dieu,  the  vowel  —  (§4.  Rem.). 

d)  V.3.  w.  3.,    looi»     Diacritical  points  are  often  placed 

under  and  over  the  radical  letters  of  verbs, sometimes  to  dis- 
tinguish particular  persons  and  sometimes  to  indicate  vowels 
(vid.  T"  3.  Rem.  1).     In  the  imperative  and  infinitive  it  may- 
be wholly  omitted  or  inserted  underneath  (vid.  §4:.Rem.;  al- 
so compare  Hoffmann's  Syriac  Gram.  §  14). 


264  EXERCISES   IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

X\r.  EXEKCISE    FOURTH. 

1    4 

Find  the  Long  and  Short  vovjels  (§  8.  Rem,  8). 
I.     Find  tlie  Long  ones  : 


z 

a: 

I 







4« 

1» 







9 

0 

9 





P 

I        0 

K 

■» 

r 

P 

X 

I 

f 

I 

•n 

0 

9 

0 

9        > 

« 

ft 

0 

* 

- 

*>. 

9 

» 

«. 

- 

«V 

>        ^ 

•k 

0 

p 

^ 

* 

^ 

9 

JL 

« 

«^ 

» 

± 

f> 

9           t 

>          K 

» 

i> 

*. 

T. 

« 

*. 

«^ 

P 

1» 

K 

9 

r        9 

* 

^ 

0 

■»> 

9 

» 

9 

9 

9 

•»> 

9 

f         9 

EXPLANATIONS. 

fs^  3/5        a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  _i  _JL  are  both  long  as  they  are  fol- 
lowed by  ^  quiescent  (§  3.  Rem.  3.  b). 

b)  Y.l.  W.5.,  ^  is  long  because  o  quiesces  in  it. 

c)  Y.  1.  w.  11.,   _L  is  long  as  it  has  a  quiescent  (§13.  1. 
Rem.). 

The  other  instances  need  no  explanation. 


2.    Find  the   Short  vowels   : 

r     f  '  7  *-  7  7         7         7  7  7  7  *.  7 


EXERCISE  FIFTH — SIMPLE  SYLLABLES.  265 

EXPLANATIONS. 

^313      a)  Verse  1.   word  2.,  _L  is  short  as  it  is  a  regular  short 
vowel. 

t)  V.  1.  w.  10.,  JL  is  short  as  Olaph  is  movable,  not 
quiescing. 

c)  V.  3.  w.  1.,  JL  is  short  as  it  has  not  O  quiescing  in  it 
(§3.  Rem.3). 

7 

Rem. — In  v.l.  w.2.,  .—  and  several  other  short  vowels  on  page 
first,  form  dipthongs  with  O  and  «ji*  These  quiescent  letters  do  not 
fully  coalesce  with  their  respective  vowels  ;  but  melt  into  them  to 
a  greater  extent  than  they  would  do  in  Hebrew,  under  similar  cir- 
cumstances. They  can  scarcely,  therefore,  be  considered  as  mov- 
able consonants,  as  they  would  be  in  Hebrew.  Still  the  vowels  in 
these  cases  are  heterogeneous  and  the  quiescents  do  not  suflSciently 
coalesce,  in  our  estimation,  to  make  the  vowels  long  (vid.  Gesen. 
Heb.  Grani.  by  Conant,  §  8.  4 ;  Uhlemann  §  l.Rem.4). 


V:  EXERCISE     FIFTH. 

1    5. 

Find  the  Simple  and  Mixed  Sylldbles  (§15.  3  and  4). 
I.     Find   the  Simple  Syllables  : 

^•b  *^f  oA  Vooi  i  Ta^  ooio  i  VA^  ^T  o^  Iboi  f  'li  loi 
1o  1!^  loi  J^  o\  looi  001  So  lAL  oi  ]j  J(o\  looi  ^>o  I 

'^  loi  li  loCT  ^O  ^  Or  VW^)  Ijl*  LO  IC)  ZXl,  ]boi  A^oll 
^1    ^L    OJ  1)01  ^jj.  Jl  l«  0010  OJ  1)01  mO  QA  P  mO  o» 


266  EXERCISES   IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem.— A  simple  syllable  terminates  in  a  vowel  sound,  and  that 
vowel  sometimes  has  a  vowel  letter  quiescing  in  it.  A  mixed  syll- 
able terminates  in  one  or  more  movable  consonants.  Every  vowel 
stands  in  a  simple  syllable  when  the  following  consonant  takes  a 
vowel. 

z 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  %*;jD  is  a  simple  syllable  as  it  ends  in  a 
vowel  sound,  although  it  has  a  quiescent  ;  m.  has  a  vowel  of 
its  own  and  is  of  course  sounded  with  the  following  syllable 
(vid.  t  5.  1.  Eem.,  and  §  15.  4.  d). 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  ^\  is  simple  for  the  same  reason  as  last, 
the  syllable  ending  with  «a  and  not  with  A  (vid.  §15. 4.d). 

c)  Y.l.  W.2.,  oA  is  a  dip  thong  and  should  be  considered, 
we  think,  as  a  simple  syllable  because  o  coalesces  in  the 
vowel  to  such  an  extent  that  the  syllable  ends  in  a  vowel 
sound,  though  the  coalescence  is  not  so  perfect  as  in  a  regu- 
lar case  of  quiescence.  Some  may  regard  O  as  a  movable 
consonant  as  it  would  be  in  Hebrew,  under  similar  circum- 
stances, but  we  incline  to  the  former  opinion  (vid.  •J'4.  2. 
Rem. ;  Ges^.n.  Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,  §  8.4). 

d)  Y.l.  W.4.,  So  is  simple  (vid.  reference  above). 

e)  Y.l.w,4.,  lA^  is  simple,  1  quiescing  in  — • 

/)  Y.l.  W.5.,  0010  is  simple,  the  last  O  quiescing. 

g)  Y.l.  w.lO.,  1  is  simple  as  !L  which  follows  Olaph  has 
a  vowel  of  its  own. 

h)  Y.l.  W.U.,  lo  is  simple,  Olaph  quiescing  in  — ,  though 
it  seldom  quiesces  in  that  vowel  (vid  §13.1  Rem.  ;  compare 
1  1.  3.  e).  _ 

i)  Y.  3.  W.2.,  la  is  simple,  1  quiescing  in  —  and  «ii  being 
otiant. 


EXERCISE  FIFTH — MIXED  SYLLABLES.  267 

h)  V.3.  W.5.,  ]  is  simple  as  —  is  a  long  vowel  and  2)  be- 
longs to  the  next  syllable  (§15. 4.  d). 

T)  Y.4.  W.5.,  «aA  is  a  dipthong  and  ends  in  a  vowel  sound 
as  %j  melts  into  the  vowel  to  such  an  extent  that  it  can  hard- 
ly be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant  as  it  would  be  in 
Hebrew.     We  choose  then   to  place   the  syllable  among 

simple  ones  ;  «-iJi  in  verse  4.  word  7.,    and   wiOl  in  verse  7. 
word  8,  are  similar  instances  (vid.T"4.2.Eem. ;  T^ö.l.c). 

*■  .  .      *^  .       . 

m)  V.4.  W.6.,  QJ  is  simple  as  O  quiesces  in  —  making  it 

a  long  vowel,  and  01  belongs  to  the  next  syllable  (§l5.4.d). 

?i)  V.7.  W.3.,  £Q^  is  simple  as  01  belongs  to  the  penult 
svllable  and  follows  a  long  vowel  (§15.4.  d.  ;  compare  %  1. 
2.  d). 


2.    Find  the  Mixed  Syllables  : 
LJm.  ZqI  Luk  Zq^  ^      oi"r»     'Zooi      }>o^  01>  Ol-£ 

.001    dJ  Ik)   JOl    >|    Ol Q    'rO   >>   ^  OlSü*   ^  EQ-JJ 

joi    \yA   lo    wAi  ^^  oiy  £Q-J?    joi    \y^   Ja-y.   ^>   J-SDJ 

,        7  •         -Xt  a  t\  7  IS 

901     ^OJ^     «A-1     Olr   r*^    Olu.1      ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  A^*  is  mixed  as  it  ends  with  a  con- 
sonant sound  (vid.  T  5.1.  Rem.). 

b)  Y.l.  w.  9.,  Zq^  is  mixed,  ending  in  a  consonant  sound 
(vid.  1"  5.  l.Rem.). 

c)  Y.3.  W.2.,  Olr  is  mixed  as  01  -=  ;p^  in  Hebrew  and  is  of 
course  movable  (§  13.  Rem.). 

d)  Y.7.  W.7.,  ^>  is  mixed  as  —  is  short  when  o  does 
not  quiesce  in  it,  and  the  following  consonant  has  no  vowel 
(vid.  §I5.4,and§3.Rem.3). 


268  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 


Vr.  EXEECISE    SIXTH. 

1"    6. 

Find  the    Pure,   Impure,    Mutable    and  Immutable    vowels 
(§45.^;    §48.  A). 

1.     Find  tlie   Pure  vowels  : 


EXPLANATIONS. 

Rem.  a  pure  vowel,  is  one  with  which  no  consonant  colesces. 
An  impure  vowel  is  one  with  which  a  consonant  coalesces. 

r#^  3/5  a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  —  is  pure*  as  the  syllable   oA  is  a 

dipthong  (vid.  g  3.  Rem.  4 :  also  Palfrey's  Gram.  §  2),  and  O 
does  not  fully  quiesce  in  _!_,  though  it  so  far  coalesces  that 
it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant.  Still 
as  the  vowel  is  a  heterogeneous  one  and  O  does  not  fully 
coalesce  in  it,  we  scarcely  feel  authorized  to  place  the  vowel 
among  the  impure  ones,  though  some  may  prefer  to  do  so, 
(vid.  Tf  4.  2.  Rem. ;  T"5. 1.  c.  and  1  ;  Gesenius'  Heb.  Gram- 
mar by  Conant,  §  8.4  ;  compare  §15.  4.  d;  also  T  6.2.  Rem., 
andT  6.1. Rem.). 

0 

h)  y.l.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  as  o  does  not  quiesce  in  it,  being 
a  movable  consonant  and  -^  preceding  being  pronounced 
with  a  vocal  sheva. 

*  It  is  also      mutable  (  ^  6.  4.  b  ). 


EXERCISE   SIXTH — IMPURE  VOWELS.  269 

7 

c)  v.l.  w.  10.,  —  is  pure  as  Olapli  does  not  quiesce  in 
that  vowel.  Olaph  is  here  a  movable  consonant  according 
to  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew  (vid.§l.  Rem.4.;also  Gesenius' 
Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant,  §23.2). 

d)  Y.3.  W.5.,  —  (the  first  one)  is  pure  f  as  f  being  a 
movable  consonant  does  not  quiesce  in  _L  (vid.  last  referen- 
ces). 

e)  Y.3.  W.7.,  —  is  pure  as  O  is  movable,  cri  being  souud- 
ed  as  if  it  had  Sheva,  and  forming  a  part  of  the  syllable. 

f)  Y.3.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  and  immutable  as  01  does  not 
quiesce  in  it,  being  a  guttural   (comp.  Tf  I.  2.  a). 

g)  V.4.  W.5.,  —  is  pure  as  ^A  is  a  dipthong  (vid.  a 
above). 

h)  Y.7.  W.3.,  —  is  pure  as  Ol  is  a  guttural. 

i)  Y.7.  W.9.,  —  is  pure  as  CTl  is  =  ^  in  Hebrew  and  is  of 
course  a  movable  consonant  (vid.  §13.  Rem.  JL  is  also  mu- 
table according  to  the  general  rule  (^[6.  2.  Rem.). 


2.    Find  the  Impure  vou^els  : 


O'KOQ^OIO'h'y.p  DTi  00  00010 


EXPLANATIONS. 

Zih         a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  —  and  —  are  both  impure  vowels 
as  they  have  %a  quiescing  in  them. 

f  _«_  is  also  immutable  (  ^  6.  4  ). 


270  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

h)  Y.l.  W.3.,  —  is  impure  as  1  qniesces  in  it  (compare  T 
6.  1.  e). 

c)  Y.l.  W.U.,  ■ —  is  impure  asOlapli  quiesces  m  it,  thougli 
it  does  not  often  quiesce  in  that  vowel  (  §  13.  1  and  Eem.). 
The  other  cases  are  similarly  explained. 

Rem.^ — As  a  general  thing,  those  vowels,  which  are  pure  are  mut- 
able and  those  which  are  impure  are  immutable  ;  hut  there  are  as 
in  Hebrew  many  exceptions  (vid.  ^  6. 1.  a.  b.  c.  d.  e.  f.  g.  h.  i). 


3.     Find   the   Mutable  vowels  (compare  %  6.  2 
Rem.)  : 


EXPLANATIONS. 
/ 
^  ^^  a)  Yerse  1.  word  10.,  — ■  is  mutable  (also  pure,  according 

to  the  general  rule  (vid.  T  6. 1.  c  )  as  it  is  in  a  simple  sylla- 
ble (compare  T  6.  4.  d). 

b)  Y.3.  W.2.,  —  is  mutable  as  it  has  no  quiescent  and  is 
long. 

7 

c)  Y.4.  W.2.,  • —  is  mutable   as  it  is  in  a  simple  sylla- 
ble. 


4.     Find  tbe  Immutable  vowels 


*.         p        '■\         S        I         y         t)^         9  i>0779^0i0i>*.'>7 


EXERCISE  SEVENTH — ^DIPTHONGS.  271 


EXPL  A.N  ATIONS. 

Rem. — Those  vowels  are  iramutable,as  in  Hebrew ;  in  which  either 
a  vowel  letter  quieeces;  or  from  which  a  vowel  letter  has  fallen  away; 
short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables  which  would  inHebrew  takeDaghesh 
forte;  and  vowels  immutable  by  nature. 

X  X 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1., are  botli  immutable  as  well  as 

impure,  having  quiescents. 

b)  V.l.  W.2.,  —  is  in  a  simple  syllable,  is  pure,  and  cannot 
properly  be  considered  as  immutable  though  O  coalesces 
with  it  to  some  extent  (vid.  T4.2.Rem. ;  T5.1.C;  T6.1.a). 

c)  Y.I.W.4.,   —  over  So   is   immutable  by  position   as 

VA^  is  derived   from  ^Siio   a     Ml  verb,  and  the  1  is  in 

reality  doubled  and  the  first  would,  if  expressed,  take  Linea 
occultans.  This  is  similar  to  Daghesh  forte  in  Hebrew,  and 
makes,  as  in  that  language,  the  preceding  vowel  impure  and 
immutable  (compare  §48.B.Feminines). 

d)  V.l.  w.lO.,  —  is  short  but  in  a  simple  syllable  (  T5. 

1 .  g)  and  consequently  not  immutable. 

e)  V.l.  w.lO.,  —  (the  first  one)  is  immutable  by  nature 
(48.  A.  Masculines) ;  it  is  sometimes,  however,  like  all  the 
other  vowels,  mutable  (vid.§  15.1.b ;  §  45.2.b)  as  in  Ilebrew 
(vid.  Stuarts'  Heb.  Gram.  §127). 

/)  V.l.  w.ll,  —  is  immutable  as  1  quiescesin  it   (  T  6. 

2.  c). 

g)  V.o.  W.I.,  —  is  immutable  as  it  is  in  a  short  mixed 
syllable. 


272  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAO  GRAMMAR. 


EXEEOISE    SEVENTH. 

t    7. 

Find  the  Dipihongs.  Quiescents  and  Otiant  Letlers  {%^.RemA  ; 
§13;   §14). 

I.  Find  the  Dipthongs  (§  3.  Eem.  4  ;  Palfrey's 
Gram.  §  2)  : 

O— .    O.—    O O O a Jk —    A 0_     ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  o is  a  dipthong  as  o  is  in  tlie  same 

syllable  with  _l  without  fully  quiescing  in  it,  though 
O  so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  the  syllable  may  be  consider- 
ed as  ending  in  a  vowel  sound  (vid.  •[4.2.Kem.;  •[[5. 1.  c  and 
1;  Gesen.Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,  §8.  4). 

7 

h)  V.3.  W.4.,    o is  a   dipthong  for  the  same  reason  as 

last. 

c)  V.4.  W.5.,   A is  a  dipthong  as  a  unites  with  -«  but 

does  not  fully  quiesce  in   it  (vid.  references  above). 

Rem.  It  will  be  observed  that  dipthongs  in  Syriac  as  well  as  in 
Hebrew,  are  quiescent  letters  with  heterogeneous  vowels  ;  but  in 
Hebrew  the  quiescent  letters  are  movable  while  the  reverse  is  true  in 
Syriac. 


2.     Find  the    Qidescents : 

-* -Hol  -1  111  ..1  ou  -  1- *n 
uinu-oQUoQiQiQnni  a 


EXERCISE  SEVENTH — OTIANTS.  278 

n  o  lal  U  o  1  aUal^  1  ^  ainiUl 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  *ji  is  a  quiescent  as  it  unites  with  the 
sound  of  the  preceding  vowel  (§13.3). 

b)  y.l.  W.2.,  O  is  a  regular  quiescent  letter ;  but  does  not 
here  fully  quiesce,  though  it  forms  a  dipthong  and 
so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  the  syllable  may  be  considered 
as  ending  with  a  vowel  sound  (vid.  T"7.1.a). 

c)  y.l.  W.3.,  O  is  not  quiescent  as  it  is  a  movable  conson- 
ant, 01  not  being  sounded.     The  following  f  however  qui- 

esces  in  the  preceding  vowel. 

d)  V-1.  W.5.,  O  (the  first  one)  is  movable  as  it  would 
in  Hebrew   take   a  vocal   Sheva ;    the   second  O  quiesces 

e)  Y.l.  W.9.,  Q  does  not  quiesce  in  —  as  it  is  movable 
(vid.  16.  l.b). 

/)  V.l.  w.u.,  1  quiesces  in —  though  it  is  rather  un- 
usual (§13.  l.Rem.). 

g)  V.8.  W.2.,  \  quiesces  in  —  ♦ 


3.     Find  the    Otiant  Letters 


a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  »^  is  otiant  as  it  is  a  part  of  the  suf- 
fix and  is  not  followed  by  001  (vid.  §  14.  2.  b). 

h)  V.3.  W.2.,  %A  is  otiant  because  it  follows  a  quiescent. 


974  EXERCISES   IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 


EXEECISE    EIGHTH. 

FindLineoß  Marhetono  (U^01;Sd),  Mehogyono  (1l.»...cnLo),  and 
Sheva,  where  there  is  no  accumulation  of  consonants. 

1.    Find  instances  of  Marhetono  and  Mehagyono : 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  5.  word  7.,  >>♦  Here  is  an  accumulation  of  con- 
sonants,and  to  indicate  that  they  could  not  all  be  sounded  con- 
veniently, Marhetono  (or  a  horizontal  line)  would  regularly 
be  placed  over  j  ♦  In  this  case  the  >  would  in  Hebrew  take 
silent  Sheva.  >  must  of  course  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal 
Sheva  (vid.§7). 

Rem. — 1.     There  seems  to  be  no  instance  of  Mehagyono   on  the 

first  page.  A.T.Hoffmann  in  his  SyriacGrammar  gives  lA^>*j  as  an 

instance.  The  a»  is  to  be  sounded  as  though  a  short  e  followed  it 
(vid.  §  7). 

Rem. — 2.  It  appears  that  Marhetono  indicates  silent  Sheva  when 
there  is  an  accumulation  of  vowelless  consonants,but  under  no  other 
circumstances,  though   silent  Sheva,  in  reality,  frequently  occurs  as 

in  Hebrew.  So  Mehagyono  represents  vocal  Sheva  only  when  there 
is  a  similar  accumulation  of  vowelless  consonants,though  when  there 
is  no  accumulation  vocal  Sheva  often  occurs. 

2.    Find  instances  of  Simple  vocal  Sheva  : 


EXERCISE   EIGHTH — VOCAL  SHEVA.  275 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  o  would,  in  Ilebrew,  take  a  vocal 
Sheva,  and  as  it  cannot  well  be  pronounced  without  the  aid 
of  a  vowel  or  half  vowel  we  must  use  the  Sheva,  This  can- 
not be  considered  as  an  instance  of  Mehagyöno,  for  there  is 
no  accumulation  of  consonants  which  are  destitute  of  vowels 
(vid.  §  7).  According  to  Lud.  de  Dieu  and  Norberg,  the 
Syrians  did  use  the  Sheva  and  pronounced  consonants  ac- 
cordingly, as  in  Hebrew  (vid.  §5.1). 

6)  Y.  1.  W.4.,  ^  should  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal  She- 
va like  s  under  a  (vid.  references  above). 

Rem. — We  find   no  characters  to  indicate  Sheva  and  seldom  any 

to  indicate  Marhetono  and  Mehagyouo,  still  we  are  to  pronounce 
the  consonants  where  those  characters  would  regularly  occur,  as  we 
should  if  they  had  actually  appeared. 

c)  Y.3.  W.5.,  2)  is  pronounced  with  a  Sheva.  The  pre- 
ceding syllable  being  simple,  2)  belongs  to  the  final  syll- 
able. 

d)  Y.3.  W.9.,  01   makes  a  part  of  the  first  syllable  of  the 

word  and  should  not  be  pronounced  with  vocal  Sheva. 

e)  ^ ,^,  W.3.,  »  is  pronounced  with  a  vocal  Sheva  as  it 
constitutes  a  part  of  the  penultimate  syllable,  being  preceded 
by  a  long  vowel  (§  15.4). 

/)  Y.9.  W.9.,  ^  should  be  pronounced  with  a  vocal  Sheva 
(vid.  last  reference). 


3.     Find  the  silent  Shevas,  wliere  there  is   no  ac. 
cumulation  of  consonants  destitute  of  vowels  : 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  A  would  regularly  in  Hebrew  take  a 


276  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

silent  Sheva  (vid.  Conants'  Gesen.  Ileb.Gram.  §10 ;  also  18. 
2.  a.  b  and  Kem.). 

h)  Y.l.  W.2.,  O  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  silent  Slieva,  be- 
ing a  movable  consonant  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  ;  but  in 
Syriac  it  so  melts  into  its  vowel,  that  the  syllable  may  be  con- 
sidered as  terminating  in  a  vowel  sound,  and  O  does  not 
take  silent  Sheva  (vid.  T  4.  2.  Eem.  ;  comp,  references 
above). 

c)  Y.3.  W.I.,  ^  takes  silent  Sheva  as  it  closes  a  sylla- 
ble. 

d)  Y.3.  W.2.,  01  is  a  movable  consonant  at  the  end  of  a 
syllable  being  equivalent  to  jrj  in  Hebrew  and  takes  silent 
Sheva. 

e)  Y.3.  W.9.,  Ol  is  at  the  end  of  a  mixed  syllable  with  a 
short  vowel,  and  takes  silent  Sheva  though  a  guttural  (vid. 
T"8.4.d;  T6.1.f ;  comp.  Gesen.  Heb.  Gram,  by  Conant,  §22. 
8). 

7 

/)  Y.4.  W.5.,  a  forms  with  the  vowel  —  a  dipthong.  It 
would  in  Hebrew  be  pronounced  as  a  movable  consonant 
and  take  a  silent  Sheva  ;  but  in  Syriac  it  so  melts  into  its 
vowel  that  it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  con- 
sonant a,nd  does  not  take  a  silent  Sheva  (vid.  ^"4.  2.  Rem.; 
18.3.b). 

g)  Y.9.W.5.,  %»  takes  a  silent  Sheva  as  it  is  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel  and  ends  the  antepenultimate  syllable. 


4.    Find  instances  of  Oomposite  Slieva  : 

01aj0101O1O1010101O10101010101» 

a)  Yerse  3.  word.3.,  01  would  in  Hebrew  take  a  compo- 
site Sheva  and  is  pronounced  as  though  it  did  here  (vid. 
Gesen.  Heb.  Grammar  by  Conant,  §22.  8.;  •|ri.2.a). 

h)  Yerse  3.  w.6.,  **  takes  composite  sheva  for  similar  rea- 
sons as  in  the  case  above. 


EXERCISE  NINTH — LINEA  OCCÜLTANS.  277 

c)  V.3.W.9.,  Ol  does  not  take  composite  Sheva  but  silent 
Sheva  simple  as  in  Hebrew.  The  Gutturals  take  simple 
Sheva  where  other  consonants  would  take  silent  Sheva 
(Gesen.Heb.Gram.  by  Conant,§22.8). 

d)YÄ.  W.6.,  01  takes  composite  Sheva  (vid.  a  above). 


EXERCISE    NINTH. 

19. 

Find  instances  of  Linea    Occultans  (§8)  : 

01010101010101G1010101* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  Ol  is  an  instance  of  Linea  occultans, 
indicating  that  the  01  is  not  sounded  (vid.  §8;  §12.1.  A.  and 
B.,  also  Rem.). 

h)  Y.l.  W.3.,  Ol  is  another  instance  of  Linea  occultans. 
The  horizontal  line  under  01  shows  that  the  letter  is  not  to 
be  pronounced.  In  this  case  o  begins  the  syllable.  The 
othe  cases  are  similarly  explained. 


278  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISE     TENTH. 

t    10. 

Find  on  wliat  Syllables  the  Tone  rests  (§  9)  : 

LkM  ^X  looi  ^  0010  Sd  ^X  looi  ioL  'li  'Ik   «jiV  looi 
001  k)  01  ^1  looi  Aa.a  Zq^  ^  \^  oir  looi  1  1  IrM 

ZOOI  LOr  01>    OL-TD    ja    loOl    aj  ^001    QJ    1    0010  QJ   Q*  )OI 
QA    IJ    01.2    looi    J    9>    ^    ^    OISQ»   ^X    01  1  0>   >0l  \^ 

QJ  u^  ^Lo  oir  U   001  looi  QJ  1  )0i  \y2k  Q-J  ^  looi 

;am.    O-J    «r    901    «A.!    l9    il   lO    loOl    10    Olr   loOl    10  |J 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  Ala  is  the  final  syllable  and  takes 
the  tone  because  it  ends  with  a  movable  consonant  (  §9.1 
and  2). 

^x 

b)  V.l.  W.2.,  %a1  takes  the  tone,  as  o  in  the  final  syllable 

ok  is  not  movable  (vid.  T4.  2.  Rem.;  T8.  3.  b  ;  §9.1  and  2). 
Ol  and  «^  are  not  sounded. 

c)  Y.l.  W.4.,  k)  is  the  penultimate  syllable  and  has  the 
tone  according  to  the  general  rule  (§9.1). 

d)  V.3.  W.2.,  Oif  is  the  final  syllable  and  takes  the  tone 
because  01  is  movable. 


EXEECISE  ELEVENTH — MARKS  OF  PUNCTUATION.     279 

e)  y.3.  W.5.,  1  is  tlie  penultimate  and  takes  tlie  tone. 
Si  belongs  to  the  last  syllable  (§15.  4.  d). 

/)  Y.4.  W.5.,  tOOi  takes  the  tone  because  it  ends  with  a 
movable  consonant. 

g)  Y.6.  W.3.,  Qm  is  inserted  above  as  receiving  the  tone 
according  to  the  general  rule,  though  it  is  somewhat  doubt- 
ful whether,  in  such  cases  the  tone  was  on  the  penultimate  or 
ultimate  syllable  (§  9.  1.  Rem.).  Euphony  would  seem  to 
favor  the  former  opinion ;  there  is  another  instance  of  the 
same  kind  in  v.7.  w.3. 


EXERCISE    ELEVENTH. 
1     11. 

Find  the   Marks   of  Punctuation   (§10)  : 
•.♦/♦♦♦♦♦•.♦♦♦♦ 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  4.,  ♦  is  a  mark  of  punctuation  more  gen- 
erally used  to  denote  the  end  of  a  period,  but  sometimes 
used  in  the  middle  to  denote  a  slight  pause  similar  perhaps 
to  our  comma.     It  is  used  so  here  (§l0.d). 

b)  V.L  W.15.,  ♦  denotes  the  full  close  of  the  period. 

c)  y.5.  W.4.,  •  indicates  the  end  of  the  protasis  (§10.a). 

d)  Y.5.  W.7.,  ♦  is  supposed  to  indicate  the  longest  pause 
of  any  mark  of  punctuation.  It  is  sometimes  written  thus  ♦♦ 
(§10.c). 

e)  Y.6.  W.5.,  /  indicates  the  end  of  the  apodosis(vid.§10.c). 


280  EXERCISES  IN  SYHIAC  GRAMMAR. 


EXEEOISE    TWELFTH. 

t    12. 

Pmd  instances  of  Mihui  (§6) : 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  3.  word  4.,  **  over  the  word  is  an  instance  of 
Bibui  indicating  tliat  the  preposition  has  a  plural  suffix  (§ 
e.l.Eem.;  §16.C). 

fc)  Y.4.  W.2.,  here  Ribui  indicates  that  the  noun  over 
which  it  is  placed  is  in  the  plural  number  though  it  is  ren- 
dered as  if  it  were  in  the  singular.  This  word  occurs  only 
in  the  plural  form  (§44.Rem.6).  The  same  is  true  in  respect 
to  V.4.  W.4. 

c)  Y.4,w.7.,  Ribui  indicates  simply  the  plural  form  of  the 
noun  as  above. 


EXERCISE    THIRTEENTH. 

t    13. 

Read  the  Syriac  : 

r  / 

Yerse    1.,     B^rishlth   aithau   vo  meletho   v%ü    m^l^ho 
aithau  vo  l^voth  aloho.  valoho  aithau  vo  hü  mel^'thö. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR.  281 

/  f  ft 

--/^        -  /  -        ^-- 

V.  2.,  nono  aithau  vo  v^risliiitli  l®voth  aloho. 
..  J  _,     ^    ...    _ 

V.  8.,  kul  bidheh  hli«vo  v*vel«odliau  oph«lo  hh^dho  hh^voth 

w  _ 

medh^m  dahhvo. 

/  /  /  /  m 

V.  4.,  beh    hhaye    lili«vo.    v^liliaye    aithayhun    nuh'^ro 
dhavnaynosho. 

"         "  /         -'  -  -      -  -  V  i      ^        i 

V.  5.,  v®liu  nuh«ro  v^hheshuko  manliar*.  v^liliesliiiko  lo 
adhr<^keh<* 

V.  6.,  lili*'vo  varnosho  dheshtadhar  m^n  aloho*»  sli®m6h 

yulihanon. 

V.  7.,   bono    etho    l^-'soh^dhutlio  dh^nashedh   al   nuli*ro, 
/  -  ..  ..     -        ..       ., 

d^kulnosh  n*liaymen  bidheh. 


V.  8. 5  lo  hu  h^vo  nuh^ro.  elo  dh^nashedh  al  nuh®ro. 

/     /       /  /  /  / 

V.  9.,  aithau  vo  ger  nuh^ro  dhashroro-.dh^manhar  l^kulnosh 

/  _      -       - 
detho  PoPmo. 

V.  lO.jb^ol^mo  h®vo.  v^ol^mo  vidhehh^vo.  v®ol®mo  lo  yadheh. 


EXPLANATIONS. 

X 

a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  «-»r^  is  the  first  syllable,  «Ä  not  mak- 
ing a  syllable  of  itself.  The  ®  answers  to  the  Sheva  in  He- 
brew, and  is  pronounced  like  a  very  short  e. 

J)  V.  1.  w.  2.,  »-if  is    perhaps  best  pronounced  like  a'l, 

7. 

though  the  a  sound  is  scarcely  perceivable.  In  oA,  o  hav- 
ing a  heterogeneous  vowel,  does  not  fully  quiesce,  still  it  so 
melts  into  the  vowel  that  it  can  hardly  be  considered  as  a 


282  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

movable  consonant  (vid  l4.2.Rem.).  01  is  not  souniod  as 
it  takes  Linea  occiiltans  (§8)  and  the  %ji  is  otiant  (§  14.  2). 

c)  y.l.  W.3.,  looi«  Ol  is  not  sounded  on  account  of  Linea 
occultans,  and  O  becomes  vocal  by  beginning  a  syllable. 

d)  y.l.  w.lO.,  X  is  pronounced  a,  Olaph  so  unites  with 
the  a  sound  that  it  is  scarcely  "perceivable  in  pronun- 
ciation, though  being  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  it  is  a 
regular  movable  consonant.  It  is  at  the  same  time  a  gut- 
tural letter  and  must  have  the  sound  of  the  Spiritus  lenis  of 
the  Greeks  (vid.  Tfl.2.Rem.). 

e)  V.l.  W.U.,  !©♦  _L  is  pronounced  broad  and  long  as  it 
has  a  quiescent  (§13.1. Rem.). 

/)  Y.^.  W.I.,  ^^   is  pronounced  thus  :  hul^  u  taking  the 

broad  and  short  sound.  The  JL,  is  short  here  as  it  has  no 
quiescent  (vid.  §3.  Rem.  3). 

g)  Y.3.W.2.,  Oipu'lo  bidheh.  1  quiesces  in  -^,  and  •^  is 
otiant.     01  is  a  movable  consonant  though  a  guttural  letter. 

h)  V.3.W.4.,     vVel^othau.     ^  must  be  sounded  with  a 

vocal  Sheva  (vid.  T[8.2).  r  being  preceded  by  a  vowel  is  as- 
pirated.    «^  as  well  as  Ol  Is  otiant. 

i)  y.3.  W.9.,  (ooij  dahhvo.  01  is  movable  and  pronoun- 
ced with  the  first  syllable.  _L  has  a  broad  and  short 
sound. 

y )  Y.4.  W.5.,  «-*A  thay.    —  is   short  and  broad  as  it  has 

no  quiescent  though  «^  so  melts  into  the  vowel  that  it 
can  hardly  be  considered  as  a  movable  consonant  (vid.  T  4. 
2. Rem.). 

k)  Y.6.W.L,  |ooi  hh®vo.  01  is  pronounced  with  Sheva. 
0  is  vocal  and  |  quiesces  in  .i_  ♦ 


EXERCISE  FOURTEENTH — TRANSLATION.  283 

EXEKCISE    FOURTEENTH. 

t    14 

Translate    Literally  : 

Verse  1.  In  (the)  beginning  was  (the)  "Word  and 
he  (or  it  the)  Word  was  with  God  and  God  was  he 
or  it  (the)  Word. 

2.  This  was  in  (the)  beginning  with  God. 

3.  Every  (thing)  by  (the)  hand  of  him  was  ;  and 
without  him  also  not  anything  was  which  was. 

4.  In  him  life  (lit.  lives)  was,  and  life  was  (lit. 
lives  were)  (the)  light  of  (the)  sons  of  man. 

5.  And  he  (or  it)  light,  into  (the)  darkness,  shin- 
eth  (lit.  causing  or  permitting  to  shine  §23.2.a.^), 
and  (the)  darkness  did  not  comprehend  it. 

6.  (There)  was  a  son  of  man,  who  was  sent  from> 
God,  whose  name  (lit.  the  name  of  him)  (was)  John. 

7.  This  (man)  came  for  a  witness,  who  shall 
(should)  bear  witness  concerning  (the)  light,  that  eve- 
ry man  might  believe  through  (the)  hand  of  him. 

8.  He  was  not  (lit.  not  he  was)  (the)  light ;  but 
(came  for  a  witness)  who  might  bear  witness  concern- 
ing (the)  light. 


284  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

9.  For  (that  light)  was  (the)  light  of  truth,  which 
shineth  upon  every  man,  who  cometh  into  (the) 
world. 

10.  (He)  was  in  (the)  world  (lit.  in  the  world  was) 
and  (the)  world  was  by  his  hand  and  (the)  world  did 
not  know  him. 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Verse  1.  word  1.,  LJ^'fJOi*  In  translating  this  word, 
the  IS  supplied.  There  is  no  distinct  character  in  Syriac  for 
the  definite  article.  It  was  originally  expressed  by  the 
noun  in  the  emphatic  state  ;  but  this  is  by  no  means  uni- 
versal in  laterSjriac.  There  are  many  cases,  as  in  Uebrew, 
in  which  the  definit>e  and  indefinite  articles  have  no  word 
nor  character  to  represent  them,  and  they  must  be  supplied 
in  translating  (§45.1). 

b)  V-1- W.2  and3.,   looi   ^^oloAaf   was.        The  substan- 

tive  verb  |ooi  to  be,m  connection  with  the  other  substantive 

verb  La]  to  be,  (third  person  masculine   %j01oAji1)  forms  the 
imperfect  tense,  was  (§38.1,2). 

c)  Y.l.  W.5.,  oqio*  001  is  a  pronoun  of  the  masculine 
gender.  It  is  pleonastic  and  need  not  be  rendered  (§55).  As 
the   neuter  gender  in  Syriac  is  included  in  the  masculine 

and  feminine   ooi   might  be  considered  either  as  neuter  or 
masculine  and  may  mean  he  or  it  (§43). 

001  is  rendered  was,  and  is  in  the  imperfect 
without  *jiOioAu1    (vid.  §65.B.a). 

e)  Y.3.  W.7.,  Zooi  is  rendered  was,  same  as  last.  The 
same  is  true  in  respect  to  1ooi>  (v. 3.  w.9). 

/)  Y.3.  W.6.,  IrJs*  and  ioilk)  (v.3.  w.8)  should  be  taken 
together.     The  first  means  any  and  the  second  something  or 


EXERCISE  FIFTEENTH — CHANGES   OF  CONSONANTS.    285 

thing.     Taken  together  they  should  be  rendered  any  thing, 

g)  YA.  W.2.,  V-'.abJa  is  rendered  life.  The  noun  always 
takes  the  plural  form  though  it  usually  takes  a  singular 
meaning  and  has  sometimes  a  singular  and  sometimes  a  plu- 
ral verb.  Here  it  takes  a  verb  singular  and  in  v.4.  w.4.,  a 
verb  plural. 

h)  Y.5.  W.4.,  >ai2io  is  a  participle ;  but  it  is  used  instead 
of  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  (§64.2.  A.  andKem. ;  also  T 
18.5). 

i)  Y.ß.  W.3.,  >?A*1j  means  (lit.)  is  sent;  but  with  loOl  it 
forms  the  imperfect  tense. 


EXEKCISE     FIFTEENTH. 

t    15. 

Find  the  Changes  of  Consonants — Assimilated — Transposed — 
Dropped — Added — Exchanged  (§12). 

1.  Find  those  which  are  changed  by  assimilor 
tion  : 

All  of  those  letters  which  take  Linea  occultans,  are  in  re- 
ality assimilated  (vid.  §12.  and  ^"9). 

2.  Find  tliose  whicli  are  changed  by  i/ransposir 
tion  : 

Lm 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Yerse  6.  word  8.,  >>A»1>   is  in  the  Ethpa.  conjugation 


286  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAB. 

and  M  and  A  are  transposed,  the  appropriate  place  for  A  be 
ing  before*  (§12.2). 


3.    Find    tliose    Consonants    wliicli  tave    been 
dropped  : 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  4.,  lAÜi^  is  from  flso,  const.  A^lo*  ]  is 
dropped. 

b)  y.3.  w.^.^  oip-alo*  ]  final  is  dropped  to  give  place  for 
tbe  suffix. 

c)  Y.3.  W.7.,  Zocn»    1  is  dropped  to  form  the  feminine 
(§37  Table). 

d)  Y.4.  W.7.,  \m\  iin?»   f  is  dropped  before  the  second  J. 

e)  Y.5.  W.4.,  >C7lik)«    1   is   dropped  after  the  preforma- 
tive  Sd* 

/)  Y.7.  W.7.,  and  v.9.  w.  7.,    *«iSnn    ]  is  dropped  be- 
fore 1^ 

g)  Y.7.  W.8.,  ^  V^iou»  }  is  dropped  before  So» 


4.    Find  consonants  wbicli  are  added  : 
Ä  1  ^cjio  lA  o  1A  1  ^010  1  o  1  ]  *aaio  lA  1  ^oio 

£)    1    iD    1    Ol    O    »^OlO    IZjOlloll    ^OOU    1    3  1   O 
liälSDoTloiljlAloilljjlj   ^OU  £1) 

1  01  1  ?  J  1  1  •aoio  l3l?2^^?^lölolo 

1    Ol    O    1    01     • 

EXPLANATIONS. 
a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  AaäJ^^*  Hi  is  added  as  a  prefix. 


EXERCISE  FIFTEENTH — CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS.   287 

b)  Y.l.  W.2.,  »jiOioA^I»   1  is  prosthetic  (§38.1).  %jiOIo  is  a 
suffix. 

c)  y.l.  W.4.,  lAi^Lo»  A  is  added  from  tlie  construct  state 
and  1  is  added  because  the  word  is  in  the  emphatic  state. 

c?)  y.l.  w.IO.,  loC^»    1  is  added  at  the  end  to  form  the 

emphatic  state  {^18.  g). 

c)  y.2.  W.I.,  ]joi»  Perhaps  }  should  be  considered  as  ad- 
ded here  because  \iOl  seems  to  be  a  kind  of  emphatic  state 

of  #01,  though  we  have  omitted  |  above  as  the  word  usual- 
ly appears  in  the  emphatic  form. 

/)  y.3.w.6  ,fyja»   I  is  added  to  form  the  feminine. 

^)y.3.  W.7.,  Zooi»  Z  is  added  to  form  the  feminine. 

h)  YA.  W.2.,  ]     '  -- 1  is  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state 

(118.^). 

^)  y.4.  W.5.,  ^OOuA^I»    ^OOU  is  added  in  the  course  of 
inflection  and  |  at  the  beginning  is  prosthetic  (§38). 

k)  y.4.w.6.,  lioiQJ»  }  is  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state 
(118.  .V). 

I)  y.5.  tr.S.j  ]oam.A*^*  ]  is  added  to  form  the  emphatic 
state. 

m)  y.5.  W.4.,    ioulD»  So  is  a  preformative  occurring  in 
the  course  of  inflection. 

n)  y.5.  W.7.,  cn-oi?!*    1  is  added  in  the  Aphel  conjuga- 
tion. 

o)  y.6.  W.3.,  >>A»lj»  A  and  1  are  added  in  the  course  of 

inflection  (comp.  T"  15.2  a). 

p)  y.7.  W.4.,  101  m ,.  !>♦    J  is  a  preformative. 


288  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 


-»      r 


q)  Y.7.  W.8.,  ^kliOU»    uiOU  is  added  in  the  course  of  in- 
flection. 

t)  Y.8.  W.6.,  >CTL-m-J>*  J  is  added  in  the  course  of  inflec- 
tion. 

s)  V.9.  W.9.,  ]V^  \sS»    1   is  added  to  form  the  emphatic 
state. 


5.    Find  Consonants  exchanged  for  each  other  : 

There  are  no  cases  on  page  first.  1  is  often  exchanged 
for  1  before  oi  and  vice  versa.  Other  letters  also  exchange 
with  each  other  (§12.4). 


EXEECISE    SIXTEENTH. 

1    16. 

Find  the  changes  of  vowels — ihrovjn  hack — exchanged — tranS' 
posed — dropped  and  added  (§  15). 

1.    Find  those   which   are   thrown  back  : 

—  — —  — — — ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yersel.  word  2.,  «-»CToA*]*    _f.  is  thrown  back  from 
-  tol(§l5.2.A.b;  §13,1-3). 

h)  V.l.  W.7.,  «iAOioAAl  —  same  as  above. 


EXERCISE   SIXTKEXTH— CHANGES   OF  VOWELS.         289 

c)  V.l.  W.U.,  loi-ko.    _L  is  thrown  back  from  ]  to  ©♦ 

d)  V.3.  W.2.,  airJ^]d*  -1.  is  thrown  back  from  1  to  a  on 
account  of  the  suffi'x. 

e)  Y.5.  W.4.,  jOUio«  1  the  characteristic  of  Aphel  is  drop- 
ped and  its  vowel  -^  falls  back  upon  the  preformative  of  the 
participle  So  (§23. 1). 

/)  Y,6.  W.3.,  »'A^l)*  JL  is  thrown  back  from  1  to  >♦ 


IS 


g)  V.IO.  W.8.,  ai^r^.  ^  falls  back  from  r  to  ^  (§36;  T 
*  .  ?   I 

18.37),  as  the  vowel  _I_  of  the  original  form  ^r-u  is  dropped 

and  a  suffix  appended  (T16.2.  e,  and4.Z ;  •[[18.37). 


2.    Find  those  which   are  exchanged  : 

—  for  — ,  —  for  — ,  —  for  —      • 
EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  3.  word  2.,  Ol|-i)^  is  derived  from  pi«  — 
dropped  and  JL  added  in  the  course  of  inflection  and  _L  is 
thrown  back  from  1  to  O  (T"16.1.c^)  the  word  here  being  in 
the  suffix  state.  Some  would  prefer  to  say  that  —  is  chang- 
ed into  ^,  (116.4.  c  and  5.  d). 

5)  Y.4.  W.7.,  jmijLiov     is  changed  mto—  m  the  con- 
struct plural  (§45.2.a ;  i'18.1). 

c)  Y.5.  W.4.,  iouSo»  In  the  second  syllable,  —  is  changed 

iiito  — ,  as  the  third  radical  of  the  verb  from  which  ioilio  is 
derived,  is  Resh  (§23  1). 

•»»7  7  »-»»  1> 

d)  Y.7.  W.8.,  ^.  V)iOlJ   is  derived  from  ^^|«  — ischang- 

ed  into  — ,  and  —  in  the  last  part,  into  —  m  passing  from 

•1» 
Peal  to  Aphel.     But  it  is  better  to  say  that  —  is  dropped 


290  EXERCISES  IN  SYßlAC   GRAMMAR. 

and  —  added  in  one  case,  and  —  dropped  and  —  added  in 
the  other  (•|[16.4.h ;  5.r). 

e)  Y.lO.  W.8.,  GUI,—»  is  derived  from  ^j--»,  and  —  has 
the  appearance  of  being  changed  into  _L  on  'account  of  the 
suffix  (§36.A.Eem.) ;  but  J.  is  dropped  and  JL  thrown  back 
upon  ^  (ll6.1.^  and  4.&;  ^18.37). 


3.    Find  those  vowels,  which  are 


EXPLANATIONS. 


a)  Yerse4.  w.6.,  liolQJ  from  jOU  or  hoOU*  —  with  O  is 
transposed  in  the  emphatic  state  from  the  last  to  the  first 
part  of  the  word  (vid.TflS.^/). 

The  other  cases  are  all  similarly  explained. 


4.    Find  those  vowels  which  are  dropped  : 


EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  "Verse  1.  word  2.,  wäOIoA^I  -has  an  additional  syllable 
fc^qiO— ;  but  the  original  vowel —  is  not  dropped  as  «a 
quiesces  in  it  making   it  immutable  (vid.§l5.3  ;  §48.  A). 

5)  Y.l  W.4.,  1A-^Ld  is  derived  from  |JSd,  construct  A^Lo* 
_!_  is  dropped  to  form  the  construct  state  and  JL  of  the  con- 
struct state  is  dropped  in  the  emphatic  state  because  the  ad- 


EXERCISE  SIXTEENTH — CFAN-GES  OF  VOWELS.        291 

ditional  syllable  I  is  added  (vid.§15.3;  compare  ^16.5.6), 

c)  V.3.  W.2.,  GifjiU^  is  derived  from  r*»  —  is  dropped 
and  from  the  emphatic  state,  —  is  dropped  to  give  place  to 
the  suffix  (compare  %  16.5.c?). 

«^  •  7  7 

d)  Y.S.  W.6.,  \r^  is  the  feminine  form  of  ^a*«  —  is  drop- 
ped (vid.  116.5.7). 

e)  V.4.  W.7.,  ]•!  >mn  —  is  dropped  from  the  plural  ab- 
solute of  jjr)  in  passing  into  the  construct  state  (vid.  §15.3, 
and  Rem.;  ^16.5.  ^;  4^8.1). 

/)  V.5.  W.7.,  cnobf  is  Aphel  of  ^j>  with  a  suffix  pro- 
noun.  In  taking  the  suffix, — •  of  the  verb  is  dropped  and  — 
of  the  suffix  added  (vid.  tl6.5.m;  118.7). 

g)  V.7.  W.3.,  lAojOlfloL  is  in  the  feminine  emphatic  state, 
-ftp  1« 

from  the  noun  501CO,  and,  in  the  course  of  inflection  —  is 
dropped  (vid.li6.5.^ ;  118.17). 

h)  V.7.  W.8.,   ^IQaOU  is  a  verb  from  ^\  and  is  in  the 

Aphel  conjugation.  In  the  course  of  inflection,  —  in  the 
first  part  of  the  word  is  dropped  and  —  in  the  last  part,  and 
other  vowels  added  (vid.116.5.  r;  118.22). 

•>'   P       7  J,  P 

i)  V.9.  W.5.,  fj^j  is  compounded  of  ?  and  p^«  The  latter 

7  7 

is  a  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  from  \m*  —  falls  away  in 
taking  an  additional  syllable  (^15.  3)  to  form  the  emphatic 
state  (vid.  1  16.  5.  .9;  1  18.32). 

h)  V.9.W.9.,  ]V>\s\  is  compounded  of  1^  and  ]V)S\  em- 

phatic  state  from  ^QAl*  —  is  dropped  in  forming  the  em- 
phatic state  (§15.3^  as  an  additional  syllable  is  received  (1 
16.5.^;  118.36). 

I)  V.IO.  W.8.,  ail,-a  is  a  verb  with  a  suffix,  derived  from 


292  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

^^I«     In  taking  tlie  suffix,  —  is  dropped  and  —  falls  back 
upon  the  first  radical  (§36 ;  «flS.  87). 


5.    Find  those   vowels  wHcli  are   added  : 

f7p7tkpi\7'T>fi*^prP7''*^^Pf 
p        7        0  7        0        0         0        X        "n        0        ■* 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  ».»oioAaV  —  is  added  in  the  course 
of  inflection  as  a  part  of  the  sufformative  of  the  verb. 

h)  V.l.  W.4.,  lA^Ji?  is  in  the  emphatic  state  from  the  con- 

.  •  y    -n        •       y  0 

Struct  state  AilLo«  —  is  dropped  and  —  added  (compare  % 
16.4.6 ;  ^1\  d). 

c)  V.l.  w.lO.,  loiSL  is  in  the  emphatic  state,  but  as  it  al- 
ways appears  in  this  state  it  is  perhaps  better  not  to  place — 
(at  the  end  of  the  word)  among  the  vowels  added. 

*      »    i  y  7 

d)  V.3.  W.2.,  Oip^kfo  is  derived  from  ,— »♦  —  is  dropped 
and  a  new  vowel,  — ,  added.     Then  from  the  emphatic  state 

Ij-^I,  —  IS  dropped  to  give  place  to  the  suffix  with  which 
-i  is  added  (vid.  §  46.  1.  a ;  compare  ^  16.  4.  c ;  T  18. 
m). 

e)  V.  3.  w.  4.,  wigio,\\no  is  from  ,s\n»  —  is  added 
with  the  suffix. 

/)  V.3.  W.6.,  IrA*  is  the  feminine  form  for  r***  —  is  drop 
ped  and  _£.  added. 


EXERCISE  SIXTEENTH — CHANGES  OF  VOWELS.       293 

*  0        7        r 

g)  V.3.  W.9.,   fooij»  —  is  assumed  over  >  to  aid  in  the 

pronunciation  (vid.TflS.^). 

h)  V.4.  W.8.,  l^OIQJ  is  derived  from  Sou  or  5oou»  —  is 
added  in  the  emphatic  state  (vid.TlS.^/)- 

i)  V.4.  W.7.,  f«i  im>»  —  at  the  beginning  of  the  word 
is  assumed  (vid.§  15.4.6).  The  remainder  of  the  word  is  com- 

pounded  of  jlIA  and  \m^\*    The  former  is  in  the  construct 

plural,  andjin  passing  from  the  absolute  to  the  construct  plural, 

*■  7 

—  is  dopped  and  —  added  (vid.  §15.3  and  4 ;  Tl6.  4.  e;  ^ 
18.1). 

h)  Y.5.  W.3.,  PQjlmjQ*  This  is  from  yiQan  though  the 
emphatic  state  is  the  more  usual  form»     _L  is  added. 

I)  Y.5.  W.4.,  >aulo»     This  is  a  participle  active,  Aphel, 

from  iou»     The  first  —  is  assumed,  forming  a  part  of  the 
preformative  (vid.«|[l8.5). 

m)  V.5.  W.7.,  OlOjjl  is  a  verb  in  the  Aphel  conjugation 
from  y\y»  —  is  assumed  in  the  preformative.  —  is  also 
assumed  with  the  suffix  (vid.l"l6.4./;  Il8.7). 

n)  V.B.  W.2.,  lAX'r^  is  in  the  emphatic  state  and  —  is  ad- 
ded (vid.ll8.9). 

6)  y.6.  W.3.,  J?Ä»1?  is  compounded  of  j  and  the  verb 
>>A«|,  Ethpaal  from  jfM*  —  is  added  as  a  part  of  the  pre- 
formative. The  first  _L  is  assumed  in  the  course  of  inflection 
in  Ethpaal. 

p)  Y.7.  W.3.,  lAojOlfioL  is  in  the  feminine  emphatic  state 

from  joifio»     In  the  course  of  inflection  —  and  —  are  added 
and  JL  is  dropped  (vid.Tl6.4.^  ;  T"l8.l7). 

q)  V.7.  W.4.,  joiflUj  is  compounded  of  the  relative  j  and 


294  EXERCISES   IX  SYniAC  GRAMMAR. 

the  verb  joiCQj,  Aphel  of  joiflo»  —  is  assumed  in  Aphel 
in  the  course  of  inflection  (vid.  §18.18). 

r)  V.7.W.8.,  ^SOftOU  is   a  verb  in  the  Aphel  conjugation 

from  ^Lof«    In  the  course  of  inflection,   —  in  the  first  part 

of  the  word  is  dropped  and  —  added,  and  in  the  latter  part 

of  the  word,  —  is  dropped  and  —  added  (T16.4.  h;  ^[18. 
22). 

>^j  is   compounded  of  j  and  |i;*^     The 

7  9 

latter  is  a  noun   in  the  emphatic  state  from  '^m  or  y^»*     If 

considered  as  derived  from  the  former,  _!_  is  dropped  on  ac- 
count of  the  additional  syllable  (§l5.3),and,  in  consequence, 
My  having  no  vowels,  j  takes  the  new  vowel  _L  (§15.  4.  h), 

J.  is  also  added  to  form  the  emphatic  state  (vid.  %  16.4.  ^ ; 

118.32). 

0  V.9.  W.9.,  ISfiVH  is  compounded  of  1  and  liüLl,  em- 
phatic  state  from  V>\s»  —  is  dropped  in  forming  the  em- 
phatic state  as  a  syllable  is  added  (§15.3),  and  J^  is  assumed 
(vid.l-l6.4.Ä;  118.36). 


EXERCISE    SEYENTEBNTH. 

1    17. 

Find  the  Suffixes  and  Prefixes^  Sufformatives  and  Preforma" 
lives  (§16;  §36;  §46). 

1.    Find  the  Prefixes  : 

"  7  7  ^  -  y 


EXERCISE  SEVENTEENTH — SUFFIXES  AND  PREFIXES.   295 

1    >    1   £)    O    £!)    O  « 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  a  is  a  prefix  preposition. 

h)  V.3.  W.2.,  iD  is  a  prefix  preposition  with  the  vowel 
thrown  back  upon  it. 

c)  V.3.  W.9.,  ?•  >  is  a  relative  pronoun  prefixed  to  the 
verb,  and,  two  vowelless  consonants  occurring  together,  _!_  is 
assumed  to  aid  in  pronunciation.  The  other  instances  need 
no  explanation 

2.     Find  the   Siiffixes  : 

Ol—    «^010—   GL.    OU.    Ol-—    Ol—  OU.  01-.  • 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  8.  word  2.,  OL—  is  a  suffix  pronoun  with  its 
union  vowel. 

**  ^ 
h)  Y.3.  W.4.,  »-iOiO-.,  is  a  suffix  pronoun  added  to  a  prepo- 
sition, though  the  same  form  when  attached  to  Au]  is  a  suf- 
formative. 

Rem. — We  use  the  terms  sufformative  and  preformative  to  indi- 
cate those  letters  which  are  suffixed  or  prefixed  to  words  as  neces- 
sary appendages  in  order  to  form  particular  conjugations,  tenses, 
moods,  persons,  numbers,  gender«*  or  states,  according  to  the  course 
of  inflection.  Such  are  mero  formative  letters  and  properly  consti- 
tute a  part  of  the  word  to  wJiich  they  are  attached,  while  suffixes 
and  prefixes  are  appendages  wliich  have  more  distinct  significations 
of  themselves,  and  do  not  necessarily  compose  a  part  of  the  word  to 
which  they  are  attached. 


296  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

3.     Find  tlie    Preformatives  : 

So    I    A— 1    ^    aou    ^    So    * 

EXPLANATIONS. 

a)  Verse  1.  word  2.,  \  is,  strictly  speaking,a  preformative ; 
but  the  letter  seems  to  constitute  a  part  of  the  word  through 
all  of  its  changes  and  does  not  so  properly  come  under  this 
head  as  it  does  under  ''consonants  added"  (^15.4.6). 

h)  Y.5.  W.4.,  So  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  course  of 
inflection. 

c)  Y.5.  W.7.,  "j  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  Aphel  con- 
jugation. 

d)  Y.Q.  W.8.,   A y  are  preformative  letters  added  in  the 

Ethpaal  conjugation. 

e)  Y.7.  W.8.,  jOU  is  a  preformative  added  in  the  Aphel 
future. 


4.    Find  the   Sufformatives  : 

^010^  lA  lA  ^010.  t^oioJ-  lA   «^Gio_  1  I  .oou.  1 
Mil  ^cno-  11111    ♦ 

EXPLANATIONS: 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  2.,  w»qio —  is  a  sufibrmative  as  it  forms, 

according  to  the  inflection,  the  third  person  singular  mascu- 
line preterite,  though  it  is  in  reality  a  noun  suffix  attached 

Ix/the  original  noun  A»  hdng. 

h)  Y.l.  W.4.,  (A  is  the  suffbrmative  ending  of  the  empha- 
tic state,  or  rather  1  is  the   ending  of  the  emphatic  state 


EXEECISE  EIGHTEENTH — PARSE.  297 

and   A    ot    the  constnict  from  whicli  the    emphatic    is 
formed. 

_» 

c)  V.3.  W.6.,  \   is  the  emphatic  ending. 

d)  Y.3.  W.7.,   L  takes  the  place  of  1  and  is  a  formative 
letter  in  constituting  the  feminine  gender. 

e)  V.4.  W.5.,  ^OOU —  is  a  sufformative  found  in  the  course 
of  inflection. 

/)  V.4.  W.7.,  I  is  the  ending  of  the  emphatic  state. 

g)  Y.6.  W.2.,  I  is  an  emphatic  ending. 


EXEECISE    EIGHTEENTH. 

1    18. 

Po/rse  : 

a)  Yerse  1.  word  1.,  LjuLä^a  is  compounded  of  the  pre- 
position O  m  and  the  noun  LkM^h  beginning.  Q  is  a  pre- 
position  governing  LkM^j  in  the  ablative  case  (§  75.5  ;  §52  ; 

§  84).     A^jBa)   is  a  denominative  noun  (§41)  from  the  root 

I 
JLft9  principal^   chief,    head  (Hebrew  '(jjji«^*-)  Chaldee  l^^'i ) — 

formed  by  adding  to  its  root  the  formative  letters  Aj.  (§39.2). 

I  .1 

The  vowel  —  is  added  and  aids  to  form  the  syllable  La  (§15.4; 

§13.3).  Aaa.19  is  of  the  first  declension  as  its  vowels  are  im- 
mutable (§48.  A)  though  it  is  somewhat  irregular  in  its  in- 
flection (see  its  plural) — third  person,  singular  number (§44). 


298  EXERCISES  m  sykiac  grammar. 


»J,  plural  IAjJSuj»  The  two  points  over  j  in  the  plural 
compose  Ribui.  The  point  belonging  to  h  still  belongs  to  j 
and  at  the  same  time  is  part  of  Ribui  (§6.2.Rem.) — feminine 
gender  as  it  is  the  same  as  in  Hebrew  and  is  transferred  from 
that  language  (§43.2.Rem.2).  It  ends  also  in  fA  a  feminine 
termination  in  the  emphatic  state,  |  being  the  regular  em- 
phatic termination  (vid.  last  reference  and  §  45.3.&).  In  the 
absolute  state  the  form  is  A^m-i>,  emphatic  f  A^jia>  (§  45j — 
in  the  ablative  case  after  the  preposition  a  and  governed  by 
it  (§75.5). 

b)  V.l.  W.2.,  .-»OloA^f  is  an  auxiliary  verb  from  A_j]  tobe 
(vid.Lexicon).  A-^1  is  formed  from  the  noun  Aa  being^  vath 
a  prosthetic  ]*  wiOloA^f  is  irregular — takes  the  noun  suffix 
«-»CJIO^,  as  it  is  derived  from  a  noun,  though  that  suffix  is 
here  to  be  considered  as  a  sufformative  (T  17.4.  a;  •f  17.2. 
Rem.)— neuter  (§  66.2  ;  §  1 9)— singular  number  (§38.1.Para- 
digm) — third  person  (§38.  1.  Paradigm) — masculine  gender 
(vid. last  reference) — indicative  mood(§ 65.1 ;  compare  (§18.4) 
— preterite  imperfect  tense,as  loOl  immediately  follows(§18.4. 
Rem.;  §38.2:§68.A).  Inflect  to  the  person  where  it  is  found. 
First  person  common  gender  ^La\  {lam),  second  masculine 
^Aaf  {thou  art),  second  feminine  > > ^ » A^i]  {thou  art),  third 
masculine  »^OloA^I  {he  is)  (vid.§38.1.Inflection).  It  agrees 
with  its  nominative  lAl^,  though  of  a  different  gender  (80. 
B.2). 

c)  Y.l.  W.3.,  looi  is  a  substantive  verb  signifying  to  be 
(§38.1)— a  U' verb  (§38.  1)— irregular  (§32)— neuter  (§  19)— 
third  person — singular  number.  When  used  with  another 
verb  it  has  the  effect  of  Yau  conversive  in  Hebre  .    §  38.  1) 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PAKSING.  299 

— masculine  gender  and  used  here  merely  as  a  lielping  verb 
to  the  preceding,  in  forming  the  imperfect  tense(§38.2). 

d)  Y  i.  W.4.,  lAi^So  ivord  is  a  substantive  noun,  derived 
from  uiLo  to  speah^  forming  in  the  absolute  state  ]V^  (vid. 
§  39.  2.  h.  third  example  ),  construct  state  A!sV),  emphatic 
IA^Sd — first  declension  (§45.  feminines  A;  §48. B.  feminines; 
T  6.  4.  c).  Decline.  Singular  (vid.above) — plural  absolute, 
,!Sk),  construct  Z!üo,  emphatic  lAÜo  (§  45.  8) — third  per- 
son singular — feminine — emphatic  state — nominative  case  to 
looi  w*cnoLf  (§80.B.2). 

e)  Y.l.  W.5.,  0010  is  compounded  of  the  conjunction  i 
and  the  pronoun  ooi.  o  is  a  copulative  conjunction  (§53. 
1) — a  prefix  (§53.  1.  Rem.).  It  connects  the  two  nouns, 
ocn  may  be  translated  by  he  or  i\  as  the  neuter  gender  in 
Syriac  is  included  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  (Tf  14.  c:  § 
43) — a  personal  pronoun  separate  (§16) — third  person  sing- 
ular. It  is  pleonastic  and  need  not  be  rendered  in  transla- 
ting (§55).  For  explanations  of  the  next  three  words  vid. 
supra. 

f)  V.l.  W.9.,  LcL^  wiihj  a  preposition  governing  ICTU^ 
(§52;  §84). 

a)  V.l.  w.lO.,  (oi-i^  God — taken  from  the  Hebrew  nib^ 
and  that  probably  derived  from  Jjjj^  God.  nib^J^  ^^  ^  ^^" 
nominative  noun  taking  the  Syriac  emphatic  termination. 
1  is  the  ending  of  a  large  number  of  Syriac  nouns,  some- 
times indicating  the  feminine  and  sometimes  the  emphatio 
state  (§43.2;  §45.3).  Some  nouns  always  appear  in  the  em- 
phatic  or  suffix  state  (§  45.1.Rem.).     (oi}:^  has  the  form  of 


800  EXERCISES   IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

the  emphatic  state.  It  is  a  substantive  noTin  and  may  be 
declined  like  ^.I  (Decl.l.  §45. masculines  A)— third  person 
singular-masculine-emphatic  state — ablative  case  and  gov- 
erned by  2q1  (§75.5). 

h)  Y.l.  W.U.,  loiiLo»  O  anc?,is  a  prefix  conjunction  con- 
tinuing the  sense.  loilL  Ood^  is  in  the  nominative  to 
]bqi  ^qio^t  (§80).     For  further  explanations  vid.  supra, 

i)  V.l.  w.  14.,  ogi  is  a  pleonastic  pronoun  (vid.sw^ra). 

j)  V.l.  W.15.,  lA^iD  word,  is  in  the  nominative  after 
Iboi  ^qioLf  (§80;  118.5). 

k)  V.2.  W.I.,  Vol  this,  same.  It  has  the  form  of  the  em- 
phatic state  though  it  should  be  considered  as  one  of  the 
original  forms  of  the  word.  The  forms  are  ^01  and  poi 
(§17) — a  demonstrative  pronoun — singular-masculine-nomi- 
oqi  »aCToA^I  (§80) — used  as  a  noun.  Decline 
it  (vid.§17). 

I)  V.3.  W.I.,  ^  all,  every,  each,  (§58.B.2.ö^,6) — a  pronoun 
used  as  an  adjective  (§58.B.2.5)  the  noun  thing  to  which 
it  belongs  being  implied — declined  according  to  decl.  1. 
of  nouns — ^third  person-masculine-absolute  state.  The  im- 
plied noun  would  be  in  the  nominative  to  1  OCT;  or  ^i^  itself 
might  be  considered  as  a  collective  noun  and  in  the  nomi 
native  to  looi  (§80.  A.  1  and  Kern.). 

m)  V.3.  W.2.,  CTh>(^  hy  the  hand  of  him  or  by  his  hand 
p  is  a  prefix  preposition  governing  hV— *  The  whole  word 
is  compounded  of  the  preposition  a  by,  the  noun  r-»  empha- 
tic ]rA  hand,axid  the  suffix  CT-.  of  him  or  his.  ,**]«  is  a  de- 
nvative  noun  (§39),  from  fU  and  takes  a  suffix  (Hebrew  yi 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  801 

Chaldee'Tn)-2nd.declension-smgular.  Absolute  and  constr.^, 
empliatic  I  pa  f,  plural  absolute^  p»  I,  construct  •^r'lj  eniphatic 
Mr— a ( — third  singular  masculine  (§45.  masculines  B) — abla- 
tive case  and  governed  by  ID  (§75.5).  Ol_  is  a  suffix  pro- 
noun  attached  to  the  emphatic  state  and  f  falls  away  (§46.1. 
a)-third  singular  masculine  (§16.  Table) — genitive  case  (§54. 
B.2)  and  governed  by  p.]l  (§16  ;  §16. B;  §74). 

n)  Y.3.W.8.,  |OCn  to  he  is  here  rendered  was^  the  imperfect 
being  sometimes  thus  formed   (§65).    It  agrees  with  ^^ 

••7   P«      * 

d)  V.3.  W.4.,  wi010,%Nno  and  without  him — compounded 
of  the  conjunction  o,  the  preposition  ,\Sn,  and  the  suffix 
pronoun  *uOiO-.*  O  and^  is  a  conjunction  as  above.  |\\o 
without  is  a  preposition  with  a  suffix.     It  governs  its  suffix 

..  7  •«7 

^01 0-*  «-lOlO-  him^  is  a  noun  suffix  -  plural  (§16.Table) — 
third  singular  masculine — ablative  case  and  governed  by 
jili  (§75.5). 

jp)  Y.3.  W.5.,  VSi\  also  not^  neither — compounded  of  |j  not^ 
and  2) I  aho.  Si\  is  a  conjunction(§53.2.a)  and  continues  the 
sense.     P  not  is  an  adverb  and  qualifies  2oqi* 

q)  Y.3.  W.6.,    1,-M  one,  any  one^  a  certain  one,  certain,  any\ 

7 

from  rA«,  is  a  pronoun  (§58.10.a  and  h)  or  a  numerical  adjec- 
tive (§50.2).  Here  it  has  the  sense  of  an  indefinite  pronoun 
— singular  feminine  and  belongs  like  an  adjective  to  the  noun 
y)y-k>  (§58.10.a). 

r)  Y.3.W.7.,  Zooi  to  he  from  looi*  ]  is  changed  into  L  to 
form  the  feminine  (§19. Table).  Imperfect  and  parsed  like 
fOOl  (vid.  n. supra). 


802  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC  GRAMMAR. 

5)  Y.3.  W.8.,  ^r-^  ci'^^y  thing^  has  a  similar  meaning  to 
that  of  IrM  above  ;  but  has  more  the  sense  of  a  noun.  It  is 
sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  as  fr^»  (§58.10.6).  It  is 
used  here  as  a  noun  meaning  thing^  and  f,-M  belongs  to  it,  as 
the  pause  between  fooi  and  ^r—^  is  one  of  minor  impor- 
tance (T  ll.c;  §  10)-third  singular  feminine-absolute  state- 
nominative  case  to  2oai  (§80). 

i)  Y.3.  W.9.,  looij  which  was — compounded  of  looi  and  >♦ 
>  which  is  a  relative  pronoun  (§  l7.2) — is  in  the  third  singu- 
lar— ^nominative  to    looi» 

u)  V.4.  W.I.,  OUiD  in  hirriy  compounded  of  a  in  and  CTL- 
him,  Q  is  a  preposition,  governing  the  ablative  (§75.5); 
Ol-  is  a  suffix  pronoun  (§  l6.Table;  §  52.Table)-third  person 
singular — in  the  ablative  case  and  governed  by  Q  (§  75.5. 
compare  §54.B.l). 


v)  V.4.  W.2.,  t  ■  >  M  life^  is  a  verbal  noun(concrete)(§40Ta- 
ble  A).  It  occurs  always  in  the  plural  form(§44.ßem.6),gener- 
ally  with  a  singular  signification  (vid.Lexicon;  §80.2)-deriv- 
ed  from  |.i-m  to  ?we-appears  in  the  emphatic  form,like  other 
plural  forms  mentioned(§44.Eem.6  and§45.Rem.)though  this 
is  its  usual  form.  It  is  an  anomalous  noun  having  no 
regular  declension-third  person  plural  masculine  (§45.Eem.)- 
nominative  case  to  fooi  (§80.2.6). 

lu)  y.4.  W.4.,  [.t^o  and  life — compounded  of  the  conjunc- 
tion  0  and,  and  |Aja  life.  This  is  parsed  like  the  same  word 
above,  only  it  is  in  the  nominative  to  a  plural  verb  (§80. 
2.  a). 


EXERCISE  EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  803 

x)  Y.4.  W.5.,  ^oauA^I  was,  literally  were  —  third  person 
plural  masculine,  and  agrees  with  |I!aj  in  gender  and  num- 
ber (§80.2.a;  vid.also  c.  and  d.  supra). 

y)  V.4.  W.6.,  IjOIQJ  light,  is  a  verbal  noun  from  JOU  to 
shine — an  infinitive  form  in  the  emphatic  state  like  ll^QD 
from  ^J4^  (^  40.Table,  IT.  A.  a).  Infinitive  absolute  50U, 
>CJU  or  )00U,  emphatic  state  ftou,  IjOU,  1>01QJ»  The  !^ 
which  appears  in  the  infinitive  is  here  dropped  (compare 
§39.2.fe.and  §40),  though  the  emphatic  form  is  the  one  in 
which  it  usually  appears-declensionIY.(§45.masculines,D)- 
third  person  singular-masculine-emphatic  state,  and  in  the 
nominative  case  after  ^oouA^j,  but  used  as  the  construct  be- 
fore J  of  the  next  word  (§74.2.a). 

1)  V.4.  W.7.,  }•!  k\ny  of  the  sons  of  men,  a  composite  noun 
(§41.1)-compounded  of  j,  oJili  and  \mS\*  >  o;^  is  a  sign  of 
the  genitive  case,  which  follows  (§74.3).  .»JLO  sons,  is 
from  \ti  son,  primitive — anomalous.  Singular  absolute  ;ii), 
construct  ;i2.  emphatic  1;^,  plural  absolute  ^iin,  construct 
» »TO,  emphatic  (aJ^  (§49.masculines)-third  person  plural- 
masculine-construct  state(in  form  and  because  the  next  noun 
is  in  the  genitive)-genitive  case,  though  in  the  construct 
state,  as  sometimes  occurs  in  Hebrew  (vid.  Stuart's  Hebrew 
Grammar,  §434.  5),  governed  by  }  (§74).  (aJ  man,  is  from 
uul,  the  1  being  dropped  (§12. 3. a)-derived  from  theHebrew 
word  "^iji^  ^«w  (Chaldee  tlJn^^sjVa  primitive  noun-declension 
1,  but  somewhat  irregular  (vid.  Lexicon) — third  person 
singular  as  it  has  not  Ribui,  though  it  has  the  same  form 
which  appeal's  in  the  plural-masculine  emphatic  state  abso- 


804  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

lute  and  construct  ,mjl,  emphatic  fmj],  absolute  plural 
^ftjf  or  lAJf-genitive  case  and  governed  bj  the  preceding 
noun  juliD  (§74). 

2)  V.5.  W.I.,    0010    (vid.swj9ra  e). 

8)  Y.5.  W.2.,  1jOlGüZ/,]9'Ä^,is  in  the  nominative  absolute,  with 
the  participle  jOUSd(§76.1).  For  farther  explanation  of  the 
word  vid.  y  above. 

4)  V.5.  W.8.,  pQLmij^m(?!Ae)5?arÄne55,is  compounded  of  the 
preposition  d  in^  and  pQmj^  darkness.  )2Qjlm  is  a  sub- 
stantive noun  (the  Hebrew  form  is  "ntfrf)  3-  verbal  noun) — 
declension  fourth  (§  45.  masculines  D) — third  person  singu- 
lar masculine-emphatic  state-ablative  case  and  governed  by 
a  (§  75.5). 

5)  V.5.  W.4.,  JOlJisOpermzV^m^  to  5A^7^e-a  participle  from  the 
irregular^, active  intransitive  verb  (§20.2)  jou  to  shine  (83) 
-in  the  Aphel  conjugation  (§  19  Table;  §  19.B.4;  §  28.1)- 
an  active  participle  (§19.B. 4;  §28.1).  It  is  used  here  for 
the  third  person  singular  of  the  present  tense(§64.2.A.Rem.) 
and  rendered  the  same  as  though  it  were  a  verb  (vid.  Trans. 
^I4)third  person  singular.  Conjugate  to  the  place  where  it  is 
found.  Preter.  Peal  >0U,  preter.  Ethpeel  jOuZf  (§  l9.Table 
II,  and  §21.1),  preterite  Pael  höU  (§l9.Table  II,  and  §22.1), 
preterite  Ethpaal  joiiZf  (§  19.  Table  II,  §  22.  1  and  Rem.), 
preterite  Aphel  JOijf  (§19.  Table  II;  §28.1),  future  Aphel 
joiaj  (§19.  Table  II;  §19.B.2,5;  §28.1),  imperative  Aphel 
jOIjI  (§  19.  Table  II;  §  19.  B.  1;  §  28.1),  infinitive  Aphel 
bjoiii  (§19.Table  II;  §19.B.8  and  9;  §28.1)pai:ticiple  active 


EXERCisi:  p:ighteenth — paksing.  805 

Aphel  jauSl5(§19.Tab].eII;  §19.B.4;  §23.1).  It  is  found 
in  the  Aphel  conjugation-active  participle — masculine  gen- 

jOiQJ  (§  64.  1.  A),  or  is  absolute  with 
it.  ' 

6)  Y.5.  wo.,  PQä-ajO  and  *he  darkness.  O  is  a  conjunc- 
tion as  above,  and  PQlä->j  is  in  the  nominative  case  to 
oi_Ojj|.     For  fartlier  explanations  see  4.  supra. 

7)  V.o.  W.7.,  01-0j>(  comprehended  it^  is  an  irregular  ac- 
tive  intransitive  verb,  composed  of  ^jj  and  OU»  Irregular- 
active  voice-intransitive  (§19.Tablel)-indicative  (§65.1.B.b) 
-Aphel  preterite.  The  usual  form  is  yS}\*  When  the  suffix 
is  appended,  the  final  vowel  of  the  verb  is  dropped  (§15.3) 
and  the  last  consonant  forms  a  syllable  with  the  suffix  Ol— 
It  is  in  the  3rd.person  masc;  Peal^^jj,  Ethpeel  j^JJm,  Pael 
^>j,    Ethpaal  »^»JM»  Aphel  »^Jjl,  and  agrees  with  its  nom- 

inative  PQä«aa»  The  suffix  OL.  is  a  personal  pronoun — 
third  masculine  singular-accusative  case  (§54.B.l)  and  gov- 

erned  by  ^>?|» 

8)  V.6.  W.I.,  |oCFi  yjas^  is  a  Lomadh  Olaph  verb — Peal — 
active  voice-3d.  singular-masculine-indicative  mood-present 
tense  (32.1)  and  agrees  with  \M2\Ci  (vid.  T18.c). 

9)  V.6.  W.2.,  ]M2'r^  son  ofman^  is  a  composite  noun  (§42. 

7  0^  7       , 

1)  compounded  of  \Ci  son  and    «ajI  man      \a  is  a  primitive 

noun — anomalous — singular,  construct  (vid.  paradigm  §49. 
masculines) — third   person    masculine  —  nominative   case 

to  lopi»  )aJ  man,  is  a  noun  derived  from  ,Jkl\  man — prim- 
itive— declension  first^third  person  singular  masculine-em- 
phatic state-in  the  genitive  case  and  governed  by  \^  (§74; 
118  I).         • 


306  EXERCISES  IN  SYRIAC   GRAMMAR. 

10)  y.6  W.8.,  J>A»1>  who  was  senilis  compounded  of  >  who, 
and  9>Ä«1  loas  sent,  j  is  a  relative  pronoun-third  singular  mas- 
culine,  a  prefix,  and  m  the  nominative  case  to  >>A*|  (§l7. 
2  ;  §56).  '>A«|  is  a  verb  in  the  Ethpaal  conjugation — pas- 
sive voice — regular — third  singular  masculine — indicative 
mood — preterit  imperfect  tense  (§60.4),  and  agrees  with 
its  nominative  >♦  Peal  J>#,  Ethpeel  >>A»1,  Pael  b*,  Eth- 
paal  >>A«|*     In  Ethpaal  and  the  other  passive  conjugations 

•  is  transposed  (vid.T15.2.a). 
■»» 

11)  V.6.  W.4.,  ^io/ro77z,  of,  is  a  preposition  and  governs  the 

ablative  case  (§75.5). 

12)  Y.6.W.5.,  loi!^  Ood,  a  noun — declension  first — third 
singular  masculine — emphatic  state — ablative  case,  and  gov- 
erned by  ^  (§75.5 ;  118.^). 

13)  V.6.  W.6.,  cnUlM  his  name,  compounded  of  So»  name 
and  Ol— his.  SO»  is  a  noun  from  ^oi — anomalous — third 
singular  masculine.  Absolute  and  constr.  sing  alar  ^»,  em- 
phatic Uq» — suffix  state  OlSO»  (vid.  paradigm,  §  49.  mascu- 
lines). JL  of  the  absolute  state  falls  away  in  the  emphatic 
state,  and  from  the  emphatic  is  formed  the  suffix  state  by 
dropping  1  and  adding  01 — (§46.1.a) — nominative  case  to 
]oC7l  .-»OIoAaI  was  (implied).  In  reference  to  looi  •-lOloA.»') 
(vid.T"18.  b  and  c).  (n^  his,  is  a  suffix  pronoun,  third  sing- 
ular masculine  (§l6.Table)-genitive  case  (§54.B.  2)  and  gov- 
erned by  SO»  (§16  ;  §16.B ;  §74). 

14)  y.8.  W.7.,  ^-l»MCLk  John,  a  noun  proper-anomalous- 
third  singular  masculine,  absolute  state-nominative  case  af- 
ter looi  %a010A^|« 


EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PAKSING.  307 

15)  V.  7.  w.  1.,  pOl  samCj  this — a  demonstrative  pronoun, 

p  ''> 
singular,  masc.  nominative  case  to  IZ]  (vid.  ^18.  h). 

16)  V.  7.  w.  2.,  121  came — Lomatli  01ai3h  (]]) — active 
voice-Peal  conjugation-pret.  imperfect-3d  pers.  singular, 
masc.  indicative  mood  and  agrees  with  poi  (§27  Tab.;  §32). 

17)  V.  7.  w.  3.,  IZojOim^/or  a  witness — compounded  of 
^for,  and  fZojOlCO  witness.  iZojOlfiD  is  a  noun  derived  from 
the  verb  joiflo  to  witness.  The  form  JOlco  appears  as  a  noun 
of  the  2d  declension.  Absolute  and  construct  ?C5lCD,  emph. 
IjOico  (§45.  masculines  B).  The  feminine  absolute  has  the 

10  0 

jOlCD*  In  many  nouns 
Z  is  inserted  before  the  final  1  in  the  feminine  ;  O  with  Z  is 
also  sometimes  inserted  (§45.  3  and  Rem.  3)  as  in  this  word. 
It  has  the  form  here  of  the  emph.  feminine.  That  indeed 
seems  to  be  the  usual  form  in  which  the  word  appears — 
3d  pers.  singular,  dative  case  and  governed  by  i^  (§75.  1). 

18)  V.  7.  w.  4.,  ?0l  .m  l?  who  shall  {should)  hear  wit- 
ness— compounded  of  ?  who,  and  >oi  m  \  shall  (should) 
bear  witness,  or  cause  to  bear  witness  (§23.  2.  a) 
yd,  m  .1  IS  a  verb  from  joico  to  beget,  to  bear witness-A-ph. 
conjugation-active    voice-regular    (§26)-intransitive.     3d 

sing.  Peal  joifio,  Ethpe.  JOifioZ],  Pa.  JOiflO,  Ethpa.  'CncDZ]^ 
Aph.  pret.  ?0iCDf,  Aph.  fut.  jOlfi£U-fut.  tense,  masc.  gender. 

7 

In  the  fut.  Aph.  3d.  masc.  usually  we  find  -  in  the  last  sylla- 
ble  ;  but  sometimes  as  here  we  have  —  (§23.2,  where  are  ex- 
amples, with  I.  in  the  last  syllable.  Compare  §19,  Tables  I 
and  II).  The  future  tense  is  here  used  in  the  sense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood  imperfect  tense  (§61.  3.  A.  b)  and 
agrees  with  its  nominative  ?  ♦     ?  is  a  relative  pronoun-3d 


308  EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSING. 

pers.    singular,    masculine-a  prefix-nominative    case  to 

jOT_mJ(1fl8.0.., 

19)  V.  7.  w.  5.,  v^  to,  against,  on  account  of,  o/-pre- 

position  governing  poiOJ . 

20)  V.  7.  w.  6.,  IjOIQJ  %7i^-verbal  noun  from  Sou  to 
«Äme-declension  fourth,  3d  pers.  singular,  masculine,  em- 
phatic state,  ablative  case  and  governed  by  ^\l  (T[18.  y). 

21)  y.  7.  w.  7.,  *Alioj-compounded  of  j  that,  )^  all, 

every,  and  «aj  man-}  is  a  conjunction  (§85.  3  «fc  4,  c?)-prefix 

connecting ?CT — mj  and  ^  V)>OU^  -^  ever?/,  a??,  is  a  pro- 
noun, but  here  used  as  an  adjective  (§58.  B.  2.  b.  a)  and 

belongs  to  ^mi  ♦  For  declension,  etc.  vid.  •[[IS.  L  *-*!  man, 

IS  a  noun  from  «-aJ  I — declension  first,  but  is  somewhat  irregu- 
lar-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.  absolute  state,  nom.  case  to 

^^■v^iOlJ,     For  further  explanations,  vid.  ^  18.  1. 

IS  7 

22)  V.  7.  w.  8.,  ^-ia»C7U  migJit  helieve-a.  verb  doubly 

irregular,  ]2)  and  ^,  and  is  placed  among  the  defective 

verbs  (§35.  2.  c).     In  the  Aph.  conjugation.  Pe.   ^1, 

Aph.  ^SOftGl,  future  Aph.  ^J^^cru-active  voice-intransitive- 
3d  pers.  singular  masc.-future  tense  and  used  in  the  sense 
of  the  subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense,  and  agrees  with 

its  nominative   —ml  (comp.  ^18.  18). 

23)  V.  7.  w.  9.,  Ol^pD  through  or  hy  the  hand  of  him. 
For  parsing,  vid.  ^  18.*  w.,  where  the  same  expression  occurs. 

24)  V.  8.  w.  1.,  P  not,  is  an  adverb  and  qualifies  looi  ♦ 

25)  V.  8.  w.  2.,  001  he,  is  a  personal  pronoun  separate- 

3d  pers.  singular  masc.  and  nominative  case  to  looi  (comp. 
1fl8.e). 

26)  V.  8.  w.  3.,    |ooi  was-Qji  irregular  verb  agreeing 

with    001  for  its  nominative  (vid.  1[18.  n). 


EXERCISE  EIGHTEENTH — PARSING.  309 

27)  V.  8.  w.  4.,  |>01QJ  light-Q.  noun   and  nominative 
case  after  looi  ( vid.  ^18.  y), 

28)  V.  8.  w.  5.,  Ul  hut-Q.  conjunction,  a  contraction  of  f] 

»of,  and  \T  -i/" ;  it  continues  the  sense.  Following  this  and 
preceding   the   next  word,  there  is  something  implied ; 

after  Ul  supply  IZo^OimA  121  came  for  a  witness,  the  same 
which  is  expressed  in  verse  7.  For  the  remaining  three 
words  of  this  verse,  vid.^18.  18,  19,  20. 

29)  V.  9.  w.  1  and  2.,  jOCTi  »jiOIoA^]  was-a,  verb  and 

agrees  with  pOlQ-J  understood,  poio-j  poi  that  light, 
being  implied.     For  parsing  this  verb  fully,  vid.  ^18.  b.  &  c. 

30)  V.  9.  w.  3.,  Jo-. /or,  is  a  conjunction  continuing 
the  sense.  ^ 

31)  V.  9.  w.  4.,  poiQ-J  Ught-a,  noun-nominative  case 
after  fooi  *aOloL^  (vid.  •[[18.  y). 

32)  V.  9.  w.  5.,  1>^»?  o/"  frw#A-compounded  of  j  of,  and 

!>;•  truth,  lij»  is  a  noun  derived  from  the  verb  >;*  to  he 
co^ivmced-declension  first  (vid.  §48.  A.  decl.   1.  Kem.)- 

singular.  Construct  and  absolute,  'r»  or  j;*,  emphatic   p^ 

''  7 

forming  the  emphatic  state,  from  'r**  -  falls  away  on  ac- 
count of  the  addition  at  the  end  (§15.  3),  then  -^?  pre- 

7 

senting  two  vowelless  consonants,  ?  takes  the  new  vowel  - 
(§15.  4.  h)-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.-genitive  case  after  > 

(§74.  2.  a).    The  expression  li'r*?  1>01Q-J  is  an  instance 

in  which  the  abstract  noun  \y^  has  the  sense  of  an  adjec- 
tive, and  the  phrase  is  properly  rendered  the  true  light. 

7  7 

33)  V.  9.  w.  6.,  jCFUlJ^J  which  shineth,  or  having  shone- 
compounded  of  Soi  1  V)  shineth,  or  having  shone,  and  ? 

7  7  7 

which,     SoLa-So  is  an  Aph.  participle  from  Sou,  absolute 


310  EXERCISE   EIGHTEENTH — PARSmG. 

with  >  (1[18.  5).  y  which,  is  a  relative  pronoun,  nomina 
tive  absolute  with  jcLj-Si)    (§76.  1 ;  ^18.  3). 

34)  V.  9.  w.  7.,  *Ä,-i-^ajk  upon  every  man,  compound- 
ed of  !^  upon,  ^  every  and  *j*1  man.  1^  is  a  preposition 
governing  the  accusative  or  dative.    i3  is  a  pronoun  used 

adjectively  and  belongs  to  **-i  (vid.  18.  I).  **!  is  a  noun 
in  the  accusative  and  governed  by^  (1[18. 1,  9,  21). 

35)  V.  9.  w.  8.,  1^1?  who  comes,  composed  of  >  who,  and 
}l\  comes.  IZJ  is  a  verb-Peal  conjugation,  present  tense, 
and  agrees  with  its  nominative  j  (If  18.  16). 

36)  Y.  9.  w.   9.,  1V)  Nn  ^  into   the  w;or?c^-compounded 

of  ik   into,   and   ^Sü-^   the   world.     ^   is   a   preposition 

governing  the  accusative.   (V>  \\  is   a  noun  from  V)\s 

second  declension.   Absolute  and  construct  ^\\,  emphatic 

ISnSs^  In  SflXl  the  final  vowel  —  falls  away  in  the  em- 
phatic state  as  a  syllable  is  added  (§15.  3)-3d  pers.  sin- 
gular, masc.  accusative  case  and  governed  by  -^  ♦ 

37)  V.  10.  w.  8.,  (the  seven  preceding  words  are  ex- 

plained  above).  01.1^-«  hnew  Aim-compounded  of  Ofl-  him^ 

7  7*  ^ 

and  ^r»  knew,  ^r»  is  a  verb  with  a  suffix  pronoun  at- 
tached to  it-derived  from  the  Hebrew  3?!*' ^o  know,  doubly 

anomalous.    *j^  and  ^-Peal  preterit  -3d  pers.  singular, 

masc.  indicative  mood  and  agrees  with  l^^i^  ♦  By  taking 
a  suffix  the  usual  form  is  changed.     The  common  form  of 

7X1  7 

the  Peal  preterit  is  ^r»  ♦  -  falls  away  and  --  falls  back  upon 
the  first  radical  when  the   verb  takes  a  suffix  (vid.  §36). 

ail  is  a  suffix  pronoun  with  its  union  vowel   (§16.  Tab.  a) 

-3d  pers.  singular,  masc.-accusative,  and  governed  by  ij- 

(§54.  B.  1). 


ill 


CHRESTOMATHY. 


5'i 


313 


CHRESTOfflATHY. 

FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATINO. 
John  i.  1 — 10. 

♦  l^k)  001  looi  »aOioA^t  lbi!L6  ♦  loi!^  Zol  Iboi 

^jiD     ZOOI    IrA»     Pal     ^JiOlOpllsO    ♦  focn     Olri]^     \^  3 

♦  fooij 

]jd.k±0)    (90103    ^OOUAa]    Va^O   «  (001    U^    OllD  4 

<»  012>>1     |J     PQJLmO    *•  90UiO    pQa»»n     |901QJ    0O10    5 

«  ^JLmOi    Olio»     I  \GL^    ^    '?^l?    )ÄJ*r2     (OOI  6 

.  »<         7  P    •    »>  »-P  *>        tt       ^  -«7         a^P*  *.  Dm        »P»«f     ^P     P 

^Icitou  ,aii\n>  «])Oia-j  \yA  >oimj>  (Zo>oiml  |Z]   poi  7 

*  oi%jo 
«I'CJiQJ  ^  joimij  VV  ♦  I'jCJiQJ  Iboi  ooi  P's 
Y2Tj  >«iSn\  ioiisbj  ••  Ir^j  Vjoiqj  -^"^  looi  *^oioLf  9 

fl'  Ikilio    ♦  Iboi  01^1-Q  V-LoLio  ♦  looi  ]  'snSvn  10 


314  CHKESTOMATHY — FIEST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

Matthew  ii.  1 — 10. 
3  ^>   msq»*    ♦  Oil  y->,mV)\  ^Z(o  (i^i/>>«^   oirüOQO 

9QL^|  ^11   t-J|  ^f>    ♦  oJOfOja  oZ  «aOLiJoA»j.ns|9 

9  loiO   ♦  oLll     pi^    ^    QlSüS    p    ^J    ^QJOI*     ♦  Oil 

]Sd^  ^bousi'rO  looi  ^iV  1ili|V^o  oijai  odi  ^riooi 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.         315 

Mark  xiv.  32—42. 


♦•uoiOj^SßikAl  -^lo  ♦^SQflDjo  M'roA^?  IhIiAooA  oZ|o*32 
jdooiJAo  ]£)]iiL  oisiii  '^jo*  »pi  ]]^  yi  ]oicn  qäZ 33 
•  .oailb  ^to*  •  oniZASiQ^o  O'^SooASd^  «^*»o    ^1>1q^o  34 

]»>n«V)  Aj  jooi  ]]^o  »U'l  ^^^-^  ^^iikjo  VuSkO  ^S'rOO*  35 

(Zjo ^  •  »A^j  iJj  .A*> .>i»n.  (J  Ul  ♦  poi  (mo  wiJio  j^ii( 31 

^ollZ  jj)  qI.O  O'rulZZl*    «  O'rlZASül    lAl«  1^^  Am^Oa]   }J  38 

o»n»l  «2oZ  1Z|  ^010'*'   «^1  |A^lD  %^oio  ^a^.  «i^oZ  ^o 

■r      p         p  "7  ••?       I    7         «»  ••  7      7  «^      -R  I         7         7         ♦      1» 

P  £>0,I>-Rl77,0  I  ■»  l"»»  7 

laio   ♦lAi«  ZZlo  lZ*rJ^  A^!^  *ci*x^lL]o  ^^^r^  aok)) 

*  «a1^  y)SaV>>  oai   .2*£) 
<  ♦ »       

Luke  xxiii.  18 — 27. 

%*'r»0    pOlii   4^01  >\on»  ♦  ^;!^|0     [mid  Oli^D  ^J   QlJD*  18 

?  I7>7  I7i»'X'f*  »7  7  777  7 


316         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

20^OaiSQl  >5iSD  ^J   ^oZ*      Or*^!    ^^-»^    l^^l    JlOJ    IJ^JOO 
21  OOGI  ^->AO   ^)  ^QJOI'^      *  ^0«i\  VrAJ)  ]^  •   ^   ^QOQ^^o^ 

^0  O  ^P»  t       *  ■"      ■«  «P    P-  7  I  •«     «P      P  "^  t  ^^ 

X  ■^  10  ^     ""  Ik  *  ti      p  p         y 

23  Oil  oooi  ^-ä^Jäo    •.  ]lDj  IJnQ  oooi  ^lOoZ  ^j  ^ojoi* 

■^  y         y     •«        17 

* a!i]s>  ooi In^isl  Zur^  looi  tso)  U^o  .mimfc^'l  ^\^> 
'6 \ Oil  ^\noV>  po*  ♦  .CPU I n  A  ;>q1ä1  ^j  ^oai\ 

7  p  *pi  ■»»iNpppi'X  -x  T'  r  f 

^aOloliL   qSQ£0O     *•  ]Lk'rO  ^  ]l]f  ]i,1>>QjO  ^SV^a\  0^^! 

P*>  '^pp  .-^p  ».-n  *P  7■^  px 

2711    QflD   OIJASJ    loOl    Ulo*      ♦^QAaJ    OlJAo    ^A^J?    ]SL,^] 

7  P  0  y  0  7  'T<7'R«  0  7 


«1»..     p..     77     7  «v«x«,»p«p  -"7  P-x  '^ 

*  pOlO  .Jk2)>0  .OOlXi)  ^OOL^  |001  ^^O    «  ^OUJQ£2£)p> 
2*  coil  ^OOlL  V^O*    ♦  .OOlAl^li  loOl'Zj  fOSi  ^J  .pnn^V,^^ 

-^yy1^x7  -nP  -np«  i7-n-xi« 


Luke  xxiii.  33 — 42. 

P7  «vy  0         yypy*»»«.  '•5'' 

33  »^Z  ^OlO^Ol    •.  lA21D*r£)  V»'r^^^?  Ir^  lACJOr^  oZ]  ^O* 

•"Pf«  ■»  7  -^Iy  T,  y  ^ .    0  "      I        "7        0         ^         0  t      7 

♦>m\<r>on  ^  ^o  OU-iIOji  ^  ^^  *.  f  AiLjuO  v^r^OL  «QJOllo 

*  /»  *"  t   *  *"  0     7  *0  7  *  ».     "    *  ■»>  <K 

34  ;a-.    |J    ♦  .OOll    ^On*     (£il    ♦  loOl    'rSOl    ^QlM^    ^J    001* 

•x         «7  ^••k^  7.  -y         c-xy  ip»pp  10 

•oouAi  cul09lo  «^oioAmj  cLylao  *  ^p^  P^  r^r* 

•ny  ivy  -np  py-nP  ^P  ^"^ 

:<5  OI^D  oooi   ^^iniV)V)0   «  IPsjO  ILQI  ^>  loOl  y>p3*     •  ]fiQ£> 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  31t 

^    CIS    0001   ^^k.js»)rik)o*     «lai^>    01  in..    (M..jjAk)3ti 

0      7  n  17  7  -^P  »P  7T>.XI7  1» 

X  P7p7-«P'X  X97'X  7*  *  »  P 

AjI*    ♦  yM2i2  ]^]  V?OCJl^?  1"^NV)  OOl  AjI  ^    ♦  oil  ^'fSiDlo^i^  f^ 

xp-X  7  xp7  """"«^t  ^''PP  P  '^P 

♦Zutk)ooi jo  Aajjo»  •.  ouSd  \>a1  j2l»Adj  "l^iAo  ^1  ^>  looi 

r  t>  -XP  *  '"7  -«P-X..     IP7  7P  xp-* 

^JJOI  .0301  ^  ^>   r*^^     *V>?OOU>  ]n\V)  QJ01    *  ZuVr^^O  39 

•7p^  7  P  •'«7  «7  7  •  I  Ti  7        0      P^^     I 

r^]o  va01o\\1ooi  «^ryv^  *•  oiSüi 0001  ^^a ni\« >lAa  i n 

■»>  P7  7  0       0       7  9  7  0     7  9  1  -x  7-« 

012  1)20^    «  ^  ^]   r^^  yMZn  \^    *.  (»fciaV)  001  Aj]  ^1  40 
Aj]  ^Ij    '.  Aj|   \y-ia>  loilL  ^   U    *a I     ♦  oil    «rSDlO    (J\',£i^ 

Ts  7  "«P  7  Ipi77  px  7  i> 

"rfc-y.    ^001    ^Q»>  »^1    ♦  A^pt)    ^IjaO*    •.  UayS    AjI    OlO  41 
•  oil    H^il    U  PJ»?   5>0rSD   ^J    |J01    ♦^•r2)Z(    .^fOlj   j^lO 

P4v7  5%«^*^"  **  77-«  ,K-n  7-n 

♦  «^ZoolSOO  Aj  I  |Z|>  (k)  ^'rSO  «jLlAp)Zl    «  V&Oai\  'rSolo*  42 


Luke  xxiii.  43 — 53. 

|00lZ  >aV>SplOa>)    *•  «^  p|  *rS0l  ^'^1    •  ^QA^   oil  *rSbp  43 

7P<\         '"*"  ^  ""    «■"••?  7  ■»>         "7  X  p  7       7 

^  PQAaa  |0010    •  As  lis  «^1  ^9  ^OOI  A^l*    *>  tfiCUVrSUD  44 

••77X  -n  -n  »  '^  ..xp  7  7P7  P7.P4^ 

•j^l  ^*;4^l0  ♦  j^ÄA*  (aS£Iä0*  ♦  ^jlI»  ^A1  tOjl  •.  ]li1  Olio  45 

5"  .  ■«      .     P    P      --O  0  -X         -n      P  7  -«7  ■"•»•''  ''  "         ' 

.'rSDlO    PsDj    UQO  ^QA^  jlOO*     ♦  OlAl^  ^  iJlLiOlJ  |l>Z46 
^>  IVm  P*    ♦  J^llsO  jSO I  IjOl  ♦  ^,i^0>  ]j1  2>0]CD  y^r^  .jlJ^  47 

PP  -f  0    1.7  y-npp7  77  P  7  **p.X 

^301  A^Vh;*  ♦•rSolo  loilU   ^w.£i»  ♦looij  y)rSo  ^JOJ^IO 


318        CHßESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

48  0001   ^^i^itn?  ^-Aa]   IjÖd  ^OOiIdO'^    OoOI  "icUJ]   I'r^y 

^-x2)*ri  p  002)01  \looi>  y>^  ov^i  p  *]ya\  ]lu*^ 

49  «jiOIQlo'jLi  |001AO  V^ILmO)   ^  0001   ,^iV^>nO*    *  .OOUpM 
^P^O    ^|J.kJ^.   ^  OlSül^OOl  ^Zl>^->Xftl]AJO    «^QJiui) 

T»  nfl'^^  -»>7  -«77  -n^pr  •*9-"7 

^^|J    POI*    ♦lQa?10    \ni    |001    rr^\     '.JOOUJ    |AXjiySD    |ALd> 

looi     ]nmV)6    «.oou'^omLo   ^ooilLdIIi  Iboi   UiS^ 
52>i{so   •.^CDO^^JÄ  Zaik  ^Q'pO  V>cfi*    .|oiJ^>  1Zon\Vi\ 

-np  PP*  P(77  -«7  ■«  7  «>-l>  «7 

53  01SÜSDO     «IiAd»  1«  ibM>.n    OlDpO    OIZUjIo^     .^QA^)  Ol'ryv^ 

0  X  *  ^I    7  "-11^*  piP9s  ■I>\ 

loqi  %o I mZil  ^^^..kDr^  aul )])  001    « Vr>.QJ  ISon^  Aino 

»012 


Acts     xvii.  22—32. 

*..px7        *7  7^  P7  "%'  't'  or 

22%XäJL\  TiÄ.«    ♦'rJiDl    ^CDOy^a  ^CDa»i{Q   ^CDOAQa  5>Q£)   pO* 

1«  ■^  «^p••'^  t\  '    T.  'KP  «x  *  "7*  * 

Am^osI    «^qdALm)  Zu^  AjiOOI  1v*^o  A^ooi  ^pA!^  ;ji.. 

7«  PX  PP7  .Ti  ^  17  0  0      0» 

001    »lu^t   Iot^j    «01^^  I001  .ruAsj    •.  ly>*  lAli 
poiX  oil  ••oil  ^AjI  ^i,\»o>  ^oAil  ^r*  U  P?   \^-»^C7l 

24Aa|>  liülDO  Uö^  rJ=^?  'r^«  fOLli.*    ♦  ^Oal  pi  ;nmV)  p| 

PP7IP7*..  7  ovorrpo        *.  ^  ■» 

|J  U'r^]  ffi^y  UnaOlO    *.  ]l' l?0   USÜJ»)    I'rSO   OkOOlO    «  OIQ 

e  -»I»  7  PP««7  .•71  1»  77  "»»P  -np 


CHRE8T0MATHY— FIBST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  319 


»  T  *"7  *_    »v 


^O*    «)a^J0Vi-m    .alVnS    .^OU    0019    ^^^4^    ♦,n  110)26 

..  r  J  r  IP«.  -n  pO"  ?7»4.0PJ'  ""7 

-n  xy  ''""t^«  *?o.  *  PP««77ö  -x 

*.  -^  I»?  ?  p-x*  •»»  I  *  -np-n 


I  7        1 


7  X  X  -ft    *  7    *  X  7  -ft^  ••  X      7  1»  p  ..0  p 

•  ^OIQ^   001  OllSO)  O'rSol  ^Q^^>    ]^'^-    ^   \mj]    ^) 

7  -»  7IP7        3  "'••''  ''  ^  *"  xpp..p 

;nmV)\^i»niMtJ  ♦♦ooiloijL^^oia4?^JuJDOi^l*29 


7  P  7.      7 


IZoiiDot)   ]*^»S..>   |2)]al   oi     ♦♦]LD]m\   ol   U^oi^Xj 

77P-X  P  -ft-«..   7  P-X  ^.  ■''.''  PPP7  07  X 

P^      ■•    -X  ^  P   P    "7  -X  t       *>t  ■"      ^.  *P        P     ^   P        7  7  *P    9tt7 

*Aj(  \yi3>  •.  (mj-i.is  .001^01  ,nak)  poi  {i^v^o  ♦1oiJ^ 
^bjjj  r-TAi  oi£)j  IsdqI  y>  >  ol>  ^^i!4^*   ♦  ^ooLi  ]66y  ^^oa  31 

«>  X  7  77P"7P  77  p#>x  •P-XP7 

7  7  i>..  X  -n-n  i>i77  '»'*.P7  p 

QiScs  po*  «lA.»^  tjLd  ^  01 V) » ol  p  oiZoiiOfeOil  ^j1  32 

7  17  -x-ft  ■«..I  -»»I«  pp 

•0001    ^  I  n  >  V^ V)   ^oouiD    *«lA^lo   Zu^   ^>   IAIOb.o 

*P  7P7IP  ^  7P  7  I.p«,  -ft 

*]yai  ^  «^  ^^TiSV)»  ^wl  ^^  *  0001  ^'r^l  tOOii!^o 


Romans    vi.  1 — 10. 

y  r     i>     9    ♦.  rpi       7«p-ft7  7ripöp 

'■^^  t         *      "      «»  *     ^  ^^     ^    X''  P  X  7  X  -ft  •*       "  ^ 


320         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 


py77'»«  '^r  -rs^p-ryypy  i>7ip 

6l'  ^    Xy^^AjJ    ♦  CflSßl   *2ID?1I   (jQ-«Al  ^'r^>  '^y  ^Xi^pi* 

CoLossiANs  iii.  1 — 15. 

P  17        77  7  '"t^^''^  7*>  pipi> 

J  lMcaJfcSo>  )Z)  •QIT)  ^JyiJlj   \U»iaV)  :>OLl  ^oASDD  XU^Ol  ^1* 

P7  9  77-n  ""t^  "     "••      ^  PI7  7  »P 

2»U>ki?     (JO     QliZ"!    ^\lL>*     .loilLj     |liV)»     \)A    ^Aj 

i»P0«^7^P  X  7  -ft  •X»«77  -ft  *>t  '^    1  I       .'^ 

3  >toi2^]£:)|»»,i,in^>Qi,^im")^nni  jmO  .•hl^.  ^oal^oZA^isD* 

«s  7  p  »N.O  ..77».4s  ;j  -ftp^i  7  ''%'^ 

4  .oAj]  .äI  ^r>^    ♦♦^i  JM  OiOOlJ  ]j..Ak5  |fcfcfV)>  ^ASOJO* 

i.     ..    y    0  y  I   .»  17  p-x  -ft7  *'t»« 

5.QnAk)joi    \)uLDoi   oA^ii:!*     .|*j^QmQ   oiSüi   \^^\ZZ 
yZonoXso  .l^t^lA..jo1iEl£)o  fZoai^l^cujf  .U't>? 

-B-X-ftp  -ft  1«.p^^'ft  -ft7  t''*  ^ 

fi  oiu.oj  |Z1  •hu..  ^-Aoi  ^^^4^*    .IpAa  AILmj  *aOi  »jioij 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  321 

7  0  •^P•  p«,r>I  ''*  0  9  ..7  7  00  7 


(sen*  ♦  ^oiQ  ^oZuoai  ^^ i n*^oiAk)  p  *  ^oji^o  ^  ^oAsl^oi  ^ 
Uaaan   «IASQaj  lUtO>  •  ^-Aoi  ^oilo  ^omio  a»<^j1  ^> 

Ö   •^  7  7  I  ^  -X  ^     0  "i    ^  '  l{t  7  P    P  -X 

"   7      0     •>.  X  -x  7  0-^7007  ■*••*' 

7  7  -«PPX  7P7T77*P7  ''«''10 

AjlIj  p*  ♦ou'rOj  jZolCr^  (Air^^  ZjaiASdj  Uh^  oanSo*  11 
•Vi'^-^o  VäJOi  iJo  ♦IZqIjqio  (Z'OUi  Uo  ♦V»lD'1oU?oou 

7  7  T  0  -X  f  ^      0    -K  >••    X  7  P  7        P 

njm\*  >ooi ]» i«V>.«i\noo^\o yl  *.l)V*^*r^o  Ir^oi ]]o  12 

—  •      • 

0       0*.  ■«  7  1»x..7  ■»     X"7  P     P  7        P««  7  7  I    «P 

]ajaO>o  Isom)  *>]ninMO  l^^r^  loiiLj  |>n.>  >^1  ^^y-i^oi 

I-Ä                   7                   7                   ^P7                   71                  7  *s77 

«s                                7                      PX7P77                   PP«s                    -"7  7  P 

P     *>                            ""     t     *"                    t^  '"                   ''                                      ^                          ».7  p  P   7     «P 

77              «px           7                    -^•P7  ^f*»*^             x7^PP  «v'X 

*7                 •X77                  7                  7                    -xi             -^               -ft  *^i''''t* 

^>qVo    .oAaOCFIO    **r.^   r^J^    ^oAu'r^^Z]    01-^9    ♦.QoZorA 

4^«-> 

Revelations    v.  1 — 10. 

pp  pp  7  »P  7  -n  I     7  7^X7 

tDAo     ••^COQJOiZ    ^    .äZuj    OÖIJ    Olli^a    ^   AJ»u*o*  1 

•  '.*..''  X7  p  T,  t\  7  ft  X7 

.Im«  ]iö4^  ^i-»^?  Oj^^aiD  ^o  Q.A  ^  *£i*Aoj 


7X  9v7  P79P  r,  7  P 


»aOIoA^I   ailD  *.^9  poo  ipSo>  tj^^^^'-A-*^  ]2]]SO  A^i^o*  2 


322         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING 

3  go*    ♦•oiXij   P^i^  |;«V^\o    ♦♦pDAal  oaAsiSol  1q*> 
ocn  ♦r'Ojj  Ijm  001     :|>ooijij  IAq'^«  ^j  ooi  Ml  ]di  loi 

PP7  1»  X  pi  7  *P  P*  ■ni7*>.p 

OoilLj  |>jdj  \in*  ^ouAafj  ^^oi  ♦M£i«  U-»^o  ♦\in* 

*  op  77  0*  "^•t^'^t  '"7   7  1»  •"" 

s«^ArA  ommj  po*  ».isqjo^Z  \yA  jdLmj  oäi>  oujlIüa 

f  *..  I7P  7  i*«^.p  PO..   7  77..  -no 

olsU    *,]aiT)  ll^Slo  ^r^Cll  ^010    «UOk^  ^i^j]  ^01 
*  •      •  •  *        _  • 

PP7  ■n7i  1>     0  -'".,'"  ■"  "t^  %"  '' 

fZol.    ^ouA^f)    ^-Aoi      :|V>rnn  ^  ,^»\^?   t^oi» 

*P  IP7P7  P-X  y  177  i*r7 

'•^loJi)    *^'r^l    P    UrM    lAjaQ£l»Z    ^»M>n«V)0*     «lA^r^> 

^    -n  1»      I          1...P  7  7-n7Pp7  '''"t  ''^ 

lA^'^  ^  ^    ♦♦)A^?  pop  fOillJ  ^  Air^io  AmajZ(> 

0]^V<^  ^J   loil|J    ^OjI    Z,£^0*    •.jASOOlo    flülO    \1M^0 

p7  7  X  7  1»..     p 


CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  323 

Revelations    xxii.  1 — 10. 

px  7  -x  '^^P7  •X7  7'^  '^x-^p  -h..7 

IjAj  \oo*  ♦tüSüij  IZoijaDlJ  ♦♦(maJDj  cuoioa'^o  401.:^?  3 

■""»•PO-«  7'      7  P     0  7  0    0         7  -x  ■^-^0 

'^     -I  P     -X  7  -x  ■»>  p  -X  7  -n     I  T\        7 

loou  (J  ^A!io*  ♦^ooiA*>  p-i^  A^^  ^  oiLij  Isqäo^ 

?».7  PP7P-X  0        0  "y,  ■>.  -n  -x       !}  -x 

l>aiQjjo    ♦♦!.;*>  Ijoiqjj  prucm  ^ooij^  loou  Do  ».^oZ 
»onNsnio    ♦^ooil   jotiLd  loilL  Ur^?  ^^>4^    /^aSosj 

PP17         pp        "   r  »*  t""^  t'^       '       *  ^-"p         *..p 

.U'^*r»olAlSaiOÜDlJSO^-Aoi  ♦»A'rSolo*   .]Vr>\v%]VnVA6 

•  cC^^y    P|JSQ2^    ^AJi    «uJ9r»    U^u>    P^oh    |ai^   V>*r^O 

779     1»        *o       *  />        r  "^  %'j*.  "1    *^  «• ''    { 

♦  \)^wiQ  (ooiSo-^  ^ojlj  ^^01    ♦♦oi\*j  f,n\\  a»Q**ia^ 

p     P        7     P      -X  17^   ■«••  7   p  -7        P     P  -X  7  P  -^  P        P 

]:dAdj  iZa-*-^^?  Uiß-^  'r^J?  001  MA£)a4  ♦Xy^  W  U1 1010*  7 

TS  f  7  ^    .0         T,  0  7       0  '7  9     7     0^  0  -K  0  0     0 

Alios  po  : ^^01  ]u*o  MSo»)  001  ^XmOi  IjI  .^lo*  «poi  s 

•7  9*7      7  ••      7       1>  0  7  *  t^  "^  r  7  P   -« 

001   pUiD?  ^oia\..j  yjjO  y..m^\  Alsü  ••AjVmO  V^I 
*^>1Aio  ^♦U  ♦  w»Vm  »jA '^fo*  ♦^u.Loi^'looi  IqjjJ^jq 
ViiAojlJSül  ^'p^J?  ^-Aoijo  .Ui^u  y^j  M?o   /•jZuI 

P      *,  X        7       *    •"••  ♦«  ""V*  X7*  «s  0     0        7  OP 

iZouQJj  |JSüly)oZu*Z|J*a^ -^lo*  .jCL^Ioi^l]  ♦poiio 

7      I  17  ""      *"  ^^     '^  "       "  P     P        7 

♦  •jiOioA^I  «£:Li'rO>  ;a-.  pjDi  001  .]joi  pi^> 


324         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

Revelations  xxii.  11 — 21. 
u#*£3ai  lUt^   •lit?  ocno   ..^oZ  VkOU    •^oiSoj  ooi* 

l^fcTI'!'     ««^^oZ   ^^Aj  lAa^OO    *^Ci0L   .nSl  iZoQa^T  ]Q-i>10 

^1  ^>>\n\  ij-ail  ♦.jlSüI  *Aaj  iLlo   .^\li  1j1  ill 

p      p  7  .7  7  7       P  P  0^  -n     X  p.p  7  X 

13 1^^^  001    «oZo  *si-^  Pi  Pi*   •oiXft>  irTii  ^oioZul? 

^         0  -X      '^       *••(»         -X  "k"     '«      *"  7  P       I  .7  »^  '        _  •' 

J4  .QJOl  .QjI    pAsai*    ♦JSüI^Qä   0010  JmaS  OOl    *U*r»A  ooio 

•  ^OOlXi)    (l^^QS    |00U>    Urul    «Olla)    PrOQ£ll   ^r^^> 

*7        7  •k"^«''       *>-*-«yy       •h..7  p        7  y 

rdio  ^ci^Sy  \oo    «Ip^  « 1  »Af^O  (JQ^OO  *]jJ10  ]s>aO 

•fl^  -Xö  7  X077  -^7  •X'^P''»  P'XPT 

16  .onl  ojoi£qSüL  *.^Aji>  ]ol]iül  Z>j»  ^QA^  p1*  «Uci^.  J 

*^1     .r*0>>    |mi-.  O  VpOl  001  *jAj1    pi    *\l^  5»Oy£)   ^-Aoi 
i7»^'rSo1   lA^O    PaOJO*     .p'rS.    001    *.pJ^^    tOOQO    OOl 

t\     Q  '7  tt     I  "^  7  '7  ^      P  71       ^7      P  7  P 

A^ii  ooio  »IZIj  loi  t  >  0010   .1^  ♦•,io|j  MSü*j  0010   ,]L 

-»>  T>..  7P  -X  P  '»»P  P7  T>7..  p    7..  7    * 

IsVSül    MSü*>     ^^^    111    JOICD*      ♦,;-y^    U>*     l*^     «^mi 

"  «k  *  «>      P  0        0  7  P"       I        7       P       P    ..      7  7  P  P     7 

19  ^Mj]  ^|o*  ♦(joi  (sArir)  ^^Ao>  \ln^^\  »^oiqIi  |oi2siv 

*p  7  P2«^  ''^  *^  'l   *"  X7  P     D        7     ^-^  ••■!*  -»«  77 


oiAiSül  loiiL  5^£u  .Ijoi  IZqulTuj  t)AD>  Msd  ^  )^nj 

p..     17  PX7  .ppl  -h  IN  ..7  P7  * 

^putoj  •.|Ajl*j£5  ^01   |Aia^  ^o    ♦«U^)  ]mjL£)  ^ 

7  «''      »    »ik'  »  -'"P'n  7  .7  7"  PPPP7 

20  \>K^  p1  Ui  ♦♦^I  ♦^loi  joimkjj  OOl  '^LdI*  .]joi  l^Aao 

7P  X  «.''*7P  1N-X  7  1>>'^PPP  X7 

21  Un  |n>i«V)  ^QAji  ^*,10)  OiZq^i^*    *^QAa  'U'r^  IZ     «^-ki^l 

«>^.4l0|  *\M^rO  ^001^ 


CHEESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING.  325 

Psalm  xlv.  1—10. 
.■i«\  :]n\V)N  ^|kii  -^lo  »lü^  UüyiAa  onS  ^ii1*i 

lAljari:)   .^«mnSni    «UonL»)!)   ]2oq1do    ]A»Q£3>   IAIsd 
]r\\n  *  «^Zoj^Z  ^oLzij  IsdSqio  ^jjuiji  ^'j'L.  ^  :yjLjLSa>>5 

Aitcno  IZon^)!  ASqa«)*  : >^Zon\V)>  14^«  l^-u^^  14^^  7 
^Aji  lZorJ^>  1»»«V)  :>^oilk  loilL  .^i»»«v>  Ijoi!::^^  *Vqi 

Z'rl^*    :  ^a>rM   «^ZqL   ^0   "Uju)   )]iLi01  ^    • . . .  •n^K  9 

:  .jbOJ)!  ^^rO  :^v*aO  ^L'^  «inV^»*  «^jlE^o])  ^cn>>io 


Psalm  li.  1—10. 
-'V^t^  lAjuJDO  :Al4^  >^>o»»\n  ^*  *^^La£)  .qj14 


326         CHRESTOMATHY— FIRST  LESSONS  IN  TRANSLATING. 

6^>  Aj]*    :^^^1   ^^Li^  Ioi^mjdo   Ai^iZl    ]]q\d> 

7«fiDo>^    :«jljAi)o]  ^ASooja)  IAjuCODo    «Aa2.  lAsonrs 

:  joL]  lyA^  ^o  ^^^^  «»IiSSm    ♦  ]Dyl]o  ]£iO\Ci  .iSi 

9: »I »A  >jZo\n(ir>  ^ai^o  ««acfi^M  ^  «^->-2)l  «^ctiI* 
10        :  *^Q.^  LfL  ]tial  Vm090  »loilL  ^a  .-I'^o  Voj  t^* 


Psalm  civ.  1 — 10. 

1  IhCIO  ]ail  :  ,Sll  «TD'r»  ^Gl!L  V>'r^  «  V»n^^  wi^£ü  ^^Si\Ci* 
2y^]    U^Q»  ^ASD    :  Uc^'r^  >^1  ]>01QJ  .jjn2Z]0*    *  >M0\ 

3^CTAr^'rlD]JLii^;>Qfloo  t  cuCTio'^r^  ]  ><nn  fjQi*  »lAiji;^ 

5]]>  ♦crujuAk)  ^liil^Z]*  :  ]rCil  ]>qj  >^oioi  ■V)tiV>o 

6  ♦^ouAuXoi  Uo^'r!^  >^1  toooiZ*  :  ^i<n\s  >qLA  ^^jloiZ 

7  j^ulSuiVj  Wo  ^o  ♦  ^>o'rii  »^Zt)  ^*  :  IIsd  qSüo  ]>a4  ^o 
8Ai£)Z>  liZti  ♦lAina  oAajjo  IVq^  ooSm*  t^nnoi^ASo 
9:1i)1]auQmajo  .o;£iDi])  « ^oai!^  ASoco IsoomZ'^'  :.6gi1^ 

xo  \»n\oüD  ])Ci4  Ai.ir^o  «Uilir:)  Uctü^  Lj^m^ 


CHRESTOMATHY. 

NOTES  ON  THE  READING  LESSONS- 


After  having  analyzed  the  first  page  of  the  Chrestomathy,  and  thus 
given  a  specimen  of  the  manner  in  which  the  learner  should  proceed  in 
reading  his  first  lessons  in  Syriac,  it  will  only  be  necessary,  in  re- 
spect to  the  remaining  pages  of  the  Chrestomathy,  to  explain  the 
derivation  and  formation  of  the  most  difficult  words  which  there 
occur.  Thus  the  student  wül  be  thrown  upon  his  own  resources,  and 
be  induced,  it  is  hoped,  to  assiduously  study  his  grammar. 

EXPLANATIONS. 

Matthew  ii.    1 — 10. 

1)  Yerse  1.  word  3.,  r-^^1  is  a  verb  in  the  Ethpeel  conjugation» 
from  r^* 

2)  y.  1.  W.7.,  1  iV)Oi*^  is  compounded  of  O  a  preposition  and 
«.klOCLk  a  noun  of  the  fourth  decl.  construct  plural,  from  ^CLi  * 

7  •»  j>    -n 

3)  Y.  1.  w.  10.,  oi]  is  a  verb  from  }!]  Pe.  pret.  3d.  masc.  plural 
(vid.  |18.  16). 

4)  Y.  2.  w.  5.,  ^^il»i  is  a  verb  from  \\j^* 

r  ft  It 

5)  Y.  2.  w.  10.,  ryimV)  is  a  verb  in  the  infin. pret.,  from  ryh^* 

6)  Y  3.  w.  5.,  ^LilZZ]  is  a  verb  in  Ethpeel  conjugation,  from  ^0} 
or  ^1  ♦ 

*    7  7 

7)  Y.  4.  w.  1.,  «JU2  is  a  verb  in  Pa.  conjugation,  from  ^MlD* 


828  NOTES  ON  THE  CHEESTOMATHY. 

8)  Y.  4.  w.  2.,  .OOlJia-from  i^O  and  takes  the  noun  sufl5x-3d 

masc.  plural. 

••  ^  ^.  \ 

9)  y.  4.  w.  3.,  w»Ä>-constr.  plural  from  «ÄJ  * 

10)  Y.  4.  w.  1.,  ^IäSo-Is  a  part,  from  ^]m  ♦ 

11)  Y.  4.  w.  8  and  11.,  ]6ai jSjTASd^    These  two  words 

indicate  the  imperfect  tense,  the  latter  word  being  a  passive  parti- 
ciple  ( vid.  §  64.  2.  B.a;  §  65.  B.  a). 

12)  Y.  6.  w.  6.,  *jA^001  is  a  verb  in  the  second  person  from  1 001  ♦ 

13)  Y.  6.  w.  12.,  •jDOaJ-third,  masc.  fut.  Pe.,  from  JDSü» 

14)  Y.  6.  w.  15.,  t-iOlGU— Ip  is  a  verb  in  the  fut.  with  suffix,  from 

15)  Y.  1.  w.  8.,  )l-ft^   is  compounded  of  \Lä\   and    iD    (vid. 
Lexicon), 

16)  Y.  7.  w.  10,,  ^\j^L]  is  a  verb  in  Ethpe.  pret.  from  lv>*» 
It)  Y.  8.  w.  6.,  q!^1  is  a  verb  in  the  imperative  from  ^ll  (vid. 

§28.  1  and  2). 

*    7  T»    7 

18)  Y.  8.  w.  1.,  QQiQl,  imperative  from  «JQQI* 

19)  Y.  8.  w.  12.,  *jiOljLJOA**IUi(jiscomposedof  ^OU-meaning 
Äm-3d.  masc.  suffix,    j  that  a  conjunction*-and  JoA»»n»|  a  verb 

7 

in  Aph.  conjugation, 2d.  plural,  from  i»»  >T  ♦ 

20)  Y.  8.  w.  13.,  ol  is  a  verb  2d.  pi.  masc.  (vid.  §  28.  2.  Rem.)- 
imperative  from  |Z|  /o  coT/ie. 

21)  Y.  8.  w.  14.,  t-iJOfOis*  is  a  verb  from  (Om 2d.  masc. 

plural,  imperative,  with  a  suffix  pronoun  (vid.  §  3t.  table  of  verbs  |J 
with  suffixes  ;  §  37.  3). 

22)  Y.  10.  w.  5.,  CLir^^is  a  verb  from  frM« 

23)  Y.  10.  w.  1,  (Aaj  is  an  adjective  noun,  fem.  sing,  construct, 
from  JDh  * 

*In  connection  with  the  preceding  word  H^,  it  fonüs  a  compound  conjunction 

meaning  when.  (vid.  <J  85.  4.  d.  a). 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


Mark  xiv.    32—42. 


24)  V.  32.  w.  4.,  ll'rOAsij  is  composed  of  ^I'^oAk)  and  }  • 
The  relative  J  with  the  preceding  pronoun  should  be  rendered  that 
which  (vid.  §  56.  3.  <i)-(!4;oASo  is  an  Ethpe.  pass,  participle,  from 

25)  Y.  32.  w.  8.,  QsJi-imperative  from  JdAX  (§  29.  2.  Rem). 

26)  V.  32.  w.  11.,  tl^LSD-Pa.  act.  participle  from  l.\#  ♦ 

27)  y.  33.  w.  7.,  0;SqoASD^  is  composed  of  the  prefix  preposi- 
tion and  the  verb — infinitive  Etlipe. 

28)  Y.  33.  w.  8.,  onsZASn^O  is  composed  of  the  conjunction  O, 
the  prep.  ^  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive  from  *OQl  or  *01  ♦ 

29)  Y.  34.  w.  9.,  OQjD-  imperative  from  ]qo* 

30)  Y.  34.  w.  11.,  0'p4:^ZZ]o-imperative,  Ethpe.  from  JOlor^l. 

31)  Y.  35.  w.  9.,  I »»*•>•  V)-Aph.  fern,  participle,  from  «»>n»» 

32)  Y.  35.  w.  10.,  'r^'Z-Pe.  future,  from  'J:^* 

33)  Y.  37.  w.  5.,  ^.i^Soj  is  a  participle,  plural  from  y » V)>  and 
that  from  the  verb  ^k^>  ♦ 

34)  Y.  37.  w.  15.,  O'^ZASO-infinitive,  Ethpe.  from  jQl  or  'J^* 

35)  Y.  38.  w.  2.,  Q^»  ^ra7/-imperative,  Pa.  from  l^t  * 

36)  Y.  38.  w.  4.,  yO^i  {je)shallenter-Pe.  fut.  2nd.  plural,  from 
^orV^I. 

37)  Y.  38.  w.  8.,  ]n  I  ^(}^\  willing-act  part.  f.  Pa.  from  »QQ^^ 
SS)  Y.  40.  w.  9.,  tOOIil  iS  their  ei/es-kom  [IjLL  with  a  plural 

suflBx  pronoun. 

p..         X    7 

39)  Y.  40.  w.  10.,  t,  in»  heavy-an  adjective  in  the  plural,  from 

40)  Y.  40.  w.  13.,  ^^fjk  knew-fvom  ^^^  ♦ 

41)  Y.  41.  w.  8.,  aK»..»jZZ1ore5^3/6-Ethpe.  imperative  from  wmQJ 
or 


330  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

42)  Y.  41.  w.  14.,  ^OL^J^itdD  being  betrayed-Eth^e.  participle  from 

43)  Y.  42.  w.  2.,  ^]ii  future  of  ^l]  to  go. 

■IS  7  * 

44)  Y.  42.  w.  6.,  ^CUkMÜ^D  bäraying- A-ph.  participle  from  ^oN»  * 


Luke  xxiii.    18 — 27. 

45)  Y.  18.  w.  1.,  OLD  cried  out-Sd.  masc.  plural,  from  \LO  ♦ 

46)  Y.  18.  w.  6.,  wiOliNon«  take  him  away-2nd.  masc.  plural, 
imperative,  with  suflQx  pronoun  (vid.  §  36.  E  table  of  suflBxes). 

;mJ-future  from  \'r»  to  rekase. 

48)  Y.  21.  w.  6.,  *jiCru.2)QDl  cri^a/^  ^m-imperative,  with  a  suffix 

r 

from  «£L01  ♦  ^    ^ 

49)  Y.  22.  w.  19.,  ^aiQujh]~I  will  chastise  him-int.  1st.  sing.  Pe. 
from  IjJ  with  a  sufiBx  pronoun. 

60)  Y.  22.  w.  21.,  ^010>n,n«|-J  w?z7Z  /ß^  him  ^ö-future,  Pe. 

7 

1st.  singular,  with  a  suffix  pronoun,  from  QjQs  ♦ 

51)  Y.  23.  w.  3.,  ^moZ  with  0001  urged-Sb  part,  from  t^^oZ* 

52)  Y.  23.  w.  10.,  *.*0LiJQ2lOlJ  (that)   they  shall  crudfy  him- 

7 

pret.  Pe.  fut.  3d.  masc.  plural,  with  suffix  pronoun,  from  %Si£i\  (vid. 
§  36.  Table). 

53)  Y.  24.  w.  4.,  loofZ  should  Jß-future  of  looi  ♦ 

54)  Y.  24.  w.  5.,  tOOlAI^l»  (according  to)  ^Aeir  ^^ire-a  feminine, 
sing,  noun,  with  a  plural  suffix  (§  16.  Table). 

•X  0  f: 

55)  Y.  25.  w.  16.,  tOOll  «n»    their  will-&   noun   with   a   suffix 
plural  from  ,^i>*^ •  ♦ 

56)  Y.  26.  w.  2.,  ^^iNqqSd  leading  or  causing  to  lead  away- A^iii. 
part,  plural  from  nSO*  ♦ 

57)  Y.  26.  w.  4.,  0^1  laid  hold  of-from  r^\  • 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHKESTOMATHY.  33 j 


58)  V.  26.  w.  13.,  A^J  might  carry-M\xre  from  -L^, 

p     „     y  ^  y 

59)  Y.  21.  w.  8.,  \r^^  bewailing-Aiph.  part,  from  -D> 


Luke  xxiii.  33 — 42. 


60)  Y.  33.  w.  5.,  tl^oASDcAZZft^-Ethpe.  pass,  participle,  from  V;r>» 

61)  Y.  34.  w.  t.,  JDOn* /w^it-e-imperative,  from  «nn»  ♦ 

62)  Y.  34.  w.  16.,  Oi^jK  ca^^-Aph.  3d.  plural  from  \Idj  ♦ 

-Äff  ff 

63)  Y.  35.  w.  1.,  ^]d  sta'ndi7ig--paiTticvp[e  from  ^QD* 

1»  ff      r 

64)  Y.  35.  w.  12.,  hr^Ji  to  o^^rjf-plural  from  ^jLl-with  the 
prefix  prep.  Lomad. 

X  7  ff 

65)  Y.  35.  w.  13.,  «.i-aaI  saved- Aph.  pret.  from  \jlj>** 

^  -R      7  ^ff 

66)  Y.  35.  w.  14.,  JwJ  shall  save-A^ih.  ftiture,  from  [ao^* 

17       7 
61)  Y.  36.  w.  1.,  ,^  I  ►  »1  ^ V)   Tnocking-ipnTt.  from « »Q *^  ♦ 

68)  Y  3t.  w.  8.,|l»j  5are-imperat.  Aph.  from  |1-m# 

77« 

69)  Y.  42.  w.  3.,  ^AJLä'fDJL]   remember  we-imperat.  Ethpe.  with 

7 
Buf.  from  JOj  ♦ 


Luke  xxiii.  43 — 53. 

TO)  Y.  45.  w.  3.,  ^'^ .  1- iüa5  rew^-Ethpe.  part,  from  lu  ♦    ^  i* 
transposed  and  changed  into  i{%  12.  2.  Rem.). 

11)  Y.  46.  w.  3.,  \lo  r^'ce-with  a  prefix  preposition. 

..  » I  7 

12)  Y.  46.  w.  1.,  «^;ato  into  thy  haTids-from  fA  with  a  prefix 

preposition,  and  a  suffix  pronoun. 

13)  Y.  46.  w.  8.,  ^]SD  conßding-Pe.  act.  participle  from  ^QflD  •» 

14)  Y.  48.  w.  4.,  ^jkJuJLO-  came  together- A^.  pret.  plural  from 

"^^^^ 
'    OF  TfiK 


332  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

T5)  Y.  48.  w.  16.,  tOOUrAi  tJidr    breasts-from    ytf**  with  sui 

plural. 

T6)  Y.  49.  w.  1.,  ^^  t     V)  I  n  standing-]^a.Yt.  Pe.  plural  from  ^CLD  • 
*7t)  Y.  49.  w.  6.,  «ji01Q^0,a  his  acquaintance-ivom  y^O^  with 

euflfix. 

T8)  Y.  51.  w.  7.,  I n m V>-^;<2i^2??g--participle  from  \D£D  * 
19)  Y.  53.  w.  1.,  cyiLKä\^took  dowTir-Aph.  pret.  from  AmJ • 

^9  1  7 

80)  Y.  53.  w.  8.,  |;im  dug  out--pavt.  passive,  Peal  from  ;nj ♦ 

81)  Y.  53.  w.  13.,  ULtOill'^was  Zdii^-Ethpe.  pret.  from  yio. 
I  is  doubled  (vid.  §  12.  2.  Rem  ;  §  31.  2). 


Acts  xvü.  22—32. 


82)  Y.  23.  w.  3.,  j^pAi  passing  ij^-Ethpe.  part,  from  y\D  ♦ 

*  -71 

83)  Y.  23.  w.  9.,  AwJa«]  //oi^?ii-Aph.  pret.  1st.  singular  from 


84)  Y.  23.  w.  14.,  au.Ll  on  it  ^  with  a  suffix. 

85)  Y.  23.  w.  29.,  ;nmV)  ^ecZö^re-Pa.  part,  from  ;Lco  * 

7     7  ■»»  -r»    7 

86)  Y.  25.  w.  2.,  »mLoAmSD  wör^ÄzjTpzTz^-Ethpa.  part,  from  *mSQ»* 
81)  Y.  26.  w.  8.,  .6oC31J  shall  be,  with  ^^SOl  5Ä(wZ^  dwdl-Ye. 

fut.  3d.  plural  of  the  defective  verb  (001  ♦ 

88)  Y.  21  w.  2.,  ^iVn  Äeß^m^-participle  from  (IS* 

17  7 

S9)  Y.  21.  w.  4.,  ^^  I  *^n\V)  ■  seeking,  feding-PeLel  pass,  participle 

*    7 

from  «jZlOI* 

7x7  r 

90)  Y.  28.  w.  4.,  .lit»!  our  Zi/e-pl.  absolute  form  with  suf.  _^ 

**  ••    7 

from  I i  I  »i» 

91)  Y.  28.  w.  5.,   ,^1  iNqZASd    oi^r   77im?2^-Ethpe.  part,  and 
ßuffixfrom^Olor^W 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  333 

92)  Y.  28.  w.  6.,  ^A^l-ore-lst.  person  plural  from  Aj^I  ♦ 

93)  V.  28.  w.  12.,  fCLQ^>  who  with  yo^^-composed  of  #00  you, 
\  with  and  J  who. 

94)  V.  28.  w.  16.,  ^100104   our   offspring-fvom   >OaiQ4   with 
suffix  pronoun. 

7        I    i>     y  0    7 

95)  y.  29.  w.  8.,  ,^1  i*^i  »i  our  debt,  from  «Hi  n  with  a  suffix. 

96)  V.  29.  w.  9.,  'rODClk)  to  //^iTzX'-infinitiye,  Pe.  from  ',^£0. 

9t)  y.  29.  w.  15.,  \Si^^y%^  written  ov  graven-]^^vi\d^\Q,  Pe.  from 

98)  y.  29.  w.  16.,  l2aiSD0i£i  by  art,  from  VZoiiDol^ 

99)  y.  30.  w.  15.,    *Q0Aj   shall   rejpeiit-MmQ   Pe.   from   *QoZ 
or«jaZ« 

100)  y.  31.  w.  6.,  tOjJj  that  shall  jvdge-MmQ  Pe.  from  ^  with 
the  prefix  }  * 

101)  y.  31.  w.  14.,  t  i1*^(0  and  showed,  made  k7ww7ir-Ai^\i.  from 

X  7  *. 

102)  y.  32.  w  8.,  ,^  I O  ■  V) V)  ??ioc^i7i^-partieiple,  Pa.  from  tjOOSD* 


Romans  vi.  1 — 10. 

» •«  7  *  «k 

103)  y.  1.  w.  4.,  (QCÜ  shall  remaiTir-YQ,.  future  from  |C10  ♦ 

104)  y.  1.  w.  8.,  >A^ZZ  5^/Z  Je  A^MTi^aw^-Ethpa.  future  from  >Aa  ♦ 

105)  y.  2.  w.  7.,  tjJ  Ä/kZZ  fc-future  Pe.  from  ]L*^* 

7     7 

106)  y.  3.  w.  6.,  ti^ül>   w?Äo    wen  baptized--pvet.   Pe.   1st.   pi. 

7  •  7 

com.  from  r^^Ql  with  the  prefix  J  ♦ 

lot)  y.  4.  w.  1.,  ^;Q£)Z]  are  buried-Eihipe.  pret.   1st.  pi.  com. 
from  'fCiQ* 

•X        ^7 

108)  y.  4.  w.  14.,  ^^OiaOfjö/Äw/Ä^^r-a  noun  in  the  suffix  state, 


334  NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 

3d.  masc.  siDgular,  from  »ä|  with  the  prefix  j  ♦ 

109)  Y.  4.  w.  20.,  5A0U  should  walk-i\ximQ  Pa.  from  yJ^öX  ♦ 

•K  -ft  7 

110)  Y.  5.  w.  4.,^Q^ZfÄ(2t'6&eß7i^/a7i^ß<^-Ethpe.pret.from*a^< 

111)  Y.  5.  w.  11.,  Toau  shall  Jß-future  Pe.  from  looi» 


112)  Y.  6.  w.  1.,  ^^1  iSf*  Äwöwiw^-partieiple,  with  a  suffix  from 

•  -Hi»  F 

113)  Y.  6.  w.  5.,  «ÄOjll  is  crwq/?ftf-Ethpe.  pret.  from  *2L01  ♦ 

114)  Y.  6.  w.  1.,  ^Jy^Ajj  that  should  he  destroyed-'Eüi^Q..  from 
v^4^  ^th  the  prefix  >  ♦ 

115)  Y.  8.  w.  6.,  ^SOkOU  JßZiere-Aph.  future  from  ^Iso]  ♦ 

116)  Y.  8  w.  10.,  "1*11 5Äfl/Z  fe-future  Pe.  from  ]lja» 

11*1)  Y.  9.  w.  13.,    v^AüiD    heing  ^owerful-'Eih^Q..   participle 
from  ^4-^  * 

118)  Y.  10.  w.  9.,  wft-x»  living-T^diii.  Aph.  from  (aaa* 


CoLOSsiANs  iii.  1 — 15. 

119)  Y.  1.  w.  ^.,  QIQ  5ee^-imperative  of  ^liD  ♦ 

7  7      -^ 

120)  Y.  2.  w.  2.,  Q1>Z)  /e^  your  affections  be  pZaco^-Ethpe.  im- 
perative, from  ]1>  ♦ 

^       '•  y  y  » *    ••  7 

121)  Y.  3.  w.  4.,   tO*^i  ■  »I  2/0 w  life-fvom   fi  i  »t  with  a  suffix 
pron.  and  the  prefix  O  ♦ 

122)  Y.  4.  w.  9.,  tO-i-iZZ  (ye)  shaU  ^pjTear-future  Ethpe.  from 


N 


123)  Y.  5.  w.  1.,  oAxSdI  mortify-Aph.  imperative  from  AaId* 

•X       ••       7     P   7 

124)  Y.  5.  w.  3.,  tnntV)>01  your  memhers-SuS^xstate,  2üd.  masc. 

0  7      \ 
plural  from  pOjOl  ♦ 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  335 

125)  V.  5.  w.  11  and  12.,  «^01  «^Oli«    These  pronouns  seem  to 
include  the  substantive  verb  (comp.  §  54.  3.  a), 

126)  y.  T.  w.  8.,  ^-i.aaoiAk5  turning  or  having  turned-Eth^SL 
from  j^sacn « 

12 1)  Y.  8.  w.  3.,  Q»»  i.l|  ^?6^  ö^i^a^-Aph.  from  %jaQJ  or  «.mJ  ♦ 

128)  V.  9.  w.  2.,  ^OOOlZ  3/ß  5Äfl//  iß-future  from  looi» 

129)  V.  9.  w.  3.,  ^^iS.tySP  iying,  decntfulr-j^SLViicipie  Pa.,   from 

130)  V.  9.  w.  7.,  %.ig1QA».\Q»  put  off,  cast  6^w7ö^i/-imperative  Pe., 
from  %»>■>>•  ♦     It  takes  a  suffix. 

131)  V.  9.  w.  12.,  %aCnQaaocn  his  deeds-suS.  state,  plural  from 
»*  ..p  *,  "" 

(02)001  • 

Z7      7  •       •» 
. ,     pjaASO)  2/)^^  iei/i^  renewed-EÜipüL,  part,  pas- 

•  7  * 

sive  from  Zr**  with  the  prefix  >  ♦ 

133)  y.  10.  w.  6.,  aiä'fC^y  who  created  him-fvom   f;0  with  a  suf. 
pronoun,  with  the  prefix  >  ♦ 

134)  y.  12.  w.  t.,  t^^jJZUiO  and  belaved-^lvLTU  from   fninn 
with  the  prefix  O  ♦ 

135)  y.  13.  w.  1.,  ^AjiOOIO  atid  ye-fvom  001  with  the  verbal 
termination-2nd.  pi  with  the  prefix  O  * 

17  r 

136)  y.  13.  w.  2.,  ^^  *;  *T^  a,im V)  forbearing-F&,  part,  from  ;*irf>» 

137)  y.  15.  w.  1.,  OlSii^O  and  his  peace,  fi'om  |SDAii  with  suf. 
pronoun,  and  prefix  O  ♦ 

138)  y.  15.  w.  4.,  ^QoLq^\  your  hearts,  from  lo^  with  suf.prou. 

•X  I  ■» 

139)  y.  15.  w.  6.,  ^oLä'rDL]  ye  are  mZ/c^-Eth.  2nd.  plural  from 

f\         7 

140)  y.  15.  w.  10.,  ^-ajQuJiJ  thankfulr-^Qxt  active  Aph.  from 


336  NOTES  ON  THE  CHKESTOMATHY. 


Revelations  v.  1 — 10. 


141)  Y.  1.  w.  1.,  AjtpaO  atid  I  saw-X^h..  pret.   1st.  sing,  from 
IVm  with  prefix  O» 

142)  Y.  2.  w.  10.,  «,mA'^V)\  to  open-Pe.  infinitive  from  oaA£} 
with  prefix  ^  • 

143)  Y.  3.  w.  11.,  QUI  M>,V>\  to  look  on  it-in^n.  with  suffix  from 

1v**  with  the  prefix  L  ♦ 

144)  Y.  4.  w.  2.,  A^OOl  it  i^-formed  from  Aa|  and  OOl,  ]  being 

dropped.     The  phrase,  including  the  word  preceding  and  the  one 
following,  means  literally,  it  is  weeping  much. 


145)  Y.  4.  w.  v.,  •^j^Z^I  was  found-Ethpe.  from 

146)  Y.  5.  w.  8.,  |asZ  hterally  thou  shalt  weep-^vadi.  per.   fut. 
masc-put  for  the  imperative  (vid,  §  61.  B.  a). 

14 1)  Y.  6.  w.  6  ,  5»o|o3  to  stand,  ^\0  is  a  participle  from  ^OO 
(vid.  §  64.  3.  B.  Rem.). 

148)  Y.  6.  w.  8.,  ]mini  5/rtm-pass.  part.  Peal.  fem.  from  .mnj* 

149)  Y.  6.  w.  21.,  ^9>As|>  who  were  sent-Z^.   per.   f.  plural, 

,77* 

Ethpa.  from  5J*» 


Revelations  xxii.  1 — 10. 

150)  Y.  2.  w.  23.,  *^01Q2)*p4o  and  leaves  of  it-ixom.  \Si\l  with 
a  suffix,  and  prefix  O» 

151)  Y.  3.  w.  4.,  loOU  shall  5e-future  of  loOl» 

0  -X  7 

152)  Y.  3.  w.  14,,  %^OL>JQmSa«J  ^MZ  5ßrt-ß  Am-fut.  3d.  masa 
plural.  Pa.  from  «aS^Is  with  a  suffix. 

153)  Y.  5.  w.  16.,  )aillO  causing  to  shim-Kph.  part.  masc.  from 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  33t 

154)  V.  6.  w.  15.,  OiOi»V)\  to  show-mfmitive,  Pa.  from  «jiCLm* 

155)  V.  8.  w.  13.,  ryiffl^^^  to  worship,  to  pratse-in&mtivef  Peal 
from  r\!e^  * 

156)  y.  11.  w.  1.,  lUV  ^^^^  beßthy-M.  Ethpa.  from  ]ly 
151)  y.  14.  w.  15.,  toSsi  tkey  shall  enter  z?^-fut.  3d.  masc.  Peal 

from  ^\l» 

158)  y.  11.  w.  4.,  12  cöTwe-imperative  of  IZ]* 

159)  y.  19.  w.  3.,  J^iQJ  äää/Z  toÄe  Ä«;Äy-Peal  future  from  >eO* 


338  NOTES  ON  THE  CHBESTOMATHY. 


POETRY. 


We  present  a  few  specimens  of  Syriac  poetry,  taken  from  the 
Peshito  Bible,  published  by  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society, 
in  1826.  It  wül  be  observed  that  the  text  does  not  appear  in  a 
rhythmical  form,  nor  are  there  any  divisions  into  verses.  The 
Peshito  or  literal  version  was  made  near  the  close  of  the  first, 
or  beginning  of  the  second  century,  while  the  divisions  into  chapters 
and  verses  were  introduced  in  the  thirteenth  century.  Points,  in 
addition  to  Ribui^  will  be  noticed  over  and  under  particular  letters. 
These  are  intended  to  mark  the  occurrence  of  Kushoi  and  Rukok. 

Psalm  xlv.  1-^10. 

1)  Yerse  2.  word  9.,  IjOlL^^  therefore.    This  is  composed  of  the 

conjunction  ^^^^^  ^-nd  the  suffix  pronoun  poi»     Conjunctions  as 
well  as  other  particles  often  take  suffixes. 

2)  Y.  3.  w.  1.,  1Sd>1  cast  (gird)-Aph.  unperative,  from  fcoj» 
See  a  similar  instance  in  Matt.  xvii.  2t. 


Psalm  li.  1—10. 


3)  Y.  2.  w.  1.,  Im^I  multij>ly-imperaitiYe,  Aph.  from  kv^D  used 
here  adverbially  in  the  sense  of  very  muck. 

4)  Y.  2.  w.  2.,  t  i  1 1 . t  ■  •  I  wash  wß-imperative,  Aph.  from  •mQ' 
with  a  suffix  pronoun. 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHRESTOMATHY.  339 

5)  y.  2.  w.  t.,  wklO)  cleanse  we-imperative,  Pa.  from  p>  with  a 
ßüflöx  pronoun. 

6)  Y.  3.  w.  8.,  ,^ni\nn  in  all  Urne,  always-üom  i^  all,  ^\ 
time  and  the  prefix  preposition,  a  in. 

1)  Y.  4.  W.8.,  »D)>lZ>  that  thou  mightest  be  just-Ethpa.  2nd.  sing. 

masc.  future  from  *0>1^     The  preformative  falls  away  as  the  con- 
junction >  precedes. 

8)  Y.  6.  w.  1.,  «.iAAl90|  thou  makest  im  to  know-^n^.  sing.  pret. 

7  X 

Aph.  from  ^r^  with  a  suffix  pronoun. 

9)  Y.  9.  w.  t.,  ii»»\  Uot  (W^mperative  Pe.  from  V»^* 


Psalm    civ.  1 — 10. 

10)  V.  5.  w.  1.,  ^A|  preparad,  laidr-Ethpe.  from  ]1d^ 

11)  Y.  5.  w.  4.,  01 1 1  nASo-participie  with  a  suffix  pronoun  from 

12)  Y.  T.  w.  t.,  ^aäOIjASD  hastening-QXL  Ethpe.  participle,  from 

^019« 

13)  Y.  9.  w.  6.,  OLJOmniO  and  (that)  they  should  not  arcer-M, 
plural,  Pa.  from  (OlD  with  a  suffix  pronoun,  and  the  conjunction  O 
preceding. 


SYRIAC    LEXICON. 


J^X  1^],  suf.  wvsl  a  father,  pi. 
(OLj^l  (ZoUDf  parents. 

|0|  to  perish,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
perish,  to  destroy. 

r  t> 

^ijo]  to  be  sad,  to  be  disturbed. 
\>  i  1  '^l  Abnil  (name  of  an  idol). 
^CJi;£i^  Abraham. 
Ijo.1  m.  a  reward. 
1Z^.1  a  letter,  a  writing. 

P>1  an  ear. 

ol  or. 

-  »p 

0|  0  I  (mark  of  the  vocative). 

AaOO  I  namely,  that  is  (from  Of 

and  AjlO). 

I'ZoiiDo'l  skill,  ability. 

lidDOJ^f.  a  nation. 

Ja£)o1  Ophir  (a  proper  name). 

•u 01)0 1  Edessa  in  Mesopotamia 
(a  proper  name). 

Vm9o]  a  way. 

|A.-i>0|  the  law  book  of  Moses, 
the  Pentateuch. 


^a^Sol  Jerusalem. 

^ll  to  go,  to  go  away. 

\jj\  brother. 

^m]  to  hold,  to  seize,  to  lay 
hold  of. 

l^^l  the  last,  the  end. 

^;jw»l,    P-k>Af    another;    fern. 

VA-a-p-**l,    pi.     m.    ^U*!, 

0     0*^  I 

Vfc.4^Q.fc^|  an  Egyptian. 

Au'l^SJOyj-il    Adverb,    like    the 

Egyptians. 

1^1  hand-in  Hebrew  '^i . 

Ih^I  who,  which,  fern,  of  M-»l« 

^1  SO  as,  according  to,  as  to, 

(secuTidum)  nearly,  J  ^|  just 
as,  therewith. 

|q-^1  where?  J  1^3— »1  there, 
where  ;  P— »|J  whither  ?  ]^-a | 
^Sb  whence  ? 

Q^^l  where. 


342 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


^V 


f    J     » y    ^y 


SO 


^1,  ]lSul  how?  >  ]l2u\ 
that. 

^^iSil  pi.  they. 

^]  truly,  certainly,  yes. 

P-a]  who,  what-|l-»)o  at  what. 

«jQmJCQjiI  Isaac  (a  proper  name). 

^l;£CLkl  Israel  (a  proper  name). 

\^CUk\  honor,  a  mark  of  esteem, 
a  solemn  procession. 

I  7       X 

A—il  it  is,  *jkLä\  1  am,  etc. 
Mr^l  serpent  (s^'^va). 
rM^l  at  the  same  time-together. 
^\ol  to  eat,  to  consume. 

Uv^.^y  just  as,  J  l-SQ-of  of 

such  a  quality  (qualis). 

fa-im   n|  a  stranger,  a  guest 

(is'vo^). 

Wl    but,    yet    (aXXa),    if     not 

(=0  Ö). 


to  lament. 


loiSL  God. 

HCri-iv  godly. 

iZoCJL^  f.  divinity,  the  godhead. 

Vt>,imn  Vv  an  Alexandrian. 

•auSk  Olaph,  the  first  letter  of 
the  alphabet. 


*2l^  to  learn,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
learn,  to  teach. 

f^  vv  a  ship. 

»  ■    vv  to  constrain,  to  compel, 

to  urge  any  one,    •  i  v^  op- 
pressed. 

t*  fc-Ä.  oppressed. 

iSo]  mother. 

r*^\    Amida  in   Mesopotamia 
(a  proper  name). 

I      7        *  17 

^aLdI,  ]i  iV)l,  surely,  firmly. 

^1  Aj)h.  ^IlliOl,  fut.  ^JkliOU 
to  believe. 

10         17 

Lk\\  iV)|  Adv.  constantly. 
;SDf  to  say,  to  speak. 
I^So]  a  lamb. 

7     1» 

%^A!sd1  (with  >  following)  i£ 

Oif. 

0   1»  7 

^]  I,  pi.  ^Lm  we. 

^Q — sl  m.  ,^>   .ll  f.,  that  [as  Aoc) 

«.  X       7 

01  ifcjf     Antinum     (a    proper 


name;. 


1  Ethjpa.  to  sigh. 
ü|  man,  a  certain    man,   pL 

^^i«li  and  \M1\* 


SYRIAC 

|Zqaj1    humanity,    as    concrete, 

mankind. 
A-jV  m.  »-lA if  f.   thou  ;   pi. 

^oAaVm. 

^AjVf.  you. 

|ZAj^  a  woman,  a  wife. 

lioffil  a  healing. 

Xr^Xa  bound,  pi  iVo^T  Ax£) 
a  prison. 

|pQ4co1    stylite   (according  to 

Assem.) 

«fnimfciPl  sedition. 
\^n^]  oil  of  cinnamon. 
lZQl^-r40D!  a  soldier. 

f  I         -n 

ILQa^O)!   external    appearance, 
dress,  (tf^^Sjfxa). 

p  p  IT« 

)jAV>  >  nCY)!  hypocrite 

P  9  P 

•äI  also,  iJa]  neither. 

^>«^1[  V— ^V  face,  ^^^  *jiJal 

over,     «jLall     according     to, 
towards. 

|£}QQmjL2)(  a  bishop. 

•£}  »1  to  be  anxious,  uneasy. 

^lQj(  IHDj]  four. 

p  i-n  * 

]n  I  ^>1  heterodox. 


LEXICON.  343 

p      ' 

fail  a  lion. 

«JDDCLa)  I  Arius. 

"      '  '    f  v  1 

JX)Q.^  JX)CLi>(  Areopagite. 

PQ2>|  a  ruler,  a  chief  man. 
|jL^)|  a  Syrian,  a  Gentile. 

p  y         '^•^ 

(.^n  >  m?l  an  errorist,  a  heretic. 
•TCutDjI  heresy  (aJ'^stfij). 
(l)|  earth,  land,  country. 
i^O#  I  to  find,  Ethye.  to  be  found. 

■»>  ..  y        p        -n 

ISOQ..^  2A»1  the  six  days  work, 

the  creation, 
p "» 
|Z1  to  come,  A^A.   to  lead,  to 

bring,  to  conduct. 

y     y     p        y 

>21,  |>Z|  a  place,  a  region. 

«iD  in,  from,  through,  to. 
1il\]a  a   possessor  of  a  bath. 

t         y      I 

2>ot>,  "tol^  a  pulpit   {ßriiia), 

»>         y 

^Q.»  p£i  hence. 

ZoiQ  to  be   ashamed,  Apk.   to 
make  ashamed. 

p  y     * 

]ZZcTLD  shame,  disgrace. 
V^Q^Q^,  «-iZoikQ^  a  counselor, 

10  P     -K 
So — QDQ— JD     agreeableness, 

amiableness, 
|9Q£^  awkward,  uneducated. 


344 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


»pD 


»»QO  Pa.  t»il*S  to  deride,   to 
mock. 

9  7  p  y 

]L\ h* O  (from  V;«.^!  end) 

finally. 
^^4^  to  cease,  to  destroy. 

7 

^O  to  conceive. 
Ii4^  pregnant. 

7  7 

among,  between. 
m.  (Ajujd  evil. 
'  m.  an  tvil  person-pl.  ^^■in, 

fZo»!*^  malice. 

7  I 

«aQJu.2  Besoe  (a  monk-proper 
name). 

LäJO  =  t     li  Q  between,  by  ; 

P  7  •»  3:         7 

Aj — I — a  ^  out ;  ^iau 
Aa^  Mesopotamia. 
Aaä,    lAjkO   a   house,   lUiDO' 
AjJD  the  Roman  dominion. 

^ij^AÄä  Bethlehem  (a  proper 
name). 

V^d  to  weep. 

riü  vTithout. 

'p'-y  P"fi        ..7 

falO  pi.  m.   sons.    (aJ|   -><*^ 

•  0     0  ••   7 

Co7wf.  fat  >10  men,  lit.  sons 

7 

of  men.  ;ä  is  always  used  in  the 
sing,  for  son. 

]akO  to  despise.  Part.  P.  ]m!D 
despised. 


0        tX  17 

J300>\imn  Basilius  (a pro- 
per name. 

|ZoV)imn  f.  joy,  benignity. 

l;4^niD  m.  back. 

^QfiQO  to  perfume. 

|V)mn  odors. 

pÄ  to  seek,  with  ^So  to  entreat, 
to  demand. 

|^^iNs*^  enemy,  an  adversary. 

f  Z^liD  the  seeking,  the  finding  out. 

,    7 

y  ^!D  to  take  away. 

;-i^  m.  small-1;^»^  feminine. 
y/<     X  o 

1^0;^^  a  small  matter  (for  the 

Adj.  small). 

\ — n  M.n  to  explore,  to  discover, 
Ethpa.  with  %d  to  contemplate. 

JOO  a  gnat,  a  midge. 

•fi,  IjiD  son.  1i\jLi^  wiiö  an 
inhabitant  of  the  city. 

1^  to  create, 

]^1;^;l^  Barabbas  (a  proper 
name). 

»MO  7 

p;!D^  a  Barbarian. 

P       7        7 

t^>r^  Bardesanes  (a  proper 
name). 

0  0        I 

(Aa,JD  houses,  pi.  feminine. 

7 

^f O  to  fall  down,  to  bend  the 

knees,  Ethpa.  to  receive  a  bene- 
diction, to  bless  one's-self. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 

^pD  but,  jet 

7       7 

«•i;*^  Etkpa.  to  become  man. 
|«i;0  man. 

]0[a  the  lightning,  brightness. 
]Z;r^,  2-^  a  daughter,  pi.  Ais* 


845 


IjoAq,  f  A^oAo  a  young  woman, 
a  maiden. 

jAilä  after,  ^-OjAO  afterwards. 

^»So   >Aq    soon,    (literally), 
shortly  thereupon. 

\Hy\,  Iry^an  arrow,  dart. 
M^t  to  choose,  to  select. 

^        f^  7  tk  0         7 

H^^-A«   a  side,   a  part,    h^^^t 

|J-SüCDj  the  wrong  side,  i.  e.  an 
enemy. 

f.Ä.£lyt  the  choice. 

fANan.t  a  formation,  a  creature. 

7  ^9^7 

^^t,  l^^t  a  man,  a  person. 

^SüfiO-y  Gethsemane  (a  proper 
name). 

*7 

«jS-iPä.  *£)-•  to  blaspheme. 

fc»,i^  to  meet  with  any  one,  to 

happen  to  any  one. 
Qy.  in  the  midst,  CX^h^  within. 

]>gL.  a  troop,  a  multitude. 


i2)>a.i  m.  blasphemy. 

MJCL.  shame,  disgrace. 

M)Q.t    Guria  (proper  name  of 

a  woman). 

I^JOVy.  circumcision. 
)Hk»A^  to  laugh,  to  mock. 

U-o    to    uncover,   to    discover, 

JEthpe.  to  be  discovered,  to  be 
made  known. 

V^yt  to  rob,  Ethpe.  to  be  robbed, 

Aa|jL^..  public,  free. 

M  >^yt  Galilee  (a  proper  name). 

»P    £>  t    -nVi 

|l  iNy«  a  revelation. 

.7  x:^ 
«21^  .•  to  engrave. 

|Zo;iV>yt     an    accomphshment, 
perfection. 

•jSO^  to  fulfill,  to  finish. 

Vr^^  mighty. 

IXy»  Pass.  Fart.  lUiyi  hidden, 

unknown. 
VkXy«  to  lend. 

■A  \i        •     P  1» 

«cniyt,  JflU-i race,  family  {ysvog)^ 

offspring. 
•mfiOu«  Aph.  *£^»  I  to  lie  down. 

;!.•  to  scold,  with  «2  • 

*P    ^7 

PiJD;..  the  north. 

^P  7  ^ 

|l0^«  a  bone,  a  Hmb. 


346 


SYEIAC  LEXICON. 


}  mark  of  the  G^mfe;  Rdcu- 
tive Pronoun;  while,  that, there- 
with, in  order  that. 

«mjD)  to  offer.  Pa.  the  same. 

lAkO)  an  offering. 

jij  to  carry,  to  take,  Ethjpe.  to 
be  conducted,  to  conduct  ones- 
self. 

^.  J  to  lie,  Pa.  ^^S^?* 
>  a  falsehood. 


\^o\y  gold. 
l;aoj  behavior. 

X   7 

päO>   David,  sometimes  written 

'«.  X 

900U9  (a  proper  name), 
j^oj,  poj,  |Aao>,  place. 

•X  0 

«aO),  *a>  to  crush. 
^\>jj  to  fear,  to  worship. 

p  »  •»     X  7  -n 

lA^j  fear,  terror,  !>)*,  A^j 
superstition. 

»0   P    7 

I  Qui  J  an  evil  spirit,  the  Devil. 

»9P  7 

pQLk>  to  be  possessed  of  an  evil 
spirit. 

*^-Aj  a  word  accompanying  the 

Possessive  Pron.  §  16,  « i\i> 
who  is  my,  or  my. 

t7     I 

y^y  thy,  or  who  is  thy. 
^?  but  {ßl). 

*,:>    0  7 

M-ij  a  Judge. 
r^?  judgment. 

*  This  is  formed  from  )  and  V^  ,    Vid. 
reference  above.    Tr. 


^99 


^^>  Daison  (the  proper  name 
of  a  river). 

10    r 
;ji>  a  cloister. 

|l;ji>  a  monk. 
^LoA'f^y  monastic  life. 

I        171 

1  >  n  >Aa>  testament  ((^laäi?«»)). 

»  *  »P         7 

pj,  JjbOj  pure,  clean. 

*P  X  7 

Pj  Pa.  ^AiOj  to  purify. 

7 

p>  to  remember. 

y>j,  and  poj  the  blood. 

(ZqSjOj  a  resemblance,  an  image, 

a  likeness. 
lli>0>  similar. 
IjlLdj  CöTiÄ/r.  St.  ulÜjj  value. 

■n 

5^>  to  sleep. 

I     7 

.^>  i  V)>  sleeping  ;  Matt.  viii.  24,  pi. 

..X  7 

^l^j  to  weep. 

7 

;Sdj  Eth'pa.  to  wonder  at,  to  be 
astonished. 

P  X 

^J   to   judge,   Pass.  Part.    ^> 
judged. 

twJj  the  feast  of  the  appearance 
of  Christ ;     Epiphany. 

^P        7 

pLOj  the  beard. 

yS}  A-ph.  Y'i{\  to  comprehend. 

P^JJ  an  arm. 

1 
«Ajj  to  encounter,  to  speak  with 

any  one. 


STBIAC  LEXICON. 


Vol« 

01* 

loi  lo ! 

fjOl  Fa.  »^jOl  to  lead,  to  guide. 

(301  this, she,  Pron.{Chal.,  ^X\)- 

T 

pOjOl  members. 
fjjOl  honor,  glory. 

7  0*.  X 

001  m.  «-kOI  f.  and  001  m.  %aü\ 

7 

f.  that,  the  former  ;  j  001  who; 
>  wkOL»£D  since. 
looi   to  be   ( Verh   Subst.)  Fut. 

It,  n 

oou* 

QaOOI  he,  she. 

1 001  them. 

paooi  customs,  deeds. 

^r^OI  there,  then. 

)j.^^01  a  temple,  a  palace. 

yZo  1V)  idi  faith,  belief,  doc- 
trine, ]Akaa*  LfjSL  the  sav- 
ing faith. 

^QOOl  in  like  manner. 
mjJDOI  therefore. 

7     P         «P  7    0 

^-OOl,  P—OOI  so,  in  this  manner. 

^01,  ^Ou^  hence,  for,  there. 

^Ol  Fa.  to  wander,  to  go  forth, 
to  walk. 

^x^OI  they,  these. 

^01,  (-J01  m.  IjOl  f.  plur.  tOJOl 

m.  ^j-JOl  f.  this. 


347 


t     7       ff 

»mjLQJOl 


pUJOl  advantage,  pleasure. 

7 

«^01  to  return,   Aph.   to  lead 
back, 

•XS)  90)01  Herod  (a  proper  name.) 

P901  here,  hither. 

•-•Ol,  ^01  now,  at  present. 


O     ]o  the  letter  Vaii,  and. 
1* 

7  1«       1» 

^1  to  redeem,  Fut.  ^P,  Pa. 

*7 
7^V        7 

^1,  li^l  time,  pi.  llOl  Acts 
xvii.  26. 

9  7  »••  7  X         7  *••  7 

lAuDl,  ^2>2>  or  ^-0^1  ^i)2j 
twice ;  ^i1*^l  li^L  thrice ; 
y>Ur)  ^  ^1  before. 

;,»!   to  grow  dumb,  to  put  to 

silence. 
)2Li>l  just,  upright. 

7  -M» 

w-Ojl  to  be  just,  ^£)jl  it  befits, 
it  is  suitable,  it  is  becoming. 

1^  i  ■  0>1  agreement,  corres- 
pondence. 

lAo>l  alms. 

Aji1;^011  Adv.  careftilly. 

,      7 

J011  Ethjpa.  to  beware. 
(aiw.*01  praise,  show,  splendor. 


«m  1*^10^    Zenobius    (a  proper 
name). 


IP         X     7 

r^m.  I, 


348  STRIAC  LEXICON. 

^01,  ^i  to  move,  to  be  restless. 

^01  a  moving,  a  dance. 

]ä01  hyssop. 

(QUI  honor,  splendor. 

pi-»!  a  weed, 

ts  7 

^\  to  arm. 

]oi  to  conquer,  to  vanquish. 

(jbDl  a  conqueror. 

\r^\  a  song. 

A  species,  kind. 

».iJT,  P»J1  m.  fornication. 

1Za.iJl  fornication. 

jQll,  fjQil  little,  jQlViä  U?  not 

small. 

7 

*Q11  to  cry,  to  call. 
IslilDI  cross. 

7 

*£1D1  to  crucify,  to  torture. 


\y\j^  free,  HIm'^jQ  free. 

0 

«jQja  ought. 

^AJiQiQAft  quiet,  concealed   resi- 
dence. 

•  ff  X     7  I     ..     I      7 

|*^«*'^>> beloved,  pi.  ^^■*^>*l»i* 

■  o,o^>  Habib  (a  proper  name). 

];n»»   an   associate,   the  other, 
any  one. 

7 

«a^i»  to  enclose. 
L^  a  feast,  a  feast  day. 


lame. 

f.  one,  a  certain  one, 
any  one  ]*^iiO  r**  Sunday. 
1,-j^,  ^r»M   to  rejoice ;    |AlD> 

1  Zo  rJs*  to  rejoice  very  much. 
IZOjj^  rejoicing. 
fjfX»  mutual,  reciprocal. 
Ofjv*,  KOfja  gladness. 

*?    P  7 

Mr**  joy. 

][»pM  the  breast,  pi.  sufif.  Luke, 

xxiii.  48. 
>r**  to  surround,  to  flow  around. 
yjöl  honor,  majesty. 

7   P 

^9rM  around. 
ZpA*  to  renew. 

0         7  ■*••  7 

IZ^AA  new,  pi.  IZpM  ♦ 

«  X    7 

(Om,  Pa;.  «aOm  to  show,  to  in- 
dicate. 

VP  7 

DO»  love. 

»P     P  -x 

]irr>Vno>>  perseverance,  patience. 

^p  p        -x 

Pj^DOm  injury. 

'\]    --  to  see  Ethpe.  to  be  seen,  to 

appear. 
loV—j^  a  vision,  pi.   pOV^  an 

apparition. 

•  V^V*^  June. 
•Op^  to  bind. 


hu** 

\a\^  bond,  union. 

(Zvm  a  view. 

14^  to  err,  to  sin. 

]oi4>*  m.  sin,  crime,  pi.  V*^4**> 
fOl^ja  and  ^Ol4>A* 

lAjL^  f.  sin. 

|A4a*  wheat,  pi.  ]^  ♦ 

H-M  to  live,  Apk.  %^.jJ\  • 
->j and  |i  i  »t  life.     (It always 
has  the  plural  form  but  gen- 
erally a  singular  signification. 

p     7  ..     I     p     7 

'*^»  «^^  m.  a  debtor,  pi.  ^iHi  »t» 

fZCLMa  living  creature,  an  animal, 
a  monster. 

^Jwi-M,  v^-M  a  force,  an  army. 
^\Lm  to  strengthen. 
.A\i»»  and  pA\i  »I  strong. 
I  ^-i-M  linen,  fine  linen. 

»J  XT  »    l>  17 

>Oin»i,    |V)in»>    wise,   plural 

I..  x7  «i>..   17 

-  iV>in»>  and  |V>tn»i« 
]ASQ2lm  wisdom. 
yja  vinegar. 
^O    \»i  a  gnat,  a  fly. 
«^..JLm  to    mingle,   Ethpa.  to 

take  part,   to   associate   with 

any  one. 
^.iXm,  1v>i\»i  sound,  healthy. 

vLm  to  wash. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  349 

?>o\»i  to  dream,  Ethpe.  to  re- 
cover. 

^*^^»i  for,  instead  of. 
ASOm  Ethpe,  to  be  angry. 
lASüjs»  anger,  wrath. 
|A.|jJjs*  a  sigh. 

^1**  we,  us,  pi.  c.  from  [i\» 

l*^!»!  a  heathen,  an  idolater. 

«CQlm,  «fiDQja  far  be  it. 

,^irn»i  vehement,  strong. 

^QCCLm  to  envy,  with  *0» 

I^Lm  to  cover  Ethpa.  to  conceal 

one's-self. 

Aa]4»^»i  diligently. 

7 
jajs*  yl^Ä.  to  blush,  to  be  ashamed. 
«»    7 
(.^  the  back,  the  loins. 

9Qj^  to  be  white. 

>*  to  see,  to  look  out. 

^;x»,  y^^j^l  to  curse,  to  detest. 

,77 

j'fj^  Pa.  to  liberate. 

\M'r^  a  magician,  a  sorcerer. 

]l'rL  f.  from  ]l'rJ^]  finally,  the 

end,  enough. 
|jUM  endurance,  suffering. 
^Q«>>,    pQjBjs»     darkness,   pi 

^ÄPOa»»  Eph.  iv.  18. 
^Ajs*  to  mark,  to  seal. 
]SoA>A  a  seal. 


350 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


(o(4  a  rumor,  a  report. 
«^4  J.<:^j.  good.  -4c?v.  very. 
Win^  Fart.  P.  m. sealed. 
llri^  seal. 

»IDCl^  Pa.  JQji-i  to  be  ready,  to 
be  willing. 

|l2Q^  the  pious,  the  good. 
pAo<l4  happy,  blessed. 
y>aiQ4,  and  "jioo^  kind,  family, 
ofifspring. 

lAjk^Q4  vine,  branch. 

]o>0^  readiness. 

(CQSdq^  a  part  (tomus.) 

*£)Q^,  *2L^  to  swim  over  any- 
thing, to  overflow. 

|>Cli  a  mountain. 

[S^jQl^  distress,  misfortune. 

]  i  •Q^  that  which  is  con- 
cealed, 11»q4s  secret. 

Q£L^,  fZoni  (j  goodness,  excel- 
lence, benevolence,  grace. 

•R     7 

•£00^  to  order,  (ratfCsiv). 

(cna^   an    arrangement,   order, 

state  (Ta|ig). 

|1^,  ]h\(,  a  young  man,  a  youth. 
^A I  \  1^  a  girl,  a  maiden. 


^^4  to  carry. 

«n!i^  £^ÄpÄ.  to  be  dispersed. 

]Sa4  foul,  detestable. 

]*hl  (^  unclean. 

1Zq£Ii4  uncleanness. 

]Li  to  wander,  to  wander  around, 
to  forget,  with  ^  to  fall  from 
something,  to  apostatize,  Aph. 
to  mislead,  to  deceive,  to  cheat. 

(Zcui^  error,  heresy. 
^oL^  to  taste,  to  taste  well. 
_1^  to  be  laden,  to  bear,  Aph. 
to  cause  to  carry,  to  bring. 

(*212l4=*25(i4)   «2^  to  over- 

run.   Aph.   %2l41  to  overflow, 

to  fill. 

«I     1» 

*m£I^,  Ethpe.  .m  1*^^21  to  ac- 
quiesce, to  obey. 

y 

y'ri^o  chase  away,  to  drive  away. 
^•pi  to  strike,  Ethpe.  •Si'ril]  ♦ 
]a;4  a  leaf. 


1^*,  V"1L»  fine,  suitable,  proper. 

«^^fji  to  wish  very  much,  Ethpa. 
the  same. 

^\:i*  to  lead,  to  lead  away. 

■TS         I 

to  dry  up. 


f 


p»,  Ipi]  hand,  ^»^  by,  with  help, 

on  account  of. 
\r-^  Aj?/i.  »^>0|  to  thank,  with 

%Q  to  believe  in  something,  to 

confess, 

,  X  IC 

p>.        m.  acknowledged,  known. 
]Alr->  f.  knowledge. 

7       I 

^,_^  to  know,  to  be  acquainted 
'with ;  Ethpe.  to  be  known ; 
Aph.  to  make  known,  to  in- 
dicate. 

Ppi,  ^10^  an  acquamtance,  one 
known. 

fAlr—^  knowledge,  insight,  de- 
vice. 

y 

^     om  to   give,    Lnperative 

•—.sen  ;  with   \MSk^  to   give 
up  one's  life. 

»     »  -X  I  »>  X  ♦  ..p  «^  X 

Va?OGrLi,  >00U  Juddsa,]di)0aLi9 
pi.  Jews. 

0      7        1«    4^ 

JP01  i1*^CLfc  Jovinian  (a  proper 

name). 

^^   t    mOi  John  (a  proper  name,) 

T>  7 

«2ifiQQa  Joseph  (a  proper  name). 

JPOtNoj  Juhus(a  proper  name). 

%CD01  >\0i  Juhan  (a  proper 
name). 

pLZLlQ^  a  doctrine,  teaching. 

y)Q— *,    "lieu    day,    ]<^0-^.A 

by  day,  ^CU,  U^ol  to  day, 


SYRIAC   LEXICON.  35  X 

now  ;  ^O    ■    So  daily. 
UjQji  a  Greek,  Zu]-Ja»  Adverb. 
in  the  Greek  manner,  accord- 


ing to  the  Greeks. 
^jZcli,  P>Zqj  use,  advantage. 

»  0  P         X  I 

H,  ■  »  I  a  hermit. 


to  bring  forth,  Ethjpe.  to 
be  born. 

]'pAi  birth, 

l?Q — -^  a  small  boy,  a  child. 

^P      0-       to 

\2iQ — la  a  teacher,  a  learned 
man. 

«'^N     ■  to  learn,  A'ph.  to  inform. 
|V)     ■  the  sea. 

|V)     i  to  swear,  Aph.  to  cause  to 
swear,  to  swear  to. 

M  '^'  the  right  hand,  the  right. 
(DQla  a  suckling,  a  baby. 

«  X 

c21£Q.a  ^^)^.  to  add. 
Jl-a  to  increase  rapidly. 

«s  7 

^dCiCiS  i  Jacob  (a  proper  name). 
J2)0  ^  one  who  takes  care. 
r^-»  to  burn. 

*0         7 

lyna  flame,  holocaust 

;>n.i,  t;ini  illustrious,  honored, 
great. 

*   X 

*lD;a  to  be  great,  to  increase  (in 
respectability). 


352 

(1*;^  a  month. 

«p    I  p  »p      I  p 
Pji;^,  |^^^>  ä  tent. 

^QJLi  Jesus. 

Li  being,  essence. 

^loLi  to  remain,   to    dwell,   to 
settle,  to  sit. 

-So  ;     >A«  niore  than. 

P      -X  17 

|Zo;-iAj  superfluity. 

,7.    I 

9Aji  to  win,  to  abound. 

IId  to  prevent,  to  rebuke. 

I     p     I 
.^lo,  lop  passion. 
ip   I 

Zupt)  justly. 

IZcüt  justice,  righteousness. 
l£)P  a  stone,  a   rock,  Cephas, 
or  Peter. 

IZp  f.  a  rebuke. 

7 

\!S^D  perhaps. 

fD  as,  during  (pleonastic  before 
the  Fart). 

pcno  a  priest. 

IZoJOlO  the  priesthood. 

IpMQD  shame. 

*p  7  ^-R      ..         7 

1^2 Q2  m.  a  star,  pi.   [i^DQO 
Matt.  xxiv.  29. 

I^VOQD  a  priest. 

^p  p 
jSDQO^  |£QO  m.  a  cup. 

|1»)C13  a  cell. 


SYEIAC  LEXICON. 


*p       ,  *- 

\jl£QjQD  a  throne. 

,    »»   o  j^^Ä^ä^.    ,    »»   nil    to 


blush. 

^7  I  -X  *.  I 

Jj— JQ— 4®r*^   the    laying    on 


or    extending    of    the     hand 

(^■^si^oTovia). 

^-O  all,  every,  ,— m — N    ^  each. 
]n\n  a  dog. 

I  P  X 

^^jlLd,  iJiNo  a  crown. 
lio^\o  every  thing,  any  thing. 
VA^  a  bride. 
|S02  how  much,  how  much  more. 

7 

;lüO  to  be  amazed,  to  be  sad. 
llO  to  give  a  surname. 
(Aid  a  fellow  servant. 
\Zi\D  bosom,  lap. 

7 

«A12  to  assemble,  to  collect  to- 
gether, Ethpa.  to  be  assembled. 
» p     * 
(aid  an  assembly. 

|cQO  a  cup. 

^£02  to  conceal,  Pa.   to  cover, 
Ethpa.  to  hide  one's-self. 

m^  .jP  ■»»  ^P  7 

(CQ3,   |ifnn,    (iffln  concealed, 

p     ..     7 

|l2^  famine. 

7 

;£iD  to  deny,  to  refuse,  to  desert 
(with  *Q)» 

7  7» 

p  where,  pi^  there  where. 

IP  to  feel  pain,  ^  A^p  it  pains 
one. 


lip. 

l^'fD   sad,   sorrowful,    Ethpe.   to 

pass  by,  to  go. 
OUp,  ')aLft;2  infirm,  weak. 
YfO  Aph.  to  announce  (^»ifuö'ö'sjv). 

]l  I  5^»r^  ^  christian. 

7 

j^p  to  involve,  to  roll  up,  to  pass 

by. 

lop  a  roll,  a  scroll. 
\1mD  a  collision,  a  shock. 

t    «^an   Ethpa.,    n    ^    m    nL\ 

to  humbly  entreat. 
•äAo  to  write,  ^^A.  the  same. 
loAo  a  writing,  a  book. 
p.Ao  flax,  linen. 
"faAo  a  shoulder. 
>Ao  to  remain,  to  remain  behind. 

U  not,  no  ;  11 J  lest,  without. 
|£^  heart. 

>*^^   \  to  arouse,  to  cheer. 
^•Q*^\  dress,  a  garment. 
^Zo^**^\  a  decision,  reliance. 
.^in\  to  hold,  to  take  hold. 
V^^  outside,  without. 
iM*S\  to  clothe,  to  cover. 

^qL  Pa.  to  accompany,  Ethpa. 
to  be  accompanied,  to  be  con- 
firmed. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  353 


IA^qN^  abuse,  insult. 

^^.riDoi^  against,  towards. 

LQJ^  to,  by,  besides,  with. 

|>j^  to  blot  out. 

rM^,  >Oi.»\n  only,  alone. 

]V)»»\  bread. 

IJA,  111!^,  lllS   night,   pi. 

^oN     ■     \  &c. 
Ao^  it  is  not. 
|J_^  an  insane  person. 
^Üi^over,  up  ;  ^ii)  ^\l^  before, 


besides. 
ifns    \  to  eat. 


]jQOn\  opponent. 

■  «N,  |1^\  tongue,  language.. 

liO  that,  what;  J  ]lD  when, 
IjSjD]^  word,  discourse,  a  part 

of  speech. 
P]Sd  a  handle,  a  covering.. 
flO*^V>  spring,  fountaihv 

(Aa;nV)  a  blessing,  a  benedic- 
tion. 

U-^,  ]AL..So  scroll,   volume, 

roll. 
^^y^  freely. 
«■..V),  ]*Q. Jk)  a  wise  man,  jd,. 


854 


8YRIAC 


fM>,0,V)  an  altar. 

IP         y 
;0^  a  desert. 

|ZQj;^,iO  redemption. 

IPX  • 

;-i^  a  cloister,  a  chamber, 

^>,    V)  thus,  thence,  therefore. 

^LipSo,  ]Al  a,Sr)  a  town,  a  city. 

^rSo  something,  y)rSo  p  nothing. 

tA*j>3rSQ    eastern,     (mJ^Lo    the 

East. 
|S9rSD  a  song,  a  hymn. 

flV)»OlSo  beliering,  with  1;^;^ 

orthodox. 
|;^aiSo  prompt,  ready. 
fAsoioi  a  gift. 
•IDQId,  Pa.  >n>V)  to  deride. 
|9Qk)  myrrh. 
floOii  death. 

>■»■»    V)  to  strike,  to  prick,  to 
bite. 

(ZqakLo    a    blow,    plague,    pi. 

|J*.»»,Vd  weak,  humble. 
;»i>.So  on  the  morrow. 
]jOa»»So  a  tempest,  pi.  waves. 

14^  to  go,  to  come,  to  arrive, 

3  /.  Fret.  Z^» 
^infe^  from,  of,  over,  on  account 

of;  >  ^\^  while. 


LEXICON. 

\\  iSftV)  a  heretic,  a  seducer. 

Aaf  iiif^V)  secretly. 

(■     V)  water. 

AjbSo  to  die,  Aph,  to  cause  to  die, 
to  mortify. 

,  7,  7 

jAjlSo  distinguished,  excellent. 

pOOOSo  humility,  modesty. 

PinV»  affable,  modest. 

^**SV>  now,  immediately. 

|LOO>nV)      lowliness,      intelli- 
gence. 

7  7 

«^«*^V>,  ^»io  to  be  depressed. 

M— So  to  be  full,  P<x.  to  fill,  Ethpi. 
to  be  filled. 

|J-J^  word,  saying,  plur.  fl— Lo» 

PU— io  an  angel,  a  messenger. 

|»»SV)  a  captain. 

«^»  >Sd  to  advise,  to  consult,  to 
reign. 

Y^,  ]n    \V>  a  king. 

lZon\V>  a  kingdom. 

vA   V)  to  speak,  to  converse. 

X^^  Abs.  word. 

|Alk>  ^wj?Ä.,  word;)/.  USD. 

tl'^NVn  a  teacher,  a  learned  man. 

«jP«  *>  P  •         7 

jlQl'^NV)  learning. 
Jj^SüSo  speech. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


355 


^io  who  ?  y  ^  V>  that,  which, 
OlSf)  who  is  this ? 

7 

^LD  certainly  (f^sv);  it  often  is 
superfluous. 

^Sd  of,  from,  on  account  of,  since ; 

ZqL    ^    from,    of;    ^--i 

^      P  7 

t-JI^ — d]  afterwards,  hereafter, 

7     •* 

with  sufif.  ^iSo  of  us. 
]s}2d  what  ? 

fu>  ilSo  a  faithful  servant. 
(ZplO  a  candlestick. 
]AxSd  a  part. 

«p.    *>     P  7 

|LQj;n>fnV)  patience.. 
Vinmsh  poor. 
"l'/ujOSülsb  f.  baptism. 

V;i-So,  l2;S  .V)    a    hollow,   a 

cavern. 
(-J n«    *^   V)  an  interpreter, 

an  explainer. 

)  ^,  *)-»  ^  possible. 

]  J^  to  be  able,  Ethpe.  the  same, 
to  have  power  to  do  (with  »iD 
by,  through). 

IZoAAiD^  splendor,  light. 

V^^^  in  the  midst. 

VAl  l!iD  midst. 

V^,  V;^,  U'^  Lord,  Sir,  ^'^ 
literally  my  Lord  (title  for 
bishop  or  any  other  ecclesias- 


r^u-^aVD. 


y    V 

tical  person),  (fiD  our  Lord, 
(i.  e.  Christ) ;  ^I'fh  title  for 
ecclesiastical  ladies. 

»p.        I     P        7 

(AaI-iPjö   a  pearl,   a    precious 

stone. 
>;.JLd  to  fall  off,  to  cast  away, 

to  make  free. 
|Zoj;Sd  a  falling  off,  an  injury. 

»    P   P    7 

|»i;V)     bold,     impudent,     -4c?r. 
]I^a4;io  a  garment. 

^P      X      7 

\\^'^  bitter,  sorrowful. 
jAoo^Si)  a  chariot,  a  throne. 

*P     00   7 

(^;Lo    that    which    relates    to 

Christ. 
\L  i  \;V)  a  flock,  an  assembly,  a 

community. 

()rjdD  a  messenger. 

*     7 

«»aV>  to  anoint. 

('^N»»aV)  changable,  variegated. 

-     p  X 

I»  iaV)  the  Anointed,  the  Mes- 
siah. 

^P  7 

(OlklBSo  known,  distinguished. 
iNv^aV)  complete,  perfect. 


*  P    0  7 

(TaNTV)  a  deacon,  a  minister. 
IZqiaSQjiSd  the  ofi&ce  of  a  dea- 


con. 

,?       7 


^^Ak)  a  person  sick  of  the  palsy. 
IAji^aIo  a  position,  a  bed. 


356 

l2aimjua^Ai  f.  obedience, 
wmASd  to  extend. 
Ij^ALd  time,  a  period. 
]iV).>>A1d  an  interpreter. 
lAfcl  ,n>  »iZASo  necessity. 
^ZjZAsi  a  catechumen. 

J« 


Tar>1  m.  a  prophet,  Matt.  i.  22. 

(ilOi*^l  f.  prophecy. 

LO'rM.^  drawing  out,  patience, 
suffering. 

r^OlJ  shining,  bright. 

J  013  to  shine,  Aph.  to  light,  Ethpa. 
to  be  bright. 

|>01J  a  river. 

pOIOI  m.  light,  from  >01J  to 
shine. 

«^QJ,  «ojJ  to  repose,  to  be  ap- 
peased, Aph.  to  lay  aside,  to 
put  away. 

•X  «    P  7 

«jaQJ,  paQJ  rest. 

P       -X  ^ff  p       «x 

»apQuJ,    [^pa^   a  stranger, 

VAapOJ  f.  also  Muter. 
2>0Qj,  yij  to  sleep. 
^i^QJ  distribution,  expending. 
V>aa  fire. 


SYRIAC   LEXICON. 

I^O^jiP  abstemiousness. 
IJjjJ  a  valley. 

AjjJ  to  go  down,  to  descend,  Aph. 
to  lay  down,  to  take  down,  to 
bring,  to  deliver. 

|AmJ  m.  a  garment,  pi.  -^AmJ, 
|Amj* 

*  7 

•a^J  to  drop. 

7 

'r^  to  take  care  of,  to  watch. 
(ZQmulJ  f.  lenity,  meekness. 
f>r>>  1  Nic8ea  (a  proper  name). 
;jj,  I'fjLJ  a  yoke,  a  bow. 
^^im  guilt,  injury,  crime. 

7 

«£QQJ  to  augment,  to  honor,  to 
sacrifice,  to  slay. 

«V  7 

>fD0V)1  law. 

7 

«nmi  to  take,  to  receive. 

»0    -x  * 

pOirni  temptation. 

7  •  * 

»^nu  to  pour,  jE^Ape.  »nmiZ% 

7 

*nmi  to  ascend. 
{i^aj  refreshment. 
^^iü  to  fall. 


«Ä2Ü  to  go  out,  ^^Ä.  to  take  out, 

X        7 

»Oi*^  1  spread. 
(jlZü  the  soul,  reflexive,  self. 
(^  to  fight,  to  attack. 

7 

«A  ^  to  plant. 


IjLm  ^  a  victory,  an  exploit, 


BYRIAC  LEXICON.  357 


jlSH. 


J  Nesibis   in  Mesopo- 


tamia (a  proper  name). 
\»*^  ^  victorious,  superior,  clear. 
Xi^J  Ethpa.  to  be  avenged  . 
><^ni  to  adhere,  to  follow. 

r 

;QJ  to  dig,  to  dig  out. 
]mJ  (pi.  ]ltS\)  a  woman. 
IjAj  a  downfall,  a  curse. 

P^dIo)  silver,  money. 
fZjflD  a  bushel. 
l^fO  an  old  man,  w4<f^'.  old. 
(minfiO  dense,  extensive. 
I^N^m  an  ode,  a  song. 

r 

\\*^ro  to  be  satisfied. 
i*^fin  to  believe.  Fa.  to  declare, 
to  forbear,  Aph.  to  suppose. 

|;*lffl  hope. 

^v£D  to  multiply,  to  increase. 

-^  to  worship,  to  honor. 
IZ.JQO  worship,  honor. 
JjCLwflO  a  cluster. 
«i  .iff),  I (lyifP much.  Adv.  very. 
|Zo]  I .« fO  a  multitude. 


,  7 


iK^a 


j,lö  to  order,  to  arrange. 

JOIID  to  testify,  to  witness,  Aph. 
to  die  as  a  martyr. 

IjOlfiD  Emph.  of  JOICD  a  witness, 
a  martyr  (  =jaa^<ru^). 

I  LOjOlflD  testimony,  witness,  mar- 
tyred one. 
QfiO  a  multitude. 

p^Li  QfiO  offense. 

»»tflfiO  to  long  for  somethmg,  to 

take  pleasure  in. 

MloQflO  thought. 

foNOfT)  reception,  ascension  to 
heaven. 

^Q£D,  Xl-£D  to  place,  to  inter, 

to  add,  ^i^S  to  shut,  1  JiD]i 

to   write  or  compose    books, 

]at;n  to  punish  with  death, 
Ethpe.  to  be  interred,  to  be 
buried. 

«fiOOrJQfiO  synod  (tfuvo^oj). 

llQJQ CD    indigence,    poverty, 

need, 

(jjlOfiO  a  deed,  an  occurrence. 
|u)QfiO  Syria. 

^V»'^^    ^dv.  Syriac,  in  the 
Syriac. 


358  BYRIAC 

pufe)a£D  a  Syrian,  Adj.  Syrian. 
.<y^..>fff>    to   pull   down,    Fa.   to 

destroy,  Ethpa.  to  be  dispersed. 
^l^CD  Satan  (a  proper  name). 
1;4^  a  side,  a  page. 
;n»ff)   to   bear,  to   endure,   to 

tolerate. 
XLiXO  the  laying  on  (of  hands). 
(ASitX)  an  assembly. 
f'^iro  a  sword  (|«<poc:). 
pQCD  to  expect,  Pa.  %  1*^00  to  wait. 
^ZoNnrO  transgression. 
«n\rn  to  ascend. 

^QOD,  ^QflO  to  place,  to  lay  upon, 
to  commit. 

«,iV)rt)  to  support,  ymsn  to  take 
refreshment,  to  tarry. 

tl  Snro  left,  wrong, 
pjDD  to  hate. 
|lCD  hated,  mean. 

F  X 

»oirn  to  need,   *nitrn  Part, 
Pass.  Pe. 

r 

*f!L£0  to  make,  to  do,  to  visit  (the 
sick). 

( fSi£D  a  scribe,  pi.  ^^SiSD,  f  ^ZiSO* 

]\  1  ^cm,  lÄluJlQO  a  ship. 

;£1CD,  {'fZiSD  a  book. 


LEXICON. 

f  Aai,  ;>/.  l'Zoär»  the  mouth,  the 

lips. 
>»>;ffl  Pö^.  to  dishonor,  to  violate. 

IP  %z 
J  tl  a  feast,  a  feast-day. 

7 

pOl  to  do,  to  perform,  to  yield, 
to  make  something  (with  a 
double  Accusative). 

»9  7  X..     y 

Ir^ll  m.  servant,  pi.  ^^1,0%, 
JrCll  Mat.  xiii.  2t. 

.P  .x'       P 

|>on\  creator. 

7 

;.^1  to  pass  by,  to  pass  over; 

with  *0,  to  pass  around. 
^l-riil    Hebre\r,   Ad.    Hebra- 

ically. 

^^,  ^^2^  shortly. 

U^,  l^^^^!i^  a  young  cow. 

yi  until,  ^^ulOjI]]  not  yet;  ^Lo^i 

until,  >   pOA  until  that; 

*iA,  PA  time. 

,  7 

jfL  Pa.  to  support,  to  aid. 

\LfL  church. 

^Ql  to  act  unjustly. 

^Ql,  ]jQl  unjust,  sinful.  \ 

I   P    7  ' 

pal  wicked,  ungodly. 


SYRIAC  L 

jjSOQl  a  habitation,  an  abode. 
P^Ql  death. 

PiJQ^  an  answer,  an  alternative 

song. 

»oai,  «.Ol  Ethjpe.  to  be  troubled. 
1 202^901  uncircumcision. 
>Q1  or  Jl  to  watch. 
]^  to  blot. 

10    0 
r-kl  custom. 

^jlI,  p-fe^  eye. 

7   7 

}jkl  to  arouse,  Ajph.   to  stir  up. 

f;.kJL  a  guardian  angel. 

vi  over,  to,  against,  on  account 

of;  J  ^\l  because. 
I^q^qn^  avarice. 

Jji.,  lA^  cause. 

\t^^  an  altar,   Acts  xvii.    23. 

ml,  ^^  to  go,  with  «i^  to  go 

into,  with  ^ijL  to  carry  on  pro- 
hibited intercourse  with  any 
one,  Ethjpe.  to  go  into,  Ajph. 
to  lead,  to  lead  into. 

NoNs,  Emph.  |V)Ns  world,  race, 
generation. 

y 

^Ql  with,  above. 

^CLl,  tül  a  nation,  pi.  ^^iV^V)\ 

7  - 

rSOL  to  suffer  one's  self  to  be  dipped, 
to  suffer  one's-self  to  be  baptized. 


EXICON. 


859 


1,101  dipping,  baptism. 
IjQißl  a  pillar. 
>0V)S  an  inhabitant. 
|jS£21  trouble,  labor. 
•fiiil  to  dwell. 
Ill  to  hear,  to  answer,  Ethpe.  to 

converse. 
fZoaail  piety. 
fr-kll  one  who  is  dead. 
pjJ^  a  cloud. 
^^■,rn\  twenty. 
^211  Pfl.  to  inter. 
(l  1  ■  S  aversion,  opposition. 

■^     7 

«*^ns  Prtß/,  to  inquire. 
|;oi  a  root. 

7 

%£3;i  to  flee. 

^Al  to  avail,  to  prevail. 

fjktlk  prepared.   Fart   (put  for 
the  future). 

]i:u'Zi  ancient,  old,  f.  l'AaJ\i, 

^^Al,  I^Alrich. 


1j|2)  fruit,  _p/.  l>]a» 

7 

^^  to  meet,  to  happen  to  (with 
l^,  l^a  body. 


860 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


«^Q2)< 


i^oa,  i^A^)  to  blow,  to  sound. 

«IPq\o^  Paul  (a  proper  name). 

^1m^Q£>  work. 

VOq£),  Ildq^)  mouth. 

PjiDOa  a  command. 

JQ2)  Ethjpe.  to  be  unwilling. 

JflCLi  )Q2)  a  tower  {itd^yog). 

]ll>Q2  a  reward,  a  recompense. 

^  0    P  ,   -x 

|1£)>Q2)  redemption,  salvation. 

pji)Q£)  separation. 

^MQSi,  *M£i  to  remain,  to  come 

to  any  one. 
(asQ2)  doubt. 

•  P       P    -x 

\Ci%QSi  an  explanation. 
,^>N|i*^  a  phial. 

«P       -X  %0  T 

^QQC0O\,<y)  a  philosopher. 

tiaQ4N     i<^  Pilate    (a  proper 

name). 
]fna<=^  mediation,  entreaty. 

]jjQio;jL2)    a    servant    of    the 

church. 
fia  cheek,  jole. 
«-th^b£)  to  divide,  Ethpa.  to  doubt. 

%**jLa,  Part.  <M>\*^  to  work,  to 
serve. 

yisi  to  return,  Pa-,  to  answer, 
Aph.  to  lead  back,  to  make 
known ;  Ethpe.  to  turn  one's-self. 


1>    7 


f      I     7        7 


]imfcl<=^  an  apparition,  aq  en- 
chantment. 
1Aa12)  a  limit,  an  end. 

7 

%£3ClfiQ2),   *£Q2)  to  free,  4P^-  ^ 

permit, 
«p    -ft  -  -«..I» 

^CQ2)  a  lot,  a  portion,  j)Z.  |m^» 

|Zq\s<=^  a  work,  labor. 

»P  17 

I  ^,  Pö^.  «^  ^  to  free,  to  deliver. 

7 

r02)  to  command. 
p     «.       »po     «» 

^rOQ2),   PrDQ2)   precept,  com- 
mand. 
|ASü2)  a  camp,  a  valley. 

»P  7        7 

tlXLi);£)  paradise. 

^P         -X         P 

(iD0;5)  a  redeemer,  a  deliverer. 

*P      P  -x     p 

f^OO^a  salutiferous,  saving. 

•»>  p 
kflOja  Persia. 
«p    p     p 
|>CD;'=^  a  Persian. 

7 

^^  to  recompense,  jK^ÄpÄ.  to  be 
rewarded. 

»P        «^  7 

(£>0 fiSi  face,  presence. 
*o;2i  to  preserve,  to  deliver. 

7      • 

*»  JQ  to  separate,  to  divide,  Ethpe. 

to  be  divided,  to  appoint. 
L'fSi  to  break. 

*4*^  to  extend,  to  spread. 
l4-^A2>  just,  right. 

■n    7 

J2MSi  to  interpret. 


^ 


Aa* 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  361 


)Sa.t As)  a  word,  a  matter. 
|Aa,  I^Aa  wide. 
«AiAa  to  open. 
f^A2)  ;?/.  m.  idols,  images. 
IpAa  an  idol,  an  image  of  a  false 
god. 


11^  to  be  filthy. 

fl^  vile,  filthy. 

ti  •  to  be  willing,  to  wish. 

]2ao.    will,   -^Q-^t,   ]a2ü, 

^^   V)  of  one's-self,  freely. 
^AÄ  f  willing,  ready. 
^1*^»  will. 

»OP  -ft 

fl  >0 •  will,  purpose. 

I  OL.  to  thirst. 

y)0 . ,  y>^  to  fast. 

|k)0  •  days  of  fasting,  fast  days. 

\Ljo .  a  figure,  a  pretence. 

y  •  to  incline.  Pa.  to  pray, with 

^ib— ^  to  pray  for  any  one,  to 
bless. 

■tor 

|]»,  U^*  inclined. 

»£^  •  Ethpe.  to  be  crucified. 
yio^  9  a  prayer,  an  entreaty. 


]*SiSi»  a  cross. 

]>rt\  •  a  figure,  an  image. 

10  7 

\Si  •  early  tune,  dawn. 

|5»   Ethpe.  to  be   separated,  to 

burst. 


^i.£iD  Pa.  to  receive ;  ^^TiO Afiol 
to  happen,  to  come  to  pass. 

7 

\dO  to  bury. 

|;^0,  pono  a  sepulchre. 

^Q^rO  ^iD  from  the  beginning. 

;>0^^O  for,  to,  >  !>0^^  ^^ 

ere,  before. 

^AiOrO,  llLOr^  the  first. 

M^rO  holy. 

|QJD  to  remain,  to  stop. 

IJIDQO  a  reception,  an  entertain- 
ment. 

pi>QD  holiness. 

0 

^QO,  ^OD  to  stand  up,  to  stand, 
Aph.  to  erect,  to  set  up,  to 
conclude,  to  appoint,  to  de- 
termine; with  ^^  '\^\0  pre- 
ceding, to  make  war  with  any 
one. 

.CL»v6^ClD  a  church-yard,  bury- 
ing-ground. 


362  SYKIAC 

]jaJQD  a  servant  of  the  church, 
sexton. 

.ftftni  >^i^fr>nr>      Constantine 

(a  proper  name). 
VijQjD  a  town,  a  city. 
l^jlk'ClO  a  Cyrenean  (a  proper 

name).. 
VA#QD  truth. 

|Jq4ö  m.  a  murderer,  a  robber. 
,  »^«^  cunmng,  mgemous. 
|J4d  slaughter,  murder. 
]<^'''o  a  league,  ]Sr)    ■  .n  &UD 

consecrated  virgins. 
^ASHäjD  resurrection. 
lAj-k-D  a  song. 
]f^><^  a  tree,  bark,  a  book. 
]jAa-0  Cithara,  harp. 
XjOjL^  a  player  on  the  cithara. 

^^LD,  ]]-0  a  voice. 

^■So  little. 

>ODO;iSo  the  clergy. 

VA^  a  bride. 

|jLO  to  acquh-e ;  Aph.  to  grant, 

to  bring. 
\aJjD  a  pen,  a  reed. 
po;4^£)  a  centurion. 
U*,£Q£)  Csesarea  (a  proper  name). 
]lo  to  call,  to  cry. 


LEXICON. 

\^^0j\2^  Cappadocia  (a  prop- 
er name). 
lifflO  cassia. 
1;^  to  name,  to  call,  to  choose. 

*    *^\    O  to  approach,  to  draw 
near.  Fa.  to  conduct,  to  bring; 

^  ft    ••    Tt 

}M^y  to  sacrifice. 
Jq;jD  war 
«£DqL^O;£)  a  crystal. 

I   7 

>*^i;o  near. 

|1  i;o  reading. 

lA^;iD  a  field,  a  country. 

*P         7 

p;0  a  horn. 
}tsiO'rD  calvary. 

sP  17 

(ao-aO  a  priest,  an  elder. 


*0>    much,   great,  loud,  chief; 

2)  eite&cher,Empkat.'U^y  Abs. 

Tl..  7  r««7 

pi.  \^y  Const,  pi.  ^jjOj* 

]Ciy  to  grow.  Fa.  to  bring  up,  to 

educate. 
OlO>  a  myriad,  pi.  ^QS9« 
I  Zoo  J  greatness,  a  multitude. 

7 

vyw,y5,  %o,J  to  wish  very  much,  to 
desire,  Ethpa.  the  same. 

7  , 

Vy.j  to  be  angry. 


V'^ 


^^ 


J  foot. 


^Q,» J  to  stone. 

y, 

*Ä^>  to  mark,  to  feel,  Apk.  the 
same,  with  **D  to  perceive,  to 
remark. 

|A..>  a  wish,  a  desire. 

f?J  to  go,  to  chastise  ;  with  and 
without  ]V^    In  to  ship 

\2iOyj  a  persecutor. 

^l>  -x 

M^Ojj  persecution. 
*QCJI>  to  hasten,  to  tremble.jE'^^ 
to  be  afraid,  to  be  terrified. 

I      P        -X  7 

A^PDOCTlj  Roman,  Adv.  romai- 

callj,  Latin. 
^cn>  to  run,  to  hasten. 
fUi  O)  anger,  misfortune. 

•X, 

•-^»0>  m.  spirit. 

0>  f.  wind,  breath,  spirit. 

^p    op   -x, 

f>1.»jO>  spiritual. 

^P       o     -x , 

(£Ui09   bowel   love,   bowels  of 

mercies. 
io>*0>    distance    ^QjaOi       ^ 

from  a  distance. 
iO0>  yl_pÄ.  5^3L-a>1  to  raise  up, 

to  elevate. 
UliDOJ  a  gift. 
pülOj  a  quarrel. 

»P         -x, 

PJ30>  a  clothj  a  rag. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON.  ggg 

M^JO>   a  prince,   a  person  of 

rank. 
Uq»0>  a  sign. 
^  ».>j>  beloved. 
^Q— ^»5    to    love,  Ethpa.     with 

\^— ^  to  feel  compassion. 

(SOmj    ^/.    compassion,    benevo- 
lence, love. 

P  -n 

|A!ku»5  love. 
*a^5  to  lie,  to  float. 
»Q^>  to  be  far  distant. 

U*-»>  smell. 

■J'   • 

iJ-iJ  spittle. 

M^-»>  the  first  named. 

]A^),  A^>  firstling,  bedn- 

nmg,  ^/.  (ZUm^j* 

*P  p  X 

pOirUL»  the  high  priest. 
tiA->J  a  person  of  rank. 
*^i2j  to  ride. 

^J  Ethpa.  to  feel  inclined,  to  be 
moved. 

^';..7^'  f.  /^^  high,  loud,  p/. 

fcoj  James  iv.  6. 
fcibi  to  lie,  to  be  placed,  Aph,  t^. 

cast,  to  send;  with  -*^Vn  to 

admmister;  with  lii£ü  to  lose 

life. 


564  SYRIAC  LEXICON. 

"to J  Part.  P.  thrown  down,  given 
up. 

Vi^'j  hills,  Luke  xxiii.  30. 
|ZomiV)>  patience,  long  suffer- 
ing. 

(aL09  evening. 
«fflrt»  to  sprinkle. 
(1>  Pö^.  «jlIj  to  obtain   again, 
Ethfa.  to  be  reconciled. 

^^PiOQlj  mournful,  deeply  moved. 
^juLj  a  herdsman. 
^0^9,  ^la^9  sense,  mind. 
^ai>  J^i^Ä^e.  to  be  angry. 
U^li  thunder. 

-A    7 

rOj  to  dance,  to  mourn,  to  lament. 
|1juS9  sinful,  a  transgressor. 

7  , 

^a»>  to  make  a  sign. 

2, 
J  to  be  inflamed,  to  rejoice. 


jQj^y»  Sapores  (apropername). 

Ijl*  an  evil  spirit. 

^l»  to  entreat,  Pa;,  to  ask;  with 

^\l  to  ask  after  some  one. 
|A!L»,  IZU-»  entreaty. 

«  ■«      7 

X}»,  ^-iJ  to  reconcile,  to  calm. 

,J>j  -X  9 

|Z.n*^n»  nearness. 


seven,     ^^iSn» 


7      7 

>K»*^»  to  praise. 

|i*l»  captivity,  destruction. 

I»»  iHo  praise- worthy. 

(Aiiin»  a  vine. 

]4^*  a  sceptre. 

\y.£iÄ  to  guide,  to  lead. 

7  «0  7 

seventy. 

7 

lOns  to  leave,  to  give  up,  to 

permit,  to  let  go. 
lA^Ä  a  week. 
lixAQ-thA  an  uproar. 
Mfcjfc,w*  restless,  uneasy. 
;.^  to  kindle. 
*■.!•  Ethjpe.  to  be  moved,  to  be 

indignant. 
\fM  to  throw,  to  precipitate. 
5p»  Pa.  to  send,  Eth-pa.  >>A»| 


is  sent. 

,     7 

501Ä  to  awake. 

IP 
OS  to. be  worthy,  JSM^^ß.  to  be 

considered  as  worthy. 

^  -n  «P  7  *P     ••  7 

(OS,  [aQm  equal,  j^/.  MQS« 

I J  01^  a»  renown. 

liloa»  praise,  renown,  glory. 


.Q«. 


to  wash. 


«^IQs  to  free,  to  tear  away. 


SYRIAC  LEXICON. 


i^OM  dishonor,  shame. 
H  >»*Q*  change,  exchange. 
fV).lQj  consummation,  end. 
^Qä,  ^  to  despise. 
P4^Q*  power,  authority,  right. 

^P      -x  •/  o 

too»  way,  street. 
IjQ»  a  wall. 

0    P    -x 

M)QA  beginning. 

PP  -x 

(9)09  confirmation. 
pJlO»  gam,  advantage. 

P   -X  £>  *^ 

]>q4»  awkward,  stupid. 

.    ^  P  X 

14*^  despised,  small,  inferior, 
p  ..I 

**j^i*p/.  f.  ^-ja^a*  present,  Aph. 

7        r, 

^*A^i*1  to  be  able,  to  find. 
***^  to  send,  to  put  away. 
H*;  «*^»  to  cease,  to  rest. 
*— • — ^^-*,  f »     >  .•  rest,  ^ 

lAi,  ^iai^o  sudden. 
I»»»  ^»  an  apostle. 

4^  J'a.  41a  to  be  able,  to 
be  powerful. 

5>a-^  to  approach  fulfillment,  Fa. 
to  fulfill,  to  complete;  with  ^ 
to  salute,  Apk.  to  deliver  ud- 

^    P         -x,  ^' 

^— i^05  to  give  up  the  ghost, 
to  die. 


I      7 


365 


liß^  ;>/.  m.  ISüÜ  peace. 

5»Q*,  "ISß*  a  name. 

^p  ». 

poSo»  Samona  (a proper name^.. 

^QSü*  Simon  (a  proper  name). 
mV)9  heaven. 

t^«iSQs   Samosata    (a  proper 
name). 

**^^*  to  finish,  to  complete. 
^iS^i»  to  hear. 

^QlSo»  Simeon,  Simon  (a  proper 
name). 

-».      7 

•Aifi*  to  serve. 

l*iüi  the  sun. 

fi»  Fa.  to  go  away,  ffi^Vr>\  qj 

Ol^  2q1  to  die. 

fl*,  M*  insane,  foolish. 

llM,  XAli  year. 

■j"    " 

f  rlA  torment,  pain,  torture. 

^,  |1*  tooth. 

ft  »I»  sharp. 

fl*  £%^.  *aAA*1  to  relate. 

Ul*,   lAli  an  hour;    ]i\lio 

01— Q  forthwith. 
mA«  jest,  play. 

X     7 

;-iÄ»  beautiful,  good,  /em.   ;?/ 

|Z,i*^9  also  the  neuter,  good- 
ness. 


386  SYRIAO  l.Exrrox. 

^\o»  to  hear,  to  take ;  Aph.  with 

^Ld  to  go  away. 
|;a  an  inhabitaur. 
Jj«  to  dwell;  with  ^^  to  besiege, 

Fa.  to  begin. 

■J^'r»,  [^'r*  generation,  bio- 
graphy. 

ih\r^  a  light,  wax  light,  a  candle. 

|£u— .•,—.%;-*  a  spectre,  an  ap- 
parition. 

\D'fM  the  remainder,  the  rest. 

S;j|,  ;a  Ethjpa.  to  be  convinced. 

Vr^'rM  true,  J.6?i;.  A-^|^*r«  truly, 
really. 

f>^  truth. 

<As  six. 

IP       17 

AjijOaA»  .yl^v.  silently. 


132. 


%oA.i.«  to  be  silent,  to  be  dumb. 

L 

f;.i(L  a  merchant. 

]iolZ,  ^COolioU  Thomas,  (a 
proper  name). 

„^qLi^oU     Theophilus      (a 
proper  name). 


'{'rt^L  not  clear,  dirty.  2)  dregs, 
that  which  is  most  objection- 
able. 

^loZ  to  demand. 

7      7 

\^L  to  carry  on  trade,  Ethpa.  to 
win  (by  trade),  to  be  added. 

fZjQlDjZ  wonder. 

PsDOOlZ  an  abyss. 

|p*OlZ  wonderful. 

jOlZ  to  be  surprised. 

oZ  TJzr-last  letter  of  the  Alpha- 
bet. 

«ÄoZ  or  *sZ  to  repent,  to  turn, 
to  return. 

•i^oZ  again. 

01  oZ  to  be  astonished. 

tOyiioZ  interpretation. 

fZoZ  repentance. 

|LdQa*Z  a  hmit,  bound. 

AjaZ,  ZomZ,  Aa^Z  under,  Ao-mZ 

^So   from  below,  ^iD  Aj^A^ 

under. 
fZ*  V)»iZ  shame. 
fZo^^iZ  repentance. 
•^oZ   to   urge.  Part.  ^^  i  *SoZ, 

Luke  XXV.  23. 

|JZ  to  hang  up,  to  raise  up. 


SYRIAC 


fl^Z  snow. 

'(La-^käül  the  Trinity. 
|V>NZ  to  make  a  scholar,  Ethpa. 
to  be  learned,  to  be  a  scholar. 
f,  iV^NZ  a  scholar. 

ASZ,/.1ZÖLZf7j.  three. 

GlSsOZ  to  wonder,  to  be  astonished. 

IOUIdZ  wonderful,  remarkable. 

y)*V>Z,  |V)>V>Z  honest,  genume. 

]iioZ/.  eight. 

^ioZ  there,  in  that  place. 

pZ  to  repeat,  Pa.  to  narrate. 


LEXICON.  3eij 

I2L1.0Z  great,  strong. 
^Q^jZ  to  explain,  to  interpret. 

^^  JZ,  ^^LjI  two  ;    ^>Zi 

the  second. 
l^jZ  right,  true,  faithful. 
]Ljl  a  door,  a  gate. 
(Aj^jZ  mind,  opinion. 
f  Zu»Qn»Z  a  liymn,a  song  of  praise 
IAaSOsZ  service,  attendance. 
^^If.  ]LMlm.  nine. 

■IäZ  to  narrate,  from  ]lA« 
|AaA»Z  a  narration. 


^•*^  OP  THE 


IV-  a^ 


üt^ 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


sn 


r-i>    \9A,\ 


RKa^m 


Ml   '69 -8 AM 


Recei'.'eö 


in  IninrliHrary  \jm 


Äf'^9./'1984 


WS 


SEP4-'66-5PM^rtrirc.APR2  5  1984 


LOAN  DEPT. 


OCT  g3l%S72 


T^ 


A 


^ 


mHf 


m^ 


\S^ 


c^ 

WOV  Tl  1983 


LD  21-100m-7,'40 (69368) 


^^^^?^^\r>>f^'v>« 


t^-^  s-^ 


•• 


UNIVERSITY  OF^CAWFORNIA  LIBRARY 


